Owner's Manual

XC60 OWNER'S MANUAL

VÄLKOMMEN!

We hope your Volvo will give you many years of happy motoring. owner's manual. The owner's manual is also available as a mobile The vehicle is designed for the safety and comfort of you and your app (Volvo Manual) and on Volvo Cars support page passengers. Volvo strives to design one of the world's safest pas- (support.volvocars.com). senger vehicles. Your Volvo is also designed to meet applicable We also encourage everyone to always use seat belts in this and safety and environmental requirements. other vehicles. You should also not drive if you are under the influ- To increase your enjoyment of your Volvo, we recommend that you ence of alcohol or medicines or if your ability to drive is for some read the instructions and maintenance information contained in this other reason impaired. TABLE OF CONTENTS

OWNER'S INFORMATION YOUR VOLVO SAFETY Owner's information 16 Contacting Volvo 26 Safety 42 Owner's Manual in the center display 17 Volvo ID 26 Safety during pregnancy 43 Navigate in the Owner's Manual 18 Creating and registering a Volvo ID 27 Occupant safety 43 in the center display Drive-E ‒ purer driving pleasure 28 Reporting safety defects 44 Owner's manual in mobile devices 20 IntelliSafe – driver support and safety 29 Recall information 45 Volvo Cars support site 21 Sensus - connection and enter- 30 Whiplash Protection System 46 Using the Owner's Manual 21 tainment Seat belts 47 The Owner's Manual and the envi- 23 Software Updates 33 ronment Buckling and unbuckling seat belts 48 Data recording 33 Seat belt tensioners 50 Terms & Conditions for Services 35 Resetting the electric seat belt 51 Customer Privacy Policy 35 tensioners* Important information on acces- 35 Door and seat belt reminders 51 sories and extra equipment Airbags 52 Accessory installation 36 Driver/passenger-side airbags 53 Connecting equipment to the 37 vehicle's data link connector Occupant weight sensor 56 Side airbags Technician certification 38 60 Inflatable curtain Viewing the Vehicle Identification 38 60 Number (VIN) Safety mode 61 Volvo Structural Parts Statement 39 Starting and moving the vehicle 62 when it is in safety mode Driver distraction 39 Child safety 63 Child restraints 65 Infant seats 67 Convertible seats 69 Booster cushions 72

2 DISPLAYS AND VOICE Top tether anchors 73 CONTROL Handling messages saved from 109 the instrument panel Lower child seat attachment points 74 Instruments and controls in left- 82 hand drive vehicles Center display overview 111 ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors 75 Instrument panel 84 Handling the center display 113 Integrated booster cushion* 76 Instrument panel settings 88 Activating and deactivating the 116 Folding up the integrated booster 78 center display cushion* Fuel gauge 89 Navigating in the center display's 116 Folding down the integrated 79 Trip computer 89 * views booster cushion Displaying trip data in the instru- 91 ment panel Handling tiles in the center display 120 Resetting the trip odometer 92 Function view in the center display 123 Displaying trip statistics in the 92 Moving apps and buttons in the 125 center display center display Trip statistics settings 93 Symbols in the center display sta- 125 tus bar Date and time 94 Using the center display keyboard 127 Ambient temperature sensor 94 Changing keyboard language in 130 Indicator symbols in the instru- 95 the center display ment panel Entering characters, letters and 130 Warning symbols in the instru- 97 words by hand in the center display ment panel Changing the appearance of the 132 Instrument panel licenses 99 center display App menu in instrument panel 105 Turning off and adjusting the vol- 132 ume of the center display system Handling the App menu in the 106 sounds instrument panel Changing system units of meas- 133 Messages in the instrument panel 107 urement Handling messages in the instru- 108 Changing system language 133 ment panel Changing settings in the center 133 display's Top view

3 LIGHTING WINDOWS, GLASS AND Opening contextual setting in the 134 Lighting control and panel 152 MIRRORS center display Adjusting light functions via the 153 Windows, glass and mirrors 166 Resetting user data when the 135 center display Pinch protection for windows and 166 vehicle changes owners Parking lights 154 sun curtains Resetting center display settings 135 Daytime running lights 154 Reset procedure for pinch protection 167 Table of settings in the center display 136 Low beams 155 Power windows 167 Driver profiles 137 Using high beam 156 Operating the power windows 168 Selecting a driver profile 138 Active high beam 157 Rearview/door mirrors 169 Changing a driver profile's name 138 Using turn signals 158 Adjusting the rearview mirror dim- 170 Protecting a driver profile 139 ming function Active Bending Lights* 158 Linking a remote key to a driver profile 139 Adjusting the door mirrors 170 Front fog lights/corner illumination* 159 * Resetting driver profile settings 140 Panoramic roof 172 Rear fog light 160 * Messages in the center display 141 Operating the panoramic roof 173 Brake lights 161 * Handling messages in the center 141 Auto closing the panoramic roof 175 display Emergency brake lights 161 sun curtain Handling messages saved from 142 Hazard warning flashers 161 Wiper blades and washer fluid 176 the center display Using home safe lighting 162 Using the windshield wipers 176 * Head-up display 143 Welcome Light 162 Using the rain sensor 177 Activating and deactivating the 144 Interior Lighting 162 Using the rain sensor's memory 178 head-up display* Adjusting interior lighting function * 164 Head-up display settings 145 Using the windshield and head- 179 Voice Control 146 light washers Use voice recognition 147 Using the rear window wiper/washer 180 Voice control for cellular phones 149 Using automatic rear window 181 wiping when backing up Voice control for radio and media 149 Voice control settings 150

4 SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL CLIMATE CONTROL Manual front seats 184 Climate 200 Activating and deactivating the 216 heated steering wheel* Power* front seats 185 Climate zones 200 * Activating and deactivating auto- 216 Adjusting the power front seats 185 Climate control sensors 201 matic steering wheel heating* Storing positions for seats, mir- 186 Perceived temperature 201 Activating auto climate control 216 rors and head-up display* Climate control system voice 202 Activating and deactivating recir- 217 Using stored positions for seats, 187 commands culation mirrors and head-up display* Air quality 203 Activating and deactivating the 218 Front seat massage* settings 188 Clean Zone* 203 recirculation timer setting Adjusting front seat massage set- 189 * Clean Zone Interior Package* 204 Activating and deactivating max 218 tings defroster * Interior Air Quality System* 204 Adjusting front seat cushion length 190 Activating and deactivating the 219 Activating and deactivating the air Adjusting front seat side bolster 191 205 heated rear window and door mirrors * quality sensor* settings Automatically activating and deac- 220 Passenger compartment air filter Adjusting front seat lumbar support* 191 205 tivating the heated rear window Air distribution and door mirrors Adjusting the passenger seat from 193 206 the driver's seat* Adjusting air distribution Setting the blower speed for the 220 206 front seats Folding down the rear seat backrests 194 Opening, closing and directing air 207 vents Setting the blower speed for the 221 Adjusting the rear seat head restraints 195 rear seats* Air distribution options 208 Steering wheel controls and horn 197 Setting the temperature for the 222 Climate system controls front seats Adjusting the steering wheel 198 211 Activating and deactivating power 213 Setting the temperature for the 223 front seats* rear seats* Activating and deactivating the 214 Synchronize temperature 224 heated front seat* Activating and deactivating air 225 Activating and deactivating the 214 conditioning heated rear seats* Parking climate* 226 Activating and deactivating front 215 * seat ventilation* Preconditioning 226

5 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM Starting and stopping precondi- 226 Lock indication 234 Locking and unlocking from inside 255 tioning* the vehicle Lock confirmation settings 235 Preconditioning timer* 227 Unlocking the tailgate from inside 256 Remote key 236 the vehicle Adding and editing timer settings 227 for preconditioning* Locking and unlocking using the 238 Activating and deactivating child 257 remote key safety locks Activating and deactivating pre- 228 conditioning timer* Settings for remote and inside 239 Automatic locking when driving 258 door unlock Deleting preconditioning timer 229 Opening and closing the power 259 settings* Unlocking the tailgate using the 240 tailgate* remote key Climate comfort retaining function* 230 Setting a maximum height for the 262 Remote key range 240 power tailgate* Starting and switching off the cli- 230 mate retaining function when parking* Replacing the remote key's battery 241 Foot movement tailgate operation* 262 Ordering additional remote keys Parking climate symbols and mes- 231 244 Private Locking 264 sages* * Red Key - restricted remote key 245 Activating and deactivating pri- 264 Settings for Red Key* 246 vate locking Detachable key blade 247 Alarm 266 Locking and unlocking with 248 Arming and disarming the alarm 267 detachable key blade Electronic immobilizer 249 Start and lock system type desig- 250 nations Keyless and touch-sensitive surfaces* 251 Keyless locking and unlocking* 252 Keyless unlock settings* 253 Keyless tailgate unlock* 254 Antenna locations for the start 254 and lock system

6 DRIVER SUPPORT Driver support systems 270 Adaptive Cruise Control* limitations 285 Curve Speed Assist (CSA)* limitations 305 Speed-dependent steering wheel 270 Switching between cruise control 286 Passing assistance 306 resistance and Adaptive Cruise Control* in the center display Using passing assistance 306 Electronic Stability Control 271 Symbols and messages for Adap- 287 Radar sensor 307 Electronic Stability Control in 272 tive Cruise Control* sport mode Radar sensor type approval 308 Pilot Assist* 289 Activating or deactivating Sport 273 Camera 310 * mode for Electronic Stability Control Pilot Assist controls and display 291 Camera/radar sensor limitations 311 * Electronic Stability Control sym- 274 Selecting and activating Pilot Assist 292 Recommended camera and radar 315 bols and messages sensor maintenance Deactivating Pilot Assist* 293 Stability system 275 City Safety™ Pilot Assist* standby mode 294 316 Distance Alert* 275 City Safety sub-functions Temporarily deactivating steering 295 317 Activating or deactivating Dis- 276 assistance with Pilot Assist* Setting a warning distance for 319 tance Alert City Safety Pilot Assist* limitations 295 Distance Alert limitations 276 Detecting obstacles with City Safety Pilot Assist* symbols and messages 297 320 Cruise control 277 City Safety in crossing traffic Collision risk warning from driver 298 322 Selecting and activating cruise control 278 support Limitations of City Safety in cross- 323 ing traffic Deactivating cruise control 279 Switching target vehicles with 299 driver support Cruise control standby mode 279 City Safety steering assistance for 324 evasive maneuver Adjusting set speed for driver support 300 Adaptive Cruise Control* 280 City Safety steering assistance 324 * Setting time interval to the vehicle 301 Adaptive Cruise Control controls 281 ahead limitations during evasive maneuvers and display Automatic braking during delayed Auto-hold braking with driver support 302 325 Selecting and activating Adaptive 282 evasive maneuvers with City Safety Cruise Control* Drive mode for driver support 303 City Safety braking for oncoming 325 Deactivating Adaptive Cruise Control* 283 Curve Speed Assist (CSA)* 304 vehicles Adaptive Cruise Control* standby 284 Activating or deactivating Curve 305 City Safety limitations 326 mode Speed Assist (CSA)* City Safety messages 329

Rear Collision Warning* 330 Selecting guidance to a rest area if 345 Activating or deactivating Park Assist* 361 * the Driver Alert Control warning Rear Collision Warning limitations 330 has been given Park Assist limitations 361 * BLIS 331 Driver Alert Control limitations 346 Park Assist symbols and messages 363 * Activating or deactivating BLIS 332 Lane Keeping Aid 346 Park Assist Camera 364 BLIS limitations 333 Activating or deactivating Lane 348 Location and field of vision of Park 365 Assist Cameras* BLIS messages 334 Keeping Aid Park Assist Camera trajectory lines* 367 Cross Traffic Alert* 335 Selecting type of assistance for 348 Lane Keeping Aid Park Assist sensor field 369 Activating or deactivating Cross 336 Traffic Alert* Lane Keeping Aid limitations 349 Activating Park Assist Camera 370 Cross Traffic Alert* limitations 336 Lane Keeping Aid symbols and 350 Park Assist Camera symbols and 372 messages messages Cross Traffic Alert* messages 338 Lane Keeping Aid display 352 Park Assist Pilot* 373 Road Sign Information* 339 Steering assistance at risk of collision 353 Types of parking with Park Assist 374 Activating or deactivating Road 340 Pilot* Sign Information* Activating or deactivating steering 354 assistance during collision risks Using Park Assist Pilot* 375 Road Sign Information* display 340 Run-Off Mitigation with steering 354 Leaving a parallel parking space 377 Road Sign Information and 341 assistance with Park Assist Pilot* Sensus Navigation* Steering assistance during colli- 355 Park Assist Pilot* limitations 378 Speed limit and speed camera 341 sion risks from oncoming traffic warnings from Road Sign Information* Park Assist Pilot* messages 380 Steering assistance during colli- 356 Activating or deactivating warn- 342 sion risks from behind* ings from Road Sign Information* Steering assistance during colli- 357 Road Sign Information* limitations 343 sion risks limitations Driver Alert Control 344 Symbols and messages for steer- 358 ing assistance during collision risks Activating or deactivating Driver 345 Alert Control Park Assist* 359 Park Assist front, rear and sides* 360

8 STARTING AND DRIVING Starting the vehicle 382 Using the steering wheel paddles* 399 Preparing for a long trip 420 to shift Switching off the vehicle 384 Winter driving 421 Shiftlock 401 Ignition modes 385 Driving through standing water 422 Deactivating the automatic shiftlock 402 Selecting ignition mode 386 Opening/closing the fuel filler door 422 The kickdown function 402 Brake functions 387 Refueling 423 All Wheel Drive (AWD)* 403 Brakes 387 Fuel 424 Drive modes* 403 Brake Assist System 388 Octane rating 425 Changing drive mode* 405 Braking on wet roads 389 Emission controls 426 Eco drive mode 406 Braking on salted roads 389 Overheating of engine and trans- 427 Activating and deactivating Eco 408 mission Maintenance of the brake system 389 drive mode using the function button Battery drain 428 Parking brake 390 Start/Stop function 409 Jump starting using another battery 428 Activating and deactivating the 390 Driving with the Start/Stop function 409 parking brake Retractable hitch* 431 Deactivating the Start/Stop function 410 Settings for automatically activat- 392 Detachable towbar* 433 ing the parking brake Conditions for the Start/Stop function 411 Driving with a trailer 434 Parking on a hill 392 Leveling control* and suspension 413 Trailer Stability Assist* 436 Parking brake malfunction 392 Leveling control settings* 416 Checking trailer lights 437 Auto-hold brakes 393 Low Speed Control* 416 Towing using a towline 438 Activating and deactivating Auto- 394 Activating and deactivating Low 417 hold at a standstill Speed Control* using the function Attaching and removing the tow- 439 button ing eyelet Hill Start Assist 395 Hill Descent Control* Recovery 441 Braking assist after a collision 418 395 ®* Activating and deactivating Hill 419 HomeLink 442 Transmission 395 * Descent Control using the func- Programming HomeLink®* 443 Automatic transmission 396 tion button Using HomeLink®* 445 Gear selector positions for auto- 397 Economical driving 419 matic transmissions Type approval for HomeLink®* 445

9 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET Compass* 446 Audio, media and Internet 450 SiriusXM Travel Link®* - Notifications 469 Activating and deactivating the 446 Sound settings 450 SiriusXM Travel Link®* - Fuel 469 compass* Sound experience* 451 SiriusXM Travel Link®* - Sports 471 Calibrating the compass* 447 Apps 452 Media player 471 Download apps 453 Playing media 472 Updating apps 453 Controlling and changing media 473 Deleting apps 454 Media searches 474 Radio 454 Gracenote® 475 Starting the radio 455 CD player* 476 Changing waveband and radio station 456 Video 476 Searching for a radio station 456 Playing video 476 Storing radio channels in the 457 Playing DivX® 477 Radio favorites app Video settings 477 Radio settings 458 Streaming media via Bluetooth® 477 RBDS 458 Connecting a device via Bluetooth® HD Radio™ 459 478 Playing media via the USB port Activating and deactivating the HD 460 478 Radio™ Connecting a device via the USB port 478 HD Radio™ sub-channels 461 Technical specifications for USB 479 devices HD Radio™ limitations 461 Compatible file formats for media SiriusXM® Satellite radio* 462 479 Apple® CarPlay®* 480 Using SiriusXM® Satellite radio* 463 Using Apple® CarPlay®* 481 Settings for SiriusXM® Satellite radio* 465 Settings for Apple® CarPlay®* 483 SiriusXM Travel Link®* 466 Tips for using Apple® CarPlay®* 483 SiriusXM Travel Link®* - Weather 467

10 WHEELS AND TIRES Android Auto* 484 Connecting the vehicle to the 497 Tires 516 Internet via a phone (Wi-Fi) Using Android Auto* 485 Tire direction of rotation 518 * Connecting the vehicle to the 498 Settings for Android Auto 486 Internet via vehicle modem (SIM card) Tread wear indicator 519 * Tips for using Android Auto 486 Vehicle modem settings 499 Tire terminology 519 Phone 487 Sharing Internet from the vehicle 500 Tire sidewall designations 520 Connecting a phone to the car via 488 via Wi-Fi hotspot (tethering) Uniform Tire Quality Grading 522 Bluetooth for the first time No or poor Internet connection 501 Checking tire pressure 523 Connecting a phone to the car via 490 Deleting Wi-Fi networks 501 Bluetooth automatically Adjusting tire pressure 524 Wi-Fi technology and security 502 Recommended tire pressure Connecting a phone to the car via 490 525 Bluetooth manually Terms of use and data sharing 502 Tire pressure monitoring system* 525 Disconnecting a Bluetooth-con- 490 Activating and deactivating data 503 Saving a new inflation pressure in 527 nected phone sharing the monitoring system* Switch between phones con- 491 Data sharing for services 503 Viewing tire pressure status in the 528 nected via Bluetooth * Hard disk storage space 504 center display Disconnecting Bluetooth-con- 491 Action when warned of low tire 529 nected devices License agreement for audio and 505 media pressure Handling phone calls 491 When changing wheels 530 Handling text messages 492 Tool kit 530 Text message settings 493 Jack* 531 Managing the phone book 494 Wheel bolts 531 Phone settings 494 Removing a wheel 532 Settings for Bluetooth devices 495 Installing a wheel 534 * Internet-connected vehicle 496 Spare wheel 535 Connecting the vehicle to the 497 Handling spare tires 536 Internet via a Bluetooth-connected phone Snow tires 537

11 LOADING, STORAGE AND MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE Snow chains 537 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT Volvo's service program 568 Tire sealing system 538 Passenger compartment interior 548 Data transfer between vehicle and 570 workshop over Wi-Fi Using the tire sealing system 539 Tunnel console 549 Download Center 571 Inflate tires with the compressor 543 Electrical outlets 550 included in the tire sealing system Using the electrical outlets 552 Handling system updates via 571 Download Center Determining the vehicle's permit- 544 Using the glove compartment 553 ted weight Vehicle status 572 Sun visors 555 Scheduling service and repairs 573 Cargo compartment 555 Sending vehicle information to the 574 Loading recommendations 555 workshop Roof loads and load carriers 557 Hoisting the vehicle 575 Grocery bag holders 557 Climate control system service 577 Load anchoring eyelets 558 Replacing a windshield with head- 577 up display* Rear seat ski hatch 558 Opening and closing the hood 578 Installing and removing the cargo 559 compartment cover* Engine compartment overview 579 Operating the cargo compartment 561 Engine oil 580 cover* Checking and filling engine oil 581 Installing and removing the steel 562 cargo grid* Refilling coolant 582 Installing and removing the cargo net* 564 Replacing bulbs 584 Start battery 585 Support battery 589 Battery symbols 591 Battery recycling 591 Fuses and fuseboxes 592 Replacing fuses 592

12 SPECIFICATIONS Fuses in the engine compartment 594 Touching up minor paint damage 622 Type designations 630 Fuses under the glove compartment 599 Color codes 623 Dimensions 633 Fuses in the cargo compartment 605 Changing rear window wipers 624 Weights 635 Cleaning the interior 610 Replacing windshield wiper blades 625 Towing capacity and tongue weight 636 Cleaning the center display 610 Putting the wiper blades in service 626 Engine specifications 637 position Cleaning the head-up display* 611 Engine oil specifications 638 Filling washer fluid 627 Cleaning fabric upholstery and 612 Coolant specifications 639 ceiling liner Transmission fluid specifications 639 Cleaning the seat belt 612 Brake fluid specifications 639 Cleaning floor mats and inlay mats 612 Fuel tank volume 640 Cleaning leather upholstery* 613 Air conditioning specifications 640 Cleaning the leather steering wheel 614 Approved tire pressure 642 Cleaning interior plastic, metal and 614 wood surfaces Cleaning the exterior 615 Polishing and waxing 615 Hand washing 616 Automatic car washes 618 High-pressure washing 619 Cleaning the wiper blades 619 Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber 620 and trim components Cleaning rims 621 Corrosion protection 621 Paintwork 622

13 INDEX Index 643

14 OWNER'S INFORMATION OWNER'S INFORMATION

Owner's information Vehicle's center display1 Volvo Cars support site Owner's information is available in several In the center display, pull Go to support.volvocars.com different formats, both digital and printed. down Top view and tap and select your country. The Owner's Manual is available on the vehi- Owner's manual. This gives Owner's Manuals are availa- cle's center display, as a mobile app and on you access to visual naviga- ble here for viewing online Volvo Cars' support website. There is also a tion with exterior and interior and in PDF format. The sup- Quick Guide in the glove compartment, as images of the vehicle. The port site also contains well as a supplement to the Owner's Manual information is searchable and instructive videos and addi- containing information about e.g. fuses, spec- is divided into categories. tional information and assistance concerning ifications, etc. A printed Owner's Manual can your vehicle and owning a Volvo. The website be ordered. Mobile app is available on most markets. In App Store or Google Play, search for "Volvo Manual". Printed information Download the app to your The glove compartment con- smartphone or tablet and tains a printed supplement to select your vehicle model. the Owner's Manual1, which The app contains instructive contains information on fuses videos and offers visual navi- and specifications as well as gation, including exterior and interior images a summary of important and of the vehicle. The contents are searchable practical information. and the sections are designed to be easy to There is also a printed Quick Guide with useful navigate. information about the most commonly used features and functions in your vehicle. Other printed information may also be provided in the vehicle, depending on equipment level, market, etc. A printed Owner's Manual and accompanying supplement can also be ordered. Contact a Volvo retailer to order.

1 For markets without Owner's Manuals in the center display, a complete printed manual is provided along with the vehicle.

16 OWNER'S INFORMATION

CAUTION Owner's Manual in the center To open the Owner's Manual, pull down Top display view in the center display and tap Owner's The driver is always responsible for operat- A digital version of the Owner's Manual is manual. ing the vehicle in a safe manner and adher- 2 ing to all applicable laws and regulations. It available in the vehicle's center display . The information in the Owner's Manual can be is also important that the vehicle is oper- The digital Owner's Manual can be accessed accessed directly via the Owner's Manual ated, maintained and serviced according to from Top view and in certain cases, the con- start page or via its Top menu. Volvo's recommendations provided in the textual Owner's Manual can also be accessed owner's information. from Top view.

If the information in the center display dif- NOTE fers from the printed information, the printed information always takes precedence. The digital Owner's Manual is not available during driving.

NOTE OWNER'S MANUAL Changing languages in the center display could mean that certain owner's information will not comply with national or local laws and regulations. Do not change to a language you do not speak well, as it can be difficult to find your way back through the menu.

Related information • Owner's Manual in the center display (p. 17) • Owner's manual in mobile devices Top view with button for Owner's Manual. (p. 20) • Volvo Cars support site (p. 21) • Using the Owner's Manual (p. 21)

2 Available in most markets. }}

17 OWNER'S INFORMATION

|| Contextual Owner's Manual Related information Navigate in the Owner's Manual in • Navigate in the Owner's Manual in the the center display center display (p. 18) The digital Owner's Manual can be accessed • Navigating in the center display's views from the center display's Top view. The con- (p. 116) tents are searchable and the sections are designed to be easy to navigate. • Download apps (p. 453)

Top view with button for contextual Owner's Manual. The contextual Owner's Manual is a shortcut to an article in the Owner's Manual describing the active function displayed on the screen. When a contextual Owner's Manual is available, it will be shown to the right of Owner's The Owner's Manual is accessed from Top view. manual in Top view. – To open the Owner's Manual, pull down Tap the contextual Owner's Manual to open Top view in the center display and tap an article in the Owner's Manual related to the Owner's manual. information displayed on the screen. There are a number of ways to find informa- For example, tap Navigation Manual to open tion in the Owner's Manual. The options can an article related to navigation. be accessed from the Owner's Manual start Certain apps in the vehicle only. For downloa- page and from the Top menu. ded third-party apps, it is e.g. not possible to access app-specific articles.

18 OWNER'S INFORMATION

Opening the menu in the Top menu Quick Guide 2. Tap a hotspot. – Tap in the upper list in the Owner's Tap the symbol to go to a > The title of a relevant article will be dis- Manual. page with links to a selection played. of useful articles about the > A menu will open, displaying different 3. Tap the title to open the article. vehicle's more commonly options for finding information: used features and functions. To go back, tap the left arrow. Start page The articles can also be Favorites Tap the symbol to return to accessed via categories, but Tap the symbol to go to arti- the Owner's Manual start have been collected here for quicker access. cles saved as favorites. Tap page. Tap an article to read it in its entirety. an article to read it in its Exterior and interior hotspots entirety. Exterior and interior overviews of the vehicle. Hot- Categories spots are provided for certain Saving or deleting favorite articles The articles in the Owner's functions, components, etc. Manual are structured into Tap a hotspot to come to a Save an article as a favorite by tapping the main and sub-categories. The relevant article. at the upper right when the article is open. same article may appear in When an article has been saved as a favorite, several relevant categories in the star symbol will be filled in: . order to help make them eas- To remove an article from the list of favorites, ier to find. tap its star again. 1. Tap Categories. Video > The main categories are listed. Tap the symbol to go to brief 1. Press Exterior or Interior. instructive videos for various 2. Tap a main category ( ). > Exterior or interior images of the vehicle functions in the vehicle. > A list of sub-categories ( ) and articles are shown with hotspots. The hotspots ( ) will appear. lead to articles about the corresponding function, component, etc. Swipe the 3. Tap an article to open it. screen horizontally to scroll between To go back, tap the left arrow. the images.

}}

19 OWNER'S INFORMATION

|| Information Owner's manual in mobile devices The contents are searchable and the sections Tap the symbol for informa- The Owner's Manual is available as a mobile are designed to be easy to navigate. tion about the current version app3 and can be downloaded from the App of the Owner's Manual in Store and Google Play. The app is adapted for your vehicle and other useful both smartphones and tablets. information.

Using the search function in the Top menu 1. Tap in the Owner's Manual upper menu. A keyboard will appear at the bottom of the screen. 2. Enter a search word, e.g. "seat belt". > Suggested articles and categories will be displayed as characters are entered. 3. Tap the article or category to read it. The Owner's Manual can be Related information downloaded as a mobile app • Owner's Manual in the center display from the App Store or Google (p. 17) Play. This QR code will take The mobile app is available on both App Store and you directly to the app. You • Using the center display keyboard Google Play. can also search for "Volvo (p. 127) manual" in the App Store or Related information • Using the Owner's Manual (p. 21) Google Play. • Using the Owner's Manual (p. 21) The app contains videos and exterior/interior images of the vehicle. These images contain hotspots for various functions, components, etc., which lead directly to related information.

3 Certain mobile devices.

20 OWNER'S INFORMATION

Volvo Cars support site Contact Using the Owner's Manual Volvo Cars' website and support site contain Contact information for customer support and To get to know your new vehicle, read the additional information about your vehicle. your nearest Volvo retailer are available on the Owner's Manual before driving it for the first support site. time. Online support Reading your Owner's Manual is a way to Go to support.volvocars.com to visit the site. Related information • familiarize yourself with new features and The support site is available in most markets. Contacting Volvo (p. 26) functions, get advice on how to handle your The site contains support for e.g. Internet- • Volvo ID (p. 26) vehicle in different situations, and to learn how based services and functions, Volvo On Call, to take advantage of everything your Volvo has the navigation system* and apps. Videos and to offer. Pay particular attention to the safety step-by-step instructions explain various pro- warnings provided in the Owner's Manual. cedures, such as how to connect the vehicle The intention of this owner's information is to to the Internet via a cellular phone. explain all of the possible features, functions, options and accessories included in a Volvo Downloadable information vehicle. It is not intended as an indication or Maps guarantee that all of these features, functions For vehicles equipped with Sensus Navigation and options are included in every vehicle. maps can be downloaded from the support Some terminology used may not exactly site. match terminology used in sales, marketing Mobile apps and advertising materials. Beginning with model year 2014, the Owner's Volvo continuously works to develop and Manual is available as an app for certain Volvo improve our products. Modifications can mean models. The Volvo On Call app can also be that information, descriptions and illustrations downloaded from the support site. in the Owner's Manual differ from the equip- Owner's manuals in PDF format ment in the vehicle. We reserve the right to Owner's Manuals are available for download- make changes without prior notice. ing in PDF format. Select the vehicle model Do not remove this manual from the vehicle. If and year to download the desired manual. a problem should occur, you will not have the necessary information on where and how to get professional assistance. © Volvo Car Corporation }}

* Option/accessory. 21 OWNER'S INFORMATION

|| Option/accessory Risk of injury White ISO symbols and white text/image on a In addition to standard equipment, the black or blue warning field and message field. Owner's Manual also describes options (fac- Used to indicate potential danger. Ignoring a tory-installed equipment) and certain accesso- warning of this type could result in damage. ries (extra retrofitted equipment). Information All, at the time of publication known, options and accessories are marked with an asterisk: *. The equipment described in the Owner's Man- ual is not available in all vehicles. Vehicles may be equipped differently depending on market requirements and national or local laws and regulations. Black ISO symbols on a yellow warning field, For more information on which equipment is white text/image on a black message field. standard and which is an option or accessory, Used to indicate potential danger. Ignoring a please contact your Volvo retailer. warning of this type could result in serious Decals injury or death. White ISO symbols and white text/image on a There are various types of decals affixed in the Risk of damage black message field. vehicle to communicate important information in a clear manner. The importance of these NOTE decals is explained as follows, in descending The decals shown in the Owner's Manual order of importance. do not claim to be exact reproductions of those found in the vehicle. The purpose is to show approximately how they look and about where they are located. The information that applies for your vehicle in particular is found on the decal on the vehicle.

22 * Option/accessory. OWNER'S INFORMATION

Illustrations, images and video clips The Owner's Manual and the Illustrations, images and video clips used in environment the Owner's Manual are sometimes generic The Owner's Manual is printed on paper from and are intended to provide an overview or an responsibly managed forests. example of a certain function or feature. They The Forest Stewardship Council (FSC)® sym- may vary depending on equipment level and bol certifies that the paper pulp in the printed market and may differ from the appearance of Owner's Manual comes from FSC®-certified your vehicle. forests or other responsibly managed sources. Related information • Owner's Manual in the center display (p. 17) • Owner's manual in mobile devices (p. 20) • Volvo Cars support site (p. 21)

Related information • Drive-E ‒ purer driving pleasure (p. 28)

YOUR VOLVO YOUR VOLVO

Contacting Volvo Volvo ID When a Volvo ID is registered in the vehicle, Use the following contact information if you Volvo ID is a personal ID that gives you additional services are available. Multiple would like to get in touch with Volvo in the access to a range of services using a single Volvo IDs can be used for the same vehicle, United States or Canada. username and password. and multiple vehicles can be linked to the same Volvo ID. In the USA: NOTE Volvo Car USA, LLC The available services can vary over time Related information • Customer Care Center and depend on equipment level and mar- Creating and registering a Volvo ID ket. (p. 27) 1 Volvo Drive, • Scheduling service and repairs (p. 573) P.O. Box 914 Examples of services: Rockleigh, New Jersey 07647 • Volvo On Call-app - check your vehicle 1-800-458-1552 using your phone. You can check fuel level, find the nearest gas station and lock www.volvocars.com/us the vehicle remotely. In Canada: • Send to Car – send addresses from online map services directly to the vehicle. Volvo Car Canada Ltd. • Send a request for service and repairs Customer Care Centre directly from the vehicle. The booking will 9130 Leslie Street, Suite 101 then be completed via email. Richmond Hill, Ontario L4B 0B9 NOTE 1-800-663-8255 If the username/password for a service www.volvocars.com/ca (e.g. Volvo On Call) is changed, the change will also automatically be applied to other services.

The creation of a Volvo ID is initiated through the Volvo On Call app or from the vehicle and then completed by email.

26 YOUR VOLVO

Creating and registering a Volvo ID 5. Press the button to create your Volvo ID. Related information • A Volvo ID can be created in two ways. If your 6. An email will be sent to the address you Volvo ID (p. 26) Volvo ID was created with the Volvo On Call have provided. Confirm that the address is • Download apps (p. 453) app, the Volvo IDmust also be registered to correct. • Handling system updates via Download the vehicle to enable access to the Volvo ID > Your Volvo ID is now ready to be used. Center (p. 571) services. • * Creating a Volvo ID with the Volvo ID app Registering your Volvo ID to the Internet-connected vehicle (p. 496) 1. Download the Volvo ID app from vehicle Download Center in the center display's If your Volvo ID was created using the Volvo App view. On Call app, follow these steps to register the 2. Start the app and register a personal email ID to the vehicle: address. 1. If you have not already done so, download 3. Follow the instructions that will be sent the Volvo ID app from Download Center automatically to this email address. in the center display's App view. > A Volvo ID has now been created and is automatically registered to the vehicle. NOTE The Volvo ID services can now be used. To download apps the vehicle must be Creating a Volvo ID using the Volvo On Call connected to the internet. app1 1. Download the latest version of the Volvo 2. Start the app and enter your Volvo ID/ On Call app to your phone, via e.g. App email address. Store, Windows Phone or Google Play. 3. Follow the instructions that will be auto- 2. Choose to create a Volvo ID. matically sent to the email address connected to your Volvo ID. 3. The website for creating a Volvo ID will open. Fill in the requested information. > Your Volvo ID has now been registered to the vehicle. The Volvo ID services 4. Check the box to accept the terms and can now be used. conditions.

1 Vehicles with Volvo On Call.

* Option/accessory. 27 YOUR VOLVO

Drive-E ‒ purer driving pleasure continuous environmental refinement of con- Related information Volvo is committed to the well-being of its ventional gasoline-powered internal combus- • Economical driving (p. 419) customers. As a natural part of this commit- tion engines, Volvo is actively looking at • Starting and stopping preconditioning* ment, we care about the environment in advanced technology alternative-fuel vehicles. (p. 226) which we all live. Concern for the environ- When you drive a Volvo, you become our part- • The Owner's Manual and the environment ment means an everyday involvement in ner in the work to lessen the vehicle's impact (p. 23) reducing our environmental impact. on the environment. To reduce your vehicle's • Volvo's environmental activities are based on a environmental impact, you can: Air quality (p. 203) holistic view, which means we consider the • overall environmental impact of a product Maintain proper air pressure in your tires. throughout its complete life cycle. In this con- Tests have shown decreased fuel econ- text, design, production, product use, and omy with improperly inflated tires. recycling are all important considerations. In • Follow the recommended maintenance production, Volvo has partly or completely schedule in your Warranty and Service phased out several chemicals including CFCs, Records Information booklet. lead chromates, asbestos, and cadmium; and • Drive at a constant speed whenever possi- reduced the number of chemicals used in our ble. plants 50% since 1991. • See a trained and qualified Volvo service Volvo was the first in the world to introduce technician as soon as possible for inspec- into production a three-way catalytic converter tion if the check engine (malfunction indi- with a Lambda sond, now called the heated cator) light illuminates, or stays on after oxygen sensor, in 1976. The current version of the vehicle has started. this highly efficient system reduces emissions • Properly dispose of any vehicle-related of harmful substances (CO, HC, NOx) from the waste such as used motor oil, used batter- exhaust pipe by approximately 95 - 99% and ies, brake pads, etc. the search to eliminate the remaining emissions continues. Volvo is the only automobile • When cleaning your vehicle, please use manufacturer to offer CFC-free retrofit kits for genuine Volvo car care products. All Volvo the air conditioning system of all models as far car care products are formulated to be back as the 1975 model 240. Advanced elec- environmentally friendly. tronic engine controls and cleaner fuels are bringing us closer to our goal. In addition to

28 * Option/accessory. YOUR VOLVO

• * IntelliSafe – driver support and Park Assist Camera NOTE safety • Road Sign Information* Read the individual parts about each sys- IntelliSafe is Volvo Cars' philosophy regarding • Electronic Stability Control tem to fully understand the functions and vehicle safety. IntelliSafe consists of a num- • Roll Stability Control be notified of important warnings. ber of systems2 that are designed to help make driving safer, prevent accidents and • Cruise control protect passengers and other road users. • Adaptive Cruise Control* Related information • Active high beam (p. 157) WARNING • Rear Collision Warning • Safety (p. 42) The functions are supplementary aids – • Driver Alert Control • Driver support systems (p. 270) they cannot manage all situations in all 3 conditions. • All Wheel Drive (AWD) The driver is always responsible for ensur- Prevention ing that the vehicle is driven in a safe man- IntelliSafe has the following functions ner and in accordance with applicable traf- designed to help the driver prevent accidents. fic rules and regulations. • City Safety Support • Distance Alert* IntelliSafe has the following functions • Lane Keeping Aid designed to help the driver operate the vehicle • Collision Avoid. Assistance more safely. • Active high beam Protection IntelliSafe has the following interacting func- • Tunnel detection tions to help protect the driver and passengers • Pilot Assist in certain situations in the event of an acci- • *Cross Traffic Alert dent. • *Blind Spot Information • Whiplash Protection System • Park Assist* • Seat belt with seat belt tensioner • Park Assist Pilot* • Airbags

2 Some of these systems are standard, while others are options. This may vary depending on market, vehicle model and model year. 3 All Wheel Drive

* Option/accessory. 29 YOUR VOLVO

Sensus - connection and Sensus provides an intelligent interface and Information when it's needed, where entertainment Internet connection to the digital world. An it's needed Sensus makes it possible to use apps and intuitive navigation structure offers access to The vehicle's displays present the right infor- turn your vehicle into a Wi-Fi hotspot. relevant assistance, information and entertain- mation at the right time. Information is pre- ment when it is needed, without distracting sented in different displays depending on how This is Sensus the driver. it should be prioritized by the driver. Sensus includes all of the solutions in the vehicle related to entertainment, Internet connection and navigation*, and serves as the user interface between the driver and the vehicle. Sensus is what makes communication between you, the vehicle and the world around you possible.

30 * Option/accessory. YOUR VOLVO

Different types of information are shown in different displays depending on how the information should be prioritized. Head-up display* tion and navigation messages*. Road sign Instrument panel information and incoming phone calls are also shown in the head-up display. These can be handled using the right-side steering wheel keypad or the center display.

12"* instrument panel. The head-up display presents information that the driver should react to immediately. For example, traffic warnings, speed informa- }}

* Option/accessory. 31 YOUR VOLVO

|| Many of the vehicle's main functions are con- • Sharing Internet from the vehicle via Wi-Fi trolled from the center display, a touchscreen hotspot (tethering) (p. 500) that reacts to taps and other gestures. This minimizes the number of physical buttons and controls needed in the vehicle. The screen can also be operated while wearing gloves. The center display is used to control e.g. the climate and entertainment systems and to adjust the power seats*. The information presented in the center display can be handled by the driver or, in some situations, by a passenger. 8-inch instrument panel. Voice control system The instrument panel displays information The voice control system ena- such as speed, incoming phone calls or the bles the driver to control cer- track currently playing. It is controlled using tain vehicle functions without the steering wheel keypads. taking their hands off the Center display wheel. The system can understand natural speech. Use voice commands to e.g. play a song, make a phone call, increase the temperature in the passenger compartment or have a text message read aloud. Related information • Head-up display* (p. 143) • Instrument panel (p. 84) • Center display overview (p. 111) • Voice Control (p. 146) • Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 496)

32 * Option/accessory. YOUR VOLVO

Software Updates Data recording trivial crash situation occurs; no data are So that you as a Volvo customer shall have As part of Volvo's commitment to safety and recorded by the EDR under normal driving the best possible experience from your car, quality, certain information is recorded regar- conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, Volvo is continuously developing the systems ding vehicle operation, functionality and inci- gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. in the cars and the services that you are dents. However, other parties, such as law offered. US market only: enforcement, could combine the EDR data You can update the software in your Volvo to with the type of personally identifying data EDR the latest version when your car is serviced at routinely acquired during a crash investigation. This vehicle is equipped with an "Event Data an authorized Volvo dealer. With the latest Recorder" (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR To read data recorded by an EDR, special software update, you can take advantage of is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like equipment is required, and access to the available improvements, including those that situations, such as an air bag deployment or vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to came with previous software updates. hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such For more information about released updates understanding how a vehicle's systems as law enforcement, that have the special and answers to frequently asked questions, performed. The EDR is designed to record equipment, can read the information if they please go to support.volvocars.com. data related to vehicle dynamics and safety have access to the vehicle or the EDR. systems for a short period of time, typically 30 ASDR NOTE seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is This vehicle is equipped with an Active Safety designed to record such data as: Data Recorder (ASDR). This data recorder can Functionality after updating may vary record information related to the usage of the depending on market, model, model year • How various systems in your vehicle were car, functional errors and active safety and options. operating; actuations (e.g. auto brake). The information • Whether or not the driver and passenger saved is used by technicians for service and Related information safety belts were buckled/fastened; maintenance to diagnose and repair possible • Sensus - connection and entertainment • How far (if at all) the driver was faults that has occurred in the vehicle and to (p. 30) depressing the accelerator and/or brake fulfil certain legal requirements. The registered • Handling system updates via Download pedal; and, data can also, in congregated form, be used Center (p. 571) • How fast the vehicle was traveling. for research- and product development – purposes to continuously improve the safety These data can help provide a better and quality of Volvo Cars. For more understanding of the circumstances in which information contact your local Volvo retailer. crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-

}}

33 YOUR VOLVO

|| Canadian market only: dent or near-accident. However, other parties, Volvo will not provide this information to any such as law enforcement, could combine the third parties without the vehicle owner's con- This vehicle is equipped with an “Event Data EDR data with the type of personally identifia- sent. However, national legislation and regula- Recorder” (EDR). The main purpose of the ble information that is routinely acquired dur- tions may require Volvo to disclose this type of EDR is to register and record data in traffic ing an accident investigation. Special equip- information to law enforcement or other accidents or accident-like situations, e.g. if an ment and access to either the vehicle or the authorities that can claim a legal right to the airbag deploys or if the vehicle hits an obstacle EDR is required to read this recorded data. information. Special technical equipment, in the road. This data is recorded in order to which Volvo and workshops that have entered help understand how the vehicle's systems In addition to the EDR, the vehicle is equipped agreements with Volvo have access to, is perform in these types of situations. The EDR with a number of computers that continuously required to read and interpret the recorded is designed to record data related to vehicle control and monitor the vehicle's performance. data. Volvo is responsible for ensuring that dynamics and safety systems for a short These computers may record data during nor- information provided to Volvo in conjunction period of time, usually 30 seconds or less. mal driving conditions, particularly if they with service and maintenance is stored and detect a fault relating to the vehicle's opera- The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record handled securely and in compliance with tion and functionality or upon activation of the data in traffic accidents or accident-like situa- applicable legal requirements. For more infor- vehicle's active driver support functions (e.g. tions such as: mation, please contact a Volvo retailer. City Safety or the auto-brake function). • How the various systems in the vehicle Some of this recorded data is required by Related information performed; technicians performing service and mainte- • Contacting Volvo (p. 26) • Whether the driver and passenger seat nance in order to diagnose and rectify any • Volvo Structural Parts Statement (p. 39) belts were tightened/buckled; faults that may have occurred in the vehicle. • The driver's use of the accelerator/brake The recorded information is also needed to pedal; enable Volvo to fulfill legal and other regula- • How fast the vehicle was moving. tory requirements. Information registered in the vehicle is stored in its computers until the This data can help provide a better under- vehicle is serviced or repaired. standing of the circumstances in which traffic accidents and injuries occur. The EDR records In addition to the above, the recorded informa- data only if a non-trivial accident situation tion may be used in aggregated form for occurs. EDR does not record any data during research and product development purposes normal driving conditions. The system also in order to continuously improve the safety never registers data on who is driving the vehi- and quality of Volvo vehicles. cle or the geographical location of the acci-

34 YOUR VOLVO

Terms & Conditions for Services Customer Privacy Policy Important information on Volvo offers services that help enhance the Volvo respects and safeguards the personal accessories and extra equipment vehicle's safety and comfort. privacy of everyone who visits our websites. Incorrectly connected or installed accessories These services comprise everything from This policy refers to the handling of customer or extra equipment may have an adverse assistance in emergencies to navigation and data and personal information. The purpose is effect on the vehicle's electronics. various maintenance services. to give current, past and potential customers a We strongly recommend that Volvo owners general understanding of: Before using the services, it is important to use only genuine, Volvo-approved accessories, read support information about terms and • The circumstances in which we collect and that accessory installations be performed conditions for the services at and process your personal data. only by a trained and qualified Volvo service www.volvocars.com. technician. Certain accessories only work • The types of personal data we collect. when the associated software is installed in Related information • Why we collect your personal data. the vehicle's computer system. • Customer Privacy Policy (p. 35) • How we process your personal data. The equipment described in the Owner's Man- For more information on the policy, search for ual is not available in all vehicles. Vehicles may support information on www.volvocars.com. be equipped differently depending on market requirements and national or local laws and Related information regulations. • Terms of use and data sharing (p. 502) • Optional or accessory equipment may not be Terms & Conditions for Services (p. 35) available in all countries or markets. Please • Data recording (p. 33) note that some vehicles may be equipped differently, depending on special legal requirements. For more information on which equipment is standard and which is an option or accessory, please contact your Volvo retailer.

}}

35 YOUR VOLVO

|| NOTE WARNING Accessory installation We strongly recommend that Volvo owners Do not export your Volvo to another coun- Certain components of this vehicle such as use only genuine, Volvo-approved accesso- try before investigating that country's air bag modules, seat belt tensioners, ries, and that accessory installations be per- applicable safety and exhaust emission adaptive steering columns, and button cell formed only by a trained and qualified Volvo requirements. In some cases it may be dif- batteries may contain Perchlorate material. Special handling may apply for service or service technician. Certain accessories only ficult or impossible to comply with these vehicle end of life disposal. work when the associated software is instal- requirements. Modifications to the emis- led in the vehicle's computer system. sion control system(s) may render your See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/ • Genuine Volvo accessories are tested to Volvo not certifiable for legal operation in perchlorate. ensure compatibility with the perform- the U.S., Canada and other countries. ance, safety, and emission systems in your WARNING vehicle. Additionally, a trained and quali- WARNING The driver is always responsible for operat- fied Volvo service technician knows where ing the vehicle in a safe manner and for accessories may and may not be safely CALIFORNIA proposition 65 complying with current statutes and regu- installed in your Volvo. In all cases, please Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, lations. consult a trained and qualified Volvo serv- and certain vehicle components contain or It is also essential to maintain and service ice technician before installing any acces- emit chemicals known to the state of Cali- the vehicle according to Volvo's recom- sory in or on your vehicle. fornia to cause cancer, and birth defects or mendations as stated in the owner's infor- • Accessories that have not been approved other reproductive harm. In addition, cer- mation and the service and warranty book- tain fluids contained in vehicles and certain let. by Volvo may or may not be specifically products of component wear contain or tested for compatibility with your vehicle. emit chemicals known to the State of Cali- If the on-board information differs from the • fornia to cause cancer, and birth defects or printed owner's manual, the printed infor- Any of your vehicle's performance and other reproductive harm. mation always takes precedence. safety systems could be adversely affected if you install accessories that Volvo Related information has not tested, or if you allow accessories to be installed by someone unfamiliar with • Accessory installation (p. 36) your vehicle. • Connecting equipment to the vehicle's • Damage caused by unapproved or data link connector (p. 37) improperly installed accessories may not • Using the Owner's Manual (p. 21) be covered by your new vehicle warranty. See your Warranty and Service Records Information booklet for more warranty

36 YOUR VOLVO

information. Volvo assumes no responsi- Connecting equipment to the NOTE bility for death, injury, or expenses that vehicle's data link connector Volvo Cars takes no responsibility for the may result from the installation of non- Incorrectly connected or installed software or consequences of connecting non-author- genuine accessories. diagnostic tools may have an adverse effect ized equipment to the On-board on the vehicle's electronics. Related information Diagnostic (OBDII) socket. This socket We strongly recommend that Volvo owners • Important information on accessories and should only be used by a trained and quali- use only genuine, Volvo-approved accessories, extra equipment (p. 35) fied Volvo service technician. and that accessory installations be performed only by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. Certain accessories only work Type approval when the associated software is installed in USA the vehicle's computer system. FCC ID: 2AGKKACUII-06 This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

WARNING

On-board Diagnostic (OBDII) socket under the dash- Changes or modifications not expressly board on the driver's side. approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

}}

37 YOUR VOLVO

|| Canada Technician certification Viewing the Vehicle Identification IC: 20839-ACUII06 In addition to Volvo factory training, Volvo Number (VIN) supports certification by the National Insti- When contacting a Volvo retailer, about e.g. This device complies with Industry Canada tute for Automotive Service Excellence your Volvo On Call subscription, your Vehicle license-exempt RSS standards. Operation is (A.S.E.). Identification Number (VIN4) may be needed. subject to the following two conditions: Certified technicians have demonstrated a 1. Tap Settings in the Top view in the center (1) This device may not cause interference, and high degree of competence in specific areas. display. Besides passing exams, each technician must (2) this device must accept any interference also have worked in the field for two or more 2. Proceed to System System received, including interference that may years before a certificate is issued. These pro- Information Vehicle Identification cause undesired operation. fessional technicians are best able to analyze Number. Related information vehicle problems and perform the necessary > The vehicle identification number will • Important information on accessories and maintenance procedures to keep your Volvo at be displayed. extra equipment (p. 35) peak operating condition. The VIN can also be found on the first page of the Warranty and Service Records Information booklet, on your registration card, or by looking at the dashboard through the windshield.

The VIN has a similar location on all models.

4 Vehicle Identification Number

38 YOUR VOLVO

Volvo Structural Parts Statement Although these parts may appear equivalent, it Driver distraction Volvo is one of the leading companies for car is difficult to tell if the parts have been previ- A driver has a responsibility to do everything safety. ously replaced with non-OE parts or if the part possible to ensure his or her own safety and Volvo engineers and manufactures vehicles has been damaged as a result of a prior colli- the safety of passengers in the vehicle and designed to help protect vehicle occupants in sion. The quality of these used parts may also others sharing the roadway. Part of this the event of a collision. have been affected due to environmental responsibility is avoiding distractions, includ- exposure. ing performing activities that are not directly Volvos are designed to absorb the impact of a related to controlling the vehicle in the driving collision. This energy absorption system Related information environment. including, but not limited to, structural compo- • Data recording (p. 33) Your new Volvo is, or can be, equipped with nents such as bumper reinforcement bars, feature-rich entertainment and communica- bumper energy absorbers, frames, rails, fender tion systems. These include hands-free cellular aprons, A-pillars, B-pillars and body panels telephones, navigation systems, and multipur- must work together to maintain cabin integrity pose audio systems. You may also own other and protect the vehicle occupants. portable electronic devices for your own con- The supplemental restraint system including venience. When used properly and safely, they but not limited to air bags, side curtain air enrich the driving experience. Improperly used, bags, and deployment sensors work together any of these could cause a distraction. with the above components to provide proper For all of these systems, we want to provide timing for air bag deployment. the following warning that reflects the strong Due to the above, Volvo Car USA does not Volvo concern for your safety. Never use these support the use of aftermarket, alternative or devices or any feature of your vehicle in a way anything other than original Volvo parts for that distracts you from the task of driving collision repair. safely. Distraction can lead to a serious acci- Volvo Car USA also recommends using Volvo- dent. In addition to this general warning, we approved replacement glass. The use of after- offer the following guidance regarding specific market glass, particularly a windshield, can new features that may be found in your vehi- have an adverse effect on collision avoidance cle: and advanced lighting systems. In addition Volvo does not support the use or re-use of structural components from an existing vehicle that has been previously damaged. }}

39 YOUR VOLVO

|| WARNING • Never use a hand-held cellular telephone while driving. Some jurisdictions prohibit cellular telephone use by a driver while the vehicle is moving. • If your vehicle is equipped with a navigation system, set and make changes to your travel itinerary only with the vehicle parked. • Never program your audio system while the vehicle is moving. Program radio presets with the vehicle parked, and use your programmed presets to make radio use quicker and simpler. • Never use portable computers or personal digital assistants while the vehicle is moving.

Related information • Audio, media and Internet (p. 450)

40 SAFETY SAFETY

• Safety WARNING Airbags (p. 52) The vehicle is equipped with a number of • If the warning symbol remains illuminated Whiplash Protection System (p. 46) safety systems that work together to help or switches on while driving and the mes- • Safety mode (p. 61) protect the vehicle's driver and passengers in sage SRS airbag Service urgent Drive to • Child safety (p. 63) the event of an accident. workshop is displayed in the instrument The vehicle is equipped with a number of sen- panel, this indicates that something in the sors that may react in the event of an accident safety system is not functioning properly. and activate different safety systems, such as Volvo recommends contacting an author- the airbag system and seat belt tensioners. ized Volvo workshop for repairs as soon as Depending on the specific conditions of the possible. accident, e.g. collisions at certain angles, over- turning or swerving, the systems react differ- WARNING ently to help provide good protection. Never attempt to alter or repair any of the There are also mechanical safety systems vehicle's safety systems yourself. Incor- such as the Whiplash Protection System. The rectly performed repairs to any system vehicle is also built so that a large part of the could impair function and lead to serious force of a collision is distributed to the vehi- injury. Volvo recommends contacting an authorized Volvo workshop. cle's members, pillars, floor, roof and other parts of the body. If this dedicated warning symbol is After an accident, the vehicle's safety mode not functioning, the general warning may be activated if any important function in symbol will illuminate instead and the vehicle has been damaged. the same message will be displayed Warning symbol in the instrument in the instrument panel. panel Related information The warning symbol in the instru- • Safety during pregnancy (p. 43) ment panel illuminates when the • vehicle's electrical system is in igni- Occupant safety (p. 43) tion mode II. The symbol will go out • Reporting safety defects (p. 44) after approx. 6 seconds if no faults are • Recall information (p. 45) detected in the vehicle's safety systems. • Seat belts (p. 47)

42 SAFETY

Safety during pregnancy position that allows them to retain full control Occupant safety It is important that seat belts are worn cor- of the vehicle (which means they should be Safety is Volvo's cornerstone. rectly during pregnancy and that pregnant able to easily reach the steering wheel and drivers adjust their seating position accord- foot pedals). Try to maintain as much distance Volvo's concern for safety ingly. as possible between the stomach and the Our concern for safety dates back to 1927 steering wheel. when the first Volvo rolled off the production Seat belt line. Three-point seat belts (a Volvo invention), Related information safety cages, and energy-absorbing impact • Safety (p. 42) zones were designed into Volvo vehicles long • Seat belts (p. 47) before it was fashionable or required by gov- • Manual front seats (p. 184) ernment regulation. • Power* front seats (p. 185) We will not compromise our commitment to safety. We continue to seek out new safety features and to refine those already in our vehicles. You can help. We would appreciate hearing your suggestions about improving automobile safety. We also want to know if you ever have a safety concern with your vehicle. Call us in the U.S. at: 1-800-458-1552 or The seat belt should fit closely against the in Canada at: 1-800-663-8255. shoulder, with the diagonal section between the breasts and to the side of the stomach. The lap section of the seat belt should lie flat over the thighs and as far as possible under the stomach. Never let it ride upward. Remove unnecessary slack and make sure the seat belt fits as close as possible to the body. Make sure there are no twists in the seat belt. Seating position As pregnancy progresses, pregnant drivers should adjust the seat and steering wheel to a }}

* Option/accessory. 43 SAFETY

|| Occupant safety reminders Related information Reporting safety defects How safely you drive doesn't depend on how • Safety (p. 42) The following information will help you report old you are but rather on: • Reporting safety defects (p. 44) any perceived safety-related defects in your vehicle. • How well you see. • Recall information (p. 45) • Your ability to concentrate. Reporting safety defects in the U.S. • How quickly you make decisions under If you believe that your vehicle has a stress to avoid an accident. defect which could cause a crash or The following suggestions are intended to could cause injury or death, you help you cope with the ever changing traffic should immediately inform the environment. National Highway Traffic Safety • Never drink and drive. Administration (NHTSA) in addition • If you are taking any medication, consult to notifying Volvo Car USA, LLC. If your physician about its potential effects NHTSA receives similar complaints, on your driving abilities. it may open an investigation, and if it • Take a driver-retraining course. finds that a safety defect exists in a • Have your eyes checked regularly. group of vehicles, it may order a • Keep your windshield and headlights recall and remedy campaign. How- clean. ever, NHTSA cannot become • Replace wiper blades when they start to involved in individual problems leave streaks. between you, your retailer, or Volvo • Take into account the traffic, road, and weather conditions, particularly with Car USA, LLC. To contact NHTSA, regard to stopping distance. you may either call the Auto Safety • Never text while driving. Hotline tollfree at • Refrain from using or minimize the use of 1-888-327-4236 a cell phone while driving.

44 SAFETY

(TTY: 1-800-424-9153) or write to: Reporting safety defects in Canada Recall information NHTSA, U.S. Department of Trans- If you believe your vehicle has a defect that On our website, click the "Owner" tab in the portation, Washington D.C. 20590. could cause a crash or could cause injury or upper left-hand side of the screen and then death, you should immediately inform Trans- click on the heading "Recall Information". You can also obtain other informa- port Canada in addition to notifying Volvo Car Enter the vehicle identification number (VIN), tion about motor vehicle safety from Canada Ltd. which can be found at the bottom of the wind- http://www.safercar.gov, where you Transport Canada can be contacted at: shield. If your vehicle has any open Recalls, they will be displayed on this page. can also enter your vehicle's VIN 1-800-333-0510 (Vehicle Identification Number) to Teletypewriter (TTY): 613 990-4500 You can also enter the Vehicle Identification Number in the search field on the National see if it has any open recalls. Fax: 1-819-994-3372 Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Volvo strongly recommends that if Mailing Address: Transport Canada - Road (NHTSA) website at: www.nhtsa.gov. your vehicle is covered under a serv- Safety, 80 rue Noël, Gatineau, (Quebec) J8Z Volvo customers in Canada ice campaign, safety or emission 0A1 For any questions regarding open recalls for recall or similar action, it should be Related information your vehicle, please contact your authorized Volvo retailer. If your retailer is unable to completed as soon as possible. • Safety (p. 42) answer your questions, please contact Volvo Please check with your local retailer • Occupant safety (p. 43) Customer Relations at 800-663-8255, Mon- or Volvo Car USA, LLC if your vehicle • Recall information (p. 45) day through Friday, 8:30 A.M. to 5:00 P.M. EST or volvocars.com/ca. You may also write is covered under these conditions. • Viewing the Vehicle Identification Number us at: NHTSA can be reached at: (VIN) (p. 38) Volvo Car Canada Ltd. Internet: Customer Care Centre http://www.nhtsa.gov 9130 Leslie Street, Suite 101 Telephone: Richmond Hill, Ontario L4B 0B9 1-888-DASH-2-DOT www.tc.gc.ca (1-888-327-4236).

}}

45 SAFETY

|| Related information Whiplash Protection System WARNING • Safety (p. 42) The Whiplash Protection System (WHIPS) is Do not attempt to alter or repair the seat or • Reporting safety defects (p. 44) designed to help reduce the risk of whiplash- WHIPS on your own. Volvo recommends type injuries. The system consists of energy • Occupant safety (p. 43) contacting an authorized Volvo workshop. absorbing backrests and seat cushions as If the front seats have been subjected to well as specially designed head restraints in severe stress, e.g. in a collision, the seats the front seats. must be replaced. Even if the seats appear WHIPS is activated in the event of a rear-end undamaged, some of their protective prop- collision and adapted to the angle and speed erties may have been lost. of the collision and to the characteristics of the colliding vehicle. When WHIPS is activated, the front seat backrests move rearward and the seat cushions move downward to change the seating positions of the driver and front seat passenger. This movement helps absorb some of the forces that could result in whiplash.

WARNING WHIPS is a supplement to the seat belt. Always wear your seat belt.

Do not place any objects on the floor behind or under the front seats or on the rear seat that could prevent WHIPS from functioning correctly.

46 SAFETY

• * WARNING Power front seats (p. 185) Seat belts • * Seat belts should always be worn by all occu- Do not squeeze box-like cargo between the Rear Collision Warning (p. 330) rear seat cushion and the front seat back- pants in your vehicle. Children should be rest. properly restrained using an infant seat, adjustable child seat or booster cushion as If the rear seat backrests are folded down, determined by age, weight and height. cargo must be secured to prevent it from sliding forward against the front seat back- Most states and provinces make it mandatory rests in the event of a collision. for occupants of a vehicle to use seat belts. Seat belt maintenance WARNING Check periodically that the seat belts are in good condition. Use water and a mild deter- If a rear seat backrest is folded down or if a rear-facing child restraint is being used in gent for cleaning. Check the seat belt mecha- the rear seat, the seat in front must be nism's function as follows: attach the seat belt moved forward so that it does not come and pull rapidly on the strap. into contact with the backrest or child restraint.

Seating position For WHIPS to provide good protection, the driver and passenger must be seated correctly and the system's function must not be impeded in any way. Set the front seat to the correct seating position before starting to drive. The driver and the front seat passenger should sit in the center of the seat with their heads as close as possible to the head restraints. Related information • Safety (p. 42) • Manual front seats (p. 184) }}

* Option/accessory. 47 SAFETY

|| WARNING Buckling and unbuckling seat belts Buckling seat belts Make sure that all passengers have buckled 1. Pull out the belt slowly and make sure it is • Never repair the belt yourself. Repairs their seat belts before starting to drive. not twisted or damaged. should only be performed by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. NOTE • Any device used to induce slack into the shoulder belt portion of the three- The seat belt is equipped with a seat belt point belt system will have a detrimen- retractor that will lock up in the following tal effect on the amount of protection situations: available in the event of a collision. • if the belt is pulled out too quickly. • The seat back should not be tilted too • during braking and acceleration. far back. The shoulder belt must be • if the vehicle is leaning excessively. taut in order to function properly. • when driving in turns. • Do not use any type of child restraint in the front passenger seat. We recom- • if the automatic locking retractor/emer- mend that children who have outgrown gency locking retractor (ALR/ELR) is these devices sit in the rear seat with activated. Each seat belt (except for the the seat belt properly fastened. driver's) is equipped with an ALR function, which is designed to keep the seat belt taut when installing a child Related information restraint. ALR is activated when the seat • Safety (p. 42) belt is pulled out as far as possible. If • Seat belt tensioners (p. 50) this is done, a sound from the seat belt • Buckling and unbuckling seat belts retractor will be audible, which is nor- (p. 48) mal. The seat belt can now only be fed • into the retractor, not pulled out. This Door and seat belt reminders (p. 51) function is automatically disabled when the seat belt is unbuckled and fully retracted.

48 SAFETY

2. Buckle the seat belt by pushing the latch 3. The height of the seat belts in the front plate into the receptacle. seats can be adjusted. > A distinct "click" indicates that the belt is locked into place.

WARNING Always insert the seat belt latch plate into the belt buckle on the correct side. Failure to do so could cause the seat belts and belt buckles to malfunction in a collision. There is a risk of serious injury.

The belt should be positioned closely over the shoulder (against the collarbone, not down over the arm). 4. Tighten the lap section of the seat belt Press the button on the seat belt holder over the hips by pulling the diagonal sec- and move the belt up or down. tion upward toward the shoulder. Position the belt as high as possible without it chafing against the neck.

The lap section of the seat belt should be positioned low on the hips (not against the abdomen).

}}

49 SAFETY

|| WARNING Related information Seat belt tensioners • Seat belts (p. 47) The vehicle is equipped with standard and Never use a seat belt for more than one * occupant. Never wear the shoulder portion • Seat belt tensioners (p. 50) electric seat belt tensioners that can help tension the seat belt in a critical situation or of the belt under the arm, behind the back • Door and seat belt reminders (p. 51) or otherwise out of position. Such use collision. could cause injury in the event of an accident. As seat belts lose much of their Standard seat belt tensioners strength when exposed to violent stretch- All seat belts are equipped with a standard ing, they should be replaced after any colli- seat belt tensioner. sion, even if they appear to be undamaged. In a collision of sufficiently violent force, the seat belt tensioners will tension the seat belts WARNING in order to more effectively restrain the occu- Do not use clips or fasten the belts around pants. hooks or other parts of the interior. This will * prevent the seat belt from fitting properly. Electric seat belt tensioners The driver's and front passenger's seat belts are equipped with electric seat belt tensioners. WARNING The seat belt tensioners interact and can be Never damage the seat belts and never activated in conjunction with the City Safety insert any foreign objects into the belt and Rear Collision Warning driver support sys- buckle. This may cause the seat belts and tems. In critical situations, such as if the vehi- belt buckles to malfunction in a collision. There is a risk of serious injury. cle brakes suddenly, begins to skid or runs off the road (e.g if the vehicle rolls into a ditch, lifts off the ground or hits an obstacle in the Unbuckling seat belts road), or if there is a risk of collision, the seat 1. Press the red button on the seat belt belts can be pulled taut by the seat belt ten- receptacle and make sure the seat belt sioner's electric motor. retracts fully into the retractor slot. The electric seat belt tensioner helps to posi- 2. If it does not fully retract, guide the belt tion the occupant more effectively in the seat, manually into the slot and make sure it which reduces the risk of the occupant strik- does not hang loose. ing the interior of the passenger compartment

50 * Option/accessory. SAFETY and improves the effect of other safety sys- Resetting the electric seat belt Door and seat belt reminders tems such as the airbags. tensioners* This system is intended to remind occupants When a critical situation has passed, the seat The electric seat belt tensioners are designed to buckle their seat belts and to alert the belt and the electric seat belt tensioner are to be reset automatically, but if the seat belt driver if a door, hood or other opening (trunk, reset automatically. However, they can also be remains taut it can be reset manually. sunroof, etc.) is open. reset manually. 1. Stop the vehicle in a safe location. Graphics in the instrument panel 2. Unbuckle the seat belt and then rebuckle WARNING it. Never attempt to alter or repair the seat > The seat belt and the electric seat belt belt on your own. Volvo recommends con- tensioner will be reset. tacting an authorized Volvo workshop. If the seat belt has been exposed to WARNING extreme forces, e.g. in conjunction with a collision, the entire seat belt must be Never attempt to alter or repair the seat replaced. Even if the seat belt appears belt on your own. Volvo recommends con- undamaged, some of its protective proper- tacting an authorized Volvo workshop. ties may have been lost. Also replace the If the seat belt has been exposed to seat belt if it is worn or damaged. The new extreme forces, e.g. in conjunction with a seat belt must be type approved and collision, the entire seat belt must be intended for the same seating position as replaced. Even if the seat belt appears Graphics in the instrument panel with various types the replaced seat belt. undamaged, some of its protective proper- of warnings. The warning colors for the doors/tail- ties may have been lost. Also replace the gate vary depending on the vehicle's speed. Related information seat belt if it is worn or damaged. The new The instrument panel graphic shows the seats seat belt must be type approved and where seat belts are buckled and not buckled. • Seat belts (p. 47) intended for the same seating position as • Buckling and unbuckling seat belts (p. 48) the replaced seat belt. The same graphic also indicates if the hood, tailgate or any door is open. • Resetting the electric seat belt tensioners* (p. 51) Related information Confirm the graphic by briefly pressing the O • Seat belt tensioners (p. 50) • City Safety™ (p. 316) button on the right-side steering wheel key- • Seat belts (p. 47) pad. • Rear Collision Warning* (p. 330)

}}

* Option/accessory. 51 SAFETY

|| Seat belt reminder Rear seat Airbags The rear seat belt reminder has two functions: The vehicle is equipped with airbags and • To indicate which seat belts are buckled in inflatable curtains for the driver and passen- the rear seats. This will also be displayed gers. in an instrument panel graphic. WARNING • To provide audio and visual reminders if • If the airbag warning light stays on any seat belt in the rear seat is removed after the engine has started or if it illu- while the vehicle is in motion. The minates while you are driving, have the reminder will stop when the seat belt has vehicle inspected by a trained and been rebuckled. qualified Volvo service technician as soon as possible. Door/hood/tailgate and fuel filler door • reminder Never attempt to alter or repair any of Reminder light in ceiling console. If the hood, tailgate, fuel filler door or any door the vehicle's safety systems yourself. A seat belt reminder light illuminates in the is not properly closed, this will be indicated by Incorrectly performed repairs to any ceiling console and a warning symbol is dis- a graphic in the instrument panel. Stop the system could impair function and lead played in the instrument panel. vehicle safely and close the open door, hood, to serious injury. All work on these sys- etc. tems should be performed by a trained The audible reminder varies depending on the and qualified Volvo service technician. vehicle's speed, driving time and distance If the vehicle is moving at a speed driven. under approx. 10 km/h (6 mph), the A seat belt status graphic in the instrument information symbol will illuminate in panel indicates when the driver's or a pas- the instrument panel. senger's seat belt is buckled or unbuckled. If the vehicle is moving at a speed Child seats are not included in the seat belt above approx. 10 km/h (6 mph), the reminder system. warning symbol will illuminate in the instrument panel. Front seats An audible signal and an indicator light remind Related information unbuckled occupants to fasten their seat • Seat belts (p. 47) belts. • Buckling and unbuckling seat belts (p. 48)

52 SAFETY

WARNING Driver/passenger-side airbags NOTE As a supplement to the seat belts, the vehicle If your vehicle has become water-damaged The sensors react differently depending on is equipped with driver and passenger side in any way (e.g., soaked floor mats/stand- the circumstances of the accident and front airbags. ing water on the floor of the vehicle), do whether or not the seat belt is used. This not attempt to start the engine. This may applies to all belt positions. cause airbag deployment, which could result in serious injury. Volvo recommends There may therefore be accident situations towing the vehicle directly to an authorized in which only one (or none) of the airbags Volvo workshop. are deployed. The sensors monitor the Before attempting to tow the vehicle: impact of the collision and react accord- 1. Switch off the ignition for at least 10 ingly to deploy one, several or no airbags. minutes and disconnect the battery. 2. Follow the instructions for manually WARNING overriding the shiftlock system. The seat belt and the airbag work together. If the seat belt is not used or is used incor- Deployed airbags Driver/passenger side front airbags. rectly, the airbag may not provide the intended protection in a collision. In a frontal collision, the airbags help protect WARNING To help prevent injury in the event the air- the driver's and passenger's head, neck, face bag is deployed, passengers should sit as If any of the airbags have deployed: and chest and the driver's knees and legs. upright as possible, with their feet on the floor and their backs against the seat back- • Do not attempt to drive the vehicle. A collision of a sufficiently violent force will rest. Have it towed to an authorized work- trigger the sensors and one or more airbags shop. will inflate. The airbag helps cushion the initial impact of the collision for the passenger. The • If necessary, seek medical attention. WARNING airbag deflates when compressed by the colli- Volvo recommends contacting an author- sion. A small amount of powder will also be ized Volvo workshop for repairs. Incorrectly Related information released from the airbag. This may appear to • performed repairs to the airbag system Safety (p. 42) be smoke and is normal. The entire process, could impair function and lead to serious • Driver/passenger-side airbags (p. 53) from inflation to deflation of the airbag, occurs injury. within tenths of a second. • Side airbags (p. 60) • Inflatable curtain (p. 60) }}

53 SAFETY

|| The front airbag system WARNING deploy in certain non-frontal collisions The front airbag system includes gas genera- where rapid deceleration occurs. • The airbags in the vehicle are designed tors surrounded by the airbags, and decelera- • The airbag system's sensors, which trigger to be a SUPPLEMENT to-not a tion sensors that activate the gas generators, the front airbags, are designed to deter- replacement for-the three-point seat causing the airbags to be inflated with nitro- mine if the collision is powerful enough to belts. For maximum protection, wear gen gas. activate the belt tensioners and/or the air- seat belts at all times. Be aware that no bags. As the movement of the seats' occupants system can prevent all possible injuries compresses the airbags, some of the gas is that may occur in an accident. However, not all frontal collisions activate the expelled at a controlled rate to provide better front airbags. • Never drive with your hands on the cushioning. The belt tensioners minimize slack steering wheel pad/airbag housing. • If the collision involves a nonrigid object in the seat belts and are activated for occu- (e.g., a snow drift or bush), or a rigid, fixed pants wearing their seat belts. The entire proc- • The front airbags are designed to help object at a low speed, the front airbags ess, from inflation to deflation of the airbag, prevent serious injury. Deployment will not necessarily deploy. occurs within tenths of a second. occurs very quickly and with considera- ble force. During normal deployment • Front airbags do not normally deploy in a The location of the front airbags is indicated and depending on variables such as side impact collision, in a collision from SRS AIRBAG by embossed on the steering seating position, one may experience the rear or in a rollover situation. wheel pad and above the glove compartment, abrasions, bruises, swellings, or other • The amount of damage to the bodywork and by decals on both sun visors and on the injuries as a result of deployment of front and far right side of the dash. does not reliably indicate if the airbags one or both of the airbags. should have deployed or not. The driver's side front airbag is folded and • When installing any accessory equip- located in the steering wheel hub. ment, make sure that the front airbag The knee airbag is folded on the underside of system is not damaged. Any interfer- the dashboard on the driver's side. The text ence in the system could cause mal- AIRBAG is embossed on the panel. function. The passenger's side front airbag is folded behind a panel located above the glove com- Front airbag deployment partment. • The front airbags are designed to deploy during certain frontal or front-angular collisions, impacts, or decelerations, depending on the crash severity, angle, speed and object impacted. The airbags may also

54 SAFETY

NOTE WARNING 1-800-458-1552 • Deployment of front airbags occurs • Do not use child safety seats or child www.volvocars.com/us only one time during an accident. In a booster cushions/backrests in the front In Canada collision where deployment occurs, the passenger's seat. We also recommend Volvo Car Canada Ltd. airbags and seat belt tensioners acti- that occupants under 140 cm (4 feet vate. Some noise occurs and a small 7 inches) in height who have outgrown Customer Care Centre amount of powder is released. The these devices sit in the rear seat with 9130 Leslie Street, Suite 101 release of the powder may appear as the seat belt fastened. See also the smoke-like matter. This is a normal Occupant Weight Sensor information. Richmond Hill, Ontario L4B 0B9 characteristic and does not indicate • Never drive with the airbags deployed. 1-800-663-8255 fire. The fact that they hang out can impair www.volvocars.com/ca • Volvo's front airbags use special sen- the steering of your vehicle. Other sors that are integrated with the front safety systems can also be damaged. Airbag decals seat buckles. The point at which the • The smoke and dust formed when the airbag deploys is determined by airbags are deployed can cause skin whether or not the seat belt is being and eye irritation in the event of pro- used, as well as the severity of the col- longed exposure. lision. • Collisions can occur where only one of Should you have questions about any compo- the airbags deploys. If the impact is nent in the SRS system, please contact a less severe, but severe enough to pres- trained and qualified Volvo service technician ent a clear injury risk, the airbags are or Volvo customer support: triggered at partial capacity. If the impact is more severe, the airbags are In the United States triggered at full capacity. Volvo Car USA, LLC Airbag decal on the outside of both sun visors. Customer Care Center 1 Volvo Drive P.O. Box 914 Rockleigh, New Jersey 07647

}}

55 SAFETY

|| WARNING Occupant weight sensor The Occupant Weight Sensor (OWS) is • No objects or accessory equipment, designed to meet the regulatory require- e.g. dashboard covers, may be placed ments of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety on, attached to, or installed near the air Standard (FMVSS) 208 and is designed to bag cover (the area above the glove disable (will not inflate) the passenger's side compartment) or the area affected by front airbag under certain conditions. airbag deployment. • There should be no loose articles, such as coffee cups on the floor, seat, or dashboard area. • Never try to open the airbag cover on Passenger's side airbag decal. the steering wheel or the passenger's side dashboard. This should only be WARNING done by a trained and qualified Volvo • Children must never be allowed in the service technician. front passenger's seat. • Failure to follow these instructions can • Occupants in the front passenger's result in injury to the vehicle's occupants. seat must never sit on the edge of the Occupant Weight Sensor (OWS) indicator light seat, sit leaning toward the instrument panel or otherwise sit out of position. Related information Disabling the passenger's side front • The occupant's back must be as • Airbags (p. 52) airbag upright as comfort allows and be • Occupant weight sensor (p. 56) Volvo recommends that ALL occupants against the seat back with the seat belt (adults and children) shorter than 140 cm properly fastened. (4 feet 7 inches) be seated in the back seat of any vehicle with a front passenger side airbag • Feet must be on the floor, e.g., not on and be properly restrained for their size and the dash, seat or out of the window. weight. The OWS works with sensors that are part of the front passenger's seat and seat belt. The sensors are designed to detect the presence

56 SAFETY of a properly seated occupant and determine if NOTE WARNING the passenger's side front airbag should be enabled (may inflate) or disabled (will not When the ignition is switched on, the • Never try to open, remove or repair any inflate). OWS indicator light will illuminate for sev- components in the OWS system. This eral seconds while the system performs a could cause the system to malfunction. The OWS will disable (will not inflate) the pas- self-diagnostic test. Maintenance or repairs should only be senger's side front airbag when: carried out by an a trained and qualified • the front passenger's seat is unoccupied, However, if a fault is detected in the system: Volvo service technician. or has small/medium objects in the front • The front passenger's seat should not • The OWS indicator light will stay on. seat, be modified in any way. This could • • the system determines that an infant is The SRS warning light will come on and reduce pressure on the seat cushion, present in a rear-facing infant seat that is stay on and a text message will be dis- which might interfere with the OWS installed according to the manufacturer's played. system's function. instructions, • the system determines that a small child is WARNING present in a forward-facing child restraint If a fault in the system is detected and indi- that is installed according to the manufac- cated as described, be aware that the pas- turer's instructions, senger's side front airbag will not deploy in the event of a collision. In this case, the • the system determines that a small child is SRS system and Occupant Weight Sensor present in a booster seat, should be inspected by a trained and quali- • a front passenger takes his/her weight off fied Volvo service technician as soon as possible. of the seat for a period of time, • a child or a small person occupies the front passenger's seat. The OWS uses a PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp which will illuminate and stay on to remind you that the passenger's side front airbag is disabled. The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp is located in the overhead console, near the base of the rearview mirror. }}

57 SAFETY

|| Passeng- OWS indi- Passenger's BAG OFF indicator lamp is on, it is possible 1 Volvo Drive that the person isn't sitting properly in the er's seat cator light side front P.O. Box 914 occupancy status airbag sta- seat. If this happens: Rockleigh, New Jersey 07647 status tus • Turn the vehicle off and ask the person to place the backrest in an upright position. 1-800-458-1552 Seat unoccu- OWS indi- Passenger's • pied cator light side front air- Have the person sit upright in the seat, In Canada centered on the seat cushion, with the lights up bag disabled Volvo Car Canada Ltd. person's legs comfortably extended. Seat occu- OWS indi- Passenger's • Restart the vehicle and have the person Customer Care Centre pied by low cator light side front air- remain in this position for about two 9130 Leslie Street, Suite 101 weight occu- lights up bag disabled minutes. This will allow the system to A Richmond Hill, Ontario L4B 0B9 pant/object detect that person and enable the pas- 1-800-663-8255 Seat occu- OWS indi- Passenger's senger's frontal airbag. pied by cator light side front air- • If the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indica- heavy occu- is not lit bag enabled tor lamp remains on even after this, the pant/object person should be advised to ride in the rear seat. A Volvo recommends that children always be properly restrained in appropriate child restraints in the rear seats. This indicates limitations in OWS classifica- Do not assume that the passenger's side front airbag is disabled unless the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp tion capability. It does not indicate OWS mal- is lit. Make sure the child restraint is properly installed. If there is any doubt as to the status of the passenger's side function. front airbag, move the child restraint to the rear seat. Modifications The OWS is designed to enable (may inflate) If you are considering modifying your vehicle the passenger's side front airbag in the event in any way to accommodate a disability, for of a collision anytime the system senses that a example by altering or adapting the driver's or person of adult size is sitting properly in the front passenger's seat(s) and/or airbag sys- front passenger's seat. The PASSENGER AIR- tems, please contact Volvo at: BAG OFF indicator lamp will be off and In the United States remain off. Volvo Car USA, LLC If a person of adult size is sitting in the front passenger's seat, but the PASSENGER AIR- Customer Care Center

58 SAFETY

WARNING WARNING WARNING • No objects that add to the total weight • Keep the following points in mind with • Do not place any type of object on the on the seat should be placed on the respect to the OWS system. Failure to front passenger's seat in such a way front passenger's seat. If a child is follow these instructions could that jamming, pressing, or squeezing seated in the front passenger's seat adversely affect the system's function occurs between the object and the with any additional weight, this extra and result in serious injury to the occu- front seat, other than as a direct result weight could cause the OWS system pant of the front passenger's seat. of the correct use of the Automatic to enable the airbag, which might • The full weight of the front seat pas- Locking Retractor/Emergency Locking cause it to deploy in the event of a col- senger should always be on the seat Retractor (ALR/ELR) seat belt. lision, thereby injuring the child. cushion. The passenger should never • No objects should be placed under the • The seat belt should never be wrapped lift him/herself off the seat cushion front passenger's seat. This could inter- around an object on the front passeng- using the armrest in the door or the fere with the OWS system's function. er's seat. This could interfere with the center console, by pressing the feet on OWS system's function. the floor, by sitting on the edge of the Related information seat cushion, or by pressing against • The front passenger's seat belt should • Driver/passenger-side airbags (p. 53) never be used in a way that exerts the backrest in a way that reduces more pressure on the passenger than pressure on the seat cushion. This normal. This could increase the pres- could cause OWS to disable the front, sure exerted on the weight sensor by a passenger's side airbag. child, and could result in the airbag being enabled, which might cause it to deploy in the event of a collision, thereby injuring the child.

59 SAFETY

Side airbags WARNING Inflatable curtain The side airbags, on the driver's and passen- The inflatable curtain, Inflatable Curtain (IC), Volvo recommends contacting an author- ger sides, protect the chest and hip in a colli- ized Volvo workshop for repairs. Incorrectly helps to prevent the driver and passengers sion. performed repairs to the side airbag sys- from striking their heads on the inside of the tem could impair function and lead to seri- vehicle during a collision. ous injury.

WARNING Do not place any objects in the area between the outer edges of the seats and the door panels, as this could impair the function of the side airbags. Volvo recommends only using seat covers approved by Volvo. Other seat covers could prevent the side airbags from functioning properly. The side airbags are located in the front seats' outer backrest frames and help protect the The inflatable curtains are installed along both driver and front seat passenger. WARNING sides of the inside of the roof and help protect The side airbag is a supplement to the seat occupants in the vehicle's outer seats. IC A collision of a sufficiently violent force will belt. Always wear your seat belt. AIRBAG is embossed on the panels. trigger the sensors and one or more side airbags will inflate. The side airbags inflate A collision of a sufficiently violent force will between the seat occupant and the door panel Related information trigger the sensors and the inflatable curtain to help cushion the initial impact of the colli- • Airbags (p. 52) will inflate. sion. The airbag deflates when compressed by the collision. The side airbags are normally only deployed on the side of the vehicle impacted by the collision.

60 SAFETY

WARNING Related information Safety mode • Airbags (p. 52) Safety mode is a feature that is triggered Volvo recommends contacting an authorized Volvo workshop for repair. Incorrectly after a collision if there is potential damage to performed repairs to the inflatable curtain an important function in the vehicle, such as system could impair function and lead to the fuel lines, sensors for one of the safety serious injury. systems, the brake system, etc. If the vehicle has been involved in a collision, the text Safety mode See Owner's manual WARNING may appear in the instrument panel along with Never hang or attach heavy objects in the the warning symbol if the panel is undamaged handle in the ceiling. The hooks are only and the vehicle's electrical system is intact. intended for lightweight garments (not for The message indicates that one or more of the hard objects such as umbrellas). vehicle's functions may be reduced. Never screw or mount anything to the vehicle's headlining, door pillars or side panels. WARNING This could impair the intended protective properties. Volvo recommends only using Never attempt to restart the vehicle if you Volvo original parts that are approved for smell fuel fumes when the message Safety placement in these areas. mode See Owner's manual is displayed in the instrument panel. Leave the vehicle immediately. WARNING If objects are loaded higher than the upper If safety mode has been set, it may be possi- edge of the side windows, leave a 10 cm ble to reset the system in order to start and (4 in.) space between the objects and the move the vehicle a short distance, for exam- window. Objects placed closer to this ple, if it is blocking traffic. could impede the function of the inflatable curtain concealed inside the headlining.

WARNING The inflatable curtain is a supplement to the seat belt. Always wear your seat belt.

}}

61 SAFETY

|| WARNING Starting and moving the vehicle 3. Then try to start the vehicle. when it is in safety mode > The vehicle's electrical system will per- Never attempt to perform repairs or reset electrical components on your own after If safety mode has been set, it may be possi- form a system check and then attempt the vehicle has been in safety mode. This ble to reset the system in order to start and to reset to normal operating mode. could result in injury or prevent the vehicle move the vehicle a short distance, for exam- from functioning properly. Volvo recom- ple, if it is blocking traffic. CAUTION mends having the vehicle inspected and reset to normal operating status by an Starting the vehicle when it is in safety If the message Safety mode See authorized Volvo workshop after Safety mode Owner's manual is still displayed, the mode See Owner's manual has been dis- 1. Check the vehicle for damage, particularly vehicle should not be driven or towed played. for fuel leakage. Make sure you do not behind another vehicle. If the vehicle needs detect any gasoline fumes. to be moved, it must be towed on a tow WARNING truck. Even if no damage is apparent, there If the damage to the vehicle is minor and may be hidden damage that could make When the vehicle is in safety mode, it there is no fuel leakage/fumes, you may the vehicle impossible to control. should not be towed behind another vehi- attempt to start the engine. cle. It should be towed from the site on a tow truck. Volvo recommends towing the vehicle directly to an authorized Volvo WARNING Moving the vehicle when it is in safety workshop. Never attempt to restart the vehicle if you mode smell fuel fumes when the message Safety 1. If the message Normal mode The mode See Owner's manual is displayed vehicle is now in normal mode is dis- Related information in the instrument panel. Leave the vehicle • Safety (p. 42) immediately. played after attempting to start the engine, the vehicle may be moved care- • Starting and moving the vehicle when it is fully from its present position if, for exam- in safety mode (p. 62) 2. Switch off the ignition. ple, it is blocking traffic. • Recovery (p. 441) 2. Do not move the vehicle farther than absolutely necessary.

62 SAFETY

WARNING Child safety ejected from the vehicle during a sudden Children should always be seated safely maneuver or impact. The same can also hap- When the vehicle is in safety mode, it when traveling in the vehicle. pen if the infant or child rides unrestrained on should not be towed behind another vehi- the seat. Other occupants should also be cle. It should be towed from the site on a tow truck. Volvo recommends towing the General information properly restrained to help reduce the chance vehicle directly to an authorized Volvo Volvo recommends the proper use of restraint of injuring or increasing the injury of a child. systems for all occupants including children. workshop. All states and provinces have legislation gov- Remember that, regardless of age and size, a erning how and where children should be car- child should always be properly restrained in a Related information ried in a vehicle. Find out the regulations exist- vehicle. • Safety mode (p. 61) ing in your state or province. Recent accident • Starting the vehicle (p. 382) Your vehicle is also equipped with ISOFIX/ statistics have shown that children are safer in • LATCH attachments, which make it more con- rear seating positions than front seating posi- Recovery (p. 441) venient to install child seats. tions when properly restrained. A child restraint system can help protect a child in a Some restraint systems for children are vehicle. Here's what to look for when selecting designed to be secured in the vehicle by lap a child restraint system: belts or the lap portion of a lap-shoulder belt. Such child restraint systems can help protect It should have a label certifying that it meets children in vehicles in the event of an accident applicable Federal Motor Vehicle Safety only if they are used properly. However, chil- Standards (FMVSS 213) - or in Canada, dren could be endangered in a crash if the CMVSS 213. child restraints are not properly secured in the Make sure the child restraint system is vehicle. Failure to follow the installation approved for the child's height, weight and instructions for your child restraint can result development - the label required by the stand- in your child striking the vehicle's interior in a ard or regulation, or instructions for infant sudden stop. restraints, typically provide this information. Holding a child in your arms is NOT a suitable In using any child restraint system, we urge substitute for a child restraint system. In an you to carefully look over the instructions that accident, a child held in a person's arms can are provided with the restraint. Be sure you be crushed between the vehicle's interior and understand them and can use the device prop- an unrestrained person. The child could also erly and safely in this vehicle. A misused child be injured by striking the interior, or by being restraint system can result in increased inju- }}

63 SAFETY

|| ries for both the infant or child and other occu- WARNING tion of resting on our laurels. But we need pants in the vehicle. your help. Please remember to put your chil- • Do not use child safety seats or child dren in the back seat, and buckle them up. When a child has outgrown the child safety booster cushions/backrests in the front seat, you should use the rear seat with the passenger's seat. We also recommend WARNING standard seat belt fastened. The best way to that children under 140 cm (4 feet help protect the child here is to place the child 7 inches) in height who have outgrown A child restraint should never be reused if: on a cushion so that the seat belt is properly these devices sit in the rear seat with • The vehicle has been involved in a colli- located on the hips. Legislation in your state or the seat belt fastened. sion, no matter how minor province may mandate the use of a child seat • or cushion in combination with the seat belt, On hot days, the temperature in the • Its history is unknown vehicle interior can rise very quickly. depending on the child's age and/or size. • It is older than the manufacturer's expi- Exposure to these high temperatures Please check local regulations. ration date for even a short period of time can A specially designed and tested booster cush- cause heat-related injury or death. ion and backrest can be obtained from your Small children are particularly at risk. Volvo has some very specific Volvo retailer. See also the article "Integrated Never leave children unattended in a recommendations booster cushion." vehicle. • Always wear your seat belt. • Airbags are a SUPPLEMENTAL safety Child seats should always be registered. device which, when used with a three- point seat belt can help reduce serious Volvo's recommendations injuries during certain types of accidents. Why does Volvo believe that no child should Volvo recommends that you do not dis- sit in the front seat of a vehicle? It's quite sim- connect the airbag system in your vehicle. ple really. A front airbag is a very powerful • Volvo strongly recommends that everyone device designed, by law, to help protect an in the vehicle be properly restrained. adult. • Volvo recommends that ALL occupants Because of the size of the airbag and its speed (adults and children) shorter than 140 cm of inflation, a child should never be placed in (4 feet 7 inches) be seated in the rear seat the front seat, even if he or she is properly bel- of any vehicle with a front passenger side ted or strapped into a child safety seat. Volvo airbag. has been an innovator in the field of safety since it was founded. And we have no inten- • Drive safely!

64 SAFETY

Related information Child restraints • Safety (p. 42) Suitable child restraints should always be • Child restraints (p. 65) used when children travel in the vehicle. • Activating and deactivating child safety Child restraint systems locks (p. 257)

Convertible seat

WARNING A child seat should never be used in the front passenger seat of any vehicle with a Infant seat front passenger airbag - not even if the There are three main types of child restraint "Passenger airbag off" symbol near the systems: infant seats, convertible seats and rear-view mirror is illuminated. If the severity of an accident were to cause the booster cushions. They are classified accord- airbag to inflate, this could lead to serious ing to the child's age and size. injury or death to a child seated in this The child restraint should be secured using a position. three-point seat belt, ISOFIX/LATCH anchors or top tether anchors.

}}

65 SAFETY

|| WARNING When attaching the seat belt to a child • seat: When not in use, keep the child 1. Attach the seat belt to the child seat restraint system secured or remove it according to the child seat manufacturer's from the passenger compartment to instructions. help prevent it from injuring passengers in the event of a sudden stop or 2. Pull the seat belt out as far as possible. collision. 3. Insert the seat belt latch plate into the • A small child's head represents a con- buckle (lock) in the usual way. siderable part of its total weight and its 4. Release the seat belt and pull it taut neck is still very weak. Volvo recom- around the child seat. mends that children up to age 4 travel, Booster cushion properly restrained, facing rearward. In A sound from the seat belt retractor will be addition, Volvo recommends that chil- audible at this time and is normal. The belt will WARNING dren should ride rearward facing, prop- now be locked in place. This function is auto- erly restrained, as long as possible. matically disabled when the seat belt is Always refer to the child restraint manufac- unlocked and the belt is fully retracted. turer's instructions for detailed information on securing the restraint. NOTE WARNING Prolonged installation and use of the child Do not use child safety seats or child restraint may damage the vehicle's interior. booster cushions/backrests in the front Volvo recommends using the kick guard passenger's seat. We also recommend that accessory to help protect the vehicle's children who have outgrown these devices interior. sit in the rear seat with the seat belt properly fastened. Automatic Locking Retractor/ Emergency Locking Retractor (ALR/ Child restraint registration and recalls ELR) Child restraints could be recalled for safety reasons. You must register your child restraint To make child seat installation easier, each to be reached in a recall. To stay informed seat belt (except for the driver's belt) is equip- about child safety seat recalls, be sure to fill ped with a locking mechanism to help keep the seat belt taut.

66 SAFETY out and return the registration card that Infant seats comes with new child restraints. Suitable child restraints should always be Child restraint recall information is readily used when children (depending on their age/ available in both the U.S. and Canada. For size) are seated in the vehicle. recall information in the U.S., call the U.S. Securing an infant seat with a seat Government's Auto Safety Hotline at 1-800-424-9393 or go to http://www- belt odi.nhtsa.dot.gov/cars/problems/recalls/ register/childseat/index.cfm. In Canada, visit Transport Canada's Child Safety website at http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/childsafety/ menu.htm. Route the seat belt through the infant seat. Related information • Child safety (p. 63) WARNING • Infant seats (p. 67) • An infant seat must be in the rear-facing • Convertible seats (p. 69) position only. • Booster cushions (p. 72) • The infant seat should not be positioned • Integrated booster cushion* (p. 76) Do not place the infant seat in the front passenger's behind the driver's seat unless there is seat. adequate space for safe installation. • Top tether anchors (p. 73) • 1. Place the infant seat in the rear seat of the Lower child seat attachment points vehicle. (p. 74) 2. Attach the seat belt to the infant seat • ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors (p. 75) according to the child restraint manufacturer's instructions.

}}

* Option/accessory. 67 SAFETY

|| WARNING NOTE A child seat should never be used in the The locking retractor will automatically front passenger seat of any vehicle with a release when the seat belt is unbuckled front passenger airbag - not even if the and allowed to retract fully. "Passenger airbag off" symbol near the rear-view mirror is illuminated. If the severity of an accident were to cause the 5. Press the infant seat firmly in place, let the airbag to inflate, this could lead to serious seat belt retract and pull it taut. A sound injury or death to a child seated in this from the seat belt retractor's automatic position. locking function will be audible at this time and is normal. The seat belt should now be 3. locked in place. Pull out the shoulder section of the seat belt. 4. Pull the shoulder section of the seat belt out as far as possible to activate the belt's automatic locking function.

Fasten the seat belt. Check that the infant seat is properly secured. Fasten the seat belt by inserting the latch 6. Press and pull the infant seat along the plate into the buckle (lock) until a distinct direction of the seat belt to check that it is click is audible. properly held in place by the seat belt.

68 SAFETY

• WARNING ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors (p. 75) Convertible seats Suitable child restraints should always be It should not be possible to move the child restraint more than 2.5 cm (1 in.) in any used when children (depending on their age/ direction along the seat belt path. size) are seated in the vehicle. Securing a convertible seat with a seat belt

When installing infant seats in the rear seat, Volvo recommends maintaining a distance of at least 50 mm (2 inches) from the front-most part of the Do not place the convertible seat in the front pas- infant seat to the rearmost part of the seat in front. senger's seat. The infant seat can be removed by unbuckling Convertible seats can be used in either a for- the seat belt and letting it retract completely. ward or rearward-facing position, depending on the age and size of the child. Related information • Child restraints (p. 65) • Convertible seats (p. 69) • Booster cushions (p. 72) • Top tether anchors (p. 73) • Lower child seat attachment points (p. 74) }}

69 SAFETY

|| WARNING • A small child's head represents a con- siderable part of its total weight and its neck is still very weak. Volvo recommends that children up to age 4 travel, properly restrained, facing rearward. In addition, Volvo recommends that children should ride rearward facing, properly restrained, as long as possible. • Convertible child seats should be installed in the rear seat only. Route the seat belt through the convertible seat. • A rear-facing convertible seat should not Fasten the seat belt. be positioned behind the driver's seat 3. Fasten the seat belt by inserting the latch WARNING unless there is adequate space for safe plate into the buckle (lock) until a distinct Always use a convertible seat that is suita- installation. click is audible. ble for the child's age and size. See the 4. Pull the shoulder section of the seat belt convertible seat manufacturer's recom- 2. Attach the seat belt to the convertible seat mendations. out as far as possible to activate the belt's according to the child restraint manufac- automatic locking function. turer's instructions. 1. Place the convertible seat in the rear seat of the vehicle.

70 SAFETY

NOTE WARNING Related information • Child restraints (p. 65) The locking retractor will automatically It should not be possible to move the child • release when the seat belt is unbuckled restraint more than 2.5 cm (1 in.) in any Infant seats (p. 67) and allowed to retract fully. direction along the seat belt path. • Booster cushions (p. 72) • Top tether anchors (p. 73) The convertible seat can be removed by 5. Press the convertible seat firmly in place, • Lower child seat attachment points unbuckling the seat belt and letting it retract let the seat belt retract and pull it taut. A (p. 74) sound from the seat belt retractor's auto- completely. • ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors (p. 75) matic locking function will be audible at this time and is normal. The seat belt should now be locked in place.

Ensure that the convertible seat is securely in place.

WARNING Pull out the shoulder section of the seat belt. A child seat should never be used in the 6. Push and pull the convertible seat along front passenger seat of any vehicle with a front passenger airbag - not even if the the seat belt path to ensure that it is held "Passenger airbag off" symbol near the securely in place by the seat belt. rear-view mirror is illuminated. If the severity of an accident were to cause the airbag to inflate, this could lead to serious injury or death to a child seated in this position.

71 SAFETY

Booster cushions 3. Fasten the seat belt by inserting the latch Related information Suitable child restraints should always be plate into the buckle (lock) until a distinct • Child restraints (p. 65) used when children (depending on their age/ click is audible. • Convertible seats (p. 69) size) are seated in the vehicle. • Infant seats (p. 67) Securing a booster cushion • Top tether anchors (p. 73) • Lower child seat attachment points (p. 74) • ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors (p. 75)

Positioning the seat belt. 4. Ensure that the seat belt is pulled taut and Position the child correctly on the booster cushion. fits snugly around the child. Booster cushions are recommended for children who have outgrown convertible seats. WARNING • 1. Place the booster cushion in the rear seat The hip section of the three-point seat of the vehicle. belt must fit snugly across the child's hips, not across the stomach. 2. With the child properly seated on the • The shoulder section of the three-point booster cushion, attach the seat belt to or seat belt should be positioned across around the cushion according to the man- the chest and shoulder. ufacturer's instructions. • The shoulder belt must never be placed behind the child's back or under the arm.

72 SAFETY

Top tether anchors 3. Attach the strap for the lower tether WARNING Your Volvo is equipped with child restraint anchors in the lower ISOFIX/LATCH • Always refer to the recommendations top tether anchorages for all three seating attachment points. If the child restraint is made by the child restraint manufac- positions in the rear seat. They are located on not equipped with straps for the lower turer. the rear side of the backrests. tether anchors, or if the child restraint is used on the center seating position, follow • Volvo recommends that the top tether Child restraint anchorages the instructions for attaching a child anchors be used when installing a for- restraint using the automatic locking seat ward-facing child restraint. belt. • Never route a top tether strap over the 4. Firmly tension all straps. top of the head restraint. The strap should be routed beneath the head Refer also to the child seat manufacturer's restraint. instructions for information on securing the child seat. • Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads NOTE imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are If the vehicle is equipped with a cargo they to be used for adult seat belts or compartment cover, this must be removed harnesses. The anchorages are not able before a child seat can be attached in the to withstand excessive forces on them Top tether anchors and symbols on the rear side of tether anchors. the rear seat backrests. There is no symbol for the in the event of collision if full harness center anchor position. seat belts or adult seat belts are installed to them. An adult who uses a belt Securing a child seat anchored in a child restraint anchorage 1. Place the child restraint on the rear seat. runs a great risk of suffering severe 2. Route the top tether strap under the head injuries should a collision occur. restraint and attach it to the anchor. • Do not install rear speakers that require the removal of the top tether anchors or interfere with the proper use of the top tether strap.

}}

73 SAFETY

|| Related information Lower child seat attachment points Related information • Child restraints (p. 65) The rear seats are equipped with lower child • Child restraints (p. 65) • Lower child seat attachment points seat attachment points. • Top tether anchors (p. 73) The lower child seat attachment points are (p. 74) • ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors (p. 75) intended for use with certain rear-facing child • ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors (p. 75) restraints. Always follow the manufacturer's installation instructions when attaching a child seat to the lower child seat attachment points. Location of child seat attachment points

Location of child seat attachment points in the rear seat. The child seat attachment points in the rear seat are located on the rear section of the front seat floor rails.

74 SAFETY

ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors 2. Kneel on the child restraint to press down Lower anchors for ISOFIX/LATCH-equipped the seat cushion and locate the anchors child seats are located in the rear, outboard by feel. seats, hidden below the backrest cushions. 3. Fasten the attachment on the child restraint's lower straps to the ISOFIX/ Using the ISOFIX/LATCH lower child LATCH lower anchors. seat anchors 4. Firmly tension the lower child seat straps according to the manufacturer's instructions.

WARNING Fasten the attachment correctly to the ISOFIX/ Volvo's ISOFIX/LATCH anchors conform to LATCH lower anchors. FMVSS/CMVSS standards. Always refer to the child restraint system's manual for weight and size ratings. WARNING • Be sure to fasten the attachment correctly to the anchor (see the illustra- NOTE tion). If the attachment is not correctly Location of the ISOFIX/LATCH anchors • The rear center seat is not equipped fastened, the child restraint may not be Symbols on the seat back upholstery mark the with ISOFIX/LATCH lower tether properly secured in the event of a colli- ISOFIX/LATCH anchor positions as shown. To anchors. If a child restraint is used in sion. access the anchors, kneel on the seat cushion this seat, attach the restraint's upper • The ISOFIX/LATCH lower child and locate the anchors by feel. Always follow anchor strap (if equipped with these) restraint anchors are only intended for your child seat manufacturer's installation to the top tether anchor point for this use with child seats positioned in the instructions, and use both ISOFIX/LATCH strap and secure the child restraint outboard seating positions. These lower anchors and top tethers whenever pos- with the vehicle's center seat belt. anchors are not certified for use with sible. • Always follow your child seat manufac- any child restraint that is positioned in To access the anchors turer's installation instructions, and use the center seating position. When 1. Put the child restraint in position. both ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors securing a child restraint in the center and top tethers whenever possible. seating position, use only the vehicle's center seat belt. }}

75 SAFETY

|| Related information Integrated booster cushion*1 Before driving, make sure that: • Child restraints (p. 65) The integrated booster cushions in the rear • the booster cushion is raised to the cor- • Top tether anchors (p. 73) seat's outboard seating positions help ensure rect position for the child's weight • ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors (p. 75) that children can sit comfortably and safely. • the booster cushion is locked into position The integrated booster cushion has been specially designed to help safeguard children in • the seat belt is taut, in contact with the the rear seat when used with the vehicle's child's body and not twisted seat belts. The integrated booster cushion in • the seat belt is not positioned across the the rear seat can be folded up to two posi- child's throat or below the shoulder tions, depending on the child's height. • the lap section of the seat belt is placed If using a booster cushion does not result in low over the child's hips to provide the proper positioning of the shoulder strap, then best protection. the child should be placed in a properly US models secured child restraint. The shoulder belt must never be placed behind the child's back or Stage 1 Stage 2 under the arm. Weight 50 - 80 lbs 33 - 55 lbs 22 - 36 kg 15 - 25 kg Length 45 - 55 in. 37 - 47 in. 115 - 140 cm 95 - 120 cm

Correct seating position: the seat belt is positioned across the collarbone.

1 Canada only: This cushion may be referred to as a built-in booster cushion.

76 * Option/accessory. SAFETY

Canadian models WARNING Related information • Child restraints (p. 65) Stage 1 Stage 2 DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY can • Folding up the integrated booster cush- Weight 22 - 36 kg 18 - 25 kg occur ion* (p. 78) • 50 - 80 lbs 40 - 55 lbs Follow all instructions on this • Folding down the integrated booster cushion* (p. 79) Length 115 - 140 cm 102 - 120 cm child restraint and in the vehicle's owner's manual. 45 - 55 in. 40 - 47 in. • Make sure the booster cushion 18 kg (40 lbs) is the minimum weight require- is securely locked before the ment for a child using booster seats according child is seated. to the Canadian regulation CMVSS 213.4. • Use this booster cushion only with children whose height and weight are within the permitted limits shown in the table. • Use only the vehicle's lap and shoulder belt system when restraining the child in this booster cushion. • In the event of a collision while the integrated booster cushion was occupied, the entire booster cushion and seat belt must be replaced. The booster cushion should also be replaced if it is badly worn or damaged in any way. This work should be performed by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician only.

* Option/accessory. 77 SAFETY

Folding up the integrated booster cushion* When the integrated booster cushion is used, it must be folded up. Lower position:

Press the booster cushion rearward to Lift the front edge of the booster cushion lock it into position. and press it rearward toward the backrest to lock it into position. Upper position (from the lower position):

Pull the handle forward and upward to release the booster cushion.

Press the button to release the booster cushion.

78 * Option/accessory. SAFETY

WARNING NOTE Folding down the integrated booster cushion* The integrated booster cushion cannot be DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY can When the integrated booster cushion in the moved directly from the upper position to occur rear seat is not in use, it should be stowed the lower position. From the upper posi- • (folded down). Follow all instructions on this tion, the booster cushion must first be child restraint and in the vehi- folded down completely into the rear seat NOTE cle's owner's manual. and then raised to the lower position. The integrated booster cushion cannot be • Make sure the booster cushion moved directly from the upper position to the lower position. From the upper posi- is securely locked before the Related information • Integrated booster cushion* (p. 76) tion, the booster cushion must first be child is seated. folded down completely into the rear seat • Folding down the integrated booster and then raised to the lower position. • Use this booster cushion only with chil- cushion* (p. 79) dren whose height and weight are within the permitted limits shown in the table. • Use only the vehicle's lap and shoulder belt system when restraining the child in this booster cushion. • In the event of a collision while the integrated booster cushion was occupied, the entire booster cushion and seat belt must be replaced. The booster cushion should also be replaced if it is badly worn or damaged in any way. This work should be performed by a trained and qualified Volvo Pull the handle forward to release the service technician only. booster cushion.

}}

* Option/accessory. 79 SAFETY

|| WARNING Related information • Integrated booster cushion* (p. 76) DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY can • Folding up the integrated booster cush- occur ion* (p. 78) • Follow all instructions on this child restraint and in the vehicle's owner's manual. • Make sure the booster cushion is securely locked before the child is seated. • Use this booster cushion only with chil- Press down on the center of the booster dren whose height and weight are cushion to lock it into position. within the permitted limits shown in the table. CAUTION • Use only the vehicle's lap and shoulder Make sure that there are no objects (e.g. belt system when restraining the child toys) on the seat under the integrated in this booster cushion. booster cushion before folding it down. • In the event of a collision while the integrated booster cushion was occu- NOTE pied, the entire booster cushion and seat belt must be replaced. The The integrated booster cushion must be booster cushion should also be stowed (folded down) before folding down replaced if it is badly worn or damaged the seat backrest. in any way. This work should be performed by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician only.

80 * Option/accessory. DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

Instruments and controls in left- Horn Center and tunnel console hand drive vehicles Left-side steering wheel keypad The overviews show the location of the vehicle's displays and controls. Hood open

Steering wheel and dashboard Display lighting, tailgate unlock/open*/ close*, halogen headlight height adjustment Ceiling console

Center display

Hazard warning flashers, defrosting, media Gear selector Parking lights, daytime running lights, low beams, high beams, turn signals, front fog Start knob lights/cornering illumination*, rear fog Drive modes* light, trip computer reset Front reading lights and courtesy lighting Steering wheel paddles for manual shift- Parking brake ing* * Panoramic roof Auto-hold brakes Head-up display* Ceiling console display ON CALL button Instrument panel HomeLink®* Wipers and washers, rain sensor*

Right-side steering wheel keypad

Steering wheel adjustment

82 * Option/accessory. DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

Driver's door

Memory for power front seat settings*, door mirrors and head-up display* Central locking

Power windows, door mirrors, electric child safety locks* Controls for front seat

Related information • Manual front seats (p. 184) • Adjusting the power* front seats (p. 185) • Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 198) • Lighting control and panel (p. 152) • Starting the vehicle (p. 382) • Instrument panel (p. 84) • Center display overview (p. 111) • Transmission (p. 395)

* Option/accessory. 83 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

Instrument panel The instrument panel is available in two ver- The instrument panel displays information sions: 8" and 12"*. Instrument panel 8" related to the vehicle and driving. The instrument panel contains gauges, indica- WARNING tors and monitoring and warning symbols. If the instrument panel turns off, does not What is shown in the instrument panel varies activate when the ignition is switched on, depending on the equipment, settings and or part/all of the panel cannot be read, do functions currently active. not drive the vehicle. Consult a workshop immediately. Volvo recommends an The instrument panel is activated as soon as a authorized Volvo workshop. door is opened, i.e. in ignition mode 0. The panel will power down after a short period of time if it is not used. To reactivate it, do one of WARNING the following: If the instrument panel is not functioning properly, information about brakes, airbags • Depress the brake pedal. The illustration is generic - details may vary accord- or other safety-related systems may not be ing to vehicle model. • Activate ignition mode I. displayed. The driver will then not be able to check the status of the vehicle systems • Open one of the doors. or receive relevant warnings and information.

Location in the instrument panel: Left side In the center Right side Fuel gauge Speedometer Media player Drive Mode Road sign information* Phone Gear indicator Cruise control/speed limiter information Navigation information*

Tachometer/ECO gaugeA Door and seat belt status Clock Distance to empty tank Start/Stop function status App menu (activated using steering wheel keypad)

84 * Option/accessory. DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

Left side In the center Right side Ambient temperature sensor – Current fuel consumption

Indicator and warning symbols – OdometerB – – Trip odometer – – Indicator and warning symbols – – Voice Control – – Engine temperature gauge – – Message (also graphics in some cases)

– – CompassA

A Depends on selected drive mode. B Total distance.

}}

85 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

|| Instrument panel 12"*

The illustration is generic - details may vary according to vehicle model.

Location in the instrument panel: Left side In the center Right side

Speedometer Indicator and warning symbols Tachometer/ECO gaugeA Trip odometer Ambient temperature sensor Gear indicator

OdometerB Clock Drive Mode Cruise control/speed limiter information Message (also graphics in some cases) Fuel gauge Road sign information* Door and seat belt status Start/Stop function status – Media player Distance to empty tank – Navigation system map* Current fuel consumption – Phone App menu (activated using steering wheel keypad)

86 * Option/accessory. DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

Left side In the center Right side – Voice Control –

– CompassA –

A Depends on selected drive mode. B Total distance.

Dynamic symbol • Trip computer (p. 89) Dynamic symbol in basic • Messages in the instrument panel mode. (p. 107) • Handling the App menu in the instrument panel (p. 106) • Drive modes* (p. 403)

In the center of the instrument panel is a dynamic symbol that changes appearance according to the type of message displayed. The severity of the control or warning symbol is indicated by a red or amber-colored marking Example with indicator symbol. around the symbol. An animation may be used to change the symbol into a graphic image to depict the location of a problem or to clarify information. Related information • Instrument panel settings (p. 88) • Warning symbols in the instrument panel (p. 97) • Indicator symbols in the instrument panel (p. 95)

* Option/accessory. 87 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

Instrument panel settings • navigation system*. Select language Display settings for the instrument panel can 1. Tap Settings in the center display's Top Settings via center display be set via the instrument panel's app menu view. and via the center display's Settings menu. Selecting type of information 2. Tap System System Languages and 1. Tap Settings in the center display's Top Settings via instrument panel's app view. Units System Language to select lan- menu guage. 2. Tap My Car Displays Driver Display > A change made here will affect the lan- Information. guage in all displays. 3. Select a background: The settings are personal and saved automati- • Show no information in the cally in the active driver profile. background Related information • Show information for current • Instrument panel (p. 84) playing media • Handling the App menu in the instrument • Show navigation even if no route is panel (p. 106) 1 set • Changing settings in the center display's Select theme Top view (p. 133) The illustration is generic - details may vary accord- 1. Tap Settings in the center display's Top ing to vehicle model. view. The app menu will open and can be controlled 2. Tap My Car Displays Display using the right-side steering wheel keypad. Themes. The app menu can be used to set what infor- 3. Select a theme (appearance) for the mation will be displayed in the instrument instrument panel: panel • Glass • trip computer • Minimalistic • media player • Performance • phone • Chrome Rings

1 Map is displayed on 12-inch* instrument panels. 8-inch instrument panels display only guidance.

88 * Option/accessory. DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

Fuel gauge Trip computer The fuel gauge in the instrument panel shows The vehicle's trip computer registers data the fuel level in the tank. while driving such as mileage, fuel consumption and average speed. To help promote fuel-efficient driving, data is recorded on both current and average fuel consumption. Data from the trip computer can be displayed in the instrument panel.

The illustration is generic - details may vary according to vehicle model. Fuel gauge in 8" instrument panel: The illustration is generic - details may vary accord- The bars in the fuel gauge indicate the amount ing to vehicle model. of fuel left in the tank. Fuel gauge in 12" instrument panel: When the fuel level is low and it is time to The beige area in the fuel gauge indicates the refuel, the fuel pump symbol will illuminate amount of fuel left in the tank. with an amber-colored light. The trip computer When the fuel level is low and it is time to also indicates the approximate distance driven refuel, the fuel pump symbol will illuminate on the fuel remaining in the tank. When the with an amber-colored light. The trip computer fuel level is critically low, only an amber-col- also indicates the approximate distance driven ored bar will be displayed. Refuel as soon as on the fuel remaining in the tank. possible. Related information • Instrument panel (p. 84) • Refueling (p. 423) • Fuel tank volume (p. 640)

}}

89 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

|| • Trip odometer Current fuel consumption • Odometer This gauge shows the vehicle's fuel consumption at that moment. The reading is updated • Current fuel consumption about once a second. • Distance to empty tank • Tourist - alternative speedometer Distance to empty tank The trip computer calculates the dis- Unit standards for distance, speed, etc. can be tance that can be driven on the fuel changed via system settings in the center dis- remaining in the tank. play. Trip odometer This calculation is based on average fuel consumption during the last 30 km (20 miles) There are two trip odometers: TM and TA. Example of trip computer information in a 12-inch and the amount of fuel remaining in the tank. * TM can be reset manually and TA is reset instrument panel . The illustration is generic - details When the gauge displays "----", there is not may vary according to vehicle model. automatically if the vehicle is not used for four enough fuel remaining to calculate the remain- hours. ing mileage. Refuel as soon as possible. During a drive, the trip odometer registers data on: NOTE • Mileage The information will change based on your • Driving time driving style. • Average speed • Average fuel consumption An economical driving style will generally increase how far you can drive on a certain The readings since the trip odometer's last amount of fuel. reset are displayed. Tourist - alternative speedometer Odometer The alternative digital speedometer makes it Example of trip computer information in an 8-inch The odometer records the vehicle's total mile- instrument panel. The illustration is generic - details easier to drive in countries where speed limit age. This reading cannot be reset. may vary according to vehicle model. signs are shown in a different measurement The trip computer includes the following unit than the one shown in the vehicle's gauges: gauges.

90 * Option/accessory. DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

When used, the digital speed is displayed in Displaying trip data in the 1. Open the app menu in the instrument the opposite unit to that shown in the analog instrument panel panel by pressing (1). speedometer. If mph is used in the analog Data recorded and calculated by the trip (The App menu cannot be opened while speedometer, the equivalent speed in km/h computer can be displayed on the instrument there is an unacknowledged message in will be shown in the digital speedometer. panel. the instrument panel. The message must Related information This data is stored in a trip computer app. You be acknowledged by pressing the O but- can choose which information the instrument • Displaying trip data in the instrument ton (4) before the App menu can be panel will display in the app menu. panel (p. 91) opened). • Resetting the trip odometer (p. 92) 2. Navigate to the trip computer app by moving left or right using (2). • Displaying trip statistics in the center display (p. 92) > The top four menu rows show meas- • ured values for trip odometer TM. The Instrument panel (p. 84) next four menu rows show measured • Changing system units of measurement values for trip odometer TA. Scroll up or (p. 133) down in the list using (3).

Open and navigate in the app menu2 using the right- hand steering wheel keypad. App menu

Left/right

Up/down

Confirm

2 The illustration is generic - details may vary according to vehicle model. }}

91 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

|| 3. Scroll down to the option buttons to Resetting the trip odometer Displaying trip statistics in the choose which information to show in the Resetting the trip odometer using the left- center display instrument panel: side steering wheel lever. Trip computer statistics can be displayed • Odometer graphically in the center display, providing an overview that facilitates more fuel-efficient • Distance to empty tank driving. • Tourist (alternative speedometer) Open the Driver • Mileage for trip odometer TM, TA or no performance app in the App display of mileage view to display trip statistics. • Current fuel consumption, average fuel Each bar in the graph repre- consumption for TM or TA, or no dis- sents a driving distance of 1 play of fuel consumption kilometers, 10 kilometers or Select or clear a selection using the O but- 100 kilometers (or miles). The bars are added ton (4). The change will apply immedi- from the right as you drive. The bar at the far ately. right shows the data for the current trip. – Reset all information in trip odometer TM Average fuel consumption and total driving Related information (i.e. mileage, average fuel consumption, time are calculated from the most recent reset • Trip computer (p. 89) average speed and driving time) by press- of the trip statistics. • Resetting the trip odometer (p. 92) ing and holding the RESET button on the left-hand steering wheel lever. Tapping the RESET button only resets the distance driven. The TA trip odometer can not be manually reset. It resets automatically if the vehicle is not used for four hours or more. Related information • Trip computer (p. 89)

92 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

Trip statistics settings Related information Trip statistics settings can be reset or • Displaying trip statistics in the center dis- adjusted. play (p. 92) 1. Open the Driver performance app in the • Trip computer (p. 89) App view to display trip statistics. • Resetting the trip odometer (p. 92)

Trip computer statistics3. 2. Tap Preferences to Related information • change the graph scale. Select 1, 10 or • Trip statistics settings (p. 93) 100 km/miles for the bar. • Trip computer (p. 89) • reset data after each trip. Performed when the vehicle remains stationary for more than 4 hours. • reset data for current trip. Trip statistics, calculated average consumption, and total driving time are always reset simultaneously. Unit standards for distance, speed, etc. can be changed via system settings in the center display.

3 The illustration is generic - details may vary according to vehicle model.

93 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

Date and time Automatic time for vehicles with GPS Ambient temperature sensor The clock is displayed in both the instrument When the vehicle is equipped with a naviga- The ambient temperature is shown in the panel and the center display. tion system, Auto Time is also available. The instrument panel. time zone will then be automatically set to the The sensor detects the temperature outside Location of clock vehicle's location. In some navigation systems, the vehicle. the current location must also be set to determine the correct time zone. If Auto Time is not selected, the time and date can be adjusted using the up and down arrows on the touchscreen. Daylight savings time In some countries, the Auto Daylight Saving Time setting can be selected to automatically change to daylight savings time. For other countries, the Daylight Saving Time setting can be selected manually. Location of clock in 12"* and 8" instrument panels. Related information Location of the ambient temperature sensor in 12"* The illustration is generic - details may vary accord- • Instrument panel (p. 84) ing to vehicle model. and 8" instrument panels. The illustration is generic - • Changing settings in the center display's details may vary according to vehicle model. Certain messages and other information may Top view (p. 133) obscure the clock in the instrument panel. If the vehicle has been stationary, the sensor reading may be higher than the actual tem- In the center display, the clock is located on perature. the upper right-hand side in the status bar. When the ambient temperature is Settings for date and time between –5 °C and +2 °C (23 °F – Select Settings System Date and and 36 °F), a snowflake symbol will Time in the center display's Top view to illuminate to alert the driver of the change settings for time and date format. risk of slippery conditions. Adjust the date and time by tapping the The symbol is also temporarily lit in the head- * up or down arrows on the touchscreen. up display if the vehicle is equipped with one.

94 * Option/accessory. DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

Change the measurement standard for the Indicator symbols in the Symbol Meaning temperature sensor etc. via system settings in instrument panel the center display's Top view. The indicator symbols alert the driver that a Fault in ABS system Related information function has been activated, that a system is If this symbol is illuminated, the running, or that a fault or error may have • Instrument panel (p. 84) ABS system is malfunctioning. occurred. The vehicle's regular brakes will • Changing system units of measurement A Symbol Meaning still work, but without the ABS (p. 133) function. Information, see the message in the display

The information symbol illumi- B nates and a message is displayed in the instrument panel if one of Auto-brake on the vehicle's systems requires the driver's attention. The infor- This symbol illuminates when the mation symbol may also illumi- function is activated and the nate in combination with other A brakes or parking brakes are symbols. being used. The brakes hold the vehicle at a standstill after it has Fault in brake system stopped. This symbol illuminates if there is a problem with the parking B A brake.

}}

95 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

|| Symbol Meaning Symbol Meaning Symbol Meaning Tire pressure system Parking lights Active high beams off This symbol illuminates to indi- This symbol illuminates when the This symbol lights up in white cate low tire pressure. If there is parking lights are on. when the active high beams are a fault in the tire pressure sys- off. Parking lights are on. tem, the symbol will first flash for Fault in headlight system High beams on approximately 1 minute and then This symbol illuminates if a fault glow steadily. This may occur if has been detected in the ABL This symbol illuminates when the the system cannot detect or alert (Active Bending Lights) function high beams and parking lights the driver of low tire pressure as or another fault in the headlight are on. intended. system. Front fog lights on Emission control system Active high beams on This symbol illuminates when the If this symbol illuminates after This symbol lights up in blue front fog lights are on. starting the engine, it could indi- when the active high beams are cate a fault in the vehicle's emis- on. Rear fog light on sion control system. Have the This symbol illuminates when the Active high beams off vehicle checked by a workshop. rear fog light is on. Volvo recommends contacting This symbol lights up in white an authorized Volvo workshop. when the active high beams are Rain sensor on off. This symbol illuminates when the Left/right turn signals rain sensor is on. The symbol will flash when the High beams on turn signals are in use. This symbol illuminates when the Preconditioning on high beams are on or flashed. This symbol illuminates when the engine block/passenger com- Active high beams on partment heater or air condition- This symbol lights up in blue ing are preconditioning the vehi- when the active high beams are cle. on. Parking lights are on.

96 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

Symbol Meaning Symbol Meaning Warning symbols in the instrument panel Stability system Lane Keeping Aid The warning symbols alert the driver that an This symbol flashes when the White symbol: Lane Keeping Aid important function is activated or that a seri- stability system is actively work- is on and lane marker lines are ous fault or error has occurred. ing to stabilize the vehicle. If the detected. Symbol Meaning symbol glows steadily, there is a Gray symbol: Lane Keeping Aid fault in the system. WARNING is on but no lane marker lines are Stability system, Sport mode detected. The red warning symbol illuminates to indicate that a fault has This symbol illuminates when Amber-colored symbol: Lane been detected that could affect Sport mode is activated. Sport Keeping Aid is alerting/interven- safety or driveability. An explana- mode offers a more active driving ing. tory message will be simultane- experience. If the system detects Lane Keeping Aid and rain sen- ously displayed in the instrument that accelerator pedal, steering sor panel. The warning symbol may wheel and cornering movements also illuminate in combination are more active than in normal White symbol: Lane Keeping Aid with other symbols. driving, it allows a certain level of is on and lane marker lines are controlled lateral movement of detected. The rain sensor is on. Seat belt reminder the rear wheels before interven- Gray symbol: Lane Keeping Aid This symbol will glow steadily or ing and stabilizing the vehicle. is on but no lane marker lines are flash if the driver or front seat detected. The rain sensor is on. passenger has not fastened their seat belt or if anyone in the rear A Canadian models. B US models. seat has removed their seat belt. Related information • Instrument panel (p. 84) • Warning symbols in the instrument panel (p. 97)

}}

97 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

|| Symbol Meaning Symbol Meaning Symbol Meaning Airbags Parking brake on Collision risk If this symbol remains illumi- This symbol glows steadily when City Safety warns the driver if nated or comes on while driving, the parking brake is applied. there is a risk of a collision with a fault has been detected in one another vehicle, pedestrian, A A flashing symbol indicates that of the vehicle's safety systems. cyclist or large animal. a fault has occurred. Read the Read the message in the instru- message in the instrument panel. ment panel. Volvo recommends High engine temperature contacting an authorized Volvo The symbol will illuminate while workshop. driving when the engine tem- B perature is too high. An explana- Fault in brake system Low oil pressure tory message will be simultane- If this symbol illuminates, the ously displayed in the instrument brake fluid level may be too low. If this symbol illuminates while panel. driving when the engine oil pres- A Contact your nearest authorized sure is too low. Stop the engine A Canadian models. workshop to have the brake fluid B US models. level checked and adjusted. immediately and check the engine oil level. Add oil if neces- Related information sary. If the symbol illuminates • Indicator symbols in the instrument panel and the oil level is normal, con- (p. 95) B tact a workshop. Volvo recom- • Instrument panel (p. 84) mends contacting an authorized Volvo workshop. Generator not charging This symbol illuminates during driving if a fault is detected in the electrical system. Contact a workshop. Volvo recommends contacting an authorized Volvo workshop.

98 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

Instrument panel licenses PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE AND NON- by the University of California, Berkeley A license is an agreement on the right to con- INFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE and its contributors. duct a certain activity or the right to use COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR ANYONE 4. Neither the name of the University nor the someone else's right according to terms and DISTRIBUTING THE SOFTWARE BE LIABLE names of its contributors may be used to conditions specified in the agreement. The FOR ANY DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, endorse or promote products derived from following text is Volvo's agreement with the WHETHER IN CONTRACT, TORT OR this software without specific prior written manufacturer or developer. OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR permission. IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR Boost Software License 1.0 THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' to any person or organization obtaining a copy AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED of the software and accompanying BSD 4-clause "Original" or "Old" License WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT documentation covered by this license (the Copyright (c) 1982, 1986, 1990, 1991, 1993 LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES "Software") to use, reproduce, display, The Regents of the University of California. All OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR distribute, execute, and transmit the Software, rights reserved. A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE and to prepare derivative works of the Redistribution and use in source and binary DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE Software, and to permit third-parties to whom forms, with or without modification, are REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE the Software is furnished to do so, all subject permitted provided that the following FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, to the following: The copyright notices in the conditions are met: SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR Software and this entire statement, including CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, the above license grant, this restriction and 1. Redistributions of source code must retain BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF the following disclaimer, must be included in the above copyright notice, this list of SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS all copies of the Software, in whole or in part, conditions and the following disclaimer. OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS and all derivative works of the Software, 2. Redistributions in binary form must INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND unless such copies or derivative works are reproduce the above copyright notice, this ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER solely in the form of machine-executable list of conditions and the following IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT object code generated by a source language disclaimer in the documentation and/or (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR processor. other materials provided with the OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", distribution. OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, 3. All advertising materials mentioning ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT features or use of this software must DAMAGE. NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF display the following acknowledgement: MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A This product includes software developed }}

99 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

|| BSD 3-clause "New" or "Revised" License SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY Copyright (c) 2011-2014, Yann Collet. CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE Redistribution and use in source and binary SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF forms, with or without modification, are OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A permitted provided that the following INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. conditions are met: ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT 1. Redistributions of source code must retain IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE the above copyright notice, this list of (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, conditions and the following disclaimer. OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR 2. Redistributions in binary form must OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, reproduce the above copyright notice, this ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF list of conditions and the following DAMAGE. SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS disclaimer in the documentation and/or BSD 2-clause “Simplified” license OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND other materials provided with the Copyright (c) , All rights distribution. reserved. ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT 3. Neither the name of the organisation nor Redistribution and use in source and binary (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR the names of its contributors may be used forms, with or without modification, are OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT to endorse or promote products derive permitted provided that the following OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF from this software without specific prior conditions are met: ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH written permission. 1. Redistributions of source code must retain DAMAGE. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE the above copyright notice, this list of The views and conclusions contained in the COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND conditions and the following disclaimer. software and documentation are those of the CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY authors and should not be interpreted as EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, 2. Redistributions in binary form must representing official policies, either expressed INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE reproduce the above copyright notice, this or implied, of the FreeBSD Project. IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF list of conditions and the following MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A disclaimer in the documentation and/or PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. other materials provided with the IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT distribution. HOLDER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND

100 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

FreeType Project License software, with or without modifications, in EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, 1. 1 Copyright 1996-1999 by David Turner, commercial products, provided that all BUT NOT LIMITED TO, WARRANTIES OF Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg warranty or liability claims are assumed by MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR Introduction The FreeType Project is the product vendor. Legal Terms 0. A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT distributed in several archive packages; Definitions Throughout this license, the WILL ANY OF THE AUTHORS OR some of them may contain, in addition to terms `package', `FreeType Project', and COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR the FreeType font engine, various tools `FreeType archive' refer to the set of files ANY DAMAGES CAUSED BY THE USE and contributions which rely on, or relate originally distributed by the authors (David OR THE INABILITY TO USE, OF THE to, the FreeType Project. This license Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner FREETYPE PROJECT. As you have not applies to all files found in such packages, Lemberg) as the `FreeType project', be signed this license, you are not required to and which do not fall under their own they named as alpha, beta or final release. accept it. However, as the FreeType explicit license. The license affects thus `You' refers to the licensee, or person project is copyrighted material, only this the FreeType font engine, the test using the project, where ùsing' is a license, or another one contracted with programs, documentation and makefiles, generic term including compiling the the authors, grants you the right to use, at the very least. This license was inspired project's source code as well as linking it distribute, and modify it. Therefore, by by the BSD, Artistic, and IJG to form a `program' or èxecutable'. This using, distributing, or modifying the (Independent JPEG Group) licenses, program is referred to as à program using FreeType project, you indicate that you which all encourage inclusion and use of the FreeType engine'. This license applies understand and accept all the terms of free software in commercial and freeware to all files distributed in the original this license. products alike. As a consequence, its main FreeType archive, including all source 2. Redistribution Redistribution and use in points are that: o We don't promise that code, binaries and documentation, unless source and binary forms, with or without this software works. However, we are be otherwise stated in the file in its original, modification, are permitted provided that interested in any kind of bug reports. (às unmodified form as distributed in the the following conditions are met: o is' distribution) o You can use this original archive. If you are unsure whether Redistribution of source code must retain software for whatever you want, in parts or not a particular file is covered by this this license file (`licence.txt') unaltered; or full form, without having to pay us. license, you must contact us to verify this. any additions, deletions or changes to the (`royalty-free' usage) o You may not The FreeType project is copyright (C) original files must be clearly indicated in pretend that you wrote this software. If 1996-1999 by David Turner, Robert accompanying documentation. The you use it, or only parts of it, in a program, Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg. All rights copyright notices of the unaltered, original you must acknowledge somewhere in reserved except as specified below. 1. No files must be preserved in all copies of your documentation that you've used the Warranty THE FREETYPE ARCHIVE IS source files. o Redistribution in binary FreeType code. (`credits') We specifically PROVIDED ÀS IS' WITHOUT form must provide a disclaimer that states permit and encourage the inclusion of this WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER that the software is based in part of the }}

101 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

|| work of the FreeType Team, in the porting, etc. o http://www.freetype.org and with the following additions to the distribution documentation. We also Holds the current FreeType web page, disclaimer: encourage you to put an URL to the which will allow you to download our There is no warranty against interference with FreeType web page in your latest development version and read your enjoyment of the library or against documentation, though this isn't online documentation. You can also infringement. There is no warranty that our mandatory. These conditions apply to any contact us individually at: David Turner efforts or the library will fulfill any of your software derived from or based on the [email protected] Robert < > particular purposes or needs. This library is FreeType code, not just the unmodified Wilhelm [email protected] < > provided with all faults, and the entire risk of files. If you use our work, you must Werner Lemberg satisfactory quality, performance, accuracy, acknowledge us. However, no fee need be and effort is with the user. paid to us. Libpng License libpng versions 0.97, January 1998, through 3. Advertising The names of FreeType's This copy of the libpng notices is provided for 1.0.6, March 20, 2000, are Copyright (c) authors and contributors may not be used your convenience. In case of any discrepancy 1998, 1999 Glenn Randers-Pehrson, and are to endorse or promote products derived between this copy and the notices in the file distributed according to the same disclaimer from this software without specific prior png.h that is included in the libpng and license as libpng-0.96, with the following written permission. We suggest, but do distribution, the latter shall prevail. individuals added to the list of Contributing not require, that you use one or more of COPYRIGHT NOTICE, DISCLAIMER, and Authors: the following phrases to refer to this LICENSE: software in your documentation or Tom Lane advertising materials: `FreeType Project', If you modify libpng you may insert additional Glenn Randers-Pehrson `FreeType Engine', `FreeType library', or notices immediately following this sentence. `FreeType Distribution'. Willem van Schaik libpng versions 1.0.7, July 1, 2000, through 4. Contacts There are two mailing lists 1.0.13, April 15, 2002, are Copyright (c) libpng versions 0.89, June 1996, through related to FreeType: o 2000-2002 Glenn Randers-Pehrson and are 0.96, May 1997, are Copyright (c) 1996, 1997 [email protected] Discusses general distributed according to the same disclaimer Andreas Dilger Distributed according to the use and applications of FreeType, as well and license as libpng-1.0.6 with the following same disclaimer and license as libpng-0.88, as future and wanted additions to the individuals added to the list of Contributing with the following individuals added to the list library and distribution. If you are looking Authors of Contributing Authors: for support, start in this list if you haven't John Bowler found anything to help you in the Simon-Pierre Cadieux documentation. o [email protected] Eric S. Raymond Kevin Bracey Discusses bugs, as well as engine Gilles Vollant Sam Bushell internals, design issues, specific licenses,

102 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

Magnus Holmgren portions hereof, for any purpose, without fee, Glenn Randers-Pehrson [email protected] subject to the following restrictions: April 15, 2002 Greg Roelofs 1. The origin of this source code must not be Tom Tanner misrepresented. libpng versions 0.5, May 1995, through 0.88, 2. Altered versions must be plainly marked January 1996, are Copyright (c) 1995, 1996 as such and must not be misrepresented Guy Eric Schalnat, Group 42, Inc. as being the original source. For the purposes of this copyright and license, 3. This Copyright notice may not be removed "Contributing Authors" is defined as the or altered from any source or altered following set of individuals: source distribution. Andreas Dilger The Contributing Authors and Group 42, Inc. Dave Martindale specifically permit, without fee, and encourage the use of this source code as a component to Guy Eric Schalnat supporting the PNG file format in commercial Paul Schmidt products. If you use this source code in a product, acknowledgment is not required but Tim Wegner would be appreciated. The PNG Reference Library is supplied "AS A "png_get_copyright" function is available, IS". The Contributing Authors and Group 42, for convenient use in "about" boxes and the Inc. disclaim all warranties, expressed or like: implied, including, without limitation, the warranties of merchantability and of fitness for printf("%s",png_get_copyright(NULL)); any purpose. The Contributing Authors and Also, the PNG logo (in PNG format, of course) Group 42, Inc. assume no liability for direct, is supplied in the files "pngbar.png" and indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or "pngbar.jpg (88x31) and "pngnow.png" consequential damages, which may result (98x31). from the use of the PNG Reference Library, even if advised of the possibility of such Libpng is OSI Certified Open Source damage. Software. OSI Certified Open Source is a certification mark of the Open Source Permission is hereby granted to use, copy, Initiative. modify, and distribute this source code, or }}

103 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

|| MIT License zlib License Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, Copyright (c) The zlib/libpng License Copyright (c) to any person obtaining a copy of this copyright holders software and associated documentation files Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, < > (the "Software"), to deal in the Software to any person obtaining a copy of this This software is provided 'as-is', without any without restriction, including without software and associated documentation files express or implied warranty. In no event will limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, (the "Software"), to deal in the Software the authors be held liable for any damages merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or without restriction, including without arising from the use of this software. sell copies of the Software, and to permit limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, Permission is granted to anyone to use this persons to whom the Software is furnished to merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or software for any purpose, including do so, subject to the following conditions: The sell copies of the Software, and to permit commercial applications, and to alter it and above copyright notice including the dates of persons to whom the Software is furnished to redistribute it freely, subject to the following first publication and either this permission do so, subject to the following conditions: restrictions: notice or a reference to http://oss.sgi.com/ The above copyright notice and this projects/FreeB/ shall be included in all copies 1. The origin of this software must not be permission notice shall be included in all or substantial portions of the Software. misrepresented; you must not claim that copies or substantial portions of the Software. you wrote the original software. If you use THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", this software in a product, an WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, acknowledgment in the product EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT documentation would be appreciated but NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF is not required. MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A 2. Altered source versions must be plainly PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND marked as such, and must not be NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL misrepresented as being the original SILICON GRAPHICS, INC. BE LIABLE FOR THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS software. ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION 3. This notice may not be removed or altered CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, from any source distribution. ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN SGI Free Software B License Version 2.0. CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR SGI FREE SOFTWARE LICENSE B (Version THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE 2.0, Sept. 18, 2008) SOFTWARE. SOFTWARE. Copyright (C) [dates of first publication] Except as contained in this notice, the name of Silicon Graphics, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Silicon Graphics, Inc. shall not be used in

104 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, App menu in instrument panel App Functions use or other dealings in this Software without The application menu (App menu) in the prior written authorization from Silicon instrument panel provides quick access to Trip com- Select a trip odometer, Graphics, Inc. commonly used functions for certain apps. puter change instrument panel display settings, etc. Related information • Instrument panel (p. 84) Media Select active source for player media player. Phone Call a contact from the call list. Navigation Guide to destination, etc.

Related information • Instrument panel (p. 84) • Center display overview (p. 111) The illustration is generic. • Handling the App menu in the instrument The App menu in the instrument panel can be panel (p. 106) used instead of the center display and is then controlled using the right-side steering wheel keypad. The app menu makes it easier to switch between different apps or functions within the apps without having to let go of the steering wheel. App menu functions Different apps provide access to different types of functions. The following apps and their functions can be controlled from the App menu:

105 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

Handling the App menu in the Opening and closing the app menu The next time the App menu is opened, the instrument panel – Tap open/close (1). functions for the most recently selected app The App (application) menu in the instrument > The App men opens/closes. will be displayed automatically. panel is controlled using the right-side steer- Related information ing wheel keypad. NOTE • App menu in instrument panel (p. 105) The App menu cannot be opened while • Messages in the instrument panel there is an unacknowledged message in (p. 107) the instrument panel. The message must be acknowledged before the App menu can be opened.

The App menu turns off automatically after a period of inactivity or after certain selections are made. Navigating and making selections in App menu and right-side steering wheel keypad. The the App menu illustration is generic. 1. Navigate between apps by tapping left or Open/close right (2). Left/right > Functions for the previous/next app will be shown in the App menu. Up/down 2. Scroll through the functions for the Confirm selected app using the up or down arrows (3). 3. Confirm or make a selection for the function by pressing confirm (4). > The function will be activated and, for some selections, the App menu will then close.

106 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

Messages in the instrument panel The message may be shown along with The instrument panel shows messages in graphics, symbols or buttons to e.g. acknowl- certain circumstances to inform or assist the edge the message or accept a request. driver.

Example of message in the instrument panel. The illustration is generic - details may vary according to vehicle model. Example of message in the instrument panel4. Example of message in an 8-inch instrument panel. High-priority messages for the driver are dis- The illustration is generic - details may vary accord- played in the instrument panel. ing to vehicle model. The messages may appear in different parts of the instrument panel depending on what other information is currently being displayed. The message will disappear from the instrument panel after a short period of time or after it has been acknowledged or any required action has been taken. Messages that need to be saved are stored in the Car Status app, which can be opened from the App view in the center display.

4 * With 12" instrument panel. }}

* Option/accessory. 107 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

|| Service messages Message Meaning Handling messages in the The following table lists a selection of impor- instrument panel tant service messages and what they mean. Regular main- Time for service - contact Messages in the instrument panel are con- B tenance a workshop . Shown trolled using the right-side steering wheel Message Meaning Maintenance when the date for service keypad. overdue has passed. Stop safelyA Stop and switch off the engine. Serious risk of Temporarily A function has been tem- damage - contact a offA porarily deactivated and workshopB. will be reactivated automatically while driving or Turn off Stop and switch off the after the engine is restar- A engine. Serious risk of engine ted. damage - contact a workshopB. A Part of message, shown along with information on the location of the problem. B An authorized Volvo workshop is recommended. Service urgent Contact a workshopB to Drive to work- have the vehicle inspec- Related information shopA ted immediately. • Handling messages in the instrument Examples of messages in the instrument panel5 and panel (p. 108) the right-side steering wheel keypad. Service Contact a workshopB to requiredA have the vehicle inspec- • Handling messages saved from the instru- ted as soon as possible. ment panel (p. 109) • Messages in the center display (p. 141) Regular main- Time for service - contact tenance a workshopB. Shown Book time for before the next service maintenance date. Regular main- Time for service - contact tenance a workshopB. Shown on Time for main- the next service date. tenance

108 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

2. Confirm your selection by pressing con- Handling messages saved from the firm (2). instrument panel > The message will disappear from the Messages saved from the instrument panel instrument panel. and center displays are handled in the center For messages without buttons: display. – Close the message by pressing confirm (2) or let the message automatically time- out after a short period. > The message will disappear from the instrument panel. Messages that need to be saved are stored in Examples of messages in the instrument panel6 and the right-side steering wheel keypad. The illustration the Car Status app, which can be opened is generic - details may vary according to vehicle from the App view in the center display. The model. message Vehicle message stored in Car Left/right Status app will simultaneously appear in the center display. Confirm Saved messages can be viewed in the Car Status Related information app. Some messages in the instrument panel con- • Messages in the instrument panel (p. 107) The messages displayed in tain one or more buttons for e.g. confirming • the instrument panel that the message or accepting a request. Handling messages saved from the instrument panel (p. 109) need to be saved are stored Handling new messages in the Car Status app in the • Messages in the center display (p. 141) For messages with buttons: center display. The message Vehicle message stored in 1. Navigate between the buttons by tapping Car Status app will simulta- left or right (1). neously appear in the center display.

5 With 8" instrument panel. 6 With 12" instrument panel. }}

109 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

|| Reading saved messages Booking service for saved messages: Related information • To read a saved message immediately: – With the message in expanded form, tap Messages in the instrument panel (p. 107) – Tap the button to the right of the message Request appoint./Call to make • Handling messages in the instrument Vehicle message stored in Car Status Appointment7 for assistance booking panel (p. 108) app in the center display. service. • Messages in the center display (p. 141) > The saved message will be displayed in > With Request appoint.: The the Car Status app. Appointments tab will open in the app and create a request for a service/repair To read saved messages at a later time: appointment. 1. Open the Car Status app from App view With Call to make Appointment: The in the center display. phone app will open and call a service > The app will open in the bottom tile of center to make an appointment for Home view. service or repairs. 2. Select the Messages tab in the app. Reading the Owner's Manual for saved mes- > A list of saved messages will be dis- sages: played. – With the message in expanded form, tap 3. Tap a message to expand/minimize it. Owner's manual to read relevant infor- > More information about the message mation about the message in the Owner's will appear in the list and the image to Manual. the left of the app will display informa- > The Owner's Manual will open in the tion about the message in graphic form. center display and provide information Handling saved messages related to the message. In expanded form, some messages have two Saved messages in the app are automatically buttons available for booking service or read- deleted each time the engine is started. ing the Owner's Manual.

7 Market dependent. Volvo ID and selected workshop also need to be registered

110 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

Center display overview display and its possibilities are presented Many of the vehicle's functions can be con- below. trolled from the center display. The center

Three of the center display's basic views. Swipe to the right/left to access Function or App view8. }}

111 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

|| Function view ‒ vehicle functions that can Navigation ‒ takes you to map navigation • Opening contextual setting in the center be activated or deactivated with one tap. with e.g. Sensus Navigation*. Tap the tile display (p. 134) Certain functions, called "trigger func- to expand it. • Owner's Manual in the center display tions", open windows with settings Media ‒ most recently used media-related (p. 17) options. One example is the Camera. Set- apps. Tap the tile to expand it. • tings for the head-up display* are also Media player (p. 471) started from Function view, but adjusted Phone ‒ used to access phone-related • Phone (p. 487) functions. Tap the tile to expand it. using the right-side steering wheel key- • Climate system controls (p. 211) pad. Fourth tile ‒ most recently used apps or • Turning off and adjusting the volume of vehicle functions not associated with the Home view ‒ the initial view displayed the center display system sounds (p. 132) when the screen is turned on. other tiles. Tap the tile to expand it. • Changing the appearance of the center Climate row - information and direct inter- App view ‒ shows downloaded apps display (p. 132) (third-party apps) as well as apps for inte- action to set temperature and seat heating * • Changing system language (p. 133) grated functions, such as FM radio. Tap for example . Tap the symbol in the center an app icon to open that app. of the climate bar to open Climate view • Changing system units of measurement and additional setting options. (p. 133) Status bar ‒ current vehicle activities are shown at the top of the screen. Network Related information • Cleaning the center display (p. 610) and connection information is shown to • Handling the center display (p. 113) • Messages in the center display (p. 141) the left of the status bar. Media-related • Navigating in the center display's views information, the clock and information (p. 116) about background activities are shown to the right. • Function view in the center display (p. 123) Top view ‒ pull the tab down to open Top view. From here, you can access Settings, • Apps (p. 452) Owner's manual, Profile and messages • Symbols in the center display status bar stored in the vehicle. In certain cases, con- (p. 125) textual setting (e.g. Navigation Settings) • Changing settings in the center display's and the contextual Owner's Manual (e.g. Top view (p. 133) Navigation Manual) can also be accessed in Top view.

8 In right-hand drive vehicles, these views are mirror images of the ones shown here.

112 * Option/accessory. DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

Handling the center display screen. It is possible to e.g. move between dif- CAUTION Many of the vehicle's functions and features ferent views, mark objects, scroll in a list and Do not use sharp objects on the screen as can be controlled and adjusted from the cen- move apps by touching the screen in various this could cause scratches. ter display. The center display is a ways. touchscreen that reacts to taps and other An infrared light curtain just above the surface gestures. of the screen enables the screen to detect The following table presents the various pro- when a finger is directly in front of the screen. Using the center display's cedures for using the screen: This technology makes it possible to use the touchscreen screen even while wearing gloves. The touchscreen reacts differently depending on whether the user taps, drags or swipes the Two people can interact with the screen at the same time, e.g. to adjust climate system settings for both the driver and passenger sides.

Procedure Gesture Result Tap once. Marks an object, confirms a selection or activates a function. Double-tap. Zooms in on a digital object, such as a map. Press and hold. Grabs hold of an object so it can be moved. Can be used to move apps or points on a map. Press and hold your finger on the screen and drag the object to the desired position.

Tap once with two Zooms out from a digital object, such as a map. fingers.

}}

113 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

|| Procedure Gesture Result Drag Moves between screen views or scrolls in a list, text or a view. Press and hold to drag apps or points on a map. Drag horizontally or vertically over the screen.

Swipe Moves between screen views or scrolls in a list, text or a view. Drag horizontally or vertically over the screen. Note that touching the upper part of the screen could cause Top view to open.

Stretch Zooms in.

Pinch Zooms out.

114 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

Returning to Home view from another • drag the control to the desired tempera- view ture, 1. Briefly press the home button below the • tap + or − to raise or lower the tempera- center display. ture by degrees, or > The most recent Home view mode will • tap the desired temperature on the con- be displayed. trol. 2. Press briefly again. Related information > All of the Home view's tiles will return • Activating and deactivating the center dis- to standard mode. play (p. 116) • Moving apps and buttons in the center NOTE display (p. 125) The scroll indicator will be shown in the center dis- In Home view's standard mode – short play when it is possible to scroll in the view. • Using the center display keyboard press on the Home button. An animation (p. 127) describing access to the various views is Using the center display controls shown on the screen.

Scrolling in lists, articles or views A scroll indicator is displayed on the screen when it is possible to scroll up or down in the view. Swipe down/up anywhere in the view.

Temperature control. Digital controls are available for many of the vehicle's functions. For example, to set the temperature:

115 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

Activating and deactivating the 1. Press and hold the button beneath the Navigating in the center display's center display screen. views The center display can be temporarily > The screen will go dark (the climate bar There are five different basic views in the cen- switched off and reactivated using the home will remain visible). All functions con- ter display: Home view, Top view, Climate button under the screen. nected to the screen continue to oper- view, App view and Function view. The ate. screen is automatically activated when the 2. To reactivate the screen, briefly press the driver's door is opened. Home button. Home view > The view that was displayed before the Home view is the view displayed when the screen was turned off will be displayed screen is activated. It consists of four tiles: again. Navigation, Media, Phone and a fourth tile. An app or vehicle function selected from the NOTE App or Function views will start in the respec- The screen cannot be turned off when a tive tile in Home view. FM radio, for example, prompt to perform an action is being dis- will start in the Media tile. played on the screen. The extra tile displays the most recently used Center display's home button. app or vehicle function that is not related to When the home button is used, the screen will NOTE the other three tiles. go dark and the touchscreen no longer reacts to touch. The climate bar will remain visible. The center display is turned off automati- The tiles display brief information about the All functions connected to the screen continue cally when the engine is off and the driver's respective apps. to operate, such as climate, audio, guiding* door is opened. and apps. The center display screen can be NOTE cleaned when the display is dimmed. The dim- Related information When the vehicle is started, information on ming function can also be used to darken the • Cleaning the center display (p. 610) the current status of apps will be displayed screen so it is not a distraction while driving. • Changing the appearance of the center in the respective tile in Home view. display (p. 132) • Center display overview (p. 111)

116 * Option/accessory. DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

NOTE Top view the digital Owner's Manual related to the content shown on the screen, directly in In Home view's standard mode – short Top view. press on the Home button. An animation describing access to the various views is To exit Top view, tap the screen outside Top shown on the screen. view, press the Home button or tap the screen at the bottom of Top view and swipe upward. The views behind will become visible again NOTE and can be used. When the vehicle is moving: NOTE • Certain functions (e.g. using the center display's keyboard) may be deacti- The top view is not available at start-up/ vated. shutdown or when a message is being • Certain texts (e.g. those generated by Top view when expanded. shown on the screen. Similarly, it is not apps) will be shortened to three rows. There is a tab in the center of the status bar at available when the climate view is shown. Tap the Read out button to have the the top of the screen. Open Top view by tap- entire message read aloud. ping the tab or by dragging/swiping from the Climate view • Text messages will be shortened to top of the screen downward. The climate bar is always visible at the bottom one row. Tap the Read out button to Top view always provides access to: of the screen. The most common climate set- have the entire message read aloud. tings can be made directly there, such as set- • Settings ting temperature and seat heating*. • Owner's manual Tap the symbol in the center of the Status bar • Profile climate bar to open Climate view Current vehicle activities are shown at the top • The vehicle's stored messages. and access additional climate sys- of the screen in the status bar. Network and tem settings. connection information is shown to the left of In certain cases, Top view provides access to: Tap the symbol to close Climate the status bar. Media-related information, the • Contextual setting (e.g. Navigation view and return to a previous view. clock and information about background activ- Settings). Change settings directly in Top ities are shown to the right. view when an app (e.g. navigation) is being used. • Contextual Owner's Manual (e.g. Navigation Manual). Access articles in }}

* Option/accessory. 117 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

|| App view Tap an app to open it. It will then be opened in Function view its associated tile, e.g. Media. Depending on the number of apps, it is possible to scroll down in App view. This is done by sweeping/dragging from the bottom upwards. To return to Home view, swipe the screen from left to right9 or press the Home button.

App view showing the vehicle's apps. Function view with buttons for various vehicle functions. Swipe the screen from right to left9 to access App view from Home view. This view displays Swipe the screen from left to right9 to access downloaded apps (third-party apps) as well as Function view from Home view. From Func- apps for integrated functions, such as FM tion view, you can activate or deactivate vari- radio. Brief information will be displayed ous vehicle functions such as BLIS*, Lane directly in App view for certain apps, such as Keeping Aid* and Park Assist*. unread text messages for Messages.

9 Applies for left-hand drive vehicles. For right-hand drive vehicles, swipe in the other direction.

118 * Option/accessory. DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

If there are many functions, you can also scroll downward through the view. This is done by sweeping/dragging from the bottom upwards. Unlike in App view, where you tap an app to open it, in Function view, tapping a function activates or deactivates it. Certain functions (trigger functions) open in their own window when tapped. To return to Home view, swipe the screen from right to left9 or press the Home button. Related information • Handling tiles in the center display (p. 120) • Symbols in the center display status bar (p. 125) • Changing settings in the center display's Top view (p. 133) • Opening contextual setting in the center display (p. 134) • Owner's Manual in the center display (p. 17) • Driver profiles (p. 137) • Climate system controls (p. 211) • Apps (p. 452) • Function view in the center display (p. 123) • Center display overview (p. 111)

9 Applies for left-hand drive vehicles. For right-hand drive vehicles, swipe in the other direction.

119 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

Handling tiles in the center display Home view consists of four tiles: Navigation, Media, Phone and a fourth tile. These views can be expanded.

120 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

Expanding a tile from standard mode

Standard mode and expanded mode of a tile in the center display.

}}

121 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

|| Expanding a tile: In expanded mode, open the Related information app in full-screen mode. Tap • – For tiles Navigation, Media and Phone: Handling the center display (p. 113) the symbol. Tap the screen anywhere in the tile. When • Activating and deactivating the center dis- a tile is expanded, the extra tile in Home play (p. 116) view will be temporarily hidden. The other • Navigating in the center display's views two tiles will be minimized and only show (p. 116) certain information. When the extra tile is To return to expanded mode, tapped, the other three tiles are minimized tap the symbol or press the and only certain information is displayed. Home button under the Expanded view provides access to the screen. basic functions of the respective apps. Closing an expanded tile: – The tile can be closed in three different ways: • Tap the top section of the expanded tile. • Tap another tile (it will then be opened in expanded mode instead). • Press briefly on the Home button under the center display. Opening or closing a tile in full-screen mode The fourth tile10 and tile for Navigation can be Center display's home button. opened in full-screen mode to show additional You can always press the Home button to information and possible settings. return to Home view. To return to Home When a tile is opened in full-screen mode, no view's standard view from full-screen mode, information from the other tiles is displayed. press the Home button twice.

10 Does not apply to all apps or vehicle functions opened via the fourth tile.

122 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

Function view in the center display navigate to Function view by swiping from Different types of buttons Function view, which is one of the center dis- left to right over the screen11. There are three different types of buttons for play's basic views, contains all of the vehi- vehicle functions; see below: cle's function buttons. From the Home view,

Type of button Functions Vehicle function affected Function buttons Have On/Off modes. Most buttons in Function view are function buttons. When a function is active, an LED indicator light will illuminate to the left of the button's icon. Press the button to turn the function on or off. Trigger buttons Do not have On/Off modes. • Camera Pressing a trigger button opens a window for the function. This can be, for example, a • Headrest Fold window to change seat position. • Head-up Display Adjustments Parking buttons Have On/Off and scanning modes. • Park In Similar to function buttons, but have an extra mode for parking scanning. • Park Out

11 Applies for left-hand drive vehicles. For right-hand drive vehicles, swipe in the other direction. }}

123 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

|| Button modes

The function is deactivated when the LED When a function or parking button's LED indi- indicator light is switched off. cator is green, the function is activated (on). For some functions, an additional text explain- ing the function will be shown when the function is initially activated. The text will be displayed for a few seconds and then the button will be displayed with the LED indicator illuminated. For Lane Keeping Aid, for example, the text Works only at certain speeds will be displayed when the button is pressed. A warning triangle in the right-hand section of Press the button once briefly to activate or the button indicates that something is not deactivate the function. working correctly. Related information • Handling the center display (p. 113) • Navigating in the center display's views (p. 116)

124 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

Moving apps and buttons in the NOTE Symbols in the center display center display status bar Hide the apps that are rarely or never used The apps and buttons for vehicle functions Overview of symbols displayed in the center by moving them far down, outside of the can be moved and organized in the App and display status bar. visible view. This makes it easier to find the Function views. The status bar shows current vehicle activities apps used more frequently. 1. Swipe from right to left12 to access App and in certain cases, also their status. Due to view or swipe from left to right12 to access the limited space in the status bar, not all sym- Function view. NOTE bols will be displayed at all times. 2. Press and hold an app or button. Apps and vehicle function buttons cannot Symbol Meaning > The app or button will change size and be situated at spots already in use. become slightly transparent. It can then Connected to the Internet. be moved. Related information 3. Drag the app or button to an available • Function view in the center display Roaming activated. position in the view. (p. 123) • Apps (p. 452) Cell phone network signal A maximum of 48 rows can be used to posi- strength. tion apps or buttons. To move an app or but- • Handling the center display (p. 113) ton outside the visible view, drag it to the bot- Bluetooth device connected. tom of the view. New rows will be added and the app or button can be placed in one of Bluetooth activated but no these. device connected. Apps or buttons placed below the view's nor- Information sent to and from mal display will not be visible on the screen. GPS. Swipe the screen to scroll up or down in the Connected to Wi-Fi network. view to display information outside the view.

12 Applies for left-hand drive vehicles. For right-hand drive vehicles, swipe in the other direction. }}

125 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

|| Symbol Meaning Related information • Navigating in the center display's views Tethering activated (Wi-Fi hot- (p. 116) spot). This means that the vehi- • Messages in the center display (p. 141) cle shares an available Internet * connection. • Internet-connected vehicle (p. 496) • Connecting a device via the USB port Vehicle modem activated. (p. 478) • USB sharing active. Phone (p. 487) • Date and time (p. 94) Action in progress.

Timer for preconditioning active.A

Audio source being played.

Audio source paused.

Phone call in progress.

Audio source muted.

News broadcasts from current radio station.B Traffic information being received.B Clock.

A Only hybrid models. B Not available in all markets.

126 * Option/accessory. DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

Using the center display keyboard You can use the keyboard in the center display to enter characters or to switch to handwriting mode to "write" letters and characters on the screen. The keyboard can be used to enter characters (letters, numbers, symbols, etc.) to e.g. send text messages from the vehicle, enter pass- words or search for information in the digital Owner's Manual. The keyboard will only appear when it is possible to enter text on the screen.

NOTE The keyboard cannot be used while the vehicle is moving.

}}

127 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

The illustration shows an overview of some of the buttons that may be shown on the keyboard. The appearance may vary depending on language settings and the context in which the keyboard is used.

128 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

Row showing suggestions for words or The first letter entered in text fields will that has been entered. The button's appear- characters13. The suggested words also be uppercase. In text fields intended ance differs depending on the context. change as new letters are entered. Scroll for names or addresses, each word will be through the list of suggested words by automatically started with an uppercase Variants of letters or characters tapping the right or left arrows. Tap a sug- letter. In text fields intended for pass- gestion to select it. Please note that this words, website addresses or email function is not available in all languages. addresses, all letters will automatically be When unavailable, this row will not be lowercase unless uppercase is selected. shown on the keyboard. Used to enter numbers. The number key- Available characters are adapted to the board (2) will then be displayed. Tap language selected for the keyboard (see , which is shown instead of in number 7 below). Tap a character to enter number mode, to return to the keyboard it. with letters, or to display the key- Different buttons are displayed here board with special characters. depending on the context in which the Used to change the keyboard language, keyboard is used, e.g. @ to enter an email e.g. EN. The available characters and word Variants of a letter or character, e.g. é or è, can address or the return key to start a new suggestions (1) vary depending on the be entered by pressing and holding the letter line. selected language. In order to toggle or character. A box containing possible vari- This button hides the keyboard. In cases between keyboard languages, the lan- ants of the letter or character will appear. Tap where this is not possible, the button will guages must first be added under Set- the desired variant. If no variant is selected, not be displayed. tings. the original letter/character will be used. Used to enter uppercase letters. Tap once Space bar. to enter one uppercase letter and then Related information continue with lowercase letters. Tap twice Delete. Tap to delete characters one at a • Changing keyboard language in the center for caps lock (all text will be entered in time. Press and hold to delete multiple display (p. 130) characters quickly. uppercase letters). Tap again to return the • Entering characters, letters and words by keyboard to lowercase letters. In this Used to change to handwriting mode. hand in the center display (p. 130) mode, the first letter after a period, excla- • Handling the center display (p. 113) mation point or question mark will be Tap the confirm button over the keyboard (not automatically entered in uppercase form. shown in illustration) once to confirm the text • Handling text messages (p. 492)

13 For Asian languages.

129 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

Changing keyboard language in Toggling between keyboard languages Entering characters, letters and the center display If more than one language words by hand in the center In order to toggle between keyboard lan- has been selected in display guages, the languages must first be added Settings, the button in the Characters, letters and words can be entered under Settings. keyboard can be used to in the center display by handwriting them on switch between the different the touchscreen. Adding or deleting languages in languages. Tap the button on the center Settings To toggle between keyboard languages from display's keyboard to switch The keyboard is automatically set to the same the list: from the keyboard to hand- language as the system language. The key- writing mode. board language can be manually changed 1. Press and hold the button. without affecting the system language. > A list will appear. 1. Tap Settings in Top view. 2. Select the desired language. If more than 2. Tap System System Languages and four languages have been selected under Settings, you can scroll through the list Units Keyboard Layouts. shown on the keyboard. 3. Select one or more languages in the list. > The keyboard and word suggestions > It is now possible to toggle between will be adapted to the selected lan- the selected languages using the key- guage. board. To change keyboard language without display- If no language has been selected under ing the list: Settings, the keyboard will remain in the – Tap the button. same language as the vehicle's system language. > The keyboard layout will change to the next language in the list without dis- Space for entering characters/letters/ playing the list. words/parts of words. Related information Text field displaying suggested characters • Changing system language (p. 133) or words14 as they are written on the screen (1). • Using the center display keyboard (p. 127)

14 Certain system languages only.

130 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

Suggestions for characters/letters/words/ Handwriting characters/letters/words Erasing/changing handwritten characters/ parts of words. You can scroll through the 1. Write a character, a letter, a word or parts letters list. of a word in the field for handwritten let- Space bar. Blank spaces can be created ters (1). Write the word or part of the word by writing a dash (‒) in the field for hand- vertically or horizontally. written letters (1). See "Writing blank > A number of suggestions for charac- spaces in free-text fields" below. ters, letters or words will be displayed Delete. Tap once to erase one character/ (3). The most likely will be shown at the letter at a time. Wait a moment before top of the list. tapping again to erase the next character, letter etc. CAUTION Erase text in the text field (2) by swiping over the Return to the standard keyboard layout. Do not use sharp objects on the screen as handwriting field (1). this could cause scratches. Switch off/on screen tap sounds. – Characters/letters can be erased or changed in several ways: Hide the keyboard. In cases where this is 2. The character/letter/word will be entered not possible, the button will not be dis- automatically after a short pause if no • Tap the desired letter or word in the list played. other action is taken. (3). Change language for text input. > The character/letter/word at the top of • Tap the delete button (5) to erase the the list will be used. Tap one of the letter and start again. other characters/letters/words in the • Swipe horizontally from right to left15 list to use it instead. over the handwriting field (1). Erase several letters at once by swiping over the area several times. • Tap the X box in the text field (2) to erase all written text.

15 For Arabic keyboards, swipe in the other direction. Swiping from right to left will create a blank space. }}

131 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

|| New lines in free-text fields in handwriting Changing the appearance of the Turning off and adjusting the mode center display volume of the center display The appearance of the center display can be system sounds changed by selecting a different theme. The volume of the center display system 1. Tap Settings in the Top view. sounds can be adjusted or turned off completely. 2. Tap My Car Displays Display 1. Tap Settings in the Top view in the center Themes. display. 3. Select a theme, e.g. Minimalistic or 2. Tap Sound System Volumes. Chrome Rings. 3. Pull the control under Touch Sounds to In addition to these themes, you can also Create a new line by drawing above the characters in adjust the volume or turn off screen tap choose between Normal and Bright. In the handwriting field as shown in the illustration16. sounds. Pull the control to the desired Normal, the background of the screen is dark sound level. Writing blank spaces in free-text fields and the text is light. This option is the default setting for all themes. If the bright version is Related information selected, the background will be light and the • Center display overview (p. 111) text will be dark. This option can, for example, • make the screen easier to see in bright day- Changing settings in the center display's light conditions. Top view (p. 133) • Sound settings (p. 450) These alternatives are always available for selection and are not affected by the ambient lighting. Make a blank space by drawing a line from left to Related information 17 right . • Changing settings in the center display's Related information Top view (p. 133) • Using the center display keyboard (p. 127) • Activating and deactivating the center display (p. 116) • Cleaning the center display (p. 610)

16 For Arabic keyboards, draw the same character, but in mirror image. 17 For Arabic keyboards, draw the line from right to left.

132 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

Changing system units of Changing system language Changing settings in the center measurement Language settings are adjusted in the display's Top view Unit settings are adjusted in the Settings Settings menu in the center display. You can change settings and information for menu in the center display. NOTE many of the vehicle's functions via the center 1. Tap Settings in the Top view in the center display. display. Changing languages in the center display 1. Open Top view by tapping the tab at the could mean that certain owner's informa- top of the screen or by dragging/swiping 2. Proceed to System System tion will not comply with national or local from the top of the screen downward. Languages and Units Units of laws and regulations. Do not change to a 2. Tap Settings to open the Settings menu. Measurement. language you do not speak well, as it can be difficult to find your way back through 3. Choose a measurement standard: the menu. • Metric - kilometers, liters and degrees Celsius. 1. Tap Settings in the Top view in the center • Imperial - miles, gallons and degrees display. Celsius. • 2. Proceed to System System US - miles, gallons and degrees Fah- Languages and Units. renheit. 3. Select System Language. A voice control > The units in the instrument panel, cen- symbol indicates that the language can be ter display and head-up display are used for voice commands. changed. > Languages in the instrument panel, Related information center display and head-up display are Top view with Settings button. • Center display overview (p. 111) changed. 3. Tap one of the categories and sub-catego- • ries to navigate to the desired setting. Changing settings in the center display's Related information Top view (p. 133) • Center display overview (p. 111) 4. Change the setting(s). Different types of • Changing system language (p. 133) settings are changed in different ways. • Changing settings in the center display's > Changes are saved immediately. Top view (p. 133) • Changing system units of measurement (p. 133)

}}

133 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

|| Opening contextual setting in the 2. Tap Navigation Settings. center display > The navigation settings page will open. Most of the settings for the vehicle's basic 3. Change the desired settings and confirm. apps can be changed directly in Top view in the center display via contextual settings. Tap Close or press the Home button under the center display to close Settings view. Most of the vehicle's basic apps have this contextual setting option, but not all. Third-party apps Third-party apps are apps that are not factory- installed in the vehicle's system, but can be A sub-category in the Settings menu with various downloaded, e.g. Volvo ID. Settings for these possible settings; has a multi-selection button and apps are changed in the apps themselves, not radio buttons. in Top view. Related information • Center display overview (p. 111) Related information Top view with button for contextual settings. • Changing settings in the center display's • Resetting center display settings (p. 135) Top view (p. 133) Contextual setting is a shortcut for accessing • Table of settings in the center display • Center display overview (p. 111) (p. 136) specific settings related to the active function displayed on the screen. Apps that are factory- • Resetting center display settings (p. 135) installed in your vehicle, e.g. FM radio and • Download apps (p. 453) USB, are part of Sensus and are used to control the vehicle's integrated functions. The settings for these apps can be changed directly via contextual setting in Top view. When contextual setting is available: 1. Pull down Top view when an app is in expanded form, e.g. Navigation.

134 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

Resetting user data when the Resetting center display settings 4. Tap OK to confirm the reset. vehicle changes owners All settings made in the center display's Set- For Reset Personal Settings, confirm If the vehicle changes owners, all user data tings menu can be reset to default values. the reset by tapping Reset for the active and system settings should be reset to fac- profile or Reset for all profiles. tory defaults. Two types of reset > The selected settings will be reset. Vehicle settings can be reset at different lev- There are two ways to reset the settings in the els. Reset all user data and system settings to Settings menu: Related information their original factory defaults when the vehicle • Factory Reset- erases all data and files • Center display overview (p. 111) changes owner. It is also important to change and resets all settings to factory default. • Changing settings in the center display's the owner of the Volvo On Call service. • Reset Personal Settings- erases per- Top view (p. 133) Related information sonal data and resets personalized set- • Table of settings in the center display • Resetting center display settings (p. 135) tings to factory default. (p. 136) • Resetting driver profile settings (p. 140) Resetting settings Follow these instructions to reset the settings.

NOTE Factory Reset is only possible when the vehicle is stationary.

1. Tap Settings in the Top view in the center display. 2. Proceed to System Factory Reset. 3. Select the type of reset you would like to do. > A pop-up window will appear.

135 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

Table of settings in the center Sub-categories Sub-categories display ® The center display's Settings menu has a Locking Gracenote number of main categories and sub-catego- Parking Brake and Suspension Video ries that contain settings and information for many of the vehicle's features and functions. Wipers Communication There are seven main categories: My Car, Sound, Navigation, Media, Sound Sub-categories Communication, Climate and System. Sub-categories Phone Each category, in turn, contains a number of Tone Text Messages sub-categories and possible settings. The table below shows the first level of sub-cate- Balance Android Auto* gories. The possible settings for a function or an area are described in more detail in their System Volumes Apple CarPlay* respective sections of the Owner's Manual. Navigation Bluetooth Devices Some settings are personal, which means that they can be saved to a Driver Profiles. Others Sub-categories Wi-Fi are global, which means that they are not Map Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot linked to a driver profile. Route and Guidance Vehicle Modem Internet My Car Volvo On Call Sub-categories Traffic Volvo Service Networks Displays Media IntelliSafe Sub-categories Climate The Climate main category does not have any AM/FM Radio Drive Preferences/Individual Drive sub-categories. * Mode SiriusXM Lights and Lighting SiriusXM Travel Link Mirrors and Convenience

136 * Option/accessory. DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

System Driver profiles Keyboard layout is an example of a global set- Sub-categories Many of the vehicle's settings can be cus- ting. If driver profile X is used to add additional tomized to the driver's personal preferences keyboard languages, these languages will also Driver Profile and saved in one or more driver profiles. be available for driver profile Y. The settings These personal settings are automatically for keyboard layout are not saved to a specific Date and Time saved in the active driver profile. Each key can driver profile - the settings are global. System Languages and Units be linked to one driver profile. When the linked Personal settings key is used, the vehicle is customized to the If driver profile X has been used to e.g., set the Privacy and Data specific settings of that driver profile. brightness for the center display, driver profile Keyboard Layouts Y will not be affected by this setting. It will Which settings are saved in driver only be saved to driver profile X because Voice Control* profiles? brightness setting is a personal setting. Many of the settings made in the vehicle will Factory Reset be automatically stored in the active driver Related information • System Information profile if the profile is not protected. The vehi- Selecting a driver profile (p. 138) cle has settings that can be made either per- • Changing a driver profile's name (p. 138) Related information sonal or global. The personal settings are • saved in driver profiles. Linking a remote key to a driver profile • Center display overview (p. 111) (p. 139) Settings that can be saved in a driver profile • Changing settings in the center display's • Protecting a driver profile (p. 139) Top view (p. 133) include, among other things, screens, mirrors, front seats, navigation*, audio and media sys- • Resetting driver profile settings (p. 140) • Resetting center display settings (p. 135) tem, language and voice control. • Table of settings in the center display Some settings are global settings. These set- (p. 136) tings can be changed but are not saved to a specific driver profile. Changes to global settings affect all profiles. Global settings Global settings and parameters do not change when driver profiles are changed. They remain the same regardless of which driver profile is currently active.

* Option/accessory. 137 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

Selecting a driver profile 3. Select desired driver profile. Changing a driver profile's name When the center display starts up, the 4. Tap Confirm. It is possible to change the names of the dif- selected driver profile will be shown at the ferent driver profiles used in the vehicle. > The driver profile has now been top of the screen. The most recently used 1. Tap Settings in the Top view in the center selected and the system will load the driver profile will be active the next time the settings stored in that profile. display. vehicle is unlocked. A different driver profile can be selected once the vehicle has been Option 3: 2. Tap System Driver Profiles. unlocked. However, if the remote key has 1. Pull down Top view in the center display. 3. Select Edit Profile. been linked to a driver profile, this profile will > A menu will open in which the driver 2. Tap Settings in the Top view in the center be used instead. profile can be changed. There are two options for switching between display. 4. Tap the Profile Name box. driver profiles. 3. Tap System Driver Profiles. > A keyboard will be displayed and can Option 1: > A list will appear, showing driver pro- be used to change the name. Tap files that can be selected. 1. Tap the name of the driver profile shown to close the keyboard. at the top of the center display when the 4. Select desired driver profile. display starts up. 5. Save the name change by pressing Back > The driver profile has now been or Close. > A list will appear, showing driver pro- selected and the system will load the files that can be selected. settings stored in that profile. > The name has now been changed. 2. Select desired driver profile. Related information NOTE 3. Tap Confirm. • Driver profiles (p. 137) Profile names may not begin with a space. > The driver profile has now been • Navigating in the center display's views If a space is entered first, the profile name selected and the system will load the (p. 116) will not be saved. settings stored in that profile. • Changing a driver profile's name (p. 138) Related information Option 2: • Linking a remote key to a driver profile • Selecting a driver profile (p. 138) 1. Pull down Top view in the center display. (p. 139) • Using the center display keyboard (p. 127) 2. Tap Profile. > The same list as in option 1 will be displayed.

138 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

Protecting a driver profile 5. Confirm your selection to protect the pro- Linking a remote key to a driver It may not always be desirable to store set- file by tapping Back/Close. profile tings made in the vehicle to the active driver > When the profile is protected, settings A remote key can be linked to a driver profile. profile. In these instances, the driver profile made in the vehicle will not be auto- This driver profile and all of its settings will can be protected. matically stored to the profile. The then automatically be selected every time the NOTE changes must instead be saved man- vehicle is used with that particular remote ually under Settings System key. Protecting a driver profile is only possible The first time the remote key is used, it is not when the vehicle is stationary. Driver Profiles Edit Profile by tapping Save current settings to the linked to any specific driver profile. The Guest profile. If the profile is not protected, profile is automatically activated when the To protect a driver profile: the settings will be automatically stored ignition is switched on. 1. Tap Settings in the Top view in the center to the profile. A driver profile can also be selected manually display. without linking it to any key. When the vehicle Related information is unlocked, the last active driver profile will be 2. Tap System Driver Profiles. • Driver profiles (p. 137) activated. If the key has ever been linked to a 3. Select Edit Profile. driver profile, it is not necessary to manually > A menu will open in which the driver select a driver profile when using that particu- profile can be changed. lar key. 4. Tap Protect Profile to protect the profile. Linking a remote key to a specific driver profile

NOTE A remote key can only be connected to a driver profile when the vehicle is stationary.

First select the profile you would like to link to the key (if that profile is not already active).

}}

139 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

|| The active profile can then be linked to the 5. Select Connect key to link the profile with Resetting driver profile settings key. the key. A driver profile can only be linked Settings that have been saved for one or to the key currently being used in the vehi- 1. Tap Settings in the Top view in the center more driver profiles can be reset when the cle. If there are any other keys in the vehi- display. vehicle is stationary. cle, More than one key is found, put the NOTE 2. Tap System Driver Profiles. key you want to connect on backup reader will be displayed. Factory Reset is only possible when the 3. Mark the desired profile. The display will vehicle is stationary. return to Home view. The Guest profile cannot be linked to a remote key. 1. Tap Settings in the Top view. 4. Pull down Top view again and tap Settings System Driver Profiles 2. Tap System Factory Reset Reset Edit Profile. Personal Settings. 3. Select option Reset for the active profile, Reset for all profiles or Cancel. Related information Location of the backup reader in the tunnel console. • > When Profile connected to key is dis- Driver profiles (p. 137) played, the key and driver profile have • Resetting center display settings (p. 135) been linked. 6. Tap OK. > The key used is now linked to the driver profile and will remain so as long as the Connect key box is not deselected. Related information • Driver profiles (p. 137) • Changing a driver profile's name (p. 138) • Remote key (p. 236)

140 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

Messages in the center display ority than messages shown in the status bar Handling messages in the center The center display shows messages in certain and require acknowledgment/action before display circumstances to inform or assist the driver. they disappear. Messages in the center display are handled in Related information the center display's views. • Handling messages in the center display (p. 141) • Handling messages saved from the center display (p. 142) • Messages in the instrument panel (p. 107)

Example of message in the center display's Top view. Messages with lower priority for the driver are Example of message in the center display's Top view. shown in the center display. Some messages in the center display have a Most of the messages are shown in the center button (or several buttons in a pop-up mes- display's status bar. The message will disap- sage) to e.g. activate/deactivate a function pear from the status bar after a short period of related to the message. time or after the required action has been taken. Messages that need to be saved are stored in Top view in the center display. The message may be shown along with graphics, symbols or a button to e.g. activate/ deactivate a function connected to the message. Pop-up messages Messages are sometimes shown as pop-up windows. Pop-up messages have a higher pri- }}

141 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

|| Handling new messages Handling messages saved from the 2. Tap a message to expand/minimize it. For messages with buttons: center display > More information about the message – Tap the button to perform the action or let Messages saved from the instrument panel will appear in the list and the image to the message automatically time-out after and center displays are handled in the center the left of the app will display informa- a short period. display. tion about the message in graphic form. > The message will disappear from the Handling saved messages status bar. Some messages have a button to e.g. activate/deactivate a function related to the mes- For messages without buttons: sage. – Close the message by tapping it or let the – Tap the button to perform the action. message automatically time-out after a short period. Saved messages in Top view are automatically > The message will disappear from the deleted when the ignition is switched off. status bar. Related information Messages that need to be saved are stored in • Messages in the center display (p. 141) Top view in the center display. • Handling messages in the center display Examples of saved messages and possible selections (p. 141) Related information in Top view. • Messages in the center display (p. 141) • Messages in the instrument panel (p. 107) Messages that have been shown in the center • Handling messages saved from the center display and that need to be saved are stored in display (p. 142) the center display's Top view. • Messages in the instrument panel (p. 107) Reading saved messages 1. Open Top view in the center display. > A list of saved messages will be displayed. Messages with an arrow to the right can be expanded.

142 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

* Head-up display NOTE The head-up display is a complement to the The driver's ability to see information in the instrument panel and projects information head-up display may be impeded by from the instrument panel onto the windshield. The projected images can only be • the use of polarizing sunglasses seen from the driver's seat. • a driving posture in which the driver is not centered in the seat • objects on the display unit's glass cover • unfavorable lighting conditions.

Examples of what might be shown on the display. CAUTION Speed The information is projected from a display unit located in the dashboard. To help pre- Cruise control vent damage to the display unit's glass Navigation cover, do not place any objects on the glass and prevent objects from falling onto Road signs The head-up display projects warnings and it. information related to speed, cruise control A number of symbols may be projected tem- functions, navigation, etc. onto the windshield porarily onto the head-up display, including: in the driver's field of vision. Traffic information If the warning symbol appears, read and incoming phone calls can also be shown the warning message in the instru- on the head-up display. ment panel.

If the information symbol appears, read the warning message in the instrument panel.

}}

* Option/accessory. 143 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

|| The snowflake symbol will illuminate Related information Activating and deactivating the if there is a risk of slippery condi- • Activating and deactivating the head-up head-up display* tions. display* (p. 144) The head-up display can be activated and • Cleaning the head-up display* (p. 611) deactivated when the vehicle has been started. NOTE • Replacing a windshield with head-up dis- Press the Head-up Display play* (p. 577) People with certain types of vision prob- button in the center display's lems may experience headaches or eye Function view. An indicator strain when using the head-up display. light in the button will illuminate when the function is City Safety in head-up-display activated. If a collision warning is given, the information in the head-up display will be replaced by a Related information • * City Safety warning signal. This graphic will Head-up display settings (p. 145) illuminate even if the head-up display is turned • Head-up display* (p. 143) off.

The warning symbol for City Safety will flash to get the driver's attention if there is a risk of collision.

144 * Option/accessory. DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

Head-up display settings* Adjusting brightness and height Raising position Adjusting settings for the head-up display. position Lowering position Settings can be adjusted when the vehicle is started and a projected image is displayed on Confirm the windshield. The brightness of the graphic is automatically Selecting display options adapted to the light conditions in its back- Select the functions to be shown in the head- ground. Brightness is also affected by adjust- up display. ments to the brightness of the other displays 1. Press the Head-up Display Adjustments in the vehicle. 1. Tap Settings in the center display's Top button in the center display's Function view. view. The height position can be stored in the front power seat's* memory function using the key- 2. Tap My Car Displays Head-Up 2. Adjust the brightness of the projected pad in the driver's door. Display Options. image and the height position in the driv- 3. Select one or more functions: er's field of vision using the right-side steering wheel lever. • Show Navigation • Show Road Sign Information • Show Driver Support • Show Phone This setting is stored as a personal setting in the driver profile.

Decreasing brightness

Increasing brightness

}}

* Option/accessory. 145 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

|| Calibrating the horizontal position Related information Voice Control If the windshield or display unit has been • Head-up display* (p. 143) Voice control18 allows you to control func- replaced, the head-up display's horizontal • Activating and deactivating the head-up tions in the vehicle, e.g. the climate control position may need to be calibrated. Calibration display* (p. 144) system, radio or a Bluetooth-connected means that the projected image is rotated • Driver profiles (p. 137) phone, using spoken commands. In vehicles clockwise or counterclockwise. equipped with Sensus Navigation*, the navi- • Storing positions for seats, mirrors and 1. Tap Settings in the center display's Top gation system can also be controlled using head-up display* (p. 186) view. voice commands. 2. Select My Car Displays Head-Up What is voice control? Display Options Head-Up Display Voice control is a driver support function that Calibration. can simplify the use of various commands in your vehicle. It works in general like a regular 3. Calibrate the horizontal position of the application in which you input information in a image using the right-side steering wheel set order in order to perform a task, but keypad. instead of typing on a keypad, you use voice commands. It can therefore be a good idea to familiarize yourself with how, and in what order, a voice command should be spoken to get the desired result. You can control certain infotainment and climate control functions through the voice control system by using voice commands. The system can respond verbally and by displaying information in the instrument panel.

WARNING The driver is always responsible for ensur- Rotate counterclockwise ing that the vehicle is operated in a safe manner and that all applicable traffic regu- Rotate clockwise lations are followed. Confirm

146 * Option/accessory. DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

Use voice recognition • Avoid background noises in the passenger compartment by keeping doors, windows Starting voice control19 and the panoramic roof* closed. Voice commands are given Generally, the system will listen for a basic through a "dialog" with the command that is then followed by more voice control system. Press detailed commands specifying what you want the button for voice control the system to do. on the right-side steering wheel keypad to activate the To change the audio volume of the system, system and initiate a voice turn the volume knob while the voice is speak- command dialog. When you press the button, ing. It is possible to use other buttons while a beep will sound and the voice control sym- voice commands are being given. However, Voice control microphone bol will appear in the instrument panel. because other audio is silenced during dialog with the system, it is not possible to perform System updates This shows that the system has begun listen- any functions connected to audio using the The voice control system is continuously ing and you can now begin speaking com- buttons. improved. It is recommended to always have mands. As soon as you start speaking, the the latest version installed. system will be trained to recognize and under- Canceling voice control stand your voice. This takes several seconds Download updates at support.volvocars.com. To cancel voice control, do one of the follow- and is done automatically, which means that ing: Related information you don't need to manually initiate any voice • Briefly press and say "Cancel". • Use voice recognition (p. 147) training. • Press and hold the steering wheel key- • Voice control for cellular phones (p. 149) These may include: • • pad's voice command button until Voice control for radio and media (p. 149) Wait until after the tone, and then speak in two audible signals are given. This cancels • Climate control system voice commands your normal voice at a normal speed. voice control even when the system is (p. 202) • Do not speak while the system is respond- speaking. • Voice control settings (p. 150) ing (the system is unable to process com- Voice control will also be canceled if you do mands during this time). not respond during a dialog. The system will first ask three times for a response and if the

18 Certain markets only. 19 Certain markets only. }}

* Option/accessory. 147 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

|| response is still not given, voice control will be Commands for specific functions, such as With repeat mode on, the system will repeat automatically canceled. phone and audio, are described in the sections what you have said. related to that function. To speed up communication and skip prompts To change the speech rate or activate/deacti- from the system, press the voice control but- Numbers vate repeat mode: ton on the steering wheel keypad. This Number commands can be given in different 1. Tap Settings in the Top view. will interrupt the system's response and you ways depending on the function to be con- can say the next command. trolled: 2. Tap System Voice Control and select • settings. Voice command examples Phone numbers and zip codes should be given by stating each number individually, • Repeat Voice Command 1. Tap . e.g. "zero, three, one, two, two, four, four, • Speech Rate 2. Say "Call [First name] [Last name] three" (03122443). [number category]", e.g. "Call Robyn • Addresses can be given by stating each Related information Smith cellular". number individually or in a group, e.g. • Voice Control (p. 146) > The system will call the selected con- "two, two" or "twenty-two" (22). For Eng- • Voice control for cellular phones (p. 149) lish and Dutch language settings, groups tact from the phone book. If the contact • Voice control for radio and media (p. 149) has several phone numbers (e.g. home, of numbers can also be said in sequence, cell, work), the right category must also e.g. "twenty-two, twenty-two" (22 22). • Climate control system voice commands be given. For English, double or triple digits can also (p. 202) be used, e.g. "double zero" (00). Numbers • Voice control settings (p. 150) Commands/phrases in the range 0-2300 can be used. The following commands can usually be used • Frequencies can be given as "ninety-eight in any situation: point eight" (98.8), "one hundred four • "Repeat" - repeats the most recent voice point two" or "hundred and four point command in the current dialog. two" (104.2). • "Cancel" - cancels the dialog.20 Speech rate and repeat mode • "Help" - initiates a help dialog. The sys- The speed at which the system speaks can be tem responds with commands that can be adjusted. used in the current situation, an instruc- tion or an example.

20 Note that this only cancels the dialog when the system is not speaking. To do this, press and hold until you hear two beeps.

148 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

Voice control for cellular phones21 Related information Voice control for radio and media22 Call a contact in the phone book, have a text • Voice Control (p. 146) Voice commands for the radio and media message read aloud or dictate short mes- • Use voice recognition (p. 147) players are shown below. sages using voice commands to a Bluetooth- • Voice control for radio and media (p. 149) Tap and say one of the following com- connected phone. mands: • Climate control system voice commands To access a contact in the phone book, the • voice command must contain the contact (p. 202) "Media" - initiates a dialog for media and information entered in the phone book. If a • Voice control settings (p. 150) radio and displays examples of commands. contact, e.g. Robyn Smith, has several phone • Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 496) numbers listed in the phone book, a number • "Play [artist]" - plays music by the category such as home or cellular can also be selected artist. specified, i.e. "Call Robyn Smith cellular". • "Play [song title]" - plays the selected Tap and say one of the following com- song. mands: • "Play [song title] from [album]" - plays the selected song from the selected • "Call [contact]" - call the selected con- album. tact from the phone book. • "Play [radio station]" - starts the • "Call [phone number]" - call a phone selected radio station. number. • "Tune to [frequency]" - tunes to the • "Recent calls" - display the list of recent selected radio frequency in the currently calls. active waveband. If no radio source is • "Read message" - read a text message active, the FM band will be started as aloud. If there are several messages, default. select the message to read aloud. • "Tune to [frequency] [waveband]" - • "Message to [contact]" – the user is tunes to the selected radio frequency on prompted to dictate a short message. The the selected waveband. message will then be read aloud and the • "Radio" - starts FM radio. user can choose to send or re-dictate the message. The vehicle must be connected • "Radio FM" - starts FM radio. to the Internet to access this function.

21 Certain markets only. }}

* Option/accessory. 149 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

|| • "Radio AM" - starts AM radio. Voice control settings23 Related information • "SiriusXM" - starts SiriusXM radio* Settings for the voice control system are • Voice Control (p. 146) • "CD" - starts playback from CD*. made here. • Use voice recognition (p. 147) • "USB" - starts playback from USB. Settings System Voice Control • Voice control for cellular phones (p. 149) • • "iPod" - starts playback from iPod. Climate control system voice commands Settings can be personalized in the following (p. 202) • "Bluetooth" - starts playback from a areas: • Voice control for radio and media (p. 149) Bluetooth-connected media source. • • Repeat Voice Command • Sound settings (p. 450) "Similar music" - plays music from a • USB-connected device with music similar Gender • Changing system language (p. 133) to that currently playing. • Speech Rate Related information Sound settings • Voice Control (p. 146) Select sound settings under: • Use voice recognition (p. 147) Settings Sound System Volumes • Voice control for cellular phones (p. 149) Voice Control • Climate control system voice commands (p. 202) Language settings • Voice control settings (p. 150) The voice control system is not available for all languages. The languages available for voice commands are indicated by the icon in the list of languages. Changing the language here will also change the language in the menus, messages and help texts.

Settings System System Languages and Units System Language

22 Certain markets only. 23 Certain markets only.

150 * Option/accessory. LIGHTING LIGHTING

Lighting control and panel Position Meaning Position Meaning The lighting panel and controls can be used to adjust both exterior and interior lighting. US: Daytime running lights and Daytime running lights and The lighting ring on the left-side steering parking lights are off. parking lights in daylight condi- A wheel lever can be used to activate and Canada: Daytime running lights tions. adjust the exterior lighting. The brightness of and parking lights are on. Low beams and parking lights in the interior lighting can be adjusted using the High beam flash can be used. weak daylight or dark conditions thumb wheel on the dashboard. or when the front fog lights* Parking lights when the vehicle Exterior lighting and/or rear fog light are acti- is parked. vated. US: Daytime running lights are Active high beam can be acti- off. vated. Canada: Daytime running lights High beams can be activated are on. when low beams are on. High beam flash can be used. High beam flash can be used. Low beams and parking lights. Active high beams on/off. High beams can be activated. A US models only: Daytime running lights and parking lights High beam flash can be used. can be deactivated in the center display.

Lighting ring position. NOTE When the vehicle's ignition is in mode II, the Volvo recommends use of Daytime lighting ring positions have the following func- Running Lights in the US. Its use is man- tions: datory in Canada.

Volvo recommends using position when the vehicle is in motion.

152 * Option/accessory. LIGHTING

• WARNING Using turn signals (p. 158) Adjusting light functions via the • center display The vehicle lighting system cannot in all sit- Using high beam (p. 156) uations determine when the daylight is too • Low beams (p. 155) A number of light functions can be adjusted weak or not strong enough, e.g. when and activated via the center display. These • Front fog lights/corner illumination* there is fog or rain. include active high beams, home safe lighting (p. 159) and approach lighting. The driver is always responsible for driving • the vehicle with lighting that is safe for the Rear fog light (p. 160) 1. Tap Settings in the center display's Top traffic conditions and as specified by appli- • Active Bending Lights* (p. 158) view. cable traffic regulations. • Brake lights (p. 161) 2. Tap My Car Lights and Lighting. • Emergency brake lights (p. 161) Thumbwheel in instrument panel 3. Select Exterior Lights or Interior • Hazard warning flashers (p. 161) Lighting and then select the function that you would like to adjust. Related information • Lighting control and panel (p. 152) • Active high beam (p. 157) • Using home safe lighting (p. 162) • Welcome Light (p. 162) • Using turn signals (p. 158) • Changing settings in the center display's Top view (p. 133) Thumb wheel (to the left) for adjusting interior bright- • Function view in the center display ness. (p. 123) Related information • Adjusting light functions via the center display (p. 153) • Interior Lighting (p. 162) • Parking lights (p. 154)

* Option/accessory. 153 LIGHTING

Parking lights conditions, the parking lights and low beams Daytime running lights The parking lights can be used to help other will be illuminated. The vehicle has sensors that detect ambient road users see the vehicle if it is stopped or In dark conditions, the rear parking lights also lighting conditions. With the lighting ring in parked. Use the lighting ring on the steering illuminate when the tailgate is opened to alert the position, the daytime running lights wheel lever to turn on the parking lights. following traffic. This happens regardless of will always be activated when the ignition is what position the lighting ring or ignition is in. in mode II. In weak daylight or dark conditions, the headlights automatically switch to Related information low beams. • Lighting control and panel (p. 152) • Ignition modes (p. 385)

Lighting ring in the parking light position. Turn the lighting ring to the position to turn on the parking lights (the license plate lighting will also illuminate). Lighting ring in AUTO position. With the steering wheel lever's lighting ring in Canadian models: If the ignition is in the II position, the daytime running lights will illumi- the position, the daytime running lights nate instead of the front parking lights. With (DRL1) will illuminate when the vehicle is the lighting ring in this position, the parking driven in daylight conditions. The headlights lights will remain on regardless of what posi- will switch automatically from daytime run- tion the ignition is in. ning lights to low beams in weak daylight or dark conditions. The headlights will also US models: When mode is selected, switch to low beams if the front fog lights* the daytime running lights can be deactivated and/or rear fog light are activated. in the center display. The parking lights will also be deactivated. In weak daylight or dark

154 * Option/accessory. LIGHTING

US models: When mode is selected, Related information Low beams the daytime running lights can be deactivated • Lighting control and panel (p. 152) When driving with the lighting ring in the in the center display. The parking lights will • Ignition modes (p. 385) position, low beam will be automati- also be deactivated. In weak daylight or dark • Low beams (p. 155) cally activated in weak daylight or dark condi- conditions, the parking lights and low beams tions, when the ignition is in the II position. will be illuminated. US models: With the lighting ring in the or position, the daytime running lights will be off. Canadian models: With the lighting ring in the or position, the daytime running lights will be on.

NOTE Volvo recommends use of Daytime Running Lights in the US. Its use is man- Lighting ring in AUTO position. datory in Canada. With the lighting ring in the position, the low beams will be automatically activated if: WARNING • the front fog lights* are activated The system is an energy saving aid – it • cannot in all situations determine when the the rear fog light is activated daylight is too weak or not strong enough, • the rear and front fog lights are activated. e.g. when there is fog or rain. With the lighting ring in the position, The driver is always responsible for driving low beams will always be on when the ignition the vehicle with lighting that is safe for the traffic conditions and as specified by appli- is in the II position. cable traffic regulations.

1 Daytime Running Lights }}

* Option/accessory. 155 LIGHTING

|| Tunnel detection Using high beam . Activate high beams by moving the The vehicle will detect if it enters a tunnel and High beam is operated via the left-hand steering wheel lever forward. shift from daytime running lights to low steering wheel lever. High beam is the vehi- Deactivate by moving the steering wheel beams. cle's strongest lighting and should be used lever backward. Note that the left-hand steering wheel lever when driving in dark conditions, provided it does not blind other road users, to improve must be in position for tunnel detection When the high beams are activated, the visibility. to work. symbol will be illuminated in the instrument panel. Related information • Lighting control and panel (p. 152) Related information • Lighting control and panel (p. 152) • Ignition modes (p. 385) • Active high beam (p. 157) • Daytime running lights (p. 154)

Steering wheel lever with lighting ring. High beam flash Move the steering wheel lever slightly backward to the high beam flash mode. The high beams will illuminate until the lever is released. High beams The high beams can be activated when the lighting ring is in mode 2 or

2 When the low beams are on.

156 LIGHTING

Active high beam Activating active high beams rain. When active high beams become availa- Active high beams is a function that uses Active high beams can be activated and deac- ble again, or the windshield sensors are no camera sensors in the upper edge of the tivated by turning the lighting ring on the left- longer blocked, the message will disappear windshield to detect the headlights of side steering wheel lever to position . and the symbol will be displayed. approaching vehicles or the taillights of the The lighting ring will then return to . vehicle directly ahead. When either of these When active high beams are activated, a white WARNING is detected, the vehicle's headlights will auto- symbol will be displayed in the instru- Automatic high beam is an aid in using the matically switch from high beams to low ment panel. When high beams are on, the best possible light based on prevailing con- beams. symbol will be blue. ditions. If active high beams are deactivated when the The driver is always responsible for man- high beams are on, the headlights will auto- ually switching between high and low beam when traffic situations or weather matically switch to low beams. conditions require this. Limitations for active high beams The camera sensor on which the function is Related information based has limitations. • Lighting control and panel (p. 152) If this symbol and the message • Using high beam (p. 156) Active High Beam Temporarily • Camera/radar sensor limitations (p. 311) unavailable is displayed in the instrument panel, switching Active high beams is indicated by the symbol. between high and low beams must be done manually. The symbol will go out when This function can be used in dark conditions the message is displayed. when the vehicle's speed is approx. 20 km/h (approx. 12 mph) or higher. The function can The same applies if this symbol also detect street lighting. When the camera along with the message sensor no longer detects an approaching vehi- Windscreen sensor Sensor cle or a vehicle ahead, the headlights will blocked, see Owner's manual is return to high beams after a second or two. displayed. Active high beams may be temporarily unavailable in certain situations, e.g. heavy fog or

157 LIGHTING

* Using turn signals NOTE Active Bending Lights The vehicle's turn signals are controlled using Active Bending Lights (ABL) are designed to • This automatic flashing sequence can the left-side steering wheel lever. The turn help provide extra illumination in curves and be interrupted by immediately moving signals flash three times or continuously, intersections. Depending on equipment level, the lever in the opposite direction. depending on how far up or down the lever is vehicles with LED3 headlights* may be equip- moved. • If the turn signal indicator flashes more ped with Active Bending Lights. quickly than normal, refer to the message in the instrument panel.

Continuous flashing sequence Move the lever up or down as far as possible. The lever will stop in its end position and can be moved back manually or automatically by moving the steering wheel. Related information • Hazard warning flashers (p. 161) Turn signals. • Adjusting light functions via the center Headlight pattern with function deactivated (left) and activated (right). Triple flash indicator display (p. 153) Move the steering wheel lever up or down Active Bending Lights follow the movement of to the first position and release. The turn the steering wheel to help provide extra illumi- signals will flash three times. If the func- nation in curves and intersections, helping to tion is deactivated via the center display, improve visibility for the driver. the signals will flash once. The function is automatically activated when the engine is started. If a fault is detected in the system, the symbol will illuminate in the instrument panel and a message will be displayed.

3 LED (Light Emitting Diode)

158 * Option/accessory. LIGHTING

The function is only active in weak daylight or Front fog lights/corner The front fog lights turn off automatically dark conditions and only when the vehicle is illumination* when the ignition is switched off or when the moving and the low beams are on. The fog lights can be activated manually lighting ring is in position . Deactivating/activating the function when driving in fog and are activated automatically when backing up to help augment The function is activated as the default factory NOTE the backup light. setting and can be activated and deactivated Regulations concerning fog light use vary in the center display's Function view: If the vehicle is equipped with corner illumi- from country to country. nation*, the fog lights are activated automati- Tap the Active Bending cally in weak daylight or dark conditions to Lights button. Cornering illumination* illuminate the area diagonally in front of the The front fog lamps can include the cornering vehicle. lights function, which temporarily illuminates the area diagonally in front of the car in the direction the steering wheel is turned on a sharp bend, or in the direction shown by the Related information direction indicators. • Adjusting light functions via the center The function is activated in weak daylight or display (p. 153) dark conditions when the lighting ring is in • * Front fog lights/corner illumination or mode and the vehicle speed is (p. 159) less than about 30 km/h (about 20 mph). Both cornering illumination are also illuminated as a complement to the taillights when reversing. Front fog lights button. The function is activated as the default factory The front fog lights can be turned on when the setting and can be activated and deactivated ignition is in mode II and the lighting ring is in using the center display. position , or . Tap the button to activate or deactivate the Related information • Lighting control and panel (p. 152) function. The symbol in the instrument panel comes on when the front fog lights are • Ignition modes (p. 385) on. • Rear fog light (p. 160) }}

* Option/accessory. 159 LIGHTING

• Active Bending Lights* (p. 158) Rear fog light The rear fog light turns off automatically when: • Adjusting light functions via the center The rear fog light is considerably brighter • the ignition is off or the lighting ring is in display (p. 153) than ordinary taillights and should only be the position. used to help other road users see the vehicle when visibility is reduced by conditions such • the lighting ring is in the position as fog, snow, smoke or dust. and the front fog lights are turned off.

NOTE Regulations concerning rear fog light use vary from country to country.

Related information • Lighting control and panel (p. 152) • Front fog lights/corner illumination* (p. 159) • Ignition modes (p. 385)

Rear fog light button. The rear fog light consists of a light on the rear of the vehicle on the driver's side. The rear fog light can only be used when: • ignition mode II is active and the lighting ring is in position or • the lighting ring is in the position and the front fog lights are on. Press the button to switch on/off. The symbol in the instrument panel illuminates when the rear fog light is on.

160 * Option/accessory. LIGHTING

Brake lights Emergency brake lights Hazard warning flashers The brake lights are automatically illuminated The emergency brake lights are activated to Hazard warning flashers warn other road when braking. warn following vehicles of hard braking. users by all of the vehicle's turn signals being The brake lights are illuminated when the activated at the same time. The function can This function causes an additional taillight on brake pedal is depressed and when the brakes be used to warn about a traffic hazard. each side of the vehicle to illuminate. are automatically applied by a driver support The emergency brake lights are activated in system. the event of hard braking or if the ABS system Related information is activated and the vehicle is traveling at a • Emergency brake lights (p. 161) high speed. • Brake functions (p. 387) After the driver decelerates to a low speed and then releases the brake, the brake lights • Driver support systems (p. 270) resume their normal brightness. Related information • Brake lights (p. 161) • Brakes (p. 387) • Hazard warning flashers (p. 161) Hazard warning flashers button. Press the button to activate the hazard warning flashers.

NOTE Regulations concerning the use of hazard warning flashers may vary from country to country.

Related information • Emergency brake lights (p. 161) • Using turn signals (p. 158)

161 LIGHTING

Using home safe lighting Welcome Light Interior Lighting Some of the exterior lights remain on to illu- Approach lighting is activated when the vehi- The passenger compartment is equipped minate the area around the vehicle. This is cle is unlocked and can be used to provide with several different types of lighting, e.g. called home safe lighting. light as you walk toward the vehicle. general lighting, adjustable ambient lighting To activate home safe lighting: The function is activated when the remote key and reading lights. is used for unlocking. The parking lights, ceil- 1. Switch off the ignition. All lighting in the passenger compartment can ing lights, footwell lights and trunk/cargo be turned on and off manually within 2. Push the left-side steering wheel lever compartment lights are activated in daylight 5 minutes after: toward the dashboard and release. conditions. In weak daylight or dark condi- • the engine has been switched off and the 3. Exit the vehicle and lock the doors. tions, the license plate lighting and outer door handle lighting* will also be activated, with the ignition is in mode 0. > A symbol in the instrument panel illumi- light directed toward the ground. • nates to indicate that the function is the vehicle is unlocked but has not yet activated and exterior lighting switches If no door is opened, the lights will remain illu- been started. on: Parking lights, headlights, license minated for approx. 2 minutes. If a door is Front ceiling lighting plate lighting and outer door handle opened while the function is activated, the lighting*. interior lighting and outer door handle lighting* will remain on for a longer period of time. The length of time home safe lighting remains illuminated can be set in the center display. This function can be activated and deactivated in the center display. Related information • Adjusting light functions via the center Related information display (p. 153) • Adjusting light functions via the center • Welcome Light (p. 162) display (p. 153) • Using home safe lighting (p. 162) • Remote key (p. 236)

The controls in the ceiling console for the front reading lights and courtesy lighting. Reading light left side

Passenger compartment lighting

162 * Option/accessory. LIGHTING

Courtesy lighting auto switch Rear roof lighting* Briefly press the button on the light to turn on Reading lights are located in the rear section or off the reading lights. To adjust the bright- Reading light right side of the vehicle and can also be used as passen- ness, press and hold the button. ger compartment lighting. Reading lights Glove compartment lighting The reading lights on the right and left sides The glove compartment lighting comes on or are switched on and off by briefly pressing the goes off when the glove compartment is buttons in the ceiling console. To adjust the opened or closed. brightness, press and hold the button. * Passenger compartment lighting Vanity mirror lighting Briefly press the button in the ceiling console The vanity mirror lighting comes on or goes off to switch on or off the footwell lighting and when the cover over the mirror is opened or ceiling lighting. closed. Courtesy lighting auto switch Ground lighting* Activate the auto switch by briefly pressing The ground lighting comes on or goes off the AUTO button in the ceiling console. With when a door is opened or closed. Auto activated, the indicator light in the button Reading lights over the rear seat. and the courtesy lighting come on and are Cargo compartment lighting turned off as follows. The cargo compartment lighting comes on or goes off when the cargo compartment is Courtesy lighting is switched on when: opened or closed. • The vehicle is unlocked Ambient Lighting • The vehicle is switched off The ambient lighting comes on when the • A side door is opened. doors are opened and goes out when the vehi- Courtesy lighting is switched off when: cle is locked. Ambient lighting brightness can • be adjusted in the center display and also fine- The vehicle is locked tuned using the thumb wheel in the dash- • The engine is started board. • A side door is closed Mood lighting* * • A side door has been open for approx. In vehicles with panoramic roofs , there are two lamp The vehicle is equipped with LEDs that pro- units, one on each side of the ceiling. 2 minutes. vide faint lighting in various colors. This lighting is on when the engine is running. Mood }}

* Option/accessory. 163 LIGHTING

|| lighting can be adjusted in the center display Adjusting interior lighting Changing the brightness and also fine-tuned using the thumb wheel in Illumination in the vehicle varies depending 1. Tap Settings in the Top view in the center the dashboard. on ignition mode. The interior lighting can be display. adjusted with a thumb wheel in the dash- Lighting in the door storage 2. Tap My Car Lights and Lighting board and certain light functions can also be compartments adjusted via the center display. Interior Lighting Interior Mood Lighting in the door storage compartments The thumb wheel on the Lighting. comes on when the doors are opened and dashboard to the left of the 3. Under Interior Mood Light Intensity, goes out when the vehicle is locked. The steering wheel can be used select Off, Low or High. brightness can be adjusted using the thumb to adjust the brightness of Changing the color of the light wheel in the dashboard. the display lighting, instru- 1. Tap Settings in the Top view in the center Lighting in the tunnel console's front ment lights, ambient lighting * display. cup holder and mood lighting . 2. Tap My Car Lights and Lighting The lighting in front console cup holders Adjust ambient decor lighting switches on when the vehicle is unlocked and 1. Tap Settings in the Top view in the center Interior Lighting Interior Mood off when the vehicle is locked. The brightness display. Lighting. can be adjusted using the thumb wheel in the 3. Choose By Temperature or By Color to dashboard. 2. Tap My Car Lights and Lighting change the color of the light. Interior Lighting. Related information If By Temperature is selected, the light 3. Choose from among the following set- • Adjusting interior lighting (p. 164) will change according to the temperature tings: • Lighting control and panel (p. 152) set for the passenger compartment. • Under Ambient Light Intensity, select • Ignition modes (p. 385) If By Color is selected, the subcategory Off, Low or High. • Passenger compartment interior (p. 548) Theme Colors can be used to make fur- • Under Ambient Light Level, select ther adjustments. Reduced or Full. Adjusting mood lighting* Related information • Interior Lighting (p. 162) The vehicle is equipped with several LEDs that provide faint lighting in various colors. This • Adjusting light functions via the center lighting is on when the engine is running. display (p. 153) • Ignition modes (p. 385)

164 * Option/accessory. WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS

Windows, glass and mirrors • Activating and deactivating the heated Pinch protection for windows and The vehicle is equipped with several different rear window and door mirrors (p. 219) sun curtains types of windows, glass and mirrors. Some of All power windows and sun curtains* have a the windows in the car are laminated. pinch protection function that is triggered if The windshield has laminated glass. Lamina- anything blocks them while they are opening ted glass is also available as on option for or closing. some other glass surfaces. Laminated glass is If pinch protection is activated, movement will reinforced, which provides better protection stop and then retract automatically to approx. against break-ins and improved soundproofing 50 mm (2 inches) from the point at which it in the passenger compartment. was blocked (or to full ventilation position). The panoramic roof* also has laminated glass. It is still possible to override pinch protection when closing is interrupted (e.g. due to ice) by pressing and holding down the control in the same direction.

The symbol shows the windows containing lamina- If there is any problem with the pinch protected glass.1 tion, a rest procedure can be tested.

Related information WARNING • Pinch protection for windows and sun curtains (p. 166) If the starter battery is disconnected, the function for automatic opening and closing • Panoramic roof* (p. 172) must be reset to function correctly. A reset • Power windows (p. 167) is required in order for the pinch protection to work. • Rearview/door mirrors (p. 169) • * Head-up display (p. 143) Related information • Using the windshield wipers (p. 176) • Reset procedure for pinch protection • Using the windshield and headlight wash- (p. 167) ers (p. 179) • Operating the power windows (p. 168) • Operating the panoramic roof* (p. 173)

1 Does not apply to windshield and panoramic roof*, which are always laminated and therefore do not have this symbol.

166 * Option/accessory. WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS

Reset procedure for pinch Power windows WARNING protection Every door has a control panel for the power Children, other passengers or objects can If you experience any problems with the elec- windows. The driver's door has controls for be trapped by the moving parts. trical functions for the power windows, you operating all windows and for activating the can try to perform a reset. child safety locks. • Always operate the windows with caution. WARNING • Do not allow children to play with the If the starter battery is disconnected, the operating controls. function for automatic opening and closing must be reset to function correctly. A reset • Never leave a child alone in the vehicle. is required in order for the pinch protection • Remember to always cut the current to to work. the power windows by setting the vehicle's electrical system to ignition If the problem persists or if it affects the pan- mode 0 and then taking the remote oramic roof, contact a workshop2. key with you when leaving the vehicle. • Resetting a power window Never stick objects or body parts out through the windows, even if the vehi- 1. Start with the window in the closed posi- cle electrical system is completely tion. Driver's door control panel. turned off. Electric child safety locks* that deactivate 2. Then move the control in manual mode the controls in the rear doors to prevent three times upward toward the closed the doors or windows from being opened Related information position. from the inside. • Operating the power windows (p. 168) > The system will be automatically acti- • vated. Rear window controls. Pinch protection for windows and sun curtains (p. 166) Front window controls. Related information • Reset procedure for pinch protection • Pinch protection for windows and sun cur- (p. 167) tains (p. 166) • Operating the power windows (p. 168)

2 An authorized Volvo workshop is recommended.

* Option/accessory. 167 WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS

Operating the power windows WARNING All power windows can be operated using the Make sure that no child or other passenger control panel in the driver's door. The control comes into contact with the windows as panels in the other doors can be used to they are closing with keyless closing*. operate that particular door. The power windows have pinch protection. If there is any problem with the pinch protection, NOTE a rest procedure can be tested. One way to reduce the pulsating wind noise heard when the rear windows are WARNING open is to also open the front windows Children, other passengers or objects can slightly. be trapped by the moving parts. Operating the power windows. • Always operate the windows with cau- Operating manually. Move one of the con- NOTE tion. trols slightly up or down. The power win- The windows cannot be opened at speeds • Do not allow children to play with the dows go up or down while the control is over approx. 180 km/h (ca112 mph), but operating controls. held in position. they can be closed. • Never leave a child alone in the vehicle. Operating with automatic controls. Move The driver is always responsible for follow- • Remember to always cut the current to one of the controls up or down to its end ing applicable traffic regulations. the power windows by setting the position and release it. The window moves vehicle's electrical system to ignition automatically to its fully closed/open posi- mode 0 and then taking the remote tion. NOTE key with you when leaving the vehicle. To use the power windows, the ignition must It may not be possible to operate the win- be in at least mode I or II. After the ignition • Never stick objects or body parts out dows in low temperatures. has been switched off, the power windows through the windows, even if the vehi- can be operated for several minutes or until a cle electrical system is completely door is opened. Only one control can be oper- Related information turned off. ated at a time. • Power windows (p. 167) • It can also be operated using keyless opening* Pinch protection for windows and sun cur- with the door handle. tains (p. 166) • Reset procedure for pinch protection (p. 167)

168 * Option/accessory. WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS

• Keyless locking and unlocking* (p. 252) Rearview/door mirrors • Storing positions for seats, mirrors and * • Locking and unlocking using the remote The rearview mirror and door mirrors can be head-up display (p. 186) key (p. 238) used to improve the driver's visibility behind • Activating and deactivating the heated the vehicle. rear window and door mirrors (p. 219) Rearview mirror The rearview mirror can be adjusted manually. The rearview mirror is equipped with Home- Link*, auto-dim* and compass*. Door mirrors

WARNING The door mirror on the passenger side is curved to improve visibility. Objects in the mirror may appear farther away than they actually are.

The joystick in the drivers' door control panel is used to adjust the position of the door mirrors. There are also several automatic settings that can also be connected to the memory function buttons for the power seat*. Related information • HomeLink®* (p. 442) • Compass* (p. 446) • Adjusting the rearview mirror dimming function (p. 170) • Adjusting the door mirrors (p. 170)

* Option/accessory. 169 WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS

Adjusting the rearview mirror The rearview mirror instead has two sensors - Adjusting the door mirrors dimming function one pointing forward and one pointing rear- To improve visibility to the rear, the door mir- Bright light entering the vehicle from behind, ward - which work together to identify and rors need to be adjusted to the driver's height e.g. from the headlights of following vehicles, eliminate glare. The forward-pointing sensor and seating position. There are several auto- could reflect in the rearview mirror and door monitors ambient light, while the rearward- matic settings that can also be connected to mirrors and cause a glare. Use the dimming pointing sensor monitors light from the head- the memory function buttons for the power function when light from behind is distract- lights of following vehicles. seat*. ing. For the door mirrors to be equipped with auto- Controls used for door mirrors dim, the rearview mirror must also be equip- Auto-dim ped with auto-dim. If bright light enters the vehicle from behind, the door mirrors will automatically dim. Auto- dim is always active when the engine is run- NOTE ning, except when reverse gear is engaged. If the sensors are obstructed by e.g. a parking permit, transponder, sunshade or NOTE objects on the seats or in the cargo compartment in a way that prevents light from Adjustments to the sensitivity level will not reaching the sensors, the auto-dim func- be noticeable immediately but will instead tion in the door and rearview mirrors will take effect after a short period of time. be reduced.

The sensitivity level for dimming will affect Related information Door mirror controls. both the rearview mirror and door mirrors. • Rearview/door mirrors (p. 169) The joystick in the drivers' door control panel To change the dimming sensitivity level: • Adjusting the door mirrors (p. 170) is used to adjust the position of the door mir- I 1. Tap Settings in the Top view in the center rors. The ignition must be in at least mode . display. 1. Press the L button for the left door mirror or R for the right door mirror. The button My Car Mirrors and Convenience 2. Tap . will light up. 3. Under Rearview Mirror Auto Dimming, 2. Adjust the position using the joystick select Normal, Dark or Light. located between the buttons.

170 * Option/accessory. WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS

3. Press the L or R button again. The light in Tilting when parking3 Automatic folding when the vehicle is the button will go out. The door mirrors can be tilted down to help locked* give the driver a better view along the sides of The door mirrors can automatically fold in Automatically folding door mirrors* the vehicle, e.g. of the curb when parking. when the vehicle is locked and open when the The door mirrors can be automatically folded vehicle is unlocked using the remote key. If – Select reverse gear and press the L or R when driving or parking in tight spaces. the mirrors have been folded in manually, they mirror button. 1. Press the L and R buttons at the same must be folded out manually as well. time. Please note that the button may need to be 1. Tap Settings in the center display's Top pressed twice depending on settings. When 2. Release the buttons after about 1 second. the door mirror is tilted down, the light in the view. The mirrors will automatically stop when button will flash. When reverse gear is 2. Tap My Car Mirrors and Convenience. they are completely folded in. engaged, the door mirrors will automatically Open the mirrors by pressing L and R at the start to move after 3 seconds and will reach 3. Select Fold Mirror When Locked to acti- same time. The mirrors will automatically stop their original position after about 8 seconds. vate/deactivate. when they are completely open. 3 Related information Automatically tilting when parking • Resetting the mirrors' position With this setting, the door mirrors will auto- Rearview/door mirrors (p. 169) A mirror that has been moved out of position matically tilt down when reverse gear is • Adjusting the rearview mirror dimming manually (e.g. hit or bumped into) must be engaged. The folded position is preset and function (p. 170) electrically returned to its normal position for cannot be adjusted. • Storing positions for seats, mirrors and automatic folding* to function properly. 1. Tap Settings in the center display's Top head-up display* (p. 186) 1. Fold in the mirrors by pressing the L and R view. • Activating and deactivating the heated buttons at the same time. rear window and door mirrors (p. 219) 2. Tap My Car Mirrors and Convenience. 2. Open them again by pressing the L and R buttons at the same time. 3. Under Exterior Mirror Tilt at Reverse, select Off, Driver, Passenger or Both to 3. Repeat the above procedure as needed. activate/deactivate and to select which The mirrors are now reset to their original mirror to tilt. positions. To immediately return the door mirrors to their original position, press the L or R button twice.

3 Only on models equipped with a power driver's seat with memory buttons*.

* Option/accessory. 171 WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS

* Panoramic roof WARNING CAUTION The panoramic roof is divided into two glass Children, other passengers or objects can • Remove ice and snow before opening sections. The front section can be opened be trapped by the moving parts. the panoramic roof. Be careful not to vertically at the rear edge (ventilation posi- scratch any surfaces or damage the tion) or horizontally (open position). The rear • Always operate the windows with cau- trim. section cannot be moved. tion. • Do not allow children to play with the • Do not operate the panoramic roof if it The panoramic roof has a wind deflector and is frozen in place. sun curtain made of perforated fabric (located operating controls. beneath the glass sections) for extra protec- • Never leave a child alone in the vehicle. tion in e.g. bright sunlight. • Remember to always cut the current to Wind blocker the power windows by setting the vehicle's electrical system to ignition mode 0 and then taking the remote key with you when leaving the vehicle. • Never stick objects or body parts out through the windows, even if the vehicle electrical system is completely turned off.

CAUTION • Do not open the panoramic roof when The panoramic roof and sun curtain are oper- load carriers are installed. The panoramic roof is equipped with a wind ated using the controls in the ceiling. • Never place heavy objects on the pan- blocker that folds up when the roof is open. To operate the panoramic roof and sun cur- oramic roof. Related information tain, the ignition must be in mode I or II. • Operating the panoramic roof* (p. 173) • Auto closing the panoramic roof* sun curtain (p. 175) • Pinch protection for windows and sun curtains (p. 166)

172 * Option/accessory. WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS

• * * Keyless locking and unlocking (p. 252) Operating the panoramic roof CAUTION • Locking and unlocking using the remote The panoramic roof and sun curtain are oper- • Do not open the panoramic roof when key (p. 238) ated using a control in the ceiling panel, and load carriers are installed. both are equipped with pinch protection. • Never place heavy objects on the pan- WARNING oramic roof. Children, other passengers or objects can be trapped by the moving parts. • Always operate the windows with cau- CAUTION tion. • Remove ice and snow before opening • Do not allow children to play with the the panoramic roof. Be careful not to operating controls. scratch any surfaces or damage the • trim. Never leave a child alone in the vehicle. • • Do not operate the panoramic roof if it Remember to always cut the current to is frozen in place. the power windows by setting the vehicle's electrical system to ignition mode 0 and then taking the remote To operate the panoramic roof and sun cur- key with you when leaving the vehicle. tain, the ignition must be in mode I or II. • Never stick objects or body parts out It can also be operated using keyless opening* through the windows, even if the vehi- with the door handle. cle electrical system is completely turned off. WARNING Make sure that no child or other passenger comes into contact with the windows as they are closing with keyless closing*.

}}

* Option/accessory. 173 WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS

|| CAUTION Opening and closing ventilation Fully opening and closing the position panoramic roof with the control in the Check that the panoramic roof is properly ceiling closed when closing.

The movement of the roof will stop if the control is released during manual operation or when the glass has reached the comfort4 or fully open/closed position. The movement of both the panoramic roof and the sun curtain is also stopped if the control in the ceiling is operated again in the direction opposite that of the current direction of movement. The panoramic roof and sun curtain are also equipped with pinch protection. If there is any Ventilation position, rear edge raised. problem with the pinch protection, a rest pro- Open by pushing the control upward Operation, manual mode cedure can be tested. once. Operation, automatic mode Close by pushing the control downward NOTE once. For manual opening, the sun curtain must When ventilation mode is selected, the rear be completely open before the panoramic edge of the front section of the roof is raised. roof can be opened. For the reverse proce- If the sun curtain is fully closed when ventila- dure, the panoramic roof must be com- tion position is selected, it will automatically pletely closed before the sun curtain can open approx. 50 mm (approx. 2 inches). be completely closed. If the panoramic roof is closed from the ventilation position, the sun curtain will also auto- NOTE matically close. It may not be possible to operate the windows in low temperatures.

4 The comfort position is a position which helps keep wind and resonance sounds to a comfortably low level.

174 WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS

Manual operation Automatic operation - rapid opening or Auto closing the panoramic roof* 1. To open the sun curtain, pull the control closing sun curtain backward to the manual open mode. The panoramic roof and sun curtain can be With this function, the sun curtain closes 2. To open the panoramic roof to the comfort opened or closed simultaneously: automatically 15 minutes after the vehicle has position, pull the control backward a sec- – Open - press the control backward twice been locked if it is parked in hot weather. This ond time to the manual opening position. to the automatic operation position and is done to lower the passenger compartment release. temperature and protect the upholstery 3. To open the panoramic roof fully, pull the against being bleached by the sun. control backward a third time to the man- – Close - press the control forward/down The function is deactivated as the default fac- ual opening position. twice to the automatic operation position tory setting and can be activated or deacti- Close by repeating the above procedure in and release. vated using the center display. reverse - push the control forward/down to Related information 1. Tap Settings in the Top view in the center the manual closing position. • Panoramic roof* (p. 172) display. Auto operation • Auto closing the panoramic roof* sun cur- 2. Tap My Car Locking. 1. To open the sun curtain to the fully open tain (p. 175) position, pull the control backward to the • Select Auto Close Sunroof Curtain to auto open mode and release. Pinch protection for windows and sun cur- activate/deactivate. tains (p. 166) 2. To open the panoramic roof to the comfort • Keyless locking and unlocking* (p. 252) position, pull the control backward a sec- NOTE • Locking and unlocking using the remote ond time to the automatic opening posi- The sun curtain also closes when all win- key (p. 238) tion and release. dows are closed with keyless closing*. 3. To open the panoramic roof fully, pull the control backward a third time to the automatic opening position and release. Related information • Panoramic roof* (p. 172) Close by repeating the above procedure in • * reverse - push the control forward/down to Operating the panoramic roof (p. 173) the auto close position. • Pinch protection for windows and sun curtains (p. 166)

}}

* Option/accessory. 175 WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS

• Keyless locking and unlocking* (p. 252) Wiper blades and washer fluid Using the windshield wipers • Locking and unlocking using the remote The wipers and the washer fluid are designed The windshield wipers are designed to clean key (p. 238) to improve visibility and the headlight pat- the windshield. The right-side steering wheel tern. lever is used to adjust windshield wiper set- Washer fluid direct from the wiper blades and tings. heating* of the wiper blades gives improved vision. When there is approximately 1 liter (1 qt) of washer fluid remaining, a message to refill will appear in the instrument panel. Related information • Using the rain sensor (p. 177) • Using the windshield and headlight washers (p. 179) • Using automatic rear window wiping when backing up (p. 181) Right-hand steering wheel lever. • Using the rain sensor's memory function The thumb wheel is used to set rain sen- (p. 178) sor sensitivity and interval wiper speed. • Using the rear window wiper/washer (p. 180) Single sweep • Move the lever down and release for a Filling washer fluid (p. 627) single sweep. • Putting the wiper blades in service position (p. 626) Wipers off Move the lever to position 0 to turn off • Replacing windshield wiper blades the windshield wipers. (p. 625) • Changing rear window wipers (p. 624) • Using the windshield wipers (p. 176)

176 * Option/accessory. WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS

Interval wipers • Using automatic rear window wiping Using the rain sensor Move the lever upward to put the wip- when backing up (p. 181) The rain sensor monitors the amount of water ers in interval wiping mode. Set the • Wiper blades and washer fluid (p. 176) on the windshield and automatically starts number of sweeps per time unit with the • Using the rain sensor's memory function the windshield wipers. Rain sensor sensitivity thumb wheel when interval wipers are (p. 178) can be adjusted using the thumb wheel on selected. the right-hand steering wheel lever. • Using the rear window wiper/washer Continuous wipers (p. 180) Move the lever upward for the wipers • Filling washer fluid (p. 627) to operate at normal speed. • Putting the wiper blades in service posi- Move the lever upward again for the tion (p. 626) wipers to operate at high speed. • Replacing windshield wiper blades (p. 625) CAUTION • Changing rear window wipers (p. 624) Before activating the wipers, make sure that the wiper blades are not frozen in place and that any snow or ice on the windshield and rear window has been Right-hand steering wheel lever. scraped away. Rain sensor button

CAUTION Thumb wheel, sensitivity/interval wiper speed Use plenty of washer fluid when the wipers clean the windshield. The windshield must When the rain sensor is activated, the be wet when the windshield wipers are rain sensor symbol will be displayed in the working. instrument panel. Activating the rain sensor Related information When the rain sensor is activated, the engine • Using the rain sensor (p. 177) must be running or the ignition in mode I or II • Using the windshield and headlight wash- while the windshield wiper lever is in position ers (p. 179) 0 or in the single sweep position. }}

177 WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS

|| Activate the rain sensor by pressing the rain Related information Using the rain sensor's memory sensor button . • Using the windshield and headlight wash- function ers (p. 179) Move the lever downward for an extra wiper The rain sensor monitors the amount of water sweep. • Using automatic rear window wiping on the windshield and automatically starts when backing up (p. 181) the windshield wipers. Turn the thumb wheel upward for increased • sensitivity and downward for decreased sensi- Wiper blades and washer fluid (p. 176) Activating/deactivating memory tivity. The wipers will make one extra sweep • Using the rain sensor's memory function function when the thumb wheel is turned upward. (p. 178) The rain sensor's memory function can be set • to activate so that the rain sensor button does Deactivate the rain sensor Using the rear window wiper/washer (p. 180) not need to be pressed each time the engine Deactivate the rain sensor by pressing the • is started: rain sensor button or moving the lever Filling washer fluid (p. 627) 1. Tap Settings in the Top view in the center upward to another wiper mode. • Putting the wiper blades in service position (p. 626) display. The rain sensor is automatically deactivated in ignition mode 0 or when the engine is • Replacing windshield wiper blades 2. Tap My Car Wipers. (p. 625) switched off. 3. Select Rain Sensor Memory to activate/ • The rain sensor is also automatically deacti- Changing rear window wipers (p. 624) deactivate the memory function. vated when the wiper blades are put in the • Using the windshield wipers (p. 176) Related information service position. The rain sensor will reactivate • Using the rain sensor (p. 177) when service mode is switched off. • Using the windshield and headlight wash- CAUTION ers (p. 179) • Using automatic rear window wiping The windshield wipers may start inadver- when backing up (p. 181) tently and be damaged in automatic car washes. Deactivate the rain sensor when • Wiper blades and washer fluid (p. 176) the engine is running or when the ignition • Using the rear window wiper/washer is in mode I or II. The symbol in the instru- (p. 180) ment panel will go out. • Filling washer fluid (p. 627)

178 WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS

• Putting the wiper blades in service posi- Using the windshield and CAUTION tion (p. 626) headlight washers Avoid activating the washer system when • Replacing windshield wiper blades The windshield and headlight washers are it is frozen or the fluid reservoir is empty. (p. 625) designed to clean the windshield and head- Otherwise, there is a risk of damaging the lights. Use the right-side steering wheel lever • Changing rear window wipers (p. 624) pump. • to start the windshield and headlight wash- Using the windshield wipers (p. 176) ers. Headlight washer* Starting the windshield and headlight To save washer fluid, the headlights are washers washed automatically according to a defined interval when the headlights are on. Reduced washing When there is about 1 liter (1 qt) of washer fluid left in the reservoir and the Washer fluid Level low, refill message is displayed in the instrument panel together with the symbol, the washer fluid supply to the headlights is cut off. This is to prioritize windshield cleaning and visibility through it. The headlights are only washed if high or low beam is on.

Washing function, right-hand steering wheel lever. Related information • Using the rain sensor (p. 177) – Move the right-hand steering wheel lever • toward the steering wheel to start the Using automatic rear window wiping windshield and headlight washers. when backing up (p. 181) > After the lever is released, the wipers • Wiper blades and washer fluid (p. 176) make several extra sweeps. • Using the rain sensor's memory function (p. 178) • Using the rear window wiper/washer (p. 180)

}}

* Option/accessory. 179 WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS

• Filling washer fluid (p. 627) Using the rear window wiper/ • Putting the wiper blades in service posi- washer tion (p. 626) The rear window washer/wiper is designed to • Replacing windshield wiper blades clean the rear window. Use the right-side (p. 625) steering wheel lever to start and control the wiper/washer. • Changing rear window wipers (p. 624) • Using the windshield wipers (p. 176) Activating the rear window wiper/ washer

NOTE The rear window wiper motor is equipped with overheating protection that switches Select for interval rear window off the motor if it becomes overheated. The wiper. rear window wiper can be operated again Select for continuous rear window after a cooling-down period. wiper. – Move the right-side steering wheel lever forward to wash/wipe the rear window. Related information • Using the rain sensor (p. 177) • Using the windshield and headlight washers (p. 179) • Using automatic rear window wiping when backing up (p. 181) • Using the rain sensor's memory function (p. 178) • Wiper blades and washer fluid (p. 176) • Filling washer fluid (p. 627)

180 WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS

• Putting the wiper blades in service posi- Using automatic rear window • Replacing windshield wiper blades tion (p. 626) wiping when backing up (p. 625) • Replacing windshield wiper blades If reverse gear is engaged while the wind- • Changing rear window wipers (p. 624) (p. 625) shield wipers are on, the rear window wipers • Using the windshield wipers (p. 176) • Changing rear window wipers (p. 624) will start. This function is deactivated when a • different gear is selected. Using the windshield wipers (p. 176) 1. Tap Settings in the Top view in the center display. 2. Tap My Car Wipers. 3. Select Auto Rear Wiper to activate/deactivate automatic rear window wiping when backing up. If the rear window wipers are already in continuous wiper mode, no change will be made when reverse gear is engaged. Related information • Using the rain sensor (p. 177) • Using the windshield and headlight washers (p. 179) • Wiper blades and washer fluid (p. 176) • Using the rain sensor's memory function (p. 178) • Using the rear window wiper/washer (p. 180) • Filling washer fluid (p. 627) • Putting the wiper blades in service position (p. 626)

181

SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL

Manual front seats Raise/lower the seat by moving the con- • Adjusting front seat side bolster settings* The front seats can be adjusted in a number trol up/down. (p. 191) of different ways to help enhance your seat- Change the backrest tilt by turning the • Adjusting front seat lumbar support* ing comfort. knob on the backrest. (p. 191) • Adjusting the passenger seat from the WARNING driver's seat* (p. 193) • Do not adjust the seat while driving. The seat should be adjusted so that the brake pedal can be depressed fully. In addition, position the seat as far rearward as comfort and control allow. • Check that the seat is securely locked into position after adjusting.

Related information Raise/lower the front edge of the seat • Power* front seats (p. 185) 1 cushion* by moving the control up/down. • Adjusting the power* front seats (p. 185) Change the length of the seat cushion* by • Storing positions for seats, mirrors and pulling up the lever and moving the cush- head-up display* (p. 186) ion forward/backward. • Using stored positions for seats, mirrors Move the seat forward/backing by lifting and head-up display* (p. 187) the handle and moving the seat to a suita- • Adjusting front seat massage settings* ble distance from the steering wheel and (p. 189) pedals. Check to make sure the seat is securely locked into place after its setting • Adjusting* front seat cushion length has been changed. (p. 190) Adjust lumbar support* by pressing the • Front seat massage* settings (p. 188) button up/down/forward/rearward2.

1 Only applies to the driver's seat. 2 Applies for four-way lumbar support*. Two-way lumbar support* is adjusted forward/rearward.

184 * Option/accessory. SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL

Power* front seats • Adjusting front seat massage settings* Adjusting the power* front seats The front seats can be adjusted in a number (p. 189) Set the desired seating position using the of different ways to help enhance your seat- • Adjusting* front seat cushion length controls on the front seat cushion. To set the ing comfort. The power seat can be moved (p. 190) convenience functions, turn the multifunction 4 forward/backward and up/down. The height • Front seat massage* settings (p. 188) control upward/downward. and length* of the seat cushion and the tilt of * the backrest can be adjusted. Lumbar sup- • Adjusting front seat side bolster settings port* can be adjusted up, down, forward and (p. 191) backward3. • Adjusting front seat lumbar support* The seats can be adjusted when the engine is (p. 191) running and for a certain period of time after • Adjusting the passenger seat from the the door has been unlocked without the driver's seat* (p. 193) engine running. They can also be adjusted for a short period after the engine is turned off.

CAUTION The power seats have an overload protec- The illustration shows the controls in a vehicle with tor that is triggered if a seat is blocked by four-way lumbar support*. Vehicles with two-way any object. If this occurs, remove the lumbar support* do not have the rotary multifunction object and attempt to adjust the seat control. again. In vehicles with four-way lumbar support*, turn the multifunction control4 up/down to Related information set the convenience functions. In vehicles • Manual front seats (p. 184) with two-way lumbar support*, use the round button to adjust the lumbar support • Adjusting the power* front seats (p. 185) forward/rearward. • Storing positions for seats, mirrors and Raise/lower the front edge of the seat head-up display* (p. 186) cushion by moving the control up/down. • Using stored positions for seats, mirrors and head-up display* (p. 187)

3 * * Applies for four-way lumbar support . Two-way lumbar support is adjusted forward/rearward. }}

* Option/accessory. 185 SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL

|| Raise/lower the seat by moving the con- • Adjusting the passenger seat from the Storing positions for seats, mirrors trol up/down. driver's seat* (p. 193) and head-up display* Move the seat forward/rearward by mov- Adjustment settings for the power* seat, door ing the control forward/rearward. mirrors and head-up display* can be stored in Change the backrest tilt by moving the the memory buttons. * control forward/backward. Two different positions for the power seat, door mirrors and head-up display* can be Only one movement (forward/rearward/up/ stored using the memory buttons. The buttons down) can be performed at a time. are located on the inside of either one or both* The front seat backrests cannot be folded front doors. down completely. Related information • Manual front seats (p. 184) • Power* front seats (p. 185) • Storing positions for seats, mirrors and head-up display* (p. 186) • Using stored positions for seats, mirrors and head-up display* (p. 187) • Adjusting front seat massage settings* (p. 189) • Adjusting* front seat cushion length (p. 190) Button M for storing a setting. • Front seat massage* settings (p. 188) Memory button. • * Adjusting front seat side bolster settings Memory button. (p. 191) • Adjusting front seat lumbar support* (p. 191)

4 Not available in vehicles with two-way lumbar support*.

186 * Option/accessory. SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL

Storing positions • Adjusting front seat side bolster settings* Using stored positions for seats, 1. Adjust the seat, door mirrors and head-up (p. 191) mirrors and head-up display* display to the desired position. • Adjusting front seat lumbar support* If the positions for the power* seat, door mir- 2. Press and hold the M button. The indica- (p. 191) rors and head-up display* have been stored, tor light in the button will illuminate. • Adjusting the passenger seat from the they can be activated using the memory but- * tons. 3. Within three seconds, press and hold the 1 driver's seat (p. 193) or 2 button. • Adjusting the door mirrors (p. 170) Using a stored position > When the position has been stored in • Head-up display settings* (p. 145) the memory button, an audio signal will sound and the indicator light in the M button will go out. If none of the memory buttons are pressed within three seconds, the M button will go out and no position will be stored. The seats, door mirrors or head-up display must be readjusted before a new memory position can be set. Related information • Manual front seats (p. 184) A stored position can be used with the front • Power* front seats (p. 185) door open or closed: • Adjusting the power* front seats (p. 185) Front door open – Briefly press one of the memory buttons 1 • Using stored positions for seats, mirrors and head-up display* (p. 187) ( ) or 2 ( ). The power seats, door mirrors and head-up display will move and • * Adjusting front seat massage settings stop at the positions stored in that button. (p. 189) • Adjusting* front seat cushion length (p. 190) • Front seat massage* settings (p. 188) }}

* Option/accessory. 187 SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL

|| Front door closed Related information Front seat massage* settings – Press and hold one of the memory buttons • Manual front seats (p. 184) The settings for the multifunctional seats can 1 ( ) or 2 ( ) until the seat, door mirrors • Power* front seats (p. 185) be adjusted using either the mutifunction and head-up display stop in the positions control on the side of the seat or the center • Adjusting the power* front seats (p. 185) stored in that memory button. display. The adjustment settings are shown in • Storing positions for seats, mirrors and the center display. If the memory button is released, the seat, head-up display* (p. 186) door mirrors and head-up display will stop • * moving. Adjusting front seat massage settings (p. 189) WARNING • Adjusting* front seat cushion length (p. 190) • This list point needs to be translated • * exactly to: "Because the driver's seat Front seat massage settings (p. 188) can be adjusted with the ignition off, • Adjusting front seat side bolster settings* children should never be left unatten- (p. 191) ded in the vehicle. • Adjusting front seat lumbar support* • Movement of the seat can be STOP- (p. 191) PED at any time by pressing any but- • Adjusting the passenger seat from the ton on the power seat control panel. * Multifunction control, located on the side of the seat driver's seat (p. 193) cushion. • Do not adjust the seat while driving. • Adjusting the door mirrors (p. 170) Massage settings • The seat should be adjusted so that the • Head-up display settings* (p. 145) brake pedal can be depressed fully. In The following massage settings are available: addition, position the seat as far rear- • On/Off: Select On/Off to turn on/off the ward as comfort and control allow. massage function. • The seat rails on the floor must not be • Programs 1-5: There are 5 preset mas- obstructed in any way when the seat is sage programs. Select Swell, Tread, in motion. Advanced, Lumbar or Shoulder. • Intensity: Select Low, Normal or High. • Speed: Select Slow, Normal or Fast.

188 * Option/accessory. SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL

Restarting the massage function Adjusting front seat massage 2. Select Massage in the seat settings view. * The massage function turns off automatically settings 3. Select massage settings by tapping the after 20 minutes. The function is reactivated The settings for the multifunctional seats can center display or by moving the cursor up/ manually. be adjusted using either the mutifunction down using the multifunction control's – Tap Restart, which is displayed in the control on the seat or the center display. The upper /lower buttons. Change a set- center display, to restart the selected mas- adjustment settings are shown in the center ting in the selected function by tapping sage program. display. the arrows on the center display or by > The massage program will restart. If no Adjusting front seat massage settings using the multifunction control's front / selection is made, the message will be The front seat backrests have a massage func- rear buttons. stored in Top view. tion. Air-filled cushions provide the massaging action and a number of settings are available. Related information Related information • Manual front seats (p. 184) • Manual front seats (p. 184) The massage function can only be activated • Power* front seats (p. 185) • Power* front seats (p. 185) when the engine is running. • Adjusting the power* front seats (p. 185) • Adjusting the power* front seats (p. 185) • Storing positions for seats, mirrors and • Storing positions for seats, mirrors and head-up display* (p. 186) head-up display* (p. 186) • Using stored positions for seats, mirrors • Using stored positions for seats, mirrors and head-up display* (p. 187) and head-up display* (p. 187) • Adjusting* front seat cushion length * • Adjusting front seat massage settings (p. 190) (p. 189) • Front seat massage* settings (p. 188) • Adjusting* front seat cushion length • * (p. 190) Adjusting front seat side bolster settings (p. 191) • Adjusting front seat side bolster settings* • * (p. 191) Adjusting front seat lumbar support (p. 191) • * 1. Activate the multifunction control by turn- Adjusting front seat lumbar support • (p. 191) ing the control upward/downward. The Adjusting the passenger seat from the seat settings view will appear in the center driver's seat* (p. 193) • Adjusting the passenger seat from the display. driver's seat* (p. 193)

* Option/accessory. 189 SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL

Adjusting* front seat cushion 2. Select Cushion extension in the seat set- Related information length tings view. • Manual front seats (p. 184) Depending on the selected equipment level, • Push in the front part of the four-way • Power* front seats (p. 185) the length of the seat cushion can either be button to extend the seat cushion. • * * Adjusting the power front seats (p. 185) adjusted using the multifunction control on • the side of the seat cushion, or manually Press the rear part of the four-way but- • Storing positions for seats, mirrors and * adjusted using the control on the front of the ton to shorten the seat cushion. head-up display (p. 186) seat cushion. • Using stored positions for seats, mirrors Manually adjusting seat cushion and head-up display* (p. 187) Adjusting seat cushion length using length • * the multifunction control Adjusting front seat massage settings (p. 189) • Front seat massage* settings (p. 188) • Adjusting front seat side bolster settings* (p. 191) • Adjusting front seat lumbar support* (p. 191) • Adjusting the passenger seat from the driver's seat* (p. 193)

Control for adjusting seat cushion. The multifunction control, located on the side of the seat cushion. 1. Grasp the handle on the front of the 1. Activate the multifunction control by turn- seat and pull upward. ing the control upward/downward. The 2. Adjust the length of the seat cushion. seat settings view will appear in the center 3. Release the handle and make sure the display. seat cushion locks into position.

190 * Option/accessory. SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL

Adjusting front seat side bolster 2. Select Side bolsters in the seat settings Adjusting front seat lumbar settings* view. support* Enhance comfort in the front seat by adjust- • Press the front part of the four-way but- Use the control on the side of the seat cush- ing the sides of the backrest. ton to increase side bolster support . ion to adjust the lumbar support. • Press the rear part of the four-way button to decrease side bolster support . Related information • Manual front seats (p. 184) • Power* front seats (p. 185) • Adjusting the power* front seats (p. 185) • Storing positions for seats, mirrors and head-up display* (p. 186) • Using stored positions for seats, mirrors * Multifunction control, located on the side of the seat and head-up display (p. 187) Multifunction control, in vehicles with four-way lum- cushion. • Adjusting front seat massage settings* bar support*. The side bolsters in the front seat backrests (p. 189) can be inflated/deflated to adjust the amount • Adjusting* front seat cushion length of support provided. The settings for the multi- (p. 190) functional seats can be adjusted using either • Front seat massage* settings (p. 188) the mutifunction control on the seat or the center display. The adjustment settings are • Adjusting front seat lumbar support* shown in the center display. (p. 191) • To adjust the side bolsters: Adjusting the passenger seat from the driver's seat* (p. 193) 1. Activate the multifunction control by turning it upward/downward . The seat settings view will appear in the center display. Control in vehicles with two-way lumbar support*.

}}

* Option/accessory. 191 SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL

|| Lumbar support is adjusted using the multi- 2. Select Lumbar in the seat settings view. Related information function control in vehicles with four-way lum- • Manual front seats (p. 184) * • Press the round button up /down bar support , or the round button in vehicles • Power* front seats (p. 185) with two-way lumbar support*. The control is to move the lumbar support upward/ * located on the side of the seat cushion. downward. • Adjusting the power front seats (p. 185) Depending on the selected equipment level, • Press the front part of the button to • Storing positions for seats, mirrors and the lumbar support can be adjusted forward/ increase lumbar support. head-up display* (p. 186) rearward and up/down (four-way lumbar sup- • Press the rear part of the button to • Using stored positions for seats, mirrors port) or forward/backward (two-way lumbar and head-up display* (p. 187) support). decrease lumbar support. • Adjusting front seat massage settings* Adjusting lumbar support in vehicles Adjusting lumbar support in vehicles (p. 189) with two-way lumbar support with four-way lumbar support • Adjusting* front seat cushion length (p. 190) • Front seat massage* settings (p. 188) • Adjusting front seat side bolster settings* (p. 191) • Adjusting the passenger seat from the driver's seat* (p. 193)

1. Activate the multifunction control by turn- 1. Press the front part of the round button ing the control upward/downward. The to increase lumbar support. seat settings view will appear in the center 2. Press the rear part of the round button display. to decrease lumbar support.

192 * Option/accessory. SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL

Adjusting the passenger seat from • Adjusting* front seat cushion length the driver's seat* (p. 190) The front passenger seat can be adjusted • Front seat massage* settings (p. 188) from the driver's seat. • Adjusting front seat side bolster settings* Activating the function (p. 191) The function is activated via the function view • Adjusting front seat lumbar support* in the center display: (p. 191) Tap the Adjust Passenger Seat button to activate.

Move the passenger seat forward/rearward by moving the control forward/rearward. Adjust passenger seat Change the backrest tilt of the passenger The driver must adjust the passenger seat seat by moving the control forward/back- within 10 seconds of activating the function. If ward. no adjustment is made within this time, the function will be deactivated. Related information • The driver adjusts the passenger seat using Manual front seats (p. 184) the controls on the driver's seat: • Power* front seats (p. 185) • Adjusting the power* front seats (p. 185) • Storing positions for seats, mirrors and head-up display* (p. 186) • Using stored positions for seats, mirrors and head-up display* (p. 187) • Adjusting front seat massage settings* (p. 189)

* Option/accessory. 193 SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL

Folding down the rear seat CAUTION backrests The seat cushion of the integrated child The rear seat backrest is split into two sec- restraint* must be in the stowed position tions. The two sections can be folded forward before the rear seat backrest can be folded individually. down. WARNING The armrest* in the center seat must be • Adjust the seat and ensure it locks into raised before the seat backrest is folded position before driving. Use caution down. when adjusting the seat. Uncontrolled or careless adjustments could lead to The ski hatch must be closed before the injury. seat backrest is folded down. • Long objects must always be securely tied down to help prevent injury or NOTE damage in the event of sudden brak- The front seats may need to be pushed for- ing. ward and/or the backrest adjusted so that • Always turn off the engine and apply the rear seat backrests can be fully low- the parking brake when loading or ered. unloading the vehicle. • Put the gear selector in P to help pre- Folding down the backrests vent the gear selector from being inad- The vehicle must be stationary and at least vertently moved. one of the rear doors must be open before a backrest can be folded down. CAUTION Make sure that the rear seat is unoccupied When the backrest is folded down, make and that there are no objects on the seat. sure there are no objects in the rear seat, and the seat belts are not buckled. Other- Push down the center seat's head wise there is a risk of damage to the restraint manually. upholstery.

194 * Option/accessory. SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL

Pull up the handle on the backrest 4. Adjust the center head restraint if neces- Adjusting the rear seat head while folding down the backrest. The han- sary. restraints dle for the head restraint will be automati- Adjust the center head restraint in the rear cally pulled up when the backrest is low- WARNING seat to the seat occupant's height. Fold down * ered. A red indicator light near the back- When the backrest is restored to an the outboard head restraints to improve rear rest lock indicates that the backrest is upright position, the red indicator should visibility. no longer locked. no longer be visible. If it is still visible, the backrest is not locked in place. Adjusting the center seat head restraint NOTE When the backrest is folded down, the WARNING head restraint may come in contact with Make sure that the rear seat backrest and the seat cushion of the seat being folded head restraint are locked securely in place down. Adjust the head restraint of the seat after the seat is folded up. being folded down to help prevent damage The head restraints at the outer seats must to the upholstery. always be raised when there is a passenger in one of these spots of the rear seat. 3. The backrest lock will release and the backrest will automatically fold down to the horizontal position. Related information • Adjusting the rear seat head restraints Folding up the backrest (p. 195) To fold up the backrest to the upright position The center head restraint should be adjusted • Private Locking (p. 264) manually: to suit the passenger's height. The entire back • Activating and deactivating private locking of the head should be covered if possible. 1. Move the backrest upward/rearward. (p. 264) Manually move the restraint up or down as 2. Press the backrest until it locks into posi- needed. tion. 3. Fold up the head restraints manually.

}}

* Option/accessory. 195 SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL

|| Folding the rear seat outboard head restraints using the handle

To lower the restraint, push and hold the but- Tap the Headrest Fold button (see illustration) while carefully lowering ton to activate/deactivate the head restraint. folding. For vehicles with electrically folding* head restraints, the outboard head restraints can be WARNING folded using the handle on the top of the seat The center seat head restraint must be in (see illustration .) Note that this method its lowest position when the seat is not also folds down the backrests. To fold down occupied. When the center seat is occu- Manually push the head restraint until it clicks into position. only the head restraints, e.g. to improve visibil- pied, the head restraint must be correctly * adjusted to the passenger's height, cover- ity, use the center display instead. ing the entire back of the head if possible. WARNING Do not lower the head restraint if there are Folding the rear seat outboard head passengers in any of the rear seats. restraints using the center display* The outer head restraints can be folded via the center display's function view. The head WARNING restraint can be folded down when the vehicle The head restraint must be locked in the is in ignition mode 0. upright position after it has been folded up.

196 * Option/accessory. SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL

Steering wheel controls and horn Horn The steering wheel has a horn and controls for e.g. driver support systems and voice control.

For vehicles without electrically folding back- The horn is located in the center of the steering rests, fold the outboard head restraints man- wheel. ually using the inner control on the top of the Related information seat (see illustration ). * Steering wheel keypads and paddles . • Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 198) Related information Driver support system controls5. • Folding down the rear seat backrests * (p. 194) Paddle for manually shifting gears (automatic transmission). Controls for voice commands, accessing menus and messages, and handling phone calls.

5 Cruise Control, Adaptive Cruise Control*, Distance Alert* and Pilot Assist.

* Option/accessory. 197 SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL

Adjusting the steering wheel The steering wheel can be adjusted to various positions.

Steering wheel adjuster lever. 1. Move the lever forward to release the steering wheel. The steering wheel's reach and height can be adjusted. 2. Adjust the steering wheel to the desired position. WARNING 3. Pull the lever back to lock the steering Adjust the steering wheel and ensure it wheel into place. If the lever is difficult to locks into position before driving. Never move, press the steering wheel lightly adjust the steering wheel while driving. while pulling the lever. Related information Steering wheel force can be adjusted with • Steering wheel controls and horn (p. 197) speed-dependent power steering. Steering * wheel force is adjusted according to the vehi- • Adjusting the power front seats (p. 185) cle's speed to give the driver an enhanced sense of control and stability.

198 * Option/accessory. CLIMATE CONTROL CLIMATE CONTROL

Climate Climate zones 4-zone climate system* The vehicle is equipped with electronic cli- The vehicle is divided into climate zones to mate control. The climate system cools, heats make it possible to set different temperatures and dehumidifies the air in the passenger for different parts of the passenger compart- compartment. ment. All of the climate system functions are controlled from the center display and the buttons 2-zone climate system on the center console. Certain rear seat functions can also be controlled from the climate controls* on the rear of the tunnel console. Related information • Climate zones (p. 200) Climate zones with 4-zone climate system. • Climate control sensors (p. 201) In 4-zone climate systems, the passenger compartment temperature can be set sepa- • Perceived temperature (p. 201) rately for the left and right sides of the vehicle, • Climate control system voice commands and for the front and rear seats. (p. 202) Climate zones with 2-zone climate system. • Parking climate* (p. 226) Related information In 2-zone climate systems, the passenger • Climate (p. 200) • Air quality (p. 203) compartment temperature can be set sepa- • Air distribution (p. 206) rately for the left and right sides of the vehicle. • Climate system controls (p. 211)

200 * Option/accessory. CLIMATE CONTROL

Climate control sensors NOTE Perceived temperature The climate system has a number of sensors The climate control system regulates the cli- Do not cover or block the sensors with to help regulate the climate settings in the mate in the passenger compartment based clothing or other objects. vehicle. on perceived temperature, not actual temperature. Location of the sensors On vehicles equipped with the Interior Air The selected passenger compartment tem- Quality System*, there is also an air quality perature is based on the physical perception of sensor in the climate system's air intake. the current ambient temperature, airflow speed, humidity, sunlight in the passenger Related information compartment, etc. • Climate (p. 200) The system has a sunlight sensor that detects • Interior Air Quality System* (p. 204) which side of the vehicle the sunlight is shin- ing on and adjusts the temperature accordingly. This means that the temperature of the air coming out of the vents may be different for the left and right sides, even if the temperature setting is the same for both sides.

Sunlight sensors - on the upper side of the Related information dashboard. • Climate (p. 200) Humidity sensor - in the rearview mirror console. Ambient temperature sensor - in the right- side door mirror. Passenger compartment temperature sensor - near the buttons in the center console.

* Option/accessory. 201 CLIMATE CONTROL

Climate control system voice • "Turn on auto" - activates automatic cli- • "Raise seat ventilation"/"Lower seat commands1 mate control. ventilation" - raises/lowers the level of * Voice commands can be used for the climate • "Air condition on"/"Air condition off" - seat ventilation . control system to e.g. change temperature, activates/deactivates air conditioning. Related information activate seat heating* or change blower • "Recirculation on"/"Recirculation off" - • Climate (p. 200) speed. activates/deactivates air recirculation. • Voice Control (p. 146) Tap and say one of the following com- • "Turn on defroster "/"Turn off mands: • Use voice recognition (p. 147) defroster" - activates/deactivates win- • "Climate" - starts a command dialog for dow and door mirror defrosting. • Voice control settings (p. 150) climate controls and provides examples of • "Turn on max defroster"/"Turn off max commands that can be used. defroster" - activates/deactivates max • "Set temperature to X degrees" - sets defroster. desired temperature. • "Turn on rear defroster"/"Turn off rear • "Raise temperature"/"Lower defroster" - Activates/deactivates heated temperature" - raises/lowers the set tem- rear window and door mirrors. perature. • "Turn steering wheel heat on"/"Turn • "Sync temperature" - synchronizes the steering wheel heat off" - activates/ temperature for all climate zones in the deactivates heated steering wheel*. vehicle with the temperature set for the • "Raise steering wheel heat"/"Lower driver's side. steering wheel heat" - raises/lowers the • "Air on feet"/"Air on body" - opens the level of steering wheel heating*. desired air vent. • "Turn on seat heat"/"Turn off seat heat" • "Air on feet off"/"Air on body off" - - activates/deactivates seat heating*. closes the desired air vent. • "Raise seat heat"/"Lower seat heat" - • "Set fan to max"/"Turn off fan" - raises/lowers the level of seat heating*. changes blower speed to Max/Off. • "Turn on seat ventilation"/"Turn off • "Raise fan speed"/"Lower fan speed" - seat ventilation" - activates/deactivates raises/lowers the set blower speed. seat ventilation*.

1 Certain markets only.

202 * Option/accessory. CLIMATE CONTROL

Air quality • Passenger compartment air filter (p. 205) Clean Zone* The materials used in the passenger compart- The Clean Zone function monitors the condi- ment and air filtering system have been tions affecting good air quality in the passen- selected to ensure a high level of air quality in ger compartment and indicates whether they the passenger compartment. are fulfilled or not. Materials used in the passenger compartment The materials in the passenger compartment are designed to be pleasant and comfortable, even for people with asthma or allergies. The materials have been developed and tested to reduce dust in the passenger compartment and make it easier to keep clean. The mats in both the passenger compartment and cargo compartment can be easily removed for cleaning. The indicator is shown in the center dis- Use Volvo-recommended cleaning agents and play's Climate view. car care products to clean the interior. The indicator is shown in the climate bar Air filtering systems when Climate view is not open. In addition to the passenger compartment air If the conditions are not met, the text Clean filter, the vehicle is also equipped with other Zone will be shown in white. When all the air cleaning systems that help you maintain conditions are met, the text will change to high air quality in the passenger compartment. blue. Related information The following conditions must be met: • Climate (p. 200) • All doors and tailgate are closed. • Clean Zone* (p. 203) • All side windows and panoramic roof* are • Clean Zone Interior Package* (p. 204) closed. • Interior Air Quality System* (p. 204) }}

* Option/accessory. 203 CLIMATE CONTROL

|| • The Interior Air Quality System* is acti- Clean Zone Interior Package* Interior Air Quality System* vated. Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP) is a series Interior Air Quality System (IAQS) is a fully • The blower is activated. of modifications that filters even more allergy automatic air quality system that removes • Air recirculation is deactivated. and asthma-inducing substances from the gases and particles to reduce odors and con- passenger compartment. taminants in the passenger compartment. CZIP includes the following: IAQS is part of the Clean Zone Interior NOTE Package (CZIP) and removes air contaminants • An enhanced function that starts the such as particles, hydrocarbons, nitric oxides Clean Zone does not indicate that the air blower when the vehicle is unlocked using and ground-level ozone. quality is good, but only that the conditions the remote key. The blower will then fill for good air quality have been met. the passenger compartment with fresh air. If the system's air quality sensors detect con- The function starts when required and taminants in the outside air, the air intake Related information switches off automatically after a period of closes and air recirculation is activated. • Air quality (p. 203) time or when one of the passenger com- • Clean Zone Interior Package* (p. 204) partment doors is opened. The amount of NOTE time the blower runs gradually decreases • * Interior Air Quality System (p. 204) due to reduced need up until the vehicle is To ensure optimal air quality in the passen- • Passenger compartment air filter (p. 205) 4 years old. ger compartment, the air quality sensor should always be engaged. • The fully automatic Interior Air Quality System (IAQS). Recirculation is limited in cold weather to prevent fogging. Related information In the event of fogging, use the defroster • Air quality (p. 203) functions for the windshield, side windows • Clean Zone* (p. 203) and rear window. • Interior Air Quality System* (p. 204) • Passenger compartment air filter (p. 205) Related information • Activating and deactivating the air quality sensor* (p. 205) • Air quality (p. 203) • Clean Zone* (p. 203)

204 * Option/accessory. CLIMATE CONTROL

• Clean Zone Interior Package* (p. 204) Activating and deactivating the air Passenger compartment air filter • Passenger compartment air filter (p. 205) quality sensor* All air entering the passenger compartment The air quality sensor is part of the fully auto- through the climate control system intake is mated Interior Air Quality System (IAQS). filtered. The air quality sensor can be switched on or off. Replacing the passenger compartment filter 1. Tap Settings in the Top view in the center To maintain the high performance of the cli- display. mate control system, the filter must be 2. Tap Climate. replaced regularly. Follow Volvo's service schedule for recommended replacement inter- 3. Select Air Quality Sensor to activate/ vals. When driving in areas with a lot of smog, deactivate the air quality sensor. dust, etc., the filter may need to be changed Related information more frequently. • Interior Air Quality System* (p. 204) NOTE There are two types of passenger compartment filters. Make sure that the correct filter is installed.

Related information • Air quality (p. 203) • Clean Zone* (p. 203) • Clean Zone Interior Package* (p. 204) • Interior Air Quality System* (p. 204)

* Option/accessory. 205 CLIMATE CONTROL

Air distribution Adjusting air distribution The climate system distributes incoming air Air distribution can be adjusted manually if through a number of vents in the passenger needed. compartment. Automatic and manual air distribution When the auto-climate feature is on, air distribution is regulated automatically. Air distribu- 1. Tap the symbol in the center of the climate tion can also be controlled manually. bar to open Climate view in the center display. Adjustable air vents Certain air vents in the vehicle are adjustable, which means they can be opened/closed and Location of adjustable air vents in the passenger the direction of the air flow from the vent can compartment. be adjusted. 2-zone system - four vents on the dashboard and one on each of the pillars between the front and rear doors. 4-zone system* - two additional vents on the rear side of the tunnel console. Related information • Climate (p. 200) • Adjusting air distribution (p. 206) • Opening, closing and directing air vents (p. 207) • Air distribution options (p. 208)

206 * Option/accessory. CLIMATE CONTROL

Opening, closing and directing air Related information vents • Air distribution (p. 206) Some of the air vents in the passenger com- • Adjusting air distribution (p. 206) partment can be individually opened, closed • Air distribution options (p. 208) and directed. Misting can be eliminated by directing the outer air vents towards the door windows. Direct the outer air vents into the passenger compartment to maintain a comfortable temperature in warm weather. Opening and closing the air vents Air distribution buttons in Climate view. Air vents on the dashboard: Air distribution - windshield defrost vents – Turn the knob in the center of the air vent Air distribution - dashboard and center to open/close airflow from the vent. console air vents When the mark on the knob is vertical, the Air distribution - floor air vents airflow is strongest.

2. Tap one or more air distribution buttons to Air vents on the door pillars and rear side of open/close the airflow for that vent. the tunnel console*: > The air distribution changes and the – Turn the thumb wheel under the air vent buttons will light up or go out. to open/close the airflow from the vent. Related information The more white lines that are visible, the • Air distribution (p. 206) stronger the airflow. • Opening, closing and directing air vents Directing air flow (p. 207) – Move the lever in the center of the air vent • Air distribution options (p. 208) horizontally or vertically to direct the airflow from the vent.

* Option/accessory. 207 CLIMATE CONTROL

Air distribution options Air distribution can be adjusted manually if needed. The following options are available. Air distribution Purpose If all air distribution buttons are deselected in manual mode, the climate control system will revert to automatic mode.

Main airflow from defroster vents. Some airflow from other Helps remove ice and condensation in cold and humid weather vents. (blower speed should not be set too low).

Main airflow from dashboard vents. Some airflow from other Provides effective cooling in warm weather. vents.

Main airflow from floor vents. Some airflow from other vents. Provides heating or cooling in footwell areas.

208 CLIMATE CONTROL

Air distribution Purpose Main airflow from defroster and dashboard vents. Some air- Provides a comfortable climate in warm and dry weather. flow from other vents.

Main airflow from defroster and floor vents. Some airflow from Provides a comfortable climate and effective defogging in cold other vents. and humid weather.

Main airflow from dashboard and floor vents. Some airflow Provides a comfortable climate in sunny, cool weather. from other vents.

Main airflow from defroster, dashboard and floor vents. Provides balanced comfort in the passenger compartment.

}}

209 CLIMATE CONTROL

|| Related information • Air distribution (p. 206) • Opening, closing and directing air vents (p. 207) • Adjusting air distribution (p. 206)

210 CLIMATE CONTROL

Climate system controls Main climate The climate system functions are controlled In addition to the functions in the climate bar, from physical buttons on the center console, other main climate system functions can be the center display, and the climate panel on controlled from the Main climate tab. the rear side of the tunnel console*. Physical buttons in the center console

Temperature controls for driver and passenger side. Controls for heated* and ventilated* driver and front passenger seat, as well as heated steering wheel*. Button for opening Climate view. The Button for max defroster. graphic in the button shows activated climate system settings. Button for heated rear window and door mirrors. Climate view in the center display Tap the symbol in the center of the Climate bar in the center display climate bar to open Climate view. The most common climate system functions Depending on equipment level, Cli- Max Rear can be controlled from the climate bar. mate view may be divided into sev- , – Controls for defrosting win- eral tabs. Toggle between the tabs by swiping dows and door mirrors. the screen to the left/right or by tapping the AC - Air conditioning controls. desired heading. Recirc - Air recirculation controls.

}}

* Option/accessory. 211 CLIMATE CONTROL

|| Air distribution controls. Climate controls on the rear side of the tunnel console* Blower control for front seats2. AUTO - Automatic climate control.

Rear climate control* All climate system functions for the rear seat can be controlled from the Rear climate tab.

Rear seat heating control*.

Blower control for rear seats.

Rear seat temperature control.

Button for locking/unlocking climate panel. 2nd row climate - Rear seat climate func- * tion. Blower control for rear seats. If the vehicle has heated rear seats but does not have a climate panel on the rear side of the Rear seat temperature control. tunnel console, there will be buttons on the Rear seat heating control*. rear side of the tunnel console to control this function. * Parking climate The climate panel has a screen lock to help Parking climate functions can be controlled prevent inadvertently changing blower speed from the Parking climate tab. and temperature. When the screen is locked,

2 With the 2-zone climate system, the control is shared with the rear seat.

212 * Option/accessory. CLIMATE CONTROL only the controls for seat adjustment* and the • Synchronize temperature (p. 224) Activating and deactivating power unlock button will be displayed. • Activating and deactivating air condition- front seats* After unlocking, blower speed and tempera- ing (p. 225) The seats can be heated for added comfort ture can also be changed from the climate for the driver and passengers in cold weather. panel and all selected climate settings will be displayed. The screen locks automatically after a period of inactivity. Related information 1. Tap the left- or right-side steering wheel • Climate (p. 200) and seat button in the center display's cli- • Activating and deactivating power front mate bar to open the controls for steering seats* (p. 213) wheel and seat heating. • Activating and deactivating the heated If the vehicle is not equipped with ventila- rear seats* (p. 214) ted seats or heated steering wheel (for the driver's side), the button for seat heating is • Activating and deactivating front seat ven- directly accessible in the climate bar. tilation* (p. 215) • Activating and deactivating the heated steering wheel* (p. 216) • Activating auto climate control (p. 216) • Activating and deactivating recirculation 2. Tap the seat heating button repeatedly to (p. 217) select one of the four levels: Off, High, Medium or Low. • Activating and deactivating max defroster (p. 218) > The level is changed and the set level is displayed in the button. • Activating and deactivating the heated rear window and door mirrors (p. 219) Related information • Setting the blower speed for the front • Climate system controls (p. 211) seats (p. 220) • Activating and deactivating the heated • Setting the blower speed for the rear front seat* (p. 214) seats* (p. 221)

* Option/accessory. 213 CLIMATE CONTROL

Activating and deactivating the Activating and deactivating the Activating and deactivating the heated heated front seat* heated rear seats* rear seats from the rear seat The seats can be heated for added comfort The seats can be heated for added comfort With 2-zone system: for the driver and passengers in cold weather. for the driver and passengers in cold weather. Seat heating can be set to automatically activate when the engine is started. When set to Activating and deactivating the heated automatically activate, heating will be turned rear seats from the front seats* on at low ambient temperatures. 1. Tap Settings in the Top view in the center display. 2. Tap Climate. 1. Tap the symbol in the center of the climate bar to open Climate view in the center dis- 3. Select Auto Driver Seat Heating Level play. and Auto Passenger Seat Heating Level to activate/deactivate automatic start of 2. Select the Rear climate tab. heated driver's and passenger seat. Buttons for seat heating on the rear side of the tun- > An "A" will be displayed next to the rel- nel console. evant seat heating button in the climate – Press repeatedly on the left or right seat bar when auto start has been activated. heating buttons on the rear side of the 3. Tap the seat heating button repeatedly to 4. tunnel console to select one of four levels: Select Low, Medium or High to select select one of the four levels: Off, High, level after the function has been activated. Off, High, Medium or Low. Medium or Low. > The level is changed and the indicator Related information > The level is changed and the set level is lights in the button display the level. • Climate system controls (p. 211) displayed in the button. • Activating and deactivating power front seats* (p. 213)

214 * Option/accessory. CLIMATE CONTROL

With 4-zone system*: Activating and deactivating front seat ventilation* The seats can be ventilated to provide increased comfort in warm weather. 2. Tap the seat ventilation button repeatedly The ventilation system consists of fans in the to select one of the four levels: Off, High, seats and backrest that draw air through the seat upholstery. The cooler the passenger Medium or Low. compartment is, the greater the cooling effect > The level is changed and the set level is of the ventilation. The system can be activated displayed in the button. when the engine is running. Related information • Climate system controls (p. 211)

Seat heating controls and indicator lights on the rear side of the tunnel console. 1. Tap the left- or right-side steering wheel – Press repeatedly on the left or right seat and seat button in the center display's cli- heating buttons in the climate panel on mate bar to open the controls for steering the tunnel console to select one of four wheel and seat heating. levels: Off, High, Medium or Low. If the vehicle is not equipped with heated > The level will be changed and the cli- seats or heated steering wheel (for the mate panel screen will show the new driver's side), the button for seat ventila- level. tion is directly accessible in the climate bar. Related information • Climate system controls (p. 211)

* Option/accessory. 215 CLIMATE CONTROL

Activating and deactivating the Activating and deactivating Activating auto climate control heated steering wheel* automatic steering wheel heating* If auto climate control is activated, several cli- The steering wheel can be heated for added The steering wheel can be heated for added mate system functions are controlled auto- comfort in cold weather. comfort in cold weather. matically. Steering wheel heating can be set to automatically activate when the engine is started. When set to automatically activate, heating will be turned on at low ambient tempera- 1. Tap the driver's side steering wheel and tures. 1. Tap the symbol in the center of the climate seat button in the climate bar in the center bar to open Climate view in the center dis- display to open the controls for steering 1. Tap Settings in the Top view in the center play. display. wheel and seat heating. 2. Tap or press and hold AUTO Climate If the vehicle is not equipped with heated 2. Tap Climate. • Tap - air recirculation, air conditioning or ventilated seats, the button for steering 3. Select Auto Steering Wheel Heating and air distribution are controlled auto- wheel heating is directly accessible in the Level to activate/deactivate automatic matically. climate bar. start of heated steering wheel. • Press and hold - air recirculation, air > An "A" will be displayed next to the conditioning and air distribution are heated steering wheel button in the cli- controlled automatically. Temperature mate bar when auto start has been and blower speed are changed to activated. standard settings: 22 °C (72 °F) and 2. Tap the steering wheel heating button 4. Select Low, Medium or High to select speed 3 (speed 2 in the rear seat3). repeatedly to select one of the four levels: level after the function has been activated. Off, High, Medium or Low. > Auto climate mode is activated and the button lights up. > The level is changed and the set level is Related information displayed in the button. • Activating and deactivating the heated steering wheel* (p. 216) Related information • Climate system controls (p. 211) • Activating and deactivating automatic steering wheel heating* (p. 216)

3 For vehicles with 4-zone climate system*.

216 * Option/accessory. CLIMATE CONTROL

NOTE Activating and deactivating Related information recirculation • Climate system controls (p. 211) It is possible to change the temperature The climate system's recirculation function • and blower speed without deactivating Activating and deactivating the recircula- helps shut out smog, smoke, exhaust fumes, automatic climate control. Automatic cli- tion timer setting (p. 218) etc. by reusing the air in the passenger com- mate control is deactivated when the air partment. distribution is changed manually or when the max defroster is activated.

Related information • Climate system controls (p. 211) 1. Tap the symbol in the center of the climate bar to open Climate view in the center display.

2. Tap Recirc. > Air recirculation is activated/deactivated and the button lights up/goes out.

CAUTION If the air in the vehicle is recirculated too long, there is a risk of fogging on the inside of the windows.

NOTE Recirculation cannot be activated when the max defroster is on.

217 CLIMATE CONTROL

Activating and deactivating the Activating and deactivating max recirculation timer setting defroster The climate system's recirculation function Max defroster is used to quickly remove con- helps shut out smog, smoke, exhaust fumes, densation and ice from windows. etc. by reusing the air in the passenger com- Max defroster deactivates automatic climate partment. control and air recirculation, activates the air When the recirculation timer is activated, air conditioning, and changes blower speed to 5 recirculation will switch off automatically after and temperature to HI. 20 minutes. 1. Tap Settings in the Top view in the center NOTE display. The volume increases when the blower 2. Tap Climate. speed is changed to 5. Button in center console. 3. Tap Recirculation Timer to activate/ – Tap the button. deactivate the recirculation timer. When max defroster is deactivated, the cli- > The max defroster is activated/deacti- mate system reverts to the previous settings. vated and the button lights up/goes Related information out. • Activating and deactivating recirculation Activating and deactivating max (p. 217) defroster from the center console Activating and deactivating max A button in the center console offers quick defroster from the center display access to the max defroster.

1. Tap the symbol in the center of the climate bar to open Climate view in the center display.

218 CLIMATE CONTROL

Activating and deactivating the Activating and deactivating the heated heated rear window and door rear window and door mirrors from mirrors the center display The heated rear window and door mirrors are 2. Tap Max. used to quickly remove condensation and ice > The max defroster is activated/deacti- from the glass. vated and the button lights up/goes out. Activating and deactivating the heated 1. Tap the symbol in the center of the climate rear window and door mirrors from bar to open Climate view in the center dis- Related information the center console play. • Climate system controls (p. 211) A button in the center console offers quick access to the heated rear window and door mirrors functions.

2. Tap Rear. > Heated windows and door mirrors are activated and the button lights up/goes out. Related information • Climate system controls (p. 211) • Automatically activating and deactivating the heated rear window and door mirrors (p. 220)

Button in center console. – Tap the button. > Heated windows and door mirrors are activated and the button lights up/goes out.

219 CLIMATE CONTROL

Automatically activating and Setting the blower speed for the deactivating the heated rear front seats4 window and door mirrors The blower can be set to several different The heated rear window and door mirrors are automatically controlled speeds for the front used to quickly remove condensation and ice seat. from the glass. It is possible to select whether rear window and door mirror heating should be automatically activated or deactivated when the engine is started. With automatic start activated, 1. Tap the symbol in the center of the climate heating will be activated when there is a risk bar to open Climate view in the center dis- of ice or condensation on the windows or mir- play. rors. Heating is automatically switched off Blower control buttons in Climate view. when the window or door mirror is sufficiently 2. Tap the desired blower speed: Off, 1-5 or warm and the condensation or ice is gone. Max. 1. Tap Settings in the Top view in the center > The blower speed will be changed and display. the buttons for the set speed will light up. 2. Tap Climate. 3. Select Auto Rear Defroster to activate/ CAUTION deactivate automatic rear window and door heating. The air conditioning will not engage if the blower is turned off completely, which may Related information cause fogging on the inside of the win- • Activating and deactivating the heated dows. rear window and door mirrors (p. 219)

4 The same setting applies to the rear seats with the 2-zone climate system.

220 CLIMATE CONTROL

NOTE Setting the blower speed for the rear seats* The climate system automatically adapts The blower can be set to several different airflow as needed within the set blower automatically controlled speeds for the rear speed, which means that airflow speed seat. may vary slightly within the same blower speed. Setting blower speed for the rear seats from the front seats Related information • Climate system controls (p. 211)

1. Tap the symbol in the center of the climate Blower control buttons in the Rear climate tab in bar to open Climate view in the center dis- Climate view. play. 3. Tap the desired blower speed, 1-5. 2. Select the Rear climate tab. The blower speed for the rear seats can be switched off by tapping 2nd row climate. > The blower speed will be changed and the buttons for the set speed will light up. Setting blower speed for the rear seats from the rear seats 1. Tap the unlock button on the tunnel console's climate panel to access the controls.

}}

* Option/accessory. 221 CLIMATE CONTROL

|| NOTE Setting the temperature for the front seats5 The climate system automatically adapts airflow as needed within the set blower The temperature can be set to the desired speed, which means that airflow speed number of degrees for the front seat climate may vary slightly within the same blower zones. speed.

Related information • Climate system controls (p. 211)

Blower controls on the rear climate panel of the tunnel console. 2. Tap the desired blower speed, 1-5. > The blower speed will be changed and the buttons for the set speed will light up. Temperature buttons in the climate bar. 1. Tap the left- or right-side temperature but- NOTE tons in the center display's climate bar to The blower speed for the rear seat cannot open the control. be set if the blower speed for the front seat is Off. The rear seat blower speed can only be turned off from the climate view in the center display.

5 The same setting applies to the rear seats with the 2-zone climate system.

222 CLIMATE CONTROL

Setting the temperature for the rear seats* The temperature can be set to the desired number of degrees for the rear seat climate zones. Setting the temperature for the rear seats from the front seats

Temperature control. 1. Tap the symbol in the center of the climate Temperature buttons in the Rear climate tab in bar to open Climate view in the center dis- 2. Set the temperature by doing one of the Climate view. play. following: 3. Tap the left- or right-side temperature but- 2. Select the Rear climate tab. ton to open the control. • dragging the control to the desired temperature, or • tapping +− to raise/lower the temperature. > The temperature will be set and the button will display the new temperature.

NOTE Heating/cooling cannot be accelerated by choosing a higher/lower temperature than the desired temperature.

Related information • Climate system controls (p. 211) }}

* Option/accessory. 223 CLIMATE CONTROL

|| Synchronize temperature The temperature in the different climate zones of the vehicle can be synchronized with the temperature set for the driver's side.

Temperature control. Temperature controls on the rear climate panel of the tunnel console. 4. Set the temperature by: • 2. Tap the left or right side's <> buttons to dragging the control to the desired lower/raise the temperature. temperature. Synchronization button on the driver's side tempera- • > The temperature will be changed and tapping +− to raise/lower the tempera- the climate panel screen will show the ture control. ture. new temperature. 1. Tap the driver's side temperature button in > The temperature will be set and the the center display's climate bar to open button will display the new tempera- NOTE the control. ture. Heating/cooling cannot be accelerated by 2. Tap Synchronize temperature . Setting the temperature for the rear choosing a higher/lower temperature than > The temperature for all of the vehicle's seats from the rear seats the desired temperature. climate zones will be synchronized with 1. Tap the unlock button on the tunnel con- the one set for the driver's side and the sole's climate panel to access the con- Related information synchronization symbol will be dis- trols. • Climate system controls (p. 211) played next to the temperature button. Synchronization is stopped with another press on Synchronize temperature or by changing the temperature setting for a climate zone other than the driver's.

224 CLIMATE CONTROL

Related information Activating and deactivating air NOTE • Climate system controls (p. 211) conditioning The air conditioning cannot be activated The air conditioning cools and dehumidifies when the fan speed is set to Off. incoming air as needed. When the air conditioning is activated, it will be switched on and off automatically by the Related information climate system as needed. • Climate system controls (p. 211)

1. Tap the symbol in the center of the climate bar to open Climate view in the center display.

2. Tap AC. > The air conditioning is activated/deactivated and the button lights up/goes out.

NOTE For optimal air conditioning function, close all the side windows and the panoramic roof*.

* Option/accessory. 225 CLIMATE CONTROL

Parking climate* Preconditioning* Starting and stopping Parking climate is an umbrella term for vari- Preconditioning is a climate function that, if preconditioning* ous functions that improve the passenger possible, attempts to achieve a comfortable Preconditioning ventilates the passenger compartment climate when the vehicle is temperature in the passenger compartment compartment, if possible, before driving. The parked, e.g. preconditioning. before driving. function can be started in the center display Parking climate functions are con- Preconditioning can be started immediately or or from a cellular phone. trolled from the Parking climate tab started at a preset time using a timer. in the center display's Climate view. Starting and stopping from the vehicle Tap the symbol in the center of the In warm weather, the ventilation system cools climate bar to open Climate view. the passenger compartment by blowing air in from outside. The function cannot heat the Related information passenger compartment. • Climate (p. 200) 1. Tap the symbol in the center of the climate • Preconditioning* (p. 226) NOTE bar to open Climate view in the center display. • Climate comfort retaining function* During preconditioning of the passenger (p. 230) compartment, the vehicle works to reach a 2. Select the Parking climate tab. * comfortable temperature and not the tem- • Parking climate symbols and messages 3. Tap Preconditioning. (p. 231) perature set in the climate system. > Preconditioning starts/stops and the button lights up/goes out. Related information • Parking climate* (p. 226) NOTE • Starting and stopping preconditioning* (p. 226) The vehicle doors and windows should be closed during preconditioning of the pas- * • Preconditioning timer (p. 227) senger compartment.

Starting from app* A device with the Volvo On Call* app can be used to start preconditioning or check settings. Preconditioning ventilates the passen-

226 * Option/accessory. CLIMATE CONTROL ger compartment by blowing in air from out- Preconditioning timer* Adding and editing timer settings side. The timer can be set to finish preconditioning for preconditioning* The passenger compartment can also be pre- at a predetermined time. The preconditioning timer can store up to 8 conditioned using the Engine Remote Start The timer can store up to 8 preset times for: preset timer settings. (ERS)6 function using the Volvo On Call* app. • A time on a particular date Adding a timer setting Related information • A time on one or more days of the week, • Parking climate* (p. 226) with or without the repeat function. • Preconditioning* (p. 226) Related information • Preconditioning timer* (p. 227) • Preconditioning* (p. 226) • Adding and editing timer settings for preconditioning* (p. 227) • Activating and deactivating preconditioning timer* (p. 228) • Deleting preconditioning timer settings* (p. 229)

Button for adding a timer setting in the Parking climate tab in Climate view. 1. Open Climate view in the center display. 2. Select the Parking climate tab.

6 Certain markets only. }}

* Option/accessory. 227 CLIMATE CONTROL

|| 3. Tap Add timer. Editing a timer setting Activating and deactivating > A pop-up window will appear. 1. Open Climate view in the center display. preconditioning timer* 2. Select the Parking climate tab. Timer settings in the preconditioning timer NOTE can be activated or deactivated as needed. 3. Tap the timer setting you would like to It is not possible to add a time setting if change. there are already 8 settings for the timer. > A pop-up window will appear. Delete a time setting to be able to add a new one. 4. To edit a timer setting, follow the procedures described under the heading "Add- ing a timer setting" above. 4. Tap Date to set a time for a specific date. Tap Days to set a time for one or more Related information * days of the week. • Preconditioning (p. 226) • Preconditioning timer* (p. 227) With Days: Activate/deactivate the repeat function by selecting/deselecting the • Activating and deactivating precondition- * Repeat weekly checkbox. ing timer (p. 228) Timer buttons in the Parking climate tab in Climate * 5. With Date: Select a date for precondition- • Deleting preconditioning timer settings view. ing by scrolling in the date list using the (p. 229) 1. Open Climate view in the center display. arrows. 2. Select the Parking climate tab. With Days: Select days of the week for 3. Activate/deactivate a timer setting by tap- preconditioning by tapping the buttons for ping the timer button to the right of the the days. setting. 6. Set the time at which preconditioning > The timer setting is activated/deacti- should be completed by scrolling using vated and the button lights up/goes the arrows in the clock. out. 7. Confirm Tap to add a timer setting. Related information > The timer setting will be added to the • Preconditioning* (p. 226) list and activated. • Preconditioning timer* (p. 227)

228 * Option/accessory. CLIMATE CONTROL

• Adding and editing timer settings for pre- Deleting preconditioning timer • Adding and editing timer settings for preconditioning* (p. 227) settings* conditioning* (p. 227) • Deleting preconditioning timer settings* A preconditioning timer setting that is no • Activating and deactivating precondition- (p. 229) longer needed can be deleted. ing timer* (p. 228)

The button for editing a list/deleting a timer setting in the Parking climate tab in Climate view. 1. Open Climate view in the center display. 2. Select the Parking climate tab. 3. Tap Edit list. 4. Tap the editing icon to the right in the list. > The icon will change to the text Delete. 5. Tap Delete to confirm. > The timer setting will be deleted from the list. Related information • Preconditioning* (p. 226) • Preconditioning timer* (p. 227)

* Option/accessory. 229 CLIMATE CONTROL

Climate comfort retaining Starting and switching off the NOTE function* climate retaining function when Climate comfort maintenance will be deac- The climate in the passenger compartment parking* tivated if the vehicle is locked from the out- can be maintained when the vehicle is The climate retaining function maintains the side in order to avoid using residual engine parked, e.g. if the engine is turned off but the climate settings in the vehicle after the heat unnecessarily. This function is driver or passengers remain in the vehicle. engine has been switched off. The function intended to be used to maintain climate This function can only be direct-started. can be activated in the center display. comfort when the driver or a passenger The function utilizes several of the vehicle's remains in the vehicle after the engine is systems: turned off. • Residual heat from the engine is used to help heat the passenger compartment to a 1. Tap the symbol in the center of the climate Related information comfortable temperature. bar to open Climate view in the center dis- • Climate comfort retaining function* • In warm weather, the ventilation system play. (p. 230) cools the passenger compartment by 2. Select the Parking climate tab. blowing air in from outside. 3. Tap Keep climate comfort. NOTE > The climate comfort retaining function will be activated/deactivated and the Climate comfort maintenance will be deac- button light will go on/off. tivated if the vehicle is locked from the outside in order to avoid using residual engine NOTE heat unnecessarily. This function is intended to be used to maintain climate Maintained climate comfort is not possible comfort when the driver or a passenger when there is not sufficient residual engine remains in the vehicle after the engine is heat to maintain the climate settings in the turned off. passenger compartment, or if the outside temperature is above approximately 20 °C (68 °F). Related information • Parking climate* (p. 226) • Starting and switching off the climate retaining function when parking* (p. 230)

230 * Option/accessory. CLIMATE CONTROL

Parking climate symbols and Messages related to parking climate can also messages* be displayed in a device that has the Volvo On * A number of symbols and messages related Call app. to parking climate may be displayed in the instrument panel.

Symbol Message Meaning

Parking climate Parking climate is not functioning properly. Contact a workshopA to have the system checked as soon as Service required possible.

Parking climate Parking climate is temporarily not functioning properly. If the problem persists, contact a workshopA to have Temporarily unavailable the system checked.

A An authorized Volvo workshop is recommended.

Related information • Parking climate* (p. 226)

* Option/accessory. 231

KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

Lock indication Lock and alarm indicators on the Lock button indicators The turn signals will flash when the vehicle is dashboard Front door locked or unlocked. Exterior confirmation Locking • The turn signals will flash once and the door mirrors will fold in1 to confirm the vehicle is locked. Unlocking • The turn signals will flash twice and the door mirrors will fold out1 to confirm the vehicle is unlocked. The tailgate, hood and all doors must be The locks and alarm indicator will display the Lock buttons with indicator lights in front door. closed for confirmation to be given. If only the status of the locking system: Illuminated indicator lights in both front door driver's door is closed when the vehicle is • One long flash indicates locking. lock buttons indicate that all doors are locked. locked2, the vehicle will be locked but the turn • If any door is opened, the lights in both doors signals will only flash to indicate locking when When the vehicle is locked, this will be will go out. all doors and the tailgate and hood have been indicated by short, pulsating flashes. closed. • Rapid flashing after disabling the alarm indicates that the alarm has been triggered.

1 Only vehicles with power folding mirrors. 2 Does not apply to vehicles equipped with keyless locking/unlocking*.

234 * Option/accessory. KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

Rear door* Lock confirmation settings Related information Settings for how the vehicle confirms locking • Lock indication (p. 234) and unlocking can be adjusted in the center display's Settings menu. To change the locking response settings: 1. Tap Settings in the center display's Top view. 2. Tap My Car Locking. 3. Tap Visible Locking Feedback to select when the vehicle should provide a visible response: Lock button with indicator light in rear door. • Lock Illuminated indicator lights in each door indi- • Unlock cate that that particular door is locked. If any • Both door is unlocked and opened, the indicator light in that door will go out. The lights in the Or turn off the function by marking Off . other doors will remain illuminated. 4. Select to receive an audible response when locking the vehicle by marking Other indicators Audible Locking Feedback. The approach lighting and home safe lighting functions may be activated when locking and To change the settings for folding door mir- unlocking. rors* when locking: Related information 1. Tap Settings in the center display's Top • Lock confirmation settings (p. 235) view. • Welcome Light (p. 162) 2. Tap My Car Mirrors and Convenience. • Using home safe lighting (p. 162) 3. Select Fold Mirror When Locked to activate or deactivate the function.

* Option/accessory. 235 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

Remote key The remote keys can be linked to different Tailgate - Unlock and disarm the tailgate The remote key is used to lock and unlock driver profiles to store personal settings in the only. On vehicles equipped with the power doors, the tailgate and the fuel filler door. The vehicle. tailgate*, press and hold to automatically open the tailgate. Press and hold to close remote key must be in the vehicle in order to Remote key buttons start the engine. an open tailgate (an audible warning signal will be given). Panic alarm - Used to attract attention in emergency situations. Press and hold the button for at least 3 seconds or press twice within 3 seconds to activate the turn signals and horn. To deactivate, wait at least 5 seconds and press the button again. If no action is taken, the panic alarm will deactivate automatically after 3 minutes.

The remote key has four buttons, one on the left side WARNING 3 * Remote key and button-less key (Key Tag) . and three on the right. If anyone is left in the vehicle, make sure The remote key is not physically used to start Locking - Press once to lock the doors, that power to the power windows and pan- * the ignition because the vehicle is standard- tailgate and fuel filler door and arm the oramic roof is cut off by always taking the remote key with you when you leave the equipped with keyless start (Passive Start). alarm. The key only needs to be in the front section of vehicle. Press and hold to close all windows. the passenger compartment. Unlocking - Press once to unlock the For vehicles equipped with keyless locking doors, tailgate and fuel filler door and dis- * and unlocking (Passive Entry) , the engine can arm the alarm. be started with the key anywhere in the vehicle. A smaller, lighter and button-less key (Key Press and hold to open all windows at the Tag) is also provided. same time. This total airing function can be used to e.g. quickly air out the vehicle in hot weather.

3 The illustration is generic - details may vary according to vehicle model.

236 * Option/accessory. KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

NOTE audio system volume. It helps vehicle owners NOTE ensure that the vehicle is being operated Be aware of the risk of locking the remote responsibly by other drivers. When the remote control key is placed in key in the vehicle. the cup holder, make sure that no other Interference vehicle keys, metal objects or electronic • If the remote key or key tag is left in Electromagnetic fields or obstructing objects devices (e.g. cell phones, tablets, laptops the vehicle, it will be deactivated when may interfere with the remote key's functions or chargers) are found in the cup holder. the vehicle is locked and the alarm set for keyless start and keyless locking and Multiple vehicle keys close to each other in using another valid key. The key will be unlocking*. the cup holder can disrupt their functional- reactivated when the vehicle is ity. unlocked. NOTE • If the remote key or Red Key is left in the vehicle, it will be deactivated even Avoid storing the remote control key near WARNING if the vehicle is locked using Volvo On metal objects or electronic devices, e.g. California Proposition 65 Call, and will be reactivated when the cell phones, tablets, laptops or chargers – vehicle is unlocked using Volvo On Call preferably no closer than 10-15 cm Operating, servicing and maintaining a pas- (4-6 in.). senger vehicle can expose you to chemi- or another valid key. cals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead, which are Button-less key (Key Tag)* If you experience interference, use the remote known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproduc- The button-less key4 provided with the keyless key's detachable blade to unlock the vehicle and then place the remote key in the backup tive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid locking and unlocking function works in the breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine reader in the tunnel console cup holder to dis- same way as the regular remote key for key- except as necessary, service your vehicle in less start, locking and unlocking. The key is arm the alarm and start the vehicle. a well ventilated area and wear gloves or waterproof up to a depth of approx. 10 meters wash your hands frequently when servicing (30 feet) for up to 60 minutes. It does not your vehicle. For more information go to have a detachable key blade and its battery www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger- cannot be replaced. vehicle. Red Key - restricted remote key* A Red Key is a key that makes it possible to set restrictions for some of the vehicle's functions, e.g. maximum speed and maximum

4 Also called sport key. }}

* Option/accessory. 237 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

|| Related information Locking and unlocking using the NOTE • Starting the vehicle (p. 382) remote key Be aware of the risk of locking the remote • All doors, tailgate and fuel filler door can be Locking and unlocking using the remote key in the vehicle. key (p. 238) locked and unlocked simultaneously using the buttons on the remote key. • If the remote key or key tag is left in • Remote key range (p. 240) the vehicle, it will be deactivated when • Replacing the remote key's battery Locking with remote key the vehicle is locked and the alarm set (p. 241) using another valid key. The key will be • Detachable key blade (p. 247) reactivated when the vehicle is unlocked. • Electronic immobilizer (p. 249) • If the remote key or Red Key is left in • Linking a remote key to a driver profile the vehicle, it will be deactivated even (p. 139) if the vehicle is locked using Volvo On Call, and will be reactivated when the vehicle is unlocked using Volvo On Call or another valid key.

Locking when the tailgate is open

The illustration is generic - details may vary according to vehicle model. NOTE If the vehicle is locked and the tailgate is – Press the button on the remote key to still open, make sure that the remote key is lock the vehicle. not left in the cargo compartment when To activate the locking sequence, the driver's the tailgate is closed and the entire vehicle door must be closed5. If any of the other doors is locked6. or the tailgate are open, they will be locked and the alarm will be armed once they are closed.

5 If the vehicle is equipped with keyless locking/unlocking*, all side doors must be closed. 6 If the vehicle is equipped with keyless locking/unlocking and the key is detected inside the vehicle, the tailgate will not lock when it is closed.*

238 * Option/accessory. KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

Unlocking with remote key • Locking and unlocking with detachable Settings for remote and inside – Press the button on the remote key to key blade (p. 248) door unlock unlock the vehicle. Several different sequences are available for remote unlocking. Automatic relocking To change this setting: If none of the doors or tailgate are opened within two minutes after being unlocked, they 1. Tap Settings in the center display's Top will automatically relock. This function reduces view. the risk of inadvertently leaving the vehicle 2. Tap My Car Locking Remote and unlocked. Interior Unlock. Remote key not working 3. Select alternative: • All Doors – unlocks all doors at the NOTE same time. Move closer to the vehicle and try to • Single Door – unlocks the driver's unlock it again. door. Press the remote key unlock button twice to unlock all doors. If the remote key is not working to lock or The settings made here also affect central unlock the vehicle, its battery may be dis- locking using the inside door handle. charged. Use the detachable key blade to lock/unlock the driver's door instead. Related information • Locking and unlocking using the remote Related information key (p. 238) • Settings for remote and inside door unlock • Locking and unlocking from inside the (p. 239) vehicle (p. 255) • Unlocking the tailgate using the remote key (p. 240) • Remote key (p. 236) • Replacing the remote key's battery (p. 241)

239 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

Unlocking the tailgate using the 2. With the optional power tailgate* . Remote key range remote key Hold and press (about 1.5 seconds) the In order to function correctly, the remote key The remote key can be used to unlock the button on the remote key. must be within a certain distance from the tailgate while keeping the rest of the vehicle vehicle. locked. > The tailgate will unlock and open. How- ever, the side doors will remain locked Manual use and armed. The remote key's functions for e.g. locking and Related information unlocking, which are activated by pressing • Locking and unlocking using the remote or , have a range of approx. 20 meters key (p. 238) (65 feet) from the vehicle. • Opening and closing the power tailgate* If the vehicle's locks do not react, move closer (p. 259) and try again. Keyless* use

1. Press the button on the remote key. > The tailgate will be unlocked but remain closed. The side doors remain locked and armed. The lock and alarm indicator on the dashboard will go out to indicate that the vehicle is no longer fully locked. The shaded areas around the vehicle illustrate the Press lightly on the rubberized pressure range of the system's antennas. plate under the tailgate handle to open the tailgate. If the tailgate is not opened For keyless use, a remote key or the Key Tag within 2 minutes, it will be relocked and must be within the shaded areas shown in the the alarm armed. illustration, i.e. a semicircle with a radius of

240 * Option/accessory. KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM approx. 1.5 meter (5 feet) along the sides of Replacing the remote key's battery key can be ordered from an authorized Volvo the vehicle or approx. 1 meter (3 feet) from the The battery in the remote key must be workshop. tailgate. replaced when it is discharged. NOTE CAUTION NOTE All batteries have a limited service life and An end-of-life Key Tag must be turned in to The functions of the remote control key must eventually be replaced (does not an authorized Volvo workshop. The key can be disrupted by ambient radio waves, apply for Key Tag). The battery's service life must be deleted from the vehicle because buildings, topographical conditions, etc. varies depending on how often the it can still be used to start the vehicle via The vehicle can always be locked/unlocked vehicle/key is used. backup start. using the key blade. Opening the key and replacing the If the remote key is removed from the battery vehicle If the remote key is removed from the vehicle while the engine is run- The remote key battery should be replaced if ning, the warning message Vehicle • the information symbol illuminates and the key not found Removed from message Vehicle key bat. low is dis- vehicle will be displayed in the instrument played in the instrument panel panel and an audible signal will sound when the last door is closed. • the locks do not react after several attempts to lock or unlock the vehicle The message will disappear when the key is using the remote key within approx. returned to the vehicle and the O button on 20 meter (65 feet) from the vehicle. Hold the remote key with the front side the right-side steering wheel keypad is (with the Volvo logo) facing up and move pressed or when the last door is closed again. NOTE the button on the key ring section to the right. Slide the front cover slightly upward. Related information Move closer to the vehicle and try to • Remote key (p. 236) unlock it again. The cover will loosen and can be • Antenna locations for the start and lock removed from the key. system (p. 254) The battery in the smaller key without but- • Keyless and touch-sensitive surfaces* tons7 (the Key Tag) cannot be replaced. A new (p. 251) }}

* Option/accessory. 241 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

Turn the key over, move the button to Use a screwdriver or similar object to turn The battery's positive side (+) faces the side and slide the rear cover slightly the battery cover counterclockwise so the upward. Carefully pry out the battery as upward. markers point to OPEN. shown in the illustration. Remove the cover carefully by pressing The cover will loosen and can be CAUTION removed from the key. e.g. a fingernail into the indentation. Pry the cover up. Avoid touching new batteries and their contact surfaces with your fingers as this will impair their function.

7 Included in vehicles equipped with keyless locking/unlocking*.

242 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

NOTE Volvo recommends that batteries used in the remote control key satisfy UN Manual of Test and Criteria, Part III, sub-section 38.3. The factory installed batteries and batteries replaced by an authorized Volvo workshop satisfy the above criterion.

Insert a new battery with the positive side Put the rear cover back into position (+) facing upward. Do not touch the con- and press it down until it clicks into place. tact surfaces of the remote key battery. Slide the cover back. Place the edge of the battery down- > A second click indicates that the cover ward into the holder. Slide the battery for- is correctly positioned and locked into ward until it locks into place under the two place. plastic catches. Press the battery downward until it locks into place under the upper black Replace the battery cover and turn it plastic catch. clockwise until it points to CLOSE.

NOTE Use batteries with the designation CR2032, 3 V.

}}

243 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

|| WARNING Ordering additional remote keys Two remote keys are provided with the vehi- California Proposition 65 cle. One Key Tag is also included if the vehi- Operating, servicing and maintaining a pas- cle is equipped with keyless locking/unlock- senger vehicle can expose you to chemi- ing*. Additional keys can be ordered. cals including engine exhaust, carbon mon- A total of 12 keys can be programmed and oxide, phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause used for the same vehicle. An additional driver cancer and birth defects or other reproduc- profile will be added for each new remote key. tive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid This also applies to the key tag. breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine Turn the remote key over and press the except as necessary, service your vehicle in Loss of a remote key front cover down until it clicks into place. a well ventilated area and wear gloves or If you lose your remote key, you can order a wash your hands frequently when servicing replacement from a workshop - an authorized Slide the cover back. your vehicle. For more information go to Volvo workshop is recommended. Bring the > An additional click indicates that the www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger- other remaining remote keys to the workshop. vehicle. cover is correctly in place. As an anti-theft measure, the code of the lost remote key must be erased from the system. Related information CAUTION The current number of keys registered for the • Locking and unlocking with detachable Be sure to dispose of end-of-life batteries vehicle can be checked via driver profiles in key blade (p. 248) in a way that protects the environment. the center display's Top view. Select Settings • Starting the vehicle (p. 382) System Driver Profiles. • Remote key (p. 236)

244 * Option/accessory. KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

* NOTE Red Key - restricted remote key Driver profile for Red Key A Red Key makes it possible for the vehicle A Red Key is linked to a specific Red Key Volvo recommends that you order a new or owner to set limitations for certain vehicle driver profile, and when it is active the key's duplicate remote control key from an properties. The limitations are intended to settings cannot be changed. It is also not pos- authorized Volvo workshop. promote safe use of the vehicle, e.g. when it sible to switch to another driver profile, as this You can also obtain additional or duplicate is loaned out. requires a regular remote key. remote control keys from certain independ- The Red Key driver profile is activated when ent repair facilities and locksmiths that are the vehicle is unlocked using a Red Key with- qualified to make remote control keys. out a regular remote key nearby. Each key must be programmed to work with your vehicle. NOTE A list of independent repair facilities and/or If the vehicle changes owners, the vehicle locksmiths known to Volvo that can cut must be locked and then unlocked for a and code replacement keys can be found: new driver profile to be activated. • on Volvo's website www.volvocars.com/us Ordering a Red Key • by calling Volvo Customer Care One or more Red Key can be ordered from a 1-800-458-1552. Volvo retailer. A total of twelve keys can be For a Red Key, it is possible to define the vehi- programmed and used for the same vehicle. Related information cle's maximum speed, set speed reminders Up to ten may be restricted keys, but at least and limit the audio system's volume. Several • Remote key (p. 236) two must be standard remote keys. of the driver support systems will also always be active. Otherwise, the Red Key functions in Related information the same way as a standard remote key. • Settings for Red Key* (p. 246) These restrictions are intended to help reduce • Remote key (p. 236) the risk of accidents and help the driver feel more secure when handing over the vehicle to e.g. a young driver, parking attendant or workshop.

* Option/accessory. 245 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

Settings for Red Key* Max Speed Limit • Driver Alert Control (DAC)* The holder of a regular remote key can adjust Set a maximum speed for this key. • Road Sign Information* settings for a Red Key. Certain driver support By default, the function is "On" and the speed Related information functions are always active, however. is 120 km/h (75 mph). • Red Key - restricted remote key* (p. 245) To change this setting: • Setting interval: 50-250 km/h 1. Unlock the vehicle using a regular remote (30-160 mph) key. • Increments: 1 km/h (1 mph) 2. Tap Settings in the center display's Top Speed limit symbol. view. 3. Tap System Driver Profiles Red Key. Speed Limit Warning > The following settings can be made: Warns when vehicle moves above set • Set Time Gap For Adaptive Cruise values. Control* By default, the function is "On" and the values • Reduced Maximum Volume are 50, 70 and 90 km/h (30, 45 and 55 mph). • Max Speed Limit • Setting interval: 0-250 km/h (0-160 mph) • Speed Limit Warning • Increments: 1 km/h (1 mph) Details and default settings • Maximum number of simultaneous reminders: 6 Set Time Gap For Adaptive Cruise Control Set the time gap (1 is the shortest and 5 is Driver support functions the longest gap). The following driver support functions will The default setting is 5.0. always be active for a Red Key user: Reduced Maximum Volume • Blind Spot Information (BLIS)* Lower maximum volume for media • Lane Keeping Aid (LKA)* sources. • Distance Alert* The function is "On" by default. • City Safety

246 * Option/accessory. KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

Detachable key blade Detaching the key blade The remote key contains a detachable metal key blade that can be used to activate a number of functions and preform certain actions. A Volvo workshop can provide you with the key blade's unique code, which is recommended in case you need to order a new key blade. Using the detachable key blade The detachable key blade can be used to Put the key blade back into its designated Hold the remote key with the front side spot in the remote key after use. • manually open the left-side front door if central locking cannot be activated with (with the Volvo logo) facing up and move Replace the cover by pressing it down the remote key the button on the key ring section to the until it clicks into place. right. Slide the front cover slightly upward. • emergency lock all doors Slide the cover back. The cover will loosen and can be • activate/deactivate the rear door mechani- > An additional click indicates that the removed from the key. cal child safety locks cover is correctly in place. The button-less key8 does not have a detacha- Related information ble key blade. If needed, use the standard • Locking and unlocking with detachable remote key's detachable key blade. key blade (p. 248) • Remote key (p. 236)

Remove the key blade by pulling it up.

8 Included in vehicles equipped with keyless locking/unlocking*.

* Option/accessory. 247 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

Locking and unlocking with Lock the door in the same way, but turn the Locking detachable key blade key 45 degrees counterclockwise in step (3). The vehicle can also be locked using the The detachable key blade can be used to Disarming the alarm and starting the remote key's detachable key blade, e.g. if either the vehicle's or remote key's batteries unlock the vehicle from the outside, e.g. if the vehicle battery in the remote key is discharged. are discharged. Unlocking NOTE The left-hand front door can be locked by inserting the detachable key into the door's When the door is unlocked using the lock cylinder. detachable key blade and then opened, the alarm will be triggered. This is the only door with a lock cylinder. The other doors have lock mechanisms in the side of the door that must be pushed in using the key blade. The door will then be locked mechanically and cannot be opened from the outside. The doors can still be opened from inside. Pull the front left-hand door handle to its end position to access the lock cylinder. Put the key in the lock cylinder.

Turn the key clockwise 45 degrees so that Location of the backup key reader in the cup holder. the key blade is pointing straight rear- Turn off the alarm by: ward. 1. Place the remote control key on the key Turn the key blade back 45 degrees to its symbol in the backup reader in the bottom original position. Remove the key from the of the cup holder in the tunnel console. lock cylinder and release the handle so 2. Turn the start knob clockwise and release that it returns to its original position it. against the vehicle. > The alarm signal will stop and the alarm Manual door lock. This is not the child lock. 5. Pull the door handle. will switch off. > The door will open.

248 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

– Remove the detachable key blade from • Replacing the remote key's battery Electronic immobilizer the remote key. Insert the key blade into (p. 241) The electronic immobilizer is a start inhibitor the opening for the lock mechanism and • Remote key (p. 236) that helps prevent the vehicle from being push the key in as far as possible, about started by an unauthorized person. 12 mm (0.5 in). The vehicle can only be started with the right The door can be opened from both the remote key. outside and the inside. The following instrument panel error mes- The door cannot be opened from the out- sages are related to the electronic immobil- side. To return to position A, open the door izer: using the inside door handle. The doors can also be unlocked by pressing Symbol Message Meaning the unlock button on the remote key or the Vehicle key Remote key not central lock button in the driver's door. not found recognized during start. Place See NOTE the remote key Owner's • on the key sym- The door's lock controls only lock that manual specific door, not all doors simultane- bol in the cup ously. holder and try to start the vehicle • A manually locked rear door with an again. activated manual or electric child safety lock cannot be opened from either the outside or inside of the vehi- Remote immobilizer with tracking 9 cle. A rear door locked in this way can system only be unlocked using the remote key The vehicle is equipped with a system that or the central unlocking button. makes it possible to track and locate the vehicle and to remotely activate the immobilizer to prevent the vehicle from being started. Con- Related information • tact your nearest Volvo retailer for more infor- Starting the vehicle (p. 382) mation and assistance activating the system. • Detachable key blade (p. 247) • Arming and disarming the alarm (p. 267) }}

249 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

|| The following instrument panel error mes- Start and lock system type This device complies with part 15 of the FCC sages are related to the remote immobilizer designations rules. Operation is subject to the following with tracking system: The following information contains type des- two conditions: ignations for the start and lock system. (1) This device may not cause harmful interfer- Symbol Message Meaning ence, and Alarm system Remotely The remote USA FCC ID: MAYDA 5823(3) (2) this device must accept any interference immobilised immobilizer with received, including interference that may tracking system This device complies with part 15 of the FCC cause undesired operation. Vehicle not is activated. The rules. Operation is subject to the following possible to Any changes or modification not expressly vehicle cannot conditions: (1) This device may not cause start approved by the party responsible for compli- be started. Con- harmful interference, and (2) this device must ance could void the user's authority to operate tact Volvo On accept any interference received, including this equipment. Call Service interference that may cause undesired opera- Center. tion. Canada Canada IC: 4405A-DA 5823(3) Volvo Standard Key IC: 4008C-HUF8423 Related information This device is subject to the following condi- • Remote key (p. 236) Volvo Tag ID IC: 4008C-HUF8432 tions: (1) This device may not cause interfer- • Ordering additional remote keys (p. 244) ence, and (2) this device must accept any This device complies with Industry Canada interference, including interference that may license-exempt RSS standards. Operation is cause undesired operation of the device. subject to the following two conditions: * (1) This device may not cause harmful interfer- Remote keys (Passive Entry /Passive ence, and (2) this device must accept any Start) interference received, including interference USA that may cause undesired operation. Volvo Standard Key FCC ID: YGOHUF8423 Immobilizer and Passive Entry*/ Volvo Tag ID FCC ID: YGOHUF8432 Passive Start systems USA-FCC ID: LTQVO3134

9 Only certain markets and in combination with Volvo On Call.

250 * Option/accessory. KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Keyless and touch-sensitive NOTE rules. Operation is subject to the following surfaces* It is important that only one pressure-sen- two conditions: With the keyless locking and unlocking func- sitive surface is activated at a time. If the tion, the remote key only needs to be within (1) This device may not cause harmful interfer- handle is grasped at the same time as the range, e.g. in a pocket or bag. The vehicle can ence, and lock area is pressed, there is a risk that then be locked or unlocked by touching the double commands may be sent. This may (2) this device must accept any interference pressure-sensitive surface on the door han- cause the requested action (locking/ received, including interference that may dle. cause undesired operation. unlocking) to be delayed or not performed at all. Any changes or modification not expressly Pressure-sensitive surfaces approved by the party responsible for compli- Door handle ance could void the user's authority to operate There are indentations on the outside of the Tailgate handle this equipment. outer door handles for locking, and pressure- The tailgate handle has a rubberized pressure plate that can only be used for unlocking. Canada-IC:3659A-VO3134 sensitive surfaces on the inside of the handles for unlocking. This device complies with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standards. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Related information • Remote key (p. 236)

NOTE Pressure-sensitive indentation for locking Please be aware that the system could be Pressure-sensitive surface for unlocking activated in a car wash if the remote key is within range.

}}

* Option/accessory. 251 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

|| Related information Keyless locking and unlocking* Keyless locking • Keyless locking and unlocking* (p. 252) With keyless locking and unlocking, touching All of the doors have to be closed before the • Keyless tailgate unlock* (p. 254) the pressure-sensitive indentation on the vehicle can be locked. However, the tailgate door handle will lock or unlock the vehicle. can be open when a door handle is used for locking. NOTE – Touch the marked area on the outside of One of the vehicle's remote keys must be one of the door handles after the door is within range for locking and unlocking to be possible. closed. Or press the button on the lower edge of the tailgate before it is closed. > The lock indicator light on the dashboard will flash to confirm that the vehicle is locked. To close all door windows at the same time - place your finger on the pressure-sensitive indentation on the outside of the door handle and hold it there until the side windows have closed. Locking when the tailgate is open If the vehicle is locked and the tailgate is still open, make sure that the remote key is not left Pressure-sensitive indentation for locking in the cargo compartment when the tailgate is closed. Pressure-sensitive surface for unlocking NOTE NOTE If the key is detected in the vehicle, the tail- Please be aware that the system could be gate will not lock when it is closed. activated in a car wash if the remote key is within range.

252 * Option/accessory. KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

Keyless unlocking • Keyless and touch-sensitive surfaces* Keyless unlock settings* – To unlock, grasp a door handle or lightly (p. 251) Several different sequences are available for press the rubberized button on the under- keyless unlocking. side of the tailgate handle. To change this setting: > The lock indicator light on the dash- 1. Tap Settings in the center display's Top board will stop flashing to confirm that view. the vehicle is unlocked. 2. Tap My Car Locking Keyless Unlock. 3. Select alternative: • All Doors – unlocks all doors at the same time. • Single Door – unlocks the selected door. Related information • Keyless locking and unlocking* (p. 252) • Keyless and touch-sensitive surfaces* The rubberized button on the tailgate can only be (p. 251) used for unlocking. Automatic relocking If none of the doors or tailgate are opened within two minutes after being unlocked, they will automatically relock. This function reduces the risk of inadvertently leaving the vehicle unlocked. Related information • Keyless unlock settings* (p. 253) • Keyless tailgate unlock* (p. 254)

* Option/accessory. 253 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

Keyless tailgate unlock* 2. Lift the outer handle to open the tailgate. Antenna locations for the start and With keyless locking/unlocking, touching the lock system pressure-sensitive indentation on the tailgate CAUTION The antennas for the keyless start system and * handle will unlock the tailgate. • Only light pressure on the rubberized keyless locking system are integrated in the NOTE pressure plate is necessary to release vehicle. One of the vehicle's remote keys must be the tailgate's locking mechanism. within range behind the vehicle for unlock- • Use the handle to lift the tailgate and do ing to be possible. not apply force to the rubberized pressure plate. Too much force can damage the pressure plate's electrical connections.

Hands-free unlocking of the tailgate is also possible using a foot movement under the rear bumper; see the separate section.

WARNING Location of the antennas: Do not drive with the tailgate open. Toxic Under the cup holder in the front section exhaust fumes can be sucked into the vehi- of the tunnel console cle through the cargo compartment. In the upper front section of the left-side rear door10 The tailgate is held closed by an electronic Related information locking mechanism. • Keyless locking and unlocking* (p. 252) In the upper front section of the right-side rear door10 To open: • Keyless and touch-sensitive surfaces* 10 1. Lightly press the rubberized pressure plate (p. 251) In the cargo compartment on the underside of the tailgate handle. • Remote key range (p. 240) > The lock will disengage. • Foot movement tailgate operation* (p. 262)

10 Only in vehicles equipped with keyless locking and unlocking*.

254 * Option/accessory. KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

WARNING Locking and unlocking from inside Alternative unlocking method the vehicle Individuals with an implanted pacemaker should not allow the pacemaker to come The doors and tailgate can be locked and closer than 22 cm (9 in.) to the Keyless unlocked from inside the vehicle using the system antennas. The aim of this is to pre- central lock buttons in the front doors. vent disturbances between the pacemaker and the Keyless system. Central locking

Related information • Keyless and touch-sensitive surfaces* (p. 251) • Remote key range (p. 240) Alternative unlocking method using side door opening handle11. – Pull either of the side door inside opening handles and release. > Depending on the remote key settings, either all doors will be unlocked or just Button with indicator light for locking and unlocking in front door. the selected door will be unlocked and opened. Unlocking using the front door buttons To change this setting, tap Settings – Press the button to unlock all side doors and the tailgate. My Car Locking Remote and Interior Unlock in the Top view of the center display. Locking using the front door buttons – Press the button (both front doors must be closed). > All doors and the tailgate will lock.

11 The illustration is generic - details may vary according to vehicle model. }}

* Option/accessory. 255 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

|| Locking using the rear door button* • Activating and deactivating child safety Unlocking the tailgate from inside locks (p. 257) the vehicle The tailgate can be unlocked from the inside using the button on the dashboard.

Button with indicator light for locking/unlocking in rear door. The lock buttons in the rear doors lock/unlock that particular door. – Press the button on the dashboard. Unlocking the rear door > The tailgate will unlock and can be 1. Pull the opening handle to unlock the rear opened from the outside by pressing door. the rubberized button on the handle. 2. Pull the opening handle again to open the With the optional power tailgate*: rear door12. – Press and hold the button on the Related information dashboard. • Settings for remote and inside door unlock > The tailgate will open. (p. 239) • Unlocking the tailgate from inside the vehicle (p. 256)

12 Provided the child safety lock is not activated.

256 * Option/accessory. KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

Related information Activating and deactivating child NOTE • Locking and unlocking from inside the safety locks • The door's knob control only locks that vehicle (p. 255) The child safety locks help prevent the rear specific door, not both rear doors • * doors from being able to be opened from the Opening and closing the power tailgate simultaneously. (p. 259) inside. The child safety locks can be either manual or • There are no manual child safety locks electric*. on models equipped with electronic child safety locks. Activating and deactivating manual child safety locks Activating and deactivating electric* child safety locks The electric child safety lock can be activated and deactivated in any ignition mode higher than 0. The lock can be activated and deactivated up to 2 minutes after the ignition is turned off if no door has been opened.

Manual child safety lock This is not the manual door lock. – Use the detachable key blade in the remote key to turn the control. The door cannot be opened from the inside. The door can be opened from both the Button for electric activation and deactivation. outside and the inside. 1. Turn on the ignition and select any ignition mode higher than 0. }}

* Option/accessory. 257 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

|| 2. Press the button on the driver's door con- Symbol Message Meaning Automatic locking when driving trol panel. The doors and tailgate will automatically lock > The message Rear child lock Rear child The child safety when the vehicle begins to move. Activated will be shown in the instru- lock Acti- locks are acti- ment panel and the indicator light will vated vated. Related information illuminate to show that the child safety • Locking and unlocking from inside the locks are activated. Rear child The child safety vehicle (p. 255) lock Deacti- locks are deacti- When the electric child safety locks are activated vated. vated • the rear windows can only be opened Related information using the driver's door control panel • Locking and unlocking from inside the • the rear doors cannot be opened from the vehicle (p. 255) inside. • Detachable key blade (p. 247) To deactivate the child safety locks: – Press the button on the driver's door control panel. > The message Rear child lock Deactivated will be shown in the instrument panel and the indicator light will go out to show that the child safety locks are deactivated. When the ignition is switched off, the current setting will be saved. If the child safety locks were activated when the ignition was switched off, they will remain activated the next time the ignition is started.

258 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

Opening and closing the power tailgate* The tailgate can be opened and closed automatically with the power trunk release. Opening To open the power tailgate, do one of the following:

– Press and hold the button on the – Move your foot in a kicking motion* under dashboard until the tailgate begins to the rear bumper. open. Closing To close13 the power tailgate, do one of the following:

– Press and hold the button on the remote key until the tailgate begins to open.

– Press lightly on the tailgate's outside handle.

13 * Vehicles equipped with keyless locking and unlocking have a button for closing and a button for closing and locking. }}

* Option/accessory. 259 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

|| – Press and hold the button on the Closing and locking remote key. > The tailgate closes automatically and an audible signal sounds – the tailgate will remain unlocked. – Press and hold the button on the dashboard. > The tailgate closes automatically and an audible signal sounds – the tailgate will remain unlocked. – Move your foot in a kicking motion* under – Press the button on the lower edge of the rear bumper. the tailgate to close. > The tailgate closes automatically and an – Press the button on the lower edge of > The tailgate will close automatically and audible signal sounds – the tailgate will the tailgate to close and simultaneously remain unlocked. remain unlocked. lock13 both the tailgate and doors (all doors must be closed in order to lock). NOTE > The tailgate closes automatically – the tailgate and doors lock, and the alarm is • The button remains active 24 hours armed. after the tailgate was opened. After this time, the tailgate must be closed manually. NOTE • If the tailgate has been open for more • One of the vehicle's remote keys must than 30 minutes, it will automatically be within range for locking and unlock- close slowly. ing to be possible. • When the keyless locking or closing* functions are used, three audible signals

13 Vehicles equipped with keyless locking and unlocking* have a button for closing and a button for closing and locking.

260 * Option/accessory. KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

will sound if the key is not detected Pinch protection Preloaded springs close enough to the tailgate. If anything obstructs the tailgate with enough force to prevent it from opening or closing, pinch protection will be activated. CAUTION • When opening - the tailgate will stop moving and an audible signal will sound. When operating the tailgate manually, open and close it slowly. If you encounter • When closing - the tailgate will stop, a resistance, do not use force. This could long audible signal will sound and the tail- lead to damage and loss of function. gate will return to the programmed maximum opening position. Interrupting opening or closing Interrupt opening or closing by doing one of WARNING the following: Be aware of the risk of injury when opening Preloaded springs for the power tailgate. and closing. • Press the button on the dashboard. Before opening or closing, make sure that WARNING • Press the button on the remote key. no one is near the tailgate's range of Do not attempt to open or access the pre- • Press the close button on the underside of motion. Serious injury could occur. loaded springs in the power tailgate struts. the tailgate. Always operate the tailgate with caution. They are preloaded with high pressure and • Press the rubberized pressure plate on the can cause injury if opened. underside of the tailgate's outer handle. • Using a foot movement*. Related information • Setting a maximum height for the power Tailgate movement is interrupted and stops. tailgate* (p. 262) The tailgate can then be opened or closed • * manually. Foot movement tailgate operation (p. 262) If the tailgate stops near the closed position, it • Remote key range (p. 240) will open the next time it is activated.

* Option/accessory. 261 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

* Setting a maximum height for the NOTE Foot movement tailgate operation power tailgate* To make it easier to operate the tailgate when • If the system has been working contin- The tailgate can be set to stop opening at a your hands are full, it can be opened and uously for a prolonged period of time, it certain height, for example if the tailgate closed by moving your foot in a forward kick- will be switched off to avoid overload. needs to be opened in a garage with a low ing motion under the rear bumper. It can be used again after approxi- ceiling. mately 2 minutes. Setting maximum opening height:

1. Open the tailgate to the desired opening Related information height. • Opening and closing the power tailgate* (p. 259) NOTE It is not possible to program an opening position lower than half-open tailgate.

2. Press the button on the lower edge of the tailgate and hold for at least The sensor is located to the left of center under the 3 seconds. rear bumper14. > Two brief audio signals will sound to One of the vehicle's remote keys must be indicate that the position has been within range behind the vehicle, approx. stored. 1 meter (3 feet), for opening and closing to be Resetting to maximum opening position: possible. This applies even if the vehicle is – Move the tailgate manually to its highest unlocked in order to prevent the trunk lid from inadvertently opening e.g. at a car wash. possible position and press the button on the tailgate for at least 3 seconds. > Two audio signals will sound to indicate that the stored position has been erased. The tailgate can then be opened to its maximum position.

262 * Option/accessory. KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

Foot movement operation Interrupting opening or closing with a foot movement – Make one slow forward kicking motion while the tailgate is opening or closing to stop its movement. The remote key does not need to be within range of the vehicle to interrupt opening or closing of the tailgate. If the tailgate stops near the closed position, it will open the next time it is activated.

NOTE To activate opening and closing using a foot Kicking motion within the sensor's activation area. There is a risk of reduced or lost function if movement on a vehicle with skid plate, make a – Make one slow forward kicking motion there are large amounts of snow, ice, dirt, kicking motion from the side of the vehicle. with your foot under the left section of the etc. on the rear bumper. Make sure to keep One of the vehicle's remote keys must be rear bumper. Take a step back. Do not the bumper clean. within range (approx. 1 meter (3 feet)) for touch the bumper. opening and closing to be possible. > A brief audible signal will be heard NOTE when opening or closing is activated - the tailgate will open/close. Please note that the system could be inadvertently activated in a car wash or similar If several opening attempts have been made if the remote key is within range. without the remote key in range behind the vehicle, foot movement operation will not be available for a short period of time. Vehicle with skid plate accessory* If the vehicle is equipped with skid plate, the Do not keep your foot under the vehicle in a sensor is located towards the left corner of the kicking motion. This may prevent activation. bumper.

14 * If the vehicle is equipped with skid plate , the sensor is located towards the left corner of the bumper. }}

* Option/accessory. 263 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

|| Private Locking Activating and deactivating private The tailgate can be locked using the private locking locking function to prevent it from being Private locking is activated using the function opened, e.g. when the vehicle is left at a button in the center display and a PIN code. workshop or with a valet. NOTE The function button for private locking is located in the For the valet lock function to be activated center display's Function the car must be in at least ignition mode I. view. Depending on the current status of the lock, Two codes are used for private locking: Private Locking Unlocked • A security code, which is created the first or Private Locking Locked time the function is used. Kicking motion within the sensor's activation area. will be displayed. • A PIN code, which is changed each time Related information Related information the function is activated. • Keyless and touch-sensitive surfaces* • Activating and deactivating private locking (p. 251) (p. 264) Entering security code before initial • Opening and closing the power tailgate* use (p. 259) The first time the function is used, a security code must be selected. This code can then be • Remote key range (p. 240) used to deactivate private locking if the selected PIN code has been forgotten or lost. The security code functions as a PUK (security) code for all PIN codes used for private locking. Save the security code in a safe place.

264 * Option/accessory. KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

To create a security code: Deactivating private locking Related information • 1. Tap the button for private locking in Func- 1. Tap the button for private locking in Func- Private Locking (p. 264) tion view. tion view.

> A pop-up window will appear. > A pop-up window will appear. 2. Enter the desired security code and press 2. Enter the code used for locking and tap Confirm. Confirm. > The security code is saved. The private > The tailgate will unlock. The green indi- locking function is now ready for activa- cator light next to the button in Func- tion. tion view will go out to confirm unlocked status. Activating private locking 1. Tap the button for private locking in Func- Forgotten PIN code tion view. If you have forgotten your PIN code or entered it incorrectly more than three times, the security code can be used to deactivate private locking. If the vehicle is unlocked using Volvo On Call or the Volvo On Call app, private locking will be automatically deactivated. > A pop-up window will appear. Forgotten security code 2. Enter the code you would like to use to If you have forgotten your security code, con- unlock the tailgate and tap Confirm. tact an authorized Volvo retailer for assistance > The tailgate will lock. A green indicator deactivating private locking. light will illuminate next to the button in Function view to confirm locked status.

265 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

Alarm Alarm indicator In the event of alarm system failure The alarm emits sound and light signals if If a problem is detected in the alarm anyone without a valid remote key attempts system, a symbol and the message to break into the vehicle or interferes with the Alarm system failure Service start battery or alarm siren. required will appear in the instru- When armed, the alarm will be triggered if: ment panel. Contact a workshop - an authorized Volvo workshop is recommended. • the hood, tailgate or any door is opened. • a battery cable is disconnected. NOTE • the alarm siren is disconnected. Do not attempt to repair or alter any of the Alarm signals components in the alarm system yourself. The following occurs if the alarm is triggered: Any such attempt could affect the terms and conditions of your insurance policy. • A siren will sound for 30 seconds or until A red indicator light on the dashboard shows the alarm is turned off. the status of the alarm: • Related information The hazard warning flashers will flash for • Indicator off - the alarm is disarmed. • Arming and disarming the alarm (p. 267) 5 minutes or until the alarm is turned off. • Indicator flashes once every two seconds - If the reason the alarm was triggered is not the alarm is armed. rectified, the alarm cycle will repeat up to 10 • times15. The indicator flashes quickly after the alarm has been disabled for up to 30 seconds or until the ignition is put in I mode – the alarm has been triggered.

15 Certain markets only.

266 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

Arming and disarming the alarm Disarming the alarm 3. Turn the start knob clockwise and release. The alarm is armed when the vehicle is Unlock and disarm the vehicle alarm by > The alarm will be disarmed. locked. • pressing the unlock button on the remote Turning off a triggered alarm Arming the alarm key . – Press the unlock button on the remote key Lock and arm the vehicle by • grip a door handle or lightly press the tail- or put the ignition into mode I by turning 16 the start knob clockwise and then releas- • pressing the lock button on the remote gate's rubberized button . ing it. key . Disarming the alarm without a functioning • touch the marked surface on the outside remote key Automatically arming and disarming of the door handle or the rubberized pres- The vehicle can be unlocked and disarmed the alarm even if the remote key is not functioning, e.g. if sure plate on the tailgate16. Automatically arming the alarm helps prevent the battery is discharged. inadvertently leaving the vehicle without alarm If the vehicle is equipped with both keyless protection. locking/unlocking* and power tailgate*, the 1. Open the driver's door using the detachable key blade. button on the lower edge of the tailgate If the vehicle is unlocked using the remote key can also be used to lock and arm the vehicle. > This will trigger the alarm. (and the alarm is disarmed) but none of the doors or tailgate are opened within two minutes, the alarm will be automatically rearmed. The vehicle will also re-lock. On some markets, the alarm will be automatically armed following a slight delay after the driver's door has been opened and closed without being locked. To change this setting:

Location of the backup key reader in the cup holder. 1. Tap Settings in the center display's Top view. 2. Place the remote key on the key symbol in the backup reader in the tunnel console's 2. Tap My Car Locking. A red LED light on the dashboard will flash every cup holder. other second when the vehicle is locked and the 3. Select Passive Arming Deactivation to alarm is armed. temporarily deactivate the function.

16 * Vehicles with keyless locking and unlocking . }}

* Option/accessory. 267 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

|| Related information • Alarm (p. 266)

268 DRIVER SUPPORT DRIVER SUPPORT

Driver support systems • Radar sensor (p. 307) Speed-dependent steering wheel The vehicle is equipped with a number of • Camera (p. 310) resistance driver support systems that can provide the • City Safety™ (p. 316) Speed-dependent power steering increases driver with active or passive assistance in var- the steering wheel resistance in pace with • * ious situations. Rear Collision Warning (p. 330) the vehicle's speed, which can help give the The systems can, for example, help the driver: • BLIS* (p. 331) driver an enhanced feeling of control and sta- • maintain a set speed • Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 335) bility. Steering is stiffer on highways. When parking • * • maintain a set time interval to the vehicle Road Sign Information (p. 339) and at low speeds, it will be easier to move ahead • Driver Alert Control (p. 344) the steering wheel. • help prevent a collision by warning the • Lane Keeping Aid (p. 346) driver and applying the brakes • Steering assistance at risk of collision NOTE • park the vehicle. (p. 353) In rare situations, the power Some of the systems are standard and others • Park Assist* (p. 359) steering may become too hot and are options. This also varies from market to require temporary cooling – dur- • Park Assist Camera* (p. 364) market. ing such time the power steering • Park Assist Pilot* (p. 373) will work at reduced output and the steer- Related information ing wheel may feel more difficult to move. • IntelliSafe – driver support and safety The message Power steering Assistance (p. 29) temporarily reduced will be displayed • Speed-dependent steering wheel resis- along with this symbol in the instrument tance (p. 270) panel. • Stability system (p. 275) While the power steering is working at • Curve Speed Assist (CSA)* (p. 304) reduced power, the driver support functions and systems with steering assistance • Electronic Stability Control (p. 271) are not available. • Distance Alert* (p. 275) • Cruise control (p. 277) • Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 280) • Pilot Assist* (p. 289)

270 * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT

WARNING Electronic Stability Control WARNING The Electronic Stability Control (ESC1) func- If the temperature rises too high, the power • The function is supplementary driver tion helps the driver avoid skidding and steering may be forced to switch off com- support intended to facilitate driving improves the vehicle's directional stability. pletely. In such a situation, the driver dis- and help make it safer – it cannot han- This symbol will be displayed play shows the message Power steering dle all situations in all traffic, weather failure Stop safely along with a symbol. in the instrument panel when and road conditions. the system is intervening. • The driver is advised to read all sec- Changing the level of steering wheel When the system has inter- * tions in the Owner's Manual about this resistance vened to apply the brakes, a function to learn of its limitations, In INDIVIDUAL drive mode, the level of steer- pulsing sound may be heard which the driver must be aware of ing wheel resistance can be adjusted. and the vehicle may accelerate more slowly before using the function. than expected when the accelerator pedal is 1. Tap Settings in the center display's Top • depressed. Driver support functions are not a sub- view. stitute for the driver's attention and The system consists of the following sub-func- judgment. The driver is always respon- 2. Select My Car Drive Modes tions: sible for ensuring the vehicle is driven Steering Force. • Stability control2 in a safe manner, at the appropriate Steering wheel resistance settings can only be • speed, with an appropriate distance to accessed if the vehicle is stationary or is mov- Spin control and active yaw control other vehicles, and in accordance with ing straight ahead at a low speed. • Engine drag control current traffic rules and regulations. • Related information Trailer Stability Assist 2 • Driver support systems (p. 270) Stability control This function helps control the driving and • Drive modes* (p. 403) braking force of each individual wheel in an attempt to stabilize the vehicle. Spin control and active yaw control This function is active at low speeds and brakes the wheels that are spinning to transfer

1 Electronic Stability Control 2 Also called traction control. }}

* Option/accessory. 271 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| additional power from wheels that are not • Electronic Stability Control symbols and Electronic Stability Control in sport spinning. messages (p. 274) mode This function can also help prevent the wheels • Trailer Stability Assist* (p. 436) The stability system (ESC6) is always acti- from spinning while the vehicle is accelerating. vated and cannot be switched off. However, the driver can select ESC Sport Mode, Engine drag control which offers more active driving characteris- Engine drag control (EDC3) can help prevent tics. inadvertent wheel lock, e.g. after downshifting With the ESC Sport Mode sub-function or using engine braking when driving at low selected, intervention from the system is speeds on a slippery surface. reduced and more lateral movement is permit- Inadvertent wheel lock while driving could ted, giving the driver more control of the vehi- impair the driver's ability to steer the vehicle. cle than usual. When ESC Sport Mode is selected, the func- *4 Trailer Stability Assist tion may seem to be disabled even though it Trailer Stability Assist (TSA5) is designed to continues to assist the driver. help stabilize a vehicle that is towing a trailer if the vehicle and trailer have begun to sway. NOTE NOTE When ESC Sport Mode is selected, the trailer stabilizer (TSA7) is switched off. Trailer Stability Assist is deactivated if ESC Sport Mode is activated. ESC Sport Mode also helps provide more traction, even if the vehicle gets stuck or is Related information driving on a loose surface such as deep snow • Driver support systems (p. 270) or loose sand. • Activating or deactivating Sport mode for Electronic Stability Control (p. 273)

3 Engine Drag Control 4 Trailer Stability Assist is included if the vehicle is equipped with a Volvo original towbar. 5 Trailer Stability Assist 6 Electronic Stability Control 7 Trailer Stability Assist

272 * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT

Related information Activating or deactivating Sport • Cruise control • Electronic Stability Control (p. 271) mode for Electronic Stability • Adaptive Cruise Control* Control • Activating or deactivating Sport mode for • Pilot Assist* Electronic Stability Control (p. 273) The stability system (ESC8) is always acti- • Trailer Stability Assist* (p. 436) vated and cannot be switched off. However, Related information the driver can select Sport mode, which • Electronic Stability Control in sport mode offers more active driving characteristics. (p. 272) Activate or deactivate the • Electronic Stability Control (p. 271) function using this button in the center display's Function view.

• GREEN button indicator light – the function is activated. • GRAY button indicator light – the function is deactivated. When ESC Sport Mode is activated, this symbol will illuminate with a steady glow in the instrument panel. It will remain on until the driver deactivates the function or until the engine is turned off. The system will return to normal mode the next time the engine is started.

The ESC Sport Mode function cannot be selected when any of the following functions are activated:

8 Electronic Stability Control

* Option/accessory. 273 DRIVER SUPPORT

Electronic Stability Control displayed in the instrument panel. Several symbols and messages examples are provided below. A number of symbols and messages related to Electronic Stability Control (ESC9) may be Symbol Message Meaning Steady glow for approx. 2 seconds. System check when the engine is started.

Flashing light. The system is actively operating.

Steady glow. Sport mode is activated. NOTE! The system is not deactivated in this mode, but has partially reduced functionality.

ESC The system's functionality has been temporarily reduced due to high brake system temperatures. The function will be automatically reactivated when the brakes have cooled. Temporarily off

ESC The system is not functioning properly. Stop the vehicle in a safe place, turn off the engine and then restart it. Service required

A text message can be erased by briefly press- If the message persists: Contact a workshop ‒ Related information ing the button in the center of the right- an authorized Volvo workshop is recom- • Electronic Stability Control (p. 271) side steering wheel keypad. mended.

9 Electronic Stability Control

274 DRIVER SUPPORT

Stability system Distance Alert*11 vehicles ahead moving in the same direction The Roll Stability Control (RSC10) system The Distance Alert function can help the as your vehicle. No distance information is helps reduce the risk of a rollover in the event driver become aware if the time interval to provided for oncoming, slow-moving or sta- of e.g. a sudden evasive maneuver or if the the vehicle in front is too short. The vehicle tionary vehicles. vehicle begins to skid. must be equipped with a head-up display* in The system monitors the lateral angle at which order to display Distance Alert. NOTE the vehicle is leaning and registers any Visual warnings on the windshield may be changes. Using this information, the system difficult to notice in cases of strong sun- calculates the likelihood of a rollover. If there is light, reflections, extreme light contrasts, an imminent risk of a rollover, Electronic Sta- or if the driver is wearing sunglasses or is bility Control is activated, engine torque is not looking straight ahead. reduced and brakes are applied to one or more of the wheels until the vehicle has regained stability. NOTE Distance Alert is deactivated while Adap- WARNING tive Cruise Control* or Pilot Assist* is The vehicle’s stability systems help active. improve vehicle safety but do not replace the driver’s responsibility for operating the Symbol for Distance Alert on the windshield with vehicle in a safe manner. Speed and driving head-up display WARNING style should always be adapted to the cur- In vehicles equipped with a head-up display, a Distance Alert only reacts of the time inter- rent road, traffic and weather conditions. symbol will be displayed on the windshield as val to the vehicle ahead is shorter than the Posted speed limits should always be preset value – vehicle speed is not affec- respected. long as the time interval to the vehicle ahead is shorter than the set time interval. However, ted. the Show Driver Support function must be Related information activated under Settings in the vehicle's menu • Electronic Stability Control (p. 271) system. Distance Alert is active at speeds above 30 km/h (20 mph) and only reacts for

10 Roll Stability Control 11 Distance Alert }}

* Option/accessory. 275 DRIVER SUPPORT

13 || WARNING Activating or deactivating Distance Distance Alert limitations 12 Alert Distance Alert functionality may be reduced • The function is supplementary driver in certain situations. The function is only support intended to facilitate driving Distance Alert can be turned off. The function available in vehicles that can display informa- and help make it safer – it cannot han- is only available in vehicles that can display tion on the windshield with a head-up dis- dle all situations in all traffic, weather information on the windshield with a head-up * play*. and road conditions. display . • Activate or deactivate the WARNING The driver is advised to read all sec- function using this button in tions in the Owner's Manual about this the center display's Function • Detection ability may be affected by function to learn of its limitations, view. vehicle size, e.g. motorcycles, which which the driver must be aware of can cause the warning light to come on before using the function. at a shorter time interval than that set • or cause the warning to be temporarily Driver support functions are not a sub- • stitute for the driver's attention and GREEN button indicator light – the func- absent. judgment. The driver is always respon- tion is activated. • Very high speeds can cause the light to sible for ensuring the vehicle is driven • GRAY button indicator light – the function come on at a shorter time interval than in a safe manner, at the appropriate is deactivated. that set due to limitations in the range speed, with an appropriate distance to Distance Alert is automatically activated each of the radar unit. other vehicles, and in accordance with time the engine is started. current traffic rules and regulations. Related information NOTE * Related information • Distance Alert (p. 275) The function uses the vehicle's camera and • Activating or deactivating Distance Alert • Distance Alert limitations (p. 276) radar sensor, which has certain general (p. 276) limitations. • Distance Alert limitations (p. 276) Related information • Setting time interval to the vehicle ahead • Distance Alert* (p. 275) (p. 301) • Camera/radar sensor limitations (p. 311) • Collision risk warning from driver support (p. 298) • Head-up display* (p. 143) • Head-up display* (p. 143)

276 * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT

Cruise control : From active mode – deactivates/ WARNING Cruise Control (CC14) can help the driver puts Cruise Control in standby mode • The function is supplementary driver maintain an even speed to provide a more : Reduces the set speed support intended to facilitate driving relaxing driving experience on highways and and help make it safer – it cannot han- long, straight roads with even traffic flows. Marker for set speed dle all situations in all traffic, weather Overview The vehicle's current speed and road conditions. • The driver is advised to read all sec- Set speed tions in the Owner's Manual about this function to learn of its limitations, NOTE which the driver must be aware of before using the function. In vehicles equipped with Adaptive Cruise Control*(ACC15), it is possible to switch • Driver support functions are not a sub- between Cruise Control and Adaptive stitute for the driver's attention and Cruise Control. judgment. The driver is always responsible for ensuring the vehicle is driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with Function buttons and symbols. current traffic rules and regulations. : Activates Cruise Control from standby mode and resumes the set speed Using engine braking instead of applying the brakes : Increases the set speed Cruise Control regulates speed by lightly : From standby mode – activates applying the brakes. On downgrades, it can Cruise Control and sets the current speed sometimes be desirable to roll a bit faster and let speed be reduced instead by engine brak-

12 Distance Alert 13 Distance Alert 14 Cruise Control 15 Adaptive Cruise Control }}

* Option/accessory. 277 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| ing alone. The driver can temporarily disen- Selecting and activating cruise 2. When cruise control is selected, press gage the Cruise Control braking function. control (2) on the steering wheel keypad to acti- To disengage CC: The Cruise Control (CC16) function must be vate. selected and activated in order to regulate > White symbol – cruise control starts – Press the accelerator pedal about halfway speed. and the current speed is stored as the down and then release it. maximum speed. The lowest speed > Cruise Control will automatically disen- that can be set is 30 km/h (20 mph). gage the automatic brake function and speed will only be reduced using the Reactivating cruise control to the last engine braking function. stored speed – Related information When cruise control is selected, press • Driver support systems (p. 270) on the steering wheel keypad to activate. > The Cruise Control marking in the • Selecting and activating cruise control instrument panel will change from (p. 278) GRAY to WHITE and the vehicle will • Deactivating cruise control (p. 279) then return to the most recently set • Cruise control standby mode (p. 279) speed. • Adjusting set speed for driver support In order to start Cruise Control from standby (p. 300) mode, the vehicle's current speed must be WARNING • Switching between cruise control and 30 km/h (20 mph) or higher. A noticeable increase in speed may follow * when the speed is resumed with the Adaptive Cruise Control in the center dis- 1. Press the ◀ (1) or ▶ (3) button on the steering wheel button. play (p. 286) steering wheel keypad and scroll to the cruise control symbol (4). Related information > Gray symbol – cruise control is in • Cruise control (p. 277) standby mode. • Deactivating cruise control (p. 279) • Cruise control standby mode (p. 279)

16 Cruise Control

278 * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT

Deactivating cruise control Related information Cruise control standby mode Cruise control (CC17) can be deactivated and • Cruise control (p. 277) Cruise control (CC18) can be deactivated and switched off. • Switching between cruise control and put in standby mode. This may happen auto- Adaptive Cruise Control* in the center dis- matically or be due to driver intervention. play (p. 286) Standby mode means that the function is • Selecting and activating cruise control selected in the instrument panel but not acti- (p. 278) vated. In standby mode, cruise control will not regulate speed. • Cruise control standby mode (p. 279) Standby mode due to action by the driver Cruise control will be deactivated and put in standby mode if any of the following occurs: • The brakes are applied. • The gear selector is moved to N. • The vehicle is driven faster than the set 1. Press the button on the steering speed for more than 1 minute. wheel (2). > The symbol and markings turn gray – The driver must then control the vehicle's cruise control goes into standby mode. speed. 2. Press the ◀ (1) or ▶ (3) buttons on the Temporarily increasing speed using the accel- steering wheel to select another function. erator pedal, e.g. when passing another vehicle, will not affect the setting. The vehicle will > The cruise control symbol and marking return to the set speed when the accelerator (4) in the instrument panel will go out pedal is released. and the stored maximum speed will be erased.

17 Cruise Control 18 Cruise Control }}

* Option/accessory. 279 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| Automatic standby mode Adaptive Cruise Control*19 vehicles ahead, the vehicle will return to the set speed. Adaptive Cruise Control may go into standby Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC20) helps the mode if: driver maintain a constant speed with a set If the Curve Speed Assist (CSA)* function is • the wheels lose traction time interval to the vehicle ahead. activated, it may also affect the vehicle's • the engine speed (rpm) is too low/high Adaptive Cruise Control can help provide a speed. more relaxed driving experience on long trips • the temperature in the brake system on highways or long, straight roads with even WARNING becomes too high traffic flows. • • the vehicle's speed goes below 30 km/h The function is supplementary driver (20 mph). support intended to facilitate driving and help make it safer – it cannot han- The driver must then control the vehicle's dle all situations in all traffic, weather speed. and road conditions. Related information • The driver is advised to read all sec- • Cruise control (p. 277) tions in the Owner's Manual about this function to learn of its limitations, • Selecting and activating cruise control which the driver must be aware of (p. 278) before using the function. • Deactivating cruise control (p. 279) • Driver support functions are not a substitute for the driver's attention and The camera/radar sensor measures the distance to judgment. The driver is always respon- the vehicle ahead. sible for ensuring the vehicle is driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate The driver sets a speed and a time interval to speed, with an appropriate distance to the vehicle ahead. If the camera/radar sensor other vehicles, and in accordance with detects a slower-moving vehicle ahead, your current traffic rules and regulations. vehicle's speed will be automatically adapted according to the set time interval to that vehicle. When there are no longer slower-moving Adaptive Cruise Control regulates speed by accelerating and braking. It is normal for the

19 Depending on market, this function can be either standard or optional. 20 Adaptive Cruise Control

280 * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT brakes to emit a slight sound when they are • Selecting and activating Adaptive Cruise Adaptive Cruise Control*21 controls being used to adjust speed. Control* (p. 282) and display Adaptive Cruise Control always attempts to • Adaptive Cruise Control* limitations A summary of how Adaptive Cruise Control regulate speed smoothly. The driver must (p. 285) (ACC22) is controlled using the left-side steer- apply the brakes in situations requiring imme- • Symbols and messages for Adaptive ing wheel keypad and how the function is diate braking. For example, when there are Cruise Control* (p. 287) shown in the display. great differences in speed between vehicles or • Collision risk warning from driver support if the vehicle ahead brakes suddenly. Due to (p. 298) limitations in the radar sensor, braking may occur unexpectedly or not at all. • Setting time interval to the vehicle ahead (p. 301) Adaptive Cruise Control is designed to follow • a vehicle ahead in the same lane and maintain Adjusting set speed for driver support a time interval to that vehicle set by the driver. (p. 300) If the radar sensor does not detect a vehicle • Auto-hold braking with driver support ahead, it will instead maintain the speed set (p. 302) by the driver. This will also happen if the speed • Switching target vehicles with driver sup- of the vehicle ahead exceeds the set speed for port (p. 299) your vehicle. • Passing assistance (p. 306) : From standby mode - activates and CAUTION sets the current speed Only a workshop may perform mainte- : From active mode - deactivates/ nance on driver support components – an puts in standby mode authorized Volvo workshop is recommended. : Activates the function from standby mode and resumes the set speed Related information : Increases the set speed • Driver support systems (p. 270) : Reduces the set speed • Adaptive Cruise Control* controls and display (p. 281)

21 Depending on market, this function can be either standard or optional. }}

* Option/accessory. 281 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| Increases the time interval to the vehicle Related information Selecting and activating Adaptive ahead • Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 280) Cruise Control*23 Reduces the time interval to the vehicle • Adaptive Cruise Control* limitations Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC24) must first be ahead (p. 285) selected and then activated before it can reg- Target vehicle indicator: the function has ulate speed and distance. detected and is following a target vehicle using the set time interval Symbol for time interval to the vehicle ahead Instrument panel

To start the function: • The driver's seat belt must be buckled and the driver's door must be closed. • There must be a vehicle ahead (target vehicle) within a reasonable distance or Speed indicators. Set speed.

Speed of the vehicle ahead.

The current speed of your vehicle.

22 Adaptive Cruise Control 23 Depending on market, this function can be either standard or optional. 24 Adaptive Cruise Control

282 * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT

your vehicle's current speed must be at Additional markings in the instrument Deactivating Adaptive Cruise least 15 km/h (9 mph). panel Control*25 1. Press the ◀ (2) or ▶ (3) button on the ACC will only regulate the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC26) can be deac- steering wheel keypad and scroll to the time interval to the vehicle tivated and switched off. ahead when the distance Adaptive Cruise Control symbol (4). symbol shows two vehicles. > Gray symbol – Adaptive Cruise Control is in standby mode. When Speed Limiter is selected, press 2. A speed interval will be (1) on the steering wheel keypad to marked at the same time. activate. The higher speed is the > White symbol – Speed Limiter starts stored speed for your vehicle and the current speed is stored as the and the lower speed is the maximum speed. speed of the vehicle ahead Reactivating Adaptive Cruise Control (target vehicle). to the last stored speed Related information – When Adaptive Cruise Control is selected, 1. Press the button on the steering • Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 280) press on the steering wheel keypad to wheel (2). • Deactivating Adaptive Cruise Control* activate. > The symbol and markings turn gray – (p. 283) Adaptive Cruise Control goes into > The Cruise Control marking in the • standby mode. The time interval indica- instrument panel will change from Switching between cruise control and * tor light and any symbols for the target GRAY to WHITE and the vehicle will Adaptive Cruise Control in the center dis- vehicle will go out. then return to the most recently set play (p. 286) speed. • Adaptive Cruise Control* limitations 2. Press the ◀ (1) or ▶ (3) buttons on the (p. 285) steering wheel to select another function. WARNING > The Adaptive Cruise Control symbol A noticeable increase in speed may follow and marking (4) in the instrument panel when the speed is resumed with the will go out and the stored maximum steering wheel button. speed will be erased.

}}

* Option/accessory. 283 DRIVER SUPPORT

27 || WARNING Adaptive Cruise Control* standby WARNING mode • If Adaptive Cruise Control is in standby • If Adaptive Cruise Control is in standby 28 mode, the driver must intervene and Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC ) can be deac- mode, the driver must intervene and regulate both speed and distance to tivated and put in standby mode. This may regulate both speed and distance to the vehicle ahead. happen automatically or be due to driver the vehicle ahead. • intervention. • If the vehicle comes too close to a vehi- Standby mode means that the function is If the vehicle comes too close to a vehicle ahead when Adaptive Cruise Con- selected in the instrument panel but not acti- cle ahead when Adaptive Cruise Con- trol is in standby mode, the driver can vated. In standby mode, Adaptive Cruise Con- trol is in standby mode, the driver can be warned of the short distance by the trol will not regulate speed or distance to the be warned of the short distance by the * * Distance Alert function. vehicle ahead. Distance Alert function.

Related information Standby mode due to action by the • Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 280) driver Automatic standby mode Adaptive Cruise Control will be deactivated Adaptive Cruise Control is dependent on other • Selecting and activating Adaptive Cruise and put in standby mode if any of the follow- systems, such as Electronic Stability Control Control* (p. 282) ing occurs: (ESC29). If any of these other systems stops • Switching between cruise control and working, Adaptive Cruise Control will be auto- • The brakes are applied. Adaptive Cruise Control* in the center dis- matically deactivated. play (p. 286) • The gear selector is moved to N. • Adaptive Cruise Control* limitations • The vehicle is driven faster than the set (p. 285) speed for more than 1 minute. Temporarily increasing speed using the accelerator pedal, e.g. when passing another vehicle, will not affect the setting. The vehicle will return to the set speed when the accelerator pedal is released.

25 Depending on market, this function can be either standard or optional. 26 Adaptive Cruise Control 27 Depending on market, this function can be either standard or optional. 28 Adaptive Cruise Control 29 Electronic Stability Control

284 * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT

30 WARNING Related information Adaptive Cruise Control* • Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 280) limitations With automatic standby mode, the driver is warned by an acoustic signal and a mes- • Selecting and activating Adaptive Cruise Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC31) may have sage on the instrument panel. Control* (p. 282) limited functionality in certain situations. • • Deactivating Adaptive Cruise Control* The driver must then regulate vehicle Steep roads and/or heavy loads (p. 283) speed, apply the brakes if necessary, Adaptive Cruise Control is primarily intended and maintain a safe distance to other • Adaptive Cruise Control* limitations to be driven on flat roads. The function may vehicles. (p. 285) not be able to maintain the correct time interval to the vehicle ahead when driving down Adaptive Cruise Control may go into standby steep hills. The driver should be extra attentive mode if: and prepared to apply the brakes. • your vehicle's speed goes below 5 km/h Do not use Adaptive Cruise Control if the vehi- (3 mph) and ACC cannot determine if the cle is carrying a heavy load or towing a trailer. vehicle ahead is stationary or if it is another object, e.g. a speed bump. Other limitations The Off Road drive mode cannot be selected • your vehicle's speed goes under 5 km/h if Adaptive Cruise Control is activated. (3 mph) and the vehicle ahead turns so that ACC no longer has a vehicle to follow. • the driver opens the door. • the driver unbuckles the seat belt. • the engine speed (rpm) is too low/high. • one or more of the wheels lose traction. • the brake temperature is high. • the parking brake is applied. • the camera/radar sensor is covered by snow or heavy rain (the camera lens/radar waves are blocked).

30 Depending on market, this function can be either standard or optional. 31 Adaptive Cruise Control }}

* Option/accessory. 285 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| WARNING Switching between cruise control A symbol in the instrument panel indicates *32 which cruise control system is active • and Adaptive Cruise Control in This is not a collision avoidance sys- the center display tem. The driver is always responsible Cruise control Adaptive Cruise 33 and must intervene if the system fails When the regular cruise control (CC ) is (CC) Control (ACC) to detect a vehicle ahead. selected in the instrument panel, you can switch to Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC34) in A A • The function does not brake for people the center display's Function view. or animals and does not brake for small Activate or deactivate the A WHITE symbol: The function is active. GRAY symbol: vehicles, such as bikes and motorcy- Standby mode function using this button in cles. Similarly, it does not brake for low the center display's Function Related information trailers, oncoming, slow-moving or sta- view. • Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 280) tionary vehicles and objects. • Cruise control (p. 277) • Do not use the function in demanding situations, such as in city traffic, at intersections, on slippery surfaces, • GREEN button indicator light – Adaptive with a lot of water or slush on the road, Cruise Control is deactivated and the reg- in heavy rain/snow, in poor visibility, on ular cruise control is in standby mode. winding roads, or on on/off ramps. • GRAY button indicator light – regular cruise control is deactivated and the Adaptive Cruise Control is in standby NOTE mode. The function uses the vehicle's camera and radar sensor, which has certain general limitations.

Related information • Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 280) • Camera/radar sensor limitations (p. 311)

32 Depending on market, this function can be either standard or optional. 33 Cruise Control 34 Adaptive Cruise Control

286 * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT

Symbols and messages for The previous illustration shows that Adaptive Adaptive Cruise Control*35 Cruise Control is set to maintain a speed of A number of symbols and messages relating 110 km/h (68 mph) and that there is no target vehicle ahead to follow. to Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC36) may be displayed in the instrument panel and/or the head-up display*. In the following illustration, Road Sign Infor- mation* (RSI37) indicates that the maximum permitted speed is 130 km/h (80 mph).

The previous illustration shows that Adaptive Cruise Control is set to maintain a speed of 110 km/h (68 mph) and is following a target vehicle ahead, which is traveling at the same speed.

35 Depending on market, this function can be either standard or optional. 36 Adaptive Cruise Control 37 Road Sign Information }}

* Option/accessory. 287 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| Symbol Message Meaning The symbol is WHITE. The vehicle is maintaining the stored speed.

Adaptive Cruise Contr. Adaptive Cruise Control is in standby mode. Unavailable The symbol is GRAY. Adaptive Cruise Contr. The system is not functioning as intended. Contact a workshop ‒ an authorized Volvo workshop is recommended. Service required The symbol is GRAY. Windscreen sensor Clean the windshield in front of the camera and radar sensors. Sensor blocked, see Owner's manual

A text message can be erased by briefly pressing the button in the center of the right- side steering wheel keypad. If the message persists: Contact a workshop ‒ an authorized Volvo workshop is recommended. Related information • Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 280)

288 * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT

38 Pilot Assist* The driver sets the desired speed and distance WARNING Pilot Assist can help the driver keep the vehi- to the vehicle ahead. Pilot Assist monitors the distance to the vehicle ahead and the traffic Pilot Assist is deactivated automatically cle in the current traffic lane by providing and resumes working without prior notice. steering assistance and maintaining an even lane's side markers using the camera and speed and a set time interval to the vehicle radar sensor. The system maintains the set The color of the steering ahead. time interval to the vehicle ahead by automatically adjusting your vehicle's speed and keeps wheel symbol indicates the How Pilot Assist works your vehicle in its lane by providing steering current status of steering The Pilot Assist function is primarily intended assistance. assistance: for use on highways and other major roads If the Curve Speed Assist (CSA)* function is • GREEN indicates that where it can help provide a more comfortable activated, it may also affect the vehicle's steering assistance is active and relaxing driving experience. speed. • GRAY (as shown in illustration) indicates that Pilot Assist's steering assistance is based on steering assistance is deactivated. monitoring the direction of the vehicle ahead and the traffic lane's side marker lines. The driver can override Pilot Assist's steering recommendations at any time and steer in another direction, e.g. to change lanes or avoid obstacles on the road. If the camera/radar sensor cannot detect the lane's side marker lines or if Pilot Assist is unable for some other reason to clearly interpret the lane, Pilot Assist will temporarily The camera/radar sensor monitors the distance to deactivate steering assistance until it can once the vehicle ahead and detects lane markings. again interpret the lane markings. However, the speed and distance warnings will remain Camera and radar sensor active. The driver will be alerted by slight Distance monitor vibrations in the steering wheel that the function has been temporarily deactivated. Lane marker line monitors

38 Depending on market, this function can be either standard or optional. }}

* Option/accessory. 289 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| WARNING camera and radar sensor, braking may occur Pilot Assist strives to keep the vehicle unexpectedly or not at all. • in the center of the lane The function is supplementary driver When Pilot Assist provides steering assis- support intended to facilitate driving Pilot Assist attempts to follow a vehicle ahead in the same lane and maintain a time interval tance, it strives to position the vehicle in the and help make it safer – it cannot han- center of the lane between the lane markings. dle all situations in all traffic, weather to that vehicle set by the driver. If the radar sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead, it will To make the driving experience as smooth as and road conditions. possible, the driver should permit the vehicle • instead maintain the speed set by the driver. The driver is advised to read all sec- This will also happen if the speed of the vehi- to find good positioning. The driver should tions in the Owner's Manual about this cle ahead exceeds the set speed for your vehi- check that the vehicle is positioned safely in function to learn of its limitations, cle. the lane and can always adjust the vehicle's which the driver must be aware of position by applying more force to the steering before using the function. wheel. CAUTION • Driver support functions are not a sub- • If Pilot Assist does not position the vehicle Only a workshop may perform mainte- stitute for the driver's attention and appropriately in the lane, the driver should nance on driver support components – an judgment. The driver is always respon- turn off Pilot Assist or switch to Adaptive authorized Volvo workshop is recom- sible for ensuring the vehicle is driven Cruise Control*. in a safe manner, at the appropriate mended. speed, with an appropriate distance to Hands on the steering wheel other vehicles, and in accordance with In curves and forks in the road Pilot Assist only functions if the driver's hands current traffic rules and regulations. Pilot Assist is designed to interact with the are on the steering wheel. driver. The driver should never wait for steer- If Pilot Assist detects that the Pilot Assist regulates speed by accelerating ing assistance from Pilot Assist, but instead driver's hands are not on the and braking. It is normal for the brakes to emit should always be ready to increase his or her steering wheel, a symbol and a slight sound when they are being used to own steering efforts, particularly in curves. text message will appear to adjust speed. • When the vehicle is approaching an off- instruct the driver to actively Pilot Assist attempts to smoothly regulate ramp or a fork in the road, the driver steer the vehicle. should steer toward the desired lane to speed. The driver must apply the brakes in sit- If the driver's hands are still not detected on indicate to Pilot Assist the desired direc- uations requiring immediate braking. For the steering wheel after a few seconds have tion of travel. example, when there are great differences in passed, the instructions to actively steer the speed between vehicles or if the vehicle ahead vehicle will be repeated, accompanied by an brakes suddenly. Due to limitations in the audible signal.

290 * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT

If Pilot Assist still does not detect the driver's Pilot Assist*39 controls and display : Increases the set speed hands on the steering wheel after a few more A summary of how Pilot Assist is controlled : Reduces the set speed seconds have passed, the audible signal will using the right-side steering wheel keypad become intense and the steering function will and how the function is shown in the display. Increases the time interval to the vehicle switch off. Pilot Assist must then be reactiva- ahead ted by pressing the button on the steering Controls Reduces the time interval to the vehicle wheel. ahead Related information ◀: Switches from Pilot Assist to Adaptive • Driver support systems (p. 270) Cruise Control • Selecting and activating Pilot Assist* Function symbol (p. 292) Symbols for target vehicle • Pilot Assist* limitations (p. 295) • Pilot Assist* controls and display (p. 291) Symbol for time interval to the vehicle ahead • Pilot Assist* symbols and messages (p. 297) Symbol for activated/deactivated steering assistance • Adjusting set speed for driver support (p. 300) Function buttons and symbols. • Setting time interval to the vehicle ahead ▶: Switches from Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 301) to Pilot Assist • Switching target vehicles with driver sup- : From standby mode - activates Pilot port (p. 299) Assist and sets the current speed • Collision risk warning from driver support : From active mode - deactivates/ (p. 298) puts Pilot Assist in standby mode • Auto-hold braking with driver support : Activates Pilot Assist from standby (p. 302) mode and resumes the set speed and time • Passing assistance (p. 306) interval

39 Depending on market, this function can be either standard or optional. }}

* Option/accessory. 291 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| Instrument panel Selecting and activating Pilot your vehicle's current speed must be at Assist*40 least 15 km/h (9 mph). Pilot Assist must first be selected and then 1. Press the ◀ (1) or ▶ (3) button on the activated before it can regulate speed and steering wheel keypad and scroll to the distance and provide steering assistance. Pilot Assist symbol (4). > Gray symbol – Pilot Assist is in standby mode.

2. When Pilot Assist is selected, press (2) on the steering wheel keypad to activate. > White symbol – Pilot Assist starts and the current speed is stored as the maxi- Speed indicators. mum speed. Set speed Reactivating Pilot Assist to the last Speed of the vehicle ahead stored speed – The current speed of your vehicle To start Pilot Assist: When Pilot Assist is selected, press on the steering wheel keypad to activate. • The driver's seat belt must be buckled and Related information > The Cruise Control marking in the the driver's door must be closed. • Pilot Assist* (p. 289) instrument panel will change from • There must be a vehicle ahead (target GRAY to WHITE and the vehicle will vehicle) within a reasonable distance or then return to the most recently set speed.

WARNING A noticeable increase in speed may follow when the speed is resumed with the steering wheel button.

40 Depending on market, this function can be either standard or optional.

292 * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT

41 NOTE Deactivating Pilot Assist* WARNING Pilot Assist can be deactivated and switched Note that the Pilot Assist function only • With Pilot Assist in standby mode, the off. works when the driver's hands are on the driver must intervene and steer and steering wheel. regulate both speed and distance to the vehicle ahead. Additional markings in the instrument • If the vehicle comes too close to a vehi- panel cle ahead when Pilot Assist is in Pilot Assist will only regulate standby mode, the driver is instead the time interval to the vehi- warned of the short distance by the cle ahead when the distance Distance Alert* function. symbol shows a vehicle (1) over the steering wheel sym- Related information bol. • Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 280) Pilot Assist's steering assistance is only active • Selecting and activating Adaptive Cruise when the steering wheel symbol (2) changes * Press the button on the steering Control (p. 282) from GRAY to GREEN. 1. wheel (2). • Switching between cruise control and * A speed interval will be > The symbol and markings turn gray – Adaptive Cruise Control in the center dis- marked at the same time. Pilot Assist goes into standby mode. play (p. 286) The higher speed is the The time interval indicator light and any • Adaptive Cruise Control* limitations stored speed for your vehicle symbols for the target vehicle will go (p. 285) and the lower speed is the out. • Temporarily deactivating steering assis- speed of the vehicle ahead 2. Press the ◀ (1) or ▶ (3) buttons on the tance with Pilot Assist* (p. 295) (target vehicle). steering wheel to select another function. Related information > The Pilot Assist symbol and marking (4) • Pilot Assist* (p. 289) in the instrument panel will go out and the stored maximum speed will be • Deactivating Pilot Assist* (p. 293) erased. • Pilot Assist* limitations (p. 295)

41 Depending on market, this function can be either standard or optional.

* Option/accessory. 293 DRIVER SUPPORT

42 • Pilot Assist* standby mode WARNING your vehicle's speed goes under 5 km/h (3 mph) and the vehicle ahead turns so Pilot Assist can be deactivated and put in With automatic standby mode, the driver is standby mode. This may happen automati- that Pilot Assist no longer has a vehicle to warned by an acoustic signal and a mes- follow. cally or be due to driver intervention. sage on the instrument panel. Standby mode means that the function is • The driver must then regulate vehicle Related information selected in the instrument panel but not acti- speed, apply the brakes if necessary, • Pilot Assist* (p. 289) vated. In standby mode, Pilot Assist will not and maintain a safe distance to other * regulate the speed or distance to the vehicle • Selecting and activating Pilot Assist vehicles. ahead or provide steering assistance. (p. 292) • Deactivating Pilot Assist* (p. 293) Standby mode due to action by the Adaptive Cruise Control may go into standby • Pilot Assist* limitations (p. 295) driver mode if, e.g.: Pilot Assist will be deactivated and put in • the driver opens the door. standby mode if any of the following occurs: • the brake temperature is high. • The brakes are applied. • the driver's hands are not on the steering • The gear selector is moved to N. wheel. • A turn signal is used for more than • the parking brake is applied. 1 minute. • • the engine speed (rpm) is too low/high. The vehicle is driven faster than the set • speed for more than 1 minute. the driver unbuckles the seat belt. • one or more of the wheels lose traction. Automatic standby mode • the camera/radar sensor is covered by Pilot Assist is dependent on other systems, snow or heavy rain (the camera lens/radar 43 such as Electronic Stability Control (ESC ). If waves are blocked). any of these other systems stops working, • Pilot Assist will be automatically deactivated. your vehicle's speed goes under 5 km/h (3 mph) and Pilot Assist cannot determine if the vehicle ahead is stationary or if it is another object, e.g. a speed bump.

42 Depending on market, this function can be either standard or optional. 43 Electronic Stability Control

294 * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT

45 Temporarily deactivating steering Pilot Assist* limitations WARNING assistance with Pilot Assist*44 Pilot Assist functionality may be reduced in In some situations, Pilot Assist may have Pilot Assist steering assistance can be tem- certain situations. trouble helping the driver properly or may porarily deactivated and reactivated without Pilot Assist is a driver support function be deactivated automatically – we advise prior warning. designed to simplify driving and assist the against using Pilot Assist in such cases. When the turn signals are used, Pilot Assist's driver in many situations. However, the driver Examples of such situations include: steering assistance will be temporarily deacti- is always responsible for maintaining a suita- • the lane markings are worn, missing or vated. When the turn signal is switched off, ble distance to vehicles or objects around it cross each other. steering assistance will be automatically reac- and ensuring that the vehicle is correctly posi- • lane division is unclear, for example, tivated if the traffic lane's side markings can tioned in the traffic lane. when the lanes divide or merge or at still be detected. exits or when there are multiple sets of If Pilot Assist cannot clearly interpret the markings. lane's side marker lines or if the camera/radar • edges or other lines than lane markings sensor is unable for some other reason to are present on or near the road, e.g. clearly interpret the lane, Pilot Assist will tem- curbs, joints or repairs to the road sur- porarily deactivate steering assistance. How- face, edges of barriers, roadside edges ever, the speed and distance warnings will or strong shadows. remain active. Steering assistance will resume when the side marker lines can once again be • the lane is narrow or winding. interpreted. In these situations, the driver may • the lane contains ridges or holes. be alerted through slight vibrations in the • weather conditions are poor, e.g. rain, steering wheel that steering assistance is tem- snow or fog or slush or reduced visibil- porarily deactivated. ity with poor light conditions, back- Related information lighting, wet road surface, etc. • Pilot Assist* (p. 289) The driver should also note that Pilot Assist has the following limitations: • Selecting and activating Pilot Assist* (p. 292) • High curbs, roadside barriers, temporary obstacles (traffic cones, safety bar- • Deactivating Pilot Assist* (p. 293) riers, etc.) are not detected. Alterna- • Pilot Assist* limitations (p. 295)

44 Depending on market, this function can be either standard or optional. }}}}

* Option/accessory. 295 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| tively, they may be detected incorrectly WARNING Steep roads and/or heavy loads as lane markings, with a subsequent Pilot Assist is primarily intended to be driven risk of contact between the vehicle and Pilot Assist should only be used if there are on flat roads. The function may not be able to such obstacles. The driver is responsi- clear lane lines painted on each side of the lane. All other use will increase the risk of maintain the correct time interval to the vehi- ble for ensuring that the vehicle main- contact with nearby obstacles that cannot cle ahead when driving down steep hills. The tains a suitable distance from such be detected by the functions. driver should be extra attentive and prepared obstacles. to apply the brakes. • The camera and radar sensors do not WARNING Do not use Pilot Assist if the vehicle is carrying have the capacity to detect all oncom- a heavy load or towing a trailer. ing objects and obstacles in traffic • This is not a collision avoidance sys- environments, e.g. potholes, stationary tem. The driver is always responsible NOTE obstacles or objects that completely or and must intervene if the system fails partially block the route. to detect a vehicle ahead. Pilot Assist cannot be activated if a trailer, bike carrier or similar is connected to the • Pilot Assist does not "see" pedestrians, • The function does not brake for people vehicle electrical system. animals, etc. or animals and does not brake for small • The recommended steering input is vehicles, such as bikes and motorcy- limited in force, which means that it cles. Similarly, it does not brake for low Other limitations cannot always help the driver to steer trailers, oncoming, slow-moving or sta- The Off Road drive mode cannot be selected and keep the vehicle within the lane. tionary vehicles and objects. when Pilot Assist is activated. • • In vehicles equipped with Sensus Do not use the function in demanding Navigation*, the function is able to use situations, such as in city traffic, at NOTE information from map data, which intersections, on slippery surfaces, The function uses the vehicle's camera and could cause variations in performance. with a lot of water or slush on the road, radar sensor, which has certain general • in heavy rain/snow, in poor visibility, on limitations. Pilot Assist will be switched off if the winding roads, or on on/off ramps. speed-dependent power steering wheel resistance is working at reduced Related information The driver can always correct or adjust steer- power, e.g. during cooling due to over- • Pilot Assist* (p. 289) heating. ing assistance provided by Pilot Assist by turning the steering wheel to the desired position. • Camera/radar sensor limitations (p. 311)

45 Depending on market, this function can be either standard or optional.

296 * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT

• Speed-dependent steering wheel resis- Pilot Assist*46 symbols and tance (p. 270) messages • Drive modes* (p. 403) A number of symbols and messages relating to Pilot Assist may be displayed in the instrument panel and/or the head-up display*. In the following illustration, Road Sign Infor- mation (RSI47) indicates that the maximum permitted speed is 130 km/h (80 mph).

The previous illustration shows that Pilot Assist is set to maintain a speed of 110 km/h (68 mph) and is following a target vehicle ahead that is traveling at the same speed. Pilot Assist will not provide any steering assistance because it cannot detect the lane's side marking lines.

The previous illustration shows that Pilot Assist is set to maintain a speed of 110 km/h (68 mph) and that there is no target vehicle ahead to follow. Pilot Assist will not provide any steering assistance because it cannot detect the lane's side marking lines.

46 Depending on market, this function can be either standard or optional. 47 Road Sign Information }}

* Option/accessory. 297 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| The previous illustration shows that Pilot Collision risk warning from driver Assist is set to maintain a speed of 110 km/h support (68 mph) and that there is no target vehicle The driver support systems Adaptive Cruise ahead to follow. Control* and Pilot Assist* can help alert the Pilot Assist will provide steering assistance driver if the distance to the vehicle ahead because it can detect the lane's side marking suddenly decreases to an unsafe distance. lines. Related information • Pilot Assist* (p. 289) • Pilot Assist* limitations (p. 295)

The previous illustration shows that Pilot Assist is set to maintain a speed of 110 km/h (68 mph) and is following a target vehicle ahead that is traveling at the same speed. In this example, Pilot Assist will also provide steering assistance because it can detect the Collision warning audible signal and symbol. lane's side marking lines. Acoustic collision warning signal

Collision warning symbol

Camera/radar sensor distance monitoring Adaptive Cruise Control and Pilot Assist use approx. 40% of the braking capacity. If a situation requires more braking force than driver support can provide, and if the driver does not apply the brakes, a warning light and audible warning signal will be activated to alert the driver that immediate action is required.

298 * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT

WARNING Related information Switching target vehicles with • Driver support systems (p. 270) driver support The driver support system only issues a warning for vehicles detected by its radar • Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 280) At certain speeds, vehicles with automatic transmissions and the driver support func- unit – thus, a warning may come after a • Pilot Assist* (p. 289) delay or not at all. Never wait for a warning. tions Adaptive Cruise Control* and Pilot * Apply the brakes when necessary. • Distance Alert (p. 275) Assist* can switch target vehicles. • Head-up display* (p. 143) Switching target vehicles

If the target vehicle ahead turns suddenly, there may be stationary traffic ahead.

Collision warning symbol on the windshield. When driver support is actively following another vehicle at speeds under 30 km/h In vehicles equipped with a head-up display*, (20 mph) and switches targets from a moving a flashing warning symbol will be displayed on vehicle to a stationary vehicle, driver support the windshield. will brake for the stationary vehicle. NOTE Visual warnings on the windshield may be difficult to notice in cases of strong sunlight, reflections, extreme light contrasts, or if the driver is wearing sunglasses or is not looking straight ahead.

}}

* Option/accessory. 299 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| WARNING Adjusting set speed for driver – Change a set speed by pressing the support When driver support follows another vehi- (1) or (2) buttons briefly or by pressing cle at speeds over approx. 30 km/h It is possible to adjust set speeds for the and holding them: Adaptive Cruise Control* and Pilot Assist* (20 mph) and changes target vehicle – • Brief press: Each press changes the from a moving vehicle to a stationary one – functions. driver support will ignore the stationary speed in +/- 5 km/h (+/- 5 mph) incre- vehicle and instead accelerate to the stored ments. speed. • Press and hold: Release the button • The driver must then intervene and when the set speed indicator (3) has apply the brakes. moved to the desired speed.

Automatic standby mode when switching NOTE targets For vehicles without Adaptive Cruise Con- Driver support disengages and goes into trol*, speed instead increases by +/- 1km/h standby mode if: (+/- 1 mph) each time the button is pressed. • your vehicle's speed goes under 5 km/h (3 mph) and driver support cannot determine if the target vehicle is stationary or if : Increases the set speed. • The most recently set speed will be it is another object, e.g. a speed bump. stored. : Reduces the set speed. • your vehicle's speed goes under 5 km/h If speed is increased by depressing the accel- (3 mph) and the vehicle ahead turns so Set speed. erator pedal while pressing the (1) button that driver support no longer has a vehicle on the steering wheel, the vehicle's speed to follow. when the button is pressed will be stored as the set speed. Related information • Driver support systems (p. 270) Temporarily increasing speed using the accelerator pedal, e.g. when passing another vehi- • * Adaptive Cruise Control (p. 280) cle, will not affect the setting. The vehicle will • Pilot Assist* (p. 289) return to the set speed when the accelerator pedal is released.

300 * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT

Automatic transmission Setting time interval to the vehicle NOTE The driver support functions can follow ahead When the symbol in the instrument panel another vehicle at speeds from a standstill up The time interval to the vehicle ahead can be shows two vehicles, ACC is following the to 200 km/h (125 mph). set for the functions Adaptive Cruise Control*, vehicle ahead at a preset time interval. Pilot Assist can provide steering assistance Pilot Assist* and Distance Alert*. from near-stationary speeds up to 140 km/h Different time intervals to the When only one vehicle is shown, there is (87 mph). vehicle ahead can be selected no vehicle ahead within a reasonable dis- and are shown in the instru- tance. The lowest speed that can be set is 30 km/h ment panel as 1–5 horizontal (20 mph). When following another vehicle, bars. The more bars, the ACC can monitor that vehicle's speed and longer the time interval. One slow your own vehicle down to a standstill, bar represents an interval of but it is not possible to set speeds lower than approx. 1 second to the vehicle ahead. 5 bars 30 km/h (20 mph). represents approx. 3 seconds. Related information • Driver support systems (p. 270) NOTE • Cruise control (p. 277) When the symbol in the instrument panel shows a vehicle and a steering wheel, Pilot • Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 280) Assist follows a vehicle ahead at a preset * • Pilot Assist (p. 289) time interval.

When only a steering wheel is shown, Controls for setting a time interval. there is no vehicle ahead within a reasona- Reduce the time interval ble distance. Increase the time interval

Distance indicator – Press the (1) or (2) button to decrease or increase the time interval. > The distance indicator (3) shows the current time interval.

}}

* Option/accessory. 301 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| In order to help your vehicle follow the vehicle Related information Auto-hold braking with driver ahead as smoothly and comfortably as possi- • Driver support systems (p. 270) support ble, Adaptive Cruise Control allows the time • Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 280) The driver support functions Adaptive Cruise interval to vary noticeably in certain situations. Control* and Pilot Assist* have a special brake • Pilot Assist* (p. 289) At low speeds, when the distance to the vehi- function in slow traffic and while stationary. cle ahead is short, Adaptive Cruise Control • Distance Alert* (p. 275) increases the time interval slightly. • Head-up display* (p. 143) Braking function in slow traffic and at a standstill NOTE In slow-moving, stop-and-go traffic or when stopped at a traffic light, driving will resume • The greater the vehicles' speed, the automatically if the vehicle is stopped for less greater the distance between them for than approx. 3 seconds. If it takes more than 3 a set time interval. seconds for the vehicle ahead to begin moving • Only use the time intervals permitted again, the driver support function will go into by local traffic regulations. standby mode and the auto-hold brake func- • If driver support does not seem to tion will activate. respond with a speed increase when – The function can be reactivated by: activated, it may be because the time interval to the vehicle ahead is shorter • Pressing the button on the steer- than the set time interval. ing wheel keypad. • Pressing the accelerator pedal. WARNING > The function will resume following the • vehicle ahead if it begins to move Only use a time interval suitable for the within approx. 6 seconds. current traffic conditions. • The driver should be aware that short WARNING time intervals give them limited time to react and act to any unforeseen traffic A noticeable increase in speed may follow situation. when the speed is resumed with the steering wheel button.

302 * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT

• WARNING the gear selector is moved to the P, N or R Drive mode for driver support positions The driver can choose different drive modes The driver support system only issues a warning for obstacles detected by its radar • the driver puts the function in standby to determine how driver support should sensor – thus, a warning may come after a mode. maintain a time interval to the vehicle ahead. delay or not at all. Settings are made using the DRIVE MODE Auto Activate Parking Brake • controls. Never wait for a warning or assistance. In certain situations, the parking brake will be Apply the brakes when necessary. applied to keep the vehicle at a standstill. Select one of the following: • This occurs if the function is keeping the vehi- Eco - Driver support will focus on provid- NOTE cle stationary using the brakes and: ing good fuel economy, which will increase the time interval to the vehicle Driver support can keep the vehicle sta- • the driver opens the door or unbuckles ahead. tionary for no more than 5 minutes – after his/her seat belt • that time the parking brake is applied and Comfort - Driver support will focus on fol- • the function has kept the vehicle at a the function is deactivated. lowing the set time interval to the vehicle standstill for more than approx. 5 minutes ahead as smoothly as possible. The parking brake must be released before • the brakes overheat • Dynamic* - Driver support will focus on driver support can be reactivated. • the driver switches off the engine man- following the set time interval to the vehi- ually. cle ahead more exactly, which could mean Deactivation of the Auto-hold brake faster acceleration and heavier braking. function Related information In certain situations, auto-hold will be deacti- • Driver support systems (p. 270) Related information • vated when the vehicle is at a standstill and • Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 280) Driver support systems (p. 270) the function will go into standby mode. This • * • Pilot Assist* (p. 289) Drive modes (p. 403) means that the brakes will be released and the • • Brake functions (p. 387) Setting time interval to the vehicle ahead vehicle could begin to roll. The driver must (p. 301) actively apply the brakes to keep the vehicle stationary. This can occur if: • the driver depresses the brake pedal • the parking brake is applied

* Option/accessory. 303 DRIVER SUPPORT

48 Curve Speed Assist (CSA)* WARNING Related information • Driver support systems (p. 270) Curve Speed Assist can help the driver • The function is supplementary driver • * reduce speed before sharp turns if the preset support intended to facilitate driving Adaptive Cruise Control (p. 280) speed for the driver support function Adap- and help make it safer – it cannot han- • Pilot Assist* (p. 289) tive Cruise Control* or Pilot Assist* is deter- dle all situations in all traffic, weather • Drive modes* (p. 403) mined to be too high. and road conditions. This assessment is performed using information from map data in the vehicle's navigation • The driver is advised to read all sec- system, Sensus Navigation*. After the turn, tions in the Owner's Manual about this the vehicle will resume the previously set function to learn of its limitations, speed. which the driver must be aware of before using the function. As the function reduces the • Driver support functions are not a sub- vehicle's speed, this symbol stitute for the driver's attention and will be displayed in the instru- judgment. The driver is always respon- ment panel. sible for ensuring the vehicle is driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to The driver can cancel the function at any time other vehicles, and in accordance with by braking or using the accelerator pedal. current traffic rules and regulations.

Drive modes Cornering assistance varies depending on the selected drive mode. If drive mode cannot be selected, the function will use the Comfort option. In Dynamic mode, cornering will be sporty, with slightly more powerful acceleration coming out of curves.

48 This function is only available on some markets.

304 * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT

* Activating or deactivating Curve Curve Speed Assist (CSA) NOTE Speed Assist (CSA)* limitations The function uses the vehicle's camera and The Curve Speed Assist (CSA) function can Curve Speed Assist (CSA) functionality may radar sensor, which has certain general be activated as a supplement to Adaptive be reduced in certain situations. This function limitations. Cruise Control* or Pilot Assist*. The driver can is only available on some markets. also deactivate the function. The driver should be aware of the following Activate or deactivate the limitations: Related information function using this button in • Curve Speed Assist (CSA)* (p. 304) • Curve Speed Assist (CSA) may have lim- the center display's Function ited performance on small roads and in • Camera/radar sensor limitations (p. 311) view. densely populated areas. • At off-ramps or intersections, Curve Speed Assist (CSA) may temporarily • GREEN button indicator light – the func- switch off. tion is activated. • If the satellite navigator's50 map data is • GRAY button indicator light – the function not updated, Curve Speed Assist (CSA) is deactivated. may have limited functionality. The next time the engine is started, the last • Curve Speed Assist (CSA) functionality used setting is reactivated or the key's driver may be limited if the satellite navigator50 profile settings are followed49. has lost contact with the satellite system. Related information • On new or rebuilt roads, map data may be • Curve Speed Assist (CSA)* (p. 304) incorrect. • Curve Speed Assist (CSA)* limitations • The risk of reduced grip due to adverse (p. 305) weather or road conditions is not taken into account when calculating suitable cornering speed.

49 These alternatives are market dependent. 50 Only with Volvo Sensus Navigation* installed.

* Option/accessory. 305 DRIVER SUPPORT

Passing assistance WARNING Using passing assistance Passing assistance can assist the driver when Passing assistance can be used with Adap- • The function is supplementary driver passing other vehicles. The function can be tive Cruise Control* or Pilot Assist*. Several support intended to facilitate driving used with Adaptive Cruise Control* or Pilot conditions must be met for passing assis- and help make it safer – it cannot han- Assist*. tance to be possible. dle all situations in all traffic, weather In order to activate passing assistance: How passing assistance works and road conditions. • When Adaptive Cruise Control or Pilot Assist • The driver is advised to read all sec- your vehicle must be following a vehicle is following another vehicle and you indicate tions in the Owner's Manual about this ahead (target vehicle) that you intend to pass that vehicle by using function to learn of its limitations, • your vehicle's current speed must be the turn signal51, the system will begin accel- which the driver must be aware of at least 70 km/h (43 mph) erating toward the vehicle ahead before your before using the function. • the set speed must be high enough to vehicle has moved into the passing lane. • Driver support functions are not a sub- safely pass another vehicle. The function will then delay a speed reduction stitute for the driver's attention and To start passing assistance: to avoid early braking as your vehicle judgment. The driver is always respon- – Turn on the left turn signal. approaches a slower-moving vehicle. sible for ensuring the vehicle is driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate > Passing assistance will start. The function remains active until your vehicle speed, with an appropriate distance to has passed the other vehicle. other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations. WARNING Please note that this function can be acti- Related information vated in more situations than just passing • Driver support systems (p. 270) another vehicle, such as when a direction indicator is used to indicate a lane change • Using passing assistance (p. 306) or before exiting to another road – the vehi- • Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 280) cle will then briefly accelerate. • Pilot Assist* (p. 289)

51 Only the left-hand turn signal for left-hand drive vehicles, or right-hand turn signal for right-hand drive vehicles.

306 * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT

• WARNING Radar sensor Recommended camera and radar sensor The radar sensor is used by several driver maintenance (p. 315) The driver should be aware that if conditions suddenly change when using Passing support systems to detect other vehicles. • Radar sensor type approval (p. 308) Assistance, the function may implement an undesired acceleration in certain conditions. Some situations should be avoided, e.g. if: • the vehicle is approaching an exit in the same direction as passing would normally occur • the vehicle ahead slows before your vehicle has had time to switch to the passing lane • traffic in the passing lane slows down Location of radar sensor. Situations of this type can be avoided by tem- The radar sensor is used by the following func- porarily putting Adaptive Cruise Control or tions: Pilot Assist in standby mode. • Distance Alert* Related information • Adaptive Cruise Control* • Passing assistance (p. 306) • Pilot Assist* • Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 280) • Lane Keeping Aid • Pilot Assist* (p. 289) • City Safety • Adaptive Cruise Control* standby mode Any modifications to the radar sensor may (p. 284) make its use illegal. • Pilot Assist* standby mode (p. 294) Related information • Driver support systems (p. 270) • Camera/radar sensor limitations (p. 311)

* Option/accessory. 307 DRIVER SUPPORT

Radar sensor type approval The type approval for the vehicle's radar units for adaptive cruise control* (ACC52), Pilot Assist* and BLIS*53 are found here. Market ACC & PA BLIS Type approval

Canada ✓ FCC ID: L2C0054TR IC: 3432A-0054TR FCC ID: L2C0055TR IC: 3432A-0055TR ✓ Canada Standard RSS-310 USA ✓ FCC ID: L2C0054TR IC: 3432A-0054TR FCC ID: L2C0055TR IC: 3432A-0055TR ✓ FCC ID: NBG01RS4

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC applicables aux appareils radio exempts de produise pas de brouillage préjudiciable et Rules and with Industry Canada license- licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux qu'il accepte tout brouillage, même celui exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject conditions suivantes: susceptible d'en compromettre le to the following two conditions: fonctionnement. (1) l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, (1) This device may not cause harmful et CAUTION TO USERS: Changes or interference, and modifications not expressively approved by (2) l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout the party responsible for compliance could (2) This device must accept any interference brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le void the user's authority to operate the received, including interference that may brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre equipment. The term “IC:” before the radio cause undesired operation. le fonctionnement. certification number only signifies that Ce dispositif de radiocommunication de Cet appareil est conforme aux CNR d’Industrie Industry Canada technical specifications were catégorie II respecte la norme CNR-310 Canada a applicables aux appareils radio met. d’Industrie Canada. Le présent appareil est exempts de licence. L’exploitation est Note: This equipment complies with radiation conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada autorisée à condition que l'appareil ne exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled

52 Adaptive Cruise Control 53 Blind Spot Information

308 * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance of 20 cm between the radiator and your body.

For detailed information about type approval, please visit support.volvocars.com. Related information • Radar sensor (p. 307) • Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 280) • Pilot Assist* (p. 289) • BLIS* (p. 331)

* Option/accessory. 309 DRIVER SUPPORT

Camera Related information The camera is used by several driver support • Driver support systems (p. 270) systems to e.g. detect lane marker lines or • Camera/radar sensor limitations (p. 311) road signs. • Recommended camera and radar sensor maintenance (p. 315)

Location of the camera. The camera is used by the following functions: • Adaptive Cruise Control* • Pilot Assist* • Lane Keeping Aid* • Steering assistance at risk of collision • City Safety • Driver Alert Control* • Road Sign Information* • Active high beams* • Park Assist*

310 * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT

Camera/radar sensor limitations The camera is located on the upper interior The following table shows some of the situa- The camera and radar sensor used by several section of the windshield along with the radar tions that can cause the message to be dis- of the driver support functions has certain sensor. played, and suggested actions: limitations, which also affect the functions Do not place, affix or mount anything on the using the camera and radar sensor. The driver inside or outside of the windshield, or in front should be aware of the following limitations: of or around the camera and radar sensor – this could disrupt camera and radar-based Camera and radar functions. It could cause functions to be Obstructed camera reduced, deactivated completely or to produce an incorrect function response.

If this symbol and the message “Windscreen sensor Sensor blocked, see Owner's manual” is displayed in the instrument panel, it means that the camera and radar sensor are unable to detect other vehicles, cyclists, pedestrians and large animals in front of the vehicle and that the vehicle's camera and radar-based functions may be obstructed.

The area marked in the illustration must be cleaned regularly and kept free of decals, objects, solar film, etc.

Cause Action The area of the windshield in front of the camera/radar sensor is Clean the windshield in front of the camera/radar sensor and remove dirt, ice dirty or covered by ice or snow. and snow. Thick fog, heavy rain or snow is blocking the radar signals or the No action. Heavy precipitation may sometimes prevent the camera/radar sensor camera's range of visibility. from functioning.

}}

311 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| Cause Action Water or snow is spraying/swirling up and blocking the radar No action. Very wet or snow-covered roads may sometimes prevent the cam- signals or the camera's range of visibility. era/radar sensor from functioning. There is dirt between the inside of the windshield and the cam- Consult a workshop to have the area of the windshield on the inside of the camera/radar sensor. era's casing cleaned. An authorized Volvo workshop is recommended. Bright sunlight. No action. The camera/radar sensor will reset automatically when lighting conditions improve.

High temperatures To avoid the risk of malfunction of the driver • The same type of windshield wipers or If the temperature in the passenger compart- support systems that use the radar sensor, the wipers approved by Volvo should be used ment is very high, the camera/radar sensor following also apply: for replacement. will switch off temporarily for • If there are cracks, scratches or stone • If the windshield is replaced, the camera approx. 15 minutes after the engine is started chips on the windshield in front of any of and radar sensor must be recalibrated by a to protect its electronic components. When the camera and radar sensor "windows" workshop54 to help ensure proper func- the temperature has cooled sufficiently, the and this covers an area of tioning of all of the vehicle's camera and camera/radar sensor will automatically restart. about 0.5 × 3.0 mm (0.02 × 0.12 in.) or radar-based systems. Damaged windshield more, contact a workshop to have the windshield replaced54. Radar NOTE • Volvo advises against repairing cracks, Vehicle speed scratches or stone chips in the area in The radar sensor's ability to detect a vehicle Failure to take action could result in ahead is significantly reduced if the speed of reduced performance for the driver support front of the camera and radar sensor – the entire windshield should instead be the vehicle ahead differs greatly from your systems that use the camera and radar vehicle's speed. unit. It could cause functions to be replaced. reduced, deactivated completely or to pro- • Before replacing the windshield, contact a duce an incorrect function response. workshop54 to verify that the right windshield has been ordered and installed.

54 An authorized Volvo workshop is recommended.

312 DRIVER SUPPORT

Limited field of vision in between your vehicle and the vehicle the function of systems that depend on the The radar sensor has a limited field of vision. In directly ahead. camera or cause these systems to temporarily some situations, it may detect a vehicle later Small vehicles, such as motorcycles, or stop functioning. than expected or not at all. vehicles that are not driving in the center Strong sunlight, reflections from the road sur- of the lane may remain undetected. face, ice or snow covering the road, a dirty In curves, the radar may detect the wrong road surface, or unclear lane marker lines may vehicle or lose sight of a target vehicle. drastically reduce the camera’s ability to detect the side of a lane, a pedestrian, a Low trailers cyclist, a large animal or another vehicle.

Low trailer in the radar shadow. Low trailers may also be difficult or even impossible for the radar to detect. The driver should be extra alert when driving behind vehicles towing low trailers when Adaptive Cruise Control* or Pilot Assist* is activated.

The radar sensor's field of vision. Camera The radar sensor's detection of vehicles Reduced visibility very close to your vehicle may be delayed Cameras have the same limitations as the in certain situations, e.g. if a vehicle pulls human eye. In other words, their “vision" is impaired by adverse weather conditions such as heavy snowfall/rain, dense fog, swirling dust/snow, etc. These conditions may reduce }}

* Option/accessory. 313 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| Park Assist Camera* Defective camera the image may vary slightly. Poor lighting conditions may result in reduced image quality. Blind sectors If a camera sector is dark and contains this symbol, this Rear Park Assist Camera indicates that the camera is not functioning properly. WARNING See the following illustration Be extra cautious when for an example. reversing if this symbol is shown when a trailer, bike carrier or similar is attached and electrically connected to the vehicle. The symbol indicates that the rear parking assist sensors are deactivated and will not warn of any obstacles. There are "blind" sectors between the cameras' fields of vision. NOTE With Park Assist Camera's 360° view* selected, objects/obstacles may not be A bike carrier and other accessories moun- detected if they are located in the "joints" ted on the rear of the vehicle can obscure the camera's view. where the edges of the individual camera The vehicle's left-side camera is malfunctioning. views meet. A dark camera sector may also be displayed in Related information the following situations, but without the • Camera (p. 310) WARNING defective camera symbol: • Even if it seems as though only a fairly • Radar sensor (p. 307) small section of the screen image is a door is open • • Recommended camera and radar sensor obstructed, this may mean that a relatively the tailgate is open maintenance (p. 315) large sector is hidden and obstacles there • a rearview mirror is folded in may not be detected until they are very • Park Assist Camera* (p. 364) near the vehicle. Lighting conditions The camera image is automatically adjusted according to the current lighting conditions. This means that the brightness and quality of

314 * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT

Recommended camera and radar Related information sensor maintenance • Camera (p. 310) In order for the camera and radar sensor to • Radar sensor (p. 307) function properly, they must be kept free of • Camera/radar sensor limitations (p. 311) dirt, ice, snow, etc. and should be washed * regularly with water and car washing deter- • Park Assist Camera (p. 364) gent. NOTE Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors could cause false warnings, reduced function, or no function. Location of rear radar sensors. Keep the marked area clean (on both the left and right sides of the vehicle). • For best possible performance, it is important to keep the areas in front of the sensors clean. • Do not attach any objects, tape or decals to the surface of the sensors. • Clean the camera lenses regularly using lukewarm water and car washing detergent. Wash gently to avoid scratching the lens.

Location of the Park Assist sensors. CAUTION Only a workshop may perform maintenance on driver support components – an authorized Volvo workshop is recommended.

* Option/accessory. 315 DRIVER SUPPORT

™ City Safety The function assists the driver by automati- WARNING City Safety55 can alert the driver with light, cally applying the brakes if there is an immi- • The function is supplementary driver sound and pulsations in the brake pedal to nent risk of a collision and the driver does not support intended to facilitate driving help the driver detect pedestrians, cyclists, react in time by braking and/or steering away. and help make it safer – it cannot han- large animals and vehicles that appear sud- City Safety activates a brief, forceful braking in dle all situations in all traffic, weather denly. an attempt to stop your vehicle immediately and road conditions. behind the vehicle or object ahead. • The driver is advised to read all sec- City Safety is activated in situations in which tions in the Owner's Manual about this the driver should have applied the brakes function to learn of its limitations, much earlier, which means that the system which the driver must be aware of will not be able to assist the driver in all situa- before using the function. tions. • Driver support functions are not a sub- City Safety is designed to be activated as late stitute for the driver's attention and as possible to help avoid unnecessary inter- judgment. The driver is always respon- vention. Automatic braking will only be applied sible for ensuring the vehicle is driven after or during a collision warning. in a safe manner, at the appropriate Normally, the occupants of the vehicle will not speed, with an appropriate distance to Location of the camera and radar sensor. be aware of City Safety except when the sys- other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations. City Safety can help prevent a collision or tem intervenes when a collision is imminent. lower the vehicle's speed at the point of impact. Related information • Driver support systems (p. 270) City Safety is an aid intended to assist the driver if a collision with a pedestrian, large ani- • City Safety sub-functions (p. 317) mal, cyclist or vehicle is imminent. • Setting a warning distance for City Safety City Safety can help the driver avoid a collision (p. 319) when e.g. driving in stop-and-go traffic, when • Detecting obstacles with City Safety changes in the traffic ahead and driver distrac- (p. 320) tion could lead to an incident.

55 This function is not available on all markets.

316 DRIVER SUPPORT

• City Safety braking for oncoming vehicles City Safety sub-functions tive at speeds above 70 km/h (43 mph) and (p. 325) City Safety56 can help the driver avoid a colli- less effective at lower speeds. • Automatic braking during delayed evasive sion with a vehicle, cyclist or large animal City Safety sub-functions maneuvers with City Safety (p. 325) ahead by reducing the vehicle's speed using • City Safety in crossing traffic (p. 322) its automatic braking function. • If the difference in speed is greater than the City Safety steering assistance for evasive speeds specified below, the City Safety auto- maneuver (p. 324) brake function cannot prevent a collision, but • City Safety limitations (p. 326) it can help mitigate its effects. • City Safety messages (p. 329) Vehicles City Safety can help prevent a collision with a vehicle ahead by reducing your vehicle's speed by up to 60 km/h (37 mph). Cyclists City Safety can help prevent a collision with a cyclist ahead by reducing your vehicle's speed Function overview. by up to 50 km/h (30 mph). Acoustic collision warning signal Pedestrians Collision warning symbol City Safety can help prevent a collision with a pedestrian ahead by reducing your vehicle's Camera/radar sensor distance monitoring speed by up to 45 km/h (28 mph). City Safety carries out three steps in the fol- Large animals lowing order: If there is a risk of colliding with a large ani- 1. Collision warning mal, City Safety can help reduce your vehicle's speed by up to 15 km/h (9 mph). 2. Brake assistance The braking function for large animals is pri- 3. Auto-brake marily intended to mitigate the force of a colli- Descriptions of what happens in these three sion at higher speeds. Braking is most effec- steps are provided below.

56 This function is not available on all markets. }}

317 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| 1 - Collision warning pedestrians, cyclists or large animals that are The seat belt tensioner may be activated when The driver is first alerted to the risk of an immi- crossing the road in front of your vehicle. the automatic braking function is triggered. nent collision. If there is a risk of a collision with a pedestrian, In certain situations, auto-braking may begin In vehicles equipped with a head-up display*, large animal, cyclist or another vehicle, the with a limited braking force before applying a flashing warning symbol will be displayed on driver will be alerted with light, sound and pul- full braking force. sations in the brake pedal. At lower speeds, the windshield. If City Safety has prevented a collision, the during hard braking or if the accelerator pedal vehicle will be kept at a standstill until the is pressed, the brake pedal pulsation warning driver takes action. If the vehicle has slowed to will not be given. The intensity of the brake avoid colliding with a slower-moving vehicle pedal pulsations varies according to the vehi- ahead, your speed will be reduced to that vehicle's speed. cle's speed. 2 - Brake assistance Auto-braking can always be cancelled if the If the risk of a collision increases after the colli- driver presses hard on the accelerator pedal. sion warning, brake support will be activated. If the system determines that the pressure the NOTE driver is exerting on the brake pedal is insufficient to prevent the collision, brake support When City Safety activates the brakes, the will increase pressure. brake lights come on. Collision warning symbol on the windshield. 3 - Auto-brake The automatic braking function is activated at When City Safety applies the brakes, a text NOTE the last moment. message will appear in the instrument panel Visual warnings on the windshield may be to notify the driver that the function is/was If the driver has not taken evasive action by activated. difficult to notice in cases of strong sun- this stage and a collision is imminent, the light, reflections, extreme light contrasts, automatic braking function will be triggered. WARNING or if the driver is wearing sunglasses or is This occurs whether or not the driver is press- not looking straight ahead. ing the brake pedal. Full braking force will be City Safety may not be used to change applied to reduce the speed at impact or how the driver operates the vehicle. The City Safety can detect pedestrians, cyclists or reduced braking effect will be applied if this is driver must not only rely on City Safety to brake the vehicle. vehicles that are stationary, are moving in the sufficient to avoid the collision. same direction as your vehicle and are ahead of your vehicle. City Safety can also detect

318 * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT

Related information Setting a warning distance for City number of warnings, but it will also result in • City Safety™ (p. 316) Safety City Safety providing warnings at a later stage. • City Safety in crossing traffic (p. 322) City Safety57 is always active, but the func- The Late warning distance setting should • City Safety braking for oncoming vehicles tion's warning distance can be adjusted. therefore only be used in exceptional cases, (p. 325) NOTE such as when a more dynamic driving style is preferred. • City Safety limitations (p. 326) The City Safety function cannot be deacti- • Head-up display* (p. 143) vated. It is activated automatically each time the engine/electric motor is started. • Seat belt tensioners (p. 50)

The alert distance determines the sensitivity of the system and regulates the distance at which the light, sound and brake pulsations will be activated. To select warning distance: 1. Select Settings My Car IntelliSafe in the center display's Top view. 2. Under City Safety Warning, tap Late, Normal or Early to set the desired warning distance. If the driver feels that the Early setting is giving too many warnings or finds them irritating, the Normal or Late warning distance settings can be selected instead. If the driver feels that the warnings are too frequent and distracting, the warning distance can be reduced. This will reduce the total

57 This function is not available on all markets. }}

* Option/accessory. 319 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| WARNING NOTE Detecting obstacles with City • Safety No automatic system can guarantee The warning with direction indicators for 58 100% correct function in all situations. Rear Collision Warning* is deactivated if City Safety can help the driver detect other You should therefore never test use of the collision warning distance in the City vehicles, cyclists, large animals and pedes- City Safety in the direction of people, Safety function is set to the lowest level trians. animals or vehicles – this could lead to "Late". Vehicles severe damage, serious personal injury The seat belt tensioning and braking func- City Safety can detect most vehicles that are or even death. tions remain active. stationary or are moving in the same direction • City Safety warns the driver if there is a as your vehicle. In some cases, it can also risk of collision, but the function cannot detect oncoming vehicles and crossing traffic. reduce the driver's reaction time. Related information • City Safety™ (p. 316) For City Safety to be able to detect a vehicle in • Even if the warning distance has been • City Safety limitations (p. 326) the dark, its headlights and taillights must be set to Early, warnings may be per- on and clearly visible. ceived as late in certain situations – • Rear Collision Warning* (p. 330) e.g. when there are large speed differ- Cyclists ences or if the vehicle ahead suddenly brakes heavily. • With the warning distance set to Early, warnings come further in advance. This may cause the warnings to come more frequently than with warning distance Normal, but is recommended since it can make City Safety more effective.

Examples of what City Safety would interpret to be a cyclist: clear body and bicycle shapes.

58 This function is not available on all markets.

320 * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT

For good performance, the system's function Pedestrians WARNING for cyclist detection needs the clearest possible information about the contours of the bicy- City Safety is supplementary driver sup- cle and of the cyclist's head, arm, shoulders, port, but it cannot detect all pedestrians in all situations and, for example, cannot see: legs, torso and lower body in combination with normal human movements. • partially obscured pedestrians, people in clothing that hides their body con- If large portions of the cyclist's body or the tour or pedestrians shorter than 80 cm bicycle itself are not visible to the function's (32 in.). camera, it will not be able to detect a cyclist. • pedestrians if the background contrast The system can only detect adult cyclists rid- of the pedestrians is poor - warning ing on bicycles intended for adults. and brake interventions may then be late or not occur at all. WARNING Examples of what the system considers to be a • pedestrians who are carrying large City Safety is supplementary driver sup- pedestrian: clear body contours. objects. port, but it cannot detect all cyclists in all For good performance, the system's function The driver is always responsible for ensur- situations and, for example, cannot see: for pedestrian detection needs the clearest ing that the vehicle is driven correctly and • partially obscured cyclists. possible information about the contours of the with a safety distance suitable for the pedestrian's head, arm, shoulders, legs, torso speed. • cyclists if the background contrast of and lower body in combination with normal the cyclist is poor - warning and brake human movements. interventions may then be late or not occur at all. In order to detect a pedestrian, there must be • cyclists in clothing that hides their a contrast to the background, which could body contour. depend on clothing, weather conditions, etc. If • there is little contrast, the person may be bikes loaded with large objects. detected late or not at all, which may result in The driver is always responsible for ensur- a delayed reaction from the system or no reac- ing that the vehicle is driven correctly and tion at all. with a safety distance suitable for the speed. City Safety can detect pedestrians even in dark conditions if they are illuminated by the vehicle's headlights.

}}

321 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| Large animals WARNING City Safety in crossing traffic 59 City Safety is supplementary driver sup- City Safety can assist the driver when turn- port, but it cannot detect all large animals ing into the path of an oncoming vehicle in an in all situations and, for example, cannot intersection. see: • partially obscured larger animals. • larger animals seen from the front or from behind. • running or fast moving larger animals. • larger animals if the contrast of the animal's background is poor - warning and brake interventions may then Examples of what City Safety would interpret as a occur late or not at all. large animal: stationary or moving slowly and with clear body contours. • smaller animals such as cats and dogs. For good performance, the system's function The driver is always responsible for ensur- Sector in which City Safety can detect an for detecting large animals (e.g. moose, ing that the vehicle is driven correctly and oncoming vehicle in crossing traffic. horses, etc.) needs the clearest possible infor- with a safety distance suitable for the mation about body contours. This entails speed. In order for City Safety to detect an oncoming being able to detect the animal straight from vehicle in situations where there is a risk of a the side in combination with normal move- Related information collision, that vehicle must be within the sec- ments for that animal. • City Safety™ (p. 316) tor in which City Safety can analyze the situation. If parts of the animal's body are not visible to • City Safety limitations (p. 326) the function's camera, the system will not be The following criteria must also be met: able to detect the animal. • your vehicle's speed must be at least City Safety can detect large animals even in 4 km/h (3 mph) dark conditions if they are illuminated by the • your vehicle must be making a left turn vehicle's headlights. • the oncoming vehicle's headlights must be on

59 This function is not available on all markets.

322 DRIVER SUPPORT

Related information Limitations of City Safety in NOTE • City Safety™ (p. 316) crossing traffic The function uses the vehicle's camera and • In certain situations, it may be difficult for City Safety limitations (p. 326) radar sensor, which has certain general City Safety to help the driver avoid a collision limitations. with crossing traffic.

Related information • City Safety in crossing traffic (p. 322) • City Safety limitations (p. 326) • Camera/radar sensor limitations (p. 311)

For example: • on slippery roads when Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is actively operating • if an approaching vehicle is detected at a late stage • if the oncoming vehicle is partially obstructed by another vehicle or object • if the oncoming vehicle's headlights are off • if the oncoming vehicle is moving erratically and e.g. suddenly changes lanes at a late stage.

323 DRIVER SUPPORT

City Safety steering assistance for function also helps stabilize the vehicle after it City Safety steering assistance evasive maneuver has passed the obstacle. limitations during evasive City Safety steering assistance can help the City Safety steering assistance can detect: maneuvers driver steer away from a vehicle/obstacle City Safety steering assistance may have lim- • vehicles when it is not possible to avoid a collision by ited functionality in certain situations and not braking alone. City Safety steering assistance • cyclists intervene, e.g.: is always activated and cannot be switched • pedestrians • at speeds outside the range of off. • large animals 50-100 km/h (30-62 mph) • Related information if the driver does not take evasive action • City Safety™ (p. 316) • if speed-dependent power steering wheel resistance is working at reduced power – • City Safety limitations (p. 326) e.g. during cooling due to overheating.

NOTE The function uses the vehicle's camera and radar sensor, which has certain general limitations.

Your vehicle swerves away Related information • City Safety steering assistance for evasive Slow-moving/stationary vehicle or obsta- maneuver (p. 324) cle. • City Safety limitations (p. 326) City Safety helps provide assistance by • Speed-dependent steering wheel resis- strengthening the driver's steering move- tance (p. 270) ments, but only if the driver has begun evasive action and the system detects that the driver's • Camera/radar sensor limitations (p. 311) steering movements are not sufficient to avoid a collision. The brake system is used simultaneously to further strengthen steering movements. The

324 DRIVER SUPPORT

Automatic braking during delayed City Safety will not intervene to automatically City Safety braking for oncoming evasive maneuvers with City apply the brakes if it is possible for the driver vehicles Safety to avoid a collision by steering the vehicle. City Safety can help you apply the brakes for City Safety60 can assist the driver by auto- However, if City Safety determines that an an oncoming vehicle in your lane. matically braking the vehicle when it is not evasive maneuver would not be possible due If an oncoming vehicle veers into your lane possible to avoid a collision by steering alone. to traffic in the adjacent lane(s), the function and a collision is unavoidable, City Safety can City Safety assists the driver by periodically can assist the driver by automatically starting help reduce your vehicle's speed to attempt to attempting to predict possible "escape to apply the brakes at an earlier stage. mitigate the force of the collision. routes" to the sides of the vehicle in the event a slow-moving or stationary vehicle were to be Related information detected at a late stage. • City Safety™ (p. 316) • City Safety limitations (p. 326)

Own vehicle

Oncoming vehicles Your vehicle (1) cannot detect any potential escape routes for veering away from the vehicle ahead (2) and may therefore apply the brakes at an earlier The following criteria must be met for the stage. function to work: Own vehicle • your vehicle's speed must be above 4 km/h (3 mph) Slow-moving/stationary vehicles • the road must be straight

60 This function is not available on all markets. }}

325 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| • your lane must have clear side lane mark- City Safety limitations Camera and radar sensor's field of vision ings City Safety61 functionality may be reduced in The camera's field of vision is limited and in • your vehicle must be positioned straight in certain situations. certain situations, it may be unable to detect your lane pedestrians, large animals, cyclists or vehicles, Surroundings or it may detect them later than expected. • the oncoming vehicle must be positioned within your vehicle's lane markings Low objects Vehicles that are dirty may be detected later Hanging objects, such as flags for overhang- • the oncoming vehicle's headlights must than clean vehicles, and in dark conditions, ing loads or accessories such as auxiliary be on motorcycles may be detected late or not at all. lights or front protective grids that extend If a text message displayed in the instrument • the function can only handle “front-to- beyond the height of the hood, may limit City panel indicates that the camera/radar sensor front” collisions Safety functionality. is obstructed, it may be difficult for City Safety • the function can only detect vehicles with Slippery road conditions to detect pedestrians, large animals, cyclists, four wheels. The extended braking distance on slippery vehicles or lane markings in front of the vehi- roads may reduce City Safety's capacity to cle. City Safety functionality may therefore be WARNING help avoid a collision. In these types of situa- reduced. tions, the Anti-lock Braking System and Elec- Warnings and brake interventions due to Text messages may not be displayed for all sit- tronic Stability Control (ESC62) are designed an imminent collision with an oncoming uations in which the windshield sensors are vehicle always come very late. for optimal braking power with maintained blocked. The driver must therefore always stability. keep the windshield in front of the camera/ Related information Backlighting radar sensor clean. • City Safety™ (p. 316) The visual warning signal in the windshield • City Safety limitations (p. 326) may be difficult to detect in bright sunlight, if CAUTION there are reflections, or if the driver is wearing sunglasses or not looking straight ahead. Only a workshop may perform maintenance on driver support components – an Heat authorized Volvo workshop is recom- If the temperature in the passenger compart- mended. ment is high due to e.g. bright sunlight, the visual warning signal in the windshield may be temporarily disabled.

61 This function is not available on all markets. 62 Electronic Stability Control

326 DRIVER SUPPORT

• Driver intervention WARNING Warnings and brake interventions for pedestrians and cyclists are disen- Backing up • Warnings and brake interventions can gaged at vehicle speeds over 80 km/h City Safety is temporarily deactivated when be triggered late or not at all if the traf- (50 mph). the vehicle is backing up. fic situation or external influences pre- • Do not place, affix or mount anything Low speed vent the camera and radar unit from on the inside or outside of the wind- City Safety is not activated at very low speeds properly detecting pedestrians, shield, or in front of or around the cam- under 4 km/h (3 mph). The system will there- cyclists, large animals or vehicles era and radar unit – this could disrupt fore not intervene in situations in which your ahead of the vehicle. camera-based functions. vehicle is approaching another vehicle very • To be able to detect vehicles at night, • Objects, snow, ice or dirt in the area of slowly, such as when parking. its front and rear lights must work and the camera sensor can reduce the Active driver illuminate clearly. function, disengage it completely or Action by the driver always has priority. City • The camera and radar unit have a lim- give an improper function response. Safety will therefore not react or will react at a ited range for pedestrians and cyclists later stage with a warning or intervention in – the system can provide effective situations in which the driver is clearly steering warnings and brake interventions if the and operating the accelerator pedal, even if a relative speed is lower than 50 km/h collision is unavoidable. (30 mph). For stationary or slow-mov- An active and aware driving style may there- ing vehicles, warnings and brake inter- fore delay collision warnings and intervention ventions are effective at vehicle speeds in order to minimize unnecessary warnings. of up to 70 km/h (43 mph). Speed reduction for large animals is less than Other limitations 15 km/h (9 mph) and can be achieved at vehicle speeds over 70 km/h WARNING (43 mph). At lower speeds, the warning and brake intervention for large ani- The driver support system only issues a mals is less effective. warning for obstacles detected by its radar sensor – thus, a warning may come after a • Warnings for stationary or slow-mov- delay or not at all. ing vehicles and large animals can be disengaged due to darkness or poor • Never wait for a warning or assistance. visibility. Apply the brakes when necessary.

}}

327 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| WARNING Settings menu, your vehicle is not equipped with this function. • The City Safety auto-brake function can prevent a collision or reduce colli- In the center display's Top view, tap: sion speed, but to ensure full brake • Settings My Car IntelliSafe performance the driver should always depress the brake pedal – even when Related information the car auto-brakes. • City Safety™ (p. 316) • The warning and steering assistance • Camera/radar sensor limitations (p. 311) are only activated if there is a high risk of collision – you must therefore never wait for the collision warning or City Safety to intervene. • Warnings and brake interventions for pedestrians and cyclists are disengaged at vehicle speeds over 80 km/h (50 mph). • City Safety does not activate auto- braking intervention during heavy acceleration.

NOTE The function uses the vehicle's camera and radar sensor, which has certain general limitations.

Market limitations City Safety is not available in all countries. If City Safety is not shown in the center display's

328 DRIVER SUPPORT

City Safety messages A number of messages related to City Safety may be displayed in the instrument panel. Several examples are provided below. Message Meaning City Safety When City Safety is braking or has activated the automatic braking function, one or more symbols may illuminate in the instrument panel and a text message may be displayed. Automatic intervention

City Safety The system is not functioning as intended. Contact a workshopA. Reduced functionality Service required

A An authorized Volvo workshop is recommended.

A text message can be erased by briefly pressing the button in the center of the right- side steering wheel keypad. If a message cannot be erased, contact a workshopA. Related information • City Safety™ (p. 316)

329 DRIVER SUPPORT

63 65 Rear Collision Warning* WARNING Rear Collision Warning* 64 limitations The Rear Collision Warning (RCW) function • The function is supplementary driver can help the driver avoid rear-end collisions support intended to facilitate driving In some situations, it may be difficult for Rear from vehicles approaching from behind. and help make it safer – it cannot han- Collision Warning (RCW) to warn the driver The function can alert drivers of following vehi- dle all situations in all traffic, weather of a collision risk. cles of the risk of a collision by rapidly flashing and road conditions. This may be the case if: the turn signals. • The driver is advised to read all sec- • the vehicle approaching from the rear is If, at a speed below 30 km/h (20 mph), the tions in the Owner's Manual about this detected at a late stage function detects that the vehicle is in danger function to learn of its limitations, • the vehicle approaching from the rear of being hit from behind, the seat belt tension- which the driver must be aware of changes lanes at a late stage ers may tension the front seat belts. The before using the function. • a trailer, bicycle holder or similar is con- Whiplash Protection System will also be acti- • Driver support functions are not a sub- nected to the vehicle's electrical system - vated in a collision. stitute for the driver's attention and the function will then be automatically Immediately before a collision from behind, judgment. The driver is always respon- deactivated. the function may also activate the brakes in sible for ensuring the vehicle is driven order to reduce the forward acceleration of the in a safe manner, at the appropriate NOTE vehicle during the collision. However, the speed, with an appropriate distance to brakes will only be applied if your vehicle is other vehicles, and in accordance with In certain markets RCW does not warn stationary. The brakes will be immediately current traffic rules and regulations. with the direction indicators due to local released if the accelerator pedal is depressed. traffic regulations – in such cases, that part of the function is deactivated. The function is automatically activated each Related information time the engine is started. • Driver support systems (p. 270) • Rear Collision Warning* limitations (p. 330) • Whiplash Protection System (p. 46)

63 Warning of collision from the rear. 64 This function is not available on all markets. 65 Warning of collision from the rear.

330 * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT

* NOTE BLIS The BLIS66 function is designed to help pro- The warning with direction indicators for vide assistance in heavy traffic with several Rear Collision Warning* is deactivated if lanes moving in the same direction by helping the collision warning distance in the City the driver to detect the presence of vehicles Safety function is set to the lowest level in the "blind spot" area behind and to the side "Late". of the vehicle. The seat belt tensioning and braking functions remain active.

NOTE The function uses the vehicle's camera and BLIS overview radar sensor, which has certain general Blind spot zone limitations. Rapidly approaching vehicle zone. Related information The system is designed to react to: • * Rear Collision Warning (p. 330) • vehicles passing your vehicle • Setting a warning distance for City Safety Location of BLIS indicator light. • vehicles that are rapidly approaching your (p. 319) vehicle from behind. BLIS is a driver support system designed to • Camera/radar sensor limitations (p. 311) alert the driver of: When BLIS detects a vehicle in zone 1 or a rapidly approaching vehicle in zone 2, an indi- • vehicles in your "blind spot" cator light will illuminate in the relevant rear- • vehicles approaching rapidly in adjacent view mirror and glow steadily. If the driver lanes. then uses the turn signal on the side in which the warning has been given, the indicator light will become brighter and begin flashing. BLIS is active when your vehicle is traveling at a speed over 10 km/h (6 mph).

66 Blind Spot Information }}

* Option/accessory. 331 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| If a passing vehicle's speed is more than Related information Activating or deactivating BLIS 15 km/h (9 mph) faster than your vehicle, BLIS • Driver support systems (p. 270) The BLIS67 function can be activated or deac- will not react. • Activating or deactivating BLIS (p. 332) tivated. • BLIS limitations (p. 333) Activate or deactivate the NOTE function using this button in • BLIS messages (p. 334) The light illuminates on the side of the the center display's Function vehicle where the system has detected the view. vehicle. If the vehicle is passed on both sides simultaneously, both lights come on. • GREEN button indicator light – the func- WARNING tion is activated. • GRAY button indicator light – the function • The function is supplementary driver is deactivated. support intended to facilitate driving and help make it safer – it cannot han- If BLIS is activated when the engine is started, dle all situations in all traffic, weather the indicator lights in the rearview mirrors will and road conditions. flash once. • The driver is advised to read all sec- If BLIS is deactivated when the engine is tions in the Owner's Manual about this turned off, it will remain off the next time the function to learn of its limitations, engine is started and the indicator lights will which the driver must be aware of not illuminate. before using the function. Related information • Driver support functions are not a sub- • BLIS* (p. 331) stitute for the driver's attention and judgment. The driver is always respon- • BLIS limitations (p. 333) sible for ensuring the vehicle is driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations.

67 Blind Spot Information

332 * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT

BLIS limitations WARNING BLIS68 functionality may be reduced in cer- • BLIS does not work in sharp curves. tain situations. • BLIS does not work when the vehicle is being reversed.

NOTE The function uses the vehicle's camera and radar sensor, which has certain general limitations.

Related information • BLIS* (p. 331) • Camera/radar sensor limitations (p. 311) Keep the marked area clean (on both the left and right sides of the vehicle)69. Examples of limitations: • Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors may reduce functionality and prevent the system from providing warnings. • The BLIS function is automatically deactivated if a trailer, bicycle holder or similar is connected to the vehicle's electrical system. • For BLIS to function effectively, bicycle holders, luggage racks or similar should not be mounted on the vehicle's towbar.

68 Blind Spot Information 69 Note: This illustration is general and details may vary depending on model.

* Option/accessory. 333 DRIVER SUPPORT

BLIS messages A number of messages related to BLIS70 may be displayed in the instrument panel. Several examples are provided below. Message Meaning

Blind spot sensor The system is not functioning as intended. Contact a workshopA. Service required

Blind spot system off BLIS and CTA B have been deactivated because a trailer has been connected to the vehicle's electrical system. Trailer attached

A An authorized Volvo workshop is recommended. B Cross Traffic Alert*

70 Blind Spot Information

334 * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT

Cross Traffic Alert*71 CTA is only active when the vehicle is moving ble, the auto brake function will intervene to Cross Traffic Alert(CTA) is a supplementary backward or if reverse gear is engaged. stop the vehicle and a text will be shown on the instrument panel to explain why the vehi- driver support system to BLIS72 that is If CTA detects that something is approaching cle was braked. intended to help the driver detect vehicles your vehicle from the side: crossing behind the vehicle while backing up. • an audible signal will sound from either WARNING The auto-brake subfunction can help the the left or right speaker, depending on driver stop the car if there is a risk of collision which side of your vehicle the object is • The function is supplementary driver with an unobserved vehicle. approaching from. support intended to facilitate driving and help make it safer – it cannot han- • an icon will illuminate in the Park Assist dle all situations in all traffic, weather System graphic on the screen. and road conditions. • an icon will appear in the Park Assist Cam- • The driver is advised to read all sec- era's Top view. tions in the Owner's Manual about this function to learn of its limitations, which the driver must be aware of before using the function. • Driver support functions are not a substitute for the driver's attention and judgment. The driver is always responsible for ensuring the vehicle is driven Examples of areas in which CTA can help the driver in a safe manner, at the appropriate detect obstacles while backing up. speed, with an appropriate distance to CTA supplements BLIS by detecting traffic other vehicles, and in accordance with crossing from the side, e.g. when backing out current traffic rules and regulations. of a parking space. Illuminated CTA icon in the Park Assist System CTA is primarily designed to detect vehicles, graphic on the screen. but in certain cases can also detect pedestrians or smaller objects such as bicycles. If the driver does not pay attention to the warning from CTA and a collision is unavoida-

71 Warning for crossing traffic when the vehicle is backing up. 72 Blind Spot Information }}

* Option/accessory. 335 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| Related information Activating or deactivating Cross Cross Traffic Alert*74 limitations 73 • Driver support systems (p. 270) Traffic Alert* The Cross Traffic Alert (CTA) function with • Activating or deactivating Cross Traffic The driver can select to switch off the warn- auto brake may have limited functionality in Alert* (p. 336) ing in the function Cross Traffic Alert (CTA) – certain situations. Auto-brake is active at • Cross Traffic Alert* limitations (p. 336) the sub-function auto brake cannot be speeds under 15 km/h (9.3 mph). switched off and continues to be active. • * WARNING Cross Traffic Alert messages (p. 338) Activate or deactivate the • BLIS* (p. 331) function using this button in The auto-brake sub-function can only detect and apply the brakes for other mov- the center display's Function • Park Assist* (p. 359) ing vehicles – not for e.g. stationary obsta- view. cles, cyclists or pedestrians.

CTA has certain limitations – The CTA sen- • GREEN button indicator light – the func- sors, for example, cannot "see" through other tion is activated. parked vehicles or objects blocking the vehi- • GRAY button indication – warning signal cle. and indication on display for the function Below are a few examples of situations in is deactivated. which CTA's field of vision may be initially lim- The function is automatically activated each ited and approaching vehicles may therefore time the engine is started. not be detected until they are very close to your vehicle: Related information • Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 335) • Cross Traffic Alert* limitations (p. 336)

73 Warning for crossing traffic when the vehicle is backing up. 74 Warning for crossing traffic when the vehicle is backing up.

336 * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT

changes in relation to the obstructing vehicle/ object and its blind zone is reduced. Examples of further limitations • The auto brake sub-function only detects vehicles in motion and may therefore not "see" and brake for e.g. stationary obstacles, a cyclists or a pedestrian. • Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors may reduce functionality and prevent the system from providing warnings. • CTA is automatically deactivated if a The vehicle is parked very far into a parking space. trailer, bicycle holder or similar is connected to the vehicle's electrical system. • For CTA to function effectively, bicycle holders, luggage racks or similar should not be mounted on the vehicle's towbar.

NOTE The function uses the vehicle's camera and radar sensor, which has certain general limitations.

Related information In a diagonal parking space, CTA may be completely • Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 335) "blind" on one side of your vehicle. • Camera/radar sensor limitations (p. 311) CTA's blind zone.

CTA's field of vision. However, as you back your vehicle slowly out of a parking space, CTA's field of vision

* Option/accessory. 337 DRIVER SUPPORT

Cross Traffic Alert*75 messages instrument panel. Several examples are provi- A number of messages related to Cross ded below. Traffic Alert (CTA) may be displayed in the Message Meaning

Blind spot sensor The system is not functioning as intended. Contact a workshopA. Service required

Blind spot system off BLISB and CTA have been deactivated because a trailer has been connected to the vehicle's electrical system. Trailer attached

A An authorized Volvo workshop is recommended. B Blind Spot Information System

75 Warning for crossing traffic when the vehicle is backing up.

338 * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT

* • Road Sign Information WARNING Speed limit and speed camera warnings * The Road Sign Information (RSI76) function from Road Sign Information (p. 341) • The function is supplementary driver can help the driver observe speed-related • Road Sign Information* limitations support intended to facilitate driving road signs. (p. 343) and help make it safer – it cannot handle all situations in all traffic, weather and road conditions. • The driver is advised to read all sections in the Owner's Manual about this function to learn of its limitations, which the driver must be aware of before using the function. • Driver support functions are not a substitute for the driver's attention and judgment. The driver is always responsible for ensuring the vehicle is driven Examples of signs that can be detected77. in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to If the vehicle passes a speed limit sign, it will other vehicles, and in accordance with be displayed in the instrument panel and the current traffic rules and regulations. head-up display*.

NOTE Related information • Driver support systems (p. 270) In certain markets, the Road Sign Informa- • Activating or deactivating Road Sign Infor- tion* function is only available in combina- mation* (p. 340) tion with Sensus Navigation*. • Road Sign Information* display (p. 340) • Road Sign Information and Sensus Navigation* (p. 341)

76 Road Sign Information 77 Road signs differ according to market ‒ the illustrations shown here are just some examples.

* Option/accessory. 339 DRIVER SUPPORT

Activating or deactivating Road Road Sign Information* display the vehicle has not passed a speed-related Sign Information* Road Sign Information (RSI79) displays road sign. 78 The Road Sign Information (RSI ) function is signs in different ways depending on the sign Signs for "School" and "Children and situation. optional – the driver can choose to have the playing" function activated or deactivated. If the warning sign80 Activate or deactivate the "School" or "Children play- function using this button in ing" is included in the satel- the center display's Function 81 view. lite navigator's map data , a symbol of this type will be displayed in the instrument panel. • GREEN button indicator light – the function is activated. Related information • Road Sign Information* (p. 339) • GRAY button indicator light – the function is deactivated. • Road Sign Information* limitations 80 (p. 343) Related information Example of registered speed information. • Road Sign Information* (p. 339) When the function has registered a speed limit sign, the sign will be displayed as a sym- • Road Sign Information* limitations bol in the instrument panel and a colored (p. 343) marking will be shown in the speedometer's speed scale. If the vehicle is equipped with Sensus Navigation*, speed-related information will also be retrieved from map data, which means that the instrument panel can display or change information about speed limits even if

78 RSI: Road Sign Information. 79 Road Sign Information 80 Road signs differ according to market ‒ the illustrations shown here are just examples. 81 Only vehicles with Sensus Navigation*.

340 * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT

Road Sign Information and Sensus Speed limit and speed camera The driver can be alerted if the vehicle is Navigation* warnings from Road Sign exceeding a detected speed limit and is If the vehicle is equipped with Sensus Information* approaching a speed camera. Navigation*, speed-related information will be There are sub-functions for Road Sign Infor- Speed Limit Warning warns the driver if the provided in the following situations: mation (RSI82) that can alert the driver if the vehicle's speed has exceeded the applicable • In cases where the speed limit is given speed limit has been exceeded or if there are speed limit or the preset Speed Limiter speed. indirectly, e.g. signs for highways or other speed cameras nearby. The warning will be repeated once after major roads. about 1 minute in that speed limit area if the driver does not slow down. • If a previously detected speed sign is deemed to be no longer valid and no new A new warning and message indicating that sign has been passed. the speed limit has been exceeded will be provided only when the vehicle has entered a NOTE new/different speed limit area. In certain markets, the Road Sign Informa- NOTE * tion function is only available in combina- For an audible alert to be provided if the * tion with Sensus Navigation . speed is exceeded, the Speed Limit Warning function must be activated and the Road Sign Audio Warning sub-func- NOTE Example of speed camera and speed limit information in the instrument panel. tion must be On. Audible alerts are provi- If a downloaded third-party app is used for ded if the vehicle's speed exceeds the navigation, there is no support for speed- Speed Limit Warning speed displayed by Road Sign Information related information. When Speed Warning is acti- in the instrument panel. vated, the symbol for the cur- Related information rent speed limit in the instru- • Road Sign Information* (p. 339) ment panel83 will flash temporarily if that speed is exceeded.

82 Road Sign Information 83 Road signs differ by market – the illustration shown here is just an example. }}

* Option/accessory. 341 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| Speed camera warning Activating or deactivating 3. Tap the up/down arrows on the screen to Vehicles equipped with Road warnings from Road Sign adjust the speed at which the Speed Sign Information and Sensus Information* Warning will be given. Navigation can provide infor- The Road Sign Information (RSI85) sub-func- Please note that the set mation on upcoming speed tion Speed Limit Warning is optional – the warning limit will not be used cameras in the instrument driver can choose to have the sub-function when a speed camera symbol 84 panel activated or deactivated. is displayed in the instrument panel. If the vehicle exceeds a detected speed limit Activating Speed Warning with the Speed Limit Warning function activated, the driver is given a speed warning 1. Select Settings My Car IntelliSafe when the vehicle is approaching a speed cam- Road Sign Information in the center Activating audible alert for Speed era if the navigation map for the vehicle's cur- display's Top view. Warning. To adjust the audible alert settings: rent location contains information on speed 2. Select Speed Limit Warning. cameras. > The function is activated and a speed 1. Select Settings My Car IntelliSafe limit selector is displayed. Road Sign Information in the center NOTE display's Top view. Adjusting the Speed Warning limit It is possible to receive an audible alert for 2. Select/deselect Road Sign Audio speed cameras regardless of the vehicle's The driver can adjust the settings to be alerted Warning to activate/deactivate the audi- speed, whether or not the speed limit is at a higher speed than the posted speed limit. ble alert. exceeded, and even if the Road Sign To adjust the Speed Warning limit: Audio Warning function is deactivated. When Road Sign Audio Warning is acti- 1. Select Settings My Car IntelliSafe vated, the driver will also be alerted if the vehi- Road Sign Information in the center cle is approaching a one-way/"no-entry" road Related information display's Top view. or entrance. • Road Sign Information* (p. 339) 2. Select Speed Limit Warning. • Activating or deactivating warnings from Activating Speed camera warning Road Sign Information* (p. 342) > The function is activated and a speed If the vehicle is equipped with Sensus limit selector is displayed. Navigation* and map data contains informa- • Road Sign Information* limitations tion on speed cameras, the driver can choose (p. 343)

84 Information on speed cameras on the navigation map is not available for all markets/areas. 85 Road Sign Information

342 * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT

* to receive an audible alert if the vehicle is Road Sign Information limitations NOTE approaching a speed camera. Road Sign Information (RSI86) functionality Certain types of bike carriers that are con- may be reduced in certain situations. To adjust the audible alert settings: nected to the trailer socket may be inter- The function could have reduced functionality preted as a connected trailer by the RSI 1. Select Settings My Car IntelliSafe due to e.g.: function. In such cases, the instrument Road Sign Information in the center • faded road signs panel may indicate incorrect speed infor- display's Top view. • signs located in a curve in the road mation. 2. Select/deselect Speed Camera Audio • Warning to activate/deactivate the speed twisted or damaged signs camera audible alert. • signs positioned high above the road NOTE • fully/partially obstructed or poorly posi- The function uses the vehicle's camera and Related information radar sensor, which has certain general • * tioned signs Road Sign Information (p. 339) limitations. • signs partially or fully covered by frost, • Speed limit and speed camera warnings snow and/or dirt from Road Sign Information* (p. 341) • digital road maps87 that are outdated, Related information • Road Sign Information* limitations • * incorrect or do not contain speed informa- Road Sign Information (p. 339) (p. 343) tion88. • Camera/radar sensor limitations (p. 311)

NOTE In certain markets, the Road Sign Informa- tion* function is only available in combination with Sensus Navigation*.

86 Road Sign Information 87 Vehicles equipped with Sensus Navigation*. 88 Map data and speed information is not available for all areas.

* Option/accessory. 343 DRIVER SUPPORT

Driver Alert Control WARNING The Driver Alert Control (DAC) function is Driver Alert Control must not be used to designed to help alert the driver to erratic extend a period of driving. The driver behavior, e.g. if the driver is distracted or should plan in breaks at regular intervals showing signs of fatigue. and make sure they are well rested. The objective of DAC is to detect slowly dete- riorating driving behavior and is primarily intended to be used on major roads. The func- WARNING tion is not intended for use in city traffic. An alarm from Driver Alert Control should be taken very seriously since a sleepy driver DAC is activated when the vehicle's speed is often not aware of their own condition. exceeds 65 km/h (40 mph) and remains active as long as speeds are above 60 km/h If the alarm sounds or you feel fatigued: The vehicle is moving erratically in the lane. (37 mph). • Stop the vehicle safely as soon as pos- If driving behavior becomes sible and rest. considerably erratic, the Studies have shown that it is just as dan- driver will be alerted by this gerous to drive while tired as it is to drive symbol in the instrument under the influence of alcohol or other panel, an audible signal and stimulants. the message Time for a break. If the vehicle is equipped with Sensus Navigation* and the Rest Stop Guidance function is activated, suggestions will also be provided for suitable places to take a break.

DAC detects the vehicle's position in the traffic lane. The warning will be repeated after a short time if driving behavior does not improve. A camera monitors the traffic lane's marker lines and compares the direction of the road with the driver's movements of the steering wheel.

344 * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT

WARNING Activating or deactivating Driver Selecting guidance to a rest area if Alert Control the Driver Alert Control warning • The function is supplementary driver The Driver Alert Control (DAC) function can has been given support intended to facilitate driving be activated or deactivated. In vehicles equipped with Sensus and help make it safer – it cannot han- 1. Tap Settings in the center display's Top Navigation*, the driver can activate a guide dle all situations in all traffic, weather view. that can automatically suggest a suitable rest and road conditions. stop if the Driver Alert Control (DAC) warning • The driver is advised to read all sec- 2. Select My Car IntelliSafe Driver is given. tions in the Owner's Manual about this Alert Control. The Rest Stop Guidance function can be function to learn of its limitations, 3. Select/deselect Alertness Warning to switched on or off. which the driver must be aware of activate/deactivate the function. before using the function. 1. Tap Settings in the center display's Top view. • Driver support functions are not a sub- Related information stitute for the driver's attention and • Driver Alert Control (p. 344) 2. Select My Car IntelliSafe Driver judgment. The driver is always respon- • Driver Alert Control limitations (p. 346) Alert Control. sible for ensuring the vehicle is driven 3. Select/deselect Rest Stop Guidance to in a safe manner, at the appropriate activate/deactivate the function. speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with Related information current traffic rules and regulations. • Driver Alert Control (p. 344) • Driver Alert Control limitations (p. 346) Related information • Driver support systems (p. 270) • Activating or deactivating Driver Alert Control (p. 345) • Selecting guidance to a rest area if the Driver Alert Control warning has been given (p. 345) • Driver Alert Control limitations (p. 346)

* Option/accessory. 345 DRIVER SUPPORT

Driver Alert Control limitations Lane Keeping Aid Driver Alert Control (DAC) functionality may Lane Keeping Aid (LKA89) is designed to be reduced in certain situations. actively steer the vehicle on freeways, high- In certain situations, the system may provide a ways and other major roads to help the driver warning even if it has not detected a change in reduce the risk of the vehicle unintentionally driving behavior, e.g.: veering out of the lane. • in strong crosswinds Lake Keeping Aid steers the vehicle back into • the lane and/or alerts the driver using vibra- on grooved road surfaces. tions in the steering wheel.

WARNING Lane Keeping Aid is active at speeds between 65–200 km/h (40–125 mph) on roads with In certain cases, driving behavior might not clearly visible traffic lane marker lines. be affected despite the driver's fatigue – A camera monitors the road/traffic lane's marker when using the Pilot Assist* function – On narrow roads, the function may be unavail- lines. resulting in the driver not getting a warning able and go into standby mode. The function from DAC. will become available again when the road It is therefore very important to always becomes sufficiently wide. stop and take a break at the slightest sign of fatigue, regardless of whether the function has issued a warning or not.

NOTE The function uses the vehicle's camera and radar sensor, which has certain general limitations. Lane Keeping Aid steers the vehicle back into its Related information lane. • Driver Alert Control (p. 344) • Camera/radar sensor limitations (p. 311)

89 Lane Keeping Aid

346 * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT

NOTE Lane Keeping Aid does not intervene When the direction indicators/turn signals are activated, the Lane Keeping Aid does not provide any warning or intervene with steering.

WARNING • The function is supplementary driver support intended to facilitate driving and help make it safer – it cannot han- Lane Keeping Aid alerts the driver using vibrations in dle all situations in all traffic, weather the steering wheel. and road conditions. Lane Keeping Aid does not intervene in sharp inside Depending on the settings used, Lane Keep- • The driver is advised to read all sec- curves. ing Aid functions in different ways: tions in the Owner's Manual about this In certain cases, such as when a turn signal is • function to learn of its limitations, used or when "straightening out" an inside Assist enabled: When the vehicle which the driver must be aware of approaches a lane marker line, the func- curve, Lane Keeping Aid will not provide steer- before using the function. ing assistance or alerts. tion will actively steer the vehicle back into • the lane using light pressure on the steer- Driver support functions are not a substitute for the driver's attention and Hands on the steering wheel ing wheel. Steering assistance with Lane Keeping Aid • judgment. The driver is always respon- Warning enabled: If the vehicle is about sible for ensuring the vehicle is driven only functions if the driver's hands are on the to move over a lane marker line, the driver in a safe manner, at the appropriate steering wheel, which the system continu- will be alerted by vibrations in the steering speed, with an appropriate distance to ously monitors. wheel. other vehicles, and in accordance with If the driver's hands are not There is also an option for activating steering current traffic rules and regulations. on the steering wheel, an assistance and alerts at the same time. audible signal will be given and a message will instruct the driver to actively steer the vehicle:

• Lane Keeping Aid – Apply steering }}

347 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| If the driver does not begin to steer the vehi- Activating or deactivating Lane Selecting type of assistance for cle, the function will go into standby mode Keeping Aid Lane Keeping Aid and this message will be displayed: The Lane Keeping Aid (LKA90) function is The driver can determine what types of assis- • Lane Keeping Aid – Standby until optional – the driver can choose to have the tance Lane Keeping Aid (LKA91) should pro- steering applied function activated or deactivated. vide if the vehicle veers from its lane. Activate or deactivate the The function will then be unavailable until the 1. Select Settings My Car IntelliSafe function using this button in driver begins actively steering the vehicle in the center display's Top view. the center display's Function again. view. 2. Under Lane Keeping Aid Mode, select what assistance the function should pro- Related information vide: • Driver support systems (p. 270) • Assist the driver will receive steering • Activating or deactivating Lane Keeping • GREEN button indicator light – the func- assistance but no warning. Aid (p. 348) tion is activated. • Both – the driver receives steering • Lane Keeping Aid limitations (p. 349) • GRAY button indicator light – the function assistance and a warning through • is deactivated. Lane Keeping Aid symbols and messages vibrations in the steering wheel. (p. 350) Related information • Warning – the driver is only warned • Lane Keeping Aid (p. 346) through vibrations in the steering • Selecting type of assistance for Lane wheel. Keeping Aid (p. 348) Related information • Lane Keeping Aid limitations (p. 349) • Lane Keeping Aid (p. 346)

90 Lane Keeping Aid 91 Lane Keeping Aid

348 DRIVER SUPPORT

Lane Keeping Aid limitations Related information In certain demanding driving conditions, Lane • Lane Keeping Aid (p. 346) Keeping Aid (LKA92) may not be able to prop- • Speed-dependent steering wheel resis- erly assist the driver. In these situations, it is tance (p. 270) recommended that the function be deacti- • Camera/radar sensor limitations (p. 311) vated. Examples of such situations include: • road work • winter driving conditions • poor road surfaces • a very sporty driving style • bad weather with reduced visibility • roads with indistinct or no lane markings • sharp edges or lines other than the lane's side markings • when speed-dependent power steering wheel resistance is working at reduced power – e.g. during cooling due to overheating. The function cannot detect barriers, railings or similar obstacles at the side of the lane.

NOTE The function uses the vehicle's camera and radar sensor, which has certain general limitations.

92 Lane Keeping Aid

349 DRIVER SUPPORT

Lane Keeping Aid symbols and played in the instrument panel. Several exam- messages ples are provided below. A number of symbols and messages related to Lane Keeping Aid (LKA93) may be dis- Symbol Message Meaning

Driver support system The system is not functioning as intended. Contact a workshopA. Reduced functionality Service required

Windscreen sensor The camera's ability to detect the lane in front of the vehicle is reduced. Sensor blocked, see Owner's manual

Lane Keeping Aid LKA's steering assistance is disabled when the driver's hands are not on the wheel. Follow the instructions and steer the vehicle. Apply steering

Lane Keeping Aid LKA will go into standby mode until the driver begins steering the vehicle again. Standby until steering applied

A An authorized Volvo workshop is recommended.

93 Lane Keeping Aid

350 DRIVER SUPPORT

351 DRIVER SUPPORT

Lane Keeping Aid display Unavailable Related information Lane Keeping Aid (LKA94) uses symbols in • Lane Keeping Aid (p. 346) the instrument panel for various situations. • Lane Keeping Aid limitations (p. 349) Some examples of symbols and descriptions of the situations in which they might appear are provided below.

Available Unavailable ‒ the marker lines in the symbol are GRAY. Lane Keeping Aid is unable to detect the lane marker lines, the vehicle's speed is too low or the road is too narrow. Steering/warning indicator

Available ‒ the marker lines in the symbol are WHITE. Lane Keeping Aid is able to detect one or both of the traffic lane's side marker lines.

Steering/warning ‒ the marker lines in the symbol are COLORED. Indicates that the Lane Keeping Aid system is alerting the driver and/or attempting to steer the vehicle back into the lane.

94 Lane Keeping Aid

352 DRIVER SUPPORT

• Steering assistance at risk of WARNING Run-Off Mitigation with steering assis- collision tance (p. 354) • The function is supplementary driver The Collision avoidance assistance function • Steering assistance during collision risks support intended to facilitate driving can help the driver reduce the risk of the vehi- from oncoming traffic (p. 355) and help make it safer – it cannot han- cle leaving its lane unintentionally and/or col- dle all situations in all traffic, weather • Steering assistance during collision risks liding with another vehicle or obstacle by and road conditions. from behind* (p. 356) actively steering the vehicle back into its lane • and/or swerving. • The driver is advised to read all sec- Steering assistance during collision risks The function consists of these sub-functions: tions in the Owner's Manual about this limitations (p. 357) function to learn of its limitations, • Symbols and messages for steering assis- • Run-Off Mitigation with steering assis- which the driver must be aware of tance during collision risks (p. 358) tance before using the function. • Steering assistance during collision risks • Driver support functions are not a sub- from oncoming traffic stitute for the driver's attention and • Steering assistance during collision risks judgment. The driver is always respon- from behind* sible for ensuring the vehicle is driven After the system has automatically intervened, in a safe manner, at the appropriate this text message will appear in the instru- speed, with an appropriate distance to ment panel: other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations. Collision avoidance assistance – Automatic intervention NOTE It is always the driver who must decide how much the vehicle should be in control – the vehicle can never take command.

Related information • Driver support systems (p. 270) • Activating or deactivating steering assistance during collision risks (p. 354)

* Option/accessory. 353 DRIVER SUPPORT

Activating or deactivating steering NOTE Run-Off Mitigation with steering assistance during collision risks assistance When the Collision avoidance The steering assistance function is optional – Steering assistance has several sub-func- assistance function is deactivated, all sub- the driver can choose to have it activated or tions. Run-Off Mitigation with steering assis- functions of the following are deactivated: deactivated. tance can help the driver and reduce the risk Activate or deactivate the • Steering assistance at risk of run-off of the vehicle inadvertently running off the function using this button in • Steering assistance at risk of head-on road by actively steering the vehicle back the center display's Function collision onto the road. view. • This function has two activation levels for Steering assistance during collision intervention: risks from behind* • Steering assistance only Although it is possible to deactivate the • GREEN button indicator light – the func- function, the driver is advised to keep it • Steering assistance with braking tion is activated. activated since it can help improve driving Steering assistance only • GRAY button indicator light – the function safety in most cases. is deactivated. The function is automatically activated each Related information time the engine is started95. • Steering assistance at risk of collision (p. 353) • Steering assistance during collision risks limitations (p. 357)

Intervention with steering assistance.

95 On some markets, the setting that was active when the engine was switched off is reactivated.

354 * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT

Steering assistance with braking is used. The function will also not be activated Steering assistance during if it detects that the driver is actively operating collision risks from oncoming the vehicle. traffic Related information Steering assistance has several sub-functions. Steering assistance during collision • Steering assistance at risk of collision risks from oncoming traffic can help a dis- (p. 353) tracted driver who has not noticed that the • Steering assistance during collision risks vehicle is veering out of the lane. limitations (p. 357)

Intervention with steering assistance and braking. Braking intervention assists in situations where steering assistance alone is not sufficient. Braking force is automatically adapted according to the situation at the moment the vehicle begins to run off the road.

The function is active at speeds between The function provides assistance by swerving your 65-140 km/h (40-87 mph) on roads with vehicle back into your own lane. clearly visible traffic lane markings/lines. Oncoming vehicles The system uses a camera to monitor the Own vehicle edges of the road and the painted side marker lines. If the vehicle is about to cross the edge When steering assistance is activated, colli- of the road, the function will attempt to steer sion warning for driver support will also be the vehicle back onto the road. If this is not activated. However, the brake pedal pulsa- sufficient to keep the vehicle on the road, the tions that are part of collision warning will not brakes will also be applied. be activated. However, the function will not provide either steering assistance or braking if the turn signal }}

355 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| The function is active at speeds between Steering assistance during next lane, this function can help the driver 60-140 km/h (37-87 mph) on roads with collision risks from behind* steer the vehicle back into its own lane. clearly visible traffic lane markings/lines. Steering assistance has several sub-func- Even if the driver intentionally changes lanes If your vehicle is starting to veer from your tions. If you become distracted and do not using a turn signal without noticing another own lane and a vehicle is approaching from notice your vehicle starting to veer out of the vehicle approaching, the function can provide the opposite direction, this function can help lane while another vehicle is approaching assistance. the driver steer the vehicle back into its own from behind or is in your vehicle's blind spot, The function is active at speeds between lane. Steering assistance during collision risks from behind can help provide assistance. 60-140 km/h (37-87 mph) on roads with However, the function will not provide steer- clearly visible traffic lane markings/lines. ing assistance if the turn signal is used. The The lights in the door mirrors will flash while function will also not be activated if it detects steering assistance is being provided, whether that the driver is actively operating the vehicle. or not the BLIS96 function is activated. Related information Related information • Steering assistance at risk of collision • Steering assistance at risk of collision (p. 353) (p. 353) • Collision risk warning from driver support • BLIS* (p. 331) (p. 298) • Steering assistance during collision risks • Steering assistance during collision risks limitations (p. 357) limitations (p. 357) The function provides assistance by steering your vehicle back into your own lane. Another vehicle in blind spot zone

Own vehicle If your vehicle is beginning to veer out of your lane while another vehicle is in your blind spot or another vehicle is rapidly approaching in the

96 Blind Spot Information

356 * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT

Steering assistance during NOTE collision risks limitations The function uses the vehicle's camera and The function may have limited functionality in radar sensor, which has certain general certain situations and not intervene, e.g.: limitations. • for smaller vehicles such as motorcycles • if more than half of your vehicle has moved into the adjacent lane Related information • Steering assistance at risk of collision • on roads/lanes with indistinct or no side (p. 353) lane markings • Run-Off Mitigation with steering assis- • outside the speed range 60-140 km/h tance (p. 354) (37-87 mph) • Steering assistance during collision risks • when speed-dependent power steering from oncoming traffic (p. 355) wheel resistance is working at reduced • power – e.g. during cooling due to over- Steering assistance during collision risks * heating. from behind (p. 356) Functionality may also be reduced in other situations, such as: • road work • winter driving conditions • narrow roads • poor road surfaces • a very sporty driving style • bad weather with reduced visibility. In these demanding driving conditions, the function may not be able to properly assist the driver. In these situations, it is recommended that it is turned off.

* Option/accessory. 357 DRIVER SUPPORT

Symbols and messages for the instrument panel. Several examples are steering assistance during collision provided below. risks A number of symbols and messages related to steering assistance may be displayed in Symbol Message Meaning Collision avoidance assistance When the function is activated, a message will appear to alert the driver. Automatic intervention

Windscreen sensor The camera's ability to detect the lane in front of the vehicle is reduced. Sensor blocked, see Owner's manual

358 DRIVER SUPPORT

* Park Assist ume of the audio system will be automatically WARNING The Park Assist function can help the driver lowered. • The function is supplementary driver when maneuvering in tight spaces by indicat- Audible signals for obstacles in front and to support intended to facilitate driving ing distances to obstacles using audible sig- the sides of the vehicle are active when the and help make it safer – it cannot han- nals and graphics in the center display. vehicle is moving but will cease after the vehi- dle all situations in all traffic, weather cle has been stationary for approx. 2 seconds. and road conditions. Audible signals for obstacles behind the vehi- • cle will remain active even when the vehicle is The driver is advised to read all sec- stationary. tions in the Owner's Manual about this function to learn of its limitations, If a detected obstacle is within approx. 30 cm which the driver must be aware of (1 ft) from the front or rear of the vehicle, the before using the function. tone will become constant and the active sen- • Driver support functions are not a sub- sor's field closest to the vehicle symbol will be stitute for the driver's attention and filled in. judgment. The driver is always respon- At distances within approx. 25 cm (0.8 ft) sible for ensuring the vehicle is driven from an obstacle to the sides of the vehicle, an in a safe manner, at the appropriate Display view showing obstacle zones and sensor rapid pulsing signal will be given and the speed, with an appropriate distance to sectors. active sector fields will change color from other vehicles, and in accordance with The center display shows an overview of the ORANGE to RED. current traffic rules and regulations. vehicle in relation to objects that have been The volume of the Park Assist audible signals detected. can be adjusted while the signal is being given Related information The marked sector indicates where the obsta- using the >II knob or in the center display's • Driver support systems (p. 270) cle is located. The closer the vehicle symbol is Top view under Settings. • Park Assist front, rear and sides* (p. 360) to a marked sector forward/rearward, the • Activating or deactivating Park Assist* closer the detected obstacle is to your vehicle. NOTE (p. 361) The side sectors change color as the distance Besides in the sector closest to the vehicle • Park Assist symbols and messages between the vehicle and an object decreases. symbol, audible warnings are only provided (p. 363) for objects located directly in the vehicle's The audible signals will also speed up the • path. Park Assist limitations (p. 361) closer the obstacle is to the vehicle. The vol-

* Option/accessory. 359 DRIVER SUPPORT

* Park Assist front, rear and sides NOTE The rear sensors will be activated if the vehicle Park Assist behaves differently depending on begins rolling backward or if reverse gear is The Park Assist system is deactivated which part of the vehicle is approaching an engaged. when the parking brake is used or when P obstacle. is selected on vehicles with automatic The distance monitored extends approx. 1.5 meters (5 ft) behind the vehicle. Front camera transmission. The Park Assist system's rear sensors will be automatically deactivated if the vehicle is CAUTION backing up with a trailer connected to the When installing auxiliary lights: Make sure vehicle's electrical system. these do not obscure the sensors – the auxiliary lights could be perceived as an NOTE obstacle. When reversing with e.g. a trailer or bike carrier on the trailer hitch – without Volvo Back original trailer cables – the Parking Assist system may have to be turned off manually to prevent the sensors from reacting to these. The warning signal has a continuous tone when the obstacle is less than approx. 30 cm (1 ft) from the vehicle. The Park Assist system's front sensors are automatically activated when the engine is started. They are active at speeds below 10 km/h (6 mph). The distance monitored extends approx. 80 cm (2.5 ft) in front of the vehicle. The warning signal has a continuous tone when the obstacle is less than approx. 30 cm (1 ft) from the vehicle.

360 * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT

Side sensors Activating or deactivating Park Park Assist limitations Assist* Park Assist may not be able to detect all con- The Park Assist function can be activated or ditions in all situations and functionality may deactivated. therefore be limited in certain cases. Park Assist's front and side sensors are auto- The driver should be aware of the following matically activated when the engine is started. limitations for Park Assist: The rear sensors are activated if the vehicle is moving backward or reverse gear is engaged. WARNING Activate or deactivate the • The parking sensors have dead/blind function using this button in spots where objects cannot be the center display's Function detected. view. • Pay particular attention to people and The warning signal will begin pulsating rapidly when animals near the vehicle. the obstacle is less than approx. 25 cm (0.8 ft) from • the vehicle. Bear in mind that the front end of the • GREEN button indicator light – the func- vehicle may swing out towards oncom- Park Assist's side sensors are automatically tion is activated. ing traffic during the parking maneuver. activated when the engine is started. They are • GRAY button indicator light – the function active at speeds below 10 km/h (6 mph). is deactivated. WARNING The distance monitored is approx. 25 cm In vehicles equipped with Park Assist Cam- Be extra cautious when (0.8 ft) out from the sides. era*, Park Assist can also be activated or deac- reversing if this symbol is The detection area of the side sensors increa- tivated from the relevant camera view. shown when a trailer, bike ses significantly, however, when the steering carrier or similar is angle of the front wheel increases and Related information attached and electrically • * depending on the position of the steering Park Assist (p. 359) connected to the vehicle. wheel, obstacles up to approx. 90 cm (3 ft) • Park Assist limitations (p. 361) The symbol indicates that diagonally behind or in front of the vehicle can the rear parking assist sensors are deacti- be detected. vated and will not warn of any obstacles. Related information • Park Assist* (p. 359) • Park Assist sensor field (p. 369) }}

* Option/accessory. 361 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| CAUTION NOTE Objects such as chains, thin and glossy When a trailer hitch is configured with the poles or low obstacles may end up in the vehicle electrical system, the trailer hitch "signal shadow" and then go temporarily protrusion is included when the function undetected by the sensors – the pulsating measures the distance to objects behind tone may then unexpectedly stop instead the vehicle. of becoming a constant tone as expected. The sensors cannot detect high objects, Related information such as protruding ramps. • Park Assist* (p. 359) • In such situations, pay extra attention and maneuver/drive the vehicle very slowly or stop the current parking maneuver – there may be a high risk of damage to the vehicle or other objects since information from the sensors is not always reliable in such situations.

CAUTION In some circumstances, the Park Assist System may produce false warnings due to external sound sources with the same ultrasonic frequencies as those the system works with. Examples of such sources are horns, wet tires on asphalt, pneumatic brakes, exhaust noise from motorcycles, etc.

362 * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT

Park Assist symbols and messages panel and/or the center display. Several Symbols and messages for the Park Assist examples are provided below. system may be displayed in the instrument Symbol Message Meaning The rear Park Assist sensors are turned off and no acoustic warnings for obstacles/ objects will be provided.

Park Assist System One or more of the sensors are blocked. Check and clean/remove the obstacle as soon as possible. Sensors blocked, cleaning needed

Park Assist System The system is not functioning as intended. Contact a workshopA. Unavailable Service required

A An authorized Volvo workshop is recommended.

* Option/accessory. 363 DRIVER SUPPORT

Park Assist Camera* Towbar* - activate/deactivate trajectory The Park Assist Camera can help provide the lines for towbar*98 driver when maneuvering in tight spaces by CTA* - activate/deactivate Cross Traffic alerting the driver to obstacles using the Alert camera screen and graphics in the center dis- Objects/obstacles may be closer to the vehicle play. than they appear on the display. The Park Assist Camera is a support function that is automatically activated when reverse gear is engaged. It can also be started man- WARNING ually from the center display. • The parking sensors have dead/blind spots where objects cannot be detected. • Pay particular attention to people and animals near the vehicle. • Bear in mind that the front end of the vehicle may swing out towards oncoming traffic during the parking maneuver.

Example camera view. Zoom97 - zoom in/out 360° view* - activate/deactivate all cameras PAS* - activate/deactivate Parking Assist

Lines - activate/deactivate trajectory lines

97 The trajectory lines will not be displayed when zooming in. 98 Not available for all models and markets.

364 * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT

• WARNING Park Assist Camera symbols and mes- Location and field of vision of Park sages (p. 372) Assist Cameras* • The function is supplementary driver • Camera/radar sensor limitations (p. 311) PAC can display a 360° panoramic view as support intended to facilitate driving well as separate views for each of the other and help make it safer – it cannot han- • Park Assist* (p. 359) cameras: rear, front, left and right. dle all situations in all traffic, weather • Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 335) and road conditions. • The driver is advised to read all sections in the Owner's Manual about this function to learn of its limitations, which the driver must be aware of before using the function. • Driver support functions are not a substitute for the driver's attention and judgment. The driver is always responsible for ensuring the vehicle is driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations.

Related information • Driver support systems (p. 270) • Location and field of vision of Park Assist Cameras* (p. 365) • Park Assist Camera trajectory lines* (p. 367) • Park Assist sensor field (p. 369) • Activating Park Assist Camera (p. 370)

}}

* Option/accessory. 365 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| 360° view* If the vehicle is equipped with Park Assist Front camera System*, the distance to detected obstacles will be illustrated by fields in different colors. The cameras can be activated automatically or manually. Back

The location of the cameras and their approximate The front Park Assist Camera is located in the grille. fields of vision. The front camera can be useful when pulling The 360° view function activates all Park out from areas with limited visibility, such as a Assist Cameras and all four sides of the vehi- driveway surrounded by a hedge. The front cle are shown in the center display at once to camera is active at speeds up to 25 km/h help the driver see what is around the vehicle (16 mph) and is automatically turned off when The rear camera is located above the license plate. while maneuvering at low speeds. the vehicle exceeds this speed. The rear camera shows a wide area behind the From the 360° view, each camera view can vehicle. On certain models, part of the bumper If the vehicle does not reach a speed of be activated separately: and the towbar (if installed) may be visible. 50 km/h (30 mph) and speed falls below • Tap the screen to select the camera's field 22 km/h (14 mph) within 1 minute after the Objects on the center display may appear to of vision, e.g. in the area in front/above the front camera turns off, the camera will be be leaning slightly. This is normal. front camera. reactivated. The active cameras will be indicated by a camera symbol on the vehicle symbol in the center display.

366 * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT

Side cameras Park Assist Camera trajectory wheel and can help simplify parallel parking, lines* backing into tight spaces or attaching a trailer. The Park Assist Cameras use trajectory lines The lines on the screen are projected as if they and fields on the screen to indicate the vehi- were painted lines on the ground behind the cle's position in relation to its immediate sur- vehicle and are directly affected by the way in roundings. which the steering wheel is turned. This makes it possible for the driver to see path the vehicle will take, even if he/she turns the steering wheel. These lines also indicate the outermost limits that any object (towbar, rearview mirrors, corners of the body, etc.) extends out from the The side cameras are located in the rearview mirrors. vehicle. The side cameras can show views along each NOTE side of the vehicle. • When reversing with a trailer that is Related information not electrically connected to the vehi- • Park Assist Camera* (p. 364) cle, the screen guide lines show the • Activating Park Assist Camera (p. 370) path the vehicle will take – not the trailer. • Camera/radar sensor limitations (p. 311) • The screen does not show guide lines when a trailer is electrically connected to the vehicle's electrical system. • Guide lines are not shown when zooming in. Example of trajectory lines. The trajectory lines show the anticipated trajectory for the vehicle's outermost dimensions based on the current position of the steering

}}

* Option/accessory. 367 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| CAUTION Trajectory lines in 360° view* Trajectory lines for a towbar* • Bear in mind that when the rearward camera view is selected, the screen only shows the area behind the vehicle – pay attention to the sides and front of the vehicle when steering while reversing. • The same applies to the reverse – pay attention to what is happening with the rear parts of the vehicle when the front camera view is selected. • Note that the guide lines show the shortest path – pay extra attention to 360° view with trajectory lines. ensure that the vehicle sides do not In the 360° view, trajectory lines are shown come in contact with/travel over any- behind, in front of, or to the sides of the vehi- thing when steering while driving for- cle, depending on the direction of travel. ward or that the vehicle front moves toward/over anything when steering • When driving forward: Front lines while reversing. • When backing up: Side lines and rear lines. When the front or rear camera is selected, the Towbar with trajectory line. trajectory lines will be shown regardless of the vehicle's direction of travel. Towbar - activate trajectory lines for towbar. With a side camera selected, the trajectory Zoom - zoom in/out. lines will only be shown if the vehicle is backing up. The camera can help make hitching a trailer easier by showing an anticipated trajectory line for the towbar's path toward the trailer.

368 * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT

1. Tap Towbar (1). Park Assist sensor field The front and rear fields change colors (from > The trajectory line for the towbar's If the vehicle is equipped with Park Assist*, YELLOW to ORANGE to RED) as the vehicle anticipated path toward the vehicle will distances will be shown in the 360° view moves closer to an obstacle. appear and the vehicle's trajectory lines with colored fields for each sensor that has Field color Distance in meters will disappear. detected an obstacle. rearward (feet) Trajectory lines cannot be displayed for Front and rear sensors Yellow 0.6-1.5 (2.0-4.9) both the vehicle and the towbar at the same time. Orange 0.3–0.6 (1.0–2.0) 2. Tap Zoom (2) for a close-up view for more Red 0-0.3 (0-1.0) precise maneuvering. > The camera will zoom in. Field color for- Distance in meters Related information ward (feet) • Park Assist Camera* (p. 364) Yellow 0.6–0.8 (2.0–2.6) • Location and field of vision of Park Assist Cameras* (p. 365) Orange 0.3–0.6 (1.0–2.0) • Camera/radar sensor limitations (p. 311) Red 0-0.3 (0-1.0)

When the sensor field color is red, the audible pulsing sounds will change to a continuous tone.

The screen can display colored sensor fields on the vehicle symbol.

}}

* Option/accessory. 369 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| Side sensor fields Right-side rear sensor field Activating Park Assist Camera Warning signals vary depending on the vehi- The Park Assist Camera is automatically acti- Obstacle sector in the vehicle's intended cle's intended direction of travel. Depending vated when reverse gear is engaged or can direction of travel rearward – varies on the steering wheel position, warnings may be started manually using one of the center according to steering wheel position. be given for obstacles diagonally in front of or display's function buttons. behind the vehicle, not only directly behind the The color of the side field changes as the vehi- vehicle. Camera view when backing up cle moves closer to the object – from YEL- When reverse gear is engaged, the screen LOW to RED. shows the rear view99. Side field Distance in meters color (feet) Camera view when manually activating the camera Yellow 0,25–0,9 (0,8–3,0) Activate the Park Assist Cam- era using this button in the Red 0–0,25 (0–0,8) center display's Function view. When the sensor field is RED, the audible pulsing signal will become more rapid. The screen will first show the most recently used camera Related information view. However, each time the engine is • * Parking sensor sectors where obstacles can be Park Assist (p. 359) started, the previous side view will be replaced detected. • Park Assist Camera* (p. 364) by the 360° view and a previously displayed Left-side front sensor field • zoomed-in rear view will be replaced by the Location and field of vision of Park Assist regular rear view. Cameras* (p. 365) Obstacle sector in the vehicle's intended • GREEN button indicator light – the func- • Camera/radar sensor limitations (p. 311) direction of travel forward – varies accord- tion is activated. ing to steering wheel position • GRAY button indicator light – the function Sector with RED field color and rapidly is deactivated. pulsing tone

99 In Canada, it is also possible to choose the 360° view. For the US, rear view is standard and cannot be changed.

370 * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT

Automatically deactivating the camera Front view switches off when the vehicle's speed reaches 25 km/h (16 mph) to help avoid distracting the driver. It will be automatically reactivated if the vehicle's speed falls below 22 km/h (14 mph) within 1 minute as long as the vehicle's speed has not exceeded 50 km/h (31 mph). Other camera views switch off at 15 km/h (9 mph) and are not reactivated. Related information • Park Assist Camera* (p. 364) • Park Assist limitations (p. 361) • Camera/radar sensor limitations (p. 311)

* Option/accessory. 371 DRIVER SUPPORT

Park Assist Camera symbols and panel and/or the center display. Several messages examples are provided below. Symbols and messages for the Park Assist Camera may be displayed in the instrument Symbol Message Meaning The rear Park Assist sensors are turned off and no acoustic warnings or field markings for obstacles/objects will be provided.

The camera is not functioning properly.

Park Assist System One or more of the sensors are blocked. Check and clean/remove the obstacle as soon as possible. Sensors blocked, cleaning needed

Park Assist System The system is not functioning as intended. Contact a workshopA. Unavailable Service required

A An authorized Volvo workshop is recommended.

A text message can be erased by briefly press- If a message cannot be erased, contact a Related information ing the button in the center of the right- workshopA. • Park Assist Camera* (p. 364) side steering wheel keypad. • Camera/radar sensor limitations (p. 311)

372 * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT

* • * Park Assist Pilot WARNING Park Assist Pilot messages (p. 380) Park Assist Pilot (PAP100) can help the driver • The function is supplementary driver maneuver the vehicle when parking. The support intended to facilitate driving function can also assist with steering when and help make it safer – it cannot han- pulling out from a parallel parking space. dle all situations in all traffic, weather The function first checks whether there is suf- and road conditions. ficient space and then helps the driver steer the vehicle into the space. • The driver is advised to read all sections in the Owner's Manual about this The center display uses symbols, graphics and function to learn of its limitations, messages to inform the driver of what steps which the driver must be aware of need to be taken and when. before using the function. • Driver support functions are not a substitute for the driver's attention and judgment. The driver is always responsible for ensuring the vehicle is driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations.

Related information • Driver support systems (p. 270) • Types of parking with Park Assist Pilot* (p. 374) • Using Park Assist Pilot* (p. 375) • Leaving a parallel parking space with Park Assist Pilot* (p. 377) • Park Assist Pilot* limitations (p. 378)

100Park Assist Pilot

* Option/accessory. 373 DRIVER SUPPORT

Types of parking with Park Assist Perpendicular parking Related information Pilot* • Park Assist Pilot* (p. 373) Park Assist Pilot (PAP101) can be used for • Leaving a parallel parking space with Park both parallel and perpendicular parking. Assist Pilot* (p. 377) Parallel parking

Perpendicular parking overview. The function helps park the vehicle using the following steps: 1. The system searches for and measures Overview of parallel parking. potential parking spaces. The function helps park the vehicle using the 2. The vehicle is steered while it is backing following steps: into the space and its position is adjusted 1. The system searches for and measures by driving forward/backward. potential parking spaces. 2. The vehicle is steered while it is backing NOTE into the parking space. Leaving a parking space with the Park Out 3. The vehicle's position in the space is function should only be used in connection adjusted by driving forward/backward. with parallel parking – it does not work for The Park Out function can also help the driver perpendicular parking. pull out of parking spaces.

101 Park Assist Pilot

374 * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT

* Using Park Assist Pilot NOTE Park Assist Pilot (PAP102) helps the driver The distance between the vehicle and park using three different steps. The function parking spots should be 0.5–1.5 meters can also help the driver pull out of a parking (1.6–5.0 ft) when the function is looking space. for parking. The function measures the space and steers the vehicle. The driver's role is to: Parking with Park Assist Pilot • keep close watch of the area around the The function helps park the vehicle using the vehicle following steps: • follow the instructions on the center dis- 1. The system searches for and measures play potential parking spaces. • change gears (reverse/forward) – an audi- Parallel parking search overview. 2. The vehicle is steered while it is backing ble signal indicates when the driver needs into the parking space. to change gears 3. The vehicle is positioned in the parking • regulating and maintaining a safe speed space (the driver may be prompted to shift • applying the brakes and stopping the vehi- gears and apply the brakes). cle. Searching and measuring potential parking Information about the actions required by the spots driver are provided in the center display using The function can be activated symbols, graphics and/or text. in the center display's Func- The function can be activated if the following tion view. criteria have been met after the engine is It can also be accessed from started: the camera views. Perpendicular parking search overview. • No trailer is hitched to the vehicle The vehicle's speed may not exceed 30 km/h • Your vehicle's speed is lower than • GREEN button indicator light – the func- (20 mph) when parallel parking or 20 km/h 30 km/h (20 mph). tion is activated. (12 mph) when perpendicular parking. • GRAY button indicator light – the function is deactivated.

102 Park Assist Pilot }}

* Option/accessory. 375 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| 1. Tap Park In in Function view or in Camera Backing into a parking space 2. Back up slowly and carefully without view. touching the steering wheel and do not > The function will search for a potential exceed a speed of 7 km/h (4 mph). parking space and measure it to deter- 3. Be prepared to stop the vehicle when mine if it is big enough. instructed to do so by a graphic and mes- 2. Be prepared to stop the vehicle when a sage in the center display. graphic and message in the center display indicate that a suitable parking space has NOTE been found. • Keep your hands away from the steer- > A pop-up window will appear. ing wheel when the function is acti- 3. Select Parallel parking or Perpendicular vated. parking and engage reverse gear. • Make sure that the steering wheel is Backing into a parallel parking spot overview. not hindered in any way and can rotate NOTE freely. • The function searches for space for park- To achieve the best results – wait until ing, shows instructions and guides the the steering wheel is finished turning vehicle on its passenger side. But, if so before beginning to drive forward/in desired the vehicle can be parked on the reverse. driver's side of the street: • Activate the turn signals on the driver's side – the system will then search for space to park on that side of the vehicle instead.

Backing into a perpendicular parking spot overview. 1. Make sure the path behind your vehicle is clear and engage reverse gear.

376 DRIVER SUPPORT

Positioning the vehicle in the parking space 1. Move the gear selector to the gear instruc- Leaving a parallel parking space ted by the system. Wait until the steering with Park Assist Pilot* wheel turns and then drive slowly forward. The Park Out function can help the driver to 2. Be prepared to stop the vehicle when pull out of a parking space when the vehicle instructed to do so by a graphic and mes- is parallel-parked. sage in the center display. NOTE 3. Engage reverse gear and back up slowly. Leaving a parking space with the Park Out 4. Be prepared to apply the brakes when function should only be used in connection instructed to do so by a graphic and mes- with parallel parking – it does not work for sage in the center display. perpendicular parking. The function will switch off automatically and a graphic and message will appear to indicate The Park Out function is acti- Parallel parking positioning overview. that parking has been completed. Adjust- vated in the center display's ments can always be made be the driver after- Function view or in Camera ward. Only the driver can determine when the view. vehicle is correctly parked.

CAUTION • GREEN button indicator light – the func- The warning distance is shorter when the tion is activated. sensors are used by Park Assist Pilot • GRAY button indicator light – the function (PAP103) compared to when they are used is deactivated. by the Parking Assist system. 1. Tap Park Out in Function view or in Cam- era view. Related information 2. Move the gear selector to the suitable Perpendicular parking positioning overview. • Park Assist Pilot* (p. 373) position (e.g. D or R) for the direction in • Park Assist Pilot* limitations (p. 378) which you will be pulling out of the parking space.

103 Park Assist Pilot }}

* Option/accessory. 377 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| 3. Be prepared to stop the vehicle when Park Assist Pilot* limitations The parking sequence is cancelled instructed to do so by a graphic and mes- Park Assist Pilot (PAP104) may not be able to A parking sequence will be cancelled if: sage in the center display. Follow the detect all conditions in all situations and func- • the driver moves the steering wheel instructions in the same way as for the tionality may therefore be limited. parking procedure. • the vehicle's speed exceeds 7 km/h WARNING (4 mph) Note that the steering wheel can "spring" • back when the procedure is completed and The parking sensors have dead/blind • the driver taps Cancel in the center dis- the driver may need to turn the steering wheel spots where objects cannot be play back to the maximum position in order to pull detected. • when the anti-lock brakes or the Elec- out of the parking space. • Pay particular attention to people and tronic stability control are engaged - e.g. animals near the vehicle. If the function determines that the driver can when a wheel loses grip on a slippery road pull out of the parking space without any extra • Bear in mind that the front end of the • when speed-dependent power steering maneuvers, the function will be deactivated, vehicle may swing out towards oncom- wheel resistance is working at reduced even if it seems as though the vehicle is not ing traffic during the parking maneuver. power – e.g. during cooling due to over- completely out of the parking space. heating. A message in the center display will explain Related information CAUTION why the parking sequence was cancelled. • Park Assist Pilot* (p. 373) Objects situated higher than the detection • * area of the sensors are not included when Park Assist Pilot limitations (p. 378) CAUTION the parking maneuver is calculated, which could cause the function to swing into the Under certain circumstances, the function parking space too early. Such parking may not be able to find parking spaces – spaces should be avoided for this reason. one reason may be that the sensors are disrupted by external sound sources that The driver should be aware of the following emit the same ultrasonic frequencies that limitations for Park Assist Pilot: the system works with. Examples of such sources include horns, wet tires on asphalt, pneumatic brakes, exhaust noise from motorcycles, etc.

104Park Assist Pilot

378 * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT

• NOTE PAP may not suggest parking spaces on narrow streets if it does not detect suffi- Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors cient space for maneuvering the vehicle. reduce their function and can make meas- 105 urement impossible. • Use approved tires inflated to the correct tire pressure because this affects the function's ability to provide parking assis- Driver responsibility tance. The driver should keep in mind that the func- • The function is based on the way the vehi- tion is a parking aid ‒ not an infallible fully cles are parked behind and in front of your automatic system. The driver must always be parking space. If they are, for example, prepared to take control and cancel a parking parked too close to the curb, there is a risk sequence if necessary. that your vehicle's tires or wheel rims There are a number of things to keep in mind could be damaged by the curb during the when parking, including: parking procedure. • The driver is always responsible for deter- • Perpendicular parking spaces may not be mining if the space suggested by the func- detected or may be suggested unneces- tion is suitable for parking. sarily if a parked vehicle is sticking out more than other parked vehicles. • Do not use the function when using snow chains or a temporary spare tire. • The function is intended to provide parking assistance on straight streets, not sec- • Do not use the function if there are any tions of street with sharp curves or bends. objects protruding from the vehicle. Always make sure that your vehicle is par- • Heavy rain or snowfall may inhibit PAP's allel to relevant parking spaces when the ability to accurately measure a parking function is measuring the parking space. space. • While searching and measuring the park- Related information * ing space, the function may be unable to • Park Assist Pilot (p. 373) detect objects located far into the space. • Speed-dependent steering wheel resistance (p. 270) • Camera/radar sensor limitations (p. 311)

105"Approved tires" refers to tires of the same type and make as the vehicle's original, factory-installed tires.

* Option/accessory. 379 DRIVER SUPPORT

Park Assist Pilot* messages the center display. Several examples are pro- Messages for Park Assist Pilot (PAP106) may vided below. be displayed in the instrument panel and/or Message Meaning Park Assist System One or more of the sensors are blocked. Check and clean/remove the obstacle as soon as possible. Sensors blocked, cleaning needed

Park Assist System The system is not functioning as intended. Contact a workshopA. Unavailable Service required

A An authorized Volvo workshop is recommended.

106Park Assist Pilot

380 * Option/accessory. STARTING AND DRIVING STARTING AND DRIVING

Starting the vehicle To start the vehicle: WARNING The vehicle can be started using the start 1. The remote key must be inside the vehicle. • Never use more than one inlay mat at a knob in the tunnel console when the remote For vehicles with Passive Start, the key time on the driver's floor. If any other key is in the passenger compartment. must be in the front section of the passen- type of floor mat is used, remove the ger compartment. With the optional key- original mat from the driver's seat floor * less locking/unlocking function , the key before driving. All types of mats must can be anywhere in the vehicle. be securely anchored in the attach- 2. Press and hold down the brake pedal1 as ment points in the floor. Make sure the far as possible. floor mat does not impede the movement of the brake pedal or accelerator 3. Turn the start knob clockwise and release. pedal in any way, as this could be a The control will automatically return to the serious safety hazard. original position. • Volvo's floor mats are specially manufactured for your vehicle. They must be properly secured in the attachment Start knob in the tunnel console. points in the floor to help ensure they cannot slide and become trapped under the pedals. WARNING Before starting: The starter motor will crank until the engine • Buckle your seat belt. starts or until overheating protection is trig- • Adjust the seat, steering wheel and gered. mirrors. Error messages • Make sure you can fully depress the If the Vehicle key not found message is brake pedal. shown in the instrument panel at start, place the remote key at the backup reader and then The remote key is not physically used to start make a new start attempt. the ignition because the vehicle is equipped with the keyless Passive Start system.

1 If the vehicle is moving, it is only necessary to turn the start knob clockwise to start the engine.

382 * Option/accessory. STARTING AND DRIVING

WARNING CAUTION Never remove the remote control key from • When starting in cold weather, the the vehicle while driving or the vehicle is automatic transmission may shift up at being towed. slightly higher engine speeds than normal until the automatic transmission WARNING fluid reaches normal operating temperature. • Always remove the remote key from • Do not race a cold engine immediately the passenger compartment when you after starting. This could prevent fluids Location of the backup reader in the tunnel console. leave the vehicle and make sure the from properly lubricating vital compo- ignition is in mode 0. NOTE nents in the engine before it has • Always put the gear selector in P and reached the proper operating tempera- When the remote key is placed in the apply the parking brake before leaving ture. backup reader, make sure that no other the vehicle. Never leave the vehicle • The engine should be idling when the vehicle keys, metal objects or electronic unsupervised while the engine is run- gear selector is moved. Never acceler- devices (e.g. cellular phones, tablets, lap- ning. tops or chargers) are in the backup reader. ate until the gear is fully engaged. • Always open the garage door fully and Accelerating rapidly before a gear is Multiple vehicle keys close to each other in make sure that ventilation is very good the backup reader can disrupt their func- properly engaged could lead to harder before starting the engine in a garage. wear of components. tionality. The exhaust fumes produced by the • To help prevent the transmission oil vehicle contain carbon monoxide, from overheating, select P or N when which is invisible and odorless but very CAUTION idling at a standstill for prolonged peri- toxic. If the engine has not responded after 3 ods of time. attempts – wait for 3 minutes before starting a new attempt. Starting capability increases if the starter battery is given time to recover.

}}

383 STARTING AND DRIVING

• || NOTE Switching off the vehicle Jump starting using another battery The vehicle can be switched off using the (p. 428) With a cold start, idling speed may be con- start knob in the tunnel console. • Selecting ignition mode (p. 386) siderably higher than normal for certain engine types. This is done to get the emissions system up to normal operating temperature as quickly as possible, which minimizes exhaust emissions and protects the environment.

Related information • Switching off the vehicle (p. 384) • Ignition modes (p. 385) • Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 198) • Jump starting using another battery Start knob in the tunnel console. (p. 428) To switch off the vehicle: • Selecting ignition mode (p. 386) – Turn the start knob clockwise and release to switch off the vehicle. The control will automatically return to the original position. If the vehicle rolls: – Turn clockwise and hold the knob until the vehicle switches off. Related information • Starting the vehicle (p. 382) • Ignition modes (p. 385) • Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 198)

384 STARTING AND DRIVING

Ignition modes Mode Functions Mode Functions The vehicle's ignition can be put in various modes (levels) to make different functions 0 • The odometer, clock and tem- I • The panoramic roof, power available. perature gauge are illumi- windows, 12-volt electrical To enable the use of a limited number of func- natedA. socket in the passenger com- tions when the engine is not running, the igni- • The power* seats can be partment, Bluetooth, navigation can be put in one of three different levels: adjusted. tion, phone, blower and wind- 0, I and II. These levels are referred to as "igni- shield wipers can be used. • The power windows can be tion modes" in the Owner's Manual. • used. The power seats can be adjusted. The following table shows which functions are • The center display is activated • The 12-volt electrical socket* in available in each ignition mode: and can be usedA. the cargo compartment can be • The infotainment system can used. be usedA. Electrical current will be taken In this mode, the functions are from the battery in this ignition available for a limited time and mode. then switch off automatically. II • The headlights illuminate. • Warning/indicator lights illuminate for 5 seconds. • A number of other systems are activated. However, seat and rear window heating can only be activated when the engine is running. This ignition mode uses a lot of current from the battery and should be avoided whenever possible!

A Also activated when the door is opened.

}}

* Option/accessory. 385 STARTING AND DRIVING

|| Related information Selecting ignition mode automatically return to the original posi- • Starting the vehicle (p. 382) The vehicle's ignition can be put in various tion. • Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 198) modes (levels) to make different functions • Ignition mode II – Turn the start knob available. • Jump starting using another battery clockwise and hold it there for (p. 428) approx. 5 seconds. Release the knob, Selecting an ignition mode which will automatically return to its origi- • Selecting ignition mode (p. 386) nal position. • Back to ignition mode 0 – To return to ignition mode 0 from modes I and II, turn the start knob clockwise and release it. The control will automatically return to the original position. Related information • Starting the vehicle (p. 382) • Switching off the vehicle (p. 384) • Ignition modes (p. 385) Start knob in the tunnel console. • Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 198) • Ignition mode 0 – Unlock the vehicle and • Jump starting using another battery keep the remote key in the passenger (p. 428) compartment.

NOTE To set level I or II without engine start – do not depress the brake pedal (or clutch pedal for vehicles with manual transmission) when selecting this ignition mode.

• Ignition mode I – Turn the start knob clockwise and release it. The control will

386 STARTING AND DRIVING

Brake functions Brakes Anti-lock brakes The vehicle's brakes are used to reduce The brake pedal is used to apply the vehicle's The vehicle is equipped with an Anti-lock speed or prevent the vehicle from rolling. regular brakes, which are part of the brake Braking System (ABS2), which helps prevent In addition to the wheel brakes and parking system. the wheels from locking and helps maintain brakes, the vehicle is also equipped with a The vehicle is equipped with two brake cir- steering control when braking. Vibrations may number of automatic brake assist functions. cuits. If one brake circuit is damaged, the be felt from the brake pedal when ABS is These systems provide assistance by e.g. the brake pedal will go down further when operating, which is normal. driver not needing to depress the brake pedal depressed. More pressure will then be After the vehicle is started, a brief test of the at a traffic light, when starting up a hill or required from the driver for normal braking ABS system is automatically performed when when driving down a hill. effect. the driver releases the brake pedal. An addi- Depending on how the vehicle is equipped, The driver's pressure on the brake pedal is tional automatic test of the system may be the following brake assist functions may be enhanced by a power braking function. performed when the vehicle is traveling at a included: low speed. During the test, the brake pedal may feel as though it is pulsating. • Auto-hold brake function at a standstill WARNING (Auto Hold) Power braking only functions if the engine • Hill Start Assist (Hill Start Assist) is running. • Braking assist after a collision • City Safety If the brake pedal is used when the engine is turned off, the pedal will feel stiffer than usual • Hill Descent Control (Hill Descent and greater pressure must be applied to brake * Control) the vehicle.

Related information In very hilly areas or when driving with a heavy • Brakes (p. 387) load, engine braking in manual gear should be • Parking brake (p. 390) used to augment the brakes. Engine braking is • Auto-hold brakes (p. 393) most effective if the same gear is used both uphill and downhill. Use the Off Road* drive • Braking assist after a collision (p. 395) mode to increase the engine braking effect • Hill Start Assist (p. 395) when driving on steep downgrades at low • City Safety™ (p. 316) speeds. • Hill Descent Control* (p. 418) }}

* Option/accessory. 387 STARTING AND DRIVING

|| Symbols in the instrument panel WARNING Brake Assist System 3 Symbol Meaning If the warning symbols for both brake fault The brake enhancing system, (BAS ), helps and ABS fault are lit simultaneously, there increase braking force and can thereby Check the brake fluid level. If the may be a fault in the brake system. reduce braking distance. level is low, fill brake fluid and The system monitors the driver's braking hab- • If the brake fluid reservoir level is nor- check to determine the reason its and increases braking force when neces- mal when this occurs, drive carefully to for the loss of brake fluid. sary. Braking force can be increased up to the A the nearest workshop to have the point at which the ABS intervenes. The func- brake system checked - an authorized tion is deactivated when pressure on the brake Volvo workshop is recommended. pedal is decreased. • If the brake fluid has fallen below the MIN level in the brake fluid reservoir, NOTE B the vehicle should not be driven until the brake fluid has been filled. The rea- When BAS is activated, the brake pedal Steady glow for 2 seconds after son for the brake fluid loss must be will go down slightly more than usual. the engine is started: Automatic checked. Press (hold) down the brake pedal as long function check. as necessary.

A Steady glow for more than 2 Related information When the brake pedal is released, all brak- seconds: Fault in the ABS sys- • Brake Assist System (p. 388) ing ceases. tem. The vehicle's regular brake • Auto-hold brakes (p. 393) system is still working, but with- Related information out the ABS function. • Hill Start Assist (p. 395) • Brakes (p. 387) • Braking on wet roads (p. 389) B • Braking on salted roads (p. 389) A In Canada. • Maintenance of the brake system B In the US. (p. 389) • Brake lights (p. 161)

2 Anti-lock Braking System 3 Brake Assist System

388 STARTING AND DRIVING

Braking on wet roads Braking on salted roads Maintenance of the brake system Prolonged driving in heavy rain without brak- When driving on salted roads, a layer of salt Regularly check the brake system compo- ing may cause braking effect to be slightly may form on the brake discs and brake pads. nents for wear. delayed the first time the brakes are applied. This could increase stopping distance. Main- To keep the vehicle as safe and reliable as This may also occur after washing the vehicle. tain an extra large safety distance to the vehi- possible, follow the Volvo service schedule It will then be necessary to apply greater pres- cle ahead. Make sure to also: specified in the Warranty and Maintenance sure to the brake pedal. You should therefore Records Information booklet. After replacing • Apply the brakes from time to time to help maintain a greater distance to the vehicle brake pads and brake discs, braking effect is remove salt. Make sure braking does not ahead. not adapted until they are "broken in" by driv- pose a risk to any other road users. ing a few hundred kilometers (miles). Com- Firmly apply the brakes after washing the • Gently apply the brakes when you have pensate for the reduced braking effect by vehicle or driving on wet roads. This helps finished driving and before driving again. applying greater pressure to the brake pedal. warm up the brake discs, enabling them to dry Volvo recommends only using brake pads more quickly and protecting them against cor- Related information approved for your Volvo. rosion. Consider the current traffic situation • Brakes (p. 387) when braking. • Braking on wet roads (p. 389) CAUTION Related information The brake system's components should be • Brakes (p. 387) regularly checked for wear. • Braking on salted roads (p. 389) Contact a workshop for advice on how to do this or let a workshop perform the inspection - an authorized Volvo workshop is recommended.

Related information • Brakes (p. 387)

389 STARTING AND DRIVING

Parking brake Related information Activating and deactivating the The parking brake helps keep the vehicle sta- • Activating and deactivating the parking parking brake tionary by mechanically locking two wheels. brake (p. 390) Use the parking brake to help keep the vehi- • Parking on a hill (p. 392) cle stationary when it is parked. • Parking brake malfunction (p. 392) Activating the parking brake • Auto-hold brakes (p. 393)

The parking brake controls are located in the tunnel console between the seats. When the electric parking brake is being applied, a faint sound can be heard from the 1. Pull up the control. brake's electric motor. This sound can also be > The symbol in the instrument panel will heard during the automatic function check of illuminate when the parking brake is the parking brake. activated. If the vehicle is stationary when the parking 2. Make sure the vehicle is stationary. brake is activated, it will only be applied to the rear wheels. If it is activated while the vehicle is moving, the normal brakes will be used on all four wheels. Braking will be transferred to only the rear wheels when the vehicle is almost stopped.

390 STARTING AND DRIVING

Symbol in the instrument panel Emergency braking 2. Press the control. Symbol Meaning In an emergency, the parking brake can be > The parking brake will release and the activated when the vehicle is moving by pull- symbol in the instrument panel will go The symbol will be illuminated ing and holding up the control. The braking out. when the parking brake is acti- process is canceled when the control is Deactivating automatically vated. released or if the accelerator pedal is 1. Start the vehicle. A flashing symbol indicates that depressed. A 2. Depress the brake pedal firmly. Move the a fault has been detected. Read gear selector to D or R and press the the message in the instrument NOTE accelerator pedal. panel. In case of emergency braking at high > The parking brake will release and the speeds, a signal sounds during the brake symbol in the instrument panel will go procedure. B out.

A Canadian models. Deactivating the parking brake B US models. NOTE Automatic activation For automatic deactivation to be possible, The parking brake is applied automatically the driver's seat belt must be buckled or the driver's door closed. • when the ignition is switched off and the setting for automatically activating the parking brake is activated in the center Related information display. • • Settings for automatically activating the when the gear selector is moved to P on a parking brake (p. 392) steep hill. • • Parking brake malfunction (p. 392) if the auto-hold brake (automatic brake at • standstill) function is activated and Parking brake (p. 390) • the vehicle has been stationary for a • Parking on a hill (p. 392) prolonged period of time (5-10 Deactivating manually minutes). 1. Depress the brake pedal firmly. • the vehicle is switched off. • the driver has left the vehicle.

391 STARTING AND DRIVING

Settings for automatically Parking on a hill Parking brake malfunction activating the parking brake Always use the parking brake when parking If you are unable to deactivate or activate the Choose whether the parking brake should be on a hill. parking brake after several attempts, contact activated automatically when the vehicle is WARNING an authorized Volvo workshop. switched off. A audible warning signal will sound if the park- To change this setting: Always apply the parking brake when parking brake is activated while the vehicle is ing on an incline. Selecting a gear or put- being driven. 1. Tap Settings in the center display's Top ting the automatic transmission in P may view. not be sufficient to keep the vehicle sta- If the vehicle must be parked before the prob- tionary in all situations. lem is rectified, turn the wheels as when park- 2. Tap My Car Parking Brake and ing on an incline and put the gear selector in Suspension and select or deselect the If the vehicle is pointing uphill: P. Auto Activate Parking Brake function. • Turn the front wheels so they are pointing Low battery charge level Related information away from the curb. If the battery charge level is too low, it will not • Activating and deactivating the parking If the vehicle is pointing downhill: be possible to activate or deactivate the park- brake (p. 390) ing brake. Connect an auxiliary battery to the • Turn the front wheels so they are pointing • Parking brake (p. 390) vehicle if the battery is discharged. toward the curb. Heavy load uphill Replacing brake pads Heavy loads, such as a trailer, could cause the Due to the design of the electric parking vehicle to roll backward when the parking brake, the rear brake pads must be replaced brake is released automatically on steep uphill by a workshop. An authorized Volvo workshop gradients. To help avoid this, pull the control is recommended. upward while you are driving away. Release the control when the vehicle gains traction. Related information • Activating and deactivating the parking brake (p. 390)

392 STARTING AND DRIVING

Symbols in the instrument panel Related information Auto-hold brakes Symbol Meaning • Activating and deactivating the parking With the Auto-hold brake function, the driver brake (p. 390) can release the brake pedal and the brakes A flashing symbol indicates that • Parking on a hill (p. 392) will remain applied, for example, when the a fault has been detected. See vehicle has stopped at a traffic light or inter- • Start battery (p. 585) the message in the instrument section. panel. • Volvo's service program (p. 568) When the vehicle stops, the brakes are acti- A vated automatically. The function can use either the normal brakes or the parking brakes to keep the vehicle stationary and works on flat surfaces or hills. If the driver has their seat belt fastened or if the driver's door is closed, B the brakes will disengage automatically when the vehicle starts driving. Fault in the brake system. See the message in the instrument panel. NOTE

A When braking to a stop on an uphill or downhill gradient, depress the brake pedal with slightly more force than usual before releasing to ensure that the vehicle cannot move at all.

B The parking brake is activated if Information message in the • the vehicle is switched off instrument panel. • the driver's door is opened • the driver's seat belt is removed A Canadian models. • the vehicle has been stationary for a pro- B US models. longed period of time (5-10 minutes)

}}

393 STARTING AND DRIVING

|| Symbols in the instrument panel Activating and deactivating Auto- • The function will remain off until it is reac- Symbol Meaning hold at a standstill tivated. The Auto-hold brake function at a standstill is • When Auto-hold is switched off, Hill Start This symbol illuminates when the activated with the button in the tunnel con- Assist (HSA) will remain active to help function is using the normal sole. prevent the vehicle from rolling backward brakes to keep the vehicle sta- when starting up a hill. tionary. Related information This symbol illuminates when the • Auto-hold brakes (p. 393) function is using the parking brake to keep the vehicle stationary. A

B – Press the button in the tunnel console to A Canadian models. B US models. activate or deactivate the function. > The indicator light in the button will illu- Related information minate when the function is activated. • Activating and deactivating Auto-hold at a The function will remain active the next standstill (p. 394) time the vehicle is started. • Brakes (p. 387) • When shutting off Parking brake (p. 390) If the function is active and holding • Hill Start Assist (p. 395) the vehicle stationary using the normal brakes (A symbol lit in the instrument panel), the brake pedal must be depressed while pressing the button in order to deactivate Auto-hold.

394 STARTING AND DRIVING

Hill Start Assist Braking assist after a collision Transmission The function for assisting when starting the In a collision in which the activation level is The transmission is part of the vehicle's drive- vehicle on inclines (HSA4) helps prevent the reached for the pyrotechnic seat belt tension- line (power transmission) between the engine vehicle from rolling backward when starting ers or airbags, or if a collision with a large ani- and the drive wheels. The function of the on an uphill gradient. When backing up a hill, mal is detected, the vehicle's brakes will be transmission is to change gears depending HSA helps prevent the vehicle from rolling automatically activated. This function is on speed and power needs. forward. intended to help prevent or reduce the effects The vehicle has an 8-speed automatic trans- The function retains pressure from the brake of any subsequent collision. mission. The number of gears allows the pedal in the brake system for several seconds After a serious collision, it may no longer be engine's torque and power band to be effec- after the brake pedal has been released. possible to control and steer the vehicle. In tively utilized. Two of the gears are overdrive order to avoid or mitigate a possible further gears that save fuel when driving at a constant This temporary braking effect is released after collision with a vehicle or an object in the vehi- engine speed. Manual shifting is also possible. a few seconds or when the driver begins driv- cle's path, the brake assist system is activated The instrument panel shows the gear currently ing. automatically to help stop the vehicle safely. in use. Hill Start Assist is available even when the If braking is not appropriate, e.g. if there is a Auto-hold brake function is switched off. Related information risk of being hit by passing traffic, the driver • Automatic transmission (p. 396) Related information can override the system by depressing the • Auto-hold brakes (p. 393) accelerator pedal. • Brakes (p. 387) This function assumes that the brake system is intact after a collision. Related information • Rear Collision Warning* (p. 330) • BLIS* (p. 331) • Brake functions (p. 387)

4 Hill Start Assist

* Option/accessory. 395 STARTING AND DRIVING

Automatic transmission Symbols in the instrument panel In vehicles with an automatic transmission, If a problem should occur with the transmis- the system selects the gear so that driving sion, a symbol and a message will appear in will be as energy-efficient as possible. The the instrument panel. transmission also has a manual mode. The transmission is available in different ver- Symbol Meaning sions. The gear selector indicates which transmission the vehicle has. The various gear Information and messages rela- selectors have different functions. ted to the transmission. Follow the recommendations provided.

Hot or overheated transmission. Overview of small gear selector and gear shift pat- Follow the recommendations tern in the instrument panel provided.

The instrument panel shows which gear is cur- Reduced performance/Accel- rently in use: eration performance reduced P, R, N, D or M. For vehicles with the small In the event of a temporary fault gear selector, P position is electric and the in the driveline, the vehicle may gear shift pattern is instead R, N, D or M. go into a "limp home" mode with For manual shifting, the gear indicator in the reduced power output to help Overview of large gear selector and gear shift pattern instrument panel displays the gear currently avoid damage to the driveline. in the instrument panel being used. Related information CAUTION • Gear selector positions for automatic Check the operating temperature of the transmissions (p. 397) transmission to help avoid damage to any • Using the steering wheel paddles* to shift of the drive system components. If there is (p. 399) a risk of overheating, a warning symbol will • Shiftlock (p. 401) appear in the instrument panel and a text • The kickdown function (p. 402) message will be displayed. Follow the recommendations given.

396 * Option/accessory. STARTING AND DRIVING

Gear selector positions for To move to another gear from Park, the brake automatic transmissions pedal must be depressed and the ignition in With an automatic transmission, a suitable mode II. For vehicles with the small gear gear is selected automatically according to selector, the engine must be running. current speed and power requirements. When parking – apply the parking brake before shifting to Park. Selecting gears The gear selector is a shift-by-wire selector, where shifting is done electronically instead of WARNING mechanically. This makes shifting easier and Always apply the parking brake when park- the gear positions more distinct. ing on an incline. Selecting a gear or putting the automatic transmission in P may not be sufficient to keep the vehicle sta- Small gear selector and gear selector positions over- tionary in all situations. view. For the small gear selector, change gear position by pushing the spring-loaded gear selec- NOTE tor forward or rearward, or to the side for The gear selector must be in position P in manual shifting. order to lock the vehicle and set the alarm. Gear selector positions Park - P For the small gear selector, Park is activated using the P button next to the gear selector. Large gear selector and gear selector positions over- For the large gear selector, Park is activated view. by moving the gear selector to position P. For the large gear selector, change gear selec- In P mode, the transmission is mechanically tor position by pressing the gear selector for- locked. ward or rearward, or to the left for manual Select P when the vehicle is parked or when shifting. starting the engine. The vehicle must be stationary when Park is selected.

}}

397 STARTING AND DRIVING

|| Help functions5 small gear selector, the engine must be run- rent gear will be displayed in the instrument ning. panel. For vehicles with the small gear selector, the system will shift to P automatically D drive mode • Push the gear selector forward toward + D is the normal driving gear position. The (plus) and release to shift up one gear. • if the ignition is switched off while D or R transmission shifts up or down automatically is selected. • Pull the gear selector backward toward – depending on acceleration and speed. (minus) and release to shift down one • if the driver unbuckles the seat belt and The vehicle must be stationary when the gear gear. opens the driver's door while the vehicle is selector is moved from R to D. running with the gear selector in a gear • Push the gear selector to the side to the other than P. Manual shifting mode - M end position at D to return to D mode. To park a vehicle with an unbuckled seat belt and open door – end P mode by shifting to R or D again. The system will not automatically shift to P if the ignition is switched off while the gear selector is in the neutral position (N). This is to make it possible to wash the vehicle in an automatic car wash in which the vehicle is pulled forward on rolling wheels. Reverse - R Select R when backing up. The vehicle must be stationary when Reverse is selected. Overview of gear shift pattern in the instrument Overview of gear shift pattern in the instrument panel for large gear selector. Neutral - N panel for small gear selector. No gear is selected and the engine can be Manual shifting mode can be selected at any Manual shifting mode can be selected at any started. Apply the parking brake if the vehicle time during a drive. Engine braking will occur time during a drive. Engine braking will occur is stationary with the gear selector in N. when the accelerator pedal is released. when the accelerator pedal is released. To move the gear selector from N to another Select manual shifting mode by moving the Select manual shifting mode by moving the gear, the brake pedal must be depressed and gear selector sideways from D to ±. The cur- gear selector rearward from the D position. the ignition in mode II. For vehicles with the

5 Does not apply to vehicles with the large gear selector.

398 STARTING AND DRIVING

The currently selected gear will be displayed in Using the steering wheel paddles* the instrument panel. to shift • Push the gear selector to the right toward The steering wheel paddles are a supplement "+" (plus) and release to shift up one gear. to the gear selector and make it possible to shift manually without removing your hands • Push the gear selector to the left toward from the steering wheel. "–" (minus) and release to shift down one gear. • Push the gear selector rearward to return to D mode. For smooth shifting and engine performance, the transmission will shift down automatically if the vehicle's speed becomes too low for the Instrument panel when shifting gears using steering selected gear. wheel paddles, large gear selector. Related information • Automatic transmission (p. 396) • Shiftlock (p. 401) • Using the steering wheel paddles* to shift "-": Shift down one gear. (p. 399) "+": Shift up one gear. • The kickdown function (p. 402) Activating the steering wheel paddles In order to shift gears using the paddles, they must first be activated: – Pull one of the paddles toward the steer- Instrument panel when shifting gears using steering ing wheel. wheel paddles, small gear selector. > A number in the instrument panel indicates the current gear being used.

}}

* Option/accessory. 399 STARTING AND DRIVING

|| In shift mode M, the paddles are automatically Change In gear position M, the paddles will not acti- activated. To shift one gear: vate automatically. – Pull one of the paddles toward the steer- Related information ing wheel and then release. • Automatic transmission (p. 396) As long as the engine speed (rpm) is within • Gear selector positions for automatic the permissible range for the selected gear, a transmissions (p. 397) gear shift will take place each time a paddle is pulled. After each gear shift, a number indicating the current gear will be displayed in the instrument panel. Turning off Start/Stop Manual deactivation in gear D and M – Deactivate the paddles by pulling the right Instrument panel when the paddles are activated for shifting in manual mode, large gear selector. paddle (+) toward the steering wheel and holding it until the number of the current gear is no longer displayed in the instrument panel. > The transmission will return to gear selector position D. On vehicles with the large gear selector, the function can only be switched off in gear selector position D. Automatic deactivation In gear position D, the steering wheel paddles are deactivated after a short period of time if they are not used. The number of the current Instrument panel when the paddles are activated for gear will no longer be displayed in the instru- shifting in manual mode, small gear selector. ment panel. If engine braking is currently being used, the paddles will remain active until engine braking stops.

400 STARTING AND DRIVING

Shiftlock Automatic shiftlock Related information The automatic transmission's shiftlock func- The automatic shiftlock has a separate safety • Automatic transmission (p. 396) tion helps prevent inadvertently moving the system. • Gear selector positions for automatic gear selector between different positions. From Park - P transmissions (p. 397) There are two types of shiftlocks: mechanical To move the gear selector from P to another • Deactivating the automatic shiftlock and automatic. gear, the brake pedal must be depressed and (p. 402) Mechanical shiftlock the ignition in mode II. For vehicles with the small gear selector, the engine must be running. From Neutral - N If the gear selector is in N and the vehicle has been stationary for at least 3 seconds (with or without the engine running), the gear selector will be locked in that position. To move the gear selector from N to another gear, the brake pedal must be depressed and the ignition in mode II. For vehicles with the small gear selector, the engine must be running. Shiftlock for vehicles with large gear selectors. The gear selector can be moved back and Messages in the instrument panel forth between N and D. The other positions If the gear selector is locked in position, a have a shiftlock that is operated using the lock message will appear in the instrument panel, button on the gear selector. e.g. Gear lever Press brake pedal to activate gear lever. Press and hold the shiftlock button and move the gear selector forward or backward There is no mechanical shiftlock function.6 between P, R, N and D.

6 Applies for vehicles with the small gear selector

401 STARTING AND DRIVING

Deactivating the automatic Press a small screwdriver or similar object The kickdown function shiftlock7 into the hole and hold it down. Kickdown can be used when maximum If the vehicle does not have electrical current, Move the gear selector to N and release acceleration is needed, e.g. when passing. the automatic shiftlock may be disengaged the button. When the accelerator pedal is depressed all on vehicles equipped with the large gear the way to the floor (past the normal full accel- 4. Replace the rubber mat. selector. The shiftlock cannot be disengaged erator position), the transmission will auto- on vehicles equipped with the small gear matically engage kickdown, i.e. immediately selector. shift down to a lower gear. If the accelerator pedal is released from the kickdown position, the transmission will automatically shift up again. Safety function The transmission control module is equipped with a downshift protection feature to help prevent the engine from overheating. In some conditions, the transmission will prevent downshifting/kickdown if this would lead Overview of small gear selector, where it is not pos- to such high engine speed (rpm) that the sible to deactivate the shiftlock. engine could be damaged. If the driver still Large gear selector overview. Related information attempts downshifting or kickdown at a high If the vehicle cannot be driven (e.g. due to a • Shiftlock (p. 401) rpm, nothing will happen and the original gear will remain selected. discharged battery), the gear selector must be • Automatic transmission (p. 396) moved to the N position so that the vehicle With kickdown, the vehicle can downshift one can be moved. or more steps at a time depending on the Lift the rubber mat in the storage com- engine speed. The vehicle upshifts when the partment in front of the gear selector. engine reaches its maximum rpm to prevent Locate the hole with a spring-loaded but- engine damage. ton in the bottom of the compartment. Related information • Automatic transmission (p. 396)

7 The function is not available for vehicles with the small gear selector.

402 STARTING AND DRIVING

All Wheel Drive (AWD)* Drive modes* once the vehicle is started, e.g. to Individual All-wheel drive (AWD8), also called four- Drive modes affect the vehicle's driving cha- mode. Once Individual mode is selected, you wheel drive, means that power is distributed racteristics in different ways to enhance and can adjust settings to personal preferences, to all four wheels, which improves traction. simplify the driving experience in certain e.g. to show the tachometer. To achieve the best traction, power is auto- types of situations. Comfort matically directed to the wheels that have the Drive modes enable easy access to the vehi- Comfort is the vehicle's default mode. This best grip. The system continuously calculates cle's many functions and settings in different setting offers driving comfort, light steering the need for torque to the rear wheels, and driving situations. The following systems are and soft suspension. can immediately redistribute up to half of the adapted to help optimize driving characteris- engine's torque to the rear wheels. tics in each drive mode: In Comfort mode, no tachometer will be displayed in the instrument panel9. All-wheel drive also has a stabilizing effect at • Steering Eco higher speeds. In normal driving conditions, • Engine/transmission/all-wheel drive* most of the engine's power is directed to the • Adapt the vehicle for more fuel-efficient • Brakes front wheels. When the vehicle is stationary, and eco-friendly driving with Eco mode. all-wheel drive is always activated in prepara- • Pneumatic suspension* and shock absorb- In this mode, the Start/Stop function is acti- tion for maximum traction during acceleration. ers vated, the ground clearance is lower to reduce All-wheel drive reacts differently depending on • Instrument panel air resistance and certain climate settings are which drive mode is selected. • Start/Stop function reduced. • Climate control settings When driving in Eco mode, an ECO gauge Related information indicating how economical the driving is will • * Drive modes (p. 403) Select the drive mode that is adapted to the be displayed in the instrument panel. • Low Speed Control* (p. 416) current driving conditions. Keep in mind that • Transmission (p. 395) not all drive modes are available in all situations. Available drive modes When the engine is started, the vehicle will be in Comfort mode and the start/stop function will be activated. Drive mode can be changed

8 All Wheel Drive 9 Only applies to vehicles with 8-inch instrument panels. }}

* Option/accessory. 403 STARTING AND DRIVING

|| Off Road NOTE Individual • Helps maximize the vehicle's ability to tra- • Customizes drive mode to personal prefer- verse difficult terrain or poor roads. Due to the increased ground clearance, if ences. the Off Road mode was selected when In this mode, ground clearance is high, steer- the engine was switched off, the suspen- Select one of the drive modes as a basis and * ing is light, and all-wheel drive and the low- sion will lower when the engine is restar- adjust the settings to achieve your preferred speed function with assistance for driving ted. driving characteristics. These settings will be downhill (HDC10) are activated. The Start/Stop stored in the active driver profile and will be function is deactivated. available every time the vehicle is unlocked with that remote key. This mode can only be activated at low CAUTION speeds. The permitted speed range will be Do not use the Off Road drive mode when Individual drive mode is only available if it has shown in the speedometer. If this speed is towing a trailer without an electrical con- been activated in the center display. exceeded, Off Road mode will be deactivated nection. This could result in damage to the and another drive mode activated. pneumatic suspension system's bellows. In Off Road mode, a compass will be displayed between the speedometer and the Dynamic tachometer in the instrument panel. • Dynamic mode is designed to help provide sportier driving characteristics and a NOTE faster acceleration response. This drive mode is not designed to be used Gear shifting will be faster and more distinct for normal street driving. and the transmission will prioritize gears with a higher traction force. Steering response is faster, suspension is stiffer and ground clearance is lower to help reduce body roll when cornering. The Start/Stop function is deactivated. Dynamic mode is also available in a Polestar Engineered* version.

10 Hill Descent Control

404 * Option/accessory. STARTING AND DRIVING

3. Under Presets, select one of the following Changing drive mode* drive modes as a basis: Eco, Comfort, Select the drive mode that is adapted to the Dynamic or Polestar Engineered*. current driving conditions. The following settings can be modified: The drive mode is changed using the control • Driver Display in the tunnel console. • Keep in mind that not all drive modes are Steering Force available in all situations. • Powertrain Characteristics To change drive mode: • Brake Characteristics • Suspension Control • ECO Climate • Start/Stop. Related information • Changing drive mode* (p. 405) • Eco drive mode (p. 406) • Economical driving (p. 419) • Start/Stop function (p. 409) Settings view11 for Individual drive mode. • Low Speed Control* (p. 416) 1. Tap Settings in the Top view. • Hill Descent Control* (p. 418) 1. Press the DRIVE MODE control. • All Wheel Drive (AWD)* (p. 403) 2. Tap My Car Individual Drive Mode > A pop-up menu will appear in the cen- and select Individual Drive Mode. • Driver profiles (p. 137) ter display. 2. Roll the wheel upward or downward to the desired drive mode.

11 The illustration is generic - details may vary according to vehicle model. }}

* Option/accessory. 405 STARTING AND DRIVING

|| 3. Press the drive mode control or tap its Eco drive mode releases the accelerator pedal, the transmis- button in the center display to confirm the Eco drive mode can help make driving more sion is automatically disengaged from the selection. fuel-efficient and eco-friendly. engine. Engine speed is reduced to idling > The selected drive mode is shown in Use this mode to save fuel and promote eco- speed to reduce fuel consumption. the instrument panel. friendly driving. This function is most effective in driving situations where the vehicle can roll freely for a Related information When Eco mode is activated, the following long distance, e.g. on roads with slight down- • Drive modes* (p. 403) characteristics are modified: grades or when a decrease in speed is antici- • Activating and deactivating Eco drive • The automatic transmission's shifting pated, such as when approaching an area with mode using the function button (p. 408) points. a lower speed limit. • Engine control and accelerator pedal • Activating and deactivating Low Speed Activating Eco Coast * response. Control using the function button The function is activated when the accelerator (p. 417) • Eco Coast functionality is activated and pedal is fully released and the following condi- • Activating and deactivating Hill Descent engine braking is disabled when the accel- tions are met: Control* using the function button erator pedal is released at speeds • Eco drive mode is activated. (p. 419) between 65 and 140 km/h (40 and 87 mph). • The gear selector is in D. • Some of the climate system settings will • The vehicle's speed is approximately be reduced or switched off. 65-140 km/h (40-87 mph). • The suspension's self-leveling function* • The gradient of the downgrade is less than will lower ground clearance to help reduce approximately 6%. wind resistance. COASTING will be displayed in the instrument • Information will be shown in the ECO panel when Eco Coast is being used. gauge in the instrument panel to help promote more eco-friendly and economical driving. Coast function Eco Coast Eco Coast essentially deactivates engine braking, allowing the vehicle's kinetic energy to be used to roll greater distances. When the driver

406 * Option/accessory. STARTING AND DRIVING

Limitations It is possible to roll short distances even with- ECO gauge in the instrument panel Eco Coast is not available if out Eco Coast in order to help conserve fuel. However, for the best fuel economy, Eco • the engine and/or transmission are not at Coast should be activated and used to roll normal working temperatures longer distances. • the gear selector is moved from D to manual shifting mode Cruise control Eco Cruise • the vehicle's speed is not within the When cruise control is activated in the Eco 65-140 km/h (40-87 mph) range drive mode, the vehicle's acceleration and • deceleration will be slower than in other drive the gradient of the downgrade is more modes to help further conserve fuel. Because than approximately 6% of this, the vehicle's actual speed may be • The steering wheel paddles* are being slightly above or below the set speed. used for manual shifting. • On a level road, the vehicle's actual speed Eco gauge in 12" instrument panel*. Deactivating and turning off Eco Coast may differ from the set speed when cruise In certain situations, it may be advisable to control is active and the vehicle is coast- deactivate or turn off Eco Coast so that engine ing. braking can be used. These situations might • On a steep uphill gradient, the vehicle's include driving down steep hills or before speed is reduced until the transmission passing another vehicle to help ensure this downshifts. Reduced acceleration is then can be done as safely as possible. initiated in order to reach the set speed. Deactivate Eco Coast by • On a downhill gradient in which the vehi- • pressing the accelerator or brake pedal cle is coasting, the vehicle's actual speed may be slightly above or below the set • moving the gear selector to manual mode speed. The function uses engine braking • Using the steering wheel paddles* to shift. to keep the set speed. If necessary, the Turn off Eco Coast by normal brakes are also applied. Eco gauge in 8" instrument panel. • switching to another drive mode* • deactivating Eco drive mode in Function view.

}}

* Option/accessory. 407 STARTING AND DRIVING

|| The ECO gauge indicates how economical Related information Activating and deactivating Eco current driving is: • Changing drive mode* (p. 405) drive mode using the function • A low reading in the green area of the • Activating and deactivating Eco drive button gauge indicates economical driving. mode using the function button (p. 408) There is a function button for Eco drive mode • A high reading is shown when driving is • Drive modes* (p. 403) in the center display's Function view if the vehicle is not equipped with a drive mode not economical, e.g. heavy braking or • Economical driving (p. 419) rapid acceleration. control in the tunnel console. • Start/Stop function (p. 409) When the engine is switched off, Eco mode is The ECO gauge also has an indicator showing deactivated and must therefore be reactivated how a reference driver would drive in the same each time the engine is started. ECO will be driving situation. This is shown by the short displayed in the instrument panel when the pointer in the gauge. function is activated. ECO Climate Selecting Eco drive mode in the center In Eco mode, ECO climate is automatically display's Function view activated in the passenger compartment to – Tap the Driving Mode ECO button to help reduce energy consumption. activate or deactivate the function. NOTE When the Eco drive mode is activated, settings for certain climate system and elec- tricity consuming functions are reduced. Some of these settings can be reset manually, but full functionality will only be > An indicator light in the button will illu- restored by switching off Eco mode or minate when the function is activated. adapting the Individual* drive mode to full climate system functionality. Related information • Eco drive mode (p. 406) If condensation forms on the windows, tap the • Changing drive mode* (p. 405) max defroster button, which will function nor- • Drive modes* (p. 403) mally.

408 * Option/accessory. STARTING AND DRIVING

Start/Stop function Driving with the Start/Stop With Adaptive Cruise Control or Pilot Assist Start/Stop is a function that temporarily function activated, the engine will auto-stop about switches off the engine when the vehicle has Start/stop is a function that temporarily turns three seconds after the vehicle has stopped. stopped, e.g. at a traffic light or in heavy traf- off the engine when the vehicle is stationary Auto-start fic, and then starts it again automatically and then automatically starts it when needed. The following conditions must be met for the when needed. The Start/Stop function is available when the engine to auto-start. The Start/Stop function reduces fuel con- ignition is started and can be activated if cer- sumption, which helps to reduce exhaust tain conditions are met. • Release the brake pedal. The engine will emissions. auto-start and the vehicle can be driven. The instrument panel indicates when the func- On an uphill gradient, Hill Start Assist The system makes it possible to drive more tion is 12 economically and climate-smart by letting the (HSA ) will activate to help prevent the • Available engine auto-stop when appropriate. vehicle from rolling backward. • active • When the Auto-hold function is activated, Related information • not available. auto-start will be delayed until the acceler- • Driving with the Start/Stop function ator is pressed. (p. 409) All of the vehicle's ordinary systems, such as • When Adaptive Cruise Control or Pilot • lighting, radio, etc. function normally when the Conditions for the Start/Stop function engine has been auto-stopped. Certain func- Assist are activated, the engine will auto- (p. 411) tions may be temporarily reduced, however, start when the accelerator pedal is • Drive modes* (p. 403) such as the climate system's blower speed or depressed or the button on the left- extremely high audio system volume. side steering wheel keypad is pressed. • Auto-stop Maintain pressure on the brake pedal and press the accelerator pedal. The engine To auto-stop the engine: will auto-start. • Stop the vehicle by applying the brakes • On a downhill gradient: Release the brake and keep the brake pedal depressed. The pedal slightly so that the vehicle begins to engine will auto-stop. roll. The engine will auto-start after a slight In Comfort or Eco drive mode, the engine increase in speed. may auto-stop before the vehicle has completely stopped.

12 Hill Start Assist }}

* Option/accessory. 409 STARTING AND DRIVING

|| Symbols in the instrument panel On vehicles with the 8-inch instrument panel, Deactivating the Start/Stop the symbol will be shown at the bottom of the function speedometer. In certain situations, it may be advisable to • The symbol will be displayed in Related information turn the Start/Stop function off. the tachometer when the function is avail- To turn off Start/Stop, tap the • Deactivating the Start/Stop function able. Start/Stop function button (p. 410) • An indicator in the tachometer will point in the center display's Func- • Conditions for the Start/Stop function tion view. The indicator light (p. 411) in the button will go out toward when Start/Stop is active • Start/Stop function (p. 409) when the function has been and the engine has auto-stopped. • Hill Start Assist (p. 395) turned off. • Auto-hold brakes (p. 393) The function will remain turned off until: • it is reactivated • The symbol will be grayed-out • the drive mode is changed to Eco. when the function is not available. • No symbol will be shown when the func- Related information tion is turned off. • Driving with the Start/Stop function (p. 409) • Conditions for the Start/Stop function (p. 411)

The function is active and the engine has auto-stopped.

410 STARTING AND DRIVING

Conditions for the Start/Stop • Driving at high altitude and the engine has The engine auto-starts while the brake function not reached its normal operating tempera- pedal is depressed Certain conditions must be met for Start/ ture. In the following situations, the engine will Stop to function. • ABS has been activated. auto-start even if the brake pedal is depressed: If any condition is not met, this will be indi- • Hard braking (even if the ABS system has cated in the instrument panel. not been activated). • High levels of condensation on the inside The engine does not auto-stop • Many starts during a short period of time of the windows. The engine will not auto-stop if: have triggered the starter motor's over- • The climate system settings and the heating protection. actual climate in the passenger compart- • The vehicle has not reached a speed of ment differ. ca 10 km/h (6 mph) after starting. • The exhaust system's particulate filter is full • The brake pedal is pumped repeatedly. • After several auto-stops, the speed must again exceed approximately ca 10 km/h • A trailer is connected to the vehicle's elec- • The hood is open. (6 mph) before the next auto-stop. trical system. • The vehicle begins to roll or increases • The driver has not fastened the seatbelt. • The transmission is not running at its nor- speed slightly if the engine auto-stopped mal operating temperature. before the vehicle was at a standstill. • The engine is not running at its normal operating temperature. • The gear selector is in mode M (±). • The driver's seat belt is unbuckled with the gear selector in the D or N positions. • The ambient temperature is under • If traffic conditions allow it (for example in approximately -5 °C (23 °F) or over a traffic jam). • The gear selector is moved from D to R or M (±). approximately 30 °C (86 °F). The engine does not auto-start • The driver's door is opened with the gear • Windshield heating is activated. The engine will not auto-start after an auto- selector in D. An audible signal and a text • The climate system settings and the stop if: message informs the driver that the igni- actual climate in the passenger compart- • The driver is not wearing a seat belt, the tion is on. ment differ. gear selector is in the P position and the • The vehicle is in reverse. driver's door is open. The engine must be WARNING • The driver is making large steering wheel started normally. Do not open the hood if the engine has movements. auto-stopped. Turn off the engine by • The road gradient is very steep. switching off the ignition before lifting the hood. • The hood is open. }}

411 STARTING AND DRIVING

|| Related information • Start/Stop function (p. 409) • Driving with the Start/Stop function (p. 409) • Deactivating the Start/Stop function (p. 410)

412 STARTING AND DRIVING

Leveling control* and suspension The instrument panel indi- on e.g. ambient temperature, how the vehicle The vehicle's leveling control system adjusts cates when the suspension is loaded, if loading mode is used, which drive the suspension and shock absorbers auto- level is being adjusted. mode is selected after the engine is started, matically to help optimize comfort and con- etc. trol while driving. Leveling can also be con- The level may also be adjusted a period after trolled manually to facilitate loading or get- the vehicle is parked. This is to compensate ting in and out of the vehicle. The following apply if a door or the tailgate is for any height changes that may occur due to temperature changes in the air springs when Pneumatic suspension and shock opened: the vehicle cools. absorbers • If a door is opened, the level can only be The system is adapted to the selected drive adjusted upwards. Transporting mode and vehicle speed. The pneumatic sus- • If the tailgate is open, the level can only be When transporting the vehicle on a ferry, train pension reduces the vehicle's ground clear- adjusted downwards. or truck, only secure (lash) the vehicle around ance at higher speeds to reduce air resistance the tires, not using any other parts of the chas- and increase stability. The shock absorbers are Parking sis. Changes in the pneumatic suspension normally set to help optimize comfort and are When parking, make sure that there is ade- may occur during transport, which could adjusted continuously according to the road quate space above and below the vehicle adversely affect the lashing and result in dam- surface and the vehicle's acceleration, braking since ground clearance may vary depending age. and cornering.

}}

* Option/accessory. 413 STARTING AND DRIVING

|| Symbols and messages in driver display Symbol Message Meaning Suspension Active chassis has been switched off manually by the user. Deactivated by user

Suspension Active chassis performance has been temporarily reduced due to extensive system use. If A Temporarily reduced performance this message appears frequently (e.g. several times in one week) contact a workshop .

Suspension A fault has occurred. Visit a workshopA as soon as possible. Service required

Suspension failure A critical fault has occurred. Stop safely, have the car towed to a workshopA. Stop safely

414 STARTING AND DRIVING

Symbol Message Meaning

Suspension A fault has occurred. If the message appears while driving, contact a workshopA. Slow down Vehicle too high

Suspension Level control to target height is in progress. Auto adjusting vehicle level

A An authorized Volvo workshop is recommended.

Related information • Leveling control settings* (p. 416) • Drive modes* (p. 403)

* Option/accessory. 415 STARTING AND DRIVING

Leveling control settings* 1. Tap Settings in the Top view. Low Speed Control* 13 Turn off leveling control before lifting the 2. Tap My Car Mirrors and Convenience. The low-speed function (LSC ) facilitates vehicle with a jack to help avoid problems and improves control and traction on rough with the pneumatic suspension. 3. Select Easy Entry and Exit Suspension roads and slippery surfaces, e.g. when towing Control. The vehicle can be lowered or raised to make a trailer on grass or up boat ramps. it easier to load or for passengers to get in > When the vehicle is parked and the In vehicles equipped with drive mode con- engine is turned off, the level is low- and out. trol*, the function is included in the Off Road ered. (Level adjustment will stop if a drive mode. side door is opened and will resume Adjusting loading mode Low Speed Control is designed for driving on after a slight delay when the door has rough roads and when towing trailers at low been closed.) When the engine is speeds, up to approximately 40 km/h (25 started and the vehicle begins to move, mph). the level will be raised to the height set by the selected drive mode. When driving at low speeds, LSC prioritizes low gears and all-wheel drive to help avoid Disable Leveling Control wheel spin and improve traction on all wheels. In certain situations, this function must be The accelerator pedal will be less responsive turned off, e.g. before the vehicle is raised to improve traction and speed control at low using a jack*. The level difference caused by speeds. raising the vehicle with a jack could cause problems with the pneumatic suspension. The function is activated together with Hill Descent Control (HDC14), which makes it pos- Turning off the function in the center display: Use the buttons in the cargo compartment to sible to control speed going down steep hills 1. Tap Settings in the Top view. raise or lower the rear section of the vehicle to using the accelerator pedal and reduces the need to use the brake pedal. The system facilitate loading or unloading the vehicle or 2. Tap My Car Parking Brake and makes it possible to maintain a low and uni- connecting or disconnecting a trailer. Suspension. form speed when driving down steep hills. Center display settings 3. Select Disable Leveling Control. Easy Entry and Exit Suspension Control Related information The vehicle can be lowered to make it easier • Leveling control* and suspension (p. 413) to get in and out. • Loading recommendations (p. 555) Activating easy entry in the center display:

416 * Option/accessory. STARTING AND DRIVING

NOTE Activating and deactivating Low Related information Speed Control* using the function • Low Speed Control* (p. 416) When LSC with HDC is activated, the feel button • * of the accelerator pedal and engine Changing drive mode (p. 405) There is a function button for driving at low response will change. speeds with Hill Descent Control in the center display's Function view if the vehicle is NOTE not equipped with a drive mode control in the tunnel console. This drive mode is not designed to be used for normal street driving. Selecting Low Speed Control in the center display's Function view – NOTE Tap the Hill Descent Control button to activate or deactivate the function. The function is deactivated when driving at high speeds and must be reactivated at lower speeds if so desired.

Related information • Activating and deactivating Low Speed * Control using the function button > An indicator light in the button will illu- (p. 417) minate when the function is activated. • * Changing drive mode (p. 405) When the engine is switched off, the function • Hill Descent Control* (p. 418) will be automatically deactivated. • All Wheel Drive (AWD)* (p. 403) NOTE The function is deactivated when driving at high speeds and must be reactivated at lower speeds if so desired.

13 Low Speed Control 14 Hill Descent Control

* Option/accessory. 417 STARTING AND DRIVING

* Hill Descent Control pedal. When the accelerator pedal is released, NOTE The function for assisting when driving down- the vehicle will return to very low speed This drive mode is not designed to be used hill (HDC15) is a low-speed function with regardless of how steep the hill is and without for normal street driving. increased engine braking. The function the brakes needing to be applied. The brake makes it possible to increase or decrease the lights will illuminate when the function is acti- vehicle's speed on steep downhill gradients vated. NOTE by only using the accelerator pedal, without The driver can brake to stop or slow the vehi- The function is deactivated when driving at applying the brakes. cle at any time by depressing the brake pedal. high speeds and must be reactivated at In vehicles equipped with drive mode con- HDC is activated along with Low Speed Con- lower speeds if so desired. trol*, the function is included in the Off Road trol (LSC16), which facilitates and improves drive mode. traction and control on rough and slippery sur- Related information HDC is designed for driving on rough roads at faces. The system is intended to be used at • Activating and deactivating Hill Descent low speeds and downhill gradients with slip- low speeds, up to approximately 40 km/h (25 Control* using the function button pery or otherwise difficult road surfaces. The mph). (p. 419) driver does not need to use the brake pedal but can instead focus on steering. To keep in mind when using HDC • Changing drive mode* (p. 405) • If the function is switched off while driving • Low Speed Control* (p. 416) on a steep downhill gradient, braking WARNING • All Wheel Drive (AWD)* (p. 403) effect will be gradually reduced. HDC is only intended to be a supplementary braking aid and it does not function in • HDC can be used in gear positions D and all situations. R, and in manual gears 1 or 2. The driver is always ultimately responsible • It is not possible to manually shift to third for operating the vehicle in a safe manner. gear or higher when HDC is active.

Function NOTE Hill Descent Control allows the vehicle to When LSC with HDC is activated, the feel move forward or backward at very low speeds of the accelerator pedal and engine assisted by the brake system. The driver can response will change. increase the speed by pressing the accelerator

15 Hill Descent Control 16 Low Speed Control

418 * Option/accessory. STARTING AND DRIVING

Activating and deactivating Hill Related information Economical driving Descent Control* using the • Hill Descent Control* (p. 418) Drive economically and more environmentally function button • Changing drive mode* (p. 405) conscious by thinking ahead and avoiding There is a function button for assistance on rapid starts and stops. steep gradients with Hill Descent Control in Adapt your driving style and speed to the cur- the center display's Function view if the vehi- rent traffic conditions. cle is not equipped with a drive mode control Observe the following rules: in the tunnel console. • For lower fuel consumption, activate Eco Selecting Hill Descent Control in the drive mode. center display's Function view • Use the Eco Coast function in drive mode HDC only works at low speeds. Eco - engine braking is deactivated, allow- – Tap the Hill Descent Control button to ing the vehicle's kinetic energy to be used activate or deactivate the function. to roll greater distances. • Use gear D as often as possible and avoid using the kick-down function. • For manual gear shifting, use the highest possible gear for the current traffic situation and road conditions - fuel consumption is reduced at lower engine speeds > An indicator light in the button will illu- (rpm). Use the gear indicator17. minate when the function is activated. • Maintain a steady speed and a generous When the engine is switched off, the function following distance to traffic ahead to mini- will be automatically deactivated. mize braking. • Fuel consumption is increased at high NOTE speeds - air resistance increases with The function is deactivated when driving at speed. high speeds and must be reactivated at lower speeds if so desired.

17 Only available in certain markets. }}

* Option/accessory. 419 STARTING AND DRIVING

• || The trip computer's current fuel consump- WARNING Preparing for a long trip tion indicator can help promote more fuel- It is important to have the vehicle's systems efficient driving. Never turn off the engine while the vehicle is moving, e.g. when driving downhill. This and equipment checked carefully before driv- • Do not warm up the engine by idling. It is deactivates certain important systems ing long distances. better to begin driving normally immedi- such as power steering and brakes. Check that ately after starting the engine. A cold • the engine is running properly and that engine uses more fuel than a warm Other factors that decrease fuel fuel consumption is normal engine. consumption • there are no leaks (fuel, oil or other fluid) • Whenever possible, avoid using the vehi- • Dirty air cleaner. cle to drive short distances. The engine • the brake pedal is functioning properly • Dirty engine oil and clogged oil filter. does not have time to reach a normal • all lights are working ‒ adjust the head- operating temperature and this leads to • Incorrect front-end alignment. light height if the vehicle is carrying a increased fuel consumption. • Incorrect wheel alignment. heavy load • Use engine braking to brake the vehicle, Some of the above items and others are • tire tread depth and air pressure are at when this is safe for other road users. checked as part of Volvo's standard mainte- correct levels. Change to snow tires when • Maintain the correct pressure in the tires nance schedule. driving in areas where there is a risk of and check pressure regularly. snowy or icy roads Related information • the start battery is sufficiently charged • The type of tires used could affect fuel • Drive-E purer driving pleasure (p. 28) ‒ • consumption - consult a retailer for advice • the wiper blades are in good condition on suitable tires. Eco drive mode (p. 406) • Related information • Remove unnecessary items from the vehi- Checking tire pressure (p. 523) • Checking tire pressure (p. 523) cle - the heavier the load, the higher the fuel consumption. • Filling washer fluid (p. 627) • Roof loads increase air resistance and • Winter driving (p. 421) increase fuel consumption. Remove roof • Economical driving (p. 419) boxes, ski racks, etc. that are not in use. • Vehicle modem settings (p. 499) • Avoid driving with the windows open. • Loading recommendations (p. 555) • Driving with a trailer (p. 434)

420 STARTING AND DRIVING

• Pilot Assist* (p. 289) Winter driving Slippery driving conditions • Tire sealing system (p. 538) It is important to check the vehicle before To help optimize traction and roadholding, driving in cold/snowy conditions to make Volvo recommends using snow tires on all sure it can be driven safely. wheels whenever there is a risk of snow or ice Before the cold season arrives: on the road. • Make sure the engine coolant contains 50% antifreeze. This mixture helps pro- NOTE tect the engine from frost erosion down to Certain countries require use of winter tires approx. –35 °C (–31 °F). Do not mix dif- by law. Not all countries permit the use of ferent types of antifreeze as this could studded tires. pose a health risk. • Keep the fuel tank well filled to prevent Practice driving on slippery surfaces under condensation from forming. controlled conditions to learn how the vehicle • Check the viscosity of the engine oil. Oil reacts. with low viscosity (thinner oil) improves Related information cold-weather starting and reduces fuel • Snow tires (p. 537) consumption when driving with a cold engine. • Snow chains (p. 537) • Braking on salted roads (p. 389) CAUTION • Braking on wet roads (p. 389) Low-viscosity oil should not be used with • Filling washer fluid (p. 627) hard driving or in hot weather. • Start battery (p. 585) • • Replacing windshield wiper blades Check the condition and charge level of (p. 625) the start battery. Cold weather places greater demands on the start battery and • Changing rear window wipers (p. 624) reduces its capacity. • Refilling coolant (p. 582) • Use washer fluid containing antifreeze to help prevent ice from forming in the washer fluid reservoir.

* Option/accessory. 421 STARTING AND DRIVING

Driving through standing water CAUTION Opening/closing the fuel filler door It may be necessary to drive the vehicle The vehicle must be unlocked before the fuel • Engine damage could occur if water through standing water, e.g. deep puddles or filler door can be opened18. enters the air cleaner. flooding on the road. This must be done with An arrow next to the fuel great caution. • If water enters the transmission, the pump symbol in the instru- The vehicle can be driven through water up to lubricating ability of the oils is reduced ment panel indicates the side a depth of 40 cm (15 in) at no more than walk- and the service life of these systems is of the vehicle on which the ing speed. Be particularly careful when driving shortened. fuel filler door is located. through flowing water. • Damage to any component, engine, When driving through standing water, drive transmission, turbocharger, differential or its internal components caused by 1. Open the fuel filler door by pressing lightly slowly and do not stop the vehicle. When you on its rear edge. have passed the water, press lightly on the flooding, vapor lock or insufficient oil is brake pedal and check that the brakes are not covered under warranty. 2. After refueling, press the fuel filler door functioning properly. Water, mud, slush, etc. • If the engine stalls while the vehicle is lightly to close it. can make the brake linings slippery, resulting in water, do not attempt to restart it. Related information in delayed braking effect. Have the vehicle towed out of the • Refueling (p. 423) water to a workshop. An authorized • If the vehicle is equipped with contacts for Volvo workshop is recommended. Risk an electric heater or trailer coupling, clean of engine failure. these after driving in water or mud. • Do not allow the vehicle to stand in water up to the sills any longer than absolutely CAUTION necessary. This could result in electrical Because it can be difficult to determine the malfunctions. water depth, Volvo recommends not driving through standing or running water. The driver is always responsible for operating the vehicle in a safe manner and adhering to all applicable laws and regulations.

Related information • Recovery (p. 441) • Low Speed Control* (p. 416)

422 * Option/accessory. STARTING AND DRIVING

Refueling 3. Insert the pump's nozzle into the fuel filler 2. Insert the funnel into the fuel filler pipe's The fuel tank is equipped with a fuel filling pipe's opening. There are two flaps just opening. There are two flaps just inside system without a cover. inside the fuel filler pipe and the pump's the fuel filler pipe and the tube section of nozzle must push both of these flaps open the funnel must push both of these flaps Refueling the vehicle at a service before fuel can be added. open before fuel can be added. station 4. Avoid overfilling the tank. Do not press the handle on the filler nozzle again after it has WARNING initially stopped pumping. California Proposition 65 > The fuel tank is now filled. Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle can expose you to chemi- NOTE cals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead, which are An over-full tank may overflow in hot known to the State of California to cause weather. cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine CAUTION except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well ventilated area and wear gloves or Avoid spilling gasoline during refueling. In wash your hands frequently when servicing It is important to insert the pump's nozzle past both addition to causing damage to the environ- your vehicle. For more information go to of the two flaps in the fuel filler pipe before beginning ment, gasolines containing alcohol can www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger- fueling. cause damage to painted surfaces, which vehicle. Instructions for fueling: may not be covered under the New Vehicle 1. Turn off the engine and open the fuel filler Limited Warranty. Related information door. • Opening/closing the fuel filler door (p. 422) 2. Select a fuel approved for use in the vehi- Refueling from a fuel container cle. For more information on approved • Fuel (p. 424) When filling from a fuel container, use the fun- fuels, see the section on “Fuel”. nel provided in a foam block under the floor hatch in the cargo compartment. 1. Open the fuel filler door.

18 Only locking and unlocking using the remote key, Passive Entry* or Volvo On Call will affect the status of the fuel filler door.

423 STARTING AND DRIVING

Fuel system. Repeated use of leaded gasoline will meet seasonal air quality standards, some Volvo recommends the use of detergent gas- lessen the effectiveness of the emission con- areas require the use of "oxygenated" fuel. trol system and could result in loss of emission oline to control engine deposits. Volvo permits the use of the following "oxy- warranty coverage. State and local vehicle genated" fuels. However, the specified octane Deposit control gasoline (gasoline inspection programs will make detection of ratings must still be met. with detergent additives) misfueling easier, possibly resulting in emis- Detergent gasoline is effective in keeping sion test failure for misfueled vehicles. Alcohol - Ethanol injectors and intake valves clean. Consistent Fuels containing up to 10% ethanol by volume use of deposit control gasolines will help NOTE may be used. Ethanol may also be referred to ensure good driveability and fuel economy. If as Ethyl alcohol, or "Gasohol". Some U.S. and Canadian gasolines contain you are not sure whether the gasoline contains an octane enhancing additive called Ethers - MTBE/ETBE: Fuels containing up to deposit control additives, check with the serv- methyl-cyclopentadienyl manganese tricar- 22% MTBE/ETBE by volume may be used. ice station operator. bonyl (MMT). If such fuels are used, your Methanol Emission Control System performance Do not use gasolines containing methanol NOTE may be affected, and the Check Engine (methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). This practice Volvo recommends not using external fuel Light (malfunction indicator light) located can result in vehicle performance deterioration injector cleaning systems, e.g. do not add on your instrument panel may light. If this and can damage critical parts in the fuel sys- detergent additives to gasoline before or occurs, please return your vehicle to a tem. Such damage may not be covered under after refueling. trained and qualified Volvo service techni- the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. cian for service. Unleaded fuel Related information All Volvo vehicles have a three-way catalytic Gasoline containing alcohol and • Octane rating (p. 425) converter and must only use unleaded gaso- ethers, "Oxygenated fuels" • Opening/closing the fuel filler door line. US and Canadian regulations require that Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing (p. 422) pumps delivering unleaded gasoline are "oxygenates" which are usually alcohols or • Refueling (p. 423) labeled "UNLEADED". Only the nozzles of ethers. In some areas, state or local laws • these pumps will fit in your vehicle's fuel filler require that the service pump be marked indi- Emission controls (p. 426) inlet. It is unlawful to dispense leaded fuel into cating use of alcohols or ethers. However, a vehicle labeled "unleaded gasoline only". there are areas in which the pumps are Leaded gasoline damages the three-way cata- unmarked. If you are not sure whether there is lytic converter and the heated oxygen sensor alcohol or ethers in the gasoline you buy, check with the service station operator. To

424 STARTING AND DRIVING

Octane rating NOTE Volvo requires premium fuel (91 octane19 or When switching to higher octane fuel or higher) for all T5, T6 and T8 engines, and rec- changing gasoline brands, it may be neces- ommends AKI 93 for optimal performance sary to fill the tank more than once before a and fuel economy. See decal examples in difference in engine operation is noticea- illustrations 1 and 2. ble. Minimum octane Decals Fuel Formulations Illustration 2: Decal on the inside of the fuel filler flap Do not use gasoline that contains lead or man- on vehicles that require premium fuel20. ganese as a knock inhibitor, and do not use lead additives. Besides damaging the exhaust TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline emission control systems on your vehicle, lead Volvo endorses the use of "TOP TIER Deter- has been strongly linked to certain forms of gent Gasoline" where available to help main- cancer. tain engine performance and reliability. TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline meets a new stand- Many fuels contain benzene as a solvent. ard jointly established by leading automotive Unburned benzene has been strongly linked to manufactures to meet the needs of today's certain forms of cancer. If you live in an area advanced engines. Qualifying gasoline retail- where you must fill your own gas tank, take ers (stations) will, in most cases, identify their precautions. These may include: gasoline as having met the "TOP TIER Deter- • standing upwind away from the filler noz- 19 Illustration 1: Sample fuel pump octane label . gent Gasoline" standards. zle while refueling • refueling only at gas stations with vapor NOTE recovery systems that fully seal the mouth Information about TOP TIER Detergent of the filler neck during refueling Gasoline is available at • wearing neoprene gloves while handling a www.toptiergas.com. fuel filler nozzle.

19 AKI (Anti Knock Index) is an average value of RON (Research Octane Number) and MON (Motor Octane Number) - (RON)+(MON)/2 20 For supplementary information - see the car's Service and Warranty Booklet. }}

425 STARTING AND DRIVING

|| Use of Additives may be a good idea to switch to a higher- Emission controls With the exception of gas line antifreeze dur- octane fuel (AKI19 91 or higher) or to switch to ing winter months, do not add solvents, thick- another brand of gasoline in order to fully uti- Three-way catalytic converter eners, or other store-bought additives to your lize the vehicle's engine capacity and optimize • Keep your engine properly tuned. Certain vehicle's fuel, cooling, or lubricating systems. traction. engine malfunctions, particularly involving Overuse may damage your engine, and some the electrical, fuel or distributor ignition of these additives contain organically volatile Related information systems, may cause unusually high three- chemicals. Do not needlessly expose yourself • Fuel (p. 424) way catalytic converter temperatures. Do to these chemicals. • Emission controls (p. 426) not continue to operate your vehicle if you detect engine misfire, noticeable loss of WARNING power or other unusual operating conditions, such as engine overheating or back- Never carry a cell phone that is switched firing. A properly tuned engine will help on while refueling your vehicle. If the avoid malfunctions that could damage the phone rings, this may cause a spark that could ignite gasoline fumes, resulting in fire three-way catalytic converter. and injury. • Do not park your vehicle over combustible materials, such as grass or leaves, which can come into contact with the hot WARNING exhaust system and cause such materials Carbon monoxide is a poisonous, colorless, to ignite under certain wind and weather and odorless gas. It is present in all exhaust conditions. gases. If you ever smell exhaust fumes inside the vehicle, make sure the passenger • Excessive starter cranking (in excess of compartment is ventilated, and immedi- one minute), or an intermittently firing or ately return the vehicle to a trained and flooded engine can cause three-way cata- qualified Volvo service technician for cor- lytic converter or exhaust system over- rection. heating. • Remember that tampering or unauthor- Demanding driving ized modifications to the engine, the In demanding driving conditions, such as Engine Control Module, or the vehicle may when towing a trailer or driving in hot weather be illegal and can cause three-way cata- or for prolonged periods at high altitudes, it lytic converter or exhaust system over-

19 AKI (Anti Knock Index) is an average value of RON (Research Octane Number) and MON (Motor Octane Number) - (RON)+(MON)/2

426 STARTING AND DRIVING

heating. This includes: altering fuel injec- Overheating of engine and played in the instrument panel. Follow the tion settings or components, altering transmission recommendations given by reducing emission system components or location In certain driving conditions, such as driving speed or stopping the vehicle safely and or removing components, and/or repeated in mountainous areas or hot weather, there is letting the engine idle for a few minutes to use of leaded fuel. a risk of the engine or transmission overheat- let the transmission cool. ing, especially when carrying heavy loads. • If the vehicle begins to overheat, the air NOTE • Engine power may be temporarily limited. conditioning may be temporarily switched Unleaded fuel is required for vehicles with • Remove any auxiliary lights mounted in off. three-way catalytic converters. front of the grille when driving in hot • After a prolonged period of driving in weather. demanding conditions, do not turn off the Heated oxygen sensors • If the temperature in the engine's cooling engine immediately after stopping. The heated oxygen sensors monitor the oxy- system becomes too high, a warning sym- gen content of the exhaust gases. Readings bol will appear in the instrument panel NOTE are fed into a control module that continuously along with the message Engine It is normal for the engine's cooling fan to monitors engine functions and controls fuel temperature High temperature Stop operate for a short time after the engine is injection. The ratio of fuel to air into the engine safely. Pull over to a safe location and let switched off. is continuously adjusted for efficient combus- the engine idle for a few minutes to cool tion to help reduce harmful emissions. down. Symbols in the instrument panel • If the message Engine temperature Related information High temperature Turn off engine or Symbol Meaning • Octane rating (p. 425) Engine coolant Level low, turn off High engine temperature. Follow • Fuel (p. 424) engine is displayed, stop the vehicle and the recommendations provided. turn off the engine. • If the transmission begins to overheat, an alternative gear shifting program will be Low coolant level. Follow the selected. An integrated protective function recommendations provided. will also be activated, the warning symbol will illuminate and the message Transmission warm Reduce speed to Transmission hot/overheated/ lower temperature or Transmission hot cooling. Follow the recommen- Stop safely, wait for cooling will be dis- dations provided. }}

427 STARTING AND DRIVING

|| Related information Battery drain Jump starting using another • Refilling coolant (p. 582) The electrical functions in the vehicle drain battery • Driving with a trailer (p. 434) the battery to varying degrees. Avoid using If the start battery is discharged, current from ignition mode II when the engine is switched another battery can be used to start the vehi- • Preparing for a long trip (p. 420) off. Use ignition mode I instead, as this uses cle. less electrical current. Note that certain accessories may also drain power from the electrical system. Do not use functions that use a lot of electrical current when the engine is turned off. Examples of such functions are: • blower • headlights • windshield wipers • audio system (especially at high volume). If the starter battery voltage is low, a message Jumper cable connecting points. Engine compart- is shown in the driver display. The vehicle's ment appearance may vary depending on vehicle energy-saving function will then turn off or model and equipment level. reduce certain functions, such as the blower To avoid short circuits or other damage, the and/or the audio system. following steps are recommended when jump – Charge the battery by starting the engine starting the battery using another battery: and let it run for at least 15 minutes (driv- 1. Put the ignition in mode 0. ing charges the battery faster than letting the engine idle). 2. Make sure the auxiliary battery (the battery used to jump start the discharged Related information battery) has a voltage of 12 volts. • Start battery (p. 585) • Ignition modes (p. 385)

428 STARTING AND DRIVING

3. If the auxiliary battery is in another vehicle, 10. Start the engine of the assisting vehicle WARNING turn off that vehicle's engine and make and let it run for a few minutes at a higher sure that the vehicles are not touching idling speed than normal, about High voltage may be dangerous if handled each other. 1500 rpm. incorrectly. Do not touch anything on batteries that is not clearly described in this 4. Clamp the red jumper cable onto the auxil- 11. Start the engine of the vehicle with the Owner's Manual. iary battery's positive (+) terminal (1). dead battery. • Never use a 48 V support battery to jump start the vehicle. CAUTION CAUTION • External electrical equipment may not Connect the jump cable carefully to pre- Do not touch the connections between the under any circumstance be connected vent short circuits with other components cable and the vehicle during the start to the 48 V battery. in the engine compartment. attempt. Risk of sparking. • Only a workshop may replace or perform service on the 48 V battery – an 5. Fold back the cover over your vehicle's 12. Remove the jumper cables in the reverse authorized Volvo workshop is recom- positive (+) jump start terminal (2). order ‒ first the black cables and then the mended. red cables. 6. Clamp the other end of the red jumper cable to your vehicle's positive (+) jump Make sure that none of the clamps of the WARNING start terminal (2). black jumper cables come into contact PROPOSITION 65 WARNING! Battery with either vehicle's positive (+) jump start 7. Clamp the black jumper cable onto the posts, terminals, and related accessories terminals or either of the red jumper auxiliary battery's negative (-) terminal (3). contain lead and lead compounds, chemi- cable's connected clamps. cals known to the state of California to 8. Clamp the other end of the black jumper cause cancer and reproductive harm. Wash cable to your vehicle's negative (-) ground hands after handling. point (4). 9. Make sure the jumper cables are securely attached to help prevent sparks while jump starting.

}}

429 STARTING AND DRIVING

• || WARNING NOTE Selecting ignition mode (p. 386) • Support battery (p. 589) • Batteries generate hydrogen gas, If the starter battery has been discharged which is flammable and explosive. to the extent that the vehicle does not have • Do not connect the jumper cable to normal electrical functions and the engine any part of the fuel system or to any must then be jump-started with an external moving parts. Avoid touching hot battery or a battery charger, the Start/Stop manifolds. function may remain activated. If the Start/ • Stop function shortly thereafter auto-stops Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do the engine, there is a huge risk that auto- not allow battery fluid to contact eyes, start of the engine will fail due to insuffi- skin, fabrics or painted surfaces. cient battery capacity since the battery had • If contact occurs, flush the affected not had time to recharge. area immediately with water. Obtain If the vehicle has been jump-started or if medical help immediately if eyes are there has not been enough time for the affected. battery to be charged with a battery • Never expose the battery to open flame charger, the Start/Stop function should be or electric spark. Do not smoke near temporarily deactivated until the battery the battery. Failure to follow the has been recharged by the vehicle. At an instructions for jump starting can lead ambient temperature of about +15°C to injury. (about 60°F), the battery must be charged by the vehicle for at least one hour. At lower ambient temperatures, the charging time can increase to 3-4 hours. It is advisable to charge the battery with an external battery charger.

Related information • Starting the vehicle (p. 382) • Ignition modes (p. 385) • Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 198)

430 STARTING AND DRIVING

Retractable hitch* 2. Press the button and release – pressing Retracting the hitch The retractable hitch is designed to be used too long on the button may prevent the 1. Open the tailgate. Press the button on the to tow a trailer or mount a bicycle holder. The hitch from folding out. rear, right-hand side of the cargo compart- hitch can be easily retracted or extended as ment and release. Pressing too long on needed. When retracted, the hitch is com- the button may prevent the hitch from pletely concealed. folding in. > The hitch will automatically fold down Folding out the hitch to the unlocked position and the indica- 1. tor light in the button will flash orange.

> The hitch will fold out and down to an unlocked position – the indicator lamp will flash orange. The hitch is ready to be moved to the locked position. 3.

Open the tailgate. There is a button for operating the hitch on the right-hand side at the rear of the cargo compartment. Steady orange illumination from the indicator light in the button shows that the folding function is active.

Move the hitch to its end position, where it will lock in place – the indicator lamp will glow steadily orange. > The hitch is now ready for use. }}

* Option/accessory. 431 STARTING AND DRIVING

|| 2. CAUTION Make sure that there is no adapter in the electrical socket or removable ball section mounted when the towbar is folded in. Remove the bicycle holder from the towbar when it is not being used.

Hitch-mounted bicycle holder

Secure the hitch into position by pushing it NOTE back to its retracted position under the The weight limits for trailers and towbar- bumper, where it will lock into place. mounted accessories differ. A separate NOTE > The indicator light in the button will limit applies for each. This towbar is only Volvo recommends only using Volvo origi- now glow steadily if the hitch is cor- designed for towbar-mounted bicycle hold- nal accessories. Follow the instructions rectly locked in the retracted position. ers. All other accessories are not suitable. supplied with the product.

Before mounting the bicycle on the bicycle holder, keep in mind that: CAUTION • The maximum weight for the bicycle • Never use towbar adapters or towbar holder including bicycles is 130 lbs/60 kg. extenders For example: holder 40 lbs + bicycle 30 • Only use ball mount for towing. Do not lbs + bicycle 30 lbs = 100 lbs total > OK mount accessories directly on the ball • Do not mount more than two bicycles mount. Use accessories designed to The center of gravity should not exceed the be mounted in the towbar's square dimensions: bracket. Do not use accessories designed to be secured around the ball 1. 613 mm (24 1/7 ") mount. 2. 642 mm (25 2/7 ")

432 STARTING AND DRIVING

Loading the bicycle holder Detachable towbar* Installing the ball holder The greater the distance between the load and Volvo recommends the use of Volvo towbars 1. If necessary, remove the cotter pin from the bicycle holder, the greater the load on the that are specially designed for the vehicle. the locking bolt and slide the locking bolt hitch and on the vehicle. out of the towbar assembly. NOTE Keep the following points in mind: 2. Slide the ball holder into the towbar The optional detachable trailer hitch may assembly. • Mount the heaviest bicycle closest to the not be available in all markets or on all vehicle. models. Consult your Volvo retailer. 3. Align the hole in the ball holder with the • If possible, mount the bicycles symmetri- one in the towbar assembly. cally, as close as possible to the center of 4. Slide the locking bolt through the towbar the vehicle. assembly/ball holder. • Remove loose objects from the bicycle, 5. Insert the cotter pin in the hole at the end such as baskets, batteries or child seats. of the locking bolt. This will help reduce the load on the hitch and the bicycle holder. WARNING • Do not place a cover over the bicycle as • this could lead to increased load on the Be sure the towbar is securely locked hitch. in position before attaching anything to it. Related information • Always attach the trailer's safety wire • Detachable towbar* (p. 433) securely to the towbar's safety wire • Driving with a trailer (p. 434) Ball holder attachment bracket. Cotter pin Removing the ball holder Towbar assembly 1. Remove the cotter pin from the locking bolt and slide the locking bolt out of the Locking bolt ball holder/towbar assembly. Safety wire attachment bracket 2. Pull the ball holder out of the towbar assembly.

}}

* Option/accessory. 433 STARTING AND DRIVING

|| WARNING Driving with a trailer There are a number of things to consider Damage may occur on the towbar if it is not used correctly or if incorrect or faulty when towing a trailer, such as the towbar, the accessories are used, such as: trailer and how the load is distributed in the • trailer. Overloading of accessory. Load-carrying capacity is determined by the • Use of incorrect or faulty accessory. vehicle's curb weight. The total weight of all • Accessory used for an incorrect pur- passengers and any installed accessories, e.g. pose. towbar, reduces the vehicle's load-carrying capacity by the corresponding amount. • Use of weight-distributing towing system. • Towbars used on the vehicle must be approved for the applicable use. • Incorrectly positioned ball mount; see geometric limits for the towbar. The ball mount must fall within the geometric • Distribute the load on the trailer so that limits for the towbar, for both distance and the weight on the towbar complies with the specified maximum towball weight. Stowing the ball holder height . Geometric limits are described on a type plate located on the towbar. The tongue weight is calculated as part of the vehicle's payload. WARNING Related information • Increase the tire pressure to the recom- • Retractable hitch* (p. 431) When not in use, the detachable ball holder mended pressure for a full load. should always be properly stowed in the • Driving with a trailer (p. 434) designated location under the floor of the • The engine is subjected to more load than cargo compartment. • Towing capacity and tongue weight usual when towing a trailer. (p. 636) • Towing a trailer affects the vehicle's han- Driving with a trailer dling, durability and driving economy. When towing a trailer, the original ball holder • Do not drive with a heavy trailer when the or equivalent should be used. vehicle is very new. Wait until the mileage has reached at least 1000 km (620 miles). • On long and steep downgrades, the vehicle's brakes are subjected to much more load than usual. When manually shifting, downshift and adapt speed accordingly.

434 * Option/accessory. STARTING AND DRIVING

• Follow applicable regulations regarding CAUTION NOTE permitted speed and weight. • Bumper-attached trailer hitches must Extreme weather conditions, towing a • Drive slowly when towing a trailer up a not be used on Volvos, nor should trailer, high altitude and lower fuel grade long and steep incline. safety chains be attached to the than recommended are factors that can • The maximum trailer weights given only bumper. significantly increase the vehicle's fuel con- apply to altitudes up to 1000 meters • Trailer hitches attaching to the vehicle sumption. (3280 feet) above sea level. At higher alti- rear axle must not be used. tudes, engine power (and thus the vehicle's climbing ability) is decreased due to • Never connect a trailer's hydraulic Trailer weights the reduced air density, and the maximum brake system directly to the vehicle trailer weight must therefore be reduced. brake system, nor a trailer's lighting WARNING system directly to the vehicle lighting The weight of the vehicle and trailer must Please adhere to the recommendations be decreased by 10% for each additional system. Consult your nearest author- provided for trailer weight. If the recom- 1000 m (3280 feet) or part thereof. ized Volvo retailer for correct installa- mendations are not followed, the vehicle tion. and trailer may be difficult to control during • Avoid driving with a trailer on inclines of evasive maneuvers and braking. more than 12%. • When towing a trailer, the trailer's safety chains or wire must be correctly • Avoid overloading and other incorrect use. fastened to the attachment points pro- NOTE • The trailer's brakes must be balanced with vided in the trailer hitch on the vehicle. the vehicle's brakes to help ensure safe The safety chain or wire must never be The specified maximum trailer weights are stops (follow applicable local regulations). fastened to or wound around the tow- those permitted by Volvo. National vehicle ing ball. regulations may set additional restrictions NOTE on trailer weight and speed. The trailer To facilitate towing a trailer in a vehicle hitches may be certified for higher towing equipped with pneumatic suspension*, NOTE weights than the vehicle is permitted to tow. select: The optional detachable trailer hitch may • Dynamic drive mode, or not be available in all markets or on all models. Consult your Volvo retailer. Self-leveling suspension* • the Suspension Control Dynamic The vehicle's self-leveling system attempts to setting in Individual drive mode. keep the vehicle at a constant level, regardless of load (up to the maximum permitted weight). When the vehicle is stationary, the rear end of }}

* Option/accessory. 435 STARTING AND DRIVING

|| the vehicle will be slightly lowered, which is Related information Trailer Stability Assist* normal. • Trailer Stability Assist* (p. 436) Trailer Stability Assist (TSA21) is a function Driving in hilly terrain or hot weather • Checking trailer lights (p. 437) designed to help stabilize a vehicle that is towing a trailer when the vehicle and trailer In certain conditions, there is a risk of over- • Towing capacity and tongue weight have begun to sway. The function is part of heating when driving with a trailer. If overheat- (p. 636) the Electronic Stability Control system ing of the engine and drive system is detected, • Overheating of engine and transmission ESC22. a warning symbol will illuminate in the instru- (p. 427) ment panel and a message will appear. • Retractable hitch* (p. 431) Reasons for swaying The automatic transmission selects the opti- A vehicle towing a trailer may begin to sway mal gear for the current load and engine for various reasons. Normally this only occurs speed. at high speeds. However, if the trailer is overloaded or unevenly distributed, e.g. too far Steep inclines back, there is a risk of swaying even at low Do not lock the automatic transmission into a speeds. higher gear than what the engine can handle ‒ it is not always preferable to drive in high Swaying may be caused by factors such as: gears at low rpm. • The vehicle and trailer are hit by a sudden, Parking on a hill strong crosswind. 1. Depress the brake pedal. • The vehicle and trailer are traveling on an 2. Apply the parking brake. uneven road or over a bump. • 3. Put the gear selector in P. Sudden movements of the steering wheel. Once swaying has begun, it can be difficult or 4. Release the brake pedal. impossible to stop it. This makes the vehicle Put chocks behind the wheels when the vehi- and trailer difficult to control and there is a risk cle is parked on a hill with a trailer attached. of swerving into oncoming traffic or driving off Starting on a hill the road. 1. Depress the brake pedal. Trailer Stability Assist function 2. Put the gear selector in D. Trailer Stability Assist continuously monitors the vehicle's movements, particularly lateral 3. Release the parking brake. movements. If swaying is detected, the brakes 4. Release the brake pedal and start driving.

436 * Option/accessory. STARTING AND DRIVING are applied individually on the front wheels, When Trailer Stability Assist Checking trailer lights which has a stabilizing effect on the vehicle is activated, the ESC symbol When connecting a trailer, make sure that all and trailer. This is often enough to enable the is displayed in the instrument of the lights on the trailer are functioning driver to regain control of the vehicle. panel. before starting to drive. If the Trailer Stability Assist function's first Trailer turn signals and brake lights attempt is not adequate to stop the swaying If one or more of the turn signals or brake motion, the brakes are applied on all wheels Related information lights on the trailer is not working, a symbol and engine power is temporarily reduced. As • Driving with a trailer (p. 434) and message will be displayed in the instru- the swaying motion begins to decrease and ment panel. The other lights on the trailer the vehicle and trailer have once again • Electronic Stability Control (p. 271) must be checked manually by the driver before become stable, TSA stops regulating the the vehicle is driven. brakes/engine power and the driver regains control of the vehicle. Symbol Message

NOTE • Trailer turn indicator Right Trailer Stability Assist is deactivated if the turn indicator malfunction driver selects the sport mode by deactivat- • Trailer turn indicator Left ing ESC in the center display's menu sys- turn indicator malfunction tem. • Trailer brake light Malfunc- Trailer Stability Assist may not intervene if the tion driver tries to compensate for the swaying motion by moving the steering wheel rapidly, because the system will then not be able to If any of the trailer's turn signal lights is not determine if it is the trailer or the driver caus- working, the turn signal symbol in the instru- ing the swaying. ment panel will also flash more quickly than normal.

21 Trailer Stability Assist 22 Electronic Stability Control }}

437 STARTING AND DRIVING

|| Trailer rear fog light 3. Get out of the vehicle to perform the Towing using a towline When a trailer is connected, the vehicle's rear check. This section refers to one vehicle being towed fog light may not illuminate and rear fog light > All of the lights on the trailer will begin behind another using a towline. functionality is instead transferred to the flashing, and then illuminate separately Before towing another vehicle, check applica- trailer. If this is the case, check to see if the one at a time. ble speed limit regulations. trailer is equipped with a rear fog light before 4. Visually check that all of the trailer's lights activating the vehicle's fog lights when driving Preparations and towing are functioning correctly. with a trailer to help ensure safe operation. 5. After a short time, all of the trailer's lights * CAUTION Checking trailer lights will start flashing again. Vehicles with the small gear selector can- Automatic check > The light check is completed. not shift out of the P position when the When the trailer has been connected to the Disabling the automatic check engine is off. Contact an authorized Volvo vehicle's electrical system, its lights can be The automatic light check can be disabled in workshop or a professional towing com- checked by automatically activating them. the center display. pany for assistance towing the vehicle. This function helps the driver check that the trailer's lights are functioning correctly before 1. Tap Settings in the Top view. starting to drive. 2. Tap My Car Lights and Lighting. CAUTION In order to perform this check, the vehicle Note that the vehicle must always be 3. Deselect Automatic Trailer Lamp must be switched off. towed with the wheels rolling forward. Check. 1. When a trailer is connected to the towbar, • Manual check Do not tow a vehicle with automatic the message Automatic Trailer Lamp transmission at a speed greater than If the automatic check has been disabled, the Check will appear in the instrument panel. 80 km/h (50 mph) or for a distance check can be started manually. 2. Acknowledge the message by pressing greater than 80 km (50 miles). 1. Tap Settings in the Top view. the O button on the right-side steering wheel keypad. 2. Tap My Car Lights and Lighting. > The light check will begin. 3. Select Manual Trailer Lamp Check. > The light check will begin. Get out of the vehicle to perform the check. Related information • Driving with a trailer (p. 434)

438 * Option/accessory. STARTING AND DRIVING

WARNING 5. Keep the towline taut when the towing Attaching and removing the vehicle slows down by applying light pres- towing eyelet • Ignition mode II must be active – all sure to the brake pedal. This will help Use the towing eyelet when towing. Screw airbags are deactivated in ignition avoid jarring movements. the towing eyelet securely into place in the mode I. threaded outlet behind the cover on the right- • 6. Be prepared to apply the brakes to stop Always have the remote key in the the vehicle. hand side of the front and rear bumpers. vehicle when it is towed. NOTE Jump starting Do not tow the vehicle to start the engine. Use If the vehicle is equipped with a towbar, WARNING an auxiliary battery if the start battery's charge there is no rear attachment for the towing The brake and steering servos do not work level is so low that the engine cannot be eye. when the engine is off – it takes started. about 5 times more pressure on the brake pedal and steering requires much more Attaching the towing eyelet effort than normal. CAUTION Attempting to tow with the engine running 1. Turn on the hazard warning flashers. could result in damage to the three-way catalytic converter. 2. Attach the towline to the towing eyelet.

3. Put the vehicle in ignition mode II – with- Related information out pressing the brake pedal, turn the start • Attaching and removing the towing eyelet knob clockwise and hold it there for about (p. 439) 4 seconds. Release the knob, which will automatically return to its original position. • Hazard warning flashers (p. 161) • Take out the towing eyelet, which is 4. Move the gear selector to neutral (N) and Recovery (p. 441) stored in a foam block under the floor in release the parking brake. • Jump starting using another battery the cargo compartment. (p. 428) If the battery charge level is too low, it may not be possible to release the parking • Selecting ignition mode (p. 386) brake. Connect an auxiliary battery to the • Transmission (p. 395) vehicle if the battery is discharged. > The towing vehicle can now start driving. }}

439 STARTING AND DRIVING

|| 4. Screw the towing eyelet into place as far as possible.

Front: Remove the cover by pressing on Rear: Remove the cover by pressing on Fasten the eyelet securing by, for example, the mark with a finger. the mark with a finger while folding out inserting a lug wrench* through it and > The cover turns along its center line and the opposite side/corner. using this as a lever. can then be removed. > The cover turns along its center line and can then be removed. CAUTION It is important that the towing eye is screwed in securely as far as possible.

440 * Option/accessory. STARTING AND DRIVING

To consider before using the towing eyelet Removing the towing eyelet Recovery • In certain conditions, the towing eyelet – Unscrew the towing eyelet after use and This section refers to transporting the vehicle may be used to pull the vehicle onto a flat- return it to its storage location in the foam with a tow truck or similar vehicle. bed tow truck. The vehicle's position and block. Call a professional towing service for assis- ground clearance determines if this is pos- Replace the cover on the bumper. tance. sible. In certain conditions, the towing eyelet can be • If the incline of the tow truck is too steep Related information • used to pull the vehicle onto a flatbed tow or if the ground clearance under the vehi- Towing using a towline (p. 438) truck. cle is insufficient, attempting to pull it up • Recovery (p. 441) using the towing eyelet may result in dam- For vehicles equipped with leveling con- • Tool kit (p. 530) * age. trol : If the vehicle is equipped with pneumatic suspension, this feature must be turned off • If necessary, lift the vehicle using the tow before the vehicle is lifted onto a tow truck. truck's lifting device instead of using the Turning off the function in the center display. towing eyelet. 1. Tap Settings in the Top view. WARNING 2. Tap My Car Parking Brake and No person or object should be behind the Suspension. tow truck when the vehicle is lifted onto the bed of the truck. 3. Select Disable Leveling Control. The vehicle's location and ground clearance determine if it can be lifted onto a tow truck. If CAUTION the incline of the tow truck is too steep or if The towing eyelet is only intended for tow- the ground clearance under the vehicle is ing on roads – not for pulling vehicles from insufficient, attempting to pull it up may result ditches or any similar purpose involving in damage. In this case, the vehicle should severe strain. Call a tow truck for profes- only be lifted with the tow truck's lifting equip- sional assistance. ment.

}}

* Option/accessory. 441 STARTING AND DRIVING

23 ® || WARNING HomeLink®* HomeLink is delivered integrated in the rear- ® ®24 view mirror. The HomeLink panel consists of No person or object should be behind the HomeLink is a programmable remote con- three programmable buttons and an indicator tow truck when the vehicle is lifted onto trol, integrated in the vehicle electrical sys- the bed of the truck. tem, that can control up to three different light in the mirror. devices (e.g. garage door opener, alarm sys- For more information about HomeLink®, tem, outdoor and indoor lighting) and thereby CAUTION please visit: www.HomeLink.com or call replace the remote controls for these. 1-800-355-3515. The towing eyelet is only intended for tow- Save the original remote controls for future ing on roads, and must not be used to pull General programming (e.g. for use in another vehicle). vehicles from ditches or any similar pur- It is also advisable to delete the button pro- pose involving severe strain. Call a tow gramming if the vehicle is sold. truck for professional assistance. Related information • ® CAUTION Using HomeLink * (p. 445) • ®* Note that the vehicle must always be Programming HomeLink (p. 443) towed with the wheels rolling forward. • Type approval for HomeLink®* (p. 445)

Related information • Attaching and removing the towing eyelet (p. 439) The illustration is generic – the design may vary. Button 1

Button 2

Button 3

Indicator light

23 Certain markets only. 24 HomeLink and the HomeLink house symbol are registered trademarks of Gentex Corporation.

442 * Option/accessory. STARTING AND DRIVING

Programming HomeLink®*25 1. Point the remote control at the 3. Do not release the buttons until the indica- ® Follow these instructions to program HomeLink button to be programmed and tor light has stopped flashing slowly (about once a second) and either flashes HomeLink®, reset all programming, or pro- hold it about 2-8 cm (1-3 inches) from the ® quickly (about 10 times a second) or gram individual buttons. button. Do not obstruct the HomeLink indicator light. glows steadily. NOTE Note: Some remote controls are more > If the indicator light glows steadily: In some vehicles, the ignition must be on Indication that programming is com- effective at programming HomeLink® from or in the "accessory position" before plete. Press the programmed button a distance of about 15-20 cm (6-12 ® twice to activate. HomeLink can be programmed or used. It inches). Keep this in mind if you experi- can be a good idea to put new batteries in ence any programming difficulties. If the indicator light flashes quickly: the remote control being replaced by The device being programmed with ® 2. Press and hold both the remote control HomeLink for faster programming and HomeLink® may have a security func- button and the HomeLink® button to be better radio signal transmission. The tion that requires an extra step. Try ® programmed. HomeLink buttons should be reset before pressing the programmed button twice programming. to see whether the programming works. Otherwise, continue with the WARNING following steps. While HomeLink® is being programmed, the garage door or gate being programmed may be activated. Make sure that no one is near the door or gate during programming. When programming a garage door opener, it is advised to park outside of the garage.

25 Certain markets only. }}

* Option/accessory. 443 STARTING AND DRIVING

|| www.HomeLink.com, or call Related information 1–800–355–3515. • Using HomeLink®* (p. 445) Programming individual buttons • HomeLink®* (p. 442) To program an individual HomeLink® button: • Type approval for HomeLink®* (p. 445) 1. Press and hold the desired button for about 20 seconds. 2. When the indicator light on HomeLink® starts flashing slowly, it is possible to pro- 4. Locate the "training" button26 on the gram as usual. receiver for the e.g. garage door opener. It Note: If the button you are reprogram- is usually located near the antenna bracket ming does not program with a new on the receiver. device, it will return to the previously 5. Press and release the "training" button saved programming. once. Programming must be completed ® within 30 seconds after pressing the but- Resetting the HomeLink buttons ton. It is only possible to reset all HomeLink® buttons at once. It is not possible to reset individ- 6. ® Press and release the HomeLink button ual buttons. Individual buttons can only be to be programmed. Repeat the press/ reprogrammed. hold/release sequence a second time. For some receivers, the sequence may need to – Press and hold the outer buttons (1 and 3) be repeated a third time. on HomeLink® for about 10 seconds. > Programming is now completed and > When the indicator light goes from a the garage door, gate, etc. should now steady glow to flashing, the buttons be activated when the programmed have been reset and are ready for button is pressed. reprogramming. If you experience any difficulties programming, please contact HomeLink® at:

26 The name and color of the button varies depending on the manufacturer.

444 * Option/accessory. STARTING AND DRIVING

27 28 Using HomeLink®* WARNING Type approval for HomeLink®* Once HomeLink® is programmed, it can be • If you use HomeLink® to open a garage used instead of the separate remote controls. FCC (USA) and IC (Canada) door or gate, be sure no one is near the Press and hold the programming button. The This device complies with FCC rules part 15 gate or door while it is in motion. garage door, gate, alarm system, etc. will be and Industry Canada RSS-210. Operation is activated (this may take several seconds). If • Do not use HomeLink® with any subject to the following two conditions: (1) the button is held down for more than 20 sec- garage door opener that lacks safety This device may not cause harmful interfer- onds, reprogramming will begin. The indicator stop and reverse features as required ence, and (2) This device must accept any light will glow steadily or flash when the but- by US federal safety standards (this interference that may be received including ton has been pressed. The original remote includes any garage door opener model interference that may cause undesired opera- controls may be used concurrently with manufactured before April 1, 1982). A tion. HomeLink® if desired. garage door that cannot detect an object - signaling the door to stop and WARNING reverse - does not meet current U.S. NOTE The transmitter has been tested and com- federal safety standards. For more plies with FCC and IC rules. Changes or When the ignition is switched off, information, contact HomeLink at: modifications not expressly approved by HomeLink® will be active for at least www.homelink.com. the party responsible for compliance could 7 minutes. void the user's authority to operate the 29 Related information device. NOTE • HomeLink®* (p. 442) Type approval for EU • Programming HomeLink®* (p. 443) HomeLink® cannot be used if the vehicle is Gentex Corporation hereby declares that * ® locked and the alarm is armed from the • Type approval for HomeLink * (p. 445) HomeLink® Model UAHL5 complies with the outside. Radio equipment directive 2014/53/EU. Wavelengths within which the radio equipment operates: • 433.05MHz-434.79MHz <10mW E.R.P. • 868.00MHz-868.60MHz <25mW E.R.P.

27 Certain markets only. 28 Certain markets only. 29 The term "IC:" before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met. }}

* Option/accessory. 445 STARTING AND DRIVING

|| • 868.70MHz-868.20MHz <25mW E.R.P. Compass* Activating and deactivating the • 869.40MHz-869.65MHz <25mW E.R.P. An integrated compass30 in the upper right compass* 31 • 869.70MHz-870.00MHz <25mW E.R.P. corner of the rearview mirror shows the An integrated compass in the upper right direction the vehicle is traveling. corner of the rearview mirror shows the Certificate holder address: Gentex Corpora- direction the vehicle is traveling. tion, 600 North Centennial Street, Zeeland MI 49464, USA The compass is automatically activated when the vehicle is started. For further details, search for support information on type approval at www.volvocars.com. To deactivate/activate the compass manually: – Related information Use a paper clip or similar object to press the button on the bottom of the mirror. • HomeLink®* (p. 442) > If the compass is deactivated when the vehicle is switched off, it will not be activated the next time the vehicle is started. The compass will then need to be activated manually. Rearview mirror with compass. Related information Eight different compass directions are shown • Compass* (p. 446) with the abbreviations: N (north), NE (north- • * east), E (east), SE (southeast), S (south), SW Calibrating the compass (p. 447) (southwest), W (west) and NW (northwest). Related information • Activating and deactivating the compass* (p. 446) • Calibrating the compass* (p. 447)

30 Rearview mirror with compass is available as an option only on certain markets and models. 31 Rearview mirror with compass is available as an option only on certain markets and models.

446 * Option/accessory. STARTING AND DRIVING

Calibrating the compass* 1 7. Vehicles with heated windshields*: If C The globe is divided into 15 magnetic zones. is shown in the display when the wind- 2 15 The compass32 should be calibrated if the shield heating function is activated, per- vehicle is driven from one zone to another. 14 form step 6 above with the heating func- 3 tion on. 1. Stop the vehicle in a large, open area away 13 from steel constructions and high-voltage 4 8. Repeat the above procedure as needed. power lines. 12 Related information 5 8 2. Start the engine and switch off all electri- 11 • Compass* (p. 446) 9 cal equipment (climate system, wipers, 10 • * 6 Activating and deactivating the compass etc.) and make sure all doors are closed. 7 (p. 446)

NOTE Magnetic zones. Calibration may fail or not even be initiated 4. Press the button on the underside of the if electrical equipment is not turned off. mirror repeatedly until the desired magnetic zone (1–15) appears (see the map of magnetic zones). 3. Hold the button on the bottom of the rearview mirror pressed for about 3 seconds 5. Wait until the display again shows C, or (using e.g. a paper clip). The number of the press and hold the button on the under- current magnetic zone is shown. side of the rearview mirror for approx. 6 seconds until C is displayed. 6. Drive slowly in a circle at a speed of no more than 10 km/h (6 mph) until a compass direction is shown in the display. This indicates that calibration is complete. Drive in a circle two more times to fine- tune the calibration.

32 Rearview mirror with compass is available as an option only on certain markets and models.

* Option/accessory. 447

AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

Audio, media and Internet Related information Sound settings The audio and media system consists of a • Media player (p. 471) Sound reproduction quality is preset but can media player and a radio. A cellular phone can • Radio (p. 454) also be adjusted. also be connected through Bluetooth to use The system's volume is normally adjusted • Phone (p. 487) hands-free functions or play music in the using the volume control below the center dis- vehicle. When the vehicle is connected to the • Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 496) play or the right-side steering wheel keypad. Internet, it is also possible to use apps to play • Apps (p. 452) This applies, for example, when playing music media. • Voice Control (p. 146) or the radio or during phone calls and active traffic messages. • Ignition modes (p. 385) • Driver distraction (p. 39) Sound reproduction The audio system is precalibrated using digital • Handling system updates via Download signal processing. This calibration takes into Center (p. 571) account speakers, amplifiers, passenger com- • License agreement for audio and media partment acoustics, listener position, etc. for (p. 505) each combination of vehicle model and audio • Handling system updates via Download system. There is also a dynamic calibration Center (p. 571) that takes into account the volume control setting and the vehicle's speed. Personal settings Audio and media overview Different settings are available in Top view The functions can be controlled using voice under Settings Sound depending on the commands, the steering wheel keypad or the vehicle's sound system. center display. The number of speakers and amplifiers varies depending on the audio sys- Premium Sound* (Bowers & Wilkins) tem installed in the vehicle. • Tone - setting for e.g. bass, treble, equalizer, etc. System updates The audio and media system is continuously • Balance - balance between right/left and improved. It is recommended to download front/rear speakers. system updates as soon as they are available. • System Volumes – adjusts volume in the various systems of the car, e.g. Voice

450 * Option/accessory. AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

Control, Park Assist and Phone Sound experience* High Performance Pro* (Harman Ringtone. Sound experience is an app that provides Kardon) access to additional sound settings. • Seat Optimization – sound settings can High Performance Pro* (Harman Open Sound Experience from the center dis- be adjusted to be primarily adapted for Kardon) • play's App view. Depending on the sound sys- Driver, All and Rear. Equalizer - setting of equalizer. tem installed in the vehicle, the following set- • • Surround - surround sound mode with Balance - balance between right/left and tings are possible: level settings. front/rear speakers. Premium Sound* (Bowers & Wilkins) • Tone - setting for e.g. bass, treble, equal- • System Volumes – adjusts volume in the • Studio – sound settings can be adjusted izer, etc. various systems of the car, e.g. Voice to be primarily adapted for Driver, All and Control, Park Assist and Phone Related information Rear. Ringtone. • Sound settings (p. 450) • Individual stage - surround sound mode • Navigating in the center display's views High Performance with settings for intensity and enclosure. • (p. 116) Tone - setting for e.g. bass, treble, equal- • Concert hall - reproduces the acoustics izer, etc. of Gothenburg's Concert Hall. • Balance - balance between right/left and front/rear speakers. • System Volumes – adjusts volume in the various systems of the car, e.g. Voice Control, Park Assist and Phone Ringtone. Related information • Sound experience* (p. 451) • Media player (p. 471) • Voice control settings (p. 150) • Phone settings (p. 494) Recreate the acoustics from the Gothenburg Concert • Audio, media and Internet (p. 450) Hall. • Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 496)

* Option/accessory. 451 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

Apps Start an app by pressing the app in the center The App view contains applications (apps) display's app view. that provide access to certain vehicle servi- All apps used should be updated to the latest ces. version. Swipe the center display screen from right to left1 to access the App view from the Home Related information view. This view displays downloaded apps • Download apps (p. 453) (third-party apps) as well as apps for inte- • Updating apps (p. 453) grated functions, such as FM radio. • Deleting apps (p. 454) • Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 480) • Android Auto* (p. 484) • Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 496) • Hard disk storage space (p. 504) • Terms of use and data sharing (p. 502)

App view. (generic illustration; basic apps vary depending on market and model) Several basic apps are always available. More apps such as web radio and music services can be downloaded when the car is connected to the Internet. Some apps can only be used when the vehicle is connected to the Internet.

1 Applies for left-hand drive vehicles. For right-hand drive vehicles, swipe in the other direction.

452 * Option/accessory. AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

Download apps 3. Tap on the row for an app in order to Updating apps New apps can be downloaded when the vehi- expand in the list and get more informa- Apps can be updated when the vehicle is cle is connected to the Internet. tion about the app. connected to the Internet. NOTE 4. Select Install to start the download and NOTE installation of the app. Data downloading can affect other services Data downloading can affect other services such as transfer data, e.g. web radio. If the > The current status of the download and such as transfer data, e.g. web radio. If the affect on other services is experienced as installation will be shown. affect on other services is experienced as problematic, the download can be interrup- If a download cannot be started imme- problematic, the download can be interrupted. Alternatively, it may be appropriate to diately, a message will be displayed. ted. Alternatively, it may be appropriate to switch off or cancel other services. The app will remain in the list and it will switch off or cancel other services. be possible to reattempt downloading. NOTE Canceling a download NOTE – Tap Abort to cancel a download in pro- When downloading using a phone, pay When downloading using a phone, pay gress. extra attention to the data traffic costs. extra attention to the data traffic costs. Note that only a download can be cancelled. An installation cannot be cancelled once it has If an app is being used while an update is in 1. Open the Download Center app in App begun. progress, it will be restarted to complete the view. Related information update. • Apps (p. 452) Update all • Updating apps (p. 453) 1. Open the Download Center app in App view. • Deleting apps (p. 454) • Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 496) • Handling system updates via Download 2. Select New apps to open a list of apps Center (p. 571) that are available but are not installed in • Hard disk storage space (p. 504) the vehicle.

2. Select Install all. > The update will begin. }}

* Option/accessory. 453 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

|| Update certain apps Deleting apps Radio 1. Open the Download Center app in App When the vehicle is connected to the Inter- The radio can receive broadcasting from AM view. net, it is possible to uninstall apps. and FM wavebands with HD Radio™ 2. Select Application updates to open a list If the app is being used, it must be closed Technology and SiriusXM® Satellite radio *. of all available updates. before it can be uninstalled. When the vehicle has an Internet connection, it is also possible to listen to web radio. 3. Find the desired app and select Install. 1. Open the Download Center app in App view. > The update will begin. Related information • Apps (p. 452) • Download apps (p. 453) • Deleting apps (p. 454) • Handling system updates via Download Center (p. 571) 2. Select Application updates to open a list of all installed apps. • Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 496) 3. Find the desired app and select Uninstall to begin uninstalling the app. > When the app has been uninstalled, it The radio can be controlled will be removed from the list. using voice commands, the right-side steering wheel key- Related information pad or the center display. • Apps (p. 452) • Download apps (p. 453) • Updating apps (p. 453) Related information • Handling system updates via Download • Starting the radio (p. 455) Center (p. 571) • Changing waveband and radio station • Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 496) (p. 456) • Storing radio channels in the Radio favorites app (p. 457)

454 * Option/accessory. AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

• Radio settings (p. 458) Starting the radio • Changing waveband and radio station • RBDS (p. 458) The radio is started from the center display's (p. 456) App view. • • HD Radio™ (p. 459) Storing radio channels in the Radio favor- 1. Open the desired waveband (e.g. FM) ites app (p. 457) • SiriusXM® Satellite radio* (p. 462) from App view. • Radio settings (p. 458) • Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 496) • Voice control for radio and media (p. 149) • Voice control for radio and media (p. 149) • Media player (p. 471)

2. Select a radio station. Related information • Radio (p. 454) • Searching for a radio station (p. 456)

* Option/accessory. 455 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

Changing waveband and radio Favorites – only plays selected favorite chan- Searching for a radio station station nels. The radio automatically compiles a list of the Instructions for changing wavebands, wave- Genres - only plays channels broadcasting the radio stations that are sending out the stron- band lists and radio stations in the selected selected genre or program type, e.g. pop, clas- gest signals in the vehicle's current location. list are provided here. sical, etc. Changing wavebands Changing radio stations in a selected Swipe from App view on the center display list and select the desired waveband (e.g. FM) or – Press or under the center display open the App menu in the instrument panel or on the right-side steering wheel key- with the right-side steering wheel keypad and pad. make your selection there. > Move step-by-step through the Changing a list in a waveband selected list. It is also possible to change radio station in the selected list via the center display.

Related information Searching is performed in different ways • Radio (p. 454) depending on the waveband selected: • Searching for a radio station (p. 456) • AM - stations and frequency. • Voice control for radio and media (p. 149) • FM, stations, genres and frequency. • Storing radio channels in the Radio favor- 1. Tap Library. ites app (p. 457) 2. Tap . • Radio settings (p. 458) • > Search view will displayed and the key- App menu in instrument panel (p. 105) board will open. 1. Tap Library. 3. Enter a search word/phrase. 2. Select playback from Stations, Favorites > The search will start and change as or Genres. characters are entered. Search results 3. Tap the desired station in the list. will be displayed by category.

456 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

Searching for a station manually Storing radio channels in the Radio Related information favorites app • Radio (p. 454) It is possible to add a radio station in the • Starting the radio (p. 455) Radio favorites app and in the list of favor- • Searching for a radio station (p. 456) ites for the waveband (e.g. FM). Instructions for adding and removing radio channels are • Changing waveband and radio station provided below. (p. 456) • Voice control for radio and media (p. 149) Radio favorites • Radio settings (p. 458) The radio favorites app shows stored radio channels • App menu in instrument panel (p. 105) from all wavebands.

Searching manually makes it possible to find and tune to stations that are not on the automatically compiled list of the strongest sta- 1. Open the Radio favorites app from App tions in the area. view. – Tap Manual tuning, drag the control or 2. Tap the desired station in the list to listen. tap or . Press and hold to skip to Adding and deleting radio favorites the next available station in the frequency band. You can also use the right-side 1. Tap to add a radio channel to the steering wheel keypad. waveband's list of favorites or the Radio favorites app. Related information Tap Library, select Edit and tap to • Radio (p. 454) 2. delete a radio channel from the list of • Starting the radio (p. 455) favorites. • Changing waveband and radio station When you delete a radio channel from the (p. 456) Radio favorites app, the channel will also be • Voice control for radio and media (p. 149) deleted from that waveband's list of favorites. • Radio settings (p. 458)

457 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

Radio settings SiriusXM® Satellite radio* RBDS There are a number of different radio func- Pull down Top view and select Settings RBDS radio tions that can be activated and deactivated. Media SiriusXM to show a list of available RBDS (Radio Broadcast Data System) enables certain functionality2, such as: Canceling a traffic message options. A current broadcast (e.g. a traffic message) • Searches for program types or new broad- can be temporarily interrupted by pressing Related information casts in the right-side steering wheel keypad or • Radio (p. 454) • Text information about currently broadcast tapping Cancel in the center display. • Settings for SiriusXM® Satellite radio* programs (p. 465) Activating and deactivating radio Related information • functions Symbols in the center display status bar • Radio (p. 454) (p. 125) Pull down Top view and select Settings • Radio settings (p. 458) Media and the desired waveband to see available functions. AM/FM Radio • HD Radio AM: HD Radio™ Technology: makes it possible for AM audio to achieve an audio quality comparable to analog FM. • HD Radio FM: HD Radio™ Technology: makes it possible to achieve a sound quality comparable with a CD. • Show Broadcast Information: shows information on program content, artists, etc. • Freeze Program Name: select to stop the program service name from scrolling continuously. Instead it freezes after 20 seconds.

2 Certain stations only.

458 * Option/accessory. AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

HD Radio™ The IBOC system is referred to as a "hybrid" so the next time the radio is tuned to the same HD Radio is a brand name registered by the since it is both analog and digital. During station, the logo will be displayed immedi- DTS, Inc.3. They are the developer of a broad- hybrid operation, receivers still continue to ately. Album art is synched with the artist that casting technology called IBOC or In Band On receive the analog (non-digital) signal. HD you are currently listening to. Radio receivers incorporate both modes of Channel, which refers to the method of trans- Ball game mode mitting a digital radio broadcast signal cen- reception, where the receiver will automati- This feature means that a main FM station tered on the same frequency as the AM or FM cally switch to the analog signal if the digital (HD1) will broadcast live events, where the station's present frequency. signal cannot be decoded or is lost by the receiver. content of the programming is more important Introduction than sound quality, in analog mode only to When you have tuned to an HD Radio station, help prevent the delay between analog and the symbol will appear in the infotain- digital broadcasting. The HD Radio symbol ment system display. The symbol will be dis- will be white during live broadcasts and "Live" played in different colors: will be displayed next to the symbol. • Grayed-out symbol: no HD Radio broad- Benefits of digital broadcasting cast reception • Better sound (FM sounds near CD quality • White symbol: the radio is actively receiv- and AM as analog FM). ing an HD broadcast • Some FM frequencies offer a greater • Orange symbol: the radio is receiving an number of listening choices through multi- HD broadcast with digital sound casting (consisting of a frequency's main More information about HD Radio and IBOC channel and any sub-channels that may also be available on that particular fre- Display when the radio is receiving an HD Radio can be found on DTS, Inc.'s website, broadcast (generic illustration) www.dts.com. quency.) • When receiving a digital signal there is no Artist Experience™ NOTE multipath disturbance or hisses/pops/ A radio station's logo and album art can be crackling due to outside influences. HD Radio volume may fade in and out at displayed. If a station opts to provide this times due to coverage limitations. information, it is broadcast once every 12 minutes, which means that there may be a delay before the logo/album art appear on the screen. The radio can store 100 station logos

3 HD Radio™ technology is manufactured under license from DTS, Inc. U.S. and Foreign Patents. HD Radio™ and the HD and HD Radio logos are proprietary trademarks of DTS, Inc. }}

459 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

|| How HD Radio ™ Technology Activating and deactivating the HD • HD Radio™ limitations (p. 461) broadcasting works Radio™ • Opening contextual setting in the center HD Radio works similarly to conventional HD Radio is deactivated when the car leaves display (p. 134) radio and broadcasts of this type are available the factory. in many areas of the United States. However, When listening to an HD Radio station and there are a few key differences: driving through areas with weak HD signals • Instead of transmitting one analogue sig- (fringe areas), you may experience that the nal, stations send out a bundled signal – radio repeatedly switches between analog/ both analog and digital. digital and digital/analog reception. If this happens, it may be desirable to switch HD off. • An HD Radio receiver can receive both digital and analog broadcasts. Depending Carry out the following to activate or deacti- on the terrain and location of the vehicle vate HD Radio: (which will influence the signal strength), 1. Drag down the top view and tap on the receiver will determine which signal to Settings. receive. 2. Press Media and AM/FM Radio. Related information • 3. Press HD Radio AM or HD Radio FM to Radio (p. 454) activate/deactivate the function. • Activating and deactivating the HD If HD radio is deactivated, the radio will be Radio™ (p. 460) unable to receive digital broadcasts but it will • HD Radio™ sub-channels (p. 461) continue to function as a conventional radio • HD Radio™ limitations (p. 461) (analog AM/FM receiver). Please note that when HD is switched off, it will not be possi- • Changing waveband and radio station ble to tune in to sub-channels. (p. 456) • Searching for a radio station (p. 456) Activating or deactivating HD Radio only affects the currently selected waveband, FM or AM. Related information • HD Radio™ (p. 459) • HD Radio™ sub-channels (p. 461)

460 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

HD Radio™ sub-channels If you tap a sub-channel favorite, it may take HD Radio™ limitations In many cases, a main HD Radio station (FM up to 6 seconds before the channel becomes wavebands only) will also have sub-channels audible. If you tap a station while you are out Limitations offering additional types of programming or of digital range of the transmitter, No • Main channel vs. sub-channels (FM music. reception will be displayed. only): The main channel is the only channel that can receive in hybrid mode (both Sub-channels Related information digital and analog). If a frequency has sub- • HD Radio™ (p. 459) channels, they are broadcast in digital • Activating and deactivating the HD mode only. The main FM channel will be Radio™ (p. 460) displayed as, for example, "WRIF-FM HD1". The sub-FM channels will be dis- • Changing waveband and radio station played as"WRIF-FM HD2", "WRIF-FM (p. 456) HD3", etc. • Searching for a radio station (p. 456) • Reception coverage area: Due to current • HD Radio™ limitations (p. 461) IBOC transmitter power limitations, the reception coverage area in digital mode is somewhat more limited than the station's analog coverage area. Be aware that, like all radio transmission technology, terrain, Example of an HD Radio station with sub-channels time of day, vegetation and buildings can If any sub-channels are available, they will lis- have a positive or negative effect on radio ted below the main channel on the screen. In reception. this example, WILD-FM HD2 is a sub-chan- • Analog to digital/digital to analog nel. blending: Analog to digital blending will Selecting sub-channels occur as the signal strength reaches a preset threshold in the receiver. This will be To listen to a station's sub-channel(s), tap the noticeable in fringe areas (areas with weak station on the screen or press the forward/ reception) and is normal. back arrow keys on the right-side steering wheel keypad or below the screen. Sub-channels can also be saved as radio favorites. }}

461 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

|| NOTE SiriusXM® Satellite radio* ® There may be a noticeable difference in The SiriusXM Satellite system broadcasts sound quality when a change from ana- from of a number of high elevation satellites logue to digital or digital to analogue in geosynchronous orbit. occurs, such as: Listening to satellite radio • Volume increase or decrease The digital signals from the satellites are line- • Equalizer settings, i.e., Bass/ Mid- of-sight, which means that physical obstruc- range/Treble cut or boost tions such as bridges, tunnels, etc, may temporarily interfere with signal reception. • Time alignment (Digital program material in extreme cases can be as much Avoid any obstructions, such as metallic as 8 seconds behind the analogue). objects transported on roof racks or in a ski This will noticeable as a "stuttering" box, or other antennas that may impede sig- effect. nals from the SiriusXM® satellites. The above items are dependant on the Selecting SiriusXM® Satellite radio broadcaster's equipment settings and mode do not indicate a fault in the vehicle's 1. From the center display's Home view, radio receiver or antenna systems. swipe from right to left to come to App view. Related information Home view with SiriusXM® Satellite radio activated • HD Radio™ (p. 459) If there is no subscription activated, tap chan- • Activating and deactivating the HD nel 1, where you will be prompted on the Radio™ (p. 460) screen to phone SiriusXM®. • HD Radio™ sub-channels (p. 461) If a cell phone is paired and connected to the vehicle, you can also subscribe by: 2. Tap the SiriusXM® Satellite radio icon. 1. From Home view, pull down the Settings menu.

462 * Option/accessory. AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

2. Open the settings menu for SiriusXM® Using SiriusXM® Satellite radio* Search Satellite radio. SiriusXM® Satellite radio offers several fea- Tap the magnifying glass to display a screen where you can enter text using the center dis- 3. Tap Unsubscribed Services. tures for finding and listening to music, news, sporting events, etc. being broadcast on sat- play's keyboard or by writing in the free-text 4. ® To call SiriusXM , enter the phone num- ellite radio stations. field to search for e.g., a station number, an ber. They will activate the subscription of artist, song title, etc. your choice. This may take several SiriusXM® Satellite radio functions Channels minutes. Tap to display a complete list of the channels When the subscription has been activated, tap included in your subscription. Tap a channel the SiriusXM® Satellite radio icon to start the name to listen. If a subscription to a channel function and display the channel list included has expired, its name will be grayed-out on the in your subscription. screen. Related information For quick access to a channel that you often • Radio (p. 454) listen to, tap the star to the right of the channel's name. It will then be added to your list of • Using SiriusXM® Satellite radio* (p. 463) favorites. • Settings for SiriusXM® Satellite radio* Favorites (p. 465) Tap to display the channels that you have • ®* added to this list. Tap a channel name to lis- SiriusXM Travel Link (p. 466) ® With SiriusXM Satellite radio activated, tap ten. Library to display a screen offering the following functions: • Search (the magnifying glass icon) • Channels • Favorites • Categories If you have used this view previously, you will be returned to the most recently used one.

}}

* Option/accessory. 463 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

|| Categories/Genres 3. A pop-up window will be displayed show- To buy a song in iTunes, begin by connecting Tap to display the categories available. Tap a ing a list of alerts (nothing will be dis- an iPhone/iPod/iPad to the USB port in the category or genre name to display the chan- played if the selected channel does not tunnel console. The iTunes tagging list will nels that it contains and then tap a channel to support the alert function). automatically be transferred to the device and removed from the list in the vehicle. If the listen. 4. Select one of the alternatives in list (only device is connected when a song is tagged, If you have activated alerts (see the “Alerts” one can be selected at a time). the data will automatically be saved in the section below) and an alert is activated for an 5. The song/artist/team will now be added to device. To purchase the song, consult the artist, song or team, temporary virtual catego- the list of alerts. Favorite sports teams can iTunes support page. ries will also be created and displayed. The also be added to the list using “Game channels currently broadcasting the song, Alert” in the SiriusXM satellite radio set- Related information artist or broadcasting a program with the tings. • SiriusXM® Satellite radio* (p. 462) selected team will be listed in a virtual cate- > When your choice is being broadcast • gory. Entering characters, letters and words by on a channel, you will be informed by a hand in the center display (p. 130) pop-up. EPG (Electronic Program Guide) • Settings for SiriusXM® Satellite radio* On the center display's Home view, tap EPG iTunes tagging (p. 465) for information about e.g., when a program is From the center display's Top view, tap • ® * being broadcast and its name, description, Settings for SiriusXM Satellite radio SiriusXM Settings. Tap the iTunes Tagging artist, etc. If no information is currently availa- (p. 465) menu. Tap the iTunes Tagging box to acti- ble, No information will be displayed. • Connecting a device via the USB port vate/deactivate this function and tap Close to (p. 478) Alerts return to Home view. Tap Tags List to display If this feature has been selected under a list of all tagged songs. SiriusXM Settings, the Alerts button will be If the function is activated, the iTunes tag displayed on the Home view. button will be displayed in Home view. If a To add e.g. an artist's name, song title or a song is played that you would like to buy in sports team to the list of alerts: the iTunes store, tap this button while the song is playing to tag it. If a song with iTunes 1. Tune to a channel that is broadcasting a Tagging information is available, the button song, game, etc., of your choice. will be selectable. Tap the button to tag the 2. Tap the Alerts button. song. If you would like to buy a tagged song via iTunes, Tap the iTunes tag button.

464 * Option/accessory. AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

Settings for SiriusXM® Satellite From the Home screen, tap JUMP to activate team as a favorite. An alert will then be provi- radio* the function. When traffic/weather information ded when information about the team is being There are numerous settings that can be is available from the selected city, the radio broadcast. will automatically tune to the channel provid- made to enhance your SiriusXM® Satellite Tap Confirm below the list to return to the list ing the information. When the information/ radio listening experience. of sports. announcement is finished, the radio will auto- Settings matically return to the channel that you were Tap Back to return to the list of settings or Drag down the top view and tap on Settings previously listening to. Close to return to the main screen. Media SiriusXM. The following alterna- During an announcement, tap JUMP to inter- Unsubscribed Services tives will be displayed: rupt the message and return to the station If you have a SiriusXM® Satellite radio sub- that you were currently listening to. scription, any channels not included in the Alert Notifications subscription will be listed here. Call SiriusXM to subscribe. The phone number Tap the box to activate/deactivate. When acti- ™ will be shown on the screen. If a cell phone is vated, you will be notified if a song, artist, etc. paired and connected to the vehicle, tap the that you have selected is playing. You will be phone number to make the call. asked if you want to listen. Skipped Stations Alert Notifications Sound Tap to display a list of channels that you would Opt to receive an audible alert when one of like to skip (hide). Hide channels from the your selected choices is being played. channel list by tapping the boxes to the right Sort Channels of the screen. Skipped (hidden) channels will Select how to sort your channels list. not be shown in the channel list. However, a iTunes Tagging channel previously selected as a favorite will Traffic Jump Tap to display a menu with the options: still be displayed in the list of favorites, even it Tap to display a list of cities from which you iTunes Tagging and Tags List. With this fea- has been added to the skip list. can choose to get traffic/weather information ture activated, songs can be tagged for later Skipped Categories (or Traffic jump off to deactivate the feature). purchase from the iTunes store. Tap to display a list of categories. Tap a cate- Tap to select a city (JUMP will be displayed gory to skip (hide) it. It will not be displayed in on the Home screen next to Library). Tap Game Alerts the list of categories. Back to return to the list of settings or Close Tap to display a list of sports. to return to the Home screen. Tap a sport to display a list of teams and tap a box on the right side of the screen to select a }}

* Option/accessory. 465 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

|| Related information SiriusXM Travel Link®* 3. Tap Media. • ® * SiriusXM Satellite radio (p. 462) SiriusXM Travel Link is a subscription fea- 4. Press SiriusXM Travel Link and • Using SiriusXM® Satellite radio* (p. 463) ture offered by SiriusXM® satellite radio* that Subscription Status. can provide information about e.g., weather > To subscribe, call the phone number lis- forecasts, weather alerts, service stations, ted on the screen. sports, etc. in the vicinity of the vehicle. Any services not subscribed will be grayed out Starting SiriusXM Travel Link and contain the text Service not subscribed. When the services have been activated (sub- NOTE scribed), tap the one of your choice to start it. SiriusXM Travel Link services are only The following applies for all of the SiriusXM available in vehicles equipped with the Travel Link services: Sensus Navigation system. • Pressing the Back button will take you back to the previous screen From the center display's App view, tap Travel Link to activate the feature. A disclaimer text • Pressing the Close button will take you to will be displayed. Tap OK to display a list of the SiriusXM Travel Link home screen. SiriusXM Travel Link services: • Alerts • Fuel • Sports • Weather • Favorites In order to use one or more of these services, the user has to subscribe to the ones desired. To subscribe to a SiriusXM Travel Link service: 1. Open the center display's Top view. 2. Tap Settings.

466 * Option/accessory. AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

NOTE Related information SiriusXM Travel Link®* - Weather • SiriusXM® Satellite radio* (p. 462) This SiriusXM Travel Link service provides If the Close button is used to return to the • ®* weather-related information near the vehicle, SiriusXM Travel Link home screen, the SiriusXM Travel Link - Fuel (p. 469) at a local ski resort, etc. following applies (the Weather service is • ®* SiriusXM Travel Link - Sports (p. 471) From the SiriusXM Travel Link home screen, used here as an example): • SiriusXM Travel Link®* - Weather (p. 467) to display weather-related information: • If you have already used the Weather • SiriusXM Travel Link®* - Notifications – Tap the Weather button to display this function, tapping Weather again in the (p. 469) screen. SiriusXM Travel Link home screen before using any other SiriusXM At the top of the screen, the following catego- Travel Link service will return you to ries will be displayed: the point where you left the Weather • Search (the magnifying glass icon) service. • • Local If another SiriusXM Travel Link serv- • ice is used (e.g., Fuel, Sports, etc.) Ski condition before you return to the Weather serv- • Areas ice, you will be returned to the default • Favorites Weather view (in this case, Local). Tap the category of your choice. The same principle applies to all of the SiriusXM Travel Link services. Search Tap the magnifying glass icon. If the function Favorites is supported in the current context, a keyboard will appear on the screen. Enter the text of Many SiriusXM Travel Link selections can be your choice and tap Search for detailed infor- saved for easy access as favorites by tapping mation from the SiriusXM Travel Link data- the "star" icon next to the selection where base. applicable. To display a list of your stored selections, tap the Favorites application in the SiriusXM Travel Link home screen.

}}

* Option/accessory. 467 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

|| Local4 5 days Tap the relevant box to the right of the option Information from the closest weather station Tap to see weather information for the coming to select/deselect it. Tap Done to confirm and will be displayed and the following alternatives 5 days. return to the previous screen or Cancel. are available: Tap Back to return to the Local screen or Areas • Map view Close to return to the SiriusXM Travel Link Tap Areas to display a list of areas/locations in • Today home screen. states from the SiriusXM Travel Link database. • 5 days Ski condition Scroll to a state and tap to display: Map view Tap to display a list of ski areas in the vicinity • Weather locations: tap arrow to the right Tap the map to display it in full-screen mode. of the vehicle. Tap a name in the list for infor- to display a list of towns. Scroll to desired Tap Back to return to the original map view. mation such as if the ski area is open/closed, town and tap for detailed weather infor- temperature, wind conditions, snow condi- mation. You can choose Map view, today, Tap Map options to display the following tions, the number of lifts that are in operation, 5 days or Favorites (star) alternatives. etc. • Ski locations: tap arrow at right to dis- • Weather radar • Weather locations play local ski areas. Tap an area for • Storm attributes • Ski location detailed info. • Surface features Tap Map view to display a map and a weather For information about storing a location, state, • Tropical storm tracks legend. town, etc. as a favorite, see the heading "Favorites" in the article "SiriusXM Travel • Tap Map options to display the following Winds Link." alternatives. Tap the relevant box to the right of the option to select/deselect it. Tap Done to confirm and • Weather radar Related information • ®* return to the previous screen or Cancel. • Storm attributes SiriusXM Travel Link (p. 466) • ®* Today • Surface features SiriusXM Travel Link - Fuel (p. 469) Tap to see the current temperature, or the • • SiriusXM Travel Link®* - Sports (p. 471) temperature in 3/6 hours. Tropical storm tracks • ®* • Winds SiriusXM Travel Link - Notifications Tap Back to return to the Local screen or (p. 469) Close to return to the SiriusXM Travel Link home screen.

4 This is the weather default unless another alternative has been selected.

468 * Option/accessory. AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

SiriusXM Travel Link®* - Information about a notification SiriusXM Travel Link®* - Fuel5 Notifications If any notifications have been displayed on the This SiriusXM Travel Link service provides This SiriusXM Travel Link service provides screen, tap one for more detailed information information and guidance to service stations notifications of potential weather problems or (i.e., the location of the weather problem on a near the vehicle providing the type of fuel that other emergency situations in the vicinity of map and a description of the situation). you prefer/require for your vehicle. the vehicle. If a phone number is available in a notification, From the SiriusXM Travel Link home screen, From the SiriusXM Travel Link home screen, a Call button will be displayed. Tap this button to show fuel information: to show notifications: for additional information. – Tap the Fuel button to display the main – Tap the Alerts button to display this Related information fuel screen. screen. • SiriusXM Travel Link®* (p. 466) The following categories are shown: • If any notifications are currently available, • SiriusXM Travel Link®* - Fuel (p. 469) • Search (the magnifying glass icon) a message will appear at the top of the screen. They can also be listed from the • SiriusXM Travel Link®* - Sports (p. 471) • Nearby Settings menu in the center display's Top • SiriusXM Travel Link®* - Weather (p. 467) • Recommended view. • Favorites • If no notifications are available, No active • Brands alerts will be displayed. Tap one of the alternatives to display its Types of notifications screen. To select the types of notifications to be displayed: NOTE 1. From the Alerts screen, tap the Select In each of the categories listed, tapping the alerts button at the bottom of the screen. Select fuel type button near the bottom 2. This displays the types of notifications that of the screen opens a sub-view where you can be displayed. Tap the box to the right can specify the type of fuel preferred/ of each type of notification to select/dese- required (Regular, Midrange, Premium, lect it. Diesel, Electric 120V, etc.) Tap Done to 3. Tap Done when you have made your return to the previous screen. selections. You will return to the Alerts screen.

}}

* Option/accessory. 469 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

|| Search for additional information about using the nav- 2. Tap a brand to display a list of service sta- Tap the magnifying glass icon. If the function igation system. tions affiliated with that brand (BP, Exxon, is supported in the current context, a keyboard etc.). will appear on the screen. Enter the text of Recommended Tap for a list of service stations near the vehi- 3. Tap the name of a service station to dis- your choice and tap Search for detailed infor- play more detailed information. mation if available. cle, displayed according to the price of regular gasoline (unless another grade/type of fuel has In addition to the Select fuel type button at Nearby been selected in Select fuel type) or of sta- the bottom of the screen, tap the Sort button Tap for a list of service stations in the vicinity tions offering the greatest number of available to arrange the list according to Nearest or of the vehicle, with the nearest station at the charging ports for electric vehicles/hybrids. Cheapest/Recommended. Tap Done to top of the list. The station offering the lowest price/most return to the previous screen. available charging ports will be displayed at The following information will be provided the top of the list. Tap the name of a service Related information where available: station to display more detailed information. • SiriusXM Travel Link®* (p. 466) • For vehicles using gasoline, the price • SiriusXM Travel Link®* - Notifications information for regular gasoline (unless Favorites (p. 469) another grade/type of fuel has been Tap for a list of service stations that have been selected in Select fuel type) stored as favorites. Tap the name of a service • SiriusXM Travel Link®* - Sports (p. 471) station to display more detailed information. • For electric vehicles/hybrids, information • SiriusXM Travel Link®* - Weather (p. 467) about charging stations, showing the total In addition to the Select fuel type button at number of charging ports and the number the bottom of the screen, tap the Edit button of ports currently not in use to delete individual stations from the list or tap • The distance to the station Delete to clear the list. Tap Done to return to the previous screen. • A star icon to set the service station as a favorite Brands Tap the name of a service station to display 1. Tap Brands to display a list of service sta- more detailed information. tion brands in the area. For guidance to the service station, tap the Start navigation or Add as waypoint buttons. See the Sensus Navigation* supplement

5 This service is not available in Canada.

470 * Option/accessory. AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

SiriusXM Travel Link®* - Sports 4. Tap one of the divisions to display: Media player This SiriusXM Travel Link service provides • In progress: play-by-play information The media player can play audio from the CD information about sporting events, tourna- about a match/game/tournament cur- player* and from external audio sources con- ments, teams, leagues, etc. rently in progress. Continue tapping to nected via USB port or Bluetooth. It can also From the SiriusXM Travel Link home screen, display. In the detailed view, you can play video format via the USB port. to display sports information: also select a radio station that is cur- When the vehicle is connected to the Internet, it is also possible to listen to web radio, audio – Tap the Sports button to display the main rently broadcasting an ongoing sport- books and to access music services via apps. sports screen. ing event • Headlines for MLB: tap to display A number of sports categories will be listed brief headline information (Football, Baseball, Basketball, etc.) • Scheduled: schedules for coming Tap a sport to select a league in that sport matches, games, etc. (NFL, MLB, etc.) or a sport organization (PGA, LPGA, etc.). • Scores: match/game results The following is an example of the result of The same principle applies to all sports. tapping Baseball: Related information 1. MLB (Major League Baseball) will be dis- • SiriusXM Travel Link®* (p. 466) played. • SiriusXM Travel Link®* - Notifications 2. Tap MLB to display the two leagues in (p. 469) Major League Baseball (American League • SiriusXM Travel Link®* - Fuel (p. 469) The media player is controlled or National League). from the center display. Sev- • SiriusXM Travel Link®* - Weather (p. 467) 3. Tap one of the league names to display eral functions can also be the divisions in the league. controlled using voice commands or the right-side steering wheel keypad. The radio, which is also handled by the media player, is described in a separate section.

}}

* Option/accessory. 471 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

|| Related information Playing media CD* • Playing media (p. 472) The media player is controlled from the cen- 1. Insert a CD. • Controlling and changing media (p. 473) ter display. Several other functions can also 2. Open the CD app from App view. be controlled using the right-side steering • Media searches (p. 474) wheel keypad or by using voice commands. 3. Select the track you would like to play. • Apps (p. 452) > Playback will begin. • The radio can also be controlled in the media Radio (p. 454) player. See the section describing the radio. USB flash drive • CD player* (p. 476) 1. Inset a USB flash drive. Starting a media source • Video (p. 476) 2. Open the USB app from App view. • Streaming media via Bluetooth® (p. 477) 3. Select the track you would like to play. • Playing media via the USB port (p. 478) > Playback will begin. • Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 496) MP3 player and iPod®

NOTE To start playback from an iPod, the iPod app must be used (not USB). When an iPod is used as source, the car's audio and media system has a menu structure similar to the iPod player's own menu structure.

1. Connect a media source. 2. Start playback in the connected media source. 3. Open the app (iPod, USB) from App view. > Playback will begin. App view. (Generic illustration; basic apps vary depending on market and model).

472 * Option/accessory. AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

Bluetooth-connected device Related information Controlling and changing media 1. Activate Bluetooth in the media source. • Handling the App menu in the instrument Media playback can be controlled using voice panel (p. 106) 2. Connect a media source. commands, the steering wheel keypad or the • Radio (p. 454) center display. 3. Start playback in the connected media The media player can be con- • Controlling and changing media (p. 473) source. trolled using voice com- • 4. Open the Bluetooth app from App view. Connecting a device via the USB port mands, the right-side steer- (p. 478) > Playback will begin. ing wheel keypad or the cen- • Connecting a device via Bluetooth® ter display. Media with Internet connection (p. 478) Medial playback from apps with Internet con- • nection: Download apps (p. 453) • Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 496) 1. Connect the vehicle to the Internet. • Video (p. 476) 2. Open the app from the App view. • Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 480) > Playback will begin. • Android Auto* (p. 484) Read the separate section on how to download apps. • Voice control for radio and media (p. 149) Video • Compatible file formats for media 1. Connect a media source. (p. 479) 2. Open the USB app from App view. 3. Tap the title you would like to play. Volume - turn the knob under the center dis- > Playback will begin. play or tap on the right-side steering Apple CarPlay wheel keypad to raise or lower the volume. CarPlay is described in a separate section. Play/pause - tap the image for the track you Android Auto would like to play, or press the button below Android Auto is described in a separate sec- the center display or on the right-side tion. steering wheel keypad.

}}

* Option/accessory. 473 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

|| Changing track/song - tap the desired track in Similar - tap the button to Media searches the center display, or press or below use Gracenote to search for Searches can be performed to locate a spe- the center display or on the right-side steering similar music on the USB cific artist, composer, song title, album, wheel keypad. device and create a playlist video, audio book or playlist. If the vehicle is from the music found. The Rewinding/fast-forwarding - tap the time axis connected to the Internet, it is also possible playlist can contain up to 50 to search for podcasts (online digital media). in the center display and drag it sideways, or tracks. press and hold or below the center display or on the right-side steering wheel Change device - tap the but- keypad. ton to toggle between USB devices when more than one Changing media source - select from among is connected. previous sources in the app, tap the desired app in App view or use the right-side steering wheel keypad to select the app in the app menu . Related information • Media player (p. 471) Library - tap the button to play from the library. • Media searches (p. 474) • Sound settings (p. 450) • Apps (p. 452) 1. Tap . • Gracenote® (p. 475) > Search view will displayed and the keyboard will open. • Voice control for radio and media (p. 149) Shuffle - tap the button to 2. Enter a search word/phrase. play tracks in a random order. 3. Tap Search. > A search will be performed on connected devices and the results will be displayed by category. Swipe the screen horizontally to display each category separately.

474 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

Related information Gracenote® Updating Gracenote • Media player (p. 471) Gracenote identifies artists, albums, tracks The contents of the Gracenote database are • Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 496) and any associated images that can be dis- continuously updated. Download the latest update to take advantage of improvements. • Playing media (p. 472) played during playback. Gracenote MusicID® is a standard for music See support.volvocars.com for information • Entering characters, letters and words by recognition. It can identify and analyze the and downloads. hand in the center display (p. 130) metadata of music files and present information about the music. Metadata from different Related information sources may sometimes be inconsistent or • Playing media (p. 472) insufficient. • License agreement for audio and media Because Gracenote supports phonetic pro- (p. 505) cessing of artist name, album titles and gen- • Voice control for radio and media (p. 149) res, voice commands can be used to control music playback.

1. Tap Settings in the Top view. 2. Tap Media Gracenote®. 3. Choose settings for Gracenote data: • Gracenote® Online Search - search Gracenote's online database for currently playing media. • Gracenote® Multiple Results - select how Gracenote data should be displayed if there are multiple search results. 1 - the file's original data will be used. 2 - Gracenote data will be used. 3 - Gracenote or original data can be selected. • None - no result will be displayed.

* Option/accessory. 475 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

CD player* Video Playing video The media player can play CDs with compati- The media player can play videos from USB- The USB app in App view is used to play vid- ble audio files. connected devices. eos. Video is not available when the vehicle is mov- 1. Connecting media source (USB device). ing; only audio will be played. Video will 2. Open the USB app from App view. resume when the vehicle is stationary. 3. Tap the title you would like to play. Information on compatible media formats is provided in a separate section. > Playback will begin. If the USB device also contains music and Related information • audio tracks, it may be difficult to locate the Playing video (p. 476) video files. To find them, go to Library and • Playing DivX® (p. 477) select the video tab. • Video settings (p. 477) Related information • Compatible file formats for media • Video (p. 476) (p. 479) Disc slot. • Playing DivX® (p. 477) Eject button. • Video settings (p. 477) • Compatible file formats for media Related information (p. 479) • Playing media (p. 472) • Voice control for radio and media (p. 149) • Compatible file formats for media (p. 479)

476 * Option/accessory. AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

Playing DivX® Video settings Streaming media via Bluetooth® The DivX Certified® device must be registered You can change some language settings for The vehicle's media player is equipped with to play purchased DivX video-on-demand video playback. Bluetooth and can play audio files from (VOD) movies. Audio Language and Subtitle Language can Bluetooth-enabled external devices such as be adjusted with the video player in full-screen cellular phones and tablets. 1. Tap Settings in the Top view. mode or by opening Top view and tapping In order for the media player to be able to 2. Tap Video DivX® VOD to get a regis- Settings Media Video. wirelessly play audio files from an external tration code. device, the device must be connected to the Related information vehicle via Bluetooth. 3. Go to vod.divx.com for more information • Video (p. 476) and to complete the registration process. Related information • Connecting a device via Bluetooth® Related information (p. 478) • Video (p. 476) • Connecting a phone to the car via Blue- • Playing video (p. 476) tooth for the first time (p. 488) • Video settings (p. 477) • Playing media (p. 472) • Compatible file formats for media (p. 479) • Compatible file formats for media (p. 479)

477 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

Connecting a device via Bluetooth® Playing media via the USB port Connecting a device via the USB Connect a Bluetooth® device to the vehicle to External audio sources, such as an iPod® or port wirelessly play media and give the vehicle an MP3 player, can be connected to the audio External audio sources, such as an iPod® or Internet connection if it is available. system via the vehicle's USB port. MP3 player, can be connected to the audio Many cellular phones on the market currently Devices with rechargeable batteries can be system via any of the vehicle's USB ports. offer wireless Bluetooth® technology, but not charged when they are connected via the USB If the vehicle has two USB ports, the phone all phones are fully compatible with the vehi- port and the ignition is in mode I, II or the must be connected to the port with the white cle. engine is running. frame to use Apple CarPlay* or Android Auto*. The procedure for connecting a media device The content on the external source can be is the same as for connecting a cellular phone read faster if it only contains data of a compat- to the vehicle via Bluetooth®. ible format. Video files can also be played via the USB port. Related information Some MP3 players have their own file system • ® Streaming media via Bluetooth (p. 477) that the vehicle has support for. • Connecting a phone to the car via Blue- tooth for the first time (p. 488) Related information • Connecting a device via the USB port • Playing media (p. 472) (p. 478) • Playing media (p. 472) • Video (p. 476) USB ports (type A) in the tunnel console. Route the • Ignition modes (p. 385) cable forward to help avoid pinching when the cover is closed. • Technical specifications for USB devices (p. 479) Related information • Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 480) • Playing media (p. 472) • Android Auto* (p. 484) • Playing media via the USB port (p. 478) • Media player (p. 471) • Technical specifications for USB devices (p. 479)

478 * Option/accessory. AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

• Technical specifications for USB devices Technical specifications for USB Compatible file formats for media (p. 479) devices In order to play media, the following file for- • Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 480) For the contents of USB devices to be read, mats must be used. • Android Auto* (p. 484) the following specifications must be met. Any folder structures will not be shown in the Audio files center display during playback. For- File extension Codec mat Max. number MP3 .mp3 MPEG1 Layer III, Files 15 000 MPEG2 Layer III, MP3 Pro (mp3 Folders 1 000 compatible), Folder levels 8 MP3 HD (mp3 compatible) Playlists 100 AAC .m4a, .m4b, .aac AAC LC Tracks in a playlist 1 000 (MPEG-4 part III Audio), HE-AAC Subfolders No limit (aacPlus v1/v2) Technical specifications for the USB-A WMA .wma WMA8/9, connector WMA9/10 Pro • Type A port WAV .wav LPCM • Version 2.0 FLAC .flac FLAC • Voltage 5 V • Max. current 2.1 A Video files Related information Format File extension • Playing media via the USB port (p. 478) MP4 .mp4, .m4v MPEG-PS .mpg, .mp2, .mpeg, .m1v

}}

* Option/accessory. 479 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

|| Format File extension Audio codec MP3, AC3 Apple® CarPlay®* With CarPlay, you can listen to music, make AVI .avi Subtitles XSUB phone calls, get driving instructions, send/ AVI (DivX) .avi, .divx Special func- Multiple subtitles, multi- receive messages and use Siri, all while tions ple audio, resume play remaining focused on driving. ASF .asf, .wmv CarPlay works with select Reference Meets all requirements of iOS devices. If the car does Subtitles the DivX Home Theater not already support CarPlay, profile. Visit divx.com for this can be retrofitted. Con- Format File extension more information and tact a Volvo retailer to install SubViewer .sub software tools to convert CarPlay. your files into DivX Home SubRip .srt Theater video. Information about supported apps and compatible iOS devices are available on the Apple SSA .ssa Related information website: www.apple.com/ios/carplay/. Using DivX® • Media player (p. 471) apps that are not compatible with CarPlay may sometimes mean that the connection DivX-certified devices have been tested for • Video (p. 476) between the device and the vehicle is broken. high-quality DivX (.divx, .avi) video playback. • Playing DivX® (p. 477) Please note that Volvo is not responsible for When you see the DivX logo, you have the the content of CarPlay. freedom to play your favorite DivX videos. When using map navigation via CarPlay, guid- Profile DivX Home Theater ance will only be shown on the center display and not in the instrument panel or head-up Video codec DivX, MPEG-4 display. Resolution 720x576 When navigation is started through Apple CarPlay, any current route guidance from the Audio speed 4.8Mbps vehicle's own systems will be discontinued. (bit rate) CarPlay apps can be controlled from the cen- Frame rate 30 fps ter display, an iOS device or with the right- File extension .divx, .avi side steering wheel keypad (for certain functions). The apps can also be voice-controlled Max. file size 4 GB

480 * Option/accessory. AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET using Siri. Press and hold the button on Using Apple® CarPlay®* 2. Read the terms and conditions and then the steering wheel to start voice control with To use CarPlay, the Siri voice control must be tap Accept to connect. Siri. Press briefly to activate the vehicle's own activated in your iOS device. The device must > The CarPlay tile will open and compati- voice control system. If Siri cuts off too soon, also have an Internet connection via Wi-Fi or ble apps will be displayed. 6 press and hold the button on the steer- a mobile network for all functions to work. 3. Tap the desired app. ing wheel. Connecting an iOS device and starting > The app will start up. By using Apple CarPlay you acknowledge CarPlay the following: Apple CarPlay is a service provided by Apple Inc. under its terms and NOTE conditions. Volvo Cars is thus not responsible for Apple CarPlay or its CarPlay can only be used if Bluetooth is features/applications. When using Apple disabled. A cell phone or media player con- CarPlay, certain information from your car nected to the vehicle via Bluetooth will (including its position) is transferred to therefore not be available when CarPlay is your iPhone. In relation to Volvo Cars, you active. An alternative source must be used are fully responsible for your and any to provide an Internet connection for the others person’s use of Apple CarPlay. vehicle's apps. Use Wi-Fi or the vehicle's integrated modem. Related information • ® ®* Using Apple CarPlay (p. 481) To start CarPlay from an iOS device that has • Settings for Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 483) not previously been connected: • Voice Control (p. 146) 1. Connect an iOS device that supports • Resetting center display settings (p. 135) CarPlay to the USB port. If there are two USB ports, use the one with the white frame.

6 Apple and CarPlay are registered trademarks of Apple Inc. }}

* Option/accessory. 481 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

|| Starting CarPlay Switching connection between • Connecting the vehicle to the Internet via To start CarPlay from an iOS device that has CarPlay and iPod a phone (Wi-Fi) (p. 497) previously been connected: CarPlay to iPod • Connecting the vehicle to the Internet via 1. Connect an iOS device to the USB port. If 1. Tap Settings in the Top view. vehicle modem (SIM card) (p. 498) there are two USB ports, use the one with • Voice Control (p. 146) the white frame. 2. Proceed to Communication Apple CarPlay. > If the auto start setting is selected – the name of the device will be dis- 3. Uncheck the box for the iOS device that played. The CarPlay tile will open auto- should no longer start CarPlay automati- matically when Home view is displayed cally when the USB cable is connected. when the iOS device is connected. 4. Remove and then reinsert the iOS device 2. If the CarPlay tile does not open automati- into the USB port. cally, tap the name of the device. The 5. Open the iPod app from App view. CarPlay tile will open and compatible apps will be displayed. iPod to CarPlay 1. Tap Apple CarPlay in App view. 3. If any other app is active in the same tile, tap Apple CarPlay in App view. 2. Read the information in the pop-up window and then tap OK. > The CarPlay tile will open and compatible apps will be displayed. 3. Remove and then reinsert the iOS device into the USB port. 4. Tap the desired app. > The Apple CarPlay tile will open and > The app will start up. compatible apps will be displayed7. CarPlay will run in the background if another app is started, or is already active when the Related information device is connected, in the same view. To dis- • Connecting a device via the USB port play CarPlay in the tile, tap the CarPlay icon in (p. 478) App view. • Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 480) • Settings for Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 483)

7 Apple, CarPlay, iPhone and iPod are registered trademarks of Apple Inc.

482 * Option/accessory. AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

Settings for Apple® CarPlay®* 2. Tap Sound System Volumes to Tips for using Apple® CarPlay®* Settings for an iOS device connected through change the settings for the following: Here are some useful tips for when you use 8 CarPlay . • Voice Control CarPlay®. • Update your iOS device with the latest • Navi Voice Guidance Automatic start version of the iOS operating system and 1. Tap Settings in the Top view. • Phone Ringtone ensure that the apps have been updated. • 2. Tap Communication Apple CarPlay Related information In the event of a problem with CarPlay, unplug the iOS device from the USB port and select the desired setting: • Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 480) and then plug it in again. Otherwise, try to • Check the box - CarPlay will start auto- ® ® • Using Apple CarPlay * (p. 481) close the app on the device that is not matically when the USB cable is con- • Resetting center display settings (p. 135) working and then restart the app, or try nected. closing all apps and restart your device. • Uncheck the box - CarPlay will not start • If the apps do not appear when CarPlay automatically when the USB cable is starts (black screen), try minimizing and connected. expanding the tile for CarPlay. A maximum of 20 iOS devices can be stored • Using apps that are not compatible with in the list, which may be worth noting if many CarPlay may sometimes cause the con- people share the vehicle, e.g. in a car pool. nection between the iOS device and the When the list is full and a new device is con- vehicle to be broken. Information about nected, the oldest one will be deleted. supported apps and compatible devices To delete the list, the settings must be rest in can be found on Apple's website. You can the center display (factory reset). also search for CarPlay in the App Store to find information about apps that are com- System Volumes patible with CarPlay in your market. 1. Tap Settings in the Top view. • You can use Siri to write or dictate messages or have them read aloud. Messages are read aloud and dictated in the language selected in the Siri settings. When you write/dictate messages, no text will be shown in the vehicle's center display,

8 Apple and CarPlay are registered trademarks of Apple Inc. }}

* Option/accessory. 483 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

* || but the text will be shown in your iOS Android Auto NOTE device. When using Siri, note that it is the Android Auto lets you listen to music, make When a device is connected to Android phone's microphones that are used and calls, get driving directions and use apps cus- Auto, it is possible to steam to another the quality therefore depends on the tomized for your vehicle from an Android media player via Bluetooth. Bluetooth is phone's location. device. Android Auto can be used with active while Android Auto is in use. • If the device is connected to the vehicle selected Android devices. through Bluetooth, the connection will be broken when CarPlay is used. Resume When using navigation guidance provided by Internet connection in the vehicle by teth- Android Auto, navigation will only be shown ering using the device's Wi-Fi hotspot. on the center display and not in the instrument panel or head-up display. • Some of CarPlay's functions (such as voice calls and messages) interrupt the Android Auto can be controlled from the cen- use of the vehicle's own functions and ter display, with the right-side steering wheel CarPlay will instead be automatically dis- keypad or by using voice commands. Press played. If you do not wish this to happen, and hold the button on the steering wheel deselect display of the corresponding keypad to start Google Assistant and press function in CarPlay under the phone's briefly to deactivate it. notification settings. By using Android Auto, you acknowledge • CarPlay only works with iPhone9. For information on supported apps and com- the following: Android Auto is a service patible Android devices, please go to provided by Google Inc. under its terms NOTE www.android.com/auto/. For third-party apps, and conditions. Volvo Cars is not see Google Play. Please note that Volvo is not responsible for Android Auto or its Availability and functionality can vary responsible for the content of Android Auto. depending on market. features or applications. When you use Android Auto is started from App view. After Android Auto, your car transfers certain Android Auto has been initially started, the app information (including its location) to your Related information will start automatically the next time the connected Android phone. You are fully • Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 480) device is connected. The automatic start set- responsible for your and any other • Connecting the vehicle to the Internet via ting can be deactivated in Settings. person’s use of Android Auto. a phone (Wi-Fi) (p. 497)

9 Apple, CarPlay and iPhone are registered trademarks owned by Apple Inc.

484 * Option/accessory. AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

Related information Using Android Auto* From a previously connected Android • Using Android Auto* (p. 485) To use the Android Auto app, the app must device • Settings for Android Auto* (p. 486) be installed on the Android device and the 1. Connect the device to the USB port with device must be connected to the vehicle's the white frame. USB port. > If the auto start setting is selected - NOTE the name of the device will be displayed. For installation of Android Auto to be possible, the vehicle must be equipped with 2. Tap the name of the device – the two USB ports (USB hub)*. If the car only Android Auto tile will open and compatible has one USB port then it is not possible to apps will be displayed. use Android Auto. 3. If the automatic start setting is not activated - open the Android Auto app from Connecting an Android device for the first App view. time > The Android Auto tile will open and 1. Connect the Android device to the USB compatible apps will be displayed. port with the white frame. 4. Tap the desired app. 2. Read the information in the pop-up win- > The app will start up. dow and then tap OK. Android Auto will run in the background if 3. Tap Android Auto in App view. another app is started in the same tile. To dis- 4. Read the terms and conditions and then play Android Auto in the tile, tap the tap Accept to connect. Android Auto icon in App view. > The Android Auto tile will open and Related information compatible apps will be displayed. • Android Auto* (p. 484) 5. Tap the desired app. • Settings for Android Auto* (p. 486) > The app will start up. • Connecting a device via the USB port (p. 478) • Voice Control (p. 146)

* Option/accessory. 485 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

Settings for Android Auto* Related information Tips for using Android Auto* Settings for Android devices initially con- • Android Auto* (p. 484) Here are some useful tips for when you use nected with Android Auto. • Using Android Auto* (p. 485) Android Auto. • Ensure that your apps are updated. Automatic start • Resetting center display settings (p. 135) • When starting the vehicle, wait until the 1. Tap Settings in the Top view. center display has started, connect the 2. Tap Communication Android Auto device and then open Android Auto from and select setting: the app view. • Check the box - Android Auto will start • In the event of problems with Android automatically when the USB cable is Auto, unplug your Android device from the connected. USB port and then plug it in again. Other- wise, try closing the app on the device and • Uncheck the box - Android Auto will not then restarting the app. start automatically when the USB cable is connected. • When a device is connected to Android Auto it is still possible to play media via A maximum of 20 Android devices can be Bluetooth to another media player. The stored in the list. When the list is full and a Bluetooth function is on when Android new device is connected, the oldest one will Auto is used. be deleted. • If the Android Auto icon is grayed out, it A factory reset must be performed to delete means that a device is no longer con- the list. nected. When you connect your device, the icon will light up. If there is no icon at System Volumes all, the vehicle does not support connect- 1. Tap Settings in the Top view. ing a device for this purpose. 2. Tap Sound System Volumes to • If the device is connected to the vehicle change the settings for the following: through Bluetooth, the connection will be • Voice Control broken when Android Auto is used. Resume Internet connection in the vehicle • Navi Voice Guidance • Phone Ringtone

486 * Option/accessory. AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

by tethering using the device's Wi-Fi hot- Phone Overview spot. A phone equipped with Bluetooth can be • A maximum of 20 Android devices can be wirelessly connected to the vehicle's inte- stored at the same time, which may be grated hands-free system. worth noting if many people share the The audio and media system offers hands-free vehicle, e.g. in a car pool. When the list is functionality for remotely controlling a number full and a new device is connected, the of the phone's features. The phone's inte- oldest one will be deleted. A factory reset grated controls can also be used, even when it must be performed to delete the list. is connected to the vehicle. Related information When the phone has been paired and con- • Android Auto* (p. 484) nected to the vehicle, it can be used as an Internet connection or to make or receive • Connecting the vehicle to the Internet via calls, send or receive text messages or wire- a phone (Wi-Fi) (p. 497) lessly play music. Microphone. The phone is controlled from the center dis- Phone. play, and the App menu (accessed using the right-side steering wheel keypad) and voice Phone handling in the center display. commands can also be used to control certain Keypad for controlling phone functions functions. shown in the center display and voice commands. Instrument panel.

Related information • Handling phone calls (p. 491) • Managing the phone book (p. 494) • Handling text messages (p. 492) • Connecting a phone to the car via Blue- tooth for the first time (p. 488)

}}

* Option/accessory. 487 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

• Connecting a phone to the car via Blue- Connecting a phone to the car via Option 1 - searching for the phone tooth automatically (p. 490) Bluetooth for the first time from the vehicle • Connecting a phone to the car via Blue- Pair a Bluetooth-enabled phone to the vehicle 1. Make the phone discoverable/visible using tooth manually (p. 490) to make calls, send/receive text messages its Bluetooth function. • Disconnecting a Bluetooth-connected and wirelessly play media from the vehicle, or 2. Open the phone tile in the center display. phone (p. 490) connect the vehicle to the Internet. • If no phone has been paired to the vehi- • Two Bluetooth devices can be connected at Switch between phones connected via the same time, but in that case, only one will cle, tap Add phone. Bluetooth (p. 491) be used for wireless playback. The most • If a phone has been paired to the vehi- • Disconnecting Bluetooth-connected devi- recently paired phone will be automatically cle, tap Change . Tap Add phone in ces (p. 491) connected to make calls, send/receive text the pop-up window. messages, play media or use as an Internet • Phone settings (p. 494) > A list of available Bluetooth devices will connection. It is possible to change what the • Voice Control (p. 146) be displayed. The list will be updated as phone is used for under Bluetooth Devices new devices are discovered. • Handling the App menu in the instrument via the settings menu in the center display's panel (p. 106) Top view. The cellular phone must be equip- 3. Tap the name of the phone you would like • Sound settings (p. 450) ped with Bluetooth and support tethering. to connect. • Connecting the vehicle to the Internet via After the device has been connected/regis- 4. Make sure that the code displayed in the a Bluetooth-connected phone (p. 497) tered for the first time via Bluetooth, the vehicle matches the one in the phone. If it device no longer needs to be visible/searcha- does, confirm the code in both places. ble. It just needs to have Bluetooth activated. 5. In the phone, accept or cancel the options A maximum of 20 paired Bluetooth devices for selecting the phone's contacts and text can be stored in the vehicle. messages. There are two ways to pair a phone to the vehicle. Searching for the phone from the vehi- NOTE cle or searching for the vehicle from the • phone. The message function must be activated in certain phones. • Not all cell phones are fully compatible and may not be able to display contacts and messages in the vehicle.

488 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

• Option 2 - searching for the vehicle NOTE Disconnecting Bluetooth-connected devi- from the phone ces (p. 491) • The message function must be acti- 1. Open the phone tile in the center display. • Settings for Bluetooth devices (p. 495) vated in certain phones. • If no phone has been paired to the vehi- • Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 496) • Not all cell phones are fully compatible cle, tap Add phone Make vehicle and may not be able to display con- • Connecting the vehicle to the Internet via discoverable. tacts and messages in the vehicle. a Bluetooth-connected phone (p. 497) • If a phone has been paired to the vehi- Change Add phone cle, tap . Tap NOTE Make vehicle discoverable in the pop-up window. If the phone's operating system is being updated, it is possible that the connection 2. Activate Bluetooth in the phone. will be interrupted. Delete the phone from 3. Search in the phone for Bluetooth devices. the car and reconnect. > A list of available Bluetooth devices will be displayed. Compatible phones Many cellular phones on the market currently 4. Select the vehicle's name from the list of offer wireless Bluetooth technology, but not devices in the phone. all phones are fully compatible with the vehi- 5. A pop-up window for the connection is cle. shown in the car. Confirm the connection. Related information 6. Make sure that the code displayed in the • Phone (p. 487) vehicle matches the one shown in the external device. If it does, confirm the • Connecting a phone to the car via Blue- code in both places. tooth automatically (p. 490) • 7. In the phone, accept or cancel the options Connecting a phone to the car via Blue- for selecting the phone's contacts and text tooth manually (p. 490) messages. • Disconnecting a Bluetooth-connected phone (p. 490) • Switch between phones connected via Bluetooth (p. 491)

* Option/accessory. 489 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

Connecting a phone to the car via Connecting a phone to the car via Disconnecting a Bluetooth- Bluetooth automatically Bluetooth manually connected phone A phone can be automatically connected to A phone can be manually connected to the A Bluetooth-connected phone can be discon- the vehicle via Bluetooth. The phone must vehicle via Bluetooth. The phone must have nected from the vehicle. have first been paired with the vehicle. first been paired with the vehicle. • When the phone is out of range of the Only the two most recently connected phones 1. Activate Bluetooth in the phone. vehicle, it will be automatically discon- can be connected automatically. nected. If a call is in progress when the 2. Open the phone tile. phone is disconnected from the vehicle, 1. Activate Bluetooth in the phone before > A list of available phones will be dis- the call will be transferred from the vehi- turning the vehicle's ignition to mode I. played. cle's speakers and microphone to the cel- 2. Turn the ignition to I or higher. 3. Tap the name of the phone you would like lular phone. > The phone will be connected. to connect. • The phone can also be disconnected by > The phone will be connected. manually deactivating Bluetooth. Related information • Phone (p. 487) Related information Related information • Connecting a phone to the car via Blue- • Phone (p. 487) • Phone (p. 487) tooth for the first time (p. 488) • Connecting a phone to the car via Blue- • Phone settings (p. 494) • Connecting a phone to the car via Blue- tooth for the first time (p. 488) • Switch between phones connected via tooth manually (p. 490) • Connecting a phone to the car via Blue- Bluetooth (p. 491) • Disconnecting a Bluetooth-connected tooth automatically (p. 490) • Disconnecting Bluetooth-connected devi- phone (p. 490) • Disconnecting a Bluetooth-connected ces (p. 491) • Switch between phones connected via phone (p. 490) • Settings for Bluetooth devices (p. 495) Bluetooth (p. 491) • Switch between phones connected via • Disconnecting Bluetooth-connected devi- Bluetooth (p. 491) ces (p. 491) • Disconnecting Bluetooth-connected devi- • Settings for Bluetooth devices (p. 495) ces (p. 491) • Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 496) • Settings for Bluetooth devices (p. 495) • Connecting the vehicle to the Internet via • Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 496) a Bluetooth-connected phone (p. 497) • Connecting the vehicle to the Internet via • Ignition modes (p. 385) a Bluetooth-connected phone (p. 497)

490 * Option/accessory. AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

Switch between phones Disconnecting Bluetooth- Handling phone calls connected via Bluetooth connected devices Handling phone calls in the vehicle for a It is possible to switch between Bluetooth- Phones or other devices in the list of regis- Bluetooth-connected cellular phone. connected phones. tered Bluetooth devices can be removed. 1. Open the phone tile. 1. Tap Settings in the Top view.

2. Tap Change or pull down Top view 2. Tap Communication Bluetooth and tap Settings Communication Devices. Bluetooth Devices Add device. > A list of registered Bluetooth devices is > A list of available Bluetooth devices will displayed. be displayed. 3. Tap the name of the device you would like 3. Tap the name of the phone you would like to remove. to connect. 4. Tap Remove device and confirm. Related information > The device is no longer registered in the vehicle. • Phone (p. 487) Generic illustration. • Connecting a phone to the car via Blue- Related information Making calls tooth for the first time (p. 488) • Phone (p. 487) 1. Open the phone tile. • Settings for Bluetooth devices (p. 495) • Connecting a phone to the car via Blue- 2. Initiate a call by selecting the phone num- • Disconnecting a Bluetooth-connected tooth for the first time (p. 488) ber from the recent calls list, entering the phone (p. 490) • Disconnecting a Bluetooth-connected number on the keypad or selecting a number from the phone book (list of contacts). • Disconnecting Bluetooth-connected devi- phone (p. 490) You can search or scroll to find a contact ces (p. 491) • Switch between phones connected via Bluetooth (p. 491) in the phone book. Tap in the phone book to add a contact to Favorites. • Settings for Bluetooth devices (p. 495) 3. Tap to make a call. 4. Tap to end the call. Calls can also be made from the list of recent calls using the app menu, which can be }}

491 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

10 || opened using the button on the right-side 2. Tap to end the call. Handling text messages steering wheel keypad. A Bluetooth-connected cellular phone's text Privacy messages can be handled in the vehicle. Making multiple calls – While a call is in progress, tap Privacy While the call is in progress: Text message functionality needs to be acti- and select setting: vated in certain phones. Not all phones are 1. Tap Add call. • Switch to mobile phone - the hands- fully compatible and therefore cannot display 2. Select from the list of recent calls, favor- free function will be disabled and the contacts and messages in the vehicle. ites or contacts. call will proceed on the cellular phone. • Handling text messages in the center 3. Tap an item/row in the list of recent calls Driver focused - the microphone in the display ceiling liner on the passenger side will or for the contact in the phone book. Text messages are only shown in the center be muted and the call will proceed display if the relevant setting is made. 4. Tap Swap call to switch between calls. using the vehicle's hands-free function. Tap Messages in App view 5. Tap to end the current call. Related information to handle text messages in Group (conference) calls • Phone (p. 487) the center display. While multiple calls are in progress: • Connecting a phone to the car via Blue- 1. Tap Join calls to merge ongoing calls. tooth for the first time (p. 488) • Voice control for cellular phones (p. 149) 2. Tap to end the call. • Handling the App menu in the instrument NOTE Incoming calls panel (p. 106) Incoming phone calls will be shown on the • Entering characters, letters and words by When the vehicle is moving: instrument panel and in the center display. hand in the center display (p. 130) • Only one row of the message will be Manage the calls using the right-side steering • Managing the phone book (p. 494) displayed. Tap Read out to have the wheel keypad or the center display. entire message read aloud. • Handling text messages (p. 492) 1. Tap Answer/Reject. • The center display's keyboard cannot • Sound settings (p. 450) be used. 2. Tap to end the call. Incoming calls while another call is in progress 1. Tap Answer/Reject.

492 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

Reading text messages in the center Dictating replies in the instrument panel Text message settings display aloud After the test message has been read aloud, it Settings for handling text messages received Tap the icon to have the message is possible to answer briefly with dictation if through a connected phone can be personal- read aloud. the vehicle has an Internet connection. ized. – Tap Answer using the steering wheel key- 1. Tap Settings in the Top view. pad. A dictation dialog will start. Sending text messages in the center 2. Tap Communication Text Messages display11 Message alert and select settings: 1. It is possible to reply to text messages or Alerts can be activated and deactivated in the • Notification in center display - dis- create a new message. text message settings. play text message notifications in the • To reply to a text message - tap the center display's status bar. Related information • name of the contact who sent the mes- • Phone (p. 487) Notification in driver display - dis- sage and then tap Answer. • plays notifications in the driver's display • Text message settings (p. 493) and incoming messages can be man- To create a new message - tap Create • new. Select a contact or enter a phone Phone settings (p. 494) aged using the steering wheel's right- number. • Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 496) hand keypad. • Text message tone - select tone for 2. Write the message. • Voice control for cellular phones (p. 149) • incoming text messages. 3. Tap Send. Entering characters, letters and words by hand in the center display (p. 130) Related information Handling test messages in the • Connecting a phone to the car via Blue- • Phone (p. 487) instrument panel tooth for the first time (p. 488) • Connecting a phone to the car via Blue- Text messages are only shown in the instru- • Terms of use and data sharing (p. 502) tooth for the first time (p. 488) ment panel if the relevant setting is made. • Handling text messages (p. 492) Reading new text messages in the • Phone settings (p. 494) instrument panel aloud – To have the message read aloud, select Read out using the steering wheel keypad.

10 Only applies to certain markets. Contact a Volvo retailer for more information. 11 Not all phones can send messages via the vehicle.

* Option/accessory. 493 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

Managing the phone book first name or last name. This is adjusted in Phone settings When a phone is connected with Bluetooth your cellular phone settings. When the phone is connected to the car, the to the vehicle, contacts can be managed Related information following settings can be made: directly in the center display. 1. Tap Settings in the Top view. • Phone (p. 487) Up to 3,000 contacts can be displayed from the phone selected in the center display. • Phone settings (p. 494) 2. Tap Communication Phone and select settings: • Voice control for cellular phones (p. 149) • • Entering characters, letters and words by Ringtones – select a ring tone. Ring hand in the center display (p. 130) tones from the cellular phone or the • vehicle can be used. Some phones are Connecting a phone to the car via Blue- not fully compatible and it may not be tooth for the first time (p. 488) possible to use the phone's ring tones in the vehicle. • Sort Order - select sort order in the contact list. Call notifications in head up display* 1. Tap Settings in the center display's Top view. Scroll by letter or to find contacts. Only letters matching existing contacts in 2. Tap My Car Displays Head-Up the phone book will be shown. Display Options. Search contacts - tap to search by 3. Select Show Phone. phone number or name in the phone book. Related information Favorites - tap to add/remove a con- • Phone (p. 487) tact from the list of favorites. • Text message settings (p. 493) Sorting • Settings for Bluetooth devices (p. 495) The phone book is sorted in alphabetical order • Connecting a phone to the car via Blue- and special characters and numbers are sor- tooth for the first time (p. 488) ted under . The list can be sorted by either

494 * Option/accessory. AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

• Head-up display* (p. 143) Settings for Bluetooth devices This device complies with Industry Canada • Sound settings (p. 450) Settings for Bluetooth-connected devices. license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is 1. Tap Settings in the Top view. subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and 2. Tap Communication Bluetooth Devices and select settings: (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause unde- • Add device - start the procedure for pair- sired operation of the device. ing a new device. • Previously paired devices - lists regis- Related information tered/paired devices. • Phone (p. 487) • Remove device - remove a connected • Phone settings (p. 494) device. • Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 496) • Allowed services for this device - select • Connecting a phone to the car via Blue- what the device will be used for: making tooth for the first time (p. 488) calls, sending/receiving messages, streaming media, Internet connection. • Internet connection connect the vehicle to the Internet using the device's Bluetooth connection.

Bluetooth® declaration of conformity USA FCC CAUTION Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. This transmitter must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. Canada

* Option/accessory. 495 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

* Internet-connected vehicle NOTE Related information When the vehicle is connected to the Inter- • Symbols in the center display status bar Data (data traffic) is transfered when using net, it is possible to use web radio and music (p. 125) the internet, which can incur additional services via apps, download software and • costs. Connecting the vehicle to the Internet via contact retailers from the vehicle. a Bluetooth-connected phone (p. 497) The vehicle can be connected to the Internet Activating data roaming can cause addi- • Connecting the vehicle to the Internet via using Bluetooth, Wi-Fi or the vehicle's inte- tional charges. a phone (Wi-Fi) (p. 497) grated modem (SIM card). Contact your network operator about data • Connecting the vehicle to the Internet via When the vehicle is connected to the Internet, traffic costs. vehicle modem (SIM card) (p. 498) it is possible to share the vehicle's Internet • connection (Wi-Fi hotspot) so that other devi- Apps (p. 452) ces, e.g. tablets, can access the Internet12. NOTE • No or poor Internet connection (p. 501) When using Apple CarPlay, it is only possi- The Internet status is shown by a symbol in • Sharing Internet from the vehicle via Wi-Fi ble to connect the vehicle to the Internet the center display's status bar. hotspot (tethering) (p. 500) using Wi-Fi or the vehicle's modem. • Deleting Wi-Fi networks (p. 501) • Wi-Fi technology and security (p. 502) NOTE • Volvo ID (p. 26) When using Android Auto, it is possible to • Terms of use and data sharing (p. 502) connect the vehicle to the Internet using Wi-Fi, Bluetooth or the vehicle's modem.

Before the vehicle is connected to the Inter- net, search for support information about terms and conditions for services and the customer privacy policy at www.volvocars.com.

12 This is not possible when the vehicle is connected to another Wi-Fi hotspot.

496 * Option/accessory. AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

Connecting the vehicle to the 6. If a different connection is being used, Connecting the vehicle to the Internet via a Bluetooth-connected confirm the connection change. Internet via a phone (Wi-Fi) phone > Your vehicle is now connected to the Establish an Internet connection using Wi-Fi Establish an Internet connection using Internet via your Bluetooth-connected through Internet sharing (tethering) from a Bluetooth and tethering from a phone and phone. phone and get access to the connected servi- get access to multiple connected services in ces in your vehicle. your vehicle. NOTE 1. Make sure that the phone supports Inter- 1. To connect the vehicle to the Internet via a net sharing (tethering) and that the func- The cellular phone and network operator Bluetooth-connected phone, the phone tion is activated. In an iPhone, the function must support tethering (sharing of Internet must first be paired with the vehicle via is called "personal hotspot". In Android connection) and the subscription must Bluetooth. phones, the function can have different include data traffic. names, but is often called "hotspot". For 2. Make sure that the phone supports Inter- iPhone phones, the "personal hotspot" net sharing (tethering) and that the func- menu page must also be open until the tion is activated. In an iPhone, the function NOTE Internet connection has been made. is called "personal hotspot". In Android When using Apple CarPlay, it is only possi- phones, the function can have different ble to connect the vehicle to the Internet 2. Tap Settings in the Top view. names, but is often called "hotspot". For using Wi-Fi or the vehicle's modem. iPhone phones, the "personal hotspot" 3. Proceed to Communication Wi-Fi. menu page must also be open until the 4. Activate/deactivate by tapping to check/ Internet connection has been made. Related information uncheck the Wi-Fi box. • Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 496) 3. If the phone has been connected via Blue- 5. If a different connection is being used, • Connecting the vehicle to the Internet via tooth previously, tap Settings in the cen- confirm the connection change. vehicle modem (SIM card) (p. 498) ter display's Top view. • Connecting a phone to the car via Blue- 6. Tap the name of the network you would 4. Tap Communication Bluetooth tooth for the first time (p. 488) like to connect. Devices. • Connecting the vehicle to the Internet via 7. Enter the network password. 5. Mark the window for Bluetooth Internet a phone (Wi-Fi) (p. 497) > The vehicle will connect to the network. connection under the heading Internet • Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 480) Please note that certain cellular phones will connection. • No or poor Internet connection (p. 501) disable Internet sharing (tethering) when the connection to the vehicle has been broken, • Settings for Bluetooth devices (p. 495) e.g. when the phone has been removed from }}

* Option/accessory. 497 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

|| the vehicle. The phone's tethering function will • Wi-Fi technology and security (p. 502) Connecting the vehicle to the then need to be reactivated the next time the Internet via vehicle modem (SIM phone's hotspot is used to connect to the card) Internet. It is possible to establish an Internet connec- When a phone is connected to the vehicle, it tion via the vehicle modem and a personal will be saved for future use. To display a list of SIM card (P-SIM). saved networks or to manually delete saved Vehicles equipped with Volvo On Call will use networks, tap Settings Communication the vehicle modem Internet connection for the services. Wi-Fi Saved networks. 1. NOTE The cellular phone and network operator must support tethering (sharing of Internet connection) and the subscription must include data traffic.

Technical and security requirements for Wi-Fi Insert a personal SIM card in the holder in connection are described in a separate sec- the passenger-side footwell. tion. Note that the vehicle's card reader requires mini SIM cards. Related information • Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 496) 2. Tap Settings in the Top view. • Deleting Wi-Fi networks (p. 501) • No or poor Internet connection (p. 501)

498 * Option/accessory. AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

3. Tap Communication Vehicle Modem Vehicle modem settings Change PIN - a maximum of 4 digits can Internet. Your vehicle is equipped with a modem that be entered. 4. Activate/deactivate by tapping to check/ can be used to connect the vehicle to the Disable PIN - select whether a PIN code uncheck the Vehicle modem Internet Internet. It is also possible to share this Inter- will be required to access the SIM card. net connection over Wi-Fi. box. • Send request code - used to e.g. down- 1. Tap Settings in the Top view. load or check the balance remaining on a 5. If a different connection is being used, prepaid phone card. This function is spe- confirm the connection change. 2. Tap Communication Vehicle Modem Internet and select settings: cific to your service provider. 6. Enter the SIM card's PIN code. • Vehicle modem Internet - select this to > The vehicle will connect to the network. NOTE use the vehicle's modem to connect to the Internet. Please note that the SIM card used for NOTE • Data usage - tap Reset to reset the coun- Internet connection via P-SIM cannot have Please note that the SIM card used for ter for the amount of data received and the same telephone number as the SIM Internet connection via P-SIM cannot have sent. card used in the cellular phone. If the same the same telephone number as the SIM • card is used for both, phone calls will not card used in the cellular phone. If the same Network. be connected properly to the cellular card is used for both, phone calls will not Select carrier - select a service provider phone. Use a SIM card with a separate be connected properly to the cellular manually or automatically. phone number for the Internet connection phone. Use a SIM card with a separate Data roaming - if the box is checked, the or a data card that does not handle phone phone number for the Internet connection vehicle modem will attempt to connect to calls and can therefore not interfere with or a data card that does not handle phone the Internet when the vehicle is outside its phone function. calls and can therefore not interfere with home network (e.g. if you are in another phone function. country). Please note that this could entail Related information additional charges. Consult with your serv- • Connecting the vehicle to the Internet via Related information ice provider for data roaming terms under vehicle modem (SIM card) (p. 498) • * Internet-connected vehicle (p. 496) your contract. • No or poor Internet connection (p. 501) • No or poor Internet connection (p. 501) • SIM card PIN. • Vehicle modem settings (p. 499)

* Option/accessory. 499 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

Sharing Internet from the vehicle 2. Tap Communication Vehicle Wi-Fi The connection status is shown by a symbol in via Wi-Fi hotspot (tethering) Hotspot. the center display's status bar. When the vehicle is connected to the Inter- 3. Tap Network name to assign a name to Tap Connected devices to see a list of cur- net, other devices may share the vehicle's the hotspot. rently connected devices. Internet connection13. 4. Tap Password and create a password. Related information This password can then be used to con- • Symbols in the center display status bar nect other devices to this hotspot. (p. 125) 5. Tap Frequency band and select a fre- • Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 496) quency for the hotspot to use to transmit • No or poor Internet connection (p. 501) data. Please note that selecting a frequency is not possible on all markets. 6. Activate/deactivate by tapping to check/ uncheck the Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot box. 7. If Wi-Fi is being used to connect to the Internet, confirm the change of connections. > It is now possible for external devices to connect to the vehicle's Wi-Fi hotspot.

NOTE Activation of Wi-Fi hotspot can cause additional charges from your network operator. The network service provider (SIM card) must Contact your network operator about data support Internet sharing (tethering). traffic costs. 1. Tap Settings in the Top view.

13 This does not apply when the vehicle is connected to the Internet via Wi-Fi.

500 * Option/accessory. AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

No or poor Internet connection Restarting the phone Deleting Wi-Fi networks Factors affecting the Internet connection. If you experience any Internet connection Networks that are not needed can be The amount of data transmitted depends on problems, it may help to restart your phone. deleted. the services or apps currently in use in the 1. Tap Settings in the Top view. vehicle. Streaming music, for example, Related information • * involves the transmission of a large amount of Internet-connected vehicle (p. 496) 2. Proceed to Communication Wi-Fi data, and this requires a good connection and • Wi-Fi technology and security (p. 502) Saved networks. a strong signal. 3. Tap Forget to delete the network. Phone to vehicle 4. Confirm the selection. Internet connection speed may vary depend- > The vehicle will no longer connect to ing on the location of the cellular phone in the the deleted network. vehicle. Move the phone closer to the center display to increase signal strength. Make sure Deleting all networks that nothing is between the phone and center All networks can be deleted at once by per- display that could be blocking the signal. forming a factory reset. Please note that all user data and system settings will be restored Phone to network operator to original default factory settings. The speed of the mobile network varies depending on the coverage in the vehicle's Related information current location. Coverage may be poorer in • Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 496) e.g. tunnels, mountainous areas, deep valleys • No or poor Internet connection (p. 501) or indoors. Connection speed is also depend- • Resetting center display settings (p. 135) ent on the subscription you have with your service provider. • Connecting the vehicle to the Internet via a phone (Wi-Fi) (p. 497) NOTE If you experience any problems with data traffic, contact your network service provider.

* Option/accessory. 501 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

Wi-Fi technology and security Terms of use and data sharing there. Note that services and apps cannot be Networks must meet certain criteria in order The first time certain services and apps are used as intended if data sharing is disabled. for the vehicle to connect. started, a pop-up window with the heading After a factory reset or e.g. a workshop visit or It is possible to connect to the following types Terms and conditions and Data sharing a software update, your data sharing preferen- of networks: may open. ces may be reset to default settings. You will The aim is to inform the user about Volvo's • Frequency - 2.4 or 5 GHz14. then need to reactivate data sharing for con- terms of use and data sharing policy. By nected services and downloaded apps. • Standards - 802.11 a/b/g/n. accepting data sharing, the user accepts that • Security type - WPA2-AES-CCMP. certain information will be sent from the vehi- NOTE cle. This is required for certain services and The vehicle's Wi-Fi system is designed to han- apps to work with full functionality. Settings for privacy and data sharing are dle Wi-Fi devices inside the vehicle. unique for each driver profile. The data sharing function for connected servi- Performance may be impaired if multiple devi- 15 ces are using a frequency at the same time. ces and apps is disabled by default . For certain connected services and apps in the vehi- Related information Related information cle to work, data sharing must be activated. • Activating and deactivating data sharing • Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 496) Data sharing can be set from the center dis- (p. 503) play's settings menu or when the services or apps are started in the center display. Privacy and data sharing The software update that became available in November 2017 introduced privacy and data sharing settings for connected services and downloaded apps. These settings can be found under Privacy and data in the settings menu in the vehicle's center display. There, you can choose which connected services will be allowed to share data. Data sharing for downloaded apps can also be disabled

14 Selecting a frequency is not possible on all markets. 15 Does not apply to Volvo On Call.

502 * Option/accessory. AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

Activating and deactivating data Data sharing for services Enabling data sharing when starting a sharing If you haven't activated data sharing for a service Data sharing for relevant services and apps connected service or for downloaded apps, 1. Select the function or service you want to can be set via the Settings menu in the center you can do this when you start them in your activate. display. center display. The first time that you start a > If this is the first time you are using the 1. Tap Settings in the Top view in the center service, or e.g. after a factory reset or certain service or after e.g. a factory reset or display. software updates, you will also need to certain software updates, you will first accept Volvo's terms and conditions for con- need to accept Volvo's terms and con- 2. Tap System Privacy and data. nected services. ditions for connected services in order 3. Select to activate or deactivate data shar- to continue. ing for individual services and all apps. If data sharing for a connected service or downloaded apps is not activated, this can be done when they are started in the center display. If this is the first time that a service is started, or e.g. after a factory reset or certain software updates, Volvo's terms and conditions for connected services must be accepted. Note that data sharing will then also be activated for other services or apps that sharing has already been accepted for.

NOTE After visiting a Volvo workshop, you may need to reactivate data sharing so that services and apps will work again.

Related information • Terms of use and data sharing (p. 502)

}}

503 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

|| 2. Accept data sharing for the service or can- Hard disk storage space cel. It is possible to view how much space is If you choose to accept, data sharing will be remaining on the vehicle's hard disk. enabled and you can begin using the service. Storage information for the vehicle's hard disk can be shown, including total capacity, availa- Enabling data sharing when starting ble capacity and how much space is used for an app installed apps. The information is found under To accept data sharing for an app that needs Settings System System Information the function, start the app and tap accept in Storage. the pop-up window. You can disable data sharing for services and Related information • Apps (p. 452) apps in the settings menu under System Privacy and data Data Sharing.

504 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

License agreement for audio and Dirac Unison® DivX®, DivX Certified® and associated logos media are trademarks of DivX, LLC and are used A license is an agreement on the right to con- under license. duct a certain activity or the right to use This DivX Certified® device can play DivX® someone else's right according to terms and Home Theater video files up to 576p (includ- conditions specified in the agreement. The ing .avi, .divx). Download free software at following texts are Volvo's agreements with www.divx.com to create, play and stream digi- manufacturers/developers. tal video. Bowers & Wilkins ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND: This DivX Certified® device must be registered in order Dirac Unison co-optimizes the loudspeakers in to play purchased DivX Video-on-Demand frequency, time and space for the best possi- (VOD) movies. To obtain your registration ble bass integration and clarity. It enables a code, locate the DivX VOD section in your faithful reproduction of the acoustic characte- device setup menu. Go to vod.divx.com for ristics of specific performance venues. Using more information on completing the registra- advanced algorithms, Dirac Unison controls all tion process. loudspeakers digitally based on acoustic high- precision measurements. Like a conductor of Patent number an orchestra, it guarantees that the loudspeak- Covered by one or more of the following pat- Bowers & Wilkins and B&W are trademarks ers perform in perfect unison. ents in the US: 7,295,673; 7,460,668; of the B&W Group Ltd. Nautilus is a trade- 7,515,710; 8,656,183; 8,731,369; RE45,052. ® mark of B&W Group Ltd. Kevlar is a registered DivX ® trademark of DuPont. Gracenote

}}

505 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

|| Portions of the content are copyright © of You agree that your non-exclusive license to is made that the Gracenote Software or Gracenote or its providers. use the Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Soft- Gracenote Servers are error-free or that func- ware, and Gracenote Servers will terminate if tioning of Gracenote Software or Gracenote Gracenote, the Gracenote logo and logotype, you violate these restrictions. If your license Servers will be uninterrupted. Gracenote is not "Powered by Gracenote" and Gracenote terminates, you agree to cease any and all use obligated to provide you with new enhanced MusicID are either registered trademarks of of the Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Soft- or additional data types or categories that Gracenote, Inc. in the United States and/or ware, and Gracenote Servers. Gracenote Gracenote may provide in the future and is other countries. reserves all rights in all Gracenote Data, all free to discontinue its services at any time. Gracenote® End User License Agreement Gracenote Software, and all Gracenote Serv- GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRAN- ers, including all ownership rights. Under no This application or device contains software TIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, circumstances will Gracenote become liable from Gracenote, Inc. in Emeryville, California, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, IMPLIED WARRAN- for any payment to you for any information United States (“Gracenote”). The software TIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR that you provide. You agree that Gracenote, from Gracenote (the “Gracenote Software”) A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND Inc. may enforce its rights under this Agree- enables this application to perform disc and/or NON-INFRINGEMENT. GRACENOTE DOES ment against you directly in its own name. file identification and obtain music-related NOT WARRANT THE RESULTS THAT WILL information, including name, artist, track, and The Gracenote service uses a unique identifier BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE OF THE title information (“Gracenote Data”) from to track queries for statistical purposes. The GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY GRACE- online servers or embedded databases (collec- purpose of a randomly assigned numeric iden- NOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL GRACE- tively “Gracenote Servers”) and to perform tifier is to allow the Gracenote service to count NOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CONSEQUEN- other functions. You may use Gracenote Data queries without knowing anything about who TIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES OR FOR only by means of the intended End-User func- you are. For more information, see the web ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOST REVENUES. tions of this application or device. page for the Gracenote Privacy Policy for the © Gracenote, Inc. 2009 You agree that you will use Gracenote Data, Gracenote service. the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Serv- The Gracenote Software and each item of Sensus software ers for your own personal non-commercial use Gracenote Data are licensed to you “AS IS.” only. You agree not to assign, copy, transfer or This software uses parts of sources from clib2 Gracenote makes no representations or war- and Prex Embedded Real-time OS - Source transmit the Gracenote Software or any ranties, express or implied, regarding the Gracenote Data to any third party. YOU (Copyright (c) 1982, 1986, 1991, 1993, 1994), accuracy of any Gracenote Data from in the and Quercus Robusta (Copyright (c) 1990, AGREE NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT GRACE- Gracenote Servers. Gracenote reserves the NOTE DATA, THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, 1993), The Regents of the University of right to delete data from the Gracenote Serv- California. All or some portions are derived OR GRACENOTE SERVERS, EXCEPT AS ers or to change data categories for any cause EXPRESSLY PERMITTED HEREIN. from material licensed to the University of that Gracenote deems sufficient. No warranty California by American Telephone and

506 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

Telegraph Co. or Unix System Laboratories, OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS first publication and either this permission Inc. and are reproduced herein with the INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND notice or a reference to http://oss.sgi.com/ permission of UNIX System Laboratories, Inc. ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER projects/FreeB/ shall be included in all copies Redistribution and use in source and binary IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT or substantial portions of the Software. THE forms, with or without modification, are (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", permitted provided that the following OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, conditions are met: Redistributions of source OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT code must retain the above copyright notice, ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF this list of conditions and the following DAMAGE. MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A disclaimer. Redistributions in binary form must PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND This software is based in part on the work of reproduce the above copyright notice, this list NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL the Independent JPEG Group. of conditions and the following disclaimer in SILICON GRAPHICS, INC. BE LIABLE FOR the documentation and/or other materials This software uses parts of sources from ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER provided with the distribution. Neither the "libtess". The Original Code is: OpenGL LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF name of the nor the Sample Implementation, Version 1.2.1, CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, names of its contributors may be used to released January 26, 2000, developed by ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN endorse or promote products derived from Silicon Graphics, Inc. The Original Code is CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR this software without specific prior written Copyright (c) 1991-2000 Silicon Graphics, THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED Inc. Copyright in any portions created by third SOFTWARE. Except as contained in this BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND parties is as indicated elsewhere herein. All notice, the name of Silicon Graphics, Inc. shall CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY Rights Reserved. Copyright (C) [1991-2000] not be used in advertising or otherwise to EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, Silicon Graphics, Inc. All Rights Reserved. promote the sale, use or other dealings in this INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, Software without prior written authorization IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF to any person obtaining a copy of this from Silicon Graphics, Inc. MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A software and associated documentation files This software is based in parts on the work of PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. (the "Software"), to deal in the Software the FreeType Team. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT without restriction, including without OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, This software uses parts of SSLeay Library: FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR sell copies of the Software, and to permit ([email protected]). All rights reserved CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, persons to whom the Software is furnished to BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF do so, subject to the following conditions: The Linux software SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS above copyright notice including the dates of }}

507 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

|| This product contains software licensed under conditions and the following disclaimer as Copyright c 1991-2013 Unicode, Inc. All rights GNU General Public License (GPL) or GNU the first lines of this file unmodified. reserved. Distributed under the Terms of Use Lesser General Public License (LGPL), etc. 2. Redistributions in binary form must in http://www.unicode.org/copyright.html. You have the right of acquisition, modification, reproduce the above copyright notice, this Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, and distribution of the source code of the list of conditions and the following to any person obtaining a copy of the Unicode GPL/LGPL software. disclaimer in the documentation and/or data files and any associated documentation other materials provided with the (the "Data Files") or Unicode software and any You may download Source Code from the distribution. associated documentation (the "Software") to following website at no charge: http:// deal in the Data Files or Software without www.embedded-carmultimedia.jp/linux/oss/ THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY NTT ``AS restriction, including without limitation the download/TVM_8351_013 IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, The website provides the Source Code "As Is" LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES distribute, and/or sell copies of the Data Files and without warranty of any kind. OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR or Software, and to permit persons to whom By downloading Source Code, you expressly A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE the Data Files or Software are furnished to do assume all risk and liability associated with DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL NTT BE so, provided that (a) the above copyright downloading and using the Source Code and LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, notice(s) and this permission notice appear complying with the user agreements that INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR with all copies of the Data Files or Software, accompany each Source Code. CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, (b) both the above copyright notice(s) and this BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF permission notice appear in associated Please note that we cannot respond to any SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS documentation, and (c) there is clear notice in inquiries regarding the source code. OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS each modified Data File or in the Software as well as in the documentation associated with camellia:1.2.0 INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND the Data File(s) or Software that the data or Copyright (c) 2006, 2007 ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT software has been modified. NTT (Nippon Telegraph and Telephone (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR THE DATA FILES AND SOFTWARE ARE Corporation). All rights reserved. OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY Redistribution and use in source and binary OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, forms, with or without modification, are ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE permitted provided that the following DAMAGE. WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, conditions are met: Unicode: 5.1.0 FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY 1. Redistributions of source code must retain COPYRIGHT AND PERMISSION NOTICE RIGHTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE the above copyright notice, this list of

508 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR HOLDERS Declaration of Conformity USA INCLUDED IN THIS NOTICE BE LIABLE FOR FCC CAUTION ANY CLAIM, OR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR ANY Changes or modifications not expressly DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING approved by the party responsible for compli- FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, ance could void the user's authority to operate WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, the equipment. This transmitter must not be NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS co-located or operated in conjunction with any ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN other antenna or transmitter. CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR Canada PERFORMANCE OF THE DATA FILES OR SOFTWARE. This device complies with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standards. Operation is Except as contained in this notice, the name of subject to the following two conditions: (1) a copyright holder shall not be used in this device may not cause interference, and (2) advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, this device must accept any interference, use or other dealings in these Data Files or including interference that may cause unde- Software without prior written authorization of sired operation of the device. the copyright holder.

}}

509 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

|| Country/ Area Brazil:

Este equipamento opera em caráter secundário isto e, náo tem direito a protecão contra interferéncia prejudicial, mesmo tipo, e não pode causar interferéncia a sistemas operando em caráter primário. Para consultas, visite: www.anatel.gov.br EU:

Manufacturer: Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Sanda Works 2-3-33, Miwa, Sanda-city. Hyogo, 669-1513, Japan Mitsubishi Electric Corporation hereby declares that this type of radio equipment [Audio Navigation Unit] conforms with directive 2014/53/EU. For further details, search for support information on www.volvocars.com. United Arab Emi- rates:

510 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

Country/ Area Kazakh- stan

Model name: NR-0V Manufacturer: Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Export country: Japan

}}

511 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

|| Country/ Area China: 1. ■ 使用频率2.4 - 2.4835 GHz ■ 等效全向辐射率(EIRP) 天线增益 10dBi 时≤100 mW 或≤20 dBm ① ■ 最大率谱密度天线增益 10dBi 时≤20 dBm / MHz(EIRP) ① ■ 载频容限20 ppm ■ 帯外发射率(在 2.4-2.4835GHz 頻段以外) ≤-80 dBm / Hz (EIRP) ■ 杂散发射(辐射)率(对应载波±2.5 倍信道带宽以外) • ≤-36 dBm / 100 kHz (30 - 1000 MHz) • ≤-33 dBm / 100 kHz (2.4 - 2.4835 GHz) • ≤-40 dBm / 1 MHz (3.4 - 3.53 GHz) • ≤-40 dBm / 1 MHz (5.725 - 5.85 GHz) • ≤-30 dBm / 1 MHz (其它 1 - 12.75 GHz) 2.不得擅自更改发射频率大发射率(包括额外装射频率放大器)，不得擅自外接天线或改用其它发射天线 3.使用时不得对各种合法的无线电通信业产生有害干扰一旦发现有干扰现象时，应立即停止使用，并采措施消除干扰后方可继续使用 4.使用微率无线电设备，必须忍各种无线电业的干扰或工业科学及医疗应用设备的辐射干扰 5.不得在飞机和机场附近使用

512 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

Country/ Area

Korea: B 급 기기 (가정용 방송통신기자재) 이 기기는 가정용(B 급) 전자파적합기기로서 주로 가정에서 사용하는 것을 적으로 하며, 든 지역에서 사용할 수 있습니다. 해당 무선설비는 전파혼신 가능성이 있으므로 인명안전과 관련된 서비스는 할 수 없습니다. Malaysia

This device has been certified under the Communications & Multimedia Act of 1998, Communications and Multimedia (Technical Standards) Regulations 2000. To retrieve your device’s serial number, please visit (support.volvocars.com) and search for “SIRIM Label Verification”. Device category: Navigation equipment for vehicle (Bluetooth) Model: NR-0V Type Approval No.: RDBV/24A/1018/S(18-4236)

}}

513 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

|| Country/ Area Mexico:

Taiwan: 低功率電波輻射性電機管理辦法第十二條經型式認證合格之低功率射頻電機，非經許可，公司商號或使用者均不得擅自變更頻率加大功率或變更原設計之特性及功能第十四條低功率射頻電機之使用不得影響飛航安全及干擾合法通信；經發現有干擾現象時，應立停用，改善至無干擾時方得繼續使用前項合法通信，指依電信法規定作業之無線電通信低功率射頻電機須忍受合法通信或工業科學及醫療用電波輻射性電機設備之干擾

Related information • Audio, media and Internet (p. 450) • Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 496) • Media player (p. 471) • Gracenote® (p. 475) • Sensus - connection and entertainment (p. 30)

514 * Option/accessory. WHEELS AND TIRES WHEELS AND TIRES

Tires CAUTION When replacing tires, be sure that the new The function of the tires is to carry loads, pro- tires are the same size designation, type Some Volvo models are equipped with an vide traction on road surfaces, reduce vibra- (radial) and preferably from the same manu- Ultra High Performance tire and wheel tions and protect the wheels from wear. facturer, on all four wheels. Otherwise there is combination designed to provide maxi- The tires significantly influence the vehicle's a risk of altering the vehicle's roadholding and mum dry pavement performance with con- driving characteristics. The type, dimensions, handling characteristics. sideration for hydroplaning resistance. tire pressure and speed rating have a consid- They may be more susceptible to road haz- Recommended tires erable impact on how the vehicle performs. ard damage and, depending on driving On delivery, the car is equipped with Volvo Your vehicle is equipped with tires according conditions, may achieve a tread life of less original tires that have the VOL1 marking on to the vehicle's tire information placard on the than 30,000 km (20,000 miles). Even if the side of the tires. These tires have been B-pillar (the structural member at the side of this vehicle is equipped with Volvo's designed specifically for your vehicle. It is the vehicle, at the rear of the driver's door advanced AWD or stability system, these therefore important when replacing tires that opening). tires are not designed for winter driving, the new tires have this same marking to help and should be replaced with winter tires maintain the vehicle's driving characteristics, WARNING when weather conditions dictate. comfort and fuel consumption. A damaged tire could cause the driver to New tires lose control of the vehicle. The tires have good road holding characteristics and offer good handling on dry and wet surfaces. It should be noted however that the tires have been developed to give these features on snow/ice-free surfaces. Most models are equipped with "all-season" tires, which provide a somewhat higher degree of roadholding on slippery road surfaces than tires without the "all-season" rating. However, for optimal roadholding on icy or snow-covered roads, Volvo recommends snow tires on all four wheels.

1 This may vary for certain tire dimensions.

516 WHEELS AND TIRES

Tires are perishable goods. After a few years, • Correct front wheel alignment is very authorized Volvo workshop. If significant dif- they will begin to harden and their friction important. ferences in wear (> 1 mm difference in tread properties will gradually deteriorate. Always • Unbalanced wheels impair tire economy depth) between the tires have already occur- replace tires with the freshest tires possible. and driving comfort. red, the least worn tires should always be This is particularly important for snow tires. A • mounted on the rear wheels. A front-wheel series of numbers is imprinted on the sidewall Tires must maintain the same direction of skid (understeer) is usually easier to control of the tire. The last four digits in the series is rotation throughout their lifetime. than a rear-wheel skid (oversteer). If the front the Department of Transportation (DOT) • When replacing tires, the tires with the wheels skid, the vehicle will continue in a stamp and indicates the week and year the most tread should be mounted on the rear straight line instead of the rear wheels skid- tire was manufactured. The tire in the illustra- wheels to reduce the chance of oversteer ding to the side, which could cause you to tion has 0717 as the last four digits, which during hard braking. completely lose control of the vehicle. It is means it was manufactured week 7 of 2017. • Hitting curbs or potholes can damage the therefore important that the rear wheels never tires and/or wheels permanently. lose grip before the front wheels. Tire age Tires degrade over time, even when they are Tire rotation Storing wheels and tires not being used. It is recommended that tires Your vehicle has no required tire rotation. Driv- When storing complete wheels (tires mounted generally be replaced after 6 years of normal ing style, tire pressure, climate and road con- on rims), they should be suspended off the service. Heat caused by hot climates, frequent ditions affect how quickly the tires age and floor or placed on their sides on the floor. high loading conditions or Ultra Violet (U.V.) exhibit signs of wear. Maintaining the correct Tires not mounted on rims should be stored on exposure can accelerate the aging process. tire pressure helps keep tread wear evenly dis- their sides or standing upright, but should not 2 The temporary spare should also be replaced tributed. be suspended. at 6-year intervals, even if it has never been used. A tire with e.g., visible cracks or discol- To help prevent differences in tread depth and oration should be replaced immediately. wear patterns forming on the tires, the front CAUTION and rear wheels should be rotated, i.e. the Tires should preferably be stored in a cool, front tires moved to the rear and the rear tires Tire economy dry, dark place, and should never be stored moved to the front. Ideally, tire rotation should • Maintain correct tire pressure. in close proximity to solvents, gasoline, be done the first time after approximately • Avoid fast starts, hard braking and tire oils, etc. 5000 km (ca 3100 miles) and thereafter at screeching. 10,000 km (approx. 6200 miles) intervals. • Tire wear increases with speed. If you have any questions regarding tread depth, Volvo recommends consulting an

2 Not available on all models. }}

517 WHEELS AND TIRES

|| WARNING Tire direction of rotation NOTE Tires with tread designed to roll in only one • The wheel and tire sizes for your Volvo Use tires of the same type, dimensions and direction are marked with an arrow on the are specified to meet stringent stability make (manufacturer) on each axle. sidewall. and handling requirements. Unap- proved wheel/tire size combinations Related information can negatively affect your vehicle's sta- • Tires (p. 516) bility and handling. • Any damage caused by installation of unapproved wheel/tire size combinations will not be covered by your new vehicle warranty. Volvo assumes no responsibility for death, injury, or expenses that may result from such installations.

Related information The arrow shows the tire's direction of rotation. • Checking tire pressure (p. 523) • The tire should maintain the same direc- • Tire direction of rotation (p. 518) tion of rotation throughout its service life. • Tread wear indicator (p. 519) • Tires should only be moved between the • Tire pressure monitoring system* front and back, never from right to left or (p. 525) vice versa. • • Tire sealing system (p. 538) Incorrectly mounted tires impair the vehi- • cle's braking properties and ability to force Uniform Tire Quality Grading (p. 522) aside rain, snow and slush. • Tire terminology (p. 519) • The tires with the most tread should • Tire sidewall designations (p. 520) always be mounted on the rear wheels to • Loading recommendations (p. 555) help reduce the risk of skidding.

518 * Option/accessory. WHEELS AND TIRES

Tread wear indicator Tire terminology • kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of air pres- The tread wear indicator shows the status of The following is a glossary of tire-related sure. the tire's tread. terms. • PSI: Pounds per square inch, a standard The tire suppliers may have additional mark- unit of air pressure. ings, notes or warnings such as standard load, • B-pillar: The structural member at the radial tubeless, etc. side of the vehicle behind the front door. • Tire information placard: A placard • Bead area of the tire: Area of the tire next showing the OE (Original Equipment) tire to the rim. sizes, recommended inflation pressure, • Sidewall of the tire: Area between the and the maximum weight the vehicle can bead area and the tread. carry. • Tread area of the tire: Area of the perime- • Tire Identification Number (TIN): A num- ter of the tire that contacts the road when ber on the sidewall of each tire providing mounted on the vehicle. information about the tire brand and man- ufacturing plant, tire size and date of man- • Rim: The metal support (wheel) for a tire The tread wear indicator is a narrow elevated ufacture. or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beads are seated. strip running across the tire's longitudinal • Inflation pressure: A measure of the tread grooves. The letters TWI (Tread Wear amount of air in a tire. • Maximum load rating: a figure indicating Indicator) are visible on the side of the tire. the maximum load in pounds and kilo- • Standard load: A class of P-metric or When approximately 1.6 mm (1/16 inch) is left grams that can be carried by the tire. This Metric tires designed to carry a maximum on the tread, the tread will be at the same rating is established by the tire manufac- load at 35 psi [37 psi (2.5 bar) for Metric height as the tread wear indicator. Replace the turer. tire as soon as possible. Tires with low tread tires]. Increasing the inflation pressure • Maximum permissible inflation offer very poor traction in rain or snow. beyond this pressure will not increase the tires load carrying capability. pressure: the greatest amount of air pressure that should ever be put in the tire. Related information • Extra load: A class of P-metric or Metric This limit is set by the tire manufacturer. • Tires (p. 516) tires designed to carry a heavier maximum load at 41 psi [43 psi (2.9 bar) for Metric • Recommended tire inflation pressure: tires]. Increasing the inflation pressure inflation pressure, established by Volvo, beyond this pressure will not increase the which is based on the type of tires that are tire's load carrying capability. mounted on a vehicle at the factory. This information can be found on the tire infla- }}

519 WHEELS AND TIRES

|| tion placard(s) located on the driver's side Tire sidewall designations NOTE B-pillar and in the tire inflation table in this The following information can be found on a Please be aware that the following tire chapter. tire's sidewall. designation is an example only and that • Cold tires: The tires are considered to be this particular tire may not be available on cold when they have the same tempera- your vehicle. ture as the surrounding (ambient) air. This temperature is normally reached after the vehicle has been parked for at least 3 1. 215: The width of the tire (in millimeters) hours. from sidewall edge to sidewall edge. The larger the number, the wider the tire. Related information • 2. 65: The ratio of the tire's height to its Tires (p. 516) width in percent. 3. R: Radial tire (the designation RF and the symbol indicate that the vehicle is equipped with optional self-supporting run Federal law mandates that tire manufacturers flat tires3. place standardized information on the sidewall 4. 15: The diameter of the wheel rim (in of all tires (see the illustration). inches). The vehicle has been certified with certain 5. 95: The tire's load index. In this example, a combinations of wheels and tires. load index of 95 equals a maximum load The following information is listed on the tire of 1521 lbs (690 kg). sidewall: 6. H: The tire's speed rating, or the maximum The tire designation: speed at which the tire is designed to be driven for extended periods of time, carrying a permissible load for the vehicle, and with correct inflation pressure. For example, H indicates a speed rating of 210 km/h (130 mph).

3 Self-supporting run flat tires may not be available on all models.

520 WHEELS AND TIRES

NOTE carried by the tire. Refer to the vehicle's H 210 km/h (130 mph) tire information placard located on the B- The tire's load index and speed rating may Pillar for the correct tire pressure for your V 240 km/h (149 mph) not appear on the sidewall because they vehicle. are not required by law. W 270 km/h (168 mph) 11. Treadwear, Traction, and Temperature grades. Y 300 km/h (186 mph) 7. M+S or M/S = Mud and Snow, AT = All 12. Maximum permissible inflation Terrain, AS = All Season pressure: the greatest amount of air pres- WARNING 8. U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number sure that should ever be put in the tire. • The wheel and tire sizes for your Volvo (TIN): This begins with the letters "DOT" This limit is set by the tire manufacturer. and indicates that the tire meets all federal are specified to meet stringent stability standards. The next two numbers are the Speed Symbol and handling requirements. Unap- factory code where the tire was manufac- A tire's Speed Symbol (SS) indicates the maxi- proved wheel/tire size combinations tured, the next two are the tire size code mum speed for which the tire has been certi- can negatively affect your vehicle's sta- and the last four numbers represent the fied and should be at least equivalent to the bility and handling. week and year the tire was made. For vehicle's top speed. • Any damage caused by installation of example, 0717 means that the tire was Winter tires, with or without studs, are excep- unapproved wheel/tire size combina- manufactured during week 7 of 2017. The tions and may use a lower SS. When winter tions will not be covered by your new numbers in between are marketing codes tires are installed, the vehicle may not be vehicle warranty. Volvo assumes no used at the manufacturer's discretion. This driven faster than the tires' SS. responsibility for death, injury, or information helps a tire manufacturer expenses that may result from such identify a tire for safety recall purposes. The vehicle's speed should always be deter- installations. mined by the posted speed limit and traffic 9. Tire Ply Composition and Material Used: and road conditions, not the tire's SS. Indicates the number of plies indicates or Related information the number of layers of rubber-coated fab- The following table indicates the maximum • Tires (p. 516) ric in the tire tread and sidewall. Tire man- permissible speed for each SS. ufacturers also must indicate the ply materials in the tire and the sidewall, M 130 km/h (81 mph) which include steel, nylon, polyester, and others. Q 160 km/h (100 mph) 10. Maximum Load: Indicates the maximum T 190 km/h (118 mph) load in pounds and kilograms that can be

521 WHEELS AND TIRES

Uniform Tire Quality Grading WARNING Related information ALL PASSENGER VEHICLE TIRES MUST • Tires (p. 516) The traction grade assigned to this tire is CONFORM TO FEDERAL SAFETY based on braking (straight-ahead) traction • Tire sidewall designations (p. 520) REQUIREMENTS IN ADDITION TO THESE tests and is not a measure of cornering GRADES. (turning) traction. Quality grades can be found, where applicable, on the tire sidewall between the tread TEMPERATURE shoulder and maximum section width. For The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, example: and C, representing the tire's resistance to the Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions TREADWEAR on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. The treadwear grade is a comparative rating Sustained high temperature can cause the based on the wear rate of the tire when tested material of the tire to degenerate and reduce under controlled conditions on a specified tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to government test course. For example, a tire sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds graded 150 would wear one and one half (1 ½) to a minimum level of performance that all times as well on the government course as a passenger vehicle tires must meet under the tire graded 100. The relative performance of Federal Motor Safety Standard No. 109. tires depends upon the actual conditions of Grades B and A represent higher levels of per- their use, however, and many depart signifi- formance on the laboratory test wheel than cantly from the norm due to variation in driving the minimum required by law. habits, maintenance practices and differences in road characteristics and climate. WARNING TRACTION The temperature grade for this tire is estab- The traction grades, from highest to lowest, lished for a tire that is properly inflated and are AA, A, B, and C, as measured under con- not overloaded. Excessive speed, under- trolled conditions on specified government inflation, or excessive loading, either sepa- test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire rately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and tire failure. marked C may have poor traction performance.

522 WHEELS AND TIRES

Checking tire pressure WARNING found on the vehicle's tire information decal or Correct inflation pressure helps improve driv- certification label. • Under-inflation is the most common ing stability, save fuel and increase the serv- cause of tire failure and may result in If you check inflation pressure when the tires ice life of the tires. severe tire cracking, tread separation, are warm, you should never release air. The Tire pressure decreases over time, which is or "blow-out," with unexpected loss of tires become warm after driving and it is nor- normal. Tire pressure also varies depending on vehicle control and increased risk of mal for warm tires to have an inflation pres- the ambient temperature. Driving on under- injury. sure above the recommended pressure for inflated tires could cause the vehicle to over- • cold tires. A warm tire with an inflation pres- heat and lead to damage. Tire pressure affects Under-inflated tires reduce the load sure equal to or under the recommended pres- traveling comfort, road noise and driving cha- carrying capacity of your vehicle. sure for cold tires could be significantly under- racteristics. inflated. Cold tires Check the pressure in the tires every month. Related information Use the recommended inflation pressure for Inflation pressure should be checked when the • Adjusting tire pressure (p. 524) cold tires to help maintain good tire perform- tires are cold. The tires are considered to be ance. Under-inflated or over-inflated tires cold when they have the same temperature as • Recommended tire pressure (p. 525) could cause uneven tread wear. the surrounding (ambient) air. This tempera- • Tire pressure monitoring system* ture is normally reached after the vehicle has (p. 525) Use an air pressure gauge and check the infla- been parked for at least 3 hours. tion pressure on all the tires, including the • Tires (p. 516) After driving for approximately 1.6 km (1 mile), spare tire4, at least once a month and before the tires are considered to be warm. If you long trips. Volvo recommends buying a relia- need to drive longer than that to inflate the ble air pressure gauge, as the automatic tires, check and record the inflation pressure gauges provided at service stations may be of the tires first and inflate accordingly when inaccurate. you arrive at the pump. When the ambient temperature changes, so does the inflation pressure. A 10-degree temperature drop causes a corresponding drop in inflation pressure of 1 psi (7 kPa). Check the inflation pressure of the tires regularly and adjust to the correct pressure, which can be

4 Not available in all models.

* Option/accessory. 523 WHEELS AND TIRES

Adjusting tire pressure 3. Screw the valve cap back on. NOTE Tire pressure decreases over time, which is If you have overfilled the tire, release air by normal. The tire pressure must therefore be NOTE pushing on the metal stem in the center of adjusted to maintain the recommended tire • After inflating a tire, always replace the the valve. Then recheck the pressure with pressure. valve cap to help prevent valve damage your tire gauge. Use the recommended inflation pressure for caused by gravel, dirt, etc. cold tires to help maintain good tire perform- Some spare tires require higher inflation ance and even wear. • Use plastic valve caps only. Metal caps pressure than the other tires. Consult the could corrode and become difficult to tire inflation pressure table or the inflation remove. NOTE pressure decal. To help prevent incorrect inflation pressure, 4. Visually inspect the tire to make sure there Related information pressure should be checked when the tires are no nails or other embedded objects are cold. The tires are considered to be • Recommended tire pressure (p. 525) that could puncture the tire and cause air • cold when they have reached the same leakage. Checking tire pressure (p. 523) temperature as the ambient temperature • Inflate tires with the compressor included 5. Check the sidewalls to make sure there (about 3 hours after the vehicle was last in the tire sealing system (p. 543) driven). After driving for a few kilometers, are no gouges, cuts, bulges or other irreg- the tires will warm up and the pressure will ularities. • Approved tire pressure (p. 642) increase. 6. Repeat this procedure for each tire, including the spare tire5. 1. Remove the valve cap from the tire and press the air pressure gauge firmly onto the valve. 2. Inflate the tire to the correct inflation pressure; see the tire pressure placard on the driver's side B pillar for recommended pressures for factory-mounted tires.

5 Not available on all models.

524 WHEELS AND TIRES

Recommended tire pressure Tire pressure monitoring system* mended by the vehicle manufacturer on the The tire pressure placard on the driver's side The tire pressure monitoring system6 pro- vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. B pillar (between the front and the rear door) vides a warning symbol in the instrument (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than indicates tire pressure for different loads and panel if pressure is too low in one or more the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire speed conditions. tires. inflation pressure label, you should determine This symbol illuminates to indicate the proper tire inflation pressure for those low inflation pressure. tires.) If there is a system malfunction, the As an added safety feature, your vehicle has inflation pressure warning symbol been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring will flash for approximately one minute and system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire then glow steadily. pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accord- System description ingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumi- The tire pressure monitoring system measures nates, you should stop and check your tires as differences in rotational speed between the soon as possible, and inflate them to the wheels through the ABS system to determine proper pressure. if the tires are properly inflated. If inflation Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire The decal specifies the designation for the fac- pressure in a tire is too low, its diameter (and causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire tory-mounted tires on the vehicle, as well as consequently its rotational speed) changes. By failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel effi- load limits and inflation pressures. comparing the tires with each other, the sys- ciency and tire tread life, and may affect the tem can determine if the pressure in one or vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Please Related information more tires is too low. note that the TPMS is not a substitute for • Checking tire pressure (p. 523) General information about the tire pressure proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's • Approved tire pressure (p. 642) monitoring system responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, In the following description, the tire monitor- even if under-inflation has not reached the ing system is generally referred to as TPMS. level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. Each tire, including the spare (if provided)7 should be checked monthly when cold and Your vehicle has also been equipped with a inflated to the inflation pressure recom- TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when

6 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) 7 Not available on all models. }}

* Option/accessory. 525 WHEELS AND TIRES

• || the system is not operating properly. The Tire pressure low Check Car Status WARNING TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with app in center display • Incorrect inflation pressure could lead the low tire pressure telltale. When the system • Tire pressure system Temporarily detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for to tire failure, which could cause the unavailable driver to lose control of the vehicle. approximately one minute and then remain • continuously illuminated. This sequence will Tire pressure system Service required • The system cannot predict sudden tire continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as To keep in mind damage. long as the malfunction exists. When the mal- • Always save the new inflation pressure in function indicator is illuminated, the system the system after changing a tire or adjust- Related information may not be able to detect or signal low tire ing the inflation pressure. • Recommended tire pressure (p. 525) pressure as intended. • If you switch to a tire of another size than • Viewing tire pressure status in the center TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of the factory-mounted tires, the system display* (p. 528) reasons, including the installation of replace- must be reset by storing a new inflation ment or alternate tires or wheels on the vehi- • Action when warned of low tire pressure pressure for these tires to avoid false (p. 529) cle that prevent the TPMS from functioning warnings. properly. • Saving a new inflation pressure in the 8 • If a spare wheel is used, it is possible that monitoring system* (p. 527) Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale the tire pressure monitoring system will after replacing one or more tires or wheels on not work correctly due to the differences your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or between the wheels. alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to • continue to function properly. The system does not replace the need for regular tire inspection and maintenance. Messages in the instrument panel • It is not possible to deactivate the tire If tire pressure is too low, the low tire pressure pressure monitoring system. warning symbol is shown in the instrument panel along with a message. Check the inflation pressure in the Car Status app in the center display.

8 Not available on all models.

526 * Option/accessory. WHEELS AND TIRES

Saving a new inflation pressure in NOTE correctly, allow the storing procedure to com- the monitoring system* plete during a single operating cycle. The vehicle must be stationary for the In order for the tire pressure monitoring sys- Store Pressure button to be selectable. tem9 to function correctly, tire pressure refer- WARNING ence values must be saved correctly. To help The exhaust gases contain carbon monox- ensure that the system can correctly alert the 6. Tap Store Pressure. ide, which is invisible and odorless but very driver of low inflation pressure, this must be 7. Tap OK to confirm that the tire pressure in poisonous. The procedure for saving a new done each time the tires are changed or the all four tires has been checked and inflation pressure must therefore always be performed outdoors or in a workshop with inflation pressure is adjusted. adjusted. For example, when driving with a heavy load exhaust gas extraction. or at high speeds (over 160 km/h (100 mph)), 8. Drive the vehicle until the new inflation tire pressure should be adjusted to the Volvo- pressure has been saved. The new infla- Related information recommended tire pressure values. The sys- tion pressure is stored when the vehicle is • Recommended tire pressure (p. 525) driven at speeds over 35 km/h (22 mph). tem should then be reset by saving the new • Adjusting tire pressure (p. 524) inflation pressure. > When enough data has been collected for the system to detect low inflation • Viewing tire pressure status in the center To store the new inflation pressure as a refer- * pressure, the animation showing the display (p. 528) ence value in the system: progress of the storing procedure will • Action when warned of low tire pressure 1. Switch off the ignition. disappear from the center display. The (p. 529) 2. Inflate the tire to the correct inflation pres- system will not provide any further con- • Tire pressure monitoring system* (p. 525) sure; see the tire pressure placard on the firmation that the new inflation pres- driver's side B pillar for recommended sure has been stored. pressures for factory-mounted tires. If storing cannot be performed, Storing 3. Start the vehicle. pressure unsuccessful. Try again. will be displayed. 4. Open the Car Status app in App view. If the vehicle's ignition is switched off before 5. Tap TPMS. the new inflation pressure has been saved, the procedure must be performed again. To help ensure that the new inflation pressure is saved

9 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

* Option/accessory. 527 WHEELS AND TIRES

Viewing tire pressure status in the Below are a few examples of messages that Related information center display* may be displayed for inflation pressure status • Saving a new inflation pressure in the With the system for tire pressure monitor- and what they mean. monitoring system* (p. 527) ing 10, tire pressure status can be viewed in • Action when warned of low tire pressure the center display. Instrument The indicator symbol will (p. 529) panel: Tire illuminate to indicate that • Tire pressure monitoring system* (p. 525) Checking status pressure low inflation pressure is low The vehicle may need to be driven for a few Check Car in one or more tires. See • Vehicle status (p. 572) minutes at a speed above 35 km/h (22 mph) Status app in the Car Status app in to activate the system. center display the center display for 1. Open the Car Status app in App view. more information. 2. Tap TPMS to display the status of the Instrument The indicator symbol will tires. panel: Tire flash for about 1 minute pressure sys- and then glow steadily. Status indicator light tem Tempo- The system is temporarily rarily unavaila- unavailable and will be ble activated momentarily. Instrument The indicator symbol will panel: Tire flash for about 1 minute pressure sys- and then glow steadily. If tem Service the system is not work- required ing properly, contact a workshopA.

A An authorized Volvo workshop is recommended.

The illustration is generic. Layout may vary depending on vehicle model or software version.

10 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

528 * Option/accessory. WHEELS AND TIRES

Action when warned of low tire NOTE Related information pressure • Recommended tire pressure (p. 525) To help prevent incorrect inflation pressure, When the inflation pressure monitoring sys- • Adjusting tire pressure (p. 524) 11 pressure should be checked when the tires tem detects low inflation pressure in a tire, are cold. The tires are considered to be • Saving a new inflation pressure in the immediate action is required. cold when they have reached the same monitoring system* (p. 527) If the system's indicator symbol illu- temperature as the ambient temperature • minates and the message Tire Viewing tire pressure status in the center (about 3 hours after the vehicle was last display* (p. 528) pressure low is displayed, check driven). After driving for a few kilometers, • Tire pressure monitoring system* (p. 525) the tire pressure and inflate if neces- the tires will warm up and the pressure will sary. increase. • Inflate tires with the compressor included 1. Switch off the ignition. in the tire sealing system (p. 543) 2. Check the inflation pressure on all four NOTE tires using a tire pressure gauge. • After inflating a tire, always replace the 3. Inflate the tire to the correct inflation pres- valve cap to help prevent valve damage sure; see the tire pressure placard on the caused by gravel, dirt, etc. driver's side B pillar for recommended • Use plastic valve caps only. Metal caps pressures for factory-mounted tires. could corrode and become difficult to 4. After the inflation pressure has been remove. adjusted, always save the new inflation pressure in the system via the center display. WARNING Please be aware that the indicator symbol • Incorrect inflation pressure could lead will not go out until the low tire pressure to tire failure, which could cause the has been corrected and a storing proce- driver to lose control of the vehicle. dure has been started for the new inflation • The system cannot predict sudden tire pressure. damage.

11 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

* Option/accessory. 529 WHEELS AND TIRES

When changing wheels Tool kit Related information The wheels can be changed, e.g. to switch to Tools for e.g. towing or changing wheels are • When changing wheels (p. 530) snow tires or spare tires. Follow the applica- provided in the vehicle's cargo compartment. • Jack* (p. 531) ble instructions for removing and installing • Tire sealing system (p. 538) the wheel. • Attaching and removing the towing eyelet Changing to tires of another (p. 439) dimension Make sure that the tire dimension is approved for use on the vehicle. Related information • Removing a wheel (p. 532) • Installing a wheel (p. 534) • Tool kit (p. 530) • Snow tires (p. 537) Jack* • Spare wheel (p. 535) Tool for removing the plastic wheel bolt • Wheel bolts (p. 531) covers Funnel for refilling fluids

Wheel bolt key* and towing eyelet The foam block under the cargo compartment floor contains the towing eyelet, the tire sealing system, the tool for removing plastic wheel bolt covers and the tool for removing the locking wheel bolts. If the vehicle is equipped with a spare tire*12, a jack and lug wrench are provided.

12 Not available on all models.

530 * Option/accessory. WHEELS AND TIRES

* Jack CAUTION Wheel bolts The jack can be used to lift the vehicle to e.g. The wheel bolts hold the wheel in place on • When not in use, the jack* should be change a wheel. the wheel hub. kept in its storage compartment under Only use rims that have been tested and the cargo compartment floor. approved by Volvo and are included in Volvo's • The jack provided with your vehicle is original product range. intended to be used only in temporary situations such as changing wheels in Use a torque wrench to check that the wheel the event of a flat tire. Only the jack bolts are tightened correctly. that came with your particular model Do not grease the wheel bolt threads. should be used to lift the vehicle. If the vehicle needs to be lifted more fre- WARNING quently or for a prolonged period, using a garage jack or hoist is recommended. The wheel bolts may need to be tightened again several days after a wheel change. Always follow this device's instructions Temperature fluctuations and vibrations for use. can cause them to loosen slightly.

The jack needs to be cranked together to the correct position in order to fit. CAUTION The wheel bolts should be tightened to For vehicles with Leveling Control*: If the 140 Nm (103 ft. lbs.). Over-tightening or vehicle is equipped with the optional pneu- under-tightening could damage the threa- matic suspension, it must be turned off before ded joints. the vehicle is lifted on a jack.

Related information Locking wheel bolts* • Tool kit (p. 530) A tool for removing the locking wheel bolts is • Hoisting the vehicle (p. 575) located in the foam block under the cargo compartment floor. Related information • Removing a wheel (p. 532) • Installing a wheel (p. 534)

* Option/accessory. 531 WHEELS AND TIRES

Removing a wheel WARNING 1. Turn on the vehicle's hazard warning Wheel changes must always be carried out flashers if a wheel change must be per- • Apply the parking brake and put the correctly. The following instructions show formed in an area with traffic. gear selector in the Park (P) position. how to remove a wheel and what is impor- • 2. Apply the parking brake and put the gear tant to keep in mind. Block the wheels standing on the selector in P, or first gear if the vehicle has ground, use rigid wooden blocks or CAUTION a manual transmission. large stones. • * For vehicles with Leveling Control*: If the When not in use, the jack should be • Check that the jack is not damaged, vehicle is equipped with pneumatic sus- kept in its storage compartment under the threads are properly lubricated and pension, this must be switched off before the cargo compartment floor. it is free from dirt. • the vehicle is lifted with the jack*. The jack provided with your vehicle is • Be sure the jack is on a firm, level, non- * * intended to be used only in temporary slippery surface and that it is upright 3. Take out the jack , lug wrench and tool for situations such as changing wheels in and not leaning. removing the plastic covers, which are the event of a flat tire. Only the jack • stowed in the foam block. that came with your particular model The jack must correctly engage in the should be used to lift the vehicle. If the jack attachment. vehicle needs to be lifted more fre- • No objects should be placed between quently or for a prolonged period, using the base of the jack and the ground, or a garage jack or hoist is recommended. between the jack and the attachment Always follow this device's instructions bar on the vehicle. for use. • Never let anyone remain in the vehicle when it is raised on a jack. • If a tire must be changed near passing traffic, make sure all passengers move to a safe location. • Use a jack intended for the vehicle when changing a tire. For any other Tool for removing the plastic covers on the wheel bolts. job, use stands to support the vehicle. • Never crawl under or allow any part of 4. Place chocks in front of and behind the your body to be extended under a vehi- wheels that are still on the ground. For cle supported by a jack. example, use heavy wooden blocks or large stones.

532 * Option/accessory. WHEELS AND TIRES

5. Using the lug wrench, screw the towing 8. When hoisting the vehicle, it is important 10. Crank it up until it is properly aligned and eye into place as far as possible according that the jack or garage lift arms are posi- it is in contact with the vehicle's jack to the instructions. tioned on the designated points under the attachment point. Make sure the top of vehicle. The triangle markings on the plas- the jack (or the garage lift arms) is cor- tic cover indicate where the jack attach- rectly positioned in the attachment point, ment points/lifting points are located. with the bump on the top of the jack in the There are two jack attachment points on recess in the attachment point and the each side of the vehicle. There is a groove base positioned vertically under the for the jack at each attachment point. attachment point. 11. Turn the jack so that the crank is as far as possible from the side of the vehicle, which will position the jack's arms perpendicular to the vehicle's direction of movement. CAUTION 12. Raise the vehicle until the wheel to be The towing eyelet must be screwed into changed can move freely. Unscrew the the lug wrench* as far as possible. wheel bolts and lift off the wheel.

6. Remove the plastic covers from the wheel Related information bolts using the designated tool. • Leveling control settings* (p. 416) 7. With the vehicle still on the ground, use • When changing wheels (p. 530) the lug wrench/towing eye to loosen the 9. Position the jack under the attachment • Hoisting the vehicle (p. 575) point being used, ensuring that the sur- wheel bolts ½-1 turn by pressing down- • Jack* (p. 531) ward (counterclockwise). face is firm, flat and not slippery. • Attaching and removing the towing eyelet (p. 439) • Installing a wheel (p. 534)

* Option/accessory. 533 WHEELS AND TIRES

• Installing a wheel WARNING Never crawl under or allow any part of Wheel changes must always be carried out your body to be extended under a vehi- • Apply the parking brake and put the correctly. The following instructions show cle supported by a jack. gear selector in the Park (P) position. how to install a wheel and what is important • Block the wheels standing on the to keep in mind. The vehicle must be raised high enough so ground, use rigid wooden blocks or CAUTION that the wheel you are removing can turn large stones. • * freely. When not in use, the jack should be • Check that the jack is not damaged, kept in its storage compartment under the threads are properly lubricated and 1. Clean the contact surfaces between the the cargo compartment floor. it is free from dirt. wheel and the wheel hub. • The jack provided with your vehicle is • Be sure the jack is on a firm, level, non- 2. Lift the wheel into place. Tighten the intended to be used only in temporary slippery surface and that it is upright wheel bolts securely. situations such as changing wheels in and not leaning. Do not grease the wheel bolt threads. the event of a flat tire. Only the jack • that came with your particular model The jack must correctly engage in the 3. Lower the vehicle so that the wheel can- should be used to lift the vehicle. If the jack attachment. not rotate. vehicle needs to be lifted more fre- • No objects should be placed between quently or for a prolonged period, using the base of the jack and the ground, or a garage jack or hoist is recommended. between the jack and the attachment Always follow this device's instructions bar on the vehicle. for use. • Never let anyone remain in the vehicle when it is raised on a jack. • If a tire must be changed near passing traffic, make sure all passengers move to a safe location. • Use a jack intended for the vehicle when changing a tire. For any other job, use stands to support the vehicle.

534 * Option/accessory. WHEELS AND TIRES

13 4. Tighten the wheel bolts in a crisscross pat- NOTE Spare wheel tern (as shown in illustration). It is impor- The spare wheel is a Temporary Spare and • After inflating a tire, always replace the tant that the wheel bolts are securely can be used to temporarily replace a punc- valve cap to help prevent valve damage tightened. Tighten to 140 Nm (103 ft. lbs.). tured tire on one of the vehicle's regular caused by gravel, dirt, etc. Use a torque wrench to check torque. wheels. • Use plastic valve caps only. Metal caps The spare tire is only intended for temporary could corrode and become difficult to use. Replace it with a normal wheel as soon as remove. possible. The driving characteristics of the vehicle Related information change and ground clearance reduces when • When changing wheels (p. 530) the spare wheel is used. Do not wash the vehi- • Hoisting the vehicle (p. 575) cle in an automatic car wash while using the • Jack* (p. 531) Temporary Spare. • Tool kit (p. 530) The recommended tire pressure must be maintained regardless of at which position the • Removing a wheel (p. 532) temporary spare wheel is used on the vehicle. • Saving a new inflation pressure in the If the spare wheel is damaged, a new one can 5. Press the plastic covers onto the wheel monitoring system* (p. 527) be purchased from a Volvo retailer. bolts. • Checking tire pressure (p. 523) 6. Check the tire inflation pressure and store WARNING the new inflation pressure in the tire pressure monitoring system*. Current legislation prohibits the use of the "Temporary Spare" tire other than as a temporary replacement for a punctured WARNING tire. It must be replaced as soon as possi- The wheel bolts may need to be tightened ble by a standard tire. Road holding and again several days after a wheel change. handling may be affected with the "Tempo- Temperature fluctuations and vibrations rary Spare" in use. Do not drive faster than can cause them to loosen slightly. 80 km/h (50 mph).

13 Not available on all models. }}

* Option/accessory. 535 WHEELS AND TIRES

|| WARNING CAUTION Handling spare tires Follow these instructions regarding handling • The vehicle must never be driven with The vehicle must not be driven with wheels the spare wheel. more than one "Temporary Spare" tire of different dimensions or with a spare tire mounted. other than the one that came with the vehi- • Driving with a spare wheel may alter cle. The use of different size wheels can the driving characteristics of the vehi- seriously damage your vehicle's transmis- cle. Replace the spare wheel with a sion. normal wheel as soon as possible. • The spare wheel is smaller than the Related information normal wheel, which affects the vehi- • When changing wheels (p. 530) cle's ground clearance. Watch for high curbs and do not wash the vehicle in • Recommended tire pressure (p. 525) an automatic car wash when a spare wheel is mounted. • Follow the manufacturer's recom- This illustration is generic and appearance may vary. mended tire inflation pressure for the The spare tire is located under the floor of the spare wheel. cargo compartment and is held in place by • On all-wheel drive vehicles, the drive two straps. The foam block contains all tools on the rear axle can be disconnected. needed to change a wheel. • If the spare wheel is mounted on the 1. Lift the rear edge of the cargo compart- front axle, snow chains must not be ment floor. used. 2. Release the straps and lift out the spare • The spare wheel must not be repaired. wheel. Related information • Spare wheel (p. 535) • Tool kit (p. 530) • Removing a wheel (p. 532)

536 WHEELS AND TIRES

Snow tires Tread depth Snow chains Snow tires are designed for winter driving Road conditions with ice, slush and low tem- Using snow chains and/or snow tires can conditions. peratures place considerably higher demands help improve traction in winter driving condi- Volvo recommends snow tires with specific on tires than summer conditions. Volvo there- tions. dimensions. The tire dimensions vary depend- fore recommends not driving on snow tires Volvo does not recommend use of snow ing on engine type. When driving with snow that have a tread depth of less than 4 mm chains on wheel dimensions larger than tires, the correct type of tires must be moun- (0.15 inch). 18 inches. ted on all four wheels. Related information • When changing wheels (p. 530) WARNING NOTE • Winter driving (p. 421) Use Volvo genuine snow chains or equiva- Contact a Volvo dealer for advice on the lent snow chains that are suitable for the • Tread wear indicator (p. 519) best choice of rims and tires. vehicle model and the tire and wheel sizes. Only one-sided snow chains are permitted. Tips for changing snow tires If uncertain about snow chains, Volvo rec- When switching between regular tires and ommends contacting an authorized Volvo snow tires, mark the tires according to which workshop. Use of the wrong snow chains side they were mounted on, e.g. L for left and could cause serious damage to the vehicle R for right. and result in an accident. Studded tires Studded tires should be broken in by driving 500–1000 km (300–600 miles) slowly and gently to help the studs settle properly in the tires. This gives the tire, and especially the studs, a longer service life.

NOTE Regulations regarding the use of studded tires vary from country to country.

}}

537 WHEELS AND TIRES

• 14 || CAUTION The handling of the vehicle can be Tire sealing system adversely affected when driving with The temporary tire sealing system can be Snow chains can be used on the vehicle, chains. Avoid fast or sharp turns as used to seal a puncture in a tire or to check with the following restrictions: well as locked wheel braking. and adjust the pressure in the tire. • Always follow the manufacturer's • Some types of strap-on chains affect Models equipped with a spare wheel15 do not installation instructions carefully. Install brake components and therefore must have the tire sealing system. chains as tightly as possible and NOT be used. retighten periodically. WARNING • Only put snow chains on the front Consult a Volvo retailer for more information California Proposition 65 wheels (also applies to all-wheel drive about snow chains. Operating, servicing and maintaining a pas- vehicles). senger vehicle can expose you to chemi- • Related information cals including engine exhaust, carbon mon- If accessory, aftermarket or "custom" • tires and wheels with different dimen- Winter driving (p. 421) oxide, phthalates, and lead, which are sions than the original tires and wheels known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproduc- are used, snow chains in some cases tive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid may NOT be used. Sufficient distance breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine between the chains and brakes, sus- except as necessary, service your vehicle in pension and body components must a well ventilated area and wear gloves or be maintained. wash your hands frequently when servicing • your vehicle. For more information go to Check local regulations regarding the www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger- use of snow chains before installing. vehicle. • Never exceed the snow chain manufacturer's specified maximum speed The tire sealing system consists of a compres- limit. Under no circumstances should sor and a bottle containing sealing compound. you exceed 50 km/h (30 mph). The sealing functions as a temporary repair. • Avoid bumps, holes or sharp turns when driving with snow chains. • Avoid driving on surfaces without snow as this wears out both the snow chains and the tires.

538 WHEELS AND TIRES

NOTE Sealing compound expiration date Using the tire sealing system The sealing compound bottle must be The temporary tire sealing system (TMK16) The sealing compound effectively seals replaced if its expiration date has passed (see can be used to seal a puncture in a tire. tires with punctures in the tread but may the decal on the bottle). Handle the old bottle not be able to fully seal tires with punctu- as hazardous waste. Overview res in the sidewall. Do not use the tire sealing system on tires with large tears, cracks Related information or similar damage. • Using the tire sealing system (p. 539) • Inflate tires with the compressor included NOTE in the tire sealing system (p. 543) • The compressor is intended for temporary Tires (p. 516) tire sealing and is approved by Volvo.

Location The tire sealing system is located in a foam block under the floor of the cargo compartment. Electrical cable

Hose

Air release valve

Protective hose cover

Speed limit sticker

Bottle holder (orange cover)

Air pressure gauge

14 Certain models only. 15 Not available on all models. }}

539 WHEELS AND TIRES

|| Sealing compound bottle WARNING the upper and lower eyelids. Get medical attention if symptoms occur. Switch Please keep the following points in mind when using the tire sealing system: • Inhalation: Move the exposed person to fresh air. If irritation persists, get Connecting • The sealing compound bottle (no. 8 in medical attention. the illustration) contains 1) rubber latex, • natural and 2) ethanediol. These sub- Ingestion: Do NOT induce vomiting stances are harmful if swallowed. unless directed to do so by medical • personnel. Get medical attention. The contents of this bottle may cause • allergic skin reactions or otherwise be Disposal: Dispose of this material and potentially harmful to the respiratory its container at a hazardous or special tract, the skin, the central nervous sys- waste collection point. tem, and the eyes. Precautions: WARNING • Keep out of reach of children. • Do not remove the bottle while the tire • Do not ingest the contents. sealing system is being used. • Avoid prolonged or repeated contact • Do not remove the hose while the tire NOTE with the skin. Remove any clothing sealing system is being used. Do not break the seal of the bottle before that has come into contact with seal- use. The seal is broken automatically when ant. 1. Turn on the vehicle's hazard warning the bottle is screwed into place. • Wash thoroughly after handling. flashers if the tire sealing system is to be used in an area with traffic. First aid: • Skin: Wash affected areas of the skin If the puncture was caused by a nail or with soap and water. Get medical similar object, do not remove it. It will help attention if symptoms occur. seal the hole. • Eyes: Flush with plenty of water for least 15 minutes, occasionally lifting

16 Temporary Mobility Kit

540 WHEELS AND TIRES

2. Peel off the speed limit sticker from the 6. Unscrew the tire's valve cap and screw 8. Start the compressor by moving the side of the compressor. Affix the decal to a the hose's valve connector as far as possi- switch to the I (On) position. clearly visible location on the windshield ble onto the valve. to remind the driver not to exceed this Be sure the air release valve on the com- WARNING speed limit. Do not drive faster than pressor's hose is completely closed. 80 km/h (50 mph) while using a tire that Never stand next to a tire being inflated 7. Connect the electrical cable to the nearest with the compressor. If cracks, bulges, etc. has been temporarily repaired with the tire form on the tire, switch off the compressor sealing system. 12 V outlet and start the vehicle. immediately. The vehicle should not be 3. Make sure the switch is in the 0 (Off) driven. Call roadside assistance to have the position and take out the electric cable NOTE vehicle towed to a workshop for inspection/replacement of the tire. Volvo recom- and the hose. Make sure that none of the vehicle's other mends an authorized workshop. 4. Unscrew the orange cover on the com- 12 V sockets are used while the compres- pressor and unscrew the cap on the seal- sor is running. NOTE ing compound bottle. When the compressor first starts, air pres- 5. Screw the bottle onto the bottle holder as WARNING sure may temporarily increase up to 6 bar far as possible. Never leave children unattended in the (88 psi) but should decrease again after The bottle and the bottle holder are equip- vehicle while the engine is running. approximately 30 seconds. ped with catches to help prevent the sealing compound from leaking. Once the bot- WARNING 9. Inflate the tire for 7 minutes. tle is screwed into place into the bottle holder, it cannot be unscrewed. The bottle Inhaling exhaust fumes could lead to seri- 17 ous injury. Never leave the engine running CAUTION can only be removed by a workshop . in an enclosed space or a space without sufficient ventilation. To help avoid overheating, the compressor WARNING should never be used for more than 10 minutes at a time. Do not unscrew the bottle. It is equipped with a catch to prevent leakage.

17 An authorized Volvo workshop is recommended. }}

541 WHEELS AND TIRES

|| 10. Switch off the compressor and check the 13. Put the protective hose cover onto the 16. Check the inflation pressure on the air inflation pressure using the air pressure hose to help prevent leakage of any resid- pressure gauge. gauge. The inflation pressure should be ual sealing compound. Return the equip- • If the pressure is under 1.3 bar (19 psi), between 1.8 bar (22 psi) and 3.5 bar ment to the cargo compartment. the tire is not sufficiently sealed. The (51 psi). If the inflation pressure is too 14. Immediately drive the vehicle at least vehicle should not be driven. Call road- high, use the air release valve to release 3 km (2 miles) at a maximum speed of side assistance to have the vehicle air. 80 km/h (50 mph) to allow the sealing towed. compound to seal the tire, and then • If the inflation pressure is higher than WARNING recheck the inflation pressure. 1.3 bar (19 psi), the tire must be inflated If pressure falls below 1.8 bar (22 psi), the to the inflation pressure specified on hole in the tire may be too large. The vehi- WARNING the tire pressure decal on the driver's cle should not be driven. Call roadside side door pillar (1 bar = 100 kPa = assistance to have the vehicle towed to a During the tire's first revolution, some seal- workshop for inspection/replacement of ing compound may spray out of the punc- 14.5 psi). If the inflation pressure is too the tire. Volvo recommends an authorized ture hole. Before driving away, make sure high, use the air release valve to release workshop. that no one is near the vehicle who could air. be sprayed with sealing compound. Make sure no one is within 2 meters(7 feet) of 11. Switch off the compressor and remove the vehicle. WARNING the electrical cable. Check inflation pressure regularly. 12. Unscrew the hose from the tire's valve and 15. Rechecking the inflation pressure screw the valve cap back on. Volvo recommends driving to the nearest Connect the hose to the tire's valve and authorized Volvo workshop to have the tire screw the hose connector onto the valve replaced/repaired. Inform the workshop that NOTE as far as possible. The compressor must the tire contains sealing compound. • After inflating a tire, always replace the be switched off. valve cap to help prevent valve damage The sealing compound bottle and the hose caused by gravel, dirt, etc. must be replaced after use. Volvo recommends contacting an authorized Volvo work- • Use plastic valve caps only. Metal caps shop for replacement. could corrode and become difficult to remove.

542 WHEELS AND TIRES

WARNING Inflate tires with the compressor 4. Start the compressor by moving the included in the tire sealing system switch to the I (On) position. After using the tire sealing system, the vehicle should not be driven farther than The vehicle's original tires can be inflated approximately 200 km (120 miles). using the compressor in the tire sealing sys- CAUTION tem. Risk of overheating. The compressor 1. The compressor must be switched off. NOTE should not be running for longer than 10 Make sure that the switch is in the 0 (Off) minutes at a time. The compressor is an electric device. Fol- position and take out the electrical cable low local regulations for disposal. and the hose. 5. Inflate the tire to the pressure specified on 2. Unscrew the tire's valve cap and screw the tire pressure decal on the driver's side Related information the hose's valve connector as far as possi- door pillar. If the inflation pressure is too • Recommended tire pressure (p. 525) ble onto the valve. high, use the air release valve to release • Tire sealing system (p. 538) Be sure the air release valve on the com- air. pressor's hose is completely closed. • Inflate tires with the compressor included 6. Switch off the compressor. Remove the in the tire sealing system (p. 543) 3. Connect the electrical cable to the nearest hose and the electrical cable. 12 V outlet and start the vehicle. 7. Screw the valve cap back onto the tire.

WARNING NOTE Inhaling exhaust fumes could lead to seri- • After inflating a tire, always replace the ous injury. Never leave the engine running valve cap to help prevent valve damage in an enclosed space or a space without sufficient ventilation. caused by gravel, dirt, etc. • Use plastic valve caps only. Metal caps could corrode and become difficult to WARNING remove. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle while the engine is running. NOTE The compressor is an electric device. Fol- low local regulations for disposal. }}

543 WHEELS AND TIRES

|| Related information Determining the vehicle's Gross vehicle weight (GVW) • Recommended tire pressure (p. 525) permitted weight The vehicle's curb weight + cargo + passen- • Using the tire sealing system (p. 539) Properly loading your vehicle will provide gers. maximum return of vehicle design perform- • Tire sealing system (p. 538) Steps for Determining Correct Load ance. Limit Weight designations 1. Locate the statement "the combined Before loading your vehicle, familiarize your- weight of occupants and cargo should self with the following terms for determining never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on your your vehicle's weight ratings, with or without a vehicle's placard. trailer, from the vehicle's Federal/Canadian 2. Determine the combined weight of the Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS/ driver and passengers that will be riding in CMVSS) label, and the vehicle's tire informa- your vehicle. tion placard: 3. Subtract the combined weight of the Curb weight driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX The weight of the vehicle including a full tank lbs. of fuel and all standard equipment. It does not include passengers, cargo, or optional equip- 4. The resulting figure equals the available ment. amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the "XXX" Capacity weight amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be All weight added to the curb weight, including five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the cargo and optional equipment. When towing, amount of available cargo and luggage towbar weight is also part of cargo weight. load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400 - 750 (5 × Permissible axle weight 150) = 650 lbs.) The maximum allowable weight that can be 5. Determine the combined weight of lug- carried by a single axle (front or rear). These gage and cargo being loaded on the vehi- numbers are shown on the Federal/Canadian cle. That weight may not safely exceed the Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS/ available cargo and luggage load capacity CMVSS) label. The total load on each axle calculated in Step 4. must never exceed its maximum permissible weight.

544 WHEELS AND TIRES

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.

WARNING • Exceeding the permissible axle weight, gross vehicle weight, or any other weight rating limits can cause tire overheating resulting in permanent defor- mation or catastrophic failure. • Do not use replacement tires with lower load carrying capacities than the tires that were original equipment on the vehicle because this will lower the vehicle's GVW rating. Use only tires with the correct load carrying capacity. Consult your Volvo retailer for information.

Related information • Loading recommendations (p. 555)

545

LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

Passenger compartment interior Rear seat Related information Overview of the passenger compartment • Electrical outlets (p. 550) interior and storage spaces. • Using the glove compartment (p. 553) Front seats • Sun visors (p. 555) • Tunnel console (p. 549) • Connecting a device via the USB port (p. 478)

Storage compartment in the door panel, cup holders* in the center seat's backrest, storage pocket* in the front seat's backrest, electrical outlets in the tunnel console and storage compartment under the seat. Storage compartment in door panel, glove compartment and sun visors. WARNING Store loose objects, such as cell phone, camera, remote control for extra equipment, etc., in the glove compartment or another compartment. Otherwise, these could injure people in the vehicle in the event of hard braking or a collision.

CAUTION Keep in mind that glossy surfaces can be easily scratched by e.g. metal objects. Do not place keys, phones or similar items on sensitive surfaces. Storage compartments with cup holders, electrical outlets and USB ports in the tunnel console.

548 * Option/accessory. LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

Tunnel console WARNING The tunnel console is located between the Store loose objects, such as cell phone, front seats. camera, remote control for extra equipment, etc., in the glove compartment or another compartment. Otherwise, these could injure people in the vehicle in the event of hard braking or a collision.

CAUTION Keep in mind that glossy surfaces can be easily scratched by e.g. metal objects. Do not place keys, phones or similar items on sensitive surfaces.

Storage compartment with cover*. The NOTE cover can be opened/closed by pressing * the handle. One of the sensors for the alarm is located under the cup holder in the center console. Storage compartment with cup holder and Avoid placing coins, keys and other metal 12 V socket. objects in the cup holder as this could trig- Storage compartment and USB port ger the alarm. under the armrest. Climate control panel for the rear seats* or Related information storage compartment. • Passenger compartment interior (p. 548) • Electrical outlets (p. 550) • Climate system controls (p. 211)

* Option/accessory. 549 LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

Electrical outlets Electrical outlets in the tunnel console There are two 12 V electrical outlets and one - rear seat* 120 V electrical outlet* in the tunnel console, and one 12 V electrical outlet* in the trunk/ cargo compartment. If a problem occurs with an electrical socket, contact a workshop - an authorized Volvo workshop is recommended. 12 V outlets

12 V outlet in the tunnel console, rear seat.

Electrical outlets in the tunnel console, rear seat. The high-voltage outlet* can be used for devices intended for this, such as chargers, laptops, etc. High-voltage outlet status indicator light An LED1 light on the outlet indicates its status: 12 V outlet in the tunnel console, front seat. The 12 V outlets can be used for devices intended for this such as MP3 players, coolers * and cellular phones. 12 V outlet in the cargo compartment .

1 LED (Light Emitting Diode)

550 * Option/accessory. LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

Status indicator light Cause Action Steady green light The outlet is providing electrical current to a connected device. None. Flashing orange light The outlet's voltage converter is too hot (e.g. if the device draws too Unplug the device, let the voltage converter much current or if the temperature in the passenger compartment is very cool down and plug in the device again. high). The connected device is drawing too much current (at the moment or None. The device cannot be used in the out- constantly) or is not functioning properly. let. Indicator light off The outlet has not detected a device plugged into the outlet. Make sure the device is correctly plugged into the outlet. The outlet is not active. Make sure the vehicle's ignition is in at least mode I. The outlet has been active but has been deactivated. Start the engine and/or charge the start battery.

Related information • Passenger compartment interior (p. 548) • Using the electrical outlets (p. 552)

551 LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

Using the electrical outlets NOTE Using 12 V outlets The 12 V outlet can be used for devices 1. Remove the stopper (tunnel console) or Bear in mind that using the electrical out- intended for this such as MP3 players, cool- fold down the cover (trunk/cargo com- lets when the engine is off could cause the ers and cellular phones. partment) over the socket and plug in the starter battery to have too low of a charge device. The high-voltage outlet* can be used for devi- level, which could limit other functionality. ces intended for this, such as chargers, lap- 2. Unplug the device and put the stopper Accessories connected to the electrical tops, etc. back in (tunnel console) or fold up the outlets can be activated even when the The ignition must be in at least mode I for the cover (trunk/cargo compartment) when vehicle electrical system is off or if precon- outlets to supply current. The outlets will then the socket is not in use or left unattended. ditioning is used. For this reason, discon- be active as long as there is sufficient charge nect plugs when they are not in use to pre- in the start battery. vent the starter battery from becoming dis- CAUTION If the engine is turned off and the vehicle is charged. The maximum power is 120 W (10 A) per locked, the outlets will be deactivated. If the outlet. engine is turned off and the vehicle remains WARNING unlocked, the sockets will remain active for up Using high-voltage outlets to 7 minutes. • Do not use accessories with large or The ignition must be in at least mode I for the heavy plugs – they could damage the outlets to supply current. The outlets will then outlet or come loose while you are driv- be active as long as there is sufficient charge ing. in the start battery. • Do not use accessories that could 1. Slide down the cover over the outlet and cause disruptions to e.g. the vehicle's plug in the device. radio receiver or electrical system. > The LED2 light on the outlet will indi- • Position the accessory so that there is cate its status. no risk of it injuring the driver or passengers in the event of heavy braking 2. The outlet is supplying electrical current or a collision. when the light is glowing steadily green. • Pay attention to connected accessories as they can generate heat that could burn passengers or the interior.

2 LED (Light Emitting Diode)

552 * Option/accessory. LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

3. Disconnect the device by pulling out the WARNING Using the glove compartment plug (do not pull on the cord). The glove compartment is located on the pas- • Only use accessories that are not dam- senger side. The glove compartment can be Pull up the cover when the outlet is not in aged or malfunctioning. The accesso- used to store the Owner's Manual, maps, etc. use or is left unattended. ries must be CE marked, UL marked or There is also room for a pen and a card have an equivalent safety marking. holder. CAUTION • Accessories must be designed for 120 The maximum power is 150 W. V and 60 Hz, with plugs intended for the outlet. • WARNING New let outlets, plugs or accessories come into contact with water or Do not attempt to alter or repair the high- another fluid. Do not touch or use the voltage outlet on your own. Volvo recom- outlet if it appears damaged or has mends contacting an authorized Volvo been in contact with water or another workshop. fluid. • Do not connect power strips, adapters or extension cords to the outlet has this could cause the outlet's safety functions to malfunction. Locking and unlocking the glove box* • The outlet is equipped with a pet The glove compartment can be locked when guard. Make sure that no one picks at the vehicle is left at a workshop, hotel, etc. or damages the outlet in such a way The glove compartment can then only be that the guard is disabled. Children locked/unlocked with the glove compartment should not be left unsupervised in the key. vehicle when the outlet is active. Failure to follow the above could lead to severe or fatal electrical shocks.

Related information • Electrical outlets (p. 550) • Passenger compartment interior (p. 548) }}

* Option/accessory. 553 LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

Storage compartment for the key. The illustration is The illustration is generic – the design may vary. The illustration is generic – the design may vary. generic – the design may vary. To lock the glove compartment: Activate cooling. Insert the key into the lock on the glove Deactivate cooling. compartment. Turn the key 90 degrees clockwise. – Activate or deactivate cooling by moving the control as far as possible toward the Remove the key from the lock. passenger compartment/glove compartment. – To unlock, perform the above steps in reverse. Related information • Using the glove box as a cooled area* Passenger compartment interior (p. 548) The glove compartment can be used to cool • Private Locking (p. 264) e.g. drinks or food. Cooling is possible when the climate system is active (i.e. when the ignition is in mode II or when the engine is running).

554 * Option/accessory. LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

Sun visors Cargo compartment Loading recommendations In the ceiling in front of the driver's and front The vehicle has a flexible cargo compartment There are a number of things that are impor- passenger's seats, there are sun visors that that makes it possible to carry and secure tant to consider when carrying loads in or on can be lowered and angled to the side as large objects. the vehicle. necessary. The cargo capacity of the vehicle can be con- Load-carrying capacity is determined by the siderably increased by folding down the rear vehicle's curb weight. The total weight of all seat backrests. To make loading and unload- passengers and any installed accessories ing easier, the rear section of the vehicle can reduces the vehicle's load-carrying capacity by be raised and lowered using the level control the corresponding amount. function*. Use the load anchoring eyelets or grocery bag holders to help secure objects in WARNING place, and the retractable cargo compartment cover* to help conceal objects in the cargo The vehicle's driving characteristics change depending on the weight and position of compartment. the load. The towing eyelet and tire sealing system, or the temporary spare tire*, are located under Loading the cargo compartment/trunk the cargo compartment floor. Keep the following in mind when loading: The illustration is generic – the design may vary. • The mirror lighting* comes on automatically Related information Position objects so they are pressing when the visor is lifted up. • Loading recommendations (p. 555) against the rear seat backrests. • Grocery bag holders (p. 557) • Heavy objects should be positioned as low The mirror frame has a holder for e.g. cards or as possible. Avoid placing heavy objects tickets. • Load anchoring eyelets (p. 558) • on folded-down seat backrests. Installing and removing the cargo com- • Related information partment cover* (p. 559) Cover sharp corners with a soft cloth or • Passenger compartment interior (p. 548) similar to help prevent damage to the upholstery. • Use the load anchoring eyelets and tensioning straps or similar to secure all objects.

}}

* Option/accessory. 555 LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

|| WARNING ment/trunk and simplify loading. If the rear The controls consist of two buttons ‒ one but- seat backrests are folded down, make sure ton for lowering and one button for raising the In a head-on collision at a speed of that no objects loaded into the vehicle prevent rear end. Press and hold the relevant button 50 km/h (30 mph), an unsecured object the WHIPS system for the front seats from until the desired height is reached. weighing 20 kg (44 pounds) can reach a functioning correctly. projectile weight equivalent to 1000 kg The rear end of the vehicle cannot be raised (2200 pounds). The ski hatch in the rear seat can be folded higher than its normal height. down to carry skis or other long, thin objects. The rear end will return to the normal height WARNING Raising/lowering the rear end of the when the vehicle begins driving. If objects are loaded higher than the upper vehicle* edge of the side windows, leave a 10 cm The rear end of the vehicle can be lowered or NOTE (4 in.) space between the objects and the raised for easier loading into the cargo com- window. Objects placed closer to this It is not possible to adjust the height of the partment/trunk or to facilitate attaching a vehicle's rear when one or more of the could impede the function of the inflatable * curtain concealed inside the headlining. trailer . doors or the hood is open. This does not The controls for raising/lowering are located at apply to the tailgate. the rear edge of the right side panel in the WARNING cargo compartment/trunk. Always secure the load. Otherwise, it may WARNING shift during heavy braking and injure peo- Make sure that no people, animals or ple in the vehicle. objects are found under the vehicle when it Cover sharp edges and sharp corners with is lowered. This could endanger life and something soft. cause damage to the vehicle or objects. Turn off the engine and apply the parking brake when loading/unloading long Related information objects. Otherwise, it is possible for the • Load anchoring eyelets (p. 558) load to reach the gear lever or gear selector • Folding down the rear seat backrests and move it to a drive position – which (p. 194) could cause the vehicle to begin rolling. • Rear seat ski hatch (p. 558) Extra cargo space • Roof loads and load carriers (p. 557) The rear seat backrests can be folded down to Controls for raising/lowering the rear end of the vehi- • * cle. Leveling control and suspension (p. 413) increase cargo space in the cargo compart- • Weights (p. 635)

556 * Option/accessory. LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

Roof loads and load carriers WARNING Grocery bag holders Volvo-developed load carriers are recom- Grocery bag holders (hooks) help keep shop- The vehicle's center of gravity and driving mended for carrying loads on the roof of the characteristics are altered by roof loads. ping bags in place and prevent them from vehicle. falling over and spilling their contents in the Volvo load carriers are specially designed to Follow the vehicle's specifications regar- cargo compartment. ding weights and maximum permitted help prevent damage to your vehicle and help load. ensure maximum safety while driving. Volvo On the sides of the cargo load carriers are available from authorized compartment Volvo retailers. Related information • Loading recommendations (p. 555) Carefully follow the installation instructions • provided with the load carriers. Weights (p. 635) • Distribute the load evenly throughout the load carriers. Place heavier cargo at the bottom of the load. • Check periodically to ensure that the load carriers and load are properly secured. Secure the load firmly using tie straps or similar. • If the load is longer than the vehicle, such as a canoe or kayak, attach the towing There is a grocery bag holder in the side panel eyelet in its front outlet and secure the tie on each side of the cargo compartment. straps in it. CAUTION • The vehicle's wind resistance and fuel consumption increase with the size of the The grocery bag holders are only intended load. to hold weights up to 5 kg (11 lbs). • Drive smoothly. Avoid rapid acceleration, hard braking and fast cornering. Related information • Loading recommendations (p. 555) • Using the glove compartment (p. 553)

}}

557 LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

• Installing and removing the cargo net* Load anchoring eyelets Rear seat ski hatch (p. 564) The load anchoring eyelets in the cargo com- The hatch in the rear seat backrest can be • Installing and removing the cargo compartment can be used to secure objects with opened to transport long, narrow objects partment cover* (p. 559) straps, a net, etc. such as skis. • Installing and removing the steel cargo grid* (p. 562)

The illustration is generic - details may vary according to vehicle model. WARNING 1. In the cargo compartment, grasp the ski Hard, sharp and/or heavy objects in or protruding from the vehicle can cause injury in hatch handle and pull it down. the event of hard braking. 2. Fold down the armrest in the rear seat. Always secure large and heavy objects If the private locking function is used, the ski with a seat belt or cargo retaining straps. hatch must be closed.

Related information Related information • Loading recommendations (p. 555) • Loading recommendations (p. 555) • Weights (p. 635) • Private Locking (p. 264) • Load anchoring eyelets (p. 558)

558 * Option/accessory. LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

Installing and removing the cargo Then put the other end piece in the recess Fitting the tailgate flap compartment cover* in the side panel on the opposite side. In the fully open position, the cover and the rear flap conceal objects in the cargo compartment. Installing the cargo compartment cover

Make sure the front flap is pointed downward behind the backrest before the cas- A flap should be mounted on the tailgate sette is put into place. when using the cargo compartment cover. Push the end piece down on both sides, 1. one at a time. > When a click is heard and the red marks on each end piece are no longer visible, the cover is in place. Check that Press the end piece on one side of the it is secure. cover into the retaining bracket in the side panel of the cargo compartment.

Turn the flap so that the screw side faces down and guide the pin into the bracket on one side of the tailgate.

}}

* Option/accessory. 559 LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

|| 2. Squeeze together the flap slightly to make 1. Related information it easier to guide the pin into place in the • Operating the cargo compartment cover* bracket on the other side. (p. 561) 3. • Loading recommendations (p. 555)

Pull the upper clips of the cover straight out of the tailgate. 2. Press the two upper clips in the respective recess in the tailgate so it clicks into place. Removing the cargo compartment cover In retracted position: 1. Press the button on one of the cover's ends and lift out that end. 2. Carefully lift the cover up and out. > The other end will release automatically Carefully pull the flap out of the bracket on and the cover can then be lifted out of one side of the tailgate and then the other. the cargo compartment. If necessary, press the flap together Removing the tailgate flap slightly to make it more flexible and facili- If the cargo compartment cover is not being tate removal. used, the rear flap should be removed.

560 * Option/accessory. LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

Operating the cargo compartment Loading mode cover* From the fully opened position: The cover can be used in two positions: fully – open to completely cover the cargo compartment or partially retracted to make it easier to reach further into the cargo compartment. Fully open

Cover in the fully open position. Press the handle section of the cargo compartment slightly upward. > The cover will move up until it stops in the partially retracted position. Grasp the handle and pull the cover out as Returning to the fully open position from the far as possible. partially retracted position: Press the attachment pins in the recesses 1. Grasp the handle and pull the cover down in the rear pillars of the cargo compart- as far as possible. Angle the handle ment. slightly upward so that the attaching pins > The cover will be secured in the fully can more easily move past the first set of open position. grooves. The rear flap mounted on the inside of the tailgate supplements the cargo compartment cover. 2. Release the handle so that the attaching pins engage into the grooves. CAUTION > The cover will be secured in the fully open position. Do not place objects on top of the cargo compartment cover.

}}

* Option/accessory. 561 LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

|| CAUTION Installing and removing the steel Installation cargo grid* When in the loading position, the cargo The steel cargo grid prevents loads or pets in compartment cover can obstruct visibility CAUTION the cargo compartment from being thrown to the rear. Make sure that the cargo com- The steel cargo grid may only be used in forward into the passenger compartment partment cover is fully extended or fully the rear position (behind the rear seat) during hard braking. retracted during driving. described here.

Retracting the cover Before installing the steel grid, the existing 1. From the fully opened position: plastic ceiling mounting consoles must be replaced with steel consoles. Volvo recom- Lift the cover's handle and pull it rearward mends that the ceiling consoles are only to release the cover's attaching pins from replaced by an authorized Volvo workshop or the grooves. Let the cover retract. retailer. From the partially retracted position: 1. Fold down the rear seat backrests. Grasp the handle and pull the cover out of 2. Make sure that the steel grid is facing the the groves to the fully open position. Lift right direction. Lift the grid into the vehicle the handle and pull it rearward to release through one of the rear doors. the cover's attaching pins from the For safety reasons, the steel grid must always grooves. Let the cover retract. be installed and secured correctly. 2. Let the cover retract with its attaching pins above the side panels until it stops in WARNING the fully retracted position. Under no circumstances may a person be Related information in the cargo compartment when the vehi- • Installing and removing the cargo com- cle is moving. Heavy braking or a collision could lead to serious injury. partment cover* (p. 559)

562 * Option/accessory. LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

3. 4. Related information • Loading recommendations (p. 555) • Load anchoring eyelets (p. 558)

Position the grid's attachment points in Screw the provided screw into place using the ceiling consoles. the provided 6 mm Allen wrench. Repeat on the other side. Recommended torque: The next step will be easier if two people 20 Nm (15 ft-lb). hold the steel grid in the right position. > Check to make sure the steel grid is securely in place. 5. Return the backrest to the upright position. For more information on necessary tools and procedures for installing/removing, see the assembly instructions provided with the steel grid.

CAUTION The steel cargo grid cannot be folded up or down when a cargo compartment cover is mounted.

563 LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

Installing and removing the cargo WARNING 3. Insert the net's other upper hook into the net* ceiling mounting point on the opposite Objects in the cargo compartment must side. The cargo net helps prevent objects in the always be securely anchored, even with a cargo compartment from entering the pas- correctly installed cargo net. The telescopic spring-loaded hooks make senger compartment in the event of a sudden mounting easier. stop or hard braking. Installing the cargo net The cargo net is attached at four points. Make sure that the net's hooks are pushed forward as far as possible into their WARNING respective mounting points. All of the cargo net's upper consoles, hooks and straps must be securely mounted and attached before the net is used. Never use the net if it is damaged.

NOTE With front mounting, the cargo net is most easily installed via a rear door.

1. Fold out the cargo net and make sure that For safety reasons, the cargo net must always the upper rod folds out and locks into be mounted and secured according to the fol- position. lowing description. 2. Insert one of the net's hooks into the front The net is made of strong nylon weave and or rear ceiling mounting point with the can be attached in two different locations in strap lock facing you. the vehicle: • Rear mounting - behind the rear seats. • Front mounting - behind the front seats.

564 * Option/accessory. LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

4. 5. Pull the straps until the cargo net is taut. Removing the cargo net The cargo net can be easily removed and folded up. 1. Loosen the cargo net by pressing the button on the strap locks on each side and pulling to allow some slack. 2. Press in the catches and release both of the strap hooks. 3. Unhook the upper hooks and remove the Front mounting. net from the ceiling mounting points. Rear mounting. 4. Press the red button on the rod so that it For front mounting: can be folded. Fold and roll up the net. For rear mounting: With the cargo net mounted in the front Store the net in its case. With the cargo net hooked into the rear ceiling mounting points, hook the straps ceiling mounting points, attach the net's into the outer eyelets on the front seat rails Related information straps into the front cargo anchoring eye- behind the seats. Attaching the net is eas- • Loading recommendations (p. 555) lets in the cargo compartment. ier if the seat backrests are upright and the • Load anchoring eyelets (p. 558) seats are moved slightly forward. Move the seat or backrest only until it touches the net. Moving it with too much force or applying too much pressure to the net could lead to damage.

CAUTION If a seat or backrest is pressed with too much force back against the cargo net, the net and its ceiling brackets could be damaged.

565

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

Volvo's service program Introduction Applicable warranties - U.S./Canada To keep the vehicle as safe and reliable as The maintenance services contain several In accordance with applicable U.S. and Cana- possible, follow the Volvo service schedule checks that require special instruments and dian regulations, the following list of warran- specified in the Warranty and Maintenance tools and therefore must be performed by a ties is provided. qualified technician. To keep your Volvo in top Records Information booklet. • New Vehicle Limited Warranty condition, specify time-tested and proven WARNING Genuine Volvo Parts and Accessories. • Parts and Accessories Limited Warranty California Proposition 65 • The Federal Clean Air Act - U.S. Corrosion Protection Limited Warranty Operating, servicing and maintaining a pas- The Federal Clean Air Act requires vehicle • Seat Belt and Supplemental Restraint senger vehicle can expose you to chemi- manufacturers to furnish written instructions Systems Limited Warranty cals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead, which are to the ultimate purchaser to assure the proper • Emission Design and Defect Warranty servicing and function of the components that known to the State of California to cause • Emission Performance Warranty cancer and birth defects or other reproduc- control emissions. These services, which are tive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid listed in the "Warranty and Service Records These are federal warranties; other warranties breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine Information" booklet, are not covered by the are provided as required by state/provincial except as necessary, service your vehicle in warranty. You will be required to pay for labor law. Refer to your separate Warranty and a well ventilated area and wear gloves or and material used. Service Records Information booklet for wash your hands frequently when servicing detailed information concerning each of the Maintenance your vehicle. For more information go to warranties. www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger- Your Volvo passed several major inspections vehicle. before it was delivered to you, in accordance with Volvo specifications. The maintenance Volvo recommends having an authorized procedures outlined in the Warranty and Serv- Volvo workshop perform service and mainte- ice Records Information booklet, many of nance. Volvo workshops have the staff, service which will positively affect your vehicle's emis- literature and special tools that can provide sions, should be performed as indicated. It is the highest quality of service. recommended that receipts for vehicle emission maintenance be retained in case ques- CAUTION tions arise concerning maintenance. Inspec- tion and maintenance should also be per- To ensure the Volvo warranty is not invali- formed anytime a malfunction is observed or dated, check and follow the Warranty and suspected. Service Records Information booklet.

568 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

Periodic maintenance helps minimize Emission inspection readiness your vehicle diagnosed and, if necessary, serviced by a qualified Volvo technician. emissions How do states use OBD II for emission inspections? • If you recently had service for a lit Check NOTE Many states connect a computer directly to a Engine light, or if you had service that required disconnecting the battery, a • Refer to your Service and Warranty vehicle's OBD II system. The inspector can period of driving is necessary to bring the Booklet for a comprehensive service then read "faults." In some states, this type of OBD II system to "ready" for inspection. and maintenance schedule up to inspection has replaced the tailpipe emission Two half-hour trips of mixed stop-and-go/ 240,000 km (150,000 miles). This test. highway driving are typically needed to program contains inspections and ser- How can my vehicle fail OBD II emission allow OBD II to reach readiness. Your vices necessary for the proper function inspection? Volvo retailer can provide you with more of your vehicle and includes compo- Your vehicle can fail OBD II emission inspec- information on planning a trip. nents that affect vehicle emissions. tion for any of the following reasons: • Maintain your vehicle in accordance with • The Warranty and Service Records • If your Check Engine (MIL) light is lit, your your vehicle's maintenance schedule. Information booklet also contains vehicle may fail inspection. detailed information concerning the Owner maintenance • If your vehicle's Check Engine light was lit, warranties that apply to your vehicle. Periodic maintenance requirements and inter- but went out without any action on your vals are described in your vehicle's Warranty part, OBD II will still have a recorded fault. and Service Records Information booklet. On-board Diagnostic System Your vehicle may pass or fail, depending OBD II is part of your vehicle's computerized on the inspection practices in your area. The following points can be carried out engine management system. It stores diag- • If you had recent service that required dis- between the normally scheduled maintenance nostic information about your vehicle's emis- connecting the battery, OBD II diagnostic services. sion controls. It can light the Check Engine information may be incomplete and "not light (MIL) if it detects an emission control Each time the vehicle is refueled: ready" for inspection. A vehicle that is not "fault." A "fault" is a component or system • Check the engine oil level. ready may fail inspection. that is not performing within an expected • Clean the windshield, windshield wipers, range. A fault may be permanent or temporary. How can I prepare for my next OBD II headlights, and taillights. OBD II will store a message about any fault. emission inspection? • If your Check Engine (MIL) light is lit or was lit but went out without service, have

}}

569 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

|| Monthly: Related information Data transfer between vehicle and • Check cold tire pressure in all tires. • Vehicle status (p. 572) workshop over Wi-Fi Inspect the tires for wear. • Scheduling service and repairs (p. 573) Volvo workshops have a designated Wi-Fi network for data transfer between your vehi- • Check that engine coolant and other fluid • Connecting equipment to the vehicle's cle and the workshop. Your visit to the work- levels are between the indicated "min" data link connector (p. 37) and "max" markings. shop will be easier and more effective when • Technician certification (p. 38) diagnostics information and software can be • Clean interior glass surfaces with a glass • transferred over the workshop's network. cleaner and soft paper towels. Climate control system service (p. 577) • At the workshop, your service technician can • Wipe driver information displays with a Maintenance of the brake system (p. 389) • connect your vehicle to the workshop's Wi-Fi soft cloth. Engine compartment overview (p. 579) network to perform troubleshooting and • Visually inspect battery terminals for cor- download software. For this type of communi- rosion. Corrosion may indicate a loose ter- cation, the vehicle only connects to a work- minal connector, or a battery near the end shop's network. It is not possible to connect of its useful service life. Consult your Volvo the vehicle to another Wi-Fi network (e.g. your retailer for additional information. home network) in the same way as to a work- As needed: shop's network. Wash the vehicle, including the undercarriage, Connecting with remote key to reduce wear that can be caused by a Connection is usually managed by the service buildup of dirt, and corrosion that can be technician, who will use the remote key but- caused by salt residues. tons. It is therefore important to bring a key Clean leaves and twigs from air intake vents at with buttons with you when you visit the the base of the windshield, and from other pla- workshop. Pressing the lock button on the ces where they may collect. remote key three times will connect the vehicle to the workshop's Wi-Fi network. NOTE When the car is connected to a Wi-Fi net- Complete service information for qualified work, the symbol appears in the center technicians is available online for purchase display. or subscription at www.volvotechinfo.com.

570 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

WARNING Download Center Handling system updates via 1 Download Center The vehicle may not be driven when it is With the vehicle connected to the Internet , connected to the workshop's networks and updates for a number of the vehicle's sys- Functions for Internet-connected vehicles systems. tems can be downloaded from the center dis- and infotainment can be updated via Down- play. load Center. Updates can be done one at a time or all at the same time. Related information The Download Center app is started from the center dis- • Handling system updates via Download play and makes it possible to: Searching for update Center (p. 571) If an update is available, the • Scheduling service and repairs (p. 573) message New software updates available will be displayed in the center dis- • search for and update system software play's status field. • update Sensus Navigation* map data • download, update and delete apps. In order for system updates to be possible, the vehicle must have an Internet connection2. Related information • Handling system updates via Download – Go to Download Center in the center dis- Center (p. 571) play's App view. • Download apps (p. 453) > If no search has been performed since the last time the infotainment system • Updating apps (p. 453) was started, a search will be initiated. • Deleting apps (p. 454) No search will begin if a software • Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 496) download is in progress. • Navigating in the center display's views A number in System updates shows (p. 116) how many updates are available. Tap to display a list of updates that can be installed in the vehicle.

1 There may be a charge for transmitting data over the Internet, depending on your service plan. 2 There may be a charge for transmitting data over the Internet, depending on your service plan. }}

* Option/accessory. 571 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

|| NOTE Note that only a download can be cancelled. Vehicle status An installation cannot be cancelled once it has The vehicle's general status can be displayed Data downloading can affect other services begun. in the center display along with the option to such as transfer data, e.g. web radio. If the schedule service3. affect on other services is experienced as Deactivating the background search The Car Status app is started problematic, the download can be interrup- for software update from the center display's App ted. Alternatively, it may be appropriate to Automatic searching for software updates is view and has four tabs: switch off or cancel other services. activated as the default factory setting, but the function can be deactivated. NOTE 1. Tap Settings in the center display's Top view. An update can be interrupted when the • Messages - status messages ignition is switched off and the vehicle is 2. Tap System Download Center. • Status – checking engine oil level and left. 3. Tap to deselect Auto Software Update. AdBlue level4 However, the update does not have to be • TPMS - tire inflation pressure check completed before the vehicle is left as the Related information update is resumed the next time the vehi- • Download Center (p. 571) • Appointments - appointment information 3 cle is used. • Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 496) and vehicle information . • Navigating in the center display's views Related information Updating all system software (p. 116) • Handling messages saved from the instru- – Select Install all at the bottom of the list. ment panel (p. 109) To avoid displaying a list, select Install all via • Checking and filling engine oil (p. 581) System updates. • Tire pressure monitoring system* (p. 525) Updating individual system software • Scheduling service and repairs (p. 573) – Select Install to choose the software you • Sending vehicle information to the work- would like to download. shop (p. 574) Canceling software download • Navigating in the center display's views – Tap the checkbox in the activity indicator (p. 116) that replaced Install when the download began.

572 * Option/accessory. MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

Scheduling service and repairs5 2. Tap Appointments. The retailer will send you a digital appointment suggestion. You also have information about This service offers a way to send a booking 3. Tap Request appointment. request for service and workshop appoint- your retailer available in the vehicle so that you 4. ments directly from the vehicle. Check that your Volvo ID is correct. can contact your workshop. When it is time for service, and in certain 5. Make sure your preferred Workshop is Accepting an appointment suggestion cases if the vehicle requires repairs, a mes- correct. When the vehicle has received an appoint- sage will be displayed in the instrument panel 6. In the Tap to write information to the ment suggestion, a message will be displayed and at the top of the center display. The time workshop field, you can provide details at the top of the center display. for service is determined by how much time on what you would like performed during has elapsed, the number of hours the engine 1. Tap the message. the visit or other important information to has run, or the distance driven since the last your workshop. 2. To accept the suggested appointment, tap service. Accept. Otherwise, tap Send new 7. Tap Send appointment request. To use the service proposal or Decline. > You will receive an appointment sug- • Create a Volvo ID and register it to the For some markets, the system reminds you gestion by email within a couple of vehicle. when an appointment time is approaching and days7. • To send and receive appointment informa- the navigation system8 can also guide you to tion, the vehicle must be connected to the On some markets, the message in the the workshop at the appointed time. Internet6. instrument panel indicating that the vehicle requires service will go out once Related information Book service the appointment request has been sent. • Vehicle status (p. 572) Book a service request when desired or when 8. Tap Cancel request if you would like to • Sending vehicle information to the work- a message is displayed indicating that service cancel your request. shop (p. 574) or repairs are needed. • The appointment request contains information Navigating in the center display's views 1. Open the Car Status app from App view about your vehicle that helps the workshop (p. 116) in the center display. plan for your visit. • Volvo ID (p. 26) • Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 496)

3 Certain markets only. 4 AdBlue Diesel models only. 5 Certain markets only. 6 There may be a charge for transmitting data over the Internet, depending on your service plan. 7 Timespan may vary depending on market. 8 For vehicles with Sensus Navigation*.

* Option/accessory. 573 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

Sending vehicle information to the was turned on). This includes information workshop9 regarding: Vehicle-related information can be sent at • service requirements any time from the vehicle, e.g. if you schedule • time since last service was performed a visit to a workshop and would like to assist • your workshop by providing additional basic function status information. Sending vehicle information is • fluid levels not the same as scheduling service. • mileage (odometer reading) 1. Open the Car Status app from App view 11 in the center display. • Vehicle Identification Number (VIN ) • software version 2. Tap Appointments. • diagnostic information. 3. Tap Send vehicle data. > A message confirming that vehicle-rela- Related information ted information has been sent will • Scheduling service and repairs (p. 573) appear at the top of the center display. • Vehicle status (p. 572) You can cancel data transmission by • Navigating in the center display's views tapping the checkbox in the activity (p. 116) indicator. • Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 496) Information is sent via the vehicle's Internet connection10. Vehicle information can be accessed by any retailer if they are provided with your vehicle identification number (VIN11). Vehicle information contents The most recently saved vehicle-related information will be sent (the last time the vehicle

9 Certain markets only. 10 There may be a charge for transmitting data over the Internet, depending on your service plan. 11 Vehicle Identification Number.

574 * Option/accessory. MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

Hoisting the vehicle NOTE When hoisting the vehicle, it is important that Volvo recommends only using the jack the jack is positioned on the designated intended for your specific vehicle model. If points under the vehicle. a jack other than that recommended by For vehicles with Leveling Control*: If the Volvo is used, follow the instructions vehicle is equipped with pneumatic suspen- included with the equipment. sion, this feature must be turned off before the vehicle is lifted onto a tow truck. The vehicle's ordinary jack is only intended to be used in temporary situations for short WARNING periods of time, such as when changing wheels in the event of a flat tire. If the vehi- If the vehicle is lifted on a garage jack, the cle needs to be lifted more frequently, or jack must be placed under one of the four for a longer period of time than for a wheel lifting points. Make sure that the vehicle is correctly positioned on the jack and that it change, a garage jack or hoist is recom- cannot slide off. Make sure the jack plate mended. Always follow the instructions for has a rubber pad to help keep the vehicle use provided with the equipment. stable and prevent damage. Always use axle stands or similar.

}}

* Option/accessory. 575 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

The triangles in the plastic covering indicate where the jack attachment points/lifting points (red areas) are located. Related information • Removing a wheel (p. 532) • Jack* (p. 531) • Leveling control settings* (p. 416)

576 * Option/accessory. MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

Climate control system service Related information Replacing a windshield with head- Service and repairs on the air conditioning • Volvo's service program (p. 568) up display* system should only be done by an authorized Vehicles with a head-up display have a spe- workshop. cial type of windshield that meets the requirements for displaying projected infor- Troubleshooting and repairs mation. The air conditioning system contains a fluores- Volvo recommends contacting an authorized cent tracer substance. Ultraviolet light is used Volvo workshop for assistance replacing the to search for leaks in the system. windshield. The correct type of replacement Volvo recommends contacting an authorized windshield must be used in order for the head- Volvo workshop. up display to function properly. Vehicles with R134a refrigerant Related information • Head-up display* (p. 143) WARNING • Cleaning the head-up display* (p. 611) The air conditioning system contains the refrigerant R134a under pressure. Service and repairs to the system should only be done by an authorized workshop.

Vehicles with R1234yf refrigerant

WARNING The air conditioning system contains the refrigerant R1234yf under pressure. In accordance with SAE J2845 (Technician Training for Safe Service and Containment of Refrigerants Used in Mobile A/C Sys- tem), service and repairs to the refrigerant system may only be performed by trained and certified technicians in order to ensure the safety of the system.

* Option/accessory. 577 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

Opening and closing the hood Closing the hood To open the hood, pull the lever in the pas- 1. Press down the hood until it begins to senger compartment and then turn the han- close under its own weight. dle under the hood. 2. When the hood reaches the catch at the Opening the hood handle in the front edge of the vehicle, press down on the hood to close it completely.

WARNING Risk of injury! When closing, make sure that the hood is completely unobstructed and that no one can be injured. Swipe your hand from left to right under the hood, grasp the handle and move it up and to the side to release the catch and lift WARNING the hood. Make sure the hood locks securely after closing. It must audibly lock on both sides. Warning - hood not closed Pull the lever near the pedals to release When the hood is released, a warn- the hood from its fully closed position. ing symbol and graphic will be displayed in the instrument panel and an audible signal will sound. If the vehicle begins to roll, the audible signal will be repeated several times.

NOTE If the warning symbol is illuminated or an audible warning signal sounds even though the hood is securely closed, consult a workshop - an authorized Volvo workshop is recommended. Hood not completely closed.

578 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

Engine compartment overview WARNING This overview shows some service-related Bear in mind that the cooling fan (located components. at the front of the engine compartment behind the radiator) may start or continue running automatically up to about 6 minutes after the engine is turned off. Always entrust engine washing to a workshop – an authorized Volvo workshop is recommended. If the engine is hot, there is a risk of fire.

Hood completely closed. WARNING The ignition system works with extremely WARNING high and dangerous voltages. The vehicle electrical system should always be in igni- Never drive with the hood The layout of the engine compartment may vary depending on model and engine variant. tion mode 0 when work in being per- open! formed in the engine compartment. Coolant expansion tank If this symbol appears, or Do not touch any spark plugs or ignition anything else indicates Brake fluid reservoir (located on the driv- coils when the vehicle electrical system is that the hood is not com- er's side) in ignition mode II or when the engine is pletely closed while driv- warm. ing, stop immediately and Washer fluid filler pipe12 close it properly. Fusebox Related information • Opening and closing the hood (p. 578) Related information Air filter • Engine compartment overview (p. 579) • Filling washer fluid (p. 627) Engine oil filler pipe • Door and seat belt reminders (p. 51) • Refilling coolant (p. 582) • Fuses in the engine compartment (p. 594)

12 Fill the washer fluid at regular intervals, e.g. when refueling. }}

579 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

• Checking and filling engine oil (p. 581) Engine oil If the engine oil is not checked regularly and • Ignition modes (p. 385) For the recommended service intervals and the level becomes low, this could cause seri- warranties to be applied, an approved engine ous engine damage. oil must be used. CAUTION To satisfy the requirements for the engine's service intervals, all engines are factory- filled with a specially adapted synthetic engine oil. Great care has been put into the choice of oil, with consideration given to service life, startability, fuel consumption and environmental impact. For the recommended service intervals to apply, an approved engine oil must be used. Only use the prescribed oil grade to top off or change the oil. Otherwise, there Volvo recommends: is a risk of the vehicle's service life, startability, fuel consumption and environmental impact being affected. Failure to use engine oil of the prescribed grade and viscosity could cause damage to engine-related components. Volvo Car Cor- poration disclaims warranty liability for such type of damage. Volvo recommends entrusting oil changes to an authorized Volvo workshop.

Volvo uses different systems to warn if the oil level is too low/high or the oil pressure is low. On engine variants with an oil pressure sensor,

580 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE a warning symbol is displayed in the instru- Checking and filling engine oil WARNING ment panel when oil pressure is low . On The engine oil level is monitored by an elec- If this symbol is shown together engine variants with an oil level sensor, the tronic oil level sensor. with the message Engine oil warning symbol in the instrument panel level Service required, visit a and display messages are used to alert the workshop – an authorized Volvo driver. Some engine variants have both sys- workshop is recommended. The oil level tems. Contact a Volvo retailer for more infor- may be too high. mation. Change the engine oil and oil filter according CAUTION to the schedule specified in the Warranty and If this symbol is shown together Maintenance Records Information booklet. with a message about low oil Oils of a higher grade than that specified may level, for example Engine oil be used. If the vehicle is driven in adverse con- level low Refill 1 liter, fill only ditions, Volvo recommends using an oil with a with the indicated volume, e.g. 1 liter higher grade than that specified. Filler pipe1314 (1 quart). Related information It may be necessary to top up engine oil • Checking and filling engine oil (p. 581) between regularly scheduled services. WARNING • Engine oil specifications (p. 638) No action is necessary with regard to engine Do not spill oil on the hot exhaust pipes as oil level until a message appears in the instru- this could cause a fire. ment panel. Viewing oil level in the center display The oil level can be viewed using the electronic oil level gauge in the center display once the vehicle has been started. The oil level should be checked regularly.

13 Engines with an electronic oil level sensor do not have a dipstick. 14 The layout of the engine compartment may vary depending on model and engine variant. }}

581 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

|| 1. Open the Car Status app from App view NOTE Refilling coolant in the center display. Coolant helps keep the combustion engine at If the conditions for measuring oil level are the right operating temperature. The heat 2. Tap Status to display the oil level. not properly fulfilled (time after engine transferred from the engine to the coolant shutdown, vehicle inclination, ambient can be used to warm the passenger compart- temperature, etc.) the message No value ment. available will be shown in the center dis- When refilling coolant, follow the instructions play. This does not mean that anything is on the package. Never fill the cooling system wrong in the vehicle systems. with only water. The risk of freezing is increased with too low or too high amounts of Related information coolant. • Engine oil (p. 580) If there is coolant under the vehicle, smoke • Engine oil specifications (p. 638) from the cooling system, or if more than • Ignition modes (p. 385) 2 liters (about 2 quarts) of coolant has been added to the system, there could be some- • Vehicle status (p. 572) thing wrong with the cooling system and star- Oil level graphic in the center display. ting the vehicle could damage the engine. Call a tow truck and do not attempt to start the NOTE engine. The system cannot directly detect changes when the oil is filled or drained. The vehicle WARNING must have been driven approximately 30 km (20 miles) and have been stationary The coolant may be very hot. Never unscrew the cap when the coolant is hot. If 5 minutes on a level surface and with the coolant must be filled, unscrew the expan- engine off before the correct oil level will sion tank cap slowly to relieve overpres- be displayed. sure.

582 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

Unscrew the cover in the plastic covering. Related information • Engine compartment overview (p. 579) Unscrew the expansion tank cap and fill • Coolant specifications (p. 639) coolant as needed. The level should not exceed the yellow MAX mark inside the expansion tank. Put the components back in place in the reverse order.

CAUTION • Do not ingest the contents. May cause Coolant expansion tank, left-hand drive vehicle. damage to organs (kidneys). • Use premixed coolant according to Volvo's recommendations. If concentrated coolant is used, make sure that the coolant mixture is 50% coolant and 50% water of acceptable quality. • Do not mix different types of coolant. • To help ensure sufficient corrosion protection in the system, only use new coolant when replacing larger components in the cooling system. • Never run the engine unless the cooling system is properly filled. An improperly filled cooling system could lead to high temperatures and cracks in the cylinder heads. • High levels of chlorine, chlorides and other salts may cause corrosion in the cooling system.

583 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

Replacing bulbs NOTE This vehicle is equipped with only LED16 Bulbs for active curve lighting* contain lights, which means it does not have any traces of mercury and should therefore 15 replaceable bulbs. Contact a workshop if always be submitted to a certified Volvo you experience any problems with the light- service technician. ing. If there is a problem with an LED16 light, the entire lamp unit will normally need to be replaced. NOTE For information on lights not mentioned in the Owner's Manual, contact a Volvo dealer or a certified Volvo service technician.

NOTE Exterior lighting such as headlights and taillights may develop temporary condensation on the inside of the lens. This is normal. All exterior lighting is designed to resist this. Condensation is normally ven- ted out of the lamp housing once the light has been lit for some period of time.

16 LED (Light Emitting Diode) 15 An authorized Volvo workshop is recommended.

584 * Option/accessory. MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

Start battery WARNING Connection points The vehicle has a single-pole electrical sys- • Batteries generate hydrogen gas, tem that uses the chassis and engine mount which is flammable and explosive. WARNING as conductors. • Do not connect the jumper cable to California Proposition 65 The start battery is used to start the electrical any part of the fuel system or to any Operating, servicing and maintaining a pas- system and power the starter motor and moving parts. Avoid touching hot senger vehicle can expose you to chemi- other electrical equipment in the vehicle. manifolds. cals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead, which are The start battery should only be replaced by a • Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do known to the State of California to cause 17 workshop . not allow battery fluid to contact eyes, cancer and birth defects or other reproduc- The vehicle has a voltage-regulated alternating skin, fabrics or painted surfaces. tive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid current generator. • breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine If contact occurs, flush the affected except as necessary, service your vehicle in The start battery is a 12 V battery, dimen- area immediately with water. Obtain a well ventilated area and wear gloves or sioned for the carbon dioxide-reducing func- medical help immediately if eyes are wash your hands frequently when servicing tions Start/Stop and regenerative charging affected. your vehicle. For more information go to and to support the function of the vehicle's • Never expose the battery to open flame www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger- vehicle. various systems. or electric spark. Do not smoke near The service life and performance of the start the battery. Failure to follow the battery are affected by factors such as driving instructions for jump starting can lead Use the vehicle's connection points in the style, driving conditions, climate, battery dis- to injury. engine compartment to connect an external charges, number of starts, etc. start battery or battery charger. • Never disconnect the start battery while The battery terminals on the car's start battery the engine is running. in the luggage/cargo area must not be used. • Make sure the cables to the start battery If the start battery is being charged, the sup- are correctly connected and the clamps port battery will also be charged. are securely tightened.

17 An authorized Volvo workshop is recommended. }}

585 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

|| CAUTION NOTE Failure to observe the following could If the starter battery becomes discharged cause the infotainment energy save mode too many times, it will shorten its service to temporarily stop working and/or a mes- life. sage in the driver's display regarding the The service life of the starter battery is state of charge of the starter battery may affected by several factors, such as driving be temporarily incorrect after an external conditions and climate. The starting starter battery or battery charger has been capacity of the battery reduces gradually connected: over time. The battery must therefore be • The negative battery terminal of the recharged if the vehicle is not used or a vehicle's starter battery must never be long period of time or if it is only driven Positive connection point used to connect an external starter short distances. Severe cold further limits battery or battery charger – only the the starting capacity. Negative connection point vehicle's negative charging point To keep the starter battery in a good condi- should be used as a grounding point. tion, the vehicle should be driven at least CAUTION 15 minutes per week or the battery should be connected to a battery charger with Only a modern battery charger with con- automatic trickle charging. trolled charge voltage should be used to charge the starter battery and support bat- A starter battery that is always kept fully tery. The rapid charging function should charged has the maximum service life. not be used as this could damage the battery.

586 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

Location WARNING If the starter battery is disconnected, the function for automatic opening and closing must be reset to function correctly. A reset is required in order for the pinch protection to work.

CAUTION On certain models, the battery is secured with a tensioning strap. Make sure that the tensioning strap is always securely tightened. The start battery is located in the cargo compartment.

Specifications for start battery Battery type H7 AGM H8 AGM Voltage (V) 12 12

Cold start capacityA - CCAB (A) 800 850 Dimensions, L×W×H 315×175×190 mm (12.4×6.9×7.5 inches) 353×175×190 mm (13.9×6.9×7.5 inches) Capacity (Ah) 80 95

A According to EN standard. B Cold Cranking Amperes.

Volvo recommends that batteries are replaced by an authorized Volvo workshop.

}}

587 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

|| CAUTION If replacing the battery, make sure you replace it with a battery of the same size, cold start capacity and type as the original battery (see the decal on the battery).

Related information • Battery symbols (p. 591) • Support battery (p. 589) • Jump starting using another battery (p. 428) • Reset procedure for pinch protection (p. 167) • Battery recycling (p. 591)

588 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

Support battery NOTE Vehicles with the Start/Stop function are • The higher the current consumption in equipped with two batteries – a more power- the vehicle, the more the alternator has ful 12 V start battery and a support battery to work and the batteries have to be that provides stronger current during the charged = increased fuel consumption. function's start sequence. • When the starter battery capacity has dropped below the lowest permissible level, the Start/Stop function is disengaged.

When the Start/Stop function is temporarily If the vehicle is instead equipped with a 48 V support reduced due to high current consumption: battery, it is located to the left in the cargo compartment. Only an authorized workshop may handle the • The engine will auto-start, even if the 48 V support battery. driver does not lift their foot from the brake pedal. WARNING The support battery does not normally require The 12 V support battery is located in a box next to High voltage may be dangerous if handled more service than the start battery. If you have the spring strut in the engine compartment. incorrectly. Do not touch anything on bat- any questions or concerns, consult a work- teries that is not clearly described in this shop ‒ an authorized Volvo workshop is rec- Owner's Manual. ommended. • Never use a 48 V support battery to jump start the vehicle. • External electrical equipment may not under any circumstance be connected to the 48 V battery. • Only a workshop may replace or perform service on the 48 V battery – an authorized Volvo workshop is recommended.

}}

589 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

|| CAUTION NOTE Cold start capacityA - B 170 If the following is not observed, the Start/ If the starter battery has been discharged CCA (A) Stop function may temporarily stop work- to the extent that the vehicle does not have 150×90×130 mm ing after connection of an external starter normal electrical functions and the engine Dimensions, L×W×H (5.9×3.5×5.1 battery or battery charger: must then be jump-started with an external inches) battery or a battery charger, the Start/Stop • The negative battery terminal of the function may remain activated. If the Start/ Capacity (Ah) 10 vehicle's starter battery must never be Stop function shortly thereafter auto-stops used to connect an external starter A According to EN standard. the engine, there is a huge risk that auto- battery or battery charger – only the B Cold Cranking Amperes. start of the engine will fail due to insuffi- vehicle's negative charging point cient battery capacity since the battery had should be used as a grounding point. CAUTION not had time to recharge. If replacing the battery, make sure you If the vehicle has been jump-started or if replace it with a battery of the same size, there has not been enough time for the cold start capacity and type as the original battery to be charged with a battery battery (see the decal on the battery). charger, the Start/Stop function should be temporarily deactivated until the battery has been recharged by the vehicle. At an Related information ambient temperature of about +15°C • Start battery (p. 585) (about 60°F), the battery must be charged • Start/Stop function (p. 409) by the vehicle for at least one hour. At • Battery symbols (p. 591) lower ambient temperatures, the charging time can increase to 3-4 hours. It is advisa- • Battery recycling (p. 591) ble to charge the battery with an external battery charger.

Specifications for support battery Type AGM Voltage (V) 12

590 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

Battery symbols Battery recycling There are warning symbols and information Start batteries and support batteries contain on the batteries. Avoid smoking, open lead and must be recycled in an environmen- flames, and/or sparks. tally sound manner at the end of their service life. Consult a workshop if you are uncertain of Wear protective goggles. how to dispose of this type of waste ‒ an authorized Volvo workshop is recommended.

Risk of explosion. Related information • Start battery (p. 585) • Support battery (p. 589) See the Owner's Manual for additional information. • Battery symbols (p. 591)

Recycle properly.

Keep batteries away from children. Related information • Start battery (p. 585) • Support battery (p. 589) • Battery recycling (p. 591) Batteries contain corrosive acid.

591 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

Fuses and fuseboxes Location of fuseboxes Replacing fuses All electrical functions and components are All electrical functions and components are protected by a number of fuses in order to protected by a number of fuses in order to protect the vehicle's electrical system from protect the vehicle's electrical system from damage by short circuiting or overloading. damage by short circuiting or overloading. WARNING 1. Refer to the fuse diagram to locate the Never use a foreign object or a fuse with a fuse. higher amperage than that specified to replace a fuse. This could cause significant 2. Pull out the fuse and examine it from the damage to the electrical system and possi- side to determine if the curved metal wire bly lead to a fire. in the fuse is intact. 3. If the wire is broken, replace the fuse with If any electrical component or function is not The illustration is generic - appearance may vary a new fuse of the same color and amper- responding, the component may have blown a according to vehicle model. age. fuse due to temporary overload. If the same fuse blows repeatedly, there may be a prob- Engine compartment lem with the component. Volvo recommends WARNING contacting an authorized Volvo workshop to Under the glove compartment Never use a foreign object or a fuse with a have the component checked. higher amperage than that specified to Trunk/cargo compartment replace a fuse. This could cause significant damage to the electrical system and possi- Related information bly lead to a fire. • Replacing fuses (p. 592) • Fuses in the cargo compartment WARNING (p. 605) Contact an authorized Volvo workshop for • Fuses in the engine compartment assistance replacing fuses not listed in the (p. 594) Owner's Manual. If fuse replacement is performed incorrectly, significant damage • Fuses under the glove compartment can be caused to the electrical system. (p. 599)

592 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

Related information • Fuses and fuseboxes (p. 592) • Fuses in the cargo compartment (p. 605) • Fuses in the engine compartment (p. 594) • Fuses under the glove compartment (p. 599)

593 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

Fuses in the engine compartment The fuses in the engine compartment help protect electrical components such as engine and brake functions.

594 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

Fuse pliers are provided on the inside of the There are also spaces for several extra fuses in Positions fuse box cover to assist in removing and the fusebox. There is a decal with a diagram of the loca- inserting fuses. tions of the fuses on the inside of the cover.

Function Ampere Type – – Micro

– – Micro

Ignition coils (gasoline); Spark plug (gasoline); Exhaust sensor; Diesel particulate sensor 15 Micro

Oil pump solenoid; A/C magnetic coupling; heated oxygen sensor, center (gasoline); heated oxygen sensor, rear (diesel); 15 Micro heated oxygen sensor, front (gasoline/diesel) Vacuum regulator; Valve; Output pulse valve (diesel); Oil level/temperature sensor (diesel); Glow plug (GCU) (diesel) 7.5 Micro

Engine control module; actuator; throttle unit; EGR valve (diesel); turbo position sensor (diesel); turbocharger valve 20 Micro (gasoline) Engine control module 5 Micro

– – Micro

Solenoids (gasoline); Valve; Engine cooling system thermostat (gasoline); EGR cooling pump (diesel); Glow control 10 Micro module (diesel); Supercharger clutch (gasoline); Crankshaft ventilation heater (diesel); Transmission oil cooler valve (diesel) Spoiler damper control module; Cooler damper control module; Relay coils for output pulse (diesel) 5 Micro

Coolant pump 15 Micro

}}

595 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

|| Function Ampere Type Engine control module 20 Micro

Starter motor 40 MCaseA

Starter motor Shunt MCaseA

Fuel filter heater (diesel) 30 MCaseA

– – MCaseA

Calculation module 5 Micro

– – Micro

12 V outlet in tunnel console, front 15 Micro

12 V socket in tunnel console between the second row of seats* 15 Micro 230 V socket in tunnel console between the second row of seats* 12 V outlet in trunk/cargo compartment* 15 Micro

– – Micro

Driver-side headlight, LEDB 15 Micro

596 * Option/accessory. MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

Function Ampere Type

Passenger-side headlight, LEDB 15 Micro

– – Micro

– – MCaseA

Headlight washers* 25 MCaseA

Washer fluid pump 25 MCaseA

Transmission control module; Electric gear selector 15 Micro

Horn 20 Micro

Alarm siren* 5 Micro

Brake system control module (valves, parking brake) 40 MCaseA

Brake control with 48 V battery 30 MCaseA

Wipers 30 MCaseA

Rear window washer 25 MCaseA

– – MCaseA

Parking heater* 20 MCaseA

– – MCaseA

}}

* Option/accessory. 597 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

|| Function Ampere Type

– – MCaseA

Fed when ignition is on: engine control module, transmission components, electrical power steering, central electrical 5 Micro module, brake system control module – – Micro

Passenger-side headlight, LEDB 15 Micro

– – Micro

Transmission control module 10 Micro

Battery connection control module 5 Micro

Airbags; Passenger weight sensor 5 Micro

Driver-side headlight, LEDB 15 Micro

Accelerator pedal sensor 5 Micro

A This type of fuse should be replaced by a workshop. An authorized Volvo workshop is recommended. B LED (Light Emitting Diode)

Related information • Fuses and fuseboxes (p. 592) • Replacing fuses (p. 592)

598 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

Fuses under the glove compartment Fuses under the glove compartment provide protection for e.g. electrical outlets, displays and door modules.

}}

599 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

Fuse pliers are provided on the inside of the There are also spaces for several extra fuses in Positions fuse box cover to assist in removing and the distribution box in the engine compart- There is a decal with a diagram of the loca- inserting fuses. ment. tions of the fuses on the inside of the cover.

600 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

Function Ampere Type Medium voltage module 10 Micro

Electrical outlet in tunnel console between rear seats* 30 MCaseA

– – Micro

Movement sensor* 5 Micro

Media player 5 Micro

Instrument panel 5 Micro

Center console buttons 5 Micro

Sun sensor 5 Micro

– – Micro

Steering wheel module 5 Micro

Module for start knob and parking brake controls 5 Micro

Heated steering wheel* module 15 Micro

– – Micro

}}

* Option/accessory. 601 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

|| Function Ampere Type Climate system control module 10 Micro

– – Micro

Data link connector OBD-II 10 Micro

Center display 5 Micro

Climate system blower module (front) 40 MCaseA

USB HUB 5 Micro

Instrument lighting; Interior lighting; Rearview mirror auto-dim function*; Rain and light sensors*; Rear tunnel console 7.5 Micro keypad, rear seat*; Power front seats*; Rear door control panels; Climate system blower module left/right Control module for driver support functions 5 Micro

Panoramic roof with sun curtain* 20 Micro

Head-up display* 5 Micro

Passenger compartment lighting 5 Micro

– – Micro

Ceiling console display (seat belt reminder/front passenger side airbag indicator) 5 Micro

– – Micro

Door module in right-side rear door 20 Micro

602 * Option/accessory. MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

Function Ampere Type Fuses in the trunk/cargo compartment 10 Micro

Control module for Internet-connected vehicle; Control module for Volvo On Call 5 Micro

Door module in left-side rear door Micro

Infotainment control module (amplifier) 40 MCaseA

– – MCaseA

Multi-band antenna module 5 Micro

Front seat massage function* 5 Micro

– – Micro

Rear window wiper 15 Micro

Fuel pump control module 15 Micro

– – Micro

Opening trunk/tailgate with foot movement* 5 Micro

Driver's seat heating 15 Micro

Front passenger's seat heating 15 Micro

Coolant pump 7.5 Micro

– – Micro

Door module in left-side front door 20 Micro

}}

* Option/accessory. 603 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

|| Function Ampere Type Active chassis control module* 20 Micro

– – Micro

Sensus control module 10 Micro

– – MCaseA

– – Micro

Door module in right-side front door 20 Micro

– – Micro

TV* (certain markets only) 5 Micro

Primary fuse for fuses 52, 53, 57 and 58 15 Micro

A This type of fuse should be replaced by a workshop. An authorized Volvo workshop is recommended.

Related information • Fuses and fuseboxes (p. 592) • Replacing fuses (p. 592)

604 * Option/accessory. MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

Fuses in the cargo compartment The fuses in the cargo compartment help protect electrical components such as the power seats*, airbags and seat belt tensioners.

}}

* Option/accessory. 605 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

The fuse box is located on the right-hand side. Fuse pliers are provided on the inside of the There are also spaces for several extra fuses in fuse box cover to assist in removing and the distribution box in the engine compart- inserting fuses. ment.

606 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

Positions Function Ampere Type

– – MCaseA

Pneumatic suspension* compressor 40 MCaseA

Lock motor for rear seat backrest, right side 15 MCaseA

– – MCaseA

Lock motor for rear seat backrest, left side 15 MCaseA

Power front passenger seat* 20 MCaseA Door module right side, rear

Control module for reduction of nitrous oxides (diesel) 30 MCaseA Power tailgate* 25 MCaseA

Power front passenger seat* 20 MCaseA Door module right side, front

Towbar* control module 40 MCaseA

Seat belt tensioner module (right side) 40 MCaseA

Internal relay windings 5 Micro

– – Micro Door module left side, rear 20 Micro

}}

* Option/accessory. 607 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

|| Function Ampere Type USB hub/accessory port – Micro

Extended accessory module 5 Micro

Towbar* control module 25 MCaseA

Accessory module 40 MCaseA

Power driver seat* 20 MCaseA Door module left side, front

Seat belt tensioner module (left side) 40 MCaseA

Park Assist Camera* 5 Micro

– – Micro

Heated rear seat (left side)* 15 Micro

– – Micro

Blind Spot Information (BLIS)* 5 Micro Exterior reverse signal control module

608 * Option/accessory. MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

Function Ampere Type – – Micro

Modules for seat belt tensioners 5 Micro

Emissions system actuator (gasoline, certain engine variants) 5 Micro

– – Micro

All Wheel Drive (AWD) control module* 15 Micro

Heated rear seat (right side)* 15 Micro

– – MCaseA

A This type of fuse should be replaced by a workshop. An authorized Volvo workshop is recommended.

Related information • Fuses and fuseboxes (p. 592) • Replacing fuses (p. 592)

* Option/accessory. 609 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

Cleaning the interior • Cleaning the seat belt (p. 612) Cleaning the center display Only use cleaning agents and car care prod- • Cleaning floor mats and inlay mats Marks, stains, finger smudges etc. on the ucts recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly (p. 612) center display may affect its performance and and treat stains immediately. It is important • Cleaning leather upholstery* (p. 613) readability. Clean the screen regularly with a to vacuum before using a cleaning agent. microfiber cloth. • Cleaning the leather steering wheel CAUTION (p. 614) • Some colored clothing (for example, • Cleaning interior plastic, metal and wood dark jeans and suede garments) may surfaces (p. 614) stain the upholstery. If this occurs, it is important to clean and treat these parts of the upholstery as soon as possible. • Never use strong solvents such as washer fluid, gasoline, mineral spirit or concentrated alcohol to clean the interior as this can damage the upholstery as well as other interior materials. • 1. Turn off the center display by pressing and Never spray cleaning agent directly holding the Home button. onto components that have electrical buttons and controls. Wipe instead 2. Wipe the screen clean with the microfiber with a damp cloth with cleaning agent. cloth provided or use another microfiber cloth of similar quality. Wipe the screen • Sharp objects and Velcro can damage with a clean, dry microfiber cloth using the car's textile upholstery. small, circular motions. If necessary, mois- • Only use cleaning agent on the type of ten the cloth slightly. material it is intended for. 3. Reactivate the display by pressing the Home button briefly. Related information • Cleaning the center display (p. 610) • Cleaning fabric upholstery and ceiling liner (p. 612)

610 * Option/accessory. MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

• * CAUTION Cleaning the leather steering wheel Cleaning the head-up display (p. 614) Carefully wipe the glass covering the head-up The microfiber cloth must be free of sand • Cleaning interior plastic, metal and wood display unit with a clean and dry microfiber and dirt when cleaning the center display. surfaces (p. 614) cloth. If necessary, the cloth may be slightly moistened. CAUTION Never use strong stain removers. For difficult cleaning conditions, a special cleaning agent When cleaning the center display, apply can be purchased at a Volvo retailer. only light pressure to the screen. Pressing too hard could damage the screen. Related information • Activating and deactivating the head-up display* (p. 144) CAUTION • Head-up display* (p. 143) Do not spray liquid or corrosive chemicals directly onto the center display. Do not use window cleaners, cleaning agents, aerosol sprays, solvents, alcohol, ammonia or detergents that contain abrasives. Never use abrasive cloths, paper towels or tissue paper, as these may scratch the center display.

Related information • Cleaning the interior (p. 610) • Cleaning fabric upholstery and ceiling liner (p. 612) • Cleaning the seat belt (p. 612) • Cleaning floor mats and inlay mats (p. 612) • Cleaning leather upholstery* (p. 613)

* Option/accessory. 611 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

Cleaning fabric upholstery and Cleaning the seat belt Cleaning floor mats and inlay mats ceiling liner Only use cleaning agents and car care prod- Only use cleaning agents and car care prod- Only use cleaning agents and car care products recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly ucts recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly ucts recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly and treat stains immediately. It is important and treat stains immediately. It is important and treat stains immediately. It is important to vacuum before using a cleaning agent. to vacuum before using a cleaning agent. to vacuum before using a cleaning agent. Use water and a synthetic soap solution. Spe- Remove the inlay mats to clean the floor mats Never scrape or rub a stain, as this could dam- cially designed textile cleaning agents are and inlay mats separately. Each inlay mat is age the upholstery or ceiling liner. Never use available for purchase at Volvo retailers. Make secured into place with pins. sure the belt is dry before it is retracted. strong stain removers, as this could change 1. Remove the inlay mat by grasping the the color of the upholstery or ceiling liner. Related information inlay mat at each pin and lifting the mat Use soapy water or a similar detergent. For • Cleaning the interior (p. 610) straight up. more difficult stains caused by oil, ice cream, • 2. Use a vacuum to remove dust and dirt. shoe polish, etc., use a stain remover. Consult Cleaning the center display (p. 610) with your Volvo retailer. • Cleaning fabric upholstery and ceiling liner (p. 612) NOTE Related information • Cleaning floor mats and inlay mats Do not swing or strike the inlay mats vio- • Cleaning the interior (p. 610) (p. 612) lently against another object to remove dirt • Cleaning the center display (p. 610) as this could damage the mats. • Cleaning leather upholstery* (p. 613) • Cleaning the seat belt (p. 612) • Cleaning the leather steering wheel 3. After vacuuming, a specially designed tex- • Cleaning floor mats and inlay mats (p. 614) (p. 612) tile cleaning agent should be used to • Cleaning interior plastic, metal and wood remove stains on floor mats. Floor mats • * Cleaning leather upholstery (p. 613) surfaces (p. 614) should be cleaned with products recom- • Cleaning the leather steering wheel mended by Volvo retailers. (p. 614) 4. After cleaning, put the inlay mat back into • Cleaning interior plastic, metal and wood place by pressing it in at each pin. surfaces (p. 614)

612 * Option/accessory. MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

* WARNING Cleaning leather upholstery 2. Move the sponge in circular motions to Only use cleaning agents and car care prod- apply the foam to the stain. • Never use more than one inlay mat at a ucts recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly time on the driver's floor. If any other 3. Dampen the stain thoroughly with the and treat stains immediately. It is important type of floor mat is used, remove the sponge. Let the sponge absorb the stain to vacuum before using a cleaning agent. original mat from the driver's seat floor and do not rub. before driving. All types of mats must Volvo's leather upholstery* is treated to pro- 4. Dry the stain using a soft towel and let the be securely anchored in the attach- tect its original appearance. Over time, sun- leather dry completely. ment points in the floor. Make sure the light, grease, dirt, etc. could break down the floor mat does not impede the move- Protecting the leather upholstery protective layer. This could result in scratches ment of the brake pedal or accelerator 1. Apply a small amount of leather protector and cracking. pedal in any way, as this could be a to a cloth and then apply the protector to serious safety hazard. Leather upholstery* is a natural product that the leather using light circular movements. • Volvo's floor mats are specially manu- changes and acquires a beautiful patina over 2. Let it dry for approximately 20 minutes. time. Regular cleaning and treatments are factured for your vehicle. They must be > Protecting the leather upholstery properly secured in the attachment required to preserve the qualities and color of the leather. Volvo offers a comprehensive makes it better able to withstand sun- points in the floor to help ensure they light's harmful UV rays. cannot slide and become trapped product, Volvo Leather Care KitWipes, for under the pedals. cleaning and treating leather upholstery. Related information When used as directed, it helps preserve the • Cleaning the interior (p. 610) leather's protective coating. Related information • Cleaning the center display (p. 610) For optimal results, Volvo recommends clean- • Cleaning the interior (p. 610) • Cleaning fabric upholstery and ceiling liner ing and applying protective cream one to four • (p. 612) Cleaning the center display (p. 610) times a year (or more often as needed). Volvo • Cleaning fabric upholstery and ceiling liner Leather Care Kit 951 0251 and Volvo Leather • Cleaning the seat belt (p. 612) (p. 612) Softener 943 7429 are available for purchase • Cleaning floor mats and inlay mats • Cleaning the seat belt (p. 612) at Volvo retailers. (p. 612) • Cleaning leather upholstery* (p. 613) Cleaning the leather upholstery • Cleaning the leather steering wheel • Cleaning the leather steering wheel 1. Apply the leather cleaner to a damp (p. 614) (p. 614) sponge and squeeze it until the cleaner • Cleaning interior plastic, metal and wood foams. • Cleaning interior plastic, metal and wood surfaces (p. 614) surfaces (p. 614)

* Option/accessory. 613 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

Cleaning the leather steering Type 3 (dry dirt or dust) Cleaning interior plastic, metal and wheel 1. Remove the dirt/dust using a soft brush. wood surfaces Only use cleaning agents and car care prod- Only use cleaning agents and car care products recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly 2. Same procedure as for Type 1 stains. ucts recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly and treat stains immediately. It is important Related information and treat stains immediately. to vacuum before using a cleaning agent. • Cleaning the interior (p. 610) A lightly dampened microfiber cloth is recom- Leather needs to breathe. Never cover the • mended for cleaning interior details and surfa- leather steering wheel with a plastic protector. Cleaning the center display (p. 610) ces. These cloths are available for purchase at Volvo Leather Care Kit 951 0251 and Leather • Cleaning fabric upholstery and ceiling liner Volvo retailers. Softener 943 7429 are recommended for (p. 612) Never scrape or rub a stain. Never use strong cleaning the leather steering wheel. First, • Cleaning the seat belt (p. 612) stain removers. remove dirt, dust, etc. with a damp sponge or • cloth. Cleaning floor mats and inlay mats (p. 612) CAUTION * CAUTION • Cleaning leather upholstery (p. 613) Do not use solvent containing alcohol to • Cleaning interior plastic, metal and wood clean the instrument panel glass. Sharp objects such as rings could damage surfaces (p. 614) the leather on the steering wheel. CAUTION Treating stains on the steering wheel: Keep in mind that glossy surfaces can be Type 1 (ink, wine, coffee, milk, sweat or blood) easily scratched. Wipe these surfaces with – Use a soft cloth or sponge. Wipe the a clean and dry microfiber cloth using steering wheel using a solution of 5% small, circular motions. If necessary, mois- ammonia. For blood stains, mix approxi- ten the cloth lightly with clean water. mately 2 dl (1 cup) of water with 25 g (one ounce) of salt and wipe the stain. Related information • Type 2 (grease, oil, sauces or chocolate) Cleaning the interior (p. 610) • Cleaning the center display (p. 610) 1. Same procedure as for Type 1 stains. • Cleaning fabric upholstery and ceiling liner 2. Finish by wiping the wheel with an (p. 612) absorbent paper or towel. • Cleaning the seat belt (p. 612)

614 * Option/accessory. MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

• Cleaning floor mats and inlay mats Cleaning the exterior Polishing and waxing (p. 612) The vehicle should be washed as soon as it Polish and wax the vehicle when the paint is • Cleaning leather upholstery* (p. 613) becomes dirty. This makes the vehicle easier matte or to provide extra protection. The • Cleaning the leather steering wheel to clean because dirt does not attach as vehicle does not need to be polished until it is (p. 614) strongly. It also reduces the risk of scratches at least a year old. However, it can be waxed and keeps the vehicle looking new. Wash the during the first year. Do not polish or wax the vehicle in a car wash or garage with an oil vehicle in direct sunlight. The surface of the separator and use car washing detergent. vehicle should not be warmer than 45 °C (113 °F). Related information • Wash and dry the vehicle very carefully • Cleaning the exterior (p. 615) before polishing or waxing. Remove • Polishing and waxing (p. 615) asphalt and tar stains with asphalt • Hand washing (p. 616) remover or paint thinner. More stubborn stains can be removed with a grinding • Automatic car washes (p. 618) paste designed for vehicle paint. • High-pressure washing (p. 619) • Use polish first and then liquid or paste • Cleaning the wiper blades (p. 619) wax. Follow the instructions on the pack- • Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim age carefully. Many products contain both components (p. 620) polish and wax. • • Cleaning rims (p. 621) A wide range of polymer-based waxes can • be purchased today. These waxes are easy Corrosion protection (p. 621) to use and produce a long-lasting, high- gloss finish that protects the bodywork against oxidation, road dirt and fading.

}}

* Option/accessory. 615 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

• || CAUTION Cleaning rims (p. 621) Hand washing • Corrosion protection (p. 621) The vehicle should be washed as soon as it Avoid waxing and polishing plastic and becomes dirty. This makes the vehicle easier rubber. to clean because dirt does not attach as If using degreaser on plastic and rubber, strongly. It also reduces the risk of scratches only rub (if necessary) with slight pressure. and keeps the vehicle looking new. Wash the Use a soft sponge. vehicle in a car wash or garage with an oil Polishing glossy trim moldings can wear separator and use car washing detergent. away or damage the glossy surface layer. Important to keep in mind when Polish containing abrasives must not be handwashing your vehicle used. • Avoid washing the vehicle in direct sunlight. This could cause the detergent or wax to dry out and become abrasive. CAUTION • Remove bird droppings from paintwork as Only use paintwork treatments recom- soon as possible. It contains chemicals mended by Volvo. Other treatments, such that affect and discolor paintwork very as preservation, sealing, protection, luster quickly. Use e.g. soft paper or a sponge sealing or similar, could damage the paint- soaked in lots of water. Consult an author- work. Paintwork damage caused by such ized Volvo workshop for assistance treatments are not covered by Volvo's war- removing discoloration. ranty. • Hose down the underbody, including the wheel housings and bumper. Related information • • Hose down the entire vehicle and remove Cleaning the exterior (p. 615) any loose dirt, droppings etc. to reduce • Hand washing (p. 616) the risk of scratches from washing. Do not • Automatic car washes (p. 618) spray directly onto locks. • High-pressure washing (p. 619) • If necessary, use cold degreaser on heavily soiled surfaces. Note that in such cases • Cleaning the wiper blades (p. 619) the surfaces must not be hot from the sun. • Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim components (p. 620)

616 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

• • Wash using a sponge, car washing deter- NOTE Cleaning the wiper blades (p. 619) gent and plenty of lukewarm water. • Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim Exterior lighting such as headlights and • Clean the wiper blades with lukewarm components (p. 620) taillights may develop temporary conden- soap solution or car washing detergent. sation on the inside of the lens. This is nor- • Cleaning rims (p. 621) • Dry the vehicle using a clean, soft chamois mal. All exterior lighting is designed to • Corrosion protection (p. 621) or a squeegee. Try not to let drops of resist this. Condensation is normally ven- • Settings for automatically activating the water dry in strong sunlight. This could ted out of the lamp housing once the light parking brake (p. 392) cause water drying stains that may need has been lit for some period of time. to be polished out. • In areas with heavy industrial emissions, more frequent washing of the vehicle's CAUTION exterior is recommended. • Make sure that the panoramic roof* • Tar spots from asphalt may remain even and sun shade are closed before wash- after washing. Use a tar remover to ing the vehicle. remove these spots. • Never use abrasive polishing agents on the panoramic roof. WARNING • Never use wax on the rubber seals Always entrust engine washing to a work- around the panoramic roof. shop. If the engine is hot, there is a risk of fire. CAUTION Remember to remove dirt from the drain CAUTION holes in the doors and sills after washing Dirty headlights do not work as well. Clean the vehicle. them regularly, e.g. when refueling. Do not use corrosive cleaners. Use water Related information and a non-abrasive sponge. • Cleaning the exterior (p. 615) • Polishing and waxing (p. 615) • Automatic car washes (p. 618) • High-pressure washing (p. 619)

* Option/accessory. 617 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

Automatic car washes CAUTION CAUTION The vehicle should be washed as soon as it For automatic car washes in which the The system will automatically change to P becomes dirty. The longer the dirt remains, vehicle is pulled forward on rolling wheels: mode if the above steps are not followed. the more difficult it will be to keep the vehicle In P mode, the wheels are locked, which clean. It could also lead to paint damage. 1. Before washing the vehicle, make sure they should not be when the vehicle is that the automatic rain sensor is deac- being washed in a car wash. Washing your vehicle in an automatic car tivated. If it is not deactivated and wash is a fast and easy way to keep your vehi- inadvertently starts, the wiper arms cle clean, but it does not reach all areas of the could be damaged. NOTE vehicle. Volvo recommends washing your 2. To help prevent damage from the auto- Keep in mind that if the vehicle is equipped vehicle by hand or supplementing automatic matic car wash machinery, make sure car washes with a hand wash. with the keyless locking and unlocking that the door mirrors are folded in, function*, the doors and tailgate/trunk lid antennas retracted or removed, and may open when washing the vehicle if the NOTE any auxiliary lights secured. remote key is within range. Volvo recommends not washing the vehi- 3. Drive into the automatic car wash. cle in an automatic car wash during the 4. Turn off the "Automatic Braking when Related information first few months; the paintwork on new Stationary" function using the but- • Cleaning the exterior (p. 615) vehicles takes some time to fully harden. ton in the tunnel console. • Polishing and waxing (p. 615) 5. Turn off the "Automatic Parking Brake • Hand washing (p. 616) CAUTION Application" function in the center dis- • High-pressure washing (p. 619) Before driving the vehicle into a car wash, play's Top view. • Cleaning the wiper blades (p. 619) deactivate the Automatic Braking when 6. Turn off the engine by turning the start Stationary and Automatic Parking Brake knob in the tunnel console clockwise. • Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim Application functions. If the functions are Hold the knob in position for at least components (p. 620) not deactivated, the brake system will 2 seconds. • Cleaning rims (p. 621) seize when the vehicle is stationary and the The vehicle is now ready for the automatic • Corrosion protection (p. 621) vehicle will not be able to roll. car wash. • Auto-hold brakes (p. 393)

618 * Option/accessory. MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

• Settings for automatically activating the High-pressure washing Cleaning the wiper blades parking brake (p. 392) The vehicle should be washed as soon as it The vehicle should be washed as soon as it • Keyless and touch-sensitive surfaces* becomes dirty. The longer the dirt remains, becomes dirty. The longer the dirt remains, (p. 251) the more difficult it will be to keep the vehicle the more difficult it will be to keep the vehicle clean. It could also lead to paint damage. clean. It could also lead to paint damage. Wash the vehicle in a car wash or garage Wash the vehicle in a car wash or garage with an oil separator. Use a car washing with an oil separator. Use a car washing detergent. detergent. If washing the vehicle with a high-pressure Asphalt, dust and salt residue on wiper blades, wash, use sweeping movements and keep the as well as insects, ice etc. on the windshield, nozzle at least 30 cm (13 in.) from the vehicle. shorten the service life of wiper blades. Do not spray directly onto locks. When cleaning, put the wiper blades in the Related information service position. • Cleaning the exterior (p. 615) • Polishing and waxing (p. 615) NOTE • Hand washing (p. 616) Wash the wiper blades and windshield • regularly with a lukewarm soap solution or Automatic car washes (p. 618) vehicle shampoo. Do not use strong sol- • Cleaning the wiper blades (p. 619) vents. • Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim components (p. 620) Related information • Cleaning rims (p. 621) • Cleaning the exterior (p. 615) • Corrosion protection (p. 621) • Polishing and waxing (p. 615) • Hand washing (p. 616) • Automatic car washes (p. 618) • High-pressure washing (p. 619) • Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim components (p. 620)

}}

* Option/accessory. 619 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

• Cleaning rims (p. 621) Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber • Corrosion protection (p. 621) and trim components The vehicle should be washed as soon as it becomes dirty. The longer the dirt remains, the more difficult it will be to keep the vehicle clean. It could also lead to paint damage. Wash the vehicle in a car wash or garage with an oil separator and use car washing detergent. A special cleaning agent available from Volvo retailers is recommended for the cleaning and care of colored plastic parts, rubber and trim components, e.g. glossy trim. Follow the Components that should be washed with a cleaning usage instructions for the cleaning agent care- product with a pH value between 3.5 and 11.5. fully. CAUTION Avoid using car washing detergents with a pH value lower than 3.5 or higher than 11.5. Doing Avoid waxing and polishing plastic and so could result in the discoloring of anodized rubber. * aluminum surfaces (as shown in the illustra- If using degreaser on plastic and rubber, tions below). Abrasive polishing agents are not only rub (if necessary) with slight pressure. recommended for these areas (as shown in Use a soft sponge. the illustrations below). Polishing glossy trim moldings can wear away or damage the glossy surface layer. Polish containing abrasives must not be used.

620 * Option/accessory. MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

CAUTION Cleaning rims Corrosion protection The vehicle should be washed as soon as it Your vehicle is constructed with protection Avoid washing the vehicle with cleaner becomes dirty. The longer the dirt remains, against corrosion. with a pH value below 3.5 or above 11.5. the more difficult it will be to keep the vehicle Corrosion protection for the body consists of This could cause discoloration of anodized clean. It could also lead to paint damage. modern metallic protective coatings on the aluminum components like the roof rail and Wash the vehicle in a car wash or garage sheet metal, a high-quality painting process, around the side windows. with an oil separator and use car washing corrosion-protected and minimized metal Never use metal polishing agent on ano- detergent. overlap, and shielding plastic components, dized aluminum components. This could abrasion protection and supplemental rust cause discoloration and destroy the sur- Only use rim cleaning products recommended inhibitor in exposed areas. In the chassis, face treatment. by Volvo. exposed components of the wheel suspension are made of corrosion-resistant cast alumi- Strong rim cleaning agents could damage the num. Related information surface and stain the chromed aluminum rims. • Cleaning the exterior (p. 615) Related information Inspection and maintenance • Polishing and waxing (p. 615) The corrosion protection does not normally • Cleaning the exterior (p. 615) • Hand washing (p. 616) require maintenance, but keeping the vehicle • Polishing and waxing (p. 615) clean helps reduce the risk of corrosion. The • Automatic car washes (p. 618) • Hand washing (p. 616) use of strong alkaline or acidic cleaning fluids • High-pressure washing (p. 619) • Automatic car washes (p. 618) should be avoided on shiny body components. • Cleaning the wiper blades (p. 619) • Any stone chips in the paint should be High-pressure washing (p. 619) touched up as soon as they are discovered. • Cleaning rims (p. 621) • Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim • Corrosion protection (p. 621) components (p. 620) Related information • Cleaning the exterior (p. 615) • Cleaning rims (p. 621) • Polishing and waxing (p. 615) • Corrosion protection (p. 621) • Hand washing (p. 616) • Automatic car washes (p. 618) • High-pressure washing (p. 619) • Cleaning the wiper blades (p. 619)

}}

621 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

• Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim Paintwork Touching up minor paint damage components (p. 620) The paintwork consists of multiple layers. It is The paintwork is an important part of the • Cleaning rims (p. 621) an important part of the vehicle's corrosion vehicle's corrosion protection and therefore protection and therefore needs to be checked needs to be checked regularly. The most regularly. common types of paint damage are minor The most common types of paint damage are stone chips, scratches and damage to e.g. minor stone chips, scratches and damage to the edges of fenders, doors and bumpers. e.g. the edges of fenders, doors and bumpers. To help prevent corrosion, paint damage To help prevent corrosion, paint damage should be rectified immediately. should be rectified immediately. NOTE Related information • Touching up minor paint damage Make sure the surface is clean and dry (p. 622) before performing any touch-ups to the paint. The surface temperature should be • Color codes (p. 623) at least 15 °C (59 °F).

Materials that might be needed • Primer ‒ special adhesive primer is available in a spray can for e.g. plastic-covered bumpers. • Base coat and clear coat ‒ available in spray cans or as a touch-up pen/stick18. • Masking tape. • Fine-grain sandpaper.

18 Follow the instructions on the packaging for the touch-up pen/stick carefully.

622 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

Applying touch-up paint to a damaged 2. Light sanding with a very fine-grained Color codes surface sandpaper or similar may be required before painting (e.g. if there are uneven Color code edges). Clean the area carefully and let it The color code decal is placed on the vehicle's dry. left-side door pillar (B-pillar) between the front and rear doors and is visible when the left 3. Thoroughly mix the primer and apply it front door is open. with a small brush, toothpick or similar. When the primer is dry, apply one or more coats of paint and then a clear coat, letting the paint dry between each application. If there is a longer scratch, follow the same procedure as above, but first mask off the surrounding area to protect the undamaged paint. Touch-up pens/sticks and spray paint are If the damage has not reached all the way available at Volvo retailers. down to the metal, then touch-up paint can be applied immediately after the surface has been cleaned. NOTE If the stone chip has not gone down to the 1. Place a strip of masking tape over the Sample color code (1): US models. damaged surface. Pull the tape off so that bare metal and an undamaged coat of Exterior color code any loose flakes of paint adhere to it. paint remains, apply base coat and clear coat immediately after cleaning the sur- Secondary exterior color code (if applica- If the damage goes down to the bare face. metal, you may need to use primer first. If ble) the paint damage is on a plastic surface, Related information an adhesive primer should be used for bet- • ter results. Spray the primer into the lid of Paintwork (p. 622) the spray can and brush on thinly. • Color codes (p. 623)

}}

623 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

|| Changing rear window wipers Changing rear window wipers The wiper blades help remove water from the windshield and rear window. Along with the washer fluid, they are designed to clean the glass and help improve visibility while driving. The windshield and rear window wiper blades can be replaced.

Sample color code (1): Canadian models. Exterior color code Lift the wiper arm from the window and pull the lower section of the blade to the right. Secondary exterior color code (if applica- Grasp the center of the wiper blade and ble) lift it from the window to the stop posi- Related information tion. • Paintwork (p. 622) NOTE • Touching up minor paint damage (p. 622) When the wiper arm is halfway folded out, it will stop in a locking position that helps prevent the arm from falling back onto the rear window. The wiper arm must be pulled past the locking position stop in order to change the wiper blade.

Grip the lower part of the blade and pull to the right until the blade loosens from the arm.

624 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

3. Press the new wiper blade until it clicks Replacing windshield wiper blades While holding the button down, pull the into place. Check to make sure the blade The wiper blades help remove water from the blade straight out, parallel with the wiper is securely in place. windshield and rear window. Along with the arm. 4. Fold the wiper arm back toward the win- washer fluid, they are designed to clean the 4. Slide in the new wiper blade until it clicks dow. glass and help improve visibility while driving. into place. The windshield and rear window wiper blades can be replaced. 5. Fold the blade back toward the arm until it CAUTION clicks into place. The blade is no longer in Check the blades regularly. Neglected its removal position and can once again be maintenance shortens the life of the moved. blades. 6. Check to make sure the wiper blade is securely in place. Related information 7. Press the wiper blade back against the • Using the rain sensor (p. 177) windshield. • Using the windshield and headlight washers (p. 179) Wiper blades come in varying lengths • Using automatic rear window wiping when backing up (p. 181) • Using the rain sensor's memory function Raise the wiper arms to the service position. (p. 178) Service position is activated/deactivated via • Using the rear window wiper/washer the function view in the center display when (p. 180) the car is stationary and the windshield wipers • Filling washer fluid (p. 627) are not on. • Putting the wiper blades in service posi- Put the wiper blade in removal position by tion (p. 626) folding it out from the wiper arm until it • Replacing windshield wiper blades clicks. (p. 625) Press and hold the lock button on the • Using the windshield wipers (p. 176) wiper blade attachment. • Wiper blades and washer fluid (p. 176)

}}

625 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

|| NOTE Putting the wiper blades in service Activating/deactivating service position position When changing wiper blades, make sure The windshield wiper blades must be in the The service position can be activated/deacti- that the blades are of different lengths. The service (vertical) position for certain opera- vated when the vehicle is stationary and the blade on the driver's side is longer than the tions, e.g. replacing the blades. windshield wipers are switched off. Service one on the passenger side. position is activated/deactivated via Function view in the center display: Related information Tap the Wiper Service • Using the rain sensor (p. 177) Position button. The indica- • Using the windshield and headlight wash- tor light in the button will illu- ers (p. 179) minate when service position • Using automatic rear window wiping is activated. The wipers will when backing up (p. 181) move to the service position when activated. To deactivate • Using the rain sensor's memory function the service position, tap Wiper Service (p. 178) Position once. The indicator light in the but- • Using the rear window wiper/washer ton will go out when service position is deacti- (p. 180) Windshield wipers in the service position. vated. • Filling washer fluid (p. 627) The windshield wipers must be in the service • Putting the wiper blades in service posi- position when replacing, washing or lifting the tion (p. 626) blades (e.g. to scrape ice or snow from the windshield). • Changing rear window wipers (p. 624) • Using the windshield wipers (p. 176) CAUTION • Wiper blades and washer fluid (p. 176) Before placing the wipers in service position, ensure that they have not frozen to the windshield.

626 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

The wiper blades will also move out of the • Using the windshield wipers (p. 176) Filling washer fluid service position if: • Wiper blades and washer fluid (p. 176) Washer fluid is used to keep the headlights, • The windshield wipers are turned on. windshield and rear window clean. Washer fluid containing anti-freeze should be used in • The windshield washers are turned on. very cold weather (below-freezing tempera- • The rain sensor is activated. tures). • The vehicle begins moving. CAUTION If the wiper arms in service position are raised from the windshield, they must be folded back against the windscreen before activating wiping, washing or rain sensor as well as before departure. This is to prevent scratching the paint on the hood.

Related information • Using the rain sensor (p. 177) • Using the windshield and headlight wash- Fill washer fluid into the reservoir with the ers (p. 179) blue cover. The reservoir is used for the windshield washer, tailgate window washer and • Using automatic rear window wiping headlight washer* when backing up (p. 181) • Using the rain sensor's memory function NOTE (p. 178) When there is approximately 1 liter (1 qt) of • Using the rear window wiper/washer washer fluid remaining, the message (p. 180) Washer fluid Level low, refill and the • Filling washer fluid (p. 627) symbol will be displayed in the • Replacing windshield wiper blades instrument panel. (p. 625) • Changing rear window wipers (p. 624) }}

* Option/accessory. 627 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

|| Recommended grade: Washer fluid recom- • Using the rain sensor's memory function mended by Volvo, with frost protection during (p. 178) cold weather and temperatures below the • Using the rear window wiper/washer freezing point. (p. 180) • Putting the wiper blades in service posi- CAUTION tion (p. 626) Use Volvo's original washer fluid or an • Replacing windshield wiper blades equivalent fluid with the recommended pH (p. 625) value between 6 and 8, diluted as recom- • Changing rear window wipers (p. 624) mended, e.g. in a 1:1 solution with pH-neutral water. • Using the windshield wipers (p. 176) • Wiper blades and washer fluid (p. 176) CAUTION Use washer fluid with anti-freeze when temperatures are below the freezing point to help keep the pump, reservoir and hoses from freezing.

Volume: • Vehicles with headlight washing: 5.3 liters (5.6 qts). • Vehicles without headlight washing: 3.5 liters (3.7 qts). Related information • Using the rain sensor (p. 177) • Using the windshield and headlight washers (p. 179) • Using automatic rear window wiping when backing up (p. 181)

628 SPECIFICATIONS SPECIFICATIONS

Type designations The decals in the vehicle contain information such as chassis number, type designation, color code, etc. Location of decals

The illustration is general and details may vary depending on market and model.

630 SPECIFICATIONS

Vehicle Emission Control Information. Vehicle Emission Control Information. Tire inflation pressures. This label indi- US models. Your Volvo is designed to meet all Canadian models. Your Volvo is designed to cates the correct inflation pressures for the applicable emission standards, as evidenced meet all applicable emission standards, as evi- tires that were on the vehicle when it left the by the certification label on the underside of denced by the certification label on the under- factory. the hood. For further information regarding side of the hood. For further information regar- these regulations, please consult your Volvo ding these regulations, please consult your retailer. Volvo retailer.

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). The VIN plate is located on the top left surface of the dashboard. The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) should always be quoted in all correspondence concerning your vehicle with the retailer and when ordering parts. }}

631 SPECIFICATIONS

|| NOTE The decals shown in the Owner's Manual do not claim to be exact reproductions of those found in the vehicle. The purpose is to show approximately how they look and about where they are located on the vehicle. The information that applies for your vehicle in particular is found on the decal on the vehicle. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards Engine oil. This label contains the recom- (FMVSS) specifications (USA) and Ministry mended engine oil specifications. Related information of Transport (CMVSS) standards (Canada). • Air conditioning specifications (p. 640) Your Volvo is designed to meet all applicable safety standards, as evidenced by the certification label on the driver's side B-pillar (the structural member at the side of the vehicle, at the rear of the driver's door opening). This label also includes codes for paint color, etc. For further information regarding these regulations, please consult your Volvo retailer. U.S. models have the upper decal; Canadian models have the lower one. Decal A/C. Refrigerant R1234yf.

632 SPECIFICATIONS

Dimensions The vehicle's length, height, etc. are shown in the table.

Dimensions mm inches Dimensions mm inches Dimensions mm inches

A Ground clearanceA 211 8,3 G Load height 776 30.6 I Wheel track, rear 1657C 65.2C B Wheelbase 2865 112.8 H Wheel track, front 1653C 65.1C 1653D 65.1D C Length 4688 184.6 1649D 64.9D 1659E 65.3E F F D Load length, floor, 1746 68.7 1655E 65.2E 1673 65.9 folded backrest 1668F 65.7F J Load width, floor 1010 39.8 E Load length, floor 960 37.8 K Width 1902 74.9 F HeightB 1658 65.3

}}

633 SPECIFICATIONS

|| Dimensions mm inches L Width incl. rearview 2117 83.3 mirrors M Width incl. folded 1999 78.7 rearview mirrors

A For curb weight + 1 person. (Varies slightly depending on tire dimension, chassis alternative, etc.). B Including roof antenna, at curb weight. C Vehicles with 17/19-inch wheels. D Vehicles with 20-inch wheels. E Vehicles with 21-inch wheels. F Vehicles with 22-inch wheels. Related information • Weights (p. 635)

634 SPECIFICATIONS

Weights The following table lists important weight data for your vehicle. Category USA Canada (lbs) (kg) T5 5225 – Gross vehicle weight T5 AWD 5360 2430 T6 AWD 5400 2450 Capacity weight 950 430 T5 2620 – Permissible axle weights, front T5 AWD 2670 1210 T6 AWD 2710 1230 T5 2690 – Permissible axle weights, rear T5 AWD 2780 1260 T6 AWD 2780 1260 Curb weight 3990–4750 1870–2160 Max. roof load 220 100

CAUTION Related information • • Type designations (p. 630) When loading the vehicle, the maxi- • mum gross vehicle weight and permis- Towing capacity and tongue weight sible axle weights may not be excee- (p. 636) ded.

635 SPECIFICATIONS

Towing capacity and tongue Towing capacity and tongue weight are weight shown in the tables below.

Category USA Canada (lbs) (kg) Without brakes: 1650 750 Max. trailer weights With brakes: 3500 1580 Max. tongue weight 350 150

CAUTION • The maximum trailer weights listed are only applicable for altitudes up to 3280 ft (1,000 m) above sea level. With increasing altitude the engine power and therefore the car's climbing ability are impaired because of the reduced air density, so the maximum trailer weight has to be reduced accordingly. The weight of the car and trailer must be reduced by 10% for every further 3280 ft (1,000 m) (or part thereof).

Related information • Type designations (p. 630) • Weights (p. 635) • Driving with a trailer (p. 434) • Trailer Stability Assist* (p. 436)

636 * Option/accessory. SPECIFICATIONS

Engine specifications The specifications for Special Edition vehicles NOTE Engine specifications (output, etc.) for each may vary. Not all engines are available on all markets. engine variant are shown in the table below.

Engine Engine codeA Output Output Torque Torque Number of cylinders (kW/rps) (hp/rpm) (Nm/rps) (ft. lbs./rpm) T5 / T5 AWD B4204T23 187/92 250/5500 350/25–80 258/1500-4800 4 T6 AWD B4204T27 235/95 316/5700 400/37–90 295/2200–5400 4

A The engine code, component and manufacturer serial numbers can be found on the engine.

Related information • Type designations (p. 630) • Engine oil specifications (p. 638) • Coolant specifications (p. 639)

637 SPECIFICATIONS

Engine oil specifications Oil viscosity • Engine oil (p. 580) Fully synthetic engine oil of at least The wrong oil viscosity can shorten engine ACEA A5/B5 must be used. Lower oil grades service life during normal use. SAE 5W-30 may not offer the same fuel economy, engine provides good fuel economy and engine pro- performance or engine protection. tection. See the viscosity chart. Volvo recommends:

Viscosity chart Extreme driving conditions General Volvo's VCC RBS0-2AE/SAE 0W20 oil is rec- See the Service and warranty booklet for infor- ommended for extreme conditions. mation about oil change intervals. Oil volume NOTE The oil volume for the engine is: This vehicle is delivered from the factory Liter (approx) 5.6 with synthetic oil. US qts (approx) 5.9 Do not use oil additives. Related information • Type designations (p. 630) • Checking and filling engine oil (p. 581)

638 SPECIFICATIONS

Coolant specifications Transmission fluid specifications Brake fluid specifications Recommended grade: Volvo-approved pre- Under normal driving conditions, the trans- The medium in the hydraulic brake system is mixed coolant. If concentrated coolant is mission fluid will not need to be changed dur- called brake fluid and is used to transfer brak- used, mix with 50% water of acceptable ing the transmission's service life. However, ing force from e.g. pressure on the brake quality (i.e. not salt water, etc.). Consult a it may need to be changed if the vehicle is pedal via a master brake cylinder to one or Volvo retailer if you have any questions. driven frequently in adverse driving condi- more slave cylinders, which in turn act on a To avoid deterioration of the cooling system, tions. mechanical brake. engine trouble, etc., only approved Volvo cool- Recommended grade: Volvo Original or simi- ant should be used. Automatic transmission lar fluid that meets a combination of Dot 4, 5.1 and ISO 4925 class 6. Prescribed transmission fluid WARNING TG-81SC: AW-1 Coolant is hazardous if ingested and could NOTE cause damage to organs (kidneys). The AWF8G55: AW-2 Changing or filling brake fluid should be product contains ethylene glycol, inhibitor, entrusted to an authorized Volvo work- water, etc. Related information shop. • Type designations (p. 630) Related information Related information • Refilling coolant (p. 582) • Engine compartment overview (p. 579)

639 SPECIFICATIONS

Fuel tank volume Air conditioning specifications Symbol Explanation The fuel tank's refillable volume is shown in The climate system in the vehicle uses a the table below. freon-free R1234yf refrigerant. For informa- Lubricant All models tion regarding the refrigerant, refer to the decal located on the inside of the hood. Liter (approx) 71 The prescribed grades and volumes for fluids Only a trained and certified tech- US gallons (approx) 18.8 and lubricants in the air conditioning system nician can perform service on the are shown in the tables below. mobile air conditioning system Related information A/C Decal (MAC) • Refueling (p. 423) Decal for R1234yf Flammable refrigerant • Octane rating (p. 425)

Refrigerant Vehicles with R1234yf refrigerant Weight Prescribed grade 650 g (1.43 lbs) R1234yf

Explanation of symbols for R1234yf WARNING Symbol Explanation The air conditioning system contains the Caution refrigerant R1234yf under pressure. In accordance with SAE J2845 (Technician Training for Safe Service and Containment of Refrigerants Used in Mobile A/C Sys- tem), service and repairs to the refrigerant Mobile air condition system system may only be performed by trained (MAC) and certified technicians in order to ensure the safety of the system.

640 SPECIFICATIONS

Compressor oil Volume Prescribed grade 130 ml (4.40 fl. oz.) PAG SP-A2

Evaporator

CAUTION The A/C system evaporator must never be repaired or replaced with a previously used evaporator. The new evaporator must be certified and labeled in accordance with SAE J2842.

Related information • Climate control system service (p. 577)

641 SPECIFICATIONS

Approved tire pressure the tire inflation placard for information spe- The following tire pressures are recom- cific to the tires installed on your vehicle at mended by Volvo for your vehicle. Refer to the factory. Tire dimensions Cold tire pressure for up to five persons Front Rear psi (kPa) psi (kPa) 235/60 R18 35 (240) 35 (240) 235/55 R19 255/45 R20 255/40 R21 265/35 R22 Temporary spare tire 60 (420) 60 (420) T125/80 R18

Related information • Type designations (p. 630) • Checking tire pressure (p. 523) • Recommended tire pressure (p. 525)

642 INDEX INDEX 1, 2, 3 ... Adjusting the steering wheel 198 Antenna Airbag 52 location 254 4WD 403 activation/deactivation 56 Apple CarPlay 480, 481, 483 driver's side 53 Approach lighting 162 passenger side 53, 56 Apps 452 A Air bag, see Airbag 52 Assistance at risk of collision 353 ABS Air conditioning 225 activating/deactivating 354 anti-lock brakes 387 Air conditioning, fluid at risk of run-off 354 AC (Air conditioning) 225 volume and grade 640 during collision risks from behind 356 during collision risks from oncoming Accessories and extra equipment 35 Air distribution 206 traffic 355 installation 36 air vents 206, 207 changing 206 limitations 357 Accessory installation warning 36, 37 defrosting 218 Symbols and messages 358 Active Bending Lights 158 recirculation 217 Audio and media 450 Adapting driving characteristics 403 table showing options 208 Audio system Adaptive Cruise Control 280 Air quality 203, 204 HD digital radio 461 activating 282 allergy and asthma 204 SiriusXM® Satellite radio 462, 463, auto-brake 302 passenger compartment filter 205 465 change cruise control functionality 286 Air recirculation 217 Auto-climate 216 limitations 285 Alarm 266 Auto hold 393 manage speed 300 deactivating 267 passing 306 Auto-hold brakes 393 set time interval 301 Allergy and asthma-inducing sub- activating/deactivating 394 standby mode 284 stances 204 after collision 395 switching target vehicles 299 All Wheel Drive, AWD 403 driver support 270 Symbols and messages 287 All Wheel Drive (AWD) 403 Automatic car wash 618 troubleshooting 285 All Wheel Drive (four-wheel drive) 403 Automatic engine stop turn off 283 auto-stop 409 WARNING 298 Android Auto 484, 485, 486

643 INDEX

Automatic high beam 157 Blower brake system Automatic locking 258 adjusting 220, 221 fluid 639 air distribution 206 Automatic relocking 238, 252 air vents 207 Automatic transmission 396, 397 Bluetooth C kickdown 402 connect 478 oil 639 connecting vehicle to Internet 497 Camera sensor Trailer 434 phone 487 see Camera 310 settings 495 Camera unit 310 Book service and repair 573 limitations 311 B maintenance and cleaning 315 Booster cushions 72 Capacity weight 544, 635 Backrest Brake assist front seat, adjusting 184, 185, 188, after collision 395 Cargo compartment 555 189, 190, 191 attachment points 558 Brake fluid rear seat, folding 194 cargo net 564 grade 639 Battery electrical outlet 550, 552 Brake functions 387 jump-start 428 Lighting 163 Maintenance 585 Brakes 387 Cargo compartment cover 559, 561 anti-lock brakes, ABS 387 recycling 591 cargo net 564 start 585 automatic when stationary 393 Cargo net 564 support 589 Brake Assist System, BAS 388 symbols on the battery 591 brake lights 161 Car wash 615, 616, 618, 619, 620, 621 brake system 387 BLIS 331 Catalytic converter 426 emergency brake lights 161 activating/deactivating 332 recovery 439 Maintenance 389 limitations 333 CD player 476 on salted roads 389 Symbols and messages 334 on wet roads 389 Cell phone, see Phone 488 parking brake 390 Center console 549

644 INDEX

Center display City Safety 316 Sensors 201 change appearance 132 braking for oncoming vehicles 325 temperature control 222, 223, 224 cleaning 610 crossing traffic 322 voice control 202 climate controls 211 delayed evasive maneuver 325 zones 200 Function view 123 detecting obstacles 320 Climate controls 211 keyboard 127 evasive maneuver 324 center display 211 messages 141, 142 limitations 326 rear seat 211 operation 113, 116, 120, 125 limitations for evasive maneuvers 324 Climate system 200, 211 overview 111 limitations in crossing traffic 323 Refrigerant 640 settings 133, 134 setting warning distance 319 repairs 577 switch off and change volume 132 sub-functions 317 symbols in status bar 125 Symbols and messages 329 Clock, setting 94 views 116 Cleaning 612, 614 Collision 42, 47, 52, 61 Central locking 255 automatic car wash 618 Collision warner Change of owner 135 car wash 615, 616, 618, 619, 620, 621 crossing traffic rear 335 center display 610 see City Safety 316 Changing a wheel 530 Seat belts 612 Collision warning Checking engine oil level 581 textile upholstery 610, 612, 613 from the rear 330 Child restraints 63, 65 upholstery 610, 612, 613, 614 Color code, paintwork 623 booster cushions 72 wheels 621 Color codes 623 convertible seats 69 Cleaning wheels 621 infant seats 67 Compass 446 Cleaning wiper blades 619 integrated booster cushion 76 calibration 447 Clean Zone 203 ISOFIX/LATCH anchors 75 Condensation in headlights 616, 618, lower attachment points 74 Clean Zone Interior Package 204 619, 620 recalls and registration 65 Climate 200 Connecting vehicle to Internet top tether anchors 73 auto-regulation 216 No connection or poor connection 501 Child safety 63 blower control 220, 221 via a mobile device (WiFi) 497 Child safety locks 257 parking 226 perceived temperature 201

645 INDEX

via cellular phone (Bluetooth) 497 standby mode 279 Distance Alert 275 via vehicle's modem 498 turn off 279 activating/deactivating 276 Connect phone 488 Curb weight 635 limitations 276 Set time interval 301 Contact information 26 Customer Privacy Policy 35 DivX® 477 Convertible seats 69 CZIP (Clean Zone Interior Package) 204 Door mirrors 169 coolant 639 compass 446, 447 filling 582 D dimming 170 Cooling system outer 169 overheating 427 Data power folding 170 Cornering assistance 304 recording 33 resetting 170 activating/deactivating 305 transferring between vehicle and store position 186, 187 limitations 305 workshop 570 Download Center 571 Cornering illumination 159 Data sharing 502, 503 use 571 Corner Traction Control 271 Daytime running lights 154 Driveline transmission 395 Corrosion protection 621 Decals Covering location 630 Drive mode 403 changing 405 cargo compartment 561 Defrosting 218 driver support 303 Crash, see Collision 42 Detecting obstacles ECO 406, 408 Crash event data 33 City Safety 320 Driver Alert Control 344 Cross Traffic Alert 335 Dimensions 633 activating/deactivating 345 activating/deactivating 336 Dipstick, electronic 581 limitations 346 limitations 336 Direction of rotation 518 rest stop guidance 345 messages 338 Disengaging the shiftlock 402 Driver performance 92 Cruise control 277 settings 93 activating 278 Display manage speed 300 driver information 84 Display lighting 164

646 INDEX

Driver profile 137 Emission inspection readiness 568 F edit 138, 139, 140 Engine select 138 overheating 427 Federal Clean Air Act 568 Driver support system 270 start 382 Ferry transport 413 Drive mode 303 Start/Stopfunction 409 Flooded road 422 turn off 384 Driving Fluids, volumes 627, 640 cooling system 427 Engine braking 387, 418 Fluids and oils 639, 640 with a trailer 434 Engine compartment Fog lights Driving economy 419 coolant 582 front 159 engine oil 580 Driving through standing water 422 rear 160 overview 579 driving with a trailer Four-C 413 towball load 636 Engine drag control 271 Front seat towing capacity 636 Engine oil 580 blower 220 filling 581 climate 211 filter 580 heating 213, 214 grade and volume 638 E temperature 222 Engine shutdown 384 ventilation 215 ECO climate 406 Engine specifications 637 Front seat manual 184 ECO mode 406 Engine temperature activate with function button 408 Front seats, power 185 high 427 adjusting passenger seat from driv- Economical driving 406, 419 Environment 28 er's seat 193 Electrical outlet 550 Ethanol content adjusting seat 185 use 552 max. 10% by volume 424 Lumbar support 191 Electrical system 585 massage 188, 189, 190 Exterior dimensions 633 Electric parking brake 390 multifunction control 188, 189, 190, 191 Side bolsters 191 Electronic immobilizer 249 store position 186, 187 emergency brake lights 161 FSC, environmental labeling 23

647 INDEX

Fuel 424 H Hill Start Assist 395 Travel Link service 469 Hill Start Assist (HSA) 395 Fuel filling 423 Handbrake 390 Hoisting the vehicle 575 Fuel gauge 89 Hand wash 616 HomeLink® 442 Fuel requirements 424, 425 Hard disk programming 443 space 504 type approval 445 Fuel tank use 445 volume 640 Hazard warning flashers 161 HomeLink® remote control Fuse box 592 HDC 418 programmable 442 Fuses 592 HD radio 459 Home safe lighting, Homesafe Lighting, below the glove compartment 599 Head restraint 195 Follow me home lighting, follow-me- in engine compartment 594 Head-up display 143 home lighting 162 in the cargo compartment 605 activating/deactivating 144 Honk 197 replacing 592 cleaning 611 Distance Alert 275 Hood, opening 578 replacing windshield 577 Horn 197 G settings 145 store position 145, 186, 187 Gasoline grade 424 Heated wiper blades 176 I Gauge Heating fuel gauge 89 IAQS (Interior Air Quality System) 204 Seats 213, 214 Gear selector positions steering wheel 216 IC (Inflatable Curtain) 60 automatic transmission 397 windows 219 ID, Volvo 26 Glass, laminated/reinforced 166 Height adjustment 413, 416 Identification number 38 Glove compartment 553 high beams 156, 157 Ignition mode 385, 386 Gracenote® 475 High engine temperature 427 Immobilizer 249 Grocery bag holders 557 Hill Descent Control 417, 418, 419 Electronic immobilizer 249 Gross vehicle weight 635 activate with function button 419 Indicator symbols 95

648 INDEX

Individual drive mode 403 Instruments overview K Infant seats 67 left-hand drive vehicle 82 Key 236 Inflatable curtain 60 Integrated booster cushion 76 folding down 79 Keyboard 127, 130 Inflatable Curtain 60 folding up 78 change language 130 Inflating tires 543 IntelliSafe Keyless Inflation pressure driver support 29 locking/unlocking 252 adjusting 524 Interior Air Quality System 204 settings 253 Checking 523 touch-sensitive surfaces 251 decal with recommended pressure 525 Intermittent wiping 177 Key tag 236 Inflation pressure monitoring 525 Internet, see Internet-connected vehi- action 529 cle 496 save new inflation pressure 527 Internet-connected vehicle 496 L Status 528 book service and repair 573 Inflation pressure table 642 No connection or poor connection 501 Labels send car data 574 Information display 84, 88 location 630 system updates 571 Infotainment (Audio and media) 450 Laminated glass 166 iPod®, connecting 478 Instrument cluster 84 Lamps ISOFIX/LATCH anchors 75 settings 88 changing 584 Trailer 437 Instrument illumination 164 Lane Keeping Aid 346 Instrument lighting 164 J activating/deactivating 348 Instrument panel 84 display 352 Jack 531 App menu 105, 106 limitations 349 messages 107 Jump-start 428 see Lane Keeping Aid 346 settings 88 select assistance option 348 Instruments and controls 82 Symbols and messages 350 Language 133

649 INDEX

Large Animal Detection (LAD) 320 settings 153 Low-speed driving 416 Leather upholstery, cleaning instruc- Turn signals 158 activate with function button 417 tions 613 Lighting, replacing bulbs 584 Leveling control 413 Limp home 395 M settings 416 Load anchoring eyelets License agreement 99, 505 cargo compartment 558 Maintained climate comfort 230 Lifting tools 531 Load anchoring hooks 557 start/stop 230 Light bulbs Load carriers 557 Maintenance 568 changing 584 Load index 520 corrosion protection 621 Light control 152, 164 Loading Max. axle weight 635 Lighting general 555 Max. roof load 635 Active Bending Lights 158 load anchoring eyelets 558 Media player 471, 472, 473 approach lighting 162 long load 556 compatible file formats 479 automatic high beam 157 Lock indication 234 voice control 149 brake lights 161 setting 235 Messages and symbols control, instrument, display 164 Locking/unlocking Adaptive Cruise Control 287 controls 152, 162 Tailgate 240, 254 Assistance at risk of collision 358 cornering illumination 159 BLIS 334 daytime running lights 154 Locking wheel bolts 531 City Safety 329 emergency brake lights 161 Locks Cross Traffic Alert 338 front fog lights 159 locking/unlocking 238 Lane Keeping Aid 350 Hazard warning flashers 161 Low battery charge level Park Assist Camera 372 high beams 156, 157 start battery 428 Park Assist Pilot 380 home safe lighting 162 Low beams 155 Parking Assist 363 in passenger compartment 162 Pilot Assist 297 low beams 155 Lower the rear end 556 stability and traction control system 274 position lights 154 Low oil level 581 rear fog light 160

650 INDEX

Messages in display 107, 141 Owner's information 16 perpendicular parking 374 handling 108, 141 OWNER'S MANUAL 21 pulling out of a parking space 377 saved 109, 142 environmental labeling 23 Symbols and messages 380 Mileage 89 in cellular phone 20 use 375 Misting in the center display 17, 18 parking condensation in headlights 615, 618 on hills 392 Mood lighting 163 Parking Assist 359 adjusting 164 P activating/deactivating 361 front, rear and sides 360 Paddle at steering wheel 197 limitations 361 N Paint Symbols and messages 363 color code 623 Parking brake 390 Net paint damage and touch-up 622, 623 activating/deactivating 390 cargo compartment 564 Panoramic roof 172 automatic activation 392 opening and closing 173 Low battery charge level 392 pinch protection 166 Parking climate 226 O sun shade 175 Symbols and messages 231 ventilation position 174 Passenger compartment filter 205 Occupant safety 43 Parallel parking 373 Passenger compartment interior 548 Occupant weight sensor 56 Park Assist Camera 364 center console 549 Octane rating 425 activating 370 electrical outlet 550 Oil, see also Engine oil 638 limitations 311 glove compartment 553 sensor field 369 sun visor 555 On-board diagnostics 568 Symbols and messages 372 Passenger compartment lighting 162 On-board Diagnostic socket 37 trajectory lines 367 adjusting 164 views 365 Option/accessory 21 auto switch 163 Outside temperature gauge 94 Park Assist Pilot 373 limitations 378 Overheating 427, 434 parallel parking 374

651 INDEX

Passing assistance pinch protection 166 R Adaptive Cruise Control 306 resetting 167 Pilot Assist 306 PIN code 499 Radar sensor starting with Pilot Assist 306 Private locking 264 see Radar sensor 307 start with Adaptive Cruise Control 306 Polishing 615 Radar unit 307 personal information (Customer Privacy limitations 311 Position lights 154 Policy) 35 maintenance and cleaning 315 Power 637 Phone 487 type approval 308 changing to another 491 Power folding door mirrors 170 Radio 454 connect 488 Power panoramic roof 172 changing radio waveband and radio connect automatically 490 Power save mode 428 station 456 connect manually 490 HD radio 459 Power seats 185 delete 491 RBDS 458 disconnect 490 Power tailgate 259 search radio station 456 phone call 491, 494 Power windows 167, 168 settings 458 text message 492 pinch protection 166 SiriusXM® Satellite radio 462, 463, voice control 149 Preconditioning 226 465 Pilot Assist 289 start/stop 226 start 455 activating 292 timer 227 voice control 149 auto-brake 302 Pressure wash 619 Radio favorites 457 disengaged steering assistance 295 Privacy Policy (Customer Privacy Policy) 35 Rain sensor 177, 178 limitations 295 Rain sensor's memory function 178 manage speed 300 Private locking 264 passing 306 activating/deactivating 264 Raise the rear end 556 set time interval 301 PROPOSITION 65 WARNING 428 Rear camera 364 standby mode 294 Rear Collision Warning 330 switching target vehicles 299 limitations 330 Symbols and messages 297 turn off 293 WARNING 298

652 INDEX

Rear seat Refueling Roll Stability Control 275 blower 221 filling 423 Roof load, max. weight 635 climate 211 fuel filler door, fuel flap 422 Run-off Mitigation 354 folding backrest 194 Remote immobilizer 249 head restraint 195 Remote key 236 heating 214 battery replacement 241 temperature 223 S connecting to driver profile 139 Rearview/door mirrors detachable key blade 247 Safety 42 adjusting door mirrors 170 loss 244 pregnancy 43 dimming 170 Range 240 Safety belt, see Seat belt 47 heating 219 Remote updates 571 interior 169 Safety defects, reporting 44 Reporting safety defects 44 Rearview mirror 169 Safety mode 61 dimming 170 Resetting door mirrors 170 starting/moving 62 Rear window Resetting settings 135 Sealing compound 538 heating 219 change of owner 135 Seat, see Seats 184 washers 180, 181 Driver profile 140 Seat belt reminder 51 wipers 180, 181 Resetting trip odometer 92 Seat belts 47 Recalls 45 Road Sign Information 339 Automatic locking retractor/Emer- Recommendations when driving 420 activating/deactivating 340 gency locking retractor 65 display 340 Recommendations when loading 555 buckling/unbuckling 48 limitations 343 pregnancy 43 Recovery 441 Sensus Navigation 341 seat belt reminder 51 Red Key settings 342 seat belt tensioner 50 restricted remote key 245 speed camera information 341 securing child restraint systems 67, settings 246 Speed warning 341 69, 72 Refrigerant 577 Road trip 420 Seat belt tensioner 50 climate system 640 Roll-over protection 275 resetting 51

653 INDEX

Seats Side Impact Protection System 60 Stability and traction control system 271 heating 213, 214 SIM card 499 sport mode 272, 273 manual front seat 184 Symbols and messages 274 SIPS (Side Impact Protection System) 60 power front seats 185 Stains 610, 612, 613, 614 store position 186, 187 Sirius Satellite radio Start/Stop ventilation 215 Travel link 466 deactivate 410 whiplash protection 46 SiriusXM® Satellite radio Driving 409 traffic information 462, 463, 465 Security code 264 limitations 411 Sensors Ski hatch 558 vehicle function 409 air quality 205 Slippery conditions 421 Start and lock system Camera unit 310 Slippery road conditions 421 type designations 250 climate 201 Snow chains 537 Start battery 428, 585 Radar unit 307 Software updates 33 overload 428 Sensus Start engine 382 connection and entertainment 30 Sound experience 451 Starting the engine Sensus Navigation Sound settings 450, 493 after a collision 62 Road Sign Information 341 phone 494 playing media 472, 473 Start the vehicle 382 Service position 626 text message 493 Steel cargo grid 562 Service program 568 Spare tire 535 Steering assistance at risk of collision 353 Set time interval for Distance Alert 301 handling 536 Steering power level, see Steering wheel settings Speed camera information 341 resistance 270 Categories 136 Speed Limiter contextual 134 Steering wheel 197, 198 change speed 300 resetting 135 heating 216 Speed symbols, tires 520 keypad 197 Shiftlock 401 paddle 197 deactivate 402 Spin control 271 steering wheel adjustment 198 Side airbag 60 Steering wheel keypad 197

654 INDEX

Steering wheel paddles 399 system updates 571 pressure 642 Steering wheel resistance, speed- removal 532 dependent 270 rotation when changing 516 specifications 520, 642 Stone chips and scratches 622, 623 T storage 516 Stop/start function 409 Tailgate tread wear indicator 519 Storage compartments 548 locking/unlocking 240, 254 winter tires 537 center console 549 open/close with foot movement 262 Tire sealing system glove compartment 553 power 259 Inflating tires 543 sun visor 555 unlocking from inside 256 use 539 Sunroof Technician certification 38 Tire tread 519 pinch protection 166 Temperature Tools 530 Sun shade adjusting 222, 223, 224 Top tether anchors (child restraint sys- panoramic roof 172, 175 perceived 201 tems) 73 pinch protection 166 Temporary Spare 535 Top view 133 Sun visor 555 Temporary tire sealing system 538 Total airing function 236 mirror lighting 163 execution, checking 539 Support battery 589 Inflating tires 543 Towbar 433 removable, attaching, installing, Switching target vehicles Terms and conditions mounting 433 with Adaptive Cruise Control 299 services 35 removable, removing, detaching 433 with Pilot Assist 299 users 502 retractable 431 Symbols Tire dimensions 520 Towing 438 dynamic 84 when changing wheels 530 Towing capacity and towball load 636 indicator symbols 95 Tires 516 warning symbols 97 direction of rotation 518 Towing eyelet 439 Symbols and messages glossary of terms 519 TPMS - Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys- center display's status bar 125 inflation pressure table 642 tem 525 parking climate 231 mounting 534 Traction control 271

655 INDEX

Traffic information 458 Trip statistics 92 V Trailer settings 93 driving with a trailer 434 Troubleshooting Vehicle care 615, 616, 618, 619, 620, 621 Lamps 437 Adaptive Cruise Control 285 leather upholstery 613 swaying 436 Camera unit 311 Vehicle Event Data 33 Trailer Stability Assist 272 City Safety 326 Vehicle functions trailer 436 Radar unit 311 in the center display 123 Trailer stabilizer 272, 436 TSA - Trailer Stability Assist 436 Vehicle key bat. low 241 Trailer towing Tunnel detection 155 Vehicle modem trailer hitch 433 Turn off engine 384 connecting vehicle to Internet 498 Transmission 395 Turn signals 158 settings 499 automatic 396, 397 Type approval Vehicle recovery 441 Transmission fluid HomeLink® 445 Vehicle status 572 grade 639 radar system 308 inflation pressure 528 Travel Link 466 Vehicle upholstery 610, 612, 613, 614 Fuel 469 Vehicle weight 635 Notifications 469 U Ventilation 206, 207 Sports 471 Seats 215 weather 467 Uniform Tire Quality Grading 522 Video 476, 478 Tread depth 519 Units 133 settings 477 winter tires 537 Unlocking Voice control 146 Tread wear indicator 519 settings 239 with key blade 248 climate 202 Trip computer 89 phone 149 USB display in instrument panel 91 radio and media 149 socket for connecting media 478 Trip odometer 89 settings 150 Trip odometer resetting 92 VOL mark 516

656 INDEX

Volvo ID 26 washer fluid, filling 627 Windshield wipers 176 create and register 27 Windshield 179 rain sensor 177, 178 Washer fluid 176, 627 Winter driving 421 Waxing 615 Snow chains 537 W winter tires 537 Weights Wiper blade 176 Warning lights Curb weight 635 replacing 624, 625 Adaptive Cruise Control 298 Wheel bolts 531 service position 626 airbags SRS 97 Wheels Wiper blade and washing fluid 176 alternator does not charge 97 cleaning 621 brake system error 97 mounting 534 Wiper blades, heated 176 low oil pressure 97 removal 532 parking brake applied 97 Snow chains 537 Pilot Assist 298 Wheels and tires seat belt reminder 97 Load index and speed symbol 520 stability and traction control system 271 starter battery not charging 97 Whiplash protection 46 system error 97 Whiplash Protection System 46 WARNING 97 WHIPS (Whiplash Protection System) 46 Warning sound Wi-Fi parking brake 392 connecting vehicle to Internet 497 warning symbols 97 delete network 501 Warning symbols sharing Internet connection, tether- safety 42 ing, hotspot 500 technology and security 502 Warranties 568 Windows and glass 166 Washer Headlights 179 Windshield rear window 180, 181 projected image 143, 145 Windshield washing 179

657 INDEX

658

WARNING California Proposition 65 Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger- vehicle. TP 28709 (English - USA & Canada), AT 1917, MY20, Copyright © 2000-2019 Volvo Car Corporation